JP7250298B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, various effects images are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device to enhance the enjoyment of the game. In addition, there is a tendency to diversify the effect images to be displayed on the display device in order to further improve the enjoyment of the game.

Therefore, in recent gaming machines, the contents of a plurality of diversifying effect images are collectively set so as to reduce the burden of the processing of executing the program, which becomes complicated and voluminous with the diversification of the effect images. is configured (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-029747 A

However, in the conventional game machine, setting the effect images collectively may cause discrepancies in the effect contents, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enables a comfortable game without inconsistencies in performance contents.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises acquisition means for acquiring starting information when a predetermined starting condition is established, and storage means for storing the starting information acquired by the acquiring means. determining means for determining based on the starting information acquired by the acquiring means; dynamic display executing means for causing image display means to dynamically display the identification information based on the determination result by the determining means; and a gaming machine capable of giving a predetermined game value to a player when special identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, The stop display means capable of displaying the special identification information or general identification information different from the special identification information as a stop result display to be displayed when the dynamic display is stopped, and the image display means have a predetermined relationship with each other. a first mode display means capable of displaying the display mode of the display means in a predetermined first mode based on the determination result by the determination means; is set to be displayed in a second mode different from the first mode, the display mode of the other display means displayed after the first display means is displayed in the second mode settable multiple setting means; display erasing means for erasing the display means after a predetermined period of time after displaying the display means; specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect for a specific period in the dynamic display; memory pattern display means for displaying a pattern corresponding to the starting information stored in the storage means; a pattern mode changing means that is different from the pattern mode and can change to an equivalent pattern mode that is the same color as a part of the second mode of the indicating means; display state means for setting the display state; and non-display state means for switching the pattern set in the display state by the display state means to the non-display state in response to execution of the specific effect by the specific effect execution means. and when the general identification information is displayed as the stop result display after the display mode of the display means is changed to the second mode by the plurality setting means, the specific effect by the specific effect execution means a first mode means for displaying the display means to be displayed after the execution of the first mode in the first mode; and re-display means for displaying the pattern in the same manner as the pattern hidden by the non-display state means when the specific effect is executed, wherein the display means is selected at any one of at least two timings. and the first mode means sets the indicating means at a specific timing after execution of the specific effect regardless of whether the indicating means changes at the first timing or at the second timing. is displayed in the first mode.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the obtaining means for obtaining starting information when a predetermined starting condition is met, the storage means for storing the starting information obtained by the obtaining means, and the obtaining means for determining means for performing a determination based on the acquired starting information; and dynamic display executing means for causing an image display means to dynamically display identification information based on a determination result of the determining means; A gaming machine capable of imparting a predetermined game value to a player when special identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by a target display executing means, wherein the dynamic display is stopped. As the stop result display to be displayed at the time, the stop display means capable of displaying the special identification information or general identification information different from the special identification information and the image display means are displayed in a predetermined relationship with each other. a plurality of indicating means; a first mode display means capable of displaying a display mode of the indicating means in a predetermined first mode based on a determination result by the determining means; When setting to be displayed in a second manner different from the above, a plurality of settings that can be set so that the display manners of the other indication means displayed after the one indication means are displayed in the second manner display erasing means for erasing the display means after a predetermined period of time after displaying the display means; specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect for a specific period in the dynamic display; memory pattern display means for displaying a pattern corresponding to the starting information stored in the memory, and changing the display mode of the predetermined pattern from a predetermined first pattern mode to a mode different from the first pattern mode before the start of the specific effect. A picture mode changing means capable of changing to an equivalent picture mode that is the same color as a part of the second mode of the indicating means, and a display that puts the picture into a display state when the dynamic display is started state means; non-display state means for switching the pattern displayed by the display state means to a non-display state in response to execution of the specific effect by the specific effect execution means; and the plurality setting means. When the general identification information is displayed as the stop result display after the display mode of the display means is changed to the second mode by the above, it is displayed after the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect. a first mode means for displaying the indicating means in the first mode; and re-display means for displaying the pattern in the same manner as the pattern hidden by the non-display state means when executed, wherein the display means can change at least one of two or more timings. and the first mode means changes the indicating means to the first mode at a specific timing after execution of the specific effect regardless of whether the indicating means changes at the first timing or at the second timing. to display. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not feel distrust.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. (a) is a diagram showing a state immediately after "ready-to-win display (normal reach)" appears in the main display area of the third pattern display device, and (b) is a view from the state of (a) to the sub-display. FIG. 12C is a diagram showing a state in which the area is erased and "normal reach" is performed in the main display area, and (c) is a state in which "super reach" occurs from the state of (b), and the cockpit display area is erased. and (d) is a diagram showing a state in which "super reach" is executed in the main display area, and (d) shows the sub display area and the cockpit display area being redisplayed from the state of (c), and the main display area. It is the figure which showed the state where the "failed display" of the 3rd pattern appeared in the display area. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, a pending|holding ball storage area, and a pending|holding ball execution area. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table. It is the figure which showed an example of the number table of a reservation typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the A table of the stop pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the B table of the stop pattern table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the C table of the stop pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the D table of the stop pattern table. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table for big hits. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a change pattern table for losing; 1 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of an audio lamp control device; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a pending change table; FIG. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the scenario table for jackpots. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a scenario table for failure; It is the figure which showed typically an example of the character pattern table at the time of a big hit. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the character pattern table at the time of a failure. (a) is a time chart showing the appearance timing of each character display in the "normal reach only" variation pattern, and (b) is the appearance timing of each character display in the "super reach only" variation pattern. It is a time chart, and (c) is a time chart which shows the appearance timing of each character display in the fluctuation pattern of "only special reach." (a) is a time chart showing the appearance timing of each character display in the "normal reach + re-fluctuation" variation pattern, and (b) is the current display of each character in the "super reach + re-fluctuation" variation pattern. FIG. 11C is a time chart showing the appearance timing, and (c) is a time chart showing the appearance timing of each character display in the fluctuation pattern of “special reach + re-fluctuation”. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a character change table; FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a color change timing table; 4 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of a pending information storage area and an execution information storage area; FIG. 1 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an image when the power is turned on; (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface B. FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining the back surface C. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table; FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the additional data table typically. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flow chart showing variation processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a hold display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation production|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the execution pattern change process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. 4 is a flow chart showing character mode setting processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing character color change restriction processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing a pending pitch command process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a demonstration command process executed by an MPU in a display control device. be. It is the flow chart which showed the fluctuation production type command processing which is executed by the MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing a fixed command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device and (c) are flowcharts showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 4 is a flowchart showing prefetch command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; 4 is a flow chart showing dialogue-based command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; be. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing pending image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; be. 4 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device; be. 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is emitted from the character pattern in the central small area of the sub-display area immediately after the "ready-to-win display (variable element of "normal reach")" appears in the main display area of the third pattern display device. FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a state in which a character display at the time of occurrence of reach is displayed in the left small area, in which the dialogue is expressed in characters, and FIG. FIG. 10C is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-display area is erased and the "normal reach" variable element is executed in the main display area; After the start, the cockpit display area is erased, the variable element of "Super Reach" is executed in the main display area, and furthermore, the character display during reach is displayed, which expresses the dialogue emitted from the character pattern on the player's side in characters. (d) is a diagram showing a state where the variable element of "super reach" ends from the state of (c), the sub display area and the cockpit display area are re-displayed, and the main display area , the 3rd pattern "missing display" appears, and furthermore, the fixed phrase character display that expresses the words emitted from the character pattern in the central small area of the sub-display area is displayed in the left small area. It is a diagram showing. (a) is emitted from the character pattern in the central small area of the sub-display area immediately after the "ready-to-win display (variable element of "normal reach")" appears in the main display area of the third pattern display device. FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a state in which a character display at the time of occurrence of reach is displayed in the left small area, in which the dialogue is expressed in characters, and FIG. FIG. 10C is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-display area is erased and the "normal reach" variable element is executed in the main display area; After the start, the cockpit display area is erased, the variable element of "Super Reach" is executed in the main display area, and furthermore, the character display during reach is displayed, which expresses the dialogue emitted from the character pattern on the player's side in characters. (d) is a diagram showing a state in which "blind effect" is executed in the variable element of "super reach" from the state of (c), and "missing display" is performed in the "blind effect". FIG. 10(e) is a diagram showing a state in which content suggesting that it will appear is displayed, and (e) is the end of the variable element of "super reach" from the state of (d), the sub display area and the cockpit display area. is re-displayed, the third pattern "failure display" appears in the main display area, and the fixed phrase character display that expresses the words emitted from the character pattern in the central small area of the sub-display area is displayed. It is a diagram showing the state displayed in the left small area, (f) shows the state just before the "big win display" appears after the variable element of "re-variation" is executed from the state of (e). It is a diagram showing. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table for big hits (for probability variable big hits) in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table for big hits (for probability variable big hits) in 2nd Embodiment. (a) is a time chart showing the appearance timing of each character display in "normal reach + promotion" in the second embodiment, (b) is each character display in "super reach + promotion" in the second embodiment (c) is a time chart showing the appearance timing of each character display in the "special reach + promotion" in the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the pending|holding information storage area in 2nd Embodiment, and execution information storage area. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a hold display setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing character color change restriction processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; (a) is a diagram showing a state immediately after "ready-to-win display (fluctuation element of "normal reach")" appears in the main display area of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment; is a diagram showing a state in which the sub display area is erased from the state of (a) and the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area, and (c) is from the state of (b) FIG. 12D is a diagram showing a state in which the cockpit display area is erased and the "super reach" variable element is executed in the main display area, and (d) shows the "super reach" variable element from the state of (c). is a diagram showing a state in which an effect suggesting that a "jackpot display" by the third symbol corresponding to the "time reduction state" appears is being executed, and (e) is from the state of (d) FIG. 12(f) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub display area and the cockpit display area are redisplayed, and the "big win display" by the third symbol corresponding to the "time reduction state" appears in the main display area; , (e), the "promotion" effect is executed, and the "big win display" by the third symbol corresponding to the "probability fluctuation state" appears. (a) is immediately after the "ready-to-win display (variable element of "normal reach")" appears in the main display area of the third pattern display device in the second embodiment, and in the central small area of the sub-display area. FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a state in which a character display at the time of occurrence of reach is displayed in the left small area, in which words spoken from the character pattern are expressed by characters, and (b) shows a change of "normal reach" from the state of (a) The element is started, the sub display area is erased, and the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area. ” has started, and in the variable element of ``Super Reach'', an effect is being executed that suggests that the ``jackpot display'' with the third symbol corresponding to the ``15R normal jackpot'' will appear. (d) shows that the "super reach" variable element ends from the state of (c), the sub display area and the cockpit display area are redisplayed, and the "15R normal jackpot" is displayed in the main display area. A state in which a "jackpot display" is displayed by the corresponding third pattern, and a set phrase character display is displayed in the left small region, in which words spoken from the character pattern in the central small region of the sub-display region are expressed in characters. It is a figure showing. FIG. 13 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the configuration of a character additional data table according to the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the configuration of a pending additional data table in the third embodiment; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing a state immediately after "ready-to-win display (fluctuation element of "normal reach")" appears in the main display area of the third pattern display device in the third embodiment; is a diagram showing a state in which the sub display area is erased from the state of (a) and the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area, and (c) is from the state of (b) FIG. 10D is a diagram showing a state in which the cockpit display area is erased and the variable element of "Super Reach" is executed in the main display area, and (d) shows the sub display area and the cockpit display area from the state of (c). is re-displayed, and "failed display" appears in the main display area. It is the figure which showed typically an example of a structure of the data table in 4th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the background pattern 1 of the background image in the "normal reach only" variation pattern of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing "normal reach only" of the fourth embodiment. is a diagram schematically showing an example of a cockpit pattern 1 of a cockpit image in the variation pattern of . FIG. 21 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a symbol pattern 1 of a symbol image in the variation pattern of “normal reach only” according to the fourth embodiment; It is the figure which showed typically an example of the character pattern of the character design in the variation pattern of "normal reach only" of 4th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list when a “normal reach” variable element occurs in the “normal reach only” variation pattern of the fourth embodiment; (a) is immediately after the "ready-to-win display (variable element of "normal reach")" appears in the main display area of the third pattern display device in the fifth embodiment, and in the central small area of the sub-display area. FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a state in which a character display at the time of occurrence of reach is displayed in the left small area, in which words spoken from the character pattern are expressed by characters, and (b) shows a change of "normal reach" from the state of (a) The element is started, the sub display area is erased, and the "normal reach" variable element is being executed in the main display area, and an error character display indicating the error state is displayed. In (c), the variable element of "super reach" is started from the state of (b), the cockpit display area is erased, the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area, and the player side (d) is a diagram showing a state in which a reach-in-reach character display is displayed in which words spoken from the character pattern of are displayed, and an error character display indicating an error state is displayed; From the state c), the "super reach" variable element ends, the sub-display area and the cockpit display area are re-displayed, the third pattern "missing display" appears in the main display area, and further, the sub-display. A diagram showing a state in which a set phrase character display that expresses words emitted from the character pattern in the central small area of the area is displayed in the left small area, and an error character display indicating an error state is displayed. is. (a) is immediately after the "ready-to-win display (variable element of "normal reach")" appears in the main display area of the third pattern display device in the fifth embodiment, and in the central small area of the sub-display area. FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a state in which a character display at the time of occurrence of reach is displayed in the left small area, in which words spoken from the character pattern are expressed by characters, and (b) shows a change of "normal reach" from the state of (a) The element is started, the sub display area is erased, and the "normal reach" variable element is being executed in the main display area, and an error character display indicating the error state is displayed. In (c), the variable element of "super reach" is started from the state of (b), the cockpit display area is erased, the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area, and the player side (d) is a diagram showing a state in which a reach-in-reach character display is displayed in which words spoken from the character pattern of are displayed, and an error character display indicating an error state is displayed; From the state of c), a "dangerous effect" is executed in the variable element of "super reach", and a content suggesting that a "loss display" appears in the "dangerous effect" is displayed, and an error state is displayed. (e) is a diagram showing a state in which an error character display indicating is displayed, (e) is the end of the variable element of "super reach" from the state of (d), and the sub display area and the cockpit display area are restored. In the main display area, the third pattern "failure display" appears, and furthermore, the fixed phrase character display in which the lines emitted from the character pattern in the central small area of the sub-display area are expressed in characters is displayed in the left small area. is displayed and an error character display indicating an error state is displayed, and (f) is a diagram showing a state where the variable element of "re-variation" is executed from the state of (e) and " FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which an error character display indicating an error state is displayed just before the "big win display" appears.

<First Embodiment>
BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 65, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and prize winning openings (entering ball openings) 63, 64, 65a, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6). A frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later. In addition, the frame button 22 is an operation button for allowing the player to select the effect content of the advance notice display executed in the variable display of the third symbol (hereinafter, the variable display of the third symbol is referred to as "variable effect"). Also used as

The variable effect is a effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and as will be described later, the ball fired to the front area of the game board 13 is a specific winning hole (first ball entrance 64 to be described later). 2), and after the pattern (the third pattern described later) fluctuates for a predetermined period of time, the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed determines the starting prize. This is an effect for presenting the player with the result of the lottery (whether it is a big hit or not).

A stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified. One stage is provided. Various effects such as the variable effects described above and the "ready-to-reach display" executed during the variable effects are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage.

It should be noted that the "ready-to-win display" refers to a display one step before the "big win display" indicating that a big win will occur in the variable effect executed by the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Specifically, the third symbols of the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 4) to be described later stop at the same symbol, and the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 4) continues to fluctuate without stopping. It refers to the state of being

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "ready-to-win display" is roughly classified into one unit of elements that constitute the "normal reach" effect (hereinafter, one unit of elements that constitute the effect is referred to as a "fluctuation element"). , which is developed and executed from the variable elements of the "normal reach", and the variable elements of the "super reach" that have higher expectations for big wins than the variable elements of the "normal reach", and the variable elements of the "normal reach". Then, a variable element of "special reach" having a higher expectation for a big hit than the variable element of "super reach" is prepared. Details of each “reach display” and variable elements will be described later.

The stage is changed by pressing the frame button 22 by the player during a period in which the variable effect is not performed or during a "high-speed change" variable element in which the third symbol is changed at a high speed so that the third symbol cannot be visually recognized by the player. Each time the frame button 22 is operated, the stage is changed repeatedly in the order of "town stage"→"sky stage"→"island stage"→"town stage"→ . In addition, immediately after the power is turned on, the initial stage is set to "town stage".

In addition, when the variable element of "normal reach" is started in the variable performance performed by the third symbol display device 81, the variable element of "normal reach" to the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" , the selection screen of the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variable element of "normal reach". good.

Specifically, on the selection screen, a plurality of candidates that can be selected as variable elements of "Super Reach" or variable elements of "Special Reach" are displayed, and while the selection screen is displayed, the frame button 22 is pressed. The selected candidate is configured to be changed when the player performs a pressing operation. Then, the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach" is determined based on the production candidate selected when developing into the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach". , according to the determination, the variable element of "super reach" and the variable element of "special reach" are executed by the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed. It may be constituted by an operating lever that can be tilted forward, backward, rightward and leftward. Then, based on the direction in which the control lever is tilted, the selection of the production stage may be changed, or the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" may be selected.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined "ready-to-win display" is performed, and play a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light-emitting means such as light-emitting diodes (Light Emitting Diodes, hereinafter abbreviated as "LEDs") are provided on the periphery of the window part 14c. .

In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps. lights up or blinks to notify that the big win is in progress or that the "ready-to-win display" just before the big win is in progress. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error occurs is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electric decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (see FIG. ) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (hereinafter abbreviated as "ABS") is applied to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 with chrome plating. .) A plating member 36 made of resin is attached.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit, not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit.

A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51 is a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 6). A touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of , a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the period of pressing operation, and a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by a change in electrical resistance. A variable resistor (not shown) for detection is built in.

When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the ball, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails for guiding balls, pinwheels and rails 61 and 62, a general prize opening 63, a first A ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. FIG. The general prize winning port 63, the first ball receiving port 64, the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and screwed from the front side of the game board 13 by wood screws. etc. is fixed. Also, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a winning opening is arranged and a shot ball is area).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin-made arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

A first pattern display device 37 provided with a plurality of LEDs 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, is disposed in the upper right portion of the game area in front view (the upper right portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 displays the first symbol in accordance with each control performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 6), which will be described later (hereinafter, the variable display of the first symbol is referred to as "dynamic display"). is performed, and the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly displayed.

A plurality of LEDs 37a perform a dynamic display by indicating whether or not a change is in progress accompanying a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) by a lighting state, or stop after the change is completed. As a pattern, a pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the starting prize is indicated by the lighting state, or a ball that has not been changed among the balls entered in the first ball entrance 64 (holding ball). The number of held balls, which is the number of , is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. The LEDs 37a are configured to emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with a small number of LEDs by combining the emitted colors.

In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is a big win is determined (big win lottery), and when it is determined as a big win, the type of the big win is also determined. As the types of jackpot determined here, "15R probability variable jackpot", "2R probability variable jackpot", and "15R normal jackpot" are prepared.

The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, but also indicates whether or not the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation executed with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64. , a pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot is shown.

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to the “probability fluctuation state” after the maximum round number of 15 rounds, and the “2R probability variable jackpot” means that the maximum number of rounds is 2 rounds. It is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to the “probability fluctuation state” after the jackpot. In addition, the "15R normal jackpot" shifts to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and is in the "time reduction state" for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). It's a big hit.

In addition, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a high probability state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during a so-called probability change. That is. The high-probability state (during variable probability, variable probability state) in the first embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol (to be described later) is increased and the ball is likely to enter the first ball entrance 64 .

On the other hand, the "normal game state" refers to the time of the low probability state that is not the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, the jackpot probability is higher than the "probability fluctuation state". is low. In addition, the "time reduction state (so-called time reduction state)" is a state in which the jackpot probability is low as in the "normal game state", and only the probability of winning the second symbol is increased and the first ball entrance It means a game state in which a ball is likely to enter 64.

Instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10, the opening time of the electric accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 or It is also possible to change the number of times that is opened. Specifically, in the "time shortened state", the time for the electric role attached to the first entrance 64 to open is made longer than in the case other than the "time shortened state", or the electric role is The number of times the object is opened may be increased compared to the case other than the "time reduction state". In addition, in the "time reduction state", at least two of increasing the winning probability of the second symbol, increasing the opening time of the electric accessory, and increasing the number of times the electric accessory is opened are performed at the same time. can be

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the dynamic display on the first pattern display device 37, a liquid crystal that performs a variable effect of the third pattern. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") and a second symbol variably displayed (hereinafter referred to as a variation of the second symbol) triggered by the passage of the ball through the second ball entrance 67 A second pattern display device 83 is provided which is composed of an LED for displaying (referred to as "variable display"). A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer circumference of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 17-inch large liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 6), which will be described later. , are displayed.

Each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) is composed of a plurality of patterns, and these patterns are vertically scrolled for each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 to display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It is designed to be displayed variably. In the third symbol display device 81 of the first embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 under the control of the main control device 110, whereas the first symbol display device 37 displays the game state. It is a decorative display according to the Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 4(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.4(b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. Also, FIGS. 5(a) to 5(d) schematically show changes in the display content of the third symbol display device 81 when a "ready-to-win display" (to be described later) appears in the main display area Dm. It is a diagram.

The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main pattern is composed of a back pattern made of a wooden box and a number from "0" to "9". The main design with "9") has a large number on the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (“0”, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) have characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets on the front of the wooden box. An imitation accessory pattern is added, and an even number is added to the lower right side of the accessory pattern so as to be displayed in green and small and on the front side of the accessory pattern.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the result of the lottery by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) to be described later is a big hit, a variable effect in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and the variable effect is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot occurs after the is over. After the jackpot ends, the transition to the "probability fluctuation state (variable probability state)" and a maximum of 15 rounds of jackpot are given, the main pattern with an odd number (equivalent to "high probability pattern") is aligned. done. Similarly, when the transition to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot and the jackpot of up to 2 rounds is given, the main pattern (e.g., "341") of a specific pattern number combination (equivalent to the so-called "probability pattern") A fluctuating production is performed. On the other hand, when shifting to a "time reduction state (time reduction state)" after the end of the jackpot, a variable performance is performed in which main patterns (corresponding to "low probability patterns") with even numbers are aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The upper one-third of the area is a sub-display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, and the like. In addition, a cockpit display area Db for displaying the number of held balls and the like is provided in the central portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 on the lower base side.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle, and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, the left symbol row Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, and the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2, A right symbol row Z3 is displayed in the display area Dm3.

The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, main patterns are arranged in ascending (or descending) numerical order in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform a variable performance. It should be noted that the arrangement of numbers may be different in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. For example, the left symbol row Z1 may be arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, while the numbers of the main symbols may appear in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third pattern is displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each variation effect. Stop is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols, hereinafter referred to as "big winning display") is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is evenly divided into three sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying characters and preview effect images, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a feeling of anticipation of a big win as a result of the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm. The cockpit display area Db includes a reserved pattern indicating the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which the variable effect has not been executed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64, and the variable effect that is being executed. This is an area for displaying execution symbols related to.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4(b), a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, in the left small area Ds1, a moving image such as the appearance of the notice pattern is displayed, and the variable effect performed in the main display area Dm is in a state where it is easier to transition to a big win than usual. Suggested to the player.

In the secondary display area Ds, in the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy wearing a headband in the first embodiment) normally performs a predetermined action, and the variable effect performed in the main display area Dm is performed. Based on this, a special action different from the predetermined action is performed, the color of the boy's hair, which is usually black, the color of the headband, which is usually white, changes, and another character appears. is done.

Furthermore, in the sub-display area Ds, in the right small area Ds3, a level meter (not shown) appears to indicate step by step whether or not a big win will occur in the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm. Is displayed. This level meter increases (adds) each time the expected occurrence of the "ready-to-win display" in the variable performance being executed and the expectation of the big win increase based on the appearance of the warning symbols etc. It is configured to indicate that a big win is confirmed when the display limit (MAX display) of the level meter is reached. Therefore, the sub-display area Ds has a function of suggesting the occurrence of "ready-to-reach display" in the main display area Dm.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable effect (dynamic display) is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball enters (Number of retained balls) is retained up to 4 times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and when the cockpit display area Db is displayed, the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4 provided in the cockpit display area Db and shown even if In the first to fourth reserved design display areas Db1 to Db4, one reserved design ("○" design (white circle design) in the normal display mode) is displayed for each reserved ball (one reserved ball). , the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved symbols displayed in the reserved design display areas Db1 to Db4.

That is, in the first to fourth reserved design display areas Db1 to Db4, when one reserved design is displayed in the first reserved design display area Db1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and the first・When a total of two reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the second reserved symbol display areas Db1 and Db2, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is two, and the first to third reserved symbol display areas Db1 When a total of three reserved patterns are displayed one each in ~Db3, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is three times, and each one is counted in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4. When four reserved symbols are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is four. Further, when no reserved design is displayed in the first to fourth reserved design display areas Db1 to Db4, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0 and there is no reserved variable effect.

Further, the cockpit display area Db is provided with an execution symbol display area Db0 in which an execution symbol indicating that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm is displayed. The execution symbol display area Db0 is provided on the left side of the first reserved symbol display area Db1 and is larger than the reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4. In addition, the reserved symbols displayed in the first reserved symbol display region Db1 are moved (shifted) and displayed as executed symbols in the executed symbol display area Db0.

The executed symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db are erased when the variable effect is completed, and as the executed symbols are erased, the displayed suspended symbols move to the lower side (left side) as the executed symbols and suspended symbols. displayed. Specifically, when the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is erased with the end of the variable effect, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1, the first The reserved symbols displayed in the reserved symbol display area Db1 are moved (shifted) and displayed as the executed symbols in the executed symbol display area Db0. Further, when a reserved design is displayed in the second reserved design display area Db2, the reserved design displayed in the second reserved design display area Db2 is moved (shifted) as a reserved design in the first reserved design display area Db1. is displayed. Furthermore, when a reserved design is displayed in the third reserved design display area Db3, the reserved design displayed in the third reserved design display area Db3 is moved (shifted) as a reserved design in the second reserved design display area Db2. is displayed. Further, when a reserved design is displayed in the fourth reserved design display area Db4, the reserved design displayed in the fourth reserved design display area Db4 is moved (shifted) as a reserved design in the third reserved design display area Db3. is displayed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, while the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, the execution symbols are continuously displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 (during the variable element of "super reach" or "special reach"). ). On the other hand, when the variable effect is finished, or when the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is being executed, the execution pattern is erased. That is, when the executed symbols are displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, it indicates that the variable effect is being executed (continued) in the main display area Dm, and the executed symbols are displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0. If not, it indicates that the variable presentation is not executed (not continued) in the main display area Dm, or the variable element of 'super reach' or the variable element of 'special reach' is being executed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, the "holding change notice" can be executed by using the holding pattern and the execution pattern displayed in the cockpit display region Db. This "reserved change notice" means that the degree of expectation for a big hit to be executed in the main display area Dm is changed in a plurality of stages in the display colors of reserved symbols and executed symbols from before the execution of the variable performance to during the execution of the variable performance. It is a notice suggested by

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the display colors of the reserved symbols and the executed symbols are changed from the normal display mode of "white" to the blue display mode of "blue" and red as the "suspension change notice". It is configured to be changeable to "red" in the mode or "rainbow color" in the rainbow color display mode. In this pachinko machine 10, when the "big win display" or "ready-to-win display" occurs in the variable effect, the selection ratio of the display colors of the pending symbols and the executed symbols is different. By changing the display color of the reserved pattern and the executed pattern from the normal display mode ("white") to another display mode (for example, "blue"), the variable effect indicated by the reserved pattern and the executed pattern is " It is possible to suggest to the player the possibility of occurrence of "ready-to-win display" or "big win display" for each display color.

Specifically, in the "reserved change notice", when the reserved pattern and the executed pattern are in the "blue" display mode rather than the normal display mode ("white"), the fluctuation indicated by the reserved pattern and the executed pattern In the production, the ratio of "reach display" and "jackpot display" is set high. In addition, when the reserved pattern and the executed pattern are in the display mode of "red" rather than "blue", the ratio of "reach display" and "jackpot display" in the variable effect indicated by the reserved pattern and the executed pattern is higher. set. Furthermore, when the reserved pattern and the executed pattern are in the display mode of "rainbow color" rather than "red", the ratio of "reach display" and "jackpot display" in the variable effect indicated by the reserved pattern and the executed pattern set high. The setting ratio and the like of the “holding change notice” will be described later.

In addition, when the display mode of the reserved design and the execution design is "red", the mode of production (mainly The mode of production is referred to as "production mode"), "special reach" production mode or "special change" production mode (hereinafter referred to as "super reach" production mode, "special reach" production mode or "special change" production mode) It is set so that the execution of the "super reach or more" production mode) is determined. Furthermore, when the display mode of the reserved pattern and the executed pattern is "rainbow color", it is set so that the appearance of the "jackpot display" is confirmed in the variable effect indicated by the reserved pattern or the executed pattern of the "rainbow color". It is Therefore, in the first embodiment, the display modes of the reserved symbols and the executed symbols are stepwise in the order of normal (“white”) → “blue” → “red” → “rainbow color” “reach display” and “jackpot display”. ” is set so that the appearance expectation is high.

It should be noted that the display mode of the "rainbow color" of the "suspended change notice" is set so as not to appear in the suspended symbols, but to appear only in the executed symbols. This is because, after displaying a “rainbow color” display mode that confirms the occurrence of a jackpot with a pending symbol, if the pending symbol is not executed due to some abnormality (for example, power failure), the player can obtain Dissatisfaction occurs due to not being able to get the big win that should be received. Therefore, in the reserved symbols, the occurrence of dissatisfaction can be prevented in advance by configuring so as not to appear in advance the display mode of the "rainbow color" that confirms the occurrence of the big win.

Further, due to this "reserved change notice", in a state where the display mode of the reserved design is changed, when the reserved design is shifted along with the execution (digestion) of the variable production, the display mode of the changed reserved design is shifted. It is configured to be inherited (inherited) and reflected to the previous reserved pattern or executed pattern. That is, when the display mode of the reserved design changes, even when the changed reserved design shifts to other reserved design display areas Db1 to Db3 or the execution design display area Db0 with the execution of the variable effect, the display before the shift The mode is configured to be maintained as it is as the display mode of the reserved pattern or the executed pattern after the shift.

Therefore, for example, when the display color of the reserved design changes to "red" in the fourth reserved design display area Db4, the reserved design is displayed in the third reserved design display area Db3, the second reserved design display area Db2, and the first reserved design. When shifting from the display area Db1 to the executed symbol display area Db0, the "red" reserved symbol or the executed symbol is continuously displayed. The details of this "pending change notice" will be described later.

In the first embodiment, the number of pending balls in the variable effect based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of held balls is four times. It is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls ( For example, they may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁It should be noted that, if the third symbol display device 81 does not display information about the number of pending balls (such as pending symbols), it is not possible to execute the "suspended change notice" by the pending symbols. It may be constructed such that by making it appear, a pre-reading notice similar to the "pending change notice" is executed.

Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state. In addition, when configured to display the number of pending balls by the pending lamp, by providing a plurality of types of display colors for the pending lamp, it is of course possible to execute a pre-reading notice similar to the "holding change notice" of the first embodiment. is possible.

Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the transition of the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the "normal reach" variable element and the "super reach" variable element appear in the variable effect will be described. FIG. 5(a) is a diagram showing a state immediately after the "ready-to-win display (variable element of "normal reach")" appears in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. In FIG. 5(b), the "normal reach" variable element is started from the state of FIG. 5(a), the sub display area Ds is erased, and the "normal reach" variable element is executed in the main display area Dm. It is the figure which showed the state. In FIG. 5(c), the variable element of "super reach" is started from the state of FIG. 5(b), the cockpit display area Db is erased, and the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. It is the figure which showed the state where it is. In FIG. 5(d), the variable element of "Super Reach" ends from the state of FIG. is a diagram showing a state in which the "failure display" has appeared.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, when representing the third pattern, only the number pattern is used to express the main pattern in the figure, and the rear pattern made of a wooden box and the accessory pattern imitating the character are omitted. and omit its explanation. In addition, in FIG. 5, as a "reach display" that develops from the variable elements of "normal reach", the variable elements of "super reach" will be exemplified and explained, but the variable elements of "super reach" and the variable elements of "special reach" Although the effects such as the background display, character design, and variable time are different, the screen configuration (erasing or redisplaying, etc.) of the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db is the same. It is possible to replace the "Special Reach" variable with the "Special Reach" variable.

First, in FIG. 5A, the third symbol "7" is stopped in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and the third symbol "7" is displayed in the right display area Dm3. It shows a state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed, and furthermore, the third symbol is still unrecognizably "high-speed fluctuating" in the medium display area Dm2. Therefore, it is the state immediately after the so-called "ready-to-win display" with the "7" pattern appears.

In the secondary display area Ds, a character pattern indicating that the "ready-to-win display" has occurred is displayed in the central small area Ds2. , character display Se1 at the time of occurrence of reach is displayed. Specifically, in the central small area Ds2, the character pattern is displayed in a manner as if it were cheering. Further, in the left small area Ds1, a "white" character saying "Let's go!" emitted from the character pattern of the central small area Ds2 is displayed as a character display Se1 when reach occurs. In conjunction with the display of the ready-to-win character display Se1, an audio output device 226 (see FIG. 6), which will be described later, is configured to output a voice corresponding to the character design of "Let's go!" . A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the right small area Ds3, and no character design or the like is displayed.

The character display Se1 at the time of occurrence of reach in the first embodiment is configured so that two types of display modes, a "weak pattern" and a "strong pattern", can appear. Specifically, when the "weak pattern" of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is selected, the character pattern "Let's go!" is displayed. In addition, when the "strong pattern" of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is selected, a character pattern of more optimistic expression than the "weak pattern" of "I can do it!" is displayed. The details of the "weak pattern" and "strong pattern" of the character display Se1 at the occurrence of reach will be described later.

Further, the character display Se1 at the occurrence of reach in the first embodiment is configured such that the displayed character color (display color) can be changed. Specifically, the characters are displayed in "white" as the normal display color of the character display Se1 at the occurrence of reach. In addition, characters are displayed in "red" as the display color of the first chance-up pattern, which has a higher chance of winning the jackpot than the normal display color. Furthermore, characters are displayed in "gold" as the display color of the second chance-up pattern, which has a higher chance of winning a big hit than the first chance-up pattern (hereinafter, "red" of the first chance-up pattern and the second chance-up pattern The “golden color” is sometimes collectively referred to as “chance up pattern”). Details of the change in the display color of the character display Se1 at the occurrence of reach will be described later.

In the cockpit display area Db, an executed symbol is displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, and reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, the execution symbol indicates that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of pending balls of the variable effect is four.

FIG. 5(b) shows a state in which the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 5(a). In this “normal reach” variable, the main display area Dm is displayed as if it were enlarged. Specifically, in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, the "7" symbol that is being stopped is displayed in an enlarged manner, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is displayed at a low speed so that it can be visually recognized. , scrolled at low speed from "5" pattern to "6" pattern).

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is erased as the main display area Dm expands due to the occurrence of the "normal reach" variable, and the sub-display area Ds becomes invisible. This is because, as described above, the secondary display area Ds has a function of suggesting whether or not the "ready-to-win display" will occur mainly in the variable effect in the main display area Dm. is generated, the significance of the existence of the sub-display area Ds is diminished.

Further, when the "ready-to-win display" occurs in the main display area Dm, the player pays attention to whether the result of the "ready-to-win display" is the "big win display" or the "losing display". There is, and the attention to the display contents of the sub-display area Ds suggesting the occurrence of the "ready-to-reach display" fades away.

Therefore, when the "ready-to-win display" occurs in the main display area Dm, the display content of the main display area Dm is enlarged so that the player can easily recognize the contents of the "ready-to-win display" that the player focuses on. It is configured to display and erase the sub-display area Ds along with the enlargement.

In the state of FIG. 5B, in the cockpit display area Db, as in the display state of FIG. Reserved symbols are displayed in the areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, as in FIG. 5(a), the execution symbol indicates that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of pending balls of the variable effect is four. showing.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the display in the cockpit display area Db is not erased and is continuously displayed during the "normal reach" variable element. This is because there is a high possibility that a "losing display" will appear in many cases where the big winning lottery is lost in the variable performance of only the "normal reach" variable element ("normal reach" performance mode). Then, when the variable element of "normal reach" ends and the "losing display" is displayed, the next variable performance is immediately started, suggesting to the player whether or not the next variable performance is suspended. There is a need. Therefore, the display of the cockpit display area Db is maintained (continuously displayed) during the execution of the variable elements of the "normal reach", and is configured to suggest to the player how many pending balls of the variable effect exist. ing.

In addition, since the cockpit display area Db is smaller than the sub-display area Ds, even if it continues to be displayed during the variable element of "normal reach", the performance of the variable element of "normal reach" is not hindered. Therefore, even if the cockpit display area Db is continuously displayed during the execution of the "normal reach" variable element, there is no actual harm.

Furthermore, the pending symbols and the execution symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db can execute the above-described "suspension change notice", and the "suspension change notice " is configured to take over (inherit) and display the display mode of the reserved pattern changed by ". That is, it is configured to be able to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the big hit of the variable effect being executed by the display mode of the executed symbols. Therefore, by having the player confirm the display mode of the execution pattern during the execution of the variable element of "normal reach", the variable element of "normal reach" during execution develops into the variable element of "super reach" and wins big. Whether or not the game is to be played can be predicted by the player, and the interest based on the prediction is given.

Specifically, for example, during the execution of the variable element of "normal reach", the execution pattern is displayed in "white", which is a normal display mode, and "blue", which is one step higher than the "white". If so, the player predicts that the "normal reach" variable element is unlikely to develop into a "super reach" variable element and result in a big win. On the other hand, when the execution pattern is displayed in "red" or "rainbow color" during the execution of the variable element of "normal reach", the player can change the variable element of "normal reach" to the variable element of "super reach". It is predicted that it will develop into a big win and that a "big win display" will appear even if the variable element of the "normal reach" remains. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 equipped with the "holding change notice", the cockpit display area Db is continued during the execution of the "normal reach" variable element in order to give the player the above interest during the execution of the "normal reach" variable element. configured to display. The details of the "pending change notice" will be described later.

FIG. 5(c) shows a state in which the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 5(b). In the variable element of this "super reach", a symbol indicating the occurrence of "reach display" based on the "7" symbol displayed in the variable element of "normal reach" (hereinafter referred to as the occurrence of this "reach display" The pattern is referred to as a "reach forming pattern") is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

In addition, in FIG. 5(c), a "battle effect" in which a plurality of character patterns compete for victory or defeat using almost the entire display screen of the third pattern display device 81 ("competition effect" as a variable element of "special reach"). is displayed. In this "battle effect", an effect (in the first embodiment, kickboxing) is executed in which the character pattern on the player side (for example, the character pattern on the left side) and the character pattern on the enemy side (for example, the character pattern on the right side) fight. . In the "battle presentation", if the character pattern on the player side wins, a big win is achieved, and the "big win display" appears as a display result of the variable element of the "super reach". On the other hand, in the "battle effect", if the character pattern on the enemy side wins, it is set to be a loss, and a "loss display" appears as a display result of the variable element of the "super reach".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the second half of the variable element of "super reach", the variable performance of the third symbol is "big win display" or "losing display". configured to be That is, in the "event effect", an effect is executed to determine whether or not the third symbol, which is the same as the ready-to-win formation pattern, stops in conjunction with the action of the character pattern on the player side and the action of the character pattern on the enemy side. . Therefore, in the variable element of "super reach", when the "event effect" is executed, the display result of either "jackpot display" or "losing display" always appears, and the variable effect is confirmed with the display result (Except when the variable element of "re-variation", which will be described later, is executed). Therefore, the player pays the most attention to whether or not the "jackpot display" appears in the "end effect" of the variable element of the "super reach", and the "end effect" is related to the game of the pachinko machine 10. Positioned as the most important performance.

Therefore, the "border effect" in the present embodiment is performed at the stage just before the end of the variable element of "super reach" (for example, 9 seconds from the start) in the variable element of "super reach". ” is configured to be performed just before the end of the variable element of “Special Reach” (for example, 19 seconds from the start). In addition, it is constructed such that a reach-in-character display Se2, which will be described later, appears slightly before each "end effect" is performed (for example, one second before the "end effect"). The display mode of Se2 is configured to suggest the result of the "end effect". The display mode of the in-reach character display Se2 will be described later.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5(c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the cockpit display area Db is erased during the execution of the "super reach" variable element, and instead, the third symbol display is performed. At the upper left of the display area of the device 81 and below the ready-to-win formation pattern, a number pattern ("4" in the first embodiment) indicating the number of pending balls in the variable effect is newly displayed. is configured to

In the variable performance being executed, if the variable element of "Super Reach", which has a higher expectation for a big hit than the variable element of "Normal Reach", occurs, the player will be able to determine the number of pending (waiting) variable performances. Also, we are paying attention to whether the variable effect being executed will be "big win display" or "losing display". For this reason, attention is not paid to the reserved pattern indicating the number of reserved balls of the variable effect before execution. Rather, if the reserved symbols are displayed in the cockpit display area Db during the execution of the variable element of "super reach", the player cannot concentrate on the effect of the variable element of "super reach". In some cases, the user may feel annoyed by the display of reserved symbols.

Further, the reserved symbols displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4 of the cockpit display area Db are not directly related to the variable effect being executed. Furthermore, the pending symbols displayed in the first to fourth pending symbol display areas Db1 to Db4 are set (lottery) processing different from the display control of the variable effect being executed (in the voice lamp control device 113, the variable effect is Variation effect processing (see FIG. 44), which will be described later.Regarding reserved symbols, the display is controlled by a pending display setting processing (see FIG. 43), which will be described later. On the other hand, during the execution of the variable element of "Super Reach", various character patterns are displayed and many effects are displayed for each character pattern, etc., which increases the processing load of display control. be. In such a situation, if display control is performed for a plurality of pending symbols that are not directly related to the variable effect being executed, the processing load on the display control of the entire third symbol display device 81 increases for each pending symbol. As a result, display abnormalities such as so-called dropped frames may occur.

Furthermore, the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db takes over (inherits) the display mode of the pending pattern changed by the "holding change notice", so it has a direct relationship with the variable effect being executed. However, the "suspended change notice" suggests the degree of expectation for the appearance of the "jackpot display" and the degree of expectation for the appearance of the "reach display". Therefore, when the variable element of "super reach" appears, it is in a state of fulfilling the suggestion of the degree of expectation for the appearance of the "reach display" as the "suspension change notice". In addition, when the variable element of "Super Reach" appears, by executing "Reach display" with a high expectation of big win, which is the variable element of "Super Reach", it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of appearance of "Super Reach display". It is a state in which a certain degree (for example, half) is satisfied. Furthermore, as described above, when the variable element of "super reach" appears, the player pays attention to the content of the effect of the variable element of "super reach", and the display of the "holding change notice" in the execution pattern Concern for mode is waning.

Therefore, during the execution of the variable element of "super reach", the reserved symbols and the executed symbols with low attention of the player are erased, and the effect of the variable element of "super reach" is mainly executed on the display screen. It is possible to make the person pay attention (concentrate) on the production of the variable element of "super reach". Further, by erasing the reserved symbols and the executed symbols that attract less attention from the player, the load on the display control can be reduced, and the occurrence of display abnormalities such as missing frames can be prevented.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, during the "battle effect" in the variable element of "super reach" (during the "competition effect" in the variable element of "special reach"), the character pattern (or , the enemy's character pattern; the same shall apply hereinafter) speaks a line, and a reach-in-reach character display Se2 in which the line is expressed in characters is displayed. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 5(c), in the display area where the cockpit display area Db has been erased, the "white" character "Kurae!" Displayed as display Se2. In conjunction with the display of the in-reach character display Se2, a voice corresponding to the character design of "Kurae!"

In the first embodiment, during the execution of the "super reach" variable element, the reach-in-progress character display Se2 is displayed in the display area of the cockpit display area Db that has been erased along with the execution of the "super reach" variable element. is configured to Conventionally, when character display (so-called telop) is displayed on a display device of a television or pachinko machine, the character display is displayed on the lower side of the display screen so as not to interfere with the display content of the main moving image being displayed. is common. However, if the in-reach character display Se2 is displayed so as to overlap the cockpit display area Db while the cockpit display area Db is displayed, the in-reach character display overlaps with the execution symbol or the pending symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db. This may make it difficult to recognize the content of the in-reach character display Se2.

In particular, in a situation where the above-described "reservation change notice" is displayed in "red" in the execution pattern or the reservation pattern, the reach-in-progress character display Se2 is displayed in the execution pattern or the reservation pattern so as to overlap the execution pattern or the reservation pattern. When displayed in the same system display color (for example, a “red” chance up pattern described later), the execution pattern or reserved pattern “red” and the reach character display Se2 display color (for example, “red”) are of the same color, the character content of the in-reach character display Se2 may be lost in the execution pattern or the reserved pattern, and the display content of the in-reach character display Se2 may not be visible.

Further, when the in-reach character display Se2 is displayed above the cockpit display area Db, the in-reach character display Se2 must be displayed near the center of the display area by the amount displayed in the cockpit display area Db. There is a possibility that the rendering of the variable elements of "Super reach" and the in-reach character display Se2 overlap, making it difficult to recognize both the rendering of the variable elements of "Super reach" and the display contents of the in-reach character display Se2.

Therefore, the cockpit display area Db is erased during the execution of the variable element of "Super Reach" in which the in-reach character display Se2 is displayed, and the in-reach character display Se2 is displayed in the display area where the cockpit display area Db is erased. With such a configuration, it is possible to effectively use the display area of the deleted cockpit display area Db and display the display contents of the in-reach character display Se2 so as not to overlap with other display objects. Therefore, it is possible to secure a displayable area for the in-reach character display Se2 to make the display content easy for the player to see, and to allow the player to accurately recognize the effect content of the variable effect.

Further, in the on-reach character display Se2 of the first embodiment, similarly to the on-reach character display Se1, two types of display modes of "weak pattern" and "strong pattern" can appear. Specifically, when the "weak pattern" of the in-reach character display Se2 is selected, the character pattern "Kurae!" is displayed. Further, when the "strong pattern" of the reach-in-reach character display Se2 is selected, a character pattern with a stronger expression than the "weak pattern" of "Stop!" is displayed. The details of the "weak pattern" and "strong pattern" of the medium-reach character display Se2 will be described later.

Further, the character display during reach Se2 of the first embodiment is configured such that the displayed character color can be changed, similarly to the character display Se1 at the time of occurrence of reach. Specifically, the characters are displayed in "white" as the normal display color of the in-reach character display Se2. In addition, characters are displayed in "red" as the display color of the first chance-up pattern, which has a higher chance of winning the jackpot than the normal display color. Furthermore, characters are displayed in "golden" as the display color of the second chance-up pattern having a higher chance of winning a big hit than the first chance-up pattern. The details of the display colors of the in-reach character display Se2 will be described later.

In the state of FIG. 5(c), the reach formation pattern of the "7" pattern, which is the cause of the fluctuation factor of this "super reach", is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third pattern display device 81. ing. The production of the variable element of "super reach" indicates whether the variable production being executed is "big hit display" or "losing display", but has a direct relationship with the display mode of the third symbol. Since it is performed by a character pattern that does not have a third pattern, if only the character pattern in the variable element of "super reach" is focused in a state where the third pattern is not displayed at all, the effect is "reach display" There are cases where it is not possible to recognize whether or not it is (for example, when it is misunderstood as a "demo screen"). In addition, since the effect of the variable element of "super reach" is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the player is asked which third symbol caused the "reach display" during the variable element of "super reach". may be forgotten. However, if the reach formation pattern is displayed large during the execution of the variable element of "Super Reach", the production of "Super Reach" will become difficult to see, and the production of the variable element of "Super Reach" will be hindered. There is a risk of

Therefore, among the variable elements of "super ready-to-win", in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol, which is the cause of the variable element of "super ready-to-win", is displayed small. Configure. By configuring in this way, it is suggested to the player that the "ready-to-win display" is occurring without hindering the performance of the variable element of the "super ready-to-win", and the third symbol that has generated the "ready-to-win display". The player can be made to clearly suggest the type of

In addition, in the state of FIG. 5(c), a numerical pattern (in the first embodiment, , “4”) are displayed. As described above, the display in the cockpit display area Db is erased during the execution of the variable elements of "Super Reach", so the player can completely cancel the number of times of the suspended variable effect depending on the display contents of the cockpit display area Db. It may not be recognized.

Therefore, instead of erasing the cockpit display area Db during the execution of the variable element of "super reach", a variable performance holding ball is displayed at the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and below the reach formation symbol. It is constructed so as to display a numerical pattern indicating a number. By constructing in this way, the number of times of the variable performance held by the player can be indicated without obstructing the performance of the variable element of "super reach" during the performance of the variable element of "super reach". can be done.

In FIG. 5(d), from the state of FIG. 5(c), the production of the variable element of "super reach" fails (the enemy character pattern wins), and "failure display" appears in the main display area Dm. In addition, the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are displayed again on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. In this state, the character pattern in the central small region Ds2 of the sub-display region Ds and the execution patterns and reserved patterns in the cockpit display region Db are visible again.

Here, the character pattern in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is "loss display" after the "blinking effect" indicating whether the "big win display" or "loss display" in the variable element of "super reach" is executed. is displayed in a mode showing a disappointed expression. In addition, in the left small area Ds1, lines emitted from the character pattern (formal phrases. Common phrases and expressions that are often used in specific situations and scenes. In the first embodiment, after the end of the "occasion effect", ) is displayed as the standard phrase character display Se3. In the example shown in FIG. 5D, "white" characters "I'm sorry..." are displayed as the standard phrase character display Se3. In tandem with the display of the fixed phrase character display Se3 for the "failure display", a voice corresponding to the character pattern of "I'm sorry..." is output from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 6), which will be described later. is configured as

Here, when the "jackpot display" appears after the "exhibition effect" of the variable element of the "super reach" is executed, the character pattern of the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner showing a happy mark. Also, in the left small area Ds1, for example, a "white" character saying "I did it!", which is a line uttered by the character pattern, is displayed as a fixed phrase character display Se3. In conjunction with the display of the fixed phrase character display Se3 for the "big win display", a voice corresponding to the character design of "Yatteze!" is configured to

In the first embodiment, the character display of 1 ("I'm sorry..." at the time of losing or "Yattaze!" However, instead of this, a plurality of character displays may be displayed after the "end effect". Specifically, for example, after the "end effect" is completed, a scene is constructed in which a plurality of character patterns each emits a line as if they are talking, and if a failure display appears in the "end effect" , ``I'm sorry. ·” may be displayed as the fixed phrase character display Se3.

In addition, in the variation effect of the first embodiment, after temporarily stopping the "loss display", there is a "re-variation" effect (variation element) in which the "loss display" is changed again to change to the "jackpot display". Although it is prepared, a pseudo fixed phrase character display (hereinafter referred to as a "pseudo fixed phrase character display") Se4 is displayed even when the "failure display" that is temporarily stopped appears. configured to be In this case, the "white" characters "I'm sorry..." corresponding to the temporarily stopped "losing display" are displayed as the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4, and the "re-variation" effect is executed to "win the jackpot". When "display" appears, the fixed phrase character display Se3 corresponding to the "jackpot display" is displayed again, saying "I did it!".

In other words, the fixed phrase character display Se3 or the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 is configured to display a dialogue corresponding to the display result of the variation effect of the third pattern displayed in the main display area Dm. As described above, when the stop pattern of the variation effect of the third pattern displayed in the main display area Dm is the "big win display", the character pattern showing the happy expression is changed to "I did it". !” in “white” is displayed as the standard phrase character display Se3. On the other hand, when the stop symbol or the temporary stop symbol of the variable effect of the third symbol displayed in the main display area Dm is the "failure display", the character symbol showing a disappointing expression as described above. "I'm sorry..." in white is displayed as a standard phrase character display Se3 or a pseudo standard phrase character display Se4.

Further, as described above, the fixed phrase character display Se3 of the first embodiment includes one type of fixed phrase character display Se3 corresponding to the "jackpot display" and the fixed phrase character display Se3 corresponding to the "loss display". A total of two types of fixed phrase character display Se3 can be displayed, including one type of fixed phrase character display Se3 "I'm sorry...". That is, the standard phrase character display Se3 is not provided with a character pattern such as "weak pattern" or "strong pattern" like the character display Se1 when the reach occurs and the character display Se2 during the reach. It is configured such that the type of character pattern corresponding to each displayed display result (pass/fail result) appears.

On the other hand, the standard phrase character display Se3 or the pseudo standard phrase character display Se4 of the first embodiment is configured such that the displayed character color can be changed in the same manner as the character display Se1 during reach occurrence and the character display Se2 during reach. Specifically, the normal display color of the standard phrase character display Se3 or the pseudo standard phrase character display Se4 is "white", "red" or "gold", similar to the character display Se1 during reach occurrence and character display Se2 during reach. characters can be displayed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a chance-up pattern ("red" or "golden") appears in any of the character displays Se1 and Se2, the chance-up pattern appears in each of the subsequent character displays Se2 to Se4. It is configured to be able to execute display that inherits the pattern. Specifically, for example, when the first chance-up pattern of "red" is executed in the character display Se1 at the time of reaching occurrence, the corresponding character is displayed in the character display Se2 and the fixed phrase character display Se3 (pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4) during reach. It is configured to be able to execute the "red" first chance up pattern. Further, for example, when the normal pattern of "white" is executed in the on-reach character display Se1, but the first chance-up pattern of "red" is executed in the on-reach character display Se2, the standard phrase character display Se3 is executed. In (pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4), the "red" first chance-up pattern is configured to be executable.

This is because, as in the first embodiment, in the case of a configuration in which character displays appear at a plurality of locations of the variable effect, if the configuration is such that a chance-up pattern is randomly selected for each appearance location, the appearance of the character display is determined. This is because the lottery process for each location is required, and the lottery process increases the processing load. In addition, in the variable effect, if the character display executed first is displayed in the chance-up pattern and then the character display executed later is displayed in the normal pattern other than the chance-up pattern, the character display after the first character display will be displayed. In the character display, the expectation of a big win is expressed (hereinafter referred to as "revolutionary expression"), and the player who was excited by the appearance of the chance-up pattern in the previous character display This is because there is a risk that the player will lose interest in the game by witnessing the expression of the downfall of the character display.

Therefore, in the character display of the variable production, the lottery for the chance up pattern is performed at once, and if the chance up pattern appears even once, the chance up pattern will be followed in the subsequent character display so that it will appear. By configuring, it becomes unnecessary to perform the lottery process for each appearing position, and the processing load can be reduced. Further, when a chance-up pattern is set, by following the chance-up pattern in the subsequent character display, the phenomenon of the occurrence of a downgraded expression in the character display can be eliminated in advance, and the player can enjoy the game. It is possible to prevent disappointment. In particular, as the number of character display locations where the chance-up pattern can be executed in the variable effect increases (for example, five locations or more, etc.), the batch lottery works more favorably, and the control load can be significantly reduced. It becomes possible.

On the other hand, when collectively setting the chance-up patterns for each of the character displays Se1 to Se4, for example, in a state in which the "discretion effect" is executed in the variable effect and the "loss display" appears, the standard phrase character display Se3 is the chance. It may be displayed in an up pattern (for example, "red"). In such a case, the player does not decide the variable effect as "loss display" as it is because the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in the chance up pattern, and the effect of "re-variation" is executed from now on. I predict that the "loss display" will change to the "jackpot display". However, contrary to the prediction, the variable performance is fixed as "failure display". There is a possibility that the distrust of the installed game hall will increase, and the game will be interrupted.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variable effect is determined by the "loss display", the chance up pattern (for example, "red") is displayed in the character display Se1 when the reach occurs or the character display Se2 during the reach. Even if it has been executed, the chance-up pattern is configured not to appear in the fixed form phrase character display Se3 displayed after the "end effect" of the variable element of "super reach". That is, in the variable rendering of the "failure display", the display color of the standard phrase character display Se3 is configured to be displayed in the normal pattern "white". In addition, when the variable effect is determined by the "big hit display", when the chance up pattern is executed in the character display Se1 when the reach occurs or the character display Se2 during the reach, the variable element of "super reach" In the standardized phrase character display Se3 displayed after "effect", the display color of the standardized phrase character display Se3 is displayed in the chance up pattern. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the performance contents, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and does not feel distrustful. Display control of the fixed phrase character display Se3 will be described later.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variable element of "super reach" ends and the variable effect is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the display state of the third symbol display device 81 is the initial state, that is, , the main display area Dm, the sub display area Ds, and the cockpit display area Db are displayed. By configuring in this way, it is easy for the player to recognize that the variable performance has been stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and when there is a pending (waiting) variable performance, the next variable performance is smoothly performed. It is possible to execute. Therefore, when the variable element of "super reach" is finished, the executed symbols and the suspended symbols in the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed, which is a natural expression in the flow of the execution process of the variable effect. does not feel uncomfortable.

As described above, as shown in FIGS. 5(a) to 5(d), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the display of the main display area Dm, the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db is performed at each timing in the variable effect. By enlarging, reducing, erasing, or redisplaying the state, the player can easily recognize the display content of high importance at each timing.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. The second symbol display device 83 has a variable display that alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display symbols (second symbols) each time the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67. It is something to do. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in the first embodiment), the first ball entrance 64 is activated for a predetermined period of time ( open).

The number of reserved balls in the second ball entrance 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed in the second symbol reservation lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holdings are provided, and arranged symmetrically above the third symbol display device 81 . Then, the number of reservations is displayed according to the number of the second symbol reservation lamps 84 lit.

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device 83 as in the first embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, as with the first ball entrance 64, the maximum number of held balls passing through the second ball entrance 67 is not limited to four times, but may be three times or less, or five times or more (for example, , 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be performed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is drawn by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 6), a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and a variable effect is executed by the third symbol display device 81. be. The first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

The first ball entrance 64 is provided with an electric accessory having two blades covering an opening through which a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 . The electric accessory opens and closes the two blades to open the first ball entrance 64 (enlarged state) or close it (reduced state). In normal times, the first ball entrance 64 is in a closed state in which the wings of the electric accessory are closed (the wings stand up), and the ball cannot enter the first ball entrance 64, or It is in a state where it is difficult to enter the ball.

On the other hand, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at the symbol "O", the electric accessory of the first ball entrance 64 is operated for a predetermined period of time. From the state in which the wings of the electric accessory stand up while the electric accessory is being operated. It will be in a state of being movable in a substantially V shape (inverted V shape), and the first ball entrance 64 will be in an open state. When the first ball entrance 64 is in the open state, the ball can enter the first ball entrance 64, or the ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 compared to the closed state. That is, as a result of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83, the ball stops at the symbol "○" and wins, and when the first ball entrance 64 is opened, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. It is possible to make a state in which many big winning lotteries can be performed by entering a ball.

A variable prize winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular special prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 6) results in a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big winning stop symbol will be displayed after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has passed. Along with lighting up, the third symbol display device 81 displays a stop symbol corresponding to the big win to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large open opening to be opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first pattern display device 37 is lit, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is opened. A special game state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. You may make it form.

Second entrances 67 are provided on the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, respectively. A through-hole (not shown) through which a ball passes is vertically provided in the second ball inlet 67 . When the ball launched into the game area passes through the second ball entrance 67, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main controller 110 Then, a winning lottery for the second symbol (also called normal symbol) is performed.

As a result of the lottery of the second pattern (normal pattern) performed for the ball passing through the second ball entrance 67, if it is determined to be a hit, the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 "○ ' symbol is stopped and displayed, the electric accessory of the first ball entrance 64 is activated. As a result, the wings of the electric accessory, which make it difficult for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, are moved from a substantially vertical upright state to a substantially V shape (inverted V shape) for a predetermined period of time. A state in which a ball can enter the first ball entrance 64 or a state in which a ball can easily enter compared to the closed state is established.

Affixing spaces K1 and K2 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. can be viewed through a small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings (entrance openings) 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out opening 66. FIG. The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has a micro-processing unit (Micro-Processing Unit, hereinafter abbreviated as "MPU") as a one-chip microcomputer responsible for each control, a port for contacting various devices, and various lottery A random number generator used for the system, a clock pulse generator circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. are mounted as necessary.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a read only memory (hereinafter abbreviated as "ROM") 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a control program stored in the ROM 202. A random access memory (hereinafter abbreviated as "RAM") 203, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data, etc. when executing a program, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, Various circuits such as a data transmission/reception circuit are built in.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main controller 110 controls the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, setting of dynamic display and variable effect in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result of the variable display in the second symbol display device 83. perform the main processing of The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Also, the ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a pending number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, and a variation pattern table 202e. Main controller 110 executes the main control described above by various counters stored in RAM 203 and various tables stored in ROM 202 .

Here, with reference to FIG. 7, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are set for the big hit lottery, the dynamic display setting of the first design display device 37, the setting of the variable effect of the third design display device 81, and the lottery of the display result of the variable display in the second design display device 83. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 . Further, in the description of various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will also be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 13. FIG.

For the setting of the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37, and the setting of the variable effect of the third pattern display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the A first winning type counter C2 used for selecting a stop type, a stopping pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting a variable effect effect mode, and a first initial value random number used for initial value setting of the first random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used.

Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 39). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 899"), and the maximum value (for example, "899" for a counter that can take a value of "0 to 899"). ) and then returns to “0”. In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1. The random number counter C1 is updated.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of "0 to 899", the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of "0 to 899". be. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 39).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start win), It is stored in one of the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. FIG. The jackpot random number value is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserve area is set by the jackpot random number table 202a. If it matches the set random number that will be a big hit, it will be determined as a big win.

Details of the jackpot random number table 202a will now be described with reference to FIG. 8(a). FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a is for the low probability state used when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the "normal game state" and the "shortened time state" (the period is not the "variable probability state"). , the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is divided into two types, one for the high probability state used in the case of the "probability fluctuation state (variable probability)" which is a high probability state in which the probability of winning a big win is higher than the low probability state. . The number of random numbers to be the big wins included in each of the low-probability state and the high-probability state is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter with a range of "0 to 899". In this first winning random number counter C1, the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that become a jackpot in the low probability state is three, and the value "7,307,582" is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. It is

On the other hand, the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that become a big hit in the case of a high probability state is 30. 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892" are stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. there is

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number value for the low probability state and the jackpot random number value for the high probability state stored in the jackpot random number table 202a are set so as not to overlap each other. is set. Here, if there is a value that becomes a jackpot random value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, so there is a possibility that the jackpot will be illegally awarded. On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high-probability state or a low-probability state), by changing the value of the random number that becomes a big win, Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number that becomes , fraud can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description is continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type when the jackpot is won, and is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (eg, "0 to 99"), and the maximum value (eg, "0 In the case of a counter that can take a value of up to 99”, it returns to “0” after reaching “99”). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). , stored in the same reservation area as the reservation area where the first winning random number counter C1 is stored among the first to fourth reservation areas provided in the reservation ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in one reservation area in the reservation ball storage area 203b is not a random number that becomes a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that becomes a loss, the variation pattern in the variation effect Also, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") is the one at the time of losing. On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number for a big win, the variation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect will be those at the time of the big win. . In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the big win are determined corresponding to the big win type indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of "0-99". The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM202. Here, with reference to FIG.8(b), the jackpot classification table 202b is demonstrated. FIG.8(b) is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot classification table 202b. As shown in FIG. 8B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot types and the values of the first hit type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As for the jackpot type, as described above, after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, the jackpot probability shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" in which the probability of the jackpot is high. "15R normal jackpot" in which the jackpot probability becomes a low probability state later, and shifts to "time reduction state" during 100 fluctuation times, and the maximum number of rounds shifts to "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot of 2 rounds. There is a "2R probability variable jackpot". In the following description, the 15-round jackpot of "15R probability variable jackpot" and "15R normal jackpot" may be described as "15R jackpot common".

In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with a possible value of the first hit type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 8 (b), the value "0 to 39" of the first per type counter C2 is associated with "15R probability variable jackpot", and the value of the first per type counter C2 with respect to "15R normal jackpot" The value "40-79" is associated, and the value "80-99" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the "2R probability variable jackpot".

When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is a value for a big win, the big winning type associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area is determined from the big winning type table 202b. . For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60", the jackpot type is " If "15R normal jackpot" is determined and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90", "2R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

Thus, in the first embodiment, in the case of a jackpot, the "15R variable jackpot" is selected with a probability of 40%, the "15R normal jackpot" is selected with a probability of 40%, and the "2R jackpot" is selected with a probability of 20%. "Variable jackpot" is selected. The probability that each jackpot type is selected when a jackpot is won is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b.

In addition, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 . In this case, a jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each game state is prepared, and in each jackpot type table 202b, the number of values of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters continues. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by "1" in sequence within a range of, for example, "0 to 99" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99").

In the first embodiment, depending on the pending number of suspended variable effects and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, the rough effect mode of the variable effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of the big hit and at the time of losing is determined. selected. Specifically, the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode or "non-reach (normal)" production mode in which the "reach display" does not occur, and the "normal reach" variable element as the "reach display" are executed. "Normal Reach" effect mode, "Super Reach" effect mode in which the variable element of "Normal Reach" is developed and the variable element of "Super Reach" is executed, and similarly, the variable element of "Normal Reach" is developed into "Special Reach". , and a ``special variation'' presentation mode that occurs when ``2R probability variable jackpot'' is selected.

Here, each effect mode will be described in detail. Among the production modes, the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode and the "non-reach (normal)" production mode are the display areas Dm1 to Dm3 (see FIG. 4A) of the main display area Dm. This is an effect mode in which the same third pattern does not stop in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3 and the "ready-to-win display" does not occur after the variable element "high-speed variation" is performed.

Here, the variable elements of the "high-speed variation" are the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4(a)) in the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 4) of the third symbol display device 81. A variable element in which the third pattern displayed in . In this "high-speed fluctuation", the third pattern is fluctuated so that the display contents of the third pattern cannot be clearly recognized by the player, and the stop result of the previously stop-displayed variable production is irregularly mixed (shuffled). is executed as

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "high speed variation" is performed, the variable element of "low speed variation" is performed except for a specific effect mode ("non-reach (shortening)" effect mode). It is configured to be The "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is the variable effect performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4(a)). It refers to a variable element that scrolls the third pattern at a low speed at a possible speed. In this "low-speed fluctuation" variable element, the third symbols are displayed in the order of left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 4(a)) while making the player recognize the display contents of the third symbol. Stop displaying the pattern. When the same third symbol stops in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3, it is considered that the "ready-to-win display" occurs and develops into a variable element of "normal reach", while in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3. When the different third symbol stops, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, and the variable effect is terminated (except for the case where it develops into a "pseudo run" described later).

Therefore, in the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode, the "low-speed variation" variation element is performed after the "high-speed variation" variation element is performed. ) are stopped in order, and one variation effect is completed. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (shortening)" effect mode, after the "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is not performed, and after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is completed, each symbol row Z1 to Z3 stops at the same time, and the 1 variable effect ends.

Among the production modes, the "normal reach" production mode is a variable production of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4(a)) in the main display area Dm. Immediately after the third symbol stops, the "normal reach" variable element is executed, and other "reach display", that is, the "reach display" that does not develop into the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" This is one of the production modes. In this "normal reach" variable element, as described above, the third symbols stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 (left display area Dm1) and right symbol row Z3 (right display area Dm3) of the main display area Dm are Displayed larger than usual. Further, the third symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 (middle display area Dm2) are scrolled downward in the vertical direction of the display screen at a low speed, and displayed in a state in which the player can visually recognize the third symbols in the middle display area Dm2. . Furthermore, in this "normal reach" variable, the sub-display area Ds is erased as the main display area Dm is enlarged (see FIG. 5(b)).

Among the presentation modes, the "super reach" presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of "reach display" in which the variable element of "super reach" is developed from the variable element of "normal reach". In this "super reach" production mode, during execution of the "super reach" variable element, the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 4A) is erased from the display state of the "normal reach" variable element, and this " The reach formation pattern of the third pattern which was the cause of occurrence of "reach display" is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm changes from the variable element of "normal reach", and a plurality of character patterns are made to appear to perform "battle effect (kickboxing in the first embodiment)" (Fig. 5 ( c) see).

In the first embodiment, based on the result (win/lose) of the "battle effect", it is configured to suggest the suitability of the variable effect. Specifically, for example, in the above-mentioned "battle effect", when the character pattern on the player's side wins over the character pattern on the enemy's side, the variable effect is suggested to be a "big win display", When the character pattern on the side loses to the character pattern on the enemy side, it is configured to suggest that the variable effect becomes "losing display".

Among the presentation modes, the "special reach" presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of "reach display" in which the variable element of "special reach" is developed from the variable element of "normal reach". In this "special reach" production mode, while the "special reach" variable element is being executed, the display state of the "normal reach" variable element changes from the display state of the "normal reach" variable element to the cockpit display area Db (Fig. 4 (a)) is erased, and the reach forming pattern of the third pattern which was the cause of occurrence of this "reach display" is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 4(a)) changes from the variable element of "normal reach", and a plurality of characters different from the variable element of "super reach" appear to create a "competition effect". (In the first embodiment, an automobile race)" is performed (not shown).

In the first embodiment, based on the result (win/lose) of the "competition effect", it is configured to suggest the propriety of the variable effect. Specifically, for example, in the above-mentioned "competition effect", when the character pattern on the player's side wins over the character pattern on the enemy's side, the variable effect is suggested to be "big win display". When the character pattern on the side loses to the character pattern on the enemy side, it is configured to suggest that the variable effect becomes "losing display".

Among the performance modes, the "special variation" performance mode is a performance mode that is executed without omission when the "2R probability variable jackpot" is won. In this "special variation" presentation mode, the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are erased, and the entire main display area Dm changes from the normal background display, suggesting that the "2R probability variable jackpot" will occur. A movie effect is displayed.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment). It is stored in the same reservation area as the reservation area in which the first hit random number counter C1 is stored among the first to fourth reservation areas provided in the reservation ball storage area 203b.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is referred to according to whether the variable performance is appropriate, the current game state, and the number of variable performances currently pending (the number of pending balls). The stop pattern table 202d is configured differently. That is, the stop pattern table 202d is provided in a plurality of types, and is configured to be selected according to the number of variable effects during standby (the number of pending balls) and the like. In the first embodiment, when determining the detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, first, based on the reservation number table 202c provided in the ROM 202, the propriety of the variation effect, the current game state, and the current variation effect (the number of held balls) is selected. Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a rough effect mode of the variable effect is selected. Thereafter, a detailed variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the variable performance is determined based on the selected performance mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1, which will be described later.

The plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of random numbers of the stop pattern selection counter C3 for selecting the effect mode differs for each stop pattern table 202d. The reason why a plurality of stop pattern tables 202d are prepared is to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the variable effect according to the suitability of the variable effect, the game state and the number of reserved balls. That is, (1) whether a big hit occurs in the acquired third symbol variation effect, or (2) the current game state of the pachinko machine 10 is "probability change state", "time reduction state" or "normal game state". and (3) the number of reserved balls of the variable effect that are reserved, to change the selection ratio of the effect mode.

The first reason for this is to change the degree of expectation for a big win for each effect mode. That is, the ratio of selecting the "non-reach" production mode, the "normal reach" production mode, the "super reach" production mode, and the "special reach" production mode in the case of winning the big winning lottery and the case of losing the big winning lottery. are made different, the degree of expectation for a big win is changed for each performance mode. Specifically, for example, when winning the jackpot lottery, the ``super reach'' performance mode or the ``special reach'' performance mode is configured to be easily selected, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the ``non-reach'' performance is configured. The mode and the "normal reach" presentation mode are configured to be easily selected. By configuring in this way, the ``super reach'' performance mode and the ``special reach'' performance mode can be a performance mode that makes it easy to hit a big hit, and the ``normal reach'' performance mode and the ``non-reach'' performance mode are less likely to hit a big hit. A performance or a performance without a big win can be provided, and the degree of expectation for a big win can be differentiated for each performance mode. Therefore, when a performance that makes it easy to win a big win appears in the variable performance, it is suggested to the player that the possibility of a big win is high while the performance that makes it easy to win a big win is being performed, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game. there is

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the acquired lottery result is a big win, the stop pattern table 202d (for example, Based on the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 11(a)), it is configured to select the effect mode of the variable effect. On the other hand, when the acquired lottery result is a loss, it is difficult to select an effect that makes it easy to win a big win, and the stop pattern table 202d (for example, the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2 (see FIG. 10) that makes it easy to select an effect that makes it difficult to win a big win). (a) or see FIG. 10(b))). As a result, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third symbol in the variable performance, if the performance that makes it easy to win a big win is executed, the performance that makes it easy to win a big win is executed in the variable performance, and the performance that makes it difficult to win a big win is executed. In the case of such a change, the variation performance makes it difficult for the big win to occur, and by providing a difference in the expected value of the big win for each performance mode, the amusement of the game can be enhanced during the execution of the variation performance.

The second reason is to reduce as much as possible the number of useless balls (so-called no lottery due to overflow winning) based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 in the state where the number of standby times of the variable effect has reached the upper limit. be. Specifically, the number of standby times of the variable effect is set to a maximum of 4 times, and the variable output is executed at least for a certain period of time. In a game state in which balls are likely to enter the 1-ball entrance 64, it is easy to reach the maximum number of reserved balls in the third symbol. In these game states, if a variable effect with a long variable time is selected, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 occurs frequently when the maximum number of balls held in the third symbol is reached, and the first ball entering is made. Even though the ball enters the mouth 64, the lottery opportunity for the third symbol cannot be obtained. In addition, even in the "normal game state", when the maximum number of reserved balls of the third pattern is reached, if a variable performance with a long fluctuation time is selected, the number of reserved balls of the third symbol is maintained during the execution of the variable performance. is not digested, even if a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during that time, the lottery opportunity for the third symbol cannot be acquired. In such a state, the player judges that the game value cannot be obtained even if the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64, and the variable effect is terminated and the number of reserved balls can be acquired again. The shooting of the balls is stopped until the game is interrupted. When the game is interrupted, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered, which affects the management of the game parlor.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in a game state in which the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol is easily reached, or in the number of reserved balls close to (or matching) the maximum number of reserved balls, the fluctuation time is relatively short. Based on a stop pattern table 202d (for example, a B table 202d2 (see FIG. 10B)) that is likely to be selected, the effect mode of the variable effect is selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the first ball entrance 64 in the state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol has been reached.

Furthermore, the third reason is that the execution time is set long to delay the end of the variable performance, thereby maintaining the state in which the variable performance is being executed for a long time. Specifically, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is small (no), if the ball is not newly entered into the first ball entrance 64 within the variable time of the variable effect being executed, the next variable effect cannot be started, and the third symbol display device 81 must display a demonstration screen or the like. When the third symbol display device 81 does not perform a variable effect in spite of the fact that the player is playing the game by shooting the ball, the player can obtain the interest related to the lottery for the big win desired by the player. Instead, they lose interest in the game. Further, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 is one in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 because the third symbol display device 81 does not perform a variable effect, and the player cannot obtain a game value. There is a possibility that the player may stop playing the pachinko machine 10 by judging that.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d (for example, the A table 202d1 (see FIG. 10A)) in which a relatively long variation time is likely to be selected when the number of pending balls in the variation effect is small. ), the effect mode of the variable effect is selected. As a result, a situation in which the third pattern display device 81 is not subjected to the variable performance can be made difficult to occur, and the execution state of the variable performance in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained for a long time.

Here, the details of the pending number table 202c and the stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 11. FIG. FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing the pending number table 202c. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when performing a variation effect based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the number of reservations table 202c is referred to, and the variation effect one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d4 is selected based on the validity of the game, the game state at that point of time, and the number of suspensions of the variable effect at that point of time. Then, based on one of the selected stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d4 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a rough effect mode of the variable effect is determined.

Specifically, as shown in the pending number table 202c in FIG. At the time of extracting a loss in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" and when the number of held balls is "1", the A table 202d1 (see FIG. 10A) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected. . In addition, when extracting a loss in the "normal game state" and the number of retained balls is "4", or when extracting a loss in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" and the number of retained balls is " In the case of "two or three" or "four", the B table 202d2 (see FIG. 10(b)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected. Furthermore, when extracting the "15R jackpot ("15R probability variable jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot"), regardless of the game state or the number of held balls, the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d (Fig. 11(a) ) is selected. Also, when extracting the "2R probability variable jackpot", the D table 202d4 (see FIG. 11(b)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the game state or the number of held balls.

That is, when one of the jackpots is won, the stop pattern table 202d (C table 202d3 or D table 202d4) is selected based only on the type of jackpot regardless of the number of pending balls or the game state at that time, Only when the jackpot is not won (that is, at the time of losing), the stop pattern table 202d (A table 202d1 or B table 202d2) is selected based on the number of reserved balls and the game state at that time.

It should be noted that the stop pattern table 202d may be configured to differ according to the number of reserved balls even when a jackpot is won. For example, when a big hit is won and the number of pending balls is large, a stop pattern table 202d in which a relatively short variation pattern is likely to be selected (for example, a "super reach" effect mode or " It may be configured to allow selection of the "Special Reach" effect mode, etc.). In this case, in each performance mode in which ``ready-to-reach display'' is executed, a performance mode in which only the time of the variable element part of ``high-speed fluctuation'' is changed from 7 seconds to 3 seconds is selected. By configuring in this way, for example, when the variation effect is started in a state where the maximum number of held balls is 4 times, even if the variable element of "high-speed variation" is performed in 3 seconds, the 3 seconds " When the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" ends (when it is recognized as "high-speed fluctuation" for 3 seconds), "reach display" may occur in the variable effect, and the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" for 3 seconds Even when is performed, it can be configured to execute the effect mode in which the "reach display" other than the "non-reach (shortened)" is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it impossible to know whether the variable performance will result in a big win or a loss at the time of execution of the variable element of "high-speed variation" for 3 seconds.

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", when the jackpot is not won and the number of held balls is small, a stop pattern table 202d (for example, A table) in which a relatively long fluctuation pattern is likely to be selected 202d1) may be selected. By configuring in this way, even in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the third pattern display device 81 is executing the fluctuation effect, and the third pattern display device 81 A situation in which the variable performance is not performed can be made difficult to occur, and the execution state of the variable performance in the third pattern display device 81 can be maintained for a long time.

Next, each stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a stop pattern table 202d that can be selected at the time of failure. FIG. 10(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of an A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d. b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of the big win, and FIG. 11(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, FIG. 11B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), in the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is set to "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "95" to " 97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98" and "99". In addition, in the A table 202d1, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (shortened)" rendering mode, and the "non-reach (shortened)" rendering mode is set so as not to be selected. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10B, in the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (shortening)" effect mode is "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98, 99". In the C table 202d3, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (normal)" rendering mode, and the "non-reach (normal)" rendering mode is set so as not to be selected. ing.

That is, in the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is 75%, the "normal reach" effect mode is 20%, the "super reach" effect mode is 3%, and the "special reach" effect mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio. In addition, in the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is 75%, the "normal reach" effect mode is 20%, the "super reach" effect mode is 3%, and the "special reach" effect mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio. The selection ratios of the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode and the "special reach" effect mode are set to be the same for the A table 202d1 and the B table 202d2.

Therefore, on the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is selected, and on the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode. is configured as Therefore, it can be said that the A table 202d1 tends to have a comparatively longer variation time of the selected variation effect than the B table 202d2. In other words, it can be said that the B table 202d2 tends to shorten the variation time of the selected variation effect as compared with the A table 202d1.

In this way, when a losing lottery result is extracted, the production mode of the variable production is selected based on the number of pending balls of the variable production being held. For example, when the number of pending balls in the variable performance is large, it is made easy to select a "non-reach (shortened)" performance mode with a short variable performance time. Thus, when the number of pending balls of the variable performance is large, the execution time of the variable performance to be executed is shortened and the number of times of execution of the variable performance is increased, so that the execution efficiency of the variable performance can be improved.

In addition, for example, when the number of suspended balls in the variable effect is small, the variable effect time is longer than in the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode in order to secure the ball entry time to the first ball entrance 64. To make it easier to select a "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode. As a result, it is possible to perform the "non-reach (normal)" variable effect time longer than when the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected, so the ball entry time to the first ball entrance 64 is performed. can be easily ensured, and by increasing the possibility that a new start prize will be generated during the execution time of the variable performance in the third pattern display device 81, the situation in which the variable performance is executed can be maintained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11(a), in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "0" to "4". The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "5" to "39", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "40" to " 99”. In the C table 202d3, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "special variation" rendering mode, and the "special variation" rendering mode is set not to be selected. Also, since the C table 202d3 is the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of the big win, the "non-reach" effect mode is not selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11(b), in the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the "special variation" effect mode ("0" to "99"). , and other "reach display" are not assigned the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Therefore, the stop type selected when winning the "2R probability variable jackpot" is set to always be the "special variation" effect mode. Since the D table 202d4 is the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of the big win, the "non-reach" effect mode is not selected.

That is, in the C table 202d3, the selection ratio is set to 5% for the "normal reach" effect mode, 35% for the "super reach" effect mode, and 60% for the "special reach" effect mode. Further, in the D-table 202d4, the "special variation" rendering mode is set to have a selection rate of 100%.

Therefore, in the variation production at the time of winning the jackpot, the selection ratio is high in the order of “special reach” production mode > “super reach” production mode > “normal reach” production mode, and in the fluctuation production at the time of losing, “normal reach” production mode> The selection ratio is set to increase in the order of "super reach" effect mode > "special reach" effect mode. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win at the time of appearance of each "ready-to-win display" is high in the order of the "special ready-to-win" production mode>"super ready-to-win" production mode>"normal reach" production mode. configured to be Thus, the degree of expectation for the big win can be shown to the player by the performance mode of the variable performance, and the player can enjoy the exhilaration of the big win according to the performance mode of the executed variable performance.

In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d selected based on the number of held balls of the variable effect is configured to be different in the selection of the effect mode in the variable effect of losing. The determination of the variable performance based on the entry of the ball into the ball 64 and the determination of the variable performance based on the start of the variable performance based on the entry are configured so that substantially the same performance mode is selected. . Specifically, in the case of a losing variable performance, either the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2 is selected based on the number of pending balls in the variable performance, but the A table 202d1 and In the B table 202d2, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 allocated to the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode or the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is the same, and is allocated to other effect modes. The values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 are also set to be the same.

That is, the only difference is whether the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode is selected or the "non-reach (normal)" production mode is selected based on the number of balls held in the variable production. The same presentation mode is selected. Therefore, the effect mode selected at the time of starting winning and the effect mode selected at the time of start of fluctuation are substantially essentially the same effect mode is selected. As a result, even if a pre-reading notice such as "holding change notice" is performed based on the presentation mode selected at the time of starting winning, in the variable effect that is the target of the pre-reading notice, the contents of the pre-reading notice On the other hand, it is possible to execute an effect that does not cause any discrepancies.

From the above, the state in which the game is performed by determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed based on the propriety of the variable effect, the game state at that time, and the number of balls held in the variable effect at that time By shortening the execution time of the variable performance and increasing the number of times of execution of the variable performance based on, it is possible to select a performance mode that enhances the execution efficiency of the variable performance.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description continues. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by "1" in order within the range of "0 to 199" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "199"). The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 39).

The variation type counter CS1 is used for determining the detailed variation pattern of the variation effect. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, in the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3, by the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM202, detailed Determining fluctuation patterns. Determination of the variation pattern is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the variation effect. The voice ramp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine pattern of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 A variation mode is determined, and the presence or absence of execution of the notice performance and the execution mode of the notice performance are determined.

In this way, MPU 201 of main controller 110 selects a rough variation pattern of the variation effect and determines only the variation time. By configuring in this way, in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, since it is not necessary to perform control such as detailed notice lottery necessary for executing the variable performance, the processing of the MPU 201 regarding the variable performance can be reduced. can. In addition, the main controller 110 does not need to prepare commands for all variation patterns of the variation effect, and the ROM capacity of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, in the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, based on the variation time (rough variation pattern) determined by the main control device 110, by determining the detailed variation pattern in the variation performance, the variation performance You can increase your freedom of choice. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the game state changes from moment to moment, it is possible to select or change the effect content of the variable effect at any time corresponding to the change, and to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. can.

Here, the details of the variation pattern table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, as the variation pattern table 202e, a large winning variation pattern table 202e1 used at the time of a big win and a losing variation pattern table 202e2 used at the time of losing are prepared. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the big-hit variation pattern table 202e1 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG.

The big hit variation pattern table 202e1 is divided into groups based on the selected effect mode. Specifically, as the effect mode, "E5: normal reach" referred when the "normal reach" effect mode is determined, and "E6: super reach" referred when the "super reach" effect mode is determined for "reach", for "E7: special reach" that is referred to when the "special reach" production mode is determined, and "E8: special variation" that is referred to when the "special variation" performance mode is determined It is divided into for and for. A possible value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is a value (big winning random number value) that becomes a big winning, the big winning type corresponding to the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area and the start winning point thereof. The stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state in , and the number of balls held at the time of starting winning, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reservation area and the stop pattern table 202d Based on this, the production mode is selected. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the big winning variation pattern table 202e1 is determined based on the effect mode. In the group (group) of the big hit variation pattern table 202e1, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reservation area is a provisional variation in the variation performance reserved in the reservation area. determined as a pattern.

In the big hit variation pattern table 202e1, "E5: normal reach" includes "normal reach only" with an overall variation time of 15 seconds, "pseudo-gase + normal reach" with an overall variation time of 25 seconds, and the overall variation time is 35 seconds of "Pseudo Reach 1 + Normal Reach", 25 seconds of total fluctuation time of "Normal Reach + Revariation", and 35 seconds of total fluctuation time of "Pseudo Gase + Normal Reach + Revariation", and the total variation Six variation patterns of "pseudo run 1 + normal reach + re-fluctuation" with a duration of 45 seconds are selectably prepared, and each variation pattern is associated with a possible value of the variation type counter CS1.

Here, each variable element constituting the variation pattern will be described. A variable element constitutes a part of one variable effect, and one variable effect is configured by combining each variable element. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the variable elements, the variable element of "high-speed variation", the variable element of "low-speed variation", the variable element of "pseudo-gase", the variable element of "pseudo-run 1", the variable element of "pseudo-run 2" variable element, "normal reach" variable element, "super reach" variable element, "special reach" variable element, "re-variable" variable element, and "movie" variable element are provided.

The "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is a variable element that scrolls and fluctuates at high speed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the content of the third symbol. The variable element of this "high-speed fluctuation" is performed for 3 seconds at the beginning of the variable production when the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode is selected (see FIG. 14). When the effect mode of the variable element (for example, "non-reach (normal)") is selected, it is performed for 7 seconds at the beginning of the variable effect (see FIG. 14). It should be noted that when the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element ends, the later-described "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is started (executed), or the variable effect ends as it is.

The variable element of "low-speed variation" is a variation that is started after the variable element of "high-speed variation" is executed for 7 seconds, and the third pattern is scrolled to make it visible and whether or not "ready-to-win display" is generated. is an element. This "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is not executed when the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode is selected, and production modes other than the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode (for example, "non-reach (normal )” production mode) is selected, it is performed for 3 seconds after the variable element of “high-speed variation”. That is, in the "non-reach (shortening)" production mode, after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Dm are displayed without passing through the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element. It is configured to stop rapidly (so-called bitter stop). In addition, when the variable element of this "low-speed fluctuation" ends, whether the variable element of "pseudo-gase" described later is started (executed) or the variable element of "normal reach" described later is started (executed) Alternatively, it is configured such that the variable production is terminated as it is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is a variation pattern including a "high-speed variation" variation element for 7 seconds and a "low-speed variation" variation element for 3 seconds. A variable performance is configured. In addition, in the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode, the variable effect is composed of a variation pattern of only the variable elements of "high-speed variation" for 3 seconds.

The variable elements of "pseudo-gase" are the variable elements of "pseudo-continued 1" or the variable elements of "pseudo-continued 2" (hereinafter referred to as the variable elements of "pseudo-continued 1" and the variable elements of "pseudo-continued 2") may be collectively referred to as ““pseudo-run” variable element”), but it is a variable element that does not generate the “pseudo-run” variable element.

A "pseudo-continuous" variable element is a variable element in which the start of a variable performance occurs multiple times (one or more pseudo-stops) in one variable performance. Specifically, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the third symbol display device 81, the variable element of "high speed variation" is started and switched to the variable element of "low speed variation", and then all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 A unit performance that the variable performance is terminated and a predetermined stop result (for example, a pseudo consecutive chance number “677”) is displayed is a variable element that is performed a plurality of times during one variable performance. This "pseudo-continuous" variable element is obtained by stopping the predetermined stop result at least once after the "low-speed variable" variable element, and the "high-speed variable" variable element starts again from the stop result, An effect is executed as if the variable effect was started once more.

In the "pseudo fake" variable element, an effect as to whether or not a predetermined stop result appears after the execution of the "low-speed variation" variable element (for example, the pattern forming the predetermined stop result is the effective line L1 (Fig. (See 4(a)) Effect of whether or not to stop by fluctuating back and forth above (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo-fluctuation") is performed, and the above-mentioned predetermined stop result does not appear in the "pseudo-fluctuation", It is a variable element that does not develop to the variable element of "pseudo-ren". Therefore, after the "pseudo fake" variable element is completed, the "normal reach" variable element develops, or a "losing display" appears (for example, "687" ), and the variable production ends as it is.

In the "pseudo continuation 1" variable element, a predetermined stop result appears after the "pseudo variation" is executed after the "low speed variation" variable element, and the second "high speed variation" variable element is executed again, In the subsequent second "pseudo-fluctuation", the predetermined stopping result does not appear again, and the fluctuation element develops into a "normal reach" fluctuation element. That is, the variable element of "pseudo-run 1" is a pseudo-variable stop (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo-stop") in which the pseudo-run chance is displayed once, and after that, a predetermined stop result is obtained at the pseudo-stop. appears and is the variable that initiates the "fast-moving" variable again. Therefore, after the variable element of "Pseudo Reach 1" ends, the variable element of "Normal Reach" always develops at least.

In the "pseudo-continuous 2" variable element, a predetermined stop result appears after the "pseudo-variation" is executed after the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element, and the second "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is executed again. A predetermined stop result appears again in the second "pseudo-variation", the variable element of the third "high-speed change" is executed, and then the variable element develops into the "normal reach" variable element. That is, "pseudo run 2" is a variable element in which a total of two pseudo-stops are performed, a predetermined stop result appears at each pseudo-stop, and the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is started again. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable element of "pseudo-run 2" is set to the maximum number of times of pseudo-variation among the variable elements of "pseudo-run". Therefore, after the variable element of "Pseudo Reach 1" ends, the variable element of "Normal Reach" always develops.

Therefore, the "pseudo fake" variable element is an effect in which the pseudo consecutive chances do not stop after the first "low-speed variation" variable element, and is performed for a total of 10 seconds. The "pseudo-run 1" variation element stops after the first "slow variation" variation element, and then the "pseudo-variation" is performed. It is an effect in which a reach formation pattern appears without a hitch, and is performed for a total of 20 seconds. The "pseudo-continuous 2" variable element stops after the first "low-speed fluctuation" variable element, and then the first "pseudo-variable" is performed, and the first " Pseudo-variation" stops the pseudo consecutive chances again, and after that, the "pseudo-variation" is performed again and the ready-to-win pattern appears, which is performed for a total of 30 seconds (see FIG. 14).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of the "pseudo fake", a pattern in which a predetermined stop result is not displayed and a "failure display" is displayed as it is, and a predetermined stop There is prepared a pattern in which the reach formation pattern is stopped and a variable element of "normal reach" occurs although the result is not shown. In addition, after the execution of the variable element of "pseudo-continuation 1", similar to the variable element of "pseudo-gase", the pattern that does not show the predetermined stop result and displays the "loss display" as it is, and the predetermined stop result There is also a pattern in which the ready-to-win pattern does not appear, but the ready-to-win pattern stops and a variable element of "normal reach" occurs. Furthermore, after execution of the variable element of "pseudo-run 2", a pattern is prepared in which the "failure display" does not appear directly, but the ready-to-win pattern stops and "normal reach" occurs.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable element of "Pseudo-Ren 2" is configured to be selected only when the "Super Reach" production mode or the "Special Reach" production mode is selected. ing. Therefore, if the variable element of "pseudo-ren 2" is performed, it is confirmed that the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" will occur after that via the variable element of "normal reach" do.

It should be noted that a variable element of "pseudo-run" may be provided in which the number of pseudo-stops (number of times of pseudo-run chance stops) is 3 or more. Further, it may be configured such that a predetermined stop result appears in the variable element of "low-speed variation" without executing "pseudo-variation" to develop an effect related to the variable element of "pseudo-run".

The variable element of "normal reach" is the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation", the variable element of "pseudo-gase", the variable element of "pseudo-continuous 1" or the variable element of "pseudo-continuous 2" (hereinafter referred to as "low-speed fluctuation" Variable elements, "pseudo-gase" variable elements, "pseudo-continuous 1" variable elements or "pseudo-continuous 2" variable elements are collectively referred to as "low-speed fluctuations, etc." This is a variable element for showing whether or not a big hit will occur as a result of the variation of the middle symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win formation symbols are stopped and displayed in the row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3. This "normal reach" variable element is performed for 10 seconds after the variable element such as "low speed variation" (see FIG. 14).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of "normal reach", the pattern of directly displaying the "loss display", the pattern of directly displaying the "jackpot display", and the "super reach" A pattern that develops into a variable element, a pattern that develops into a "special reach" variable element, and a pattern that once displays a temporary "loss display" and then executes a "re-fluctuation" variable element are prepared. It is

The "super reach" variable element is developed and executed when the "loss display" does not stop in the "normal reach" variable element and the middle symbol row Z2 continues to change, and the "battle" is executed in the main display area Dm. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur by performing "performance". This "Super Reach" variable is performed 10 seconds after the "Normal Reach" variable is performed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of "super reach", a pattern that directly displays the "loss display", a pattern that directly displays the "jackpot display", and a temporary and a pattern in which the variable element of "re-variation" is executed after the "missing display" appears.

The "special reach" variable element is developed and executed when the "loss display" does not stop in the "normal reach" variable element and the middle symbol row Z2 continues to change, and the "competition" in the main display area Dm. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur by performing "performance". This "Special Reach" variable is performed for 20 seconds after the "Normal Reach" variable is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of "special reach", a pattern that directly displays the "loss display", a pattern that directly displays the "jackpot display", and a temporary A pattern of "re-fluctuation" after the "failure display" appears is prepared.

In addition, it is configured to develop into a variable element of "super reach" or a variable element of "special reach" after executing the variable element of "normal reach", but instead of this configuration, reach formation after "low speed change" It may be configured such that when the symbols stop, the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" suddenly develops without going through the variable element of "normal reach". Further, the variable element of "special reach" may be performed after the variable element of "super reach" is executed.

The variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that develops and is executed after the "losing display" once appears in any of the "ready-to-win display", and the "jackpot display" appears. The variable element of this "re-variation" is performed for 10 seconds after any "reach indication".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, only patterns in which "big win display" appears after execution of the variable element of "re-variation" are prepared. That is, when the "re-variation" is executed, the "big win display" always appears after that.

The variable element of the "movie" is performed after the "low-speed variation" is executed when the "2R probability variable jackpot" is won, and is a variable element that causes the "jackpot display" corresponding to the "2R probability variable jackpot" to appear. . This "movie" variable element is performed for 40 seconds after the "low speed variation", and an effect is executed in which a specific character pattern (for example, a premier character) speaks a predetermined message in the entire main display area Dm (not shown). figure).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after execution of the variable element of the "movie", only the pattern in which the "jackpot display" corresponding to the "2R probability variable jackpot" appears is prepared. That is, when the "movie" is executed, the "jackpot display" of the "2R probability variable jackpot" always appears after that.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description continues. In the example shown in FIG. 12, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "normal reach only (01H)", "pseudo fake + normal reach ( 02H)” for “10-19”, “20-59” for “pseudo ream 1 + normal reach (03H)”, “60-79” for “normal reach + revariation (04H)”, “pseudo It is "80-99" for "Gase + normal reach + re-fluctuation (05H)", and "100-199" for "pseudo ream 1 + normal reach + re-fluctuation (06H)".

That is, in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of the big hit, the variation pattern of "normal reach only (01H)" is 5%, the variation pattern of "pseudo gusset + normal reach (02H)" is 5%, and "pseudo consecutive 1 + normal reach (03H)". ” variation pattern is 20%, “normal reach + re-fluctuation (04H)” variation pattern is 10%, “pseudo-gase + normal reach + re-fluctuation (05H)” variation pattern is 10%, “pseudo continuous 1 + normal reach + re- It is set so that the variation pattern of "Variation (06H)" is selected at a rate of 50%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" effect mode selected at the time of the big hit, it is easy to select the variation pattern including the "re-variation" variable element (70% of the total), especially "pseudo ream 1 + normal reach + re-variation ( 06H)” is likely to be selected (50% of the total). However, by configuring it so that ``normal reach only (01H)'' and ``pseudo fake + normal reach (02H)'' that do not include the variable element of ``re-fluctuation'' are also selected, a game that can expect a big hit from any variation pattern. can provide sexuality.

In the big hit variation pattern table 202e1, "E6: Super Reach" includes "Super Reach Only (01H)" with a total variation time of 25 seconds and "Pseudo Gusse + Super Reach (01H)" with a total variation time of 35 seconds. 02H)", "Pseudo-Ren 1 + Super Reach (03H)" with a total fluctuation time of 45 seconds, "Pseudo-Ren 2 + Super Reach (04H)" with a total fluctuation time of 55 seconds, and the total fluctuation time 35 seconds of "super reach + re-fluctuation (05H)", 45 seconds of "pseudo gasse + super reach + re-fluctuation (06H)" of 45 seconds of total fluctuation time, and "pseudo-ren 1 +" of 55 seconds of total fluctuation time Eight variation patterns are selectably prepared, "Super Reach + re-fluctuation (07H)" and "Pseudo Reach 2 + Super Reach + Re-fluctuation (08H)" with a total fluctuation time of 65 seconds, and for each variation pattern are associated with possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In the example shown in FIG. 12, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E6: Super reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "Super reach only (01H)", "Pseudo fake + "10-19" for "Super Reach (02H)", "20-59" for "Pseudo-Ren 1 + Super Reach (03H)", "60- for "Pseudo-Ren 2 + Super Reach (04H)" 99”, “100 to 119” for “Super Reach + Revariation (05H)”, “120 to 139” for “Pseudo Gase + Super Reach + Revariation (06H)”, “Pseudo Reach 1 + Super Reach + re-fluctuation (07H)” is “140-169”, and “pseudo-ren 2 + super reach + re-fluctuation (08H)” is “170-199”.

That is, in the "super reach" production mode at the time of the big hit, the variation pattern of "super reach only (01H)" is 5%, the variation pattern of "pseudo-gase + super reach (02H)" is 5%, and the variation pattern of "pseudo-ream 1 + super reach" is 5%. Reach (03H)” variation pattern is 20%, “Pseudo-Ren 2 + Super Reach (04H)” variation pattern is 20%, “Super Reach + re-variation (05H)” variation pattern is 10%, “Pseudo Gase + Super reach + re-fluctuation (06H)" fluctuation pattern is 10%, "Pseudo-ren 1 + super reach + re-fluctuation (07H)" fluctuation pattern is 15%, "Pseudo-ren 2 + super reach + re-fluctuation (08H)" The variation pattern is set to be selected at a rate of 15%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" production mode selected at the time of the big hit, the variation pattern including the "re-variation" variation element and the variation pattern not including the "re-variation" variation element are equally selected (50% of each other). It has become so. In addition, variation patterns including the variation elements of “pseudo-run 2” are more likely to be selected (35%). However, by configuring it so that "super reach only (01H)" and "pseudo gase + super reach (02H)" that do not include the variable elements of "re-variation" and the variable elements of "pseudo-ren 2" are also selected , can provide a game property in which a big win can be expected from any variation pattern.

In the big hit variation pattern table 202e1, "E7: Special reach" includes "Special reach only (01H)" with an overall variation time of 35 seconds and "Pseudo-gase + special reach (01H)" with an overall variation time of 45 seconds. 02H)", "Pseudo-Ren 1 + Special Reach (03H)" with a total fluctuation time of 55 seconds, "Pseudo-Ren 2 + Special Reach (04H)" with a total fluctuation time of 65 seconds, and the total fluctuation time 45 seconds of "special reach + re-fluctuation (05H)", 55 seconds of "pseudo gasse + special reach + re-fluctuation (06H)" of 55 seconds of total fluctuation time, and "pseudo-ren 1 +" of 65 seconds of total fluctuation time Eight variation patterns are selectably prepared, "Special Reach + re-fluctuation (07H)" and "Pseudo Reach 2 + Special Reach + Re-fluctuation (08H)" with a total fluctuation time of 75 seconds, and for each variation pattern are associated with possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In the example shown in FIG. 12, the correspondence between the variation pattern in "E7: Special reach" and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "Special reach only (01H)", "Pseudo fake + "10-19" for "Special Reach (02H)", "20-39" for "Pseudo-Ren 1 + Special Reach (03H)", "40-" for "Pseudo-Ren 2 + Special Reach (04H)" 99", "100 to 109" against "Special Reach + Revariation (05H)", "110 to 119" against "Pseudo Gase + Special Reach + Revariation (06H)", "Pseudo Reach 1 + Special Reach + re-fluctuation (07H)” is “120-139”, and “pseudo-ren 2 + special reach + re-fluctuation (08H)” is “140-199”.

That is, in the "special reach" production mode at the time of the big hit, the variation pattern of "only special reach (01H)" is 5%, the variation pattern of "pseudo gasse + special reach (02H)" is 5%, and the variation pattern of "pseudo consecutive 1 + special Reach (03H)” variation pattern is 10%, “Pseudo-Ren 2 + Special Reach (04H)” variation pattern is 30%, “Special Reach + re-variation (05H)” variation pattern is 5%, “Pseudo Gase + The variation pattern of "Special reach + re-fluctuation (06H)" is 5%, the variation pattern of "Pseudo-ren 1 + special reach + re-fluctuation (07H)" is 10%, "Pseudo-ren 2 + special reach + re-fluctuation (08H)" The variation pattern is set to be selected at a rate of 30%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" production mode selected at the time of the big hit, the variation pattern including the "re-variation" variation element and the variation pattern not including the "re-variation" variation element are equally selected (50% of each other). It has become so. In addition, the variation pattern including the variation element of "pseudo-run 2" is likely to be selected (60%). However, by configuring it so that "special reach only (01H)" and "pseudo gase + special reach (02H)" that do not include the variable elements of "revariation" and the variable elements of "pseudo-ren 2" are also selected , can provide a game property in which a big win can be expected from any variation pattern.

In the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1, only one variation pattern of "movie (01H)" with a total variation time of 50 seconds is prepared for "E8: special variation". In the example shown in FIG. 12, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E8: special fluctuation" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 199" for "movie (01H)", and "movie (01H)" is set to be selectable. That is, when the jackpot stop type is "2R probability variable jackpot", "movie (01H)" is always selected as the variation pattern.

When "movie (01H)" is selected by main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113 and display controller 114 determine a detailed variation pattern corresponding to "movie (01H)". In the pachinko machine 10, characters such as "chicken" or "girl" are displayed in the small areas Ds1 and Ds3 of the third pattern display device 81 as detailed variation patterns corresponding to "movie (01H)". , Finally, the third pattern stops at a specific pattern (for example, "341") with a variation pattern, or with the lighting or blinking of a specific lamp, etc. Finally, the third pattern stops at a specific pattern Variation patterns, etc. are included.

Although the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, it may be determined using a plurality of other variation type counters. For example, whether or not to add a notice effect that foretells the start of a big hit or "reach display" before the start of the change or during the change effect may be determined by another variation type counter, or if the reach is established , It may be determined by another variation type counter how many symbols the third symbol that is to be stopped last is shifted and stopped (for example, one symbol is shifted before and after, etc.).

Also, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1, a group dedicated to "2R probability variable jackpot" is provided. is selected, there is no group dedicated to "2R probability variable jackpot", and in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1, the variation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern when "15R probability variable jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot" are obtained Only mappings may be defined. In this case, when "2R probability variable jackpot" is selected as the jackpot type, "movie (01H)" may be determined as the fluctuation pattern without referring to the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e1.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, only "movie (01H)" is selected when "2R probability variable jackpot" is achieved, but when "2R probability variable jackpot" is achieved, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected. A variation pattern may be selected. In this case, like the "15R jackpot common" group, even in the group dedicated to "2R probability variable jackpot", the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected when "2R probability variable jackpot" occurs. Additionally, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in a certain reservation area may be determined as the variation pattern in the variation performance reserved in that reservation area.

Next, the losing variation pattern table 202e2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the losing variation pattern table 202e2 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13, the losing variation pattern table 202e2 is grouped based on the selected effect mode.

Specifically, as the production mode, "E0: non-reach (shortened)" which is referred to when the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode is determined, and the "non-reach (normal)" production mode are determined. "E1: non-reach (normal)" referred to when the "normal reach" effect mode is determined, "E2: normal reach" referred to when the "normal reach" effect mode is determined, and "super reach" effect mode is determined. It is divided into "E3: Super Reach" which is referred to when the "Special Reach" effect mode is determined, and "E4: Special Reach" which is referred to when the "Special Reach" effect mode is determined. A possible value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in a certain reservation area is not a value for a big win (random value for a big win), that is, it is a value for losing, the game state at that time and the value at that time. The stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the number of balls held in , and the effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the losing variation pattern table 202e2 is determined based on the effect mode. In the group (group) of the change pattern table 202e2 for loss, the change pattern associated with the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the same reservation area is determined as the change pattern in the change performance reserved in the reservation area. be done.

In the losing variation pattern table 202e2, only one variation pattern of "non-reach (shortening) only" with a total variation time of 3 seconds is prepared for "E0: non-reaching (shortening)". In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E0: non-reach (shortening)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 199 for "non-reach (shortening) only (01H)" ", and only "non-reach (shortening) only (01H)" is set to be selectable. That is, when the "non-reach (shortening)" effect mode is selected in the fluctuation pattern table 202e2 for losing, "non-reach (shortening)" for all values ("0 to 199") that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take only (01H)" is associated.

In the losing variation pattern table 202e2, "E1: non-reach (normal)" includes "non-reach (normal) only (01H)" with an overall variation time of 10 seconds and " Two variation patterns of "pseudo-gull + non-reach (normal) (02H)" are selectably prepared, and each variation pattern is associated with a possible value of the variation type counter CS1.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E1: non-reach (normal)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 179 for "non-reach (normal) only (01H)" ”, and “Pseudo fake + non-reach (normal) (02H)” are “180 to 199”.

That is, in the "non-reach (normal)" production mode at the time of losing, the variation pattern of "non-reach (normal) only (01H)" is 90%, and the variation pattern of "pseudo-gase + non-reach (normal) (02H)" is set to be selected at a rate of 10%. Therefore, in the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode selected when losing, the "non-reach (normal) only (01H)" variation pattern is likely to be selected (90%).

In the change pattern table for losing 202e2, "E2: normal reach" includes "normal reach only (01H)" with an overall fluctuation time of 15 seconds and "pseudo-gase + normal reach (02H)" with an overall fluctuation time of 25 seconds. , and "Pseudo Reach 1 + Normal Reach (03H)" with a total variation time of 35 seconds are selectably prepared, and each variation pattern is associated with a value that can be taken by the variation type counter CS1. ing.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E2: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 99" for "normal reach only (01H)", "pseudo gusset + normal reach ( 02H)” is “100-179”, and “180-199” is “180-199” for “Pseudo Ream 1+Normal Reach (03H)”.

That is, in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of losing, the variation pattern of "normal reach only (01H)" is 50%, the variation pattern of "pseudo hitch + normal reach (02H)" is 40%, and "pseudo consecutive 1 + normal reach (03H)". ” is set to be selected at a rate of 10%. Therefore, in the "Normal Reach" effect mode selected when losing, the "Normal Reach Only (01H)" variation pattern is likely to be selected (50%).

In the losing variation pattern table 202e2, "E3: Super Reach" includes "Super Reach Only (01H)" with a total variation time of 25 seconds and "Pseudo Gusse + Super Reach (01H)" with a total variation time of 35 seconds. 02H)”, “Pseudo-Ren 1 + Super Reach (03H)” with an overall variation time of 45 seconds, and “Pseudo-Ren 2 + Super Reach (04H)” with an overall variation time of 55 seconds. It is prepared to be selectable, and each variation pattern is associated with a possible value of the variation type counter CS1.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 59" for "Super Reach Only (01H)", "Pseudo Gase + "60 to 119" for "super reach (02H)", "120 to 179" for "pseudo-ren 1 + super reach (03H)", "180- for "pseudo-ren 2 + super reach (04H)" 199”.

That is, in the "super reach" production mode at the time of losing, the variation pattern of "super reach only (01H)" is 30%, the variation pattern of "pseudo gusset + super reach (02H)" is 30%, and the "pseudo ream 1 + super reach" is 30%. It is set so that the variation pattern of "Reach (03H)" is selected at a rate of 30% and the variation pattern of "Pseudo-Ren 2 + Super Reach (04H)" is selected at a rate of 10%. Therefore, in the "super reach" production mode selected at the time of losing, the variation patterns of "super reach only (01H)", "pseudo fake + super reach (02H)" and "pseudo consecutive 1 + super reach (03H)" It is likely to be selected evenly (30%).

In the change pattern table 202e2 for losing, "E4: Special reach" includes "Special reach only (01H)" with a total change time of 35 seconds and "Pseudo-gase + special reach (01H)" with a total change time of 45 seconds. 02H)”, “Pseudo-Ren 1 + Special Reach (03H)” with an overall variation time of 55 seconds, and “Pseudo-Ren 2 + Special Reach (04H)” with an overall variation time of 65 seconds. It is prepared to be selectable, and each variation pattern is associated with a possible value of the variation type counter CS1.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the variation pattern in "E4: Special reach" and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 79" for "Special reach only (01H)", "Pseudo fake + "80-159" for "Special Reach (02H)", "160-179" for "Pseudo-Ren 1 + Special Reach (03H)", "180-" for "Pseudo-Ren 2 + Special Reach (04H)" 199”.

That is, in the "special reach" production mode at the time of losing, the variation pattern of "only special reach (01H)" is 40%, the variation pattern of "pseudo gusset + special reach (02H)" is 40%, and the variation pattern of "pseudo consecutive 1 + special It is set so that the variation pattern of "Reach (03H)" is selected at a rate of 10% and the variation pattern of "Pseudo-Ren 2 + Special Reach (04H)" is selected at a rate of 10%. Therefore, in the "special reach" production mode selected at the time of losing, the fluctuation pattern of "only special reach (01H)" and the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo fake + special reach (02H)" are selected equally (40% of each other). is becoming easier.

In this way, when a big win is won, a comparatively long variation pattern is easily selected, thereby enhancing the performance contents of the variation performance in which a big win occurs, thereby improving the amusement of the game. be able to. In addition, when the jackpot is not won, that is, in the case of a loss, a relatively short variation pattern is configured to be easily selected, thereby shortening the performance contents of the variation performance at the time of the loss and performing the variation performance. It can be digested efficiently.

It should be noted that the variation pattern at the time of failure is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters (selecting the presence or absence of advance notice display, etc.).

Returning to FIG. 7, the second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially adds 1 within the range of, for example, "0 to 250" and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "250"). It is Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4.

In the first embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33) is performed to indicate that the ball has passed through either the left or right second ball entrance (through gate) 67. Acquired when detected. There are 149 random numbers to be won, and the range is "5 to 153". That is, when the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 153", it is determined that a winning is occurring, and the second symbol display device 83 displays a "○" symbol as a stop symbol (second symbol). Along with the lighting display, the electric accessory of the first ball entrance 64 is operated, and the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = "0 to 250"), and is set for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33). It is updated once and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 39).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the jackpot lottery and the dynamic drawing of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting of display and variable effect, and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. The RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, as well as various flags, counters, input/output buffers, etc., in addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. and a work area (work area) in which values such as input/output (hereinafter abbreviated as "I/O") are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see FIG. 39) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up processing (see FIG. 38) when the power is turned on. A non-maskable interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as "NMI") terminal of the MPU 201 is designed to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 37) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

The RAM 203 further has at least a reserved ball number counter 203a, a reserved ball storage area 203b, and a reserved ball execution area 203c.

The pending ball number counter 203a counts the number of balls entered into the first ball entrance 64 (hereinafter referred to as the first ball The entry of the game ball into the mouth 64 is sometimes called "start winning"), the dynamic display performed by the first symbol display device 37 (variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) is suspended. It is a counter that counts the number of balls (waiting times) up to four times. This reserved ball counter 203a is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process (S613 in FIG. 38) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of pending balls for dynamic display (variable effect) increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (see S203 in FIG. 34). On the other hand, the number of pending balls counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time a dynamic display (variation effect) is executed (see S305 in FIG. 35).

The value of the pending ball number counter 203a (that is, the pending ball number) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the pending ball number command (see S205 in FIG. 34). The pending ball count command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the start winning is detected and the pending ball counter 203a is incremented by one.

The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of pending balls of the dynamic display (variation effect) that is suspended by the main control unit 110 by the pending number of balls command. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can manage the suspension count of the dynamic display (variation effect) without accessing the main control device 110 . In addition, every time the start winning is detected, by transmitting a pending ball count command from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, the dynamic display (variation effect) managed by the audio lamp control device 113 is suspended. Even if the number of balls deviates from the number of reserved balls in the actual dynamic display (fluctuation effect) reserved by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the number of reserved balls will be changed by the next received number of reserved balls command. , the deviation can be corrected.

The audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display pending ball number command for notifying the pending ball number to the display control device 114 every time the internally managed pending ball number changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved design in the cockpit display area Db of the third design display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the main controller 110 transmits a pending ball number command to the sound lamp control device 113, only the value of the pending ball number counter 203a incremented by 1 is used in the pending ball number command. However, in accordance with the above-mentioned start winning that triggered the addition of the number of pending balls counter 203a, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) Each value of counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1 is also included.

That is, when there is a starting prize, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the main control device 110 , is communicated to the audio ramp controller 113 by the number of pending pitches command.

In the voice ramp control device 113, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 transmitted by the pending ball number command is changed based on each value. Pre-reading is performed before the performance is executed, and it is determined before the execution of the variable performance how the variable performance will be (whether or not a big hit will occur, how the variable time will be, etc.). Then, based on the result of determination by the look-ahead, it is possible to determine the execution of various effects, and to determine the contents and execution timing (timing) of the "holding change notice".

It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which a pending ball number command indicating the pending ball number of the variable effect and a command indicating the value of the first hit random number counter C1 or the like are separately transmitted. As a command indicating the value of the first hit random number counter C1 or the like, which is different from the reserved ball number command, a reserved ball number command is generated at the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and A command similar to the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command (advance fluctuation pattern command and advance stop type command) may be generated and transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 . In this case, regarding the program for generating the advance variation pattern command and the advance stop type command, by using the program for the variation pattern command and the stop type command, it is possible to easily create the program.

The reserved ball storage area 203b stores the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) upon detection of the start winning. A memory for storing each value. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read from the counter buffer. It is acquired and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The reserved ball storage area 203b is divided into four reserved areas (first reserved to first 4 areas) (see FIG. 7).

The reserved ball execution area 203c stores data (counters C1 to C3, CS1 each value).

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable effect, the big winning lottery, the dynamic display of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and the setting of the variable effect are executed. Of the data corresponding to each starting prize stored in the above-described reserved ball storage area 203b (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1), the data corresponding to one starting prize is stored in this reserved ball execution area 203c. shift to Note that the shift in the first embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7 again, the details of the reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c will be described. The reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to set the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the variable effects. used by

For setting the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and the variable effect, a first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first random number counter C1 used for determining the jackpot type are used. A hit type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the effect mode of the variable effect, and a change type counter CS1 used to determine the change pattern are used. The reserved ball storage area 203b stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer by the MPU 201 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning).

The reserved ball storage area 203b is composed of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Each of the four reservation areas (reservation first to fourth areas) has a first winning random number counter storage area 203b1 that stores the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and a first winning type counter C2 that stores the value. A per type counter storage area 203b2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203b4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

In the first embodiment, the first winning random number counter storage area 203b1, the first winning type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and the variation type counter storage area 203b4 are stored as one holding ball. Although provided in the area 203b, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided, and each of the four areas 203b1, 203b2, 203b3, and 203b4 may be provided in one of the reserved ball storage areas.

As described above, in the reserved ball storage area 203b, up to four data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) obtained at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is stored. In that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 reserved areas (1st to 4th reserved areas). . That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest starting prize is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest starting prize.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203c is composed of only one area. In this reserved ball execution area 203c, similarly to the reserved ball storage area 203b, a first winning random number counter storage area 203c1 for storing the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the value of the first winning type counter C2 are stored. A first hit type counter storage area 203c2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203c4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect, the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the first reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203b are stored in this reserved ball. It shifts to each area 203c1 to 203c4 of the execution area 203c. Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c is referred to in the variation start process (see FIG. 36), and a big winning lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. decide. In the first symbol display device 37, dynamic display is performed under the control of the main controller 110 based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

Further, the variation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by a variation pattern command and a stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The details of data shift will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect, the random value in the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1 of the first reservation area is transferred to the first hit random number counter storage area 203c1 of the reservation ball execution area 203c. shift. Similarly, the random number in the first winning type counter storage area 203b2 is shifted to the first winning type counter storage area 203c2, and the random number in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3. , the random number in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 is shifted to the fluctuation type counter storage area 203c4.

When the shift of the data to the holding ball execution area 203c is completed, the holding first area becomes empty, so that each area (second to fourth) of the holding ball storage area 203b stores (holds). Shift processing is performed to pack the data into areas (first to third) whose area number is one smaller. In the present embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

Here, the data shift performed for each reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b will be described. For example, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a when it is determined to start the variable effect is "4", and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the pending ball storage area 203b. do. In this state, the data in the first reserved area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c, and when the first reserved area becomes empty, the MPU 201 transfers the data in the other areas (second to fourth) to the area Shift to area (1st to 3rd) with number 1 smaller. That is, the data in the second reserved area is shifted to the first reserved area, the data in the third reserved area is shifted to the second reserved area, and the data in the fourth reserved area is shifted to the third reserved area.

Further, for example, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the variable effect is performed is "2", the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the second pending area to the first pending area. , to finish shifting the data. As described above, in the present embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the reserved areas (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), so the number of data shifts can be reduced. can reduce the control burden.

Note that regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the reserved areas (second to fourth) may be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In that case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (retained) in the reserving areas (second to fourth), making it easier to create a program.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 37) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Also, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, changes production and continuous It controls the setting of the display mode of the effect performed by the third pattern display device 81 such as the advance notice effect.

The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 425 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 425 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, it changes the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 so as to change the rear image such as the "reach" effect mode.

When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

When the frame button 22 is operated for a purpose other than changing the stage, such as changing the effect mode of “Super Reach”, a frame button operation command is transmitted to the display control device 114 . The display control device 114 displays an image corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 on the third pattern display device 81 by receiving the frame button operation command.

A detailed electrical configuration of the audio ramp controller 113 will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113. As shown in FIG. In the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, in addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221, as fixed value data, a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, a fluctuation pattern table 222d, a pending change table 222e, a scenario table 222f, a character pattern table 222g, a character color change table 222h, and a color change timing table 222i. Of these tables 222a to 222i, tables 222a to 222d are all the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, jackpot type table 202b, stop pattern table 202d, and fluctuation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. be.

The sound lamp control device 113 acquires from the counter buffer in accordance with the start winning in the main control device 110 and transmits the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 by the reserved ball number command. And based on each value of the variation type counter CS1, the jackpot random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the variation pattern table 222d, the prefetching process is executed.

"Looking ahead" means that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read in advance prior to performing the big winning lottery and the variation pattern lottery based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 at the timing of starting execution of the variable performance. That is. The pachinko machine 10 is configured to pre-read each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 by "pre-reading" processing, and to predict the determination result of the big winning lottery and the variation pattern in advance. Based on the result of the big winning lottery and the determination result of the variation pattern, various controls such as the setting of continuous advance notice performance to be executed over a plurality of variation performances are executed.

Then, by this look-ahead processing, the pending change table 222e and the scenario table 222f are referred to, and what kind of performance the pending variable effect that is the target of the look-ahead processing will be as a result (whether it will be a big hit or not) or what happens to the variable time, etc.) before the execution of the variable effect, decide to execute various effects, or determine the effect content and execution timing (timing) of the "pending change notice" Execute control. Details of the pending change table 222e and the scenario table 222f will be described later.

The RAM 223 contains a fluctuation start flag 223a, a sub-reserved ball number counter 223b, a reservation change counter 223c, a scenario counter 223d, a character pattern counter 223e, a character color lottery counter 223f, a color change timing counter 223g, a reservation information storage area 223h, and execution information. At least a storage area 223i is provided.

The fluctuation start flag 223a is a flag indicating that the fluctuation performance should be started in the ON state. This fluctuation start flag 223a is set to OFF as an initial value when power is turned on, and is turned ON when a stop type command output from main controller 110 is received (see S1207 in FIG. 42). Then, it is turned off when the variable effect is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S1402 in FIG. 44). When the variation start flag 223a is turned on, the MPU 221 performs a variation performance process (see FIG. 31) for executing the variation performance during standby when there is a variation performance during standby.

The sub-reserved ball number counter 223b, like the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (dynamic display) performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), It is a counter that counts up to 4 times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the main controller 110 .

As described above, the audio ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the pending ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 . Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of pending balls based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 110, and manages the number of pending balls by the sub pending ball number counter 223b. there is

Specifically, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the number of pending balls of the variable effect is added, and the value of the pending ball counter 203a is added in the main controller 110. When the command for the number of held balls sent from the main controller 110 is received, the value after the addition of the number of held balls counter 203a of the main controller 110 included in the command for the number of held balls (that is, the value held by the main controller 110 The number of pending balls of the variable effect that has been made) is stored in the sub-holding ball number counter 223b (see S1301 in FIG. 43).

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the pending ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110, and upon receipt thereof, the third symbol When the aspect of the variable effect in the display device 81 is set, the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is subtracted by 1 (see S1411 in FIG. 44). In this way, in accordance with the command transmitted from the main controller 110 in accordance with the update of the pending ball number counter 203a, the voice lamp control unit 113 updates the value of the sub pending ball number counter 223b. While synchronizing with the ball number counter 203a, the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b can be updated.

The value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved symbols on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to receiving the number of reserved balls command in the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b, or changes the number of sub-held balls in response to reception of the variation pattern command. At the timing of updating the value of the counter 223b, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the stored or updated value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b, a display reserved ball number command is sent to the display control device 114. Send (see S1313 in FIG. 43 or S1412 in FIG. 44).

Further, the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is referred to for determining the timing of executing the "reserved change notice" when performing the "reserved change notice" to be described later. Specifically, when it is determined in the hold display setting process (see FIG. 30) to be described later that the "hold change notice" is to be executed, the execution timing of the "hold change notice" is determined by the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f (to be described later). The value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is referenced when determining, and the number of reserved balls in the variable effect at that time is determined.

When the display control device 114 receives this display pending ball number command, the value of the pending ball number indicated by the command, that is, the pending ball number pattern corresponding to the value of the sub pending ball number counter 223b in the audio lamp control device 113 is displayed. is displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third pattern display device 81, the drawing of the image is controlled.

As described above, the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the number of pending symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the pending ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, it is possible to cause the third symbol display device 81 to accurately display the number of held balls for which the variable effect is held.

The pending change counter 223c is a counter for determining whether or not to execute the "holding change notice" in the pending symbols and the execution symbols in the cockpit display area Db. In the first embodiment, as described above, as the "suspension change notice", the display colors of the suspended symbols and the executed symbols are changed from the normal display mode of white to the blue display mode of "blue" and the red display mode. or "rainbow" in a rainbow color display mode.

The sound lamp control device 113, according to the pending ball number command received from the main controller 110, sets the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1, and the jackpot random number. Prefetching can be performed based on the table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the variation pattern table 222d. In the look-ahead processing, the performance mode of the variable performance indicated by the pending ball number command is grasped, and based on the performance mode, a lottery is drawn as to whether or not to perform the "suspension change notice" by the suspension change counter 223c and the suspension change table 222e. .

This pending change counter 223c is incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99") in the counter updating process (see S1111 in FIG. 41) of the main process of the sound lamp control device 113, and the maximum value is (For example, in the case of a counter that can take a value from "0 to 99", it returns to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the pending change counter 223c is updated once (see S1111 in FIG. 41) each time the main process loops. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the performance mode of the variable performance indicated by the reserved ball number command is grasped, and a pending change counter is based on the performance mode. By referring to the value of 223c and the pending change table 222e, whether or not to execute the "holding change notice" and the display mode are determined (see S1303 in FIG. 43).

Here, the pending change table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the pending change table 222e. As shown in FIG. 15, the pending change table 222e is divided into groups based on the selected effect mode.

Specifically, the hold change table 222e is for the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode at the time of failure, the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode at the time of failure, and the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of failure. And, for the "super reach" performance mode at the time of losing, for the "special reach" performance mode at the time of losing, for the "normal reach" performance mode at the time of the big hit, and for the "super reach" performance mode at the time of the big hit. It is divided into a "special reach" effect mode at the time and a "special change" effect mode at the time of the big hit. A possible value of the pending change counter 223c is associated with each divided group.

In the pending change table 222e, "E0: non-reach (shortened)" at the time of losing indicates that the color of the pending symbol or the executed symbol does not change from the normal display mode ("white") to "none" and changes to blue. Two display modes of "blue" are selectably prepared, and each display mode is associated with a possible value of the pending change counter 223c. In the first embodiment, when "none", in which the color of the reserved symbol or the executed symbol does not change, is selected, the "suspended change notice" is not executed.

In addition, for the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode at the time of losing, the color of the reserved pattern or the execution pattern changes to red, "red", and "rainbow color" to change to rainbow color. The value of the pending change counter 223c is not associated so that it is not changed. This is because, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the color of the reserved pattern or the executed pattern is "red" in the "reserved change notice", the variable effect indicated by the reserved pattern or the executed pattern is "super This is to ensure that the "reach or more" variable is executed. In addition, when the color of the reserved pattern or the executed pattern is "rainbow color" in the "reserved change notice", it is confirmed that the "big hit display" appears in the variable performance indicated by the reserved pattern or the executed pattern. It's for. Therefore, in the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode where the "super reach or more" variable element and the "jackpot display" do not appear, set so that "red" or "rainbow color" of "hold change notice" is not selected It is

In the example shown in FIG. 15, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223c and the "hold change notice" in the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode at the time of losing is "0 to 98" for "none", It is "99" for "blue". Since no values are assigned to "red" and "rainbow", they are indicated as "-".

That is, when the "non-reach (shortening)" effect mode at the time of losing is selected, the display mode of "no pending change notice" is 99%, the display mode of "blue" is 1%, and "red" and "rainbow color" are set to be selected at a rate of 0%.

Therefore, in the "hold change notice" selected in the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode at the time of losing, the "none" display mode is easily selected (99%), and the "hold change notice" itself It is a setting that makes it difficult for this to occur.

In the pending change table 222e, in the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode at the time of losing, the color of the pending symbol or the executed symbol changes from the normal display mode ("white") to "none" and changes to blue. Two display modes of "blue" are selectably prepared, and each display mode is associated with a possible value of the pending change counter 223c. In addition, in the "non-reach (normal)" production mode at the time of loss, the "super reach or more" variable element and the "jackpot display" do not appear, as in the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode at the time of loss. Therefore, the value of the pending change counter 223c is associated so that the display modes of "red" where the color of the pending symbol or the executed symbol changes to red and "rainbow color" where the color changes to rainbow are not selected. not

In the example shown in FIG. 15, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223c and the "hold change notice" in the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode at the time of losing is "0 to 98" for "none", It is "99" for "blue". Since no values are assigned to "red" and "rainbow", they are indicated as "-".

That is, when the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode at the time of losing is selected, the display mode of "no pending change notice" is 99%, the display mode of "blue" is 1%, and "red" and "rainbow color" are set to be selected at a rate of 0%.

Therefore, in the "hold change notice" selected in the "non-reach (normal)" production mode at the time of losing, the "none" display mode is easily selected (99%), and the "hold change notice" itself It is a setting that makes it difficult for this to occur.

In the pending change table 222e, in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of losing, the color of the pending symbol or the executed symbol is "none", which does not change from the normal display mode ("white"), and "blue", which changes to blue. and are prepared to be selectable, and each display mode is associated with a possible value of the pending change counter 223c. In addition, in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss, similar to the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode at the time of loss and the "non-reach (normal)" production mode at the time of loss, the variable element of "super reach or more" and " Jackpot display” does not appear. Therefore, the value of the pending change counter 223c is associated so that the display modes of "red" where the color of the pending symbol or the executed symbol changes to red and "rainbow color" where the color changes to rainbow are not selected. not

In the example shown in FIG. 15, the value of the hold change counter 223c and the "hold change notice" in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of losing are associated with "0 to 79" and "blue" for "none". On the other hand, it is "80 to 99". Since no values are assigned to "red" and "rainbow", they are indicated as "-".

That is, when the "normal reach" production mode at the time of losing is selected, the display mode of "no pending change notice" is 80%, the display mode of "blue" is 20%, "red" and "rainbow color ” is set to be selected at a rate of 0%.

Therefore, in the "hold change notice" selected during the "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss, the "none" display mode is likely to be selected (80%), but the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode at the time of loss and The setting (1% → 20%) is such that the “blue” display mode is more likely to be selected than the “non-reach (normal)” presentation mode when losing.

In the pending change table 222e, the "super reach" effect mode at the time of losing includes "none" where the color of the pending symbol or the executed symbol does not change from the normal display mode ("white") and "blue" where the color changes to blue. and "red" which changes to red are selectably prepared, and each display mode is associated with a possible value of the pending change counter 223c.

In addition, in the "super reach" production mode at the time of loss, as in the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode at the time of loss, the "jackpot display" does not appear, so the color of the pending pattern or the execution pattern is rainbow color. The value of the pending change counter 223c is not associated so that the display mode of changing "rainbow color" is not selected. On the other hand, in the "Super Reach" production mode at the time of losing, in order to execute the "Super Reach" variable element, the "Red" display mode that suggests the execution of the "Super Reach or higher" variable element is selected. , possible values of the pending change counter 223c.

In the example shown in FIG. 15, the value of the pending change counter 223c in the "super ready-to-win" rendering mode at the time of losing and the "holding change notice" are associated with "0 to 19" and "blue" for "none". "20 to 89" for "red" and "90 to 99" for "red". Since no value is assigned to "rainbow color", it is written as "-".

That is, when the "super reach" production mode at the time of losing is selected, the "hold change notice" is "none" display mode is 20%, "blue" display mode is 70%, and "red" display mode is set to be selected at a rate of 10%, and the display mode of "rainbow color" is selected at a rate of 0%.

Therefore, in the "holding change notice" selected in the "super reach" production mode at the time of losing, the "blue" display mode is set (70%) to be more likely to be selected than the "none" display mode. In addition, the display mode of "red", which has a higher expectation for a big win than the display mode of "blue", is also set to be selectable (10%).

In the pending change table 222e, the color of the pending symbol or the executed symbol changes to "none (white)" which does not change, "blue" which changes to blue, and changes to red in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of losing. Three display modes of "red" are selectably prepared, and each display mode is associated with a possible value of the pending change counter 223c.

In addition, in the "special reach" production mode at the time of loss, as in the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode at the time of loss, the "jackpot display" does not appear, so the color of the pending pattern or execution pattern changes to rainbow color The value of the pending change counter 223c is not associated so that the display mode of "rainbow color" is not selected. On the other hand, the "special reach" effect mode at the time of losing is to execute the variable element of "special reach", so that the "red" display mode that suggests the execution of the variable element of "super reach or higher" is selected. , possible values of the pending change counter 223c.

In the example shown in FIG. 15, the value of the hold change counter 223c and the "hold change notice" in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of losing are associated with "no", "0 to 9", and "blue". "10 to 49" for "red" and "50 to 99" for "red". Since no value is assigned to "rainbow color", it is written as "-".

That is, when the "special reach" production mode at the time of losing is selected, the "hold change notice" is "none" display mode is 10%, "blue" display mode is 40%, and "red" display mode is set to be selected at a rate of 50%, and the display mode of "rainbow color" is selected at a rate of 0%.

Therefore, in the "hold change notice" selected in the "special reach" production mode at the time of losing, the "red" display mode is set (50%) to be more likely to be selected than the "blue" or "none" display mode. ing.

In the pending change table 222e, in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of the big win, the color of the pending symbol or the executed symbol is "none", which does not change from the normal display mode ("white"), and "blue", which changes to blue. , and “rainbow color” that changes to a rainbow color are selectably prepared, and each display mode is associated with a possible value of the pending change counter 223c. In addition, in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of the big hit, since the variable element of "super reach or more" is not executed, it is reserved so that the "red" display mode in which the color of the reserved pattern or the executed pattern changes to red is not selected. The value of the change counter 223c is not associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 15, the value of the hold change counter 223c in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of the big win and the "hold change notice" are associated with "0 to 9" and "blue" for "none". "10 to 89" for "Rainbow Color" and "90 to 99" for "Rainbow Color". Since no value is assigned to "red", it is written as "-".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of the big hit is selected, the display mode of "no pending change notice" is 10%, the display mode of "blue" is 80%, and the display mode of "red" is It is set to be selected at a rate of 0% and the display mode of "rainbow color" at 10%.

Therefore, in the "suspended change notice" selected in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of the big win, the "blue" display mode is likely to be selected (80%), and the "rainbow color" display mode is also selected. (10%).

In the pending change table 222e, the "super reach" effect mode at the time of the big win includes "none" in which the color of the pending symbol or the executed symbol does not change from the normal display mode ("white") and "blue" in which the color changes to blue. , ``red'' that changes to red, and ``rainbow color'' that changes to rainbow color are prepared in a selectable manner. attached.

In the example shown in FIG. 15, the correspondence between the value of the pending change counter 223c and the "holding change notice" in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of the big win is "0 to 9" and "blue" for "none". "10 to 39" for "red", "40 to 89" for "rainbow", and "90 to 99" for "rainbow".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of the big hit is selected, the display mode of "no pending change notice" is 10%, the display mode of "blue" is 30%, and the display mode of "red". is set to be selected at a rate of 50%, and the display mode of "rainbow color" is selected at a rate of 10%.

Therefore, in the "holding change notice" selected in the "super reach" production mode at the time of the big win, the "red" display mode is likely to be selected (40%), and the "blue" display mode is also likely to be selected ( 30%), and the display mode of "rainbow color" is also selected (10%), so that the "hold change notice" is set to occur easily.

In the pending change table 222e, the "special reach" effect mode at the time of the big win includes "none" in which the color of the pending symbol or the executed symbol does not change from the normal display mode ("white") and "blue" in which the color changes to blue. , ``red'' that changes to red, and ``rainbow color'' that changes to rainbow color are prepared in a selectable manner. attached.

In the example shown in FIG. 15, the value of the hold change counter 223c in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of the big win and the "hold change notice" are associated with "0 to 9" and "blue" for "none". "10 to 19" for "red", "20 to 89" for "rainbow", and "90 to 99" for "rainbow".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of the big hit is selected, the "holding change notice" is 10% in the display mode of "none", 10% in the "blue" display mode, and 10% in the "red" display mode. is set to be selected at a rate of 70%, and the display mode of "rainbow color" is selected at a rate of 10%.

Therefore, in the "holding change notice" selected in the "special reach" production mode at the time of the big win, the "red" display mode is easily selected (70%), and the "blue" display mode is also selected (10%). %), and the display mode of "rainbow color" is also selected (10%).

In the pending change table 222e, the "special change" effect mode at the time of the big win includes "none" in which the color of the pending symbol or the executed symbol does not change from the normal display mode ("white") and "blue" in which the color changes to blue. , ``red'' that changes to red, and ``rainbow color'' that changes to rainbow color are prepared in a selectable manner. attached.

In the example shown in FIG. 15, the correspondence between the value of the pending change counter 223c and the "holding change notice" in the "special change" effect mode at the time of the big win is "0 to 69" and "blue" for "none". "70-79" for "red", "80-89" for "rainbow", and "90-99" for "rainbow".

That is, when the "special variation" effect mode at the time of the jackpot is selected (when the "2R probability variable jackpot" is won), the display mode of "no pending change notice" is 70%, and the display of "blue" The display mode is set to be selected at a rate of 10%, the "red" display mode at 10%, and the "rainbow color" display mode at 10%.

Therefore, in the "suspended change notice" selected in the "special change" production mode at the time of the big win, the "none" display mode is likely to be selected (70%), and the "blue", "red" or "rainbow color" is easily selected (70%). ” is set to be selected evenly (10%), so it is difficult for “holding change notice” to occur, but if it does occur, it is set to be selected almost evenly. .

Therefore, the appearance probability of the "suspended change notice" at the time of losing is, for example, when the number of retained balls in the "normal game state" is the first, that is, when the effect mode is selected by the A table 202d1, The "pending change notice" is selected at a rate of 91.05% for "no change", 7.65% for "blue", and 1.3% for "red". In addition, the appearance probability of the "suspended change notice" at the time of the big win is, for example, when the "15R probability variable jackpot" is won, that is, when the effect mode is selected by the C table 202d3, the "suspended change notice" is 10% of unchanged "none", 20.5% of "blue", 59.5% of "red", and 10% of "rainbow" are selected. Therefore, when winning the jackpot lottery with the third pattern, "red" and "rainbow color" are likely to be selected, and "none" and "blue" are less likely to be selected from the "holding change notice". When the lottery is lost, "none" and "blue" are more likely to be selected, and "red" is less likely to be selected ("rainbow color" is not selected when the lottery is lost).

In this way, the sound lamp control device 113, when receiving the pending ball number command from the main control device 110, grasps the propriety of the variable effect indicated by the pending ball number command and the effect mode, and based on the propriety and the effect mode It is configured to determine whether or not execution of the "suspension change notice" is possible and the display mode. By configuring in this way, the result of the variable performance is suggested to the player by the pending symbol before the variable performance is executed, and the variable performance reserved for the player is displayed until the variable performance is executed. By predicting whether or not a jackpot will be achieved, the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

The holding change information of the "holding change notice" determined (selected) based on the values of the holding change table 222e and the holding change counter 223c is stored in a holding information storage area 223h described later indicated by the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b. is stored in the pending change information storage area 223h5 (see FIG. 24). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, "suspension change notice" is executed in pending symbols or execution symbols based on the pending change information stored in the pending information storage area 223h and scenario data described later.

Returning to FIG. 14, the description continues. The scenario counter 223d is a counter for determining the execution timing of the determined "suspension change notice". As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute the “holding change notice” and the display mode based on the number-of-holding-balls command received from the main control device 110 . In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when execution of the "holding change notice" is determined, the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is determined by the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f.

This scenario counter 223d is incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99") in the counter updating process (see S1111 in FIG. 41) of the main process of the sound lamp control device 113, and the maximum value ( For example, in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 99", it is configured to return to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the scenario counter 223d is updated (eg, incremented by 1) once each time the main process loops (see S1111 in FIG. 41). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a pending ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the effect mode of the variable effect indicated by the pending ball number command is grasped, and based on the effect mode, "holding Whether or not execution of "prediction of change" and display mode are determined. Then, when the execution of the "holding change notice" is determined, the value of the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f are referred to determine the execution timing of the "holding change notice" (see S1305 in FIG. 43).

Here, the scenario table 222f will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17. FIG. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the sound ramp control device 113 refers to the value of the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f when execution of the "hold change notice" is determined. , to determine the execution timing of the "suspension change notice". In this case, even with the same ``pending change notice (for example, ``blue color''), the execution timing of the ``holding change notice'' at the time of losing is made different from the execution timing of the ``holding change notice'' at the time of the big win. By doing so, the degree of expectation for a big win is configured to differ depending on the difference in execution timing of the "holding change notice". FIG. 16 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot scenario table 222f1.

In the jackpot scenario table 222f1 of FIG. It is divided into a total of 12 types of situation patterns classified by the display mode of "holding change notice" (three patterns of "blue", "red", and "rainbow color") for each of the number of holding balls. In addition, as the timing at which the horizontal row executes (starts) the "holding change notice", 4 patterns at the time of display or shift to each number of holding balls (number of holding balls "1" to "4") and holding balls A total of 8 types of timing patterns, including 4 patterns of "start (shift time)", "before reach", "after reach" or "after pending deletion" in the number "0" (during the execution of the variable effect) are separated from each other. A possible value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with each of the divided groups.

The "holding change notice" in the first embodiment is executed (appears) in the timing pattern determined by the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f for each situation pattern. is set to

Specifically, for example, when the execution timing of the "suspension change notice" is "0" in the number of pending balls and "at the start" is selected, the variable effect that determines the "suspension change notice" is started. The "suspension change notice" is executed at the timing when the change is made. In addition, when the execution timing of the "suspension change notice" is "0" pending balls and "before reach" is selected, it is during the variable performance in the variable performance that determines the "suspension change notice" Before the "reach display" appears (for example, when the left symbol column Z1 is stopped during the execution of the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element or the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element, etc.) Change Notice” is executed. In addition, when the execution timing of the "suspension change notice" is the number of pending balls "0" and "after reach" is selected, it is during the variable performance in the variable performance that determined the "suspension change notice" The "suspension change notice" is executed at the timing during execution of the "reach display" (for example, during execution of the variable element of the "normal reach"). In addition, when the execution timing of the "suspension change notice" is "0" on hold balls and "after deletion of the hold" is selected, it is during the variable production in the variable production that determined the "hold change notice" At the timing when the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed after the execution of the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" (the timing before the variable element of "re-variation" is executed), the "suspended change notice" ” is executed.

Further, for example, when the number of pending balls "1" is selected as the execution timing of the "holding change notice", the holding symbol indicating the variable effect for which the "holding change notice" is determined is displayed in the first holding symbol display area Db1. The "suspended change notice" is executed at the timing displayed to or at the shifted timing. Further, when the execution timing of the "suspension change notice" is selected with the number of pending balls "2", the pending symbol indicating the variable effect for which the "suspension change notice" is determined is displayed in the second pending symbol display area Db2. The "holding change notice" is executed at the shifted timing or at the shifted timing. Further, when the execution timing of the "suspension change notice" is selected with the number of pending balls "3", the pending symbol indicating the variable effect for which the "suspension change notice" is determined is displayed in the third pending symbol display area Db3. The "holding change notice" is executed at the shifted timing or at the shifted timing. Further, when the execution timing of the "suspended change notice" is selected with the number of "4" pending balls, the pending symbol indicating the variable effect for which the "suspended change notice" is determined is displayed in the fourth pending symbol display area Db4. The "suspension change notice" is executed at the specified timing.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a pending ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the voice lamp A lottery for "holding change notice" is performed in the control device 113, and it is determined whether or not to execute the "holding change notice". When execution of the "holding change notice" is determined, first, the number of holding balls at the time of the decision and the display mode of the decided "holding change notice" are grasped. Then, when the variable effect indicated by the pending ball number command is a big win, the value of the scenario counter 223d and the big win scenario table 222f1 are referred to, and the execution timing (appearance timing) of the "holding change notice" at the time of the big win ) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the jackpot scenario table 222f1, situation patterns of the number of pending balls in the variable effect at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" and each display mode of the "holding change notice" are prepared. Possible values of the scenario counter 223d are associated with the situation patterns.

First, a case will be described where the number of pending balls in the variable effect is "1" at the time when the "holding change notice" of the big win is determined. In this case, the number of held balls "2" to "4" does not exist when the number of held balls "1" occurs. That is, when the number of reserved balls "1" occurs, the reserved symbols of the number of reserved balls "2" to "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of pending balls is "1" when the "holding change notice" is determined, the number of holding balls becomes "2" to "4" when the "holding change notice" is executed. No value is assigned to the scenario counter 223d (see FIG. 16).

First, as shown in the example of FIG. 16, when the number of pending balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 4" for "starting" with "0" pending balls, and "before reaching" with "0" pending balls. 5 to 9”, “10 to 14” for “after reach” with “0” retained balls, “15 to 49” for “after deletion” with “0” retained balls, retained balls It is "50 to 99" for the number "1".

That is, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is the number of held balls "0". 5% "at the start", 5% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 5% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 5% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls It is set so that the selection ratio is 35% for "after pending deletion" and 50% for the number of pending balls "1" (that is, when the pending pattern is displayed).

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variation effect of the big hit is "blue". Most likely to be selected at the time of display (50%), and next most likely to be selected at the time of re-display after the reserved design in the cockpit display area Db is erased due to the variable factor of "Super Reach" (35%) %) is set as

In the first embodiment, when determining the execution timing of the "suspension change notice", the effect mode of the corresponding variable effect is not determined. Therefore, for example, even if the execution timing of "after pending deletion" is selected, when the variable production is in the "normal reach" production mode, "hold change notice" is executed at the execution timing of "after pending deletion" Situations may arise where it is not possible. However, in such a case, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the performance mode is such that the "holding change notice" cannot be performed at the determined execution timing, another execution timing that can be executed (for example, "after reach") (see FIG. 45). Therefore, when the lottery for execution of the "holding change notice" is won, the "holding change notice" can be reliably executed at any timing. Therefore, when determining the execution timing of the "suspension change notice", even if the execution timing is determined without grasping the performance mode of the variable performance, the "suspension change notice" can be reliably executed, and the game is improved. You can increase your interest. Details of change control will be described later.

Then, as shown in the example of FIG. 16, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "starting" when the number of pending balls is "0", and "before reaching" when the number of pending balls is "0". 10 to 19”, “20 to 29” for “after reach” with “0” retained balls, “30 to 89” for “after deletion of retained” with “0” retained balls, retained balls It is "90 to 99" for the number "1".

That is, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is the number of pending balls "0". 10% "at the start", 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls The selection ratio is set such that "after pending deletion" is 60% and the number of pending balls "1" (that is, when the pending pattern is displayed) is 10%.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "1" and the display mode is "red", "super reach , etc., the timing of re-display after erasure of the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db is set to be most likely to be selected (60%).

Then, as shown in the example of FIG. 16, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow color", the "holding change notice" The correspondence between the execution timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 4" for "at the start" when the number of pending balls is "0", and for "before reaching" when the number of pending balls is "0". "5 to 9", "10 to 49" for "after reach" with "0" pending balls, and "50 to 99" for "after deletion" with "0" pending balls ing. It should be noted that the "rainbow color" display mode of the "suspended change notice" does not appear in the pending symbols, and can appear only in the executed symbols. The value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the execution timing of .

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is set to "0". "At the start" is 5%, "Before reaching" with "0" pending balls is 5%, "After reaching" with "0" pending balls is 40%, and "0" pending balls 50% for "after pending deletion" and 0% for the number of pending balls "1" (that is, when the pending pattern is displayed).

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow color", "super The timing of redisplay after the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db have been erased due to the fluctuation factors of "reach" is most likely to be selected (50%). It is set to be easy (40%). The "rainbow color" display mode of the "suspension change notice" at the time of the big win is set to the above selection ratio regardless of the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "suspension change notice". Therefore, the description of the display mode of the "rainbow color" of the "holding change notice" at the time of the big hit with the number of "2" to "4" holding balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is omitted.

Next, a case will be described where the number of pending balls in the variable effect is "2" at the time when the "holding change notice" of the big win is determined. In this case, the number of held balls "3" or "4" does not exist when the number of held balls "2" occurs. That is, when the number of reserved balls is "2", the reserved symbols with the number of reserved balls of "3" or "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of pending balls is "2" when the "holding change notice" is determined, the number of holding balls becomes "3" or "4" when the "holding change notice" is executed. No value is assigned to the scenario counter 223d (see FIG. 16).

As shown in the example of FIG. 16, when the number of pending balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 4" for "starting" with "0" pending balls, and "5 to 4" for "before reaching" with "0" pending balls. 9", "10 to 14" for "after reach" with "0" pending balls, "15 to 39" for "after erasing" with "0" pending balls, number of pending balls " "40 to 49" for 1" and "50 to 99" for the number of held balls "2".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 5% "at the start", 5% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 5% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 5% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls Selection ratio of 25% for "after deletion of pending", 10% for "1" pending balls (i.e., when shifting pending patterns), and 50% for "2" pending balls (i.e., when displaying pending patterns) is set to be

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variation effect of the big hit is The timing at the time of display is the most likely to be selected (50%), and the timing at the time of re-display after the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db are erased due to the variable factors of "super reach" etc. is the second most likely to be selected (25%). %) is set as

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 16, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "starting" when the number of pending balls is "0", and "before reaching" when the number of pending balls is "0". 10 to 19”, “20 to 29” for “after reach” with “0” retained balls, “30 to 79” for “after deletion of retained” with “0” retained balls, retained balls It is "80 to 89" for the number "1" and "90 to 99" for the number of held balls "2".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "2" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% "at the start", 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls "After pending deletion" is 50%, the number of pending balls is "1" (i.e., when the pending pattern is shifted) is 10%, and the number of pending balls is "2" (i.e., when the pending pattern is displayed) is 10%. is set to be

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "2" and the display mode is "red", "super reach , etc., the timing of re-display after erasure of the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db is set to be most likely to be selected (50%).

Next, a case will be described where the number of pending balls in the variable effect is "3" at the time when the "holding change notice" of the big win is determined. In this case, the number of held balls "4" does not exist when the number of held balls "3" occurs. That is, when the number of reserved balls is "3", the reserved symbols with the number of reserved balls of "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of pending balls is "3" when the "holding change notice" is determined, the scenario counter 223d for the number of holding balls "4" when the "holding change notice" is executed is not assigned (see FIG. 16).

As shown in the example of FIG. 16, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 4" for "starting" with "0" pending balls, and "5 to 4" for "before reaching" with "0" pending balls. 9", "10 to 14" for "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, "15 to 29" for "after deleting pending" with "0" pending balls, number of pending balls " "30 to 39" for 1", "40 to 49" for the number of held balls of "2", and "50 to 99" for the number of held balls of "3".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 5% "at the start", 5% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 5% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 5% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls "After pending deletion" is 15%, the number of pending balls is "1" (that is, at the time of pending pattern shift) is 10%, the number of pending balls is "2" (that is, at the time of pending pattern shift) is 10%, the number of pending balls It is set so that the selection ratio is 50% for "3" (that is, when the reserved symbols are displayed).

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variation effect of the big hit is "blue". The timing at the time of display is the most likely to be selected (50%), and the timing at the time of re-display after the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db are erased due to the variable factors of "super reach" etc. is the second most likely to be selected (15%). %) is set as

Then, as shown in the example of FIG. 16, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "starting" when the number of pending balls is "0", and "before reaching" when the number of pending balls is "0". 10 to 19”, “20 to 29” for “after reach” with “0” retained balls, “30 to 69” for “after deletion of retained” with “0” retained balls, retained balls "70 to 79" for the number "1", "80 to 89" for the number of held balls "2", and "90 to 99" for the number of held balls "3".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "3" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% "at the start", 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls "After pending deletion" is 40%, the number of pending balls is "1" (i.e., when shifting the pending pattern) is 10%, the number of pending balls is "2" (i.e., when shifting the pending pattern) is 10%, the pending pattern is " 3" (that is, when the reserved symbols are displayed) is set to have a selection ratio of 10%.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "3" and the display mode is "red", "super reach , etc., the timing of re-display after erasure of the pending symbols in the cockpit display area Db is set to be most likely to be selected (40%).

Next, a case will be described where the number of pending balls in the variable effect is "4" at the time when the "holding change notice" of the big win is determined.

As shown in the example of FIG. 16, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 4" for "starting" with "0" pending balls, and "5 to 4" for "before reaching" with "0" pending balls. 9", "10 to 14" for "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, "15 to 19" for "after deleting pending" with "0" pending balls, number of pending balls " "20 to 29" for 1", "30 to 39" for the number of held balls "2", "40 to 49" for the number of held balls "3", "4" for the number of held balls It is "50 to 99" for each.

That is, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is the number of held balls "0". 5% "at the start", 5% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 5% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 5% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls "After pending deletion" is 5%, the number of pending balls is "1" (i.e. when shifting the pending pattern) is 10%, the number of pending balls is "2" (i.e. when shifting the pending pattern) is 10%, the number of pending balls The selection ratio is set to 10% for "3" (that is, when the reserved symbols are shifted) and 50% for "4" reserved symbols (that is, when the reserved symbols are displayed).

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variation effect of the big hit is "blue". The display timing is set so that it is most likely to be selected (50%).

Then, as shown in the example of FIG. 16, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "starting" when the number of pending balls is "0", and "before reaching" when the number of pending balls is "0". 10 to 19”, “20 to 29” for “after reach” with “0” retained balls, “30 to 59” for “after deletion of retained” with “0” retained balls, retained balls "60 to 69" for the number "1", "70 to 79" for the number of "2" held balls, "80 to 89" for the number of "3" held balls, "80 to 89" for the number of held balls " 4” and “90 to 99”.

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "3" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% "at the start", 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls "After pending deletion" is 30%, the number of pending balls is "1" (that is, when shifting the reserved pattern) is 10%, the number of pending balls is "2" (that is, when shifting the reserved pattern) is 10%, and the reserved pattern is " The selection ratio is set to 10% for 3" (that is, when the reserved symbols are shifted) and 10% for 4" reserved symbols (that is, when the reserved symbols are displayed).

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "4" and the display mode is "red", "super reach , etc., the timing of re-display after erasure of the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db is set to be most likely to be selected (30%).

In this way, when the "suspended change notice" is performed in the reserved symbols and the executed symbols indicating the variable effect that generates the big win, the variable element of "super reach" is displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db. At the timing when the execution pattern is erased, the performance of the variable element of "Super Reach" is completed, and the execution pattern in the execution pattern display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is displayed again, the "suspension change notice" appears (execution ) configuration possible.

As a result, compared to the case of directly changing the notice object (change object) that is always visible and notifying it, or the case of making a new notice object appear and notifying, To make it difficult for a player to clearly recognize the change, and to casually change the display mode of the notice object. By temporarily hiding the announcement object and then casually changing it, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the player is made to recognize that the source of the sense of discomfort is directly linked to the game value (for example, a big win). As a result, it is possible to diversify the presentation while providing the player with an unexpected presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, by allocating the execution timing of "holding change notice" to the second half of the variable production ("after reach" and "after holding erasure"), the expectation of the jackpot will increase even in the latter half of the variable production. The player can play the game while anticipating the occurrence (appearance) of the pending change notice. Therefore, the player can play the game while anticipating a big win until the second half of the variable presentation, so that the player can be entertained for a long period of time.

Next, the losing scenario table 222f2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the losing scenario table 222f2. In the losing scenario table 222f2 of FIG. 17, as in the big win scenario table 222f1, each number of pending balls (the number of pending balls "1" to 4 patterns), a total of 12 types of situation patterns classified by display mode (3 patterns of "blue", "red", and "rainbow color") for each number of pending balls are classified respectively. In addition, as the timing at which the horizontal row executes (starts) the "holding change notice", 4 patterns at the time of display or shift to each number of holding balls (number of holding balls "1" to "4") and holding balls A total of 8 types of timing patterns, including 4 patterns of "start (shift time)", "before reach", "after reach" or "after pending deletion" in the number "0" (during the execution of the variable effect) are separated from each other. A possible value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with each of the divided groups.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the scenario table 222f2 for losing, situation patterns of the number of pending balls of the variable effect at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" and each display mode of the "holding change notice" are prepared. Possible values of the scenario counter 223d are associated with the situation patterns. It should be noted that the "rainbow color" of the display mode of the "suspension change notice" indicates the occurrence of a big win by the appearance of the "rainbow color" display mode, and is not selected at the time of loss. Therefore, in the "rainbow" situation pattern of the losing scenario table 222f2, the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to any of the pending numbers of the variable effect at the time when the "pending change notice" is determined. Description is omitted.

First, a case will be described where the number of pending balls in the variable effect is "1" at the time when the "holding change notice" for losing is determined. In this case, the number of held balls "2" to "4" does not exist when the number of held balls "1" occurs. That is, when the number of reserved balls "1" occurs, the reserved symbols of the number of reserved balls "2" to "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this losing scenario table 222f2, when the number of pending balls is "1" when the "holding change notice" is determined, the number of holding balls becomes "2" to "4" when the "holding change notice" is executed. No value is assigned to the scenario counter 223d (see FIG. 17).

As shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "starting" with "0" pending balls, and "10 to 9" for "before reach" with "0" pending balls. 19", "20 to 29" for "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, "-" for "after deleting pending" with "0" pending balls, and "1" pending balls It is "30 to 99" for each.

That is, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is the number of held balls "0". 10% "at the start", 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls The selection ratio is set such that "after pending deletion" is 0% and the number of pending balls is "1" (that is, when the pending pattern is displayed) is 70%.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variation effect of the big hit is "blue". The display timing is set so that it is most likely to be selected (70%).

In the losing scenario table 222f2, the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the execution timing of "after pending deletion" when the number of pending balls is "0". This is because in order to perform the "suspension change notice" at the execution timing of "after deletion of suspension", it is necessary to perform some kind of effect such as the variable element of "re-fluctuation" after the effect of "reach display" is executed. be. In the first embodiment, after the "ready-to-win display" is performed, the effect of the variable element of "re-fluctuation" is not performed except for the case of a big win, and the "loss display" is determined. Therefore, in the change effect of losing, there is no change element of "re-fluctuation" that confirms the jackpot after the effect of "reach display", so the execution pattern (holding pattern) is re-displayed after "reach display" If the "holding change notice" is executed at the timing of , a discrepancy in the performance will occur. Therefore, in order to prevent such an event from occurring, the scenario counter 223d is set so as not to be allocated to the execution timing of "after pending erasure".

Then, as shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 19" for "at the start" of "0" pending balls, and "before reach" for "0" pending balls. 20 to 39", "40 to 59" for "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, "-" for "after deleting pending" with "0" pending balls, number of pending balls " 1” is “60 to 99”.

That is, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is the number of pending balls "0". "At the start" of 20%, 20% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls The selection ratio is set such that "after pending deletion" is 0% and the number of pending balls is "1" (that is, when the pending pattern is displayed) is 40%.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "1" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variable effect of the loss is "red". The display timing is set so that it is most likely to be selected (40%).

Next, a case will be described in which the number of pending balls in the variable effect is "2" at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" for losing. In this case, the number of held balls "3" or "4" does not exist when the number of held balls "2" occurs. That is, when the number of reserved balls is "2", the reserved symbols with the number of reserved balls of "3" or "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this losing scenario table 222f2, when the number of pending balls is "2" when the "holding change notice" is determined, the number of holding balls becomes "3" or "4" when the "holding change notice" is executed. No value is assigned to the scenario counter 223d (see FIG. 17).

As shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of pending balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "starting" with "0" pending balls, and "10 to 9" for "before reach" with "0" pending balls. 19", "20 to 29" for "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, "-" for "after deleting pending" with "0" pending balls, and "1" pending balls It is "30 to 39" for 1, and "40 to 99" for the number of held balls "2".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% "at the start", 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls Selection ratio of 0% for "after deletion of pending", 10% for "1" pending balls (i.e., when shifting pending patterns), and 60% for "2" pending balls (i.e., when displaying pending patterns) is set to be

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variable effect of the loss is "blue". The display timing is set so that it is most likely to be selected (60%).

Next, when the number of pending balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" shown in the example of FIG. 17 is "2" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing and scenario of the "holding change notice" Correlation with the value of the counter 223d is "0 to 19" for "starting" when the number of held balls is "0", and "20 to 39" for "before reaching" when the number of held balls is "0". ", "40 to 59" for "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, "-" for "after erasing" with "0" pending balls, "1" pending balls "60 to 69" for the number of balls held, and "70 to 99" for the number of held balls "2".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "2" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". "At the start" of 20%, 20% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls Selection ratio of 0% for "after deletion of pending", 10% for "1" pending balls (i.e., when shifting pending patterns), and 30% for "2" pending balls (i.e., when displaying pending patterns) is set to be

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "2" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variable effect of the loss is "red". The display timing is set so that it is most likely to be selected (30%).

Next, a case will be described in which the number of pending balls in the variable effect is "3" at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" of loss. In this case, the number of held balls "4" does not exist when the number of held balls "3" occurs. That is, when the number of reserved balls is "3", the reserved symbols with the number of reserved balls of "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this losing scenario table 222f2, when the number of pending balls is "3" when the "holding change notice" is determined, the scenario counter 223d for the number of holding balls of "4" when the "holding change notice" is executed is not assigned (see FIG. 17).

As shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of pending balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "starting" with "0" pending balls, and "10 to 9" for "before reach" with "0" pending balls. 19", "20 to 29" for "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, "-" for "after deleting pending" with "0" pending balls, and "1" pending balls "30 to 39" for 1, "40 to 49" for the number of held balls "2", and "50 to 99" for the number of held balls "3".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% "at the start", 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls "After pending deletion" is 0%, the number of pending balls is "1" (that is, at the time of pending pattern shift) is 10%, the number of pending balls is "2" (that is, at the time of pending pattern shift) is 10%, the number of pending balls It is set so that the selection ratio is 50% for "3" (that is, when the reserved symbols are displayed).

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variable performance of the loss is The display timing is set so that it is most likely to be selected (50%).

Then, as shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 19" for "at the start" of "0" pending balls, and "before reach" for "0" pending balls. 20 to 39", "40 to 59" for "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, "-" for "after deleting pending" with "0" pending balls, number of pending balls " "60 to 69" for 1", "70 to 79" for the number of held balls of "2", and "80 to 99" for the number of held balls of "3".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "3" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". "At the start" of 20%, 20% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls "After pending deletion" is 0%, the number of pending balls is "1" (i.e., when shifting the pending pattern) is 10%, the number of pending balls is "2" (i.e., when shifting the pending pattern) is 10%, the pending pattern is " 3" (that is, when the reserved symbols are displayed) is set to have a selection ratio of 20%.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "3" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variable effect of the loss is "red". It is set so that the timing at the time of display and "at the start", "before reach" or "after reach" of the variable effect are easily selected (each 20%).

Next, a case will be described where the number of pending balls in the variable effect at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" for losing is "4".

As shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "starting" with "0" pending balls, and "10 to 9" for "before reach" with "0" pending balls. 19", "20 to 29" for "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, "-" for "after deleting pending" with "0" pending balls, and "1" pending balls "30 to 39" for 1 ball, "40 to 49" for 2 balls on hold, 50 to 59 for 3 balls on hold, 4 balls on hold On the other hand, it is "60 to 99".

That is, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is the number of held balls "0". 10% "at the start", 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls "After pending deletion" is 0%, the number of pending balls is "1" (that is, at the time of pending pattern shift) is 10%, the number of pending balls is "2" (that is, at the time of pending pattern shift) is 10%, the number of pending balls The selection ratio is set to 10% for "3" (that is, when the reserved symbols are shifted) and 40% for "4" reserved symbols (that is, when the reserved symbols are displayed).

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variable performance of the loss is The display timing is set so that it is most likely to be selected (40%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 19" for "at the start" of "0" pending balls, and "before reach" for "0" pending balls. 20 to 39", "40 to 59" for "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, "-" for "after deleting pending" with "0" pending balls, number of pending balls " "60 to 69" for 1", "70 to 79" for the number of held balls "2", "80 to 89" for the number of held balls "3", "4" for the number of held balls It is "90 to 99" for each.

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "3" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". "At the start" of 20%, 20% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls "After pending deletion" is 0%, the number of pending balls is "1" (i.e., when shifting the pending pattern) is 10%, the number of pending balls is "2" (i.e., when shifting the pending pattern) is 10%, the pending pattern is " The selection ratio is set to 10% for 3" (that is, when the reserved symbols are shifted) and 10% for 4" reserved symbols (that is, when the reserved symbols are displayed).

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "4" and the display mode is "red", the variable effect "At the start", "before reaching" or "after reaching" are set to be easily selected (each 20%).

In this way, even if the same "holding change notice (for example," blue ")" is different at the time of losing the variable production and at the time of the big hit, the execution timing (appearance timing) is different, so that the "holding change notice , and the timing at which the display mode appears. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the suggested content of the degree of expectation for a big win by the "suspension change notice" according to the display mode and appearance timing of the "suspension change notice", thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 14, the description continues. The character pattern counter 223e is a counter for selecting the types of character patterns of the character display Se1 during reach occurrence and the during reach character display Se2 appearing in the "reach display". As described above, in the first embodiment, the "weak pattern" or the "strong pattern" can be displayed as the character patterns of the character display Se1 during reach occurrence and the character display Se2 during reach. Upon receiving the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the sound lamp control device 113 performs variation effect processing (see FIG. 44), which will be described later, and changes the character pattern counter 223e and the character pattern table 222g. By using it, the contents of the character patterns of the character displays Se1 and Se2 appearing during the "ready-to-reach display" are drawn.

This character pattern counter 223e is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99") in the counter updating process (see S1111 in FIG. 41) of the main process of the sound lamp control device 113, and the maximum value is (For example, in the case of a counter that can take a value from "0 to 99", it returns to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the character pattern counter 223e is updated (eg, incremented by 1) once (see S1111 in FIG. 41) each time the main process loops. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received from the main control device 110, the character pattern counter is set according to the effect mode of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command and the stop type command. By referring to the value of 223e and the character pattern table 222g, the contents of the character patterns of the character display Se1 during reach occurrence and the character display Se2 during reach are determined (see FIG. 46).

Here, the character pattern table 222g will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with, as the character pattern table 222g, a character pattern table for big win 222g1 that is referred to at the time of a big win, and a character pattern table for loss 222g2 that is referred to at the time of a loss. FIG. 18 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot character pattern table 222g1.

In the first embodiment, the audio ramp control device 113, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110, when executing any "reach display" in the variation effect of the third symbol, Either the character pattern table for big win 222g1 or the character pattern table for losing 222g2 is referred to depending on whether or not it is a big win, and the value of the character pattern counter 223e at that time and the type of "ready-to-win display" (type of effect mode) ), and the contents of the character patterns (“weak pattern” or “strong pattern”) of the character display Se1 during reach occurrence and the character display Se2 during reach appearing in the “reach display” are determined.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, character displays Se1 and Se2 of "weak pattern" are displayed as character patterns as the initial settings of the character display Se1 during reach occurrence and the character display Se2 during reach, respectively, and the display color , the characters Se1 and Se2 of "white" are displayed. Therefore, the lottery of the character display Se1 during reach occurrence and the character display Se2 during reach occurrence by the character pattern table 222g and the character pattern counter 223e determines whether or not to change the initial setting of the character display Se1 during reach occurrence and character display Se2 during reach occurrence. A lottery will be held.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the big-win character pattern table 222g1, the vertical rows are the production modes selected at the time of the big win ("normal reach" production mode, "super reach" production mode, "special reach" production mode and "special It is grouped for each “variation” effect mode).

Specifically, as the effect mode, "E5: normal reach" referred when the "normal reach" effect mode is determined, and "E6: super reach" referred when the "super reach" effect mode is determined for "reach", for "E7: special reach" that is referred to when the "special reach" production mode is determined, and "E8: special variation" that is referred to when the "special variation" performance mode is determined It is divided into for and for. A possible value of the character pattern counter 223e is associated with each of the divided effect mode groups.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the horizontal column of the character pattern table for big win 222g1 indicates the timing at which the character display appears in the variable display, that is, the timing at which the character display Se1 appears at the time of the ready-to-win event. "During reach" at the timing when the reaching character display Se2 appears, "at the time of temporary stop" at the timing at which the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 appears, and "at the time of stop" at the timing at which the fixed phrase character display Se3 appears , are associated with character patterns of character display that appear every four patterns.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21, the appearance timing of each character display Se1 to Se4 in the variable effect will be described. FIG. 20 is a time chart showing an example of a variation effect of a variation pattern that does not include the variation element of "re-variation", FIG. FIG. 20B is a time chart showing the appearance timing of each character display Se1-Se3, and FIG. 20B shows the appearance timing of each character display Se1-Se3 in "only super reach ("E301H" or "E601H")". FIG. 20(c) is a time chart showing the appearance timing of each character display Se1 to Se3 in "only special reach ("E401H" or "E701H")".

On the other hand, FIG. 21 is a time chart showing an example of the variation effect of the variation pattern including the variation element of "re-variation", and FIG. FIG. 21(b) is a time chart showing the appearance timings of the character displays Se1 to Se4, and FIG. 21(b) is a time chart showing the appearance timings of the character displays Se1 to Se4 in "Super reach + re-fluctuation ("E605H")". FIG. 21(c) is a time chart showing the appearance timing of each character display Se1 to Se4 in "Special Reach + Re-fluctuation ("E705H")". In addition, in each time chart, the upper part of the time chart shows the variable elements in the variable production and events such as the stoppage of the pattern with the number of seconds, and the lower part of the time chart shows each character that appears in the variable production. The names of Se1 to Se4 are described according to each appearance timing.

20 and 21, "at the time of occurrence of reach" is a character display at the time of occurrence of reach at the timing when the change element of "normal reach" occurs after the change element of "low speed change" is completed in the variable effect. It shows that Se1 appears. That is, at the timing indicated by "at the time of occurrence of reach", the character display Se1 at the time of occurrence of reach is emitted from the character pattern displayed in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds at the time when the variable element of "normal reach" occurs. displayed as

In the first embodiment, the character display Se1 at the time of occurrence of reach, which is displayed at the time of occurrence of reach, is "weak pattern" as "go!" Two types are available. In addition, this pachinko machine 10, when any of the "reach display ("normal reach" variable element, "super reach" variable element or "special reach" variable element) occurs, always "normal reach" fluctuation Since the element is executed, in the variable effect in which the "ready-to-win display" is executed, the character display Se1 at the time of the ready-to-win is always displayed at "at the time of the occurrence of the ready-to-win".

20 and 21, "during reach" means that the "super reach" variable element or the "special reach" variable element is being executed in the variable performance, and the "jackpot display" or "losing display" is performed. ” indicates that the in-reach character display Se2 appears at the timing just before the “end effect” indicating the content suggesting “. That is, at the timing indicated by this "during reach", the character pattern on the player side is directed to the character pattern on the enemy side before the "end effect" in the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach". It is displayed so that the in-reach character display Se2 is emitted.

In the first embodiment, two types of reach-in-progress character display Se2 displayed in the "reach-in progress" are prepared: "Kurae!" as a "weak pattern" and "Stop!" ing. In this pachinko machine 10, in the variation pattern in which the display result of the variable effect appears after the execution of the variable element of "normal reach" (that is, the variation pattern when the effect mode of "E5: normal reach" is selected), Since the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is not executed, the character display Se2 during reach in the above "during reach" is not displayed (not selected).

Next, the "symbol temporary stop" shown in the example of FIG. It shows that the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 appears in the displayed state and at the timing before the variable element of "re-variation" is executed. That is, at the timing indicated by the "temporary stop of the pattern", when the variable element of the "ready-to-win display" ends, the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 is emitted from the character pattern displayed in the central small region Ds2 of the sub-display region Ds. displayed as

In the first embodiment, the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 displayed in the "temporary stop of the pattern" is displayed corresponding to the display result of the third pattern temporarily displayed in the main display area Dm. It is configured. Specifically, one type of character display of "I'm sorry..." corresponding to the "losing display" is prepared, and no character display corresponding to the "big win display" is prepared. This is because, in the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, the pseudo-fixed phrase character display Se4 appears only in the provisional "losing display" temporarily displayed in the variable performance, and the pseudo-fixed phrase character display Se4 appears. This is because the variable element of "re-variation" is always performed later, and the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 by "jackpot display" does not exist.

Next, the “symbol stop” shown in the examples of FIGS. 20 and 21 is performed in the main display area Dm after any of the “reach display” variable element or the “re-variation” variable element is executed in the variable effect. It shows that the standard phrase character display Se3 appears at the timing when the "big hit display" or the "losing display" which is determined and displayed is displayed. That is, at the timing indicated by "symbol stop", when the variable element of "reach display" or the variable element of "re-variation" ends, the character pattern displayed in the central small region Ds2 of the sub-display region Ds is changed to the fixed pattern. A phrase display Se3 is displayed so that it is emitted.

In the first embodiment, the fixed phrase character display Se3 displayed in the "symbol stop" is configured to be displayed corresponding to the display result of the third symbol confirmed and displayed in the main display area Dm. . Specifically, two types of character display are prepared: "I did it!" corresponding to the "big win display" and "I'm sorry..." corresponding to the "losing display". Therefore, the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 corresponding to the provisional "failure display" at "temporary stop" and the fixed phrase character display Se3 corresponding to "failure display" at "stop" are the same. It is configured to be displayed in content.

The fixed phrase character display Se3 and the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 displayed in the "symbol stop" and "symbol temporary stop" are not provided with the "weak pattern" and "strong pattern" as character patterns. This is because the timing of the "symbol stop" is after the "extraordinary effect" is executed in the variable effect, and the "big win display" or "losing display" of the variable effect is determined. Therefore, the fixed phrase character display Se3 displayed in "symbol stop" may only have contents that directly express the display result of the variable effect, and it is necessary to provide a character pattern such as "strong pattern" that is highly expected to hit the jackpot. It is because they lack sexuality. In addition, since the timing of "temporary stop of design" is to display "temporary stop of design" itself and "stop of design" in a pseudo manner, the content of "temporary stop of design" and the usage of "stop of design" are consistent. need to let Therefore, the character pattern of the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 and the character pattern of the fixed phrase character display Se3 are configured to match each other.

Returning to FIG. 18, the description continues. Here, allocation of the character pattern counter 223e for each effect mode in the big win character pattern table 222g1 will be specifically described. As shown in the example of FIG. 18, when the "E5: normal reach" effect mode is selected, the correspondence between the character pattern and the character pattern counter 223e at each timing is "weak" of "at the time of reach occurrence". "0 to 9" for the character pattern of "pattern", and "10 to 99" for the character pattern of "strong pattern" of "when reach occurs".

That is, in the variable effect of "E5: normal reach", the selection ratio of the "weak pattern" character pattern "at the time of reach occurrence" is 10%, and the "strong pattern" character pattern "at the time of reach occurrence" is 90%. is set to be

Therefore, when the effect mode of "E5: normal reach" is selected in the variation effect of the jackpot, the character pattern of "strong pattern" of "at the time of occurrence of reach" is set to occur most easily (90%). .

It should be noted that when the effect mode of "E5: normal reach" is selected, the value of the character pattern counter 223e is not assigned to the timing of "during reach". This is because, as described above, when character display is made to appear at the timing of "during reach", the character pattern on the player's side in the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is displayed. However, in the production mode with only the variable element of "normal reach", the character pattern on the player side is not displayed, so the characters emitted from the character pattern on the player side at the execution timing of "during reach" This is because the display cannot be displayed.

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 18, when the effect mode of "E6: super reach" is selected, the correspondence between the character pattern and the character pattern counter 223e at each timing is "at the time of occurrence of reach". is "weak pattern" and "reaching" is "weak pattern", "0 to 9", "when reach occurs" is "weak pattern", and "reaching" is "strong pattern" ” for the character pattern “10 to 29”, “when reach occurs” is “strong pattern”, and “during reach” is “weak pattern” for character pattern “30 to 49”, “reach occurs "Time" is "strong pattern" and "reaching" is "50 to 99" for the character pattern of "strong pattern".

That is, in the variable effect of "E6: Super reach", the character pattern of "weak pattern" is 10% for both "when reach occurs" and "during reach", and "when reach occurs" is "weak pattern" and " 20% of the character patterns are "strong pattern" when reachable, 20% are "strong pattern" when reachable and 20% are "weak pattern" when reachable. The selection ratio is set such that 50% of the character patterns are both "reachable" and "strong pattern".

Therefore, when the effect mode of "E6: Super reach" is selected in the variation effect of the jackpot, the character pattern of "strong pattern" is most likely to occur for both "when reach occurs" and "during reach" (50% ) is set as

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 18, when the effect mode of "E7: Special Reach" is selected, the correspondence between the character pattern and the character pattern counter 223e at each timing is set to "When Reach Occurs". "0 to 9" for character patterns that are "weak pattern" and "reaching" is "weak pattern", "when reach occurs" is "weak pattern" and "reaching" is "strong pattern" "10 to 39" for the character pattern, "when reach occurs" is "strong pattern", and "during reach" is "weak pattern" for character pattern "40 to 69", "when reach occurs " is "strong pattern" and "reaching" is "70 to 99" with respect to the character pattern of "strong pattern".

That is, in the variable effect of "E7: Super reach", the character pattern of "weak pattern" is 10% for both "when reach occurs" and "during reach", and "when reach occurs" is "weak pattern" and " 30% of the character patterns are "strong pattern" when reachable, 30% are "strong pattern" when reachable and 30% are "weak pattern" when reachable. The selection ratio is set such that 30% of the character patterns are both "reachable" and "strong pattern".

Therefore, when the production mode of "E7: special reach" is selected in the variation production of the jackpot, the character pattern "at the time of occurrence of reach" and "during reach" is a character pattern other than the "weak pattern", that is, "at the time of occurrence of reach". is a "weak pattern" and "reaching" is a "strong pattern" character pattern, "when reach occurs" is a "strong pattern" and "reaching" is a "weak pattern" character pattern, or " It is set so that the character patterns of "strong pattern" are equally likely to be selected (both 30%) for both "at the time of occurrence of reach" and "during reach".

As shown in the example of FIG. 18, when the effect mode of "E8: special variation" is selected, the variable element of "movie" is executed in the variable effect, and any other than the standard phrase character display Se3 is displayed. No character display appears. Therefore, since it is not necessary to determine the "weak pattern" or "strong pattern" in each character display Se1, Se2, the value of the character pattern counter 223e is not associated. Therefore, the character pattern counter 223e corresponding to the effect mode of "E8: special variation" is indicated as "-".

In the present embodiment, since no character display appears in "E8: special variation", it is not necessary to provide a division (group) for "E8: special variation" in the jackpot character pattern table 222g1. Further, as described above, the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 that appears at the timing of "temporary stop of the pattern" and the fixed phrase character display Se3 that appears at the timing of "stop the pattern" have a single character pattern. Therefore, the character pattern table for big win 222g1 may not be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the character pattern table for failure 222g2 will be described. FIG. 19 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the character pattern table for failure 222g2. As shown in FIG. 19, in the character pattern table for losing 222g2, as in the character pattern table for big win 222g1, the vertical row is selected at the time of losing. They are grouped according to the "reach (normal)" effect mode, the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode, and the "special reach" effect mode.

Specifically, as the production mode, "E0: non-reach (shortened)" which is referred to when the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode is determined, and the "non-reach (normal)" production mode are determined. "E1: non-reach (normal)" referred to when the "normal reach" effect mode is determined, "E2: normal reach" referred to when the "normal reach" effect mode is determined, and "super reach" effect mode is determined. It is divided into "E3: Super Reach" which is referred to when the "Special Reach" effect mode is determined and "E4: Special Reach" which is referred to when the "Special Reach" effect mode is determined. A possible value of the character pattern counter 223e is associated with each of the divided effect mode groups.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19, the horizontal row of the character pattern table for losing 222g2 is arranged for each timing at which the character display appears in the variable display (three patterns of "at the time of reaching", "during reaching", or "symbol stop"). is associated with a character pattern of character display that appears in . It should be noted that, in the case of a loss, since the variable element of "re-variation" is not selected, in the character pattern table for loss 222g2, unlike the character pattern table for big win 222g1, the appearance timing of "symbol temporary stop" is not provided. .

Here, allocation of the character pattern counter 223e for each effect mode in the character pattern table for losing 222g2 will be specifically described. As shown in the example of FIG. 19, when the production modes of "E0: non-reach (shortening)" and "E1: non-reach (normal)" are selected, "reach display" does not occur in the variable production. , none of the character representations Se1 to Se4 appear. Therefore, since it is not necessary to determine the "weak pattern" or "strong pattern" in each character display Se1, Se2, the value of the character pattern counter 223e is not associated. Therefore, the character pattern counter 223e corresponding to the rendering mode of "E0: non-reach (shortened)" and "E1: non-reach (normal)" is indicated by "-".

In the present embodiment, since no character display appears in "E0: non-reach (shortened)" and "E1: non-reach (normal)", "E0: non-reach" (Shortened)” and “E1: Non-reach (Normal)” may be configured so as not to provide divisions (groups).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 19, when the effect mode of "E2: normal reach" is selected, the correspondence between the character pattern and the character pattern counter 223e at each timing is changed to that of "at the time of occurrence of reach". It is "0 to 89" for the "weak pattern" character pattern, and "90 to 99" for the "strong pattern" "at the time of reaching".

That is, in the variable effect of "E2: normal reach", the selection ratio of the "weak pattern" character pattern "at the time of reach occurrence" is 90% and the character pattern "strong pattern" at "at the time of reach occurrence" is 10%. is set to be

Therefore, when the "E2: normal reach" effect mode is selected in the variable effect of losing, the character pattern of "weak pattern" of "when reach occurs" is set to occur most easily (90%). .

It should be noted that when the effect mode of "E2: normal reach" is selected, the value of the character pattern counter 223e is not assigned to the timing of "during reach". This is because, like "E5: normal reach", the character display emitted from the character pattern on the player's side cannot be displayed at the execution timing of "during reach".

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 19, when the effect mode of "E3: super reach" is selected, the correspondence between the character pattern and the character pattern counter 223e at each timing is "at the time of occurrence of reach". is "weak pattern", and "reaching" is "weak pattern", "0 to 69", "when reach occurs" is "weak pattern", and "reaching" is "strong pattern" ” for the character pattern “70 to 84”, “when reach occurs” is “strong pattern”, and “during reach” is “weak pattern” for character pattern “85 to 94”, “reach occurs "Time" is "strong pattern" and "reaching" is "95 to 99" for the character pattern of "strong pattern".

That is, in the variable effect of "E3: Super reach", the character pattern of "weak pattern" is 70% for both "when reach occurs" and "during reach", and "when reach occurs" is "weak pattern" and " 15% of the character patterns are "strong pattern" when reachable, 10% are "strong pattern" when reachable and 10% are "weak pattern" when reachable. The selection ratio is set such that the character pattern of both "reachable" and "strong pattern" is 5%.

Therefore, when the effect mode of "E3: Super reach" is selected in the variable effect of losing, the character pattern of "weak pattern" for "when reach occurs" and "during reach" is most likely to occur (70%). is set to

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 19, when the effect mode of "E4: Special reach" is selected, the correspondence between the character pattern and the character pattern counter 223e at each timing is set to "when reach occurs". "0 to 89" for character patterns that are "weak pattern" and "reaching" is "weak pattern", "when reach occurs" is "weak pattern" and "reaching" is "strong pattern" "90 to 94" for the character pattern, "strong pattern" for "when reaching" and "95 to 97" for the character pattern for "weak pattern" for "reaching", "when reaching " is "strong pattern", and "reaching" is "98, 99" for the character pattern of "strong pattern".

That is, in the variable effect of "E4: Super reach", 90% of the character patterns are "weak patterns" for both "when reach occurs" and "during reach", and "weak pattern" is used for "when reach occurs" and " 5% of the character patterns are "strong pattern" when reachable, 3% are "strong pattern" when "reachable" is "weak pattern", 3% are "when reachable" and "weak pattern". The selection ratio is set such that the character pattern of both "reachable" and "strong pattern" is 2%.

Therefore, when the effect mode of "E4: special reach" is selected in the variable effect of losing, the character pattern with "weak pattern" for "when reach occurs" and "during reach" is most likely to occur (90%). is set to

In this pachinko machine 10, the ``super reach'' performance mode or the ``special reach'' performance mode is set as a performance mode that is difficult to select at the time of losing and easy to be selected at the time of big win. Therefore, when the "super reach" production mode or "special reach" production mode at the time of losing is selected, if the character display of "strong pattern" appears in "when reach occurs" or "during reach", In spite of the situation in which a loss appears as a result of the variable performance, a ``super reach'' performance mode or a ``special reach'' performance mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is executed, and a ``reach generation'' with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is executed. By witnessing the character display of ``strong pattern'' during ``time'' or ``reaching'', the player's expectation for a big win is excessively increased. Then, in a state in which the player's expectation for the big win is high, if the "losing display" appears in the variable effect, the player will have a high expected value for the big win ("Super Reach" effect mode, etc. + each character Due to the high possibility of the appearance of the "big win display" due to the combination of the "strong pattern" of the displays Se1 and Se2, the appearance of the "losing display" stunned the interest. It may interrupt the game.

Therefore, when the "super reach" production mode or "special reach" production mode at the time of losing is selected, it is configured to make it difficult to select the character display of "strong pattern" in "at the time of occurrence of reach" or "during reach". By doing so, it is possible to reduce the number of cases in which the player loses interest.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to facilitate selection of the "strong pattern" character pattern "at the time of occurrence of reach" or "during reach" at the time of a big win. By configuring in this way, when the "strong pattern" in "when reach occurs" or "during reach" is executed in conjunction with the execution of the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" In this case, it is possible to increase the possibility that the "big win display" appears as a display result of the variable effect. As a result, any display result in the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" after the "strong pattern" in "when reach occurs" or "during reach" appears Appearance or not can dramatically increase interest.

As described above, the standard phrase character display Se3 that appears at the timing of "symbol stop" has a single character pattern. It may be configured so as not to be provided.

Returning to FIG. 14, the description continues. The character color lottery counter 223f is a counter for lottery of the display color of each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 appearing when the "ready-to-win display" is executed in the variation effect of the third symbol. In the first embodiment, the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 is "white" as the normal display color, and "red" as the display color of the first chance-up pattern, which has a higher chance of winning the jackpot than the normal display color. and "gold" as the display color of the second chance-up pattern having a higher chance of winning a big hit than the first chance-up pattern. The sound lamp control device 113, based on the reception of the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, performs a variation effect process (see FIG. 44), which will be described later. 223f and the character color change table 222h, the display color of each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 to be displayed during the "ready-to-reach display" is selected.

This character color lottery counter 223f is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99") in the counter updating process (see S1111 in FIG. 41) of the main process of the sound lamp control device 113. It is configured to return to "0" after reaching a value (for example, "99" in the case of a counter that can take a value from "0 to 99"). The value of the character color lottery counter 223f is updated (eg, incremented by 1) once (see S1111 in FIG. 41) each time the main process loops. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received from the main controller 110, the character color change table 222h is referred to, and the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command and the stop type command and the value of the character color lottery counter 223f, the contents of the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are determined (see FIG. 46).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery of the display color based on the character color lottery counter 223f and the character color change table 222h is won and the jackpot is won, the selected display color is selected. Although there are differences due to change timings (details of change timings will be described later), the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are collectively set. That is, when the display color of one of the character displays Se1 and Se2 is changed, the character colors of the subsequent character displays Se2 to Se4 are displayed in the changed display color.

This is because, as in the first embodiment, when the character displays Se1 to Se4 appear at a plurality of locations of the variable effect, each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 has a chance of "red" or "gold". This is because, in the case of a configuration in which an up pattern is drawn by lottery, the lottery processing for the number of character displays is required, which increases the processing load. In addition, in the character display executed first in the variable effect, after the character display of the chance-up pattern whose display color is changed is displayed, in the character display executed later, the character of the normal pattern other than the chance-up pattern is displayed. If the display is made to appear, it becomes an expression in which the degree of expectation for a big win is lowered (hereinafter referred to as a "downward expression"). This is because there is a risk that you will lose interest by witnessing the expression of the upbringing.

Therefore, the lottery of the display colors is performed collectively in the character display of the variable effect, and if the chance-up pattern appears even once, the chance-up pattern is followed in the subsequent character display to appear. This eliminates the need to perform the lottery process for each character display, thereby reducing the processing load. Further, when a chance-up pattern is set, by following the chance-up pattern in the subsequent character display, the phenomenon of the occurrence of a downgraded expression in the character display can be eliminated in advance, and the player can enjoy the game. It is possible to prevent disappointment. In particular, as the number of character display locations where the chance-up pattern can be executed in the variable effect increases (for example, five locations or more, etc.), the batch lottery works more favorably, and the control load can be significantly reduced. It becomes possible.

Here, the character color change table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the character color change table 222h. The sound lamp control device 113, when executing any of the "ready-to-win display" in the variation effect of the third symbol based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110, this character color change table 222h , based on the value of the character color lottery counter 223f at that time and the type of "ready-to-win display" (type of effect mode), display of character displays Se1 to Se4 appearing in "ready-to-win display" Determine the color (change color). As shown in FIG. 22, the character color change table 222h is grouped based on the selected presentation mode.

Specifically, for "E0: non-reach (shortened)" to be referred to when the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode at the time of loss is determined, and "non-reach (normal)" production mode at the time of loss For "E1: non-reach (normal)" referred to when is determined, "Normal reach" for "E2: normal reach" referred to when the production mode at the time of loss is determined, and " For "E3: Super Reach" that is referred to when the "Super Reach" production mode is determined, and for "E4: Special Reach" that is referenced when the "Special Reach" performance mode at the time of losing is determined, For "E5: normal reach" referred when the "normal reach" production mode at the time of the big hit is determined, and for "E6: super reach" referred when the "super reach" performance mode at the time of the big win is determined , "E7: Special reach" referred to when the "special reach" production mode at the time of the big hit is determined, and "E8: It is divided into "for special fluctuation" and "for special fluctuation". A possible value of the character color lottery counter 223f is associated with each divided group.

In the first embodiment, character displays Se1 and Se2 do not appear in "E0: non-reach (shortened)", "E1: non-reach (normal)", and "E8: special variation". , in the character color change table 222h, the value of the character color lottery counter 223f is not assigned to "E0: non-reach (shortened)", "E1: non-reach (normal)" and "E8: special variation". The classification (group) of "E0: non-reach (shortened)", "E1: non-reach (normal)", and "E8: special variation" may be configured not to be provided in the character color change table 222h. .

In the character color change table 222h, in "E2: normal reach" at the time of failure, the display color (change color) of the character display Se1 to Se4 is one of "none" that does not change from the normal display color ("white"). A display mode is configured to be selected. That is, in "E2: normal reach", the character color lottery counter is set so that the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are not selected from "red" which changes to red and "gold" which changes to gold. 223f values are not associated. Therefore, in the first embodiment, when the effect mode of "E2: normal reach" is selected, only "none ("white")" in which the colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 do not change is selected. The display colors of Se1 to Se4 do not change.

That is, in the first embodiment, the "red" display color of the character displays Se1 to Se4 is selected only in the "super reach or higher" production mode at the time of the big win or the loss, or the "normal reach" production mode at the time of the big win. , "Red" character displays Se1 to Se4 are not selected in the "Normal Reach" effect mode at the time of losing. As a result, when the ``red'' character displays Se1 to Se4 appear, it is confirmed that the ``super reach or higher'' presentation mode at the time of the big hit or the loss or the ``normal reach'' presentation mode at the time of the big win is selected. is configured as Note that the classification (group) of "E2: normal reach" may be configured so as not to be provided in the text color change table 222h.

In the character color change table 222h, at "E3: Super Reach" at the time of failure, the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 change from the normal display color ("white") to "none" and to red. Three display modes, ie, "red" and "golden" which changes to gold, are selectably prepared, and each display mode is associated with a possible value of the character color lottery counter 223f.

In the example shown in FIG. 22, the correspondence between the value of the character color lottery counter 223f and the display color (changing color) of the character display in "E3: Super Reach" is "0 to 89", " "90 to 98" for "red" and "99" for "gold".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of losing is selected, the display color of "none ("white")" in the character displays Se1 to Se4 is 90%, the display color of "red" is 9%, and the display color of "red" is 9%. It is set so that the display color "golden" is selected at a rate of 1%.

Therefore, the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 selected in the "super ready-to-win" rendering mode at the time of losing are set (90%) so that "none" in which the display color does not change is likely to be selected.

In the character color change table 222h, at "E4: Special Reach" at the time of failure, the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 change from the normal display color ("white") to "none" and to red. Three display modes, ie, "red" and "golden" which changes to gold, are selectably prepared, and each display mode is associated with a possible value of the character color lottery counter 223f.

In the example shown in FIG. 22, the correspondence between the value of the character color lottery counter 223f and the display color (change color) of the character display in "E4: Special reach" is "0 to 79", " "80 to 98" for "red" and "99" for "gold".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of losing is selected, the display color of "none ("white")" in the character displays Se1 to Se4 is 80%, the display color of "red" is 19%, and the display color of "red" is 19%. It is set so that the display color "golden" is selected at a rate of 1%.

Therefore, the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 that are selected in the "special reach" rendering mode at the time of losing are set (80%) so that the display color does not change and "none" is likely to be selected.

In the character color change table 222h, in "E5: normal reach" at the time of the big win, the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are "none", which does not change from the normal display color ("white"), and "no", which changes to red. There are three selectable display modes, "red" and "golden" that changes to gold, and each display mode is associated with a possible value of the character color lottery counter 223f.

In the example shown in FIG. 22, the correspondence between the value of the character color lottery counter 223f and the display color (change color) of the character display in "E5: normal reach" is "0 to 29", "red " is "30-89", and "gold" is "90-99".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of the big hit is selected, the display color of "none ("white")" in the character displays Se1 to Se4 is 30%, the display color of "red" is 60%, and the display color is "golden ” is set to be selected at a rate of 10%.

Therefore, the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 selected in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of the big hit are set so that the display color of "red" is easily selected (60%), so the character displays Se1 to Se4 is set so that the display color of is easily changed.

In the character color change table 222h, at "E6: Super Reach" at the time of the big win, the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 change from the normal display color ("white") to "none" and to red. Three display modes, ie, "red" and "golden" which changes to gold, are selectably prepared, and each display mode is associated with a possible value of the character color lottery counter 223f.

In the example shown in FIG. 22, the correspondence between the value of the character color lottery counter 223f and the display color (change color) of the character display in "E6: Super Reach" is "0 to 19", " "20 to 79" for "red" and "80 to 99" for "gold".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of the big hit is selected, the display color of "none ("white") for the character displays Se1 to Se4 is 30%, the display color of "red" is 60%, and the display color of "red" is 60%. It is set so that the display color "golden" is selected at a rate of 10%.

Therefore, the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 selected in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of the big hit are set so that the display color of "red" is easily selected (60%). The display color of Se4 is set to change easily.

In the character color change table 222h, at "E7: Special Reach" at the time of the big win, the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 change from the normal display color ("white") to "none" and to red. Three display modes, ie, "red" and "golden" which changes to gold, are selectably prepared, and each display mode is associated with a possible value of the character color lottery counter 223f.

In the example shown in FIG. 22, the correspondence between the value of the character color lottery counter 223f and the display color (changing color) of the character display in "E7: Special reach" is "0 to 9", " "10 to 69" for "red" and "70 to 99" for "gold".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of the big hit is selected, the display color of "none ("white")" of the character displays Se1 to Se4 is 10%, the display color of "red" is 60%, and the display color of "red" is 60%. It is set so that the display color "golden" is selected at a rate of 30%.

Therefore, the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 selected in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of the big hit are set so that the display color of "red" is easily selected (60%). The display color of Se4 is set to change easily.

Therefore, the display color of the character displays Se1 to Se4 at the time of losing is, for example, when the number of reserved balls in the "normal game state" is the first, that is, when the effect mode is selected by the A table 202d1, the character The display colors of the displays Se1 to Se4 are selected at a rate of 99.3% for "no change", which remains "white", 0.65% for "red", and 0.05% for "gold". In addition, the display color of the character displays Se1 to Se4 at the time of the big win is, for example, when the "15R probability variable jackpot" is won, that is, when the effect mode is selected by the C table 202d3, the display color of the character displays Se1 to Se4 However, 14.5% of the selections are "none", which remains "white", 60% are "red", and 25.5% are "gold". Therefore, when the jackpot lottery of the third symbol is won, "red" or "gold" is likely to be selected among the character displays Se1 to Se4 appearing in the "ready-to-win display", and "none" is selected. On the other hand, when the jackpot lottery is lost, "none" is likely to be selected, and "red" and "golden" are less likely to be selected.

In this pachinko machine 10, the ``super reach'' performance mode or the ``special reach'' performance mode is set as a performance mode that is difficult to select at the time of losing and easy to be selected at the time of big win. Therefore, when the "super reach" production mode or the "special reach" production mode at the time of losing is selected, the display colors of the character displays Se1 and Se2 displayed during "when the reach occurs" or "during the reach" are changed to the big hit. If it is displayed in “red” or “gold” with a high degree of expectation, the degree of expectation for a big win will be excessively increased in spite of the change effect of the loss. In a state where the expectation of the jackpot is high, if the "losing display" appears in the variable production, the production with a high expected value of the jackpot ("super reach" production mode, etc. + "red" of each character display Se1, Se2, etc. ), the player who is strongly agitated by the high possibility of the appearance of the "big win display" may lose interest due to the appearance of the "losing display" and may interrupt the game. be.

Therefore, when the "super reach" production mode or "special reach" production mode at the time of losing is selected, the display colors of the character displays Se1 and Se2 displayed during "reach" or "during reach" are " By making it difficult to select "red" or "gold", it is possible to reduce the number of cases in which the player loses interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, regarding the display colors of the character displays Se1 and Se2 that are displayed during "reaching" and "reaching", "red" and "gold" are selected more at the time of a big hit than at the time of a loss. configured to be easy. By configuring in this way, coupled with the execution of the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach", the character displays Se1 and Se2 in "when reach occurs" or "during reach" are "red" Alternatively, when it is executed in "golden color", it is possible to increase the possibility of "big win display" appearing as a display result of the variable effect. As a result, after the display colors of the character displays Se1 and Se2 change in "at the time of reaching" or "during reach", either It is possible to dramatically increase interest in whether or not the display result of .

Furthermore, when the character pattern of "strong pattern" in "at the time of occurrence of reach" or "during reach" is combined with a change in display color, the possibility that "big hit display" will appear as a display result of the variable effect is further increased. can be enhanced. As a result, when "at the time of reaching" or "during reaching", "strong pattern" as a character pattern and "red" or "gold" as a display color appear Variable elements of "super reach" or "special reach" , the interest in which display result will appear can be further heightened.

Returning to FIG. 14, the description continues. The color change timing counter 223g is a character display Se1 when a reach occurs and a character display Se2 during a reach (hereinafter referred to as a character display Se1 when a reach occurs and a reach This is a counter for randomly selecting the timing of changing (changing) the display color of the middle character display Se2, which may be collectively referred to as "each character display Se1, Se2".

That is, when the character color lottery counter 223f and the character color change table 222h win a lottery for changing the display colors of the character displays Se1 and Se2 (for example, the character color lottery counter value is within the range of "10" to "99"), according to the winning (selected) display color, the display color is changed at the appearance timing of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence, or At the timing when the in-reach character display Se2 appears, it is determined by lottery whether the display color is to be changed.

Specifically, the sound lamp control device 113 performs a variation effect process (see FIG. 44) described later based on the reception of the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, and in the variation effect process , the color change timing counter 223g and the color change timing table 222i are used to select the timing for changing the display colors of the character displays Se1 and Se2.

This color change timing counter 223g is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99") in the counter updating process (see S1111 in FIG. 41) of the main process of the sound lamp control device 113, and reaches the maximum value. It is configured to return to "0" after reaching a value (for example, "99" in the case of a counter that can take a value from "0 to 99"). The value of the color change timing counter 223g is updated (eg, incremented by 1) once (see S1111 in FIG. 41) each time the main process loops. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when receiving the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the color change timing counter according to the effect mode of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command and the stop type command By referring to the value of 223g and the color change timing table 222i, the change timing of the display color in each of the character displays Se1 and Se2 is determined (see FIG. 46).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the display colors of the character displays Se1 and Se2 are changed based on the lottery by the color change timing counter 223g and the color change timing table 222i, the changed In the display colors of the character displays Se2 to Se4 that appear after the character displays Se1 and Se2 that have been changed, the display colors of the changed character displays Se1 and Se2 are inherited (followed).

By constructing in this manner, it is not necessary to perform lottery processing for each character lottery, the processing load can be reduced, and the display color of each character display Se1, Se2 increases the chance of "red" or "gold". When a pattern is set, the chance-up pattern can be followed and displayed in the character display thereafter, and the occurrence of an expression of downfall in the character display can be prevented. Further, by collectively determining the change timings of the display colors of the character displays Se1 and Se2 by lottery, the display colors can be determined with simpler control than by drawing lots for the change of the display colors of the character displays Se1 and Se2. It is possible to diversify the change pattern and enhance the interest of the game.

Here, the color change timing table 222i will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the color change timing table 222i. The sound lamp control device 113, when executing any of the "ready-to-win display" in the variation effect of the third symbol based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110, this color change timing table 222i , based on the effect mode (type of "reach display") of the variable effect indicated by the variation pattern command and the stop type command, and the value of the color change timing counter 223g at that time, in the "reach display" A change timing for changing the display color of each of the character displays Se1 and Se2 to appear is determined. As shown in FIG. 23, the color change timing table 222i is grouped based on the selected effect mode and the determined display colors (change colors) of the character displays Se1 and Se2.

Specifically, at the time of losing, for "red" and "golden" in "E0: non-reach (shortened)" referred to when the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode is determined, "E1: non-reach (normal)" referred to when the reach (normal) production mode is determined, and for "red" and "gold" in "Normal reach (normal)" Referred when the "normal reach" production mode is determined For "Red" and "Gold" in "E2: Normal Reach", and for "Red" and "Gold" in "E3: Super Reach" that is referred to when the "Super Reach" production mode is determined , and for “red” and “gold” in “E4: Special reach” which is referred to when the “Special reach” effect mode is determined. A possible value of the color change timing counter 223g is associated with each divided group.

Also, at the time of the jackpot, refer to when the "normal reach" production mode is determined, and for "red" and "gold" in "E5: normal reach", and when the "super reach" production mode is determined For "red" and "gold" in "E6: Super Reach", and for "red" and "gold" in "E7: Special Reach" that is referred to when the "Special Reach" production mode is determined and for "red" and "gold" in "E8: special variation" which is referred to when the "special variation" effect mode is determined. A possible value of the color change timing counter 223g is associated with each divided group.

In the first embodiment, "E0: non-reach (shortened)", "E1: non-reach (normal)" and "E8: special variation" are configured so that the character displays Se1 and Se2 do not appear, In the color change timing table 222i, the values of the color change timing counter 223g are not assigned to "E0: non-reach (shortening)", "E1: non-reach (normal)" and "E8: special variation". In addition, in "E2: Normal Reach" at the time of losing, the lottery for changing the color of each character display Se1, Se2 is not won (see FIG. 22), and the display color of each character display Se1, Se2 is not changed. The value of the color change timing counter 223g is not assigned to "E2: normal reach" in the color change timing table 222i.

In the first embodiment, "E0: non-reach (shortening)", "E1: non-reach (normal)", "E2: normal reach" and "E8: special variation" do not display characters, or , the display color of the character display does not change, so the color change timing table 222i shows "E0: non-reach (shortening)", "E1: non-reach (normal)", "E2: normal reach" and "E8: special variation". It may be configured so as not to provide division (group).

In the color change timing table 222i, when the "red" display color is won in "E3: Super Reach" at the time of losing, there are two change timings, "At the time of occurrence of Reach" and "During Reach", as the change timing. are prepared to be selectable, and each change timing is associated with a possible value of the color change timing counter 223g.

In the example shown in FIG. 23, the correspondence between the value of the color change timing counter 223g and the change timing in the display color of "red" in "E3: Super Reach" is "0 to 9" with respect to "When Reach Occurs". , and "10-99" for "Reaching".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of losing is selected and "red" is selected as the display color of the character display, the change timing of the display color of the character display is "at the time of occurrence of reach". It is set so that the timing is selected at a rate of 10% and the change timing of "reaching" is selected at a rate of 90%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of losing, when "red" is selected as the display color of the character display, during the reach character display Se2 displayed during the execution of the variable element of "super reach" is displayed, the display color of the in-reach character display Se2 is set to be easily changed to "red" (90%).

Next, in the color change timing table 222i, when the "golden" display color is won in "E3: Super Reach" at the time of losing, there are two change timings, "At the time of occurrence of Reach" and "During Reach". Change timings are prepared to be selectable, and each change timing is associated with a possible value of the color change timing counter 223g.

In the example shown in FIG. 23, the correspondence between the value of the color change timing counter 223g and the change timing in the display color of "gold" in "E3: Super Reach" is "0, 1" with respect to "When Reach Occurs". , and “reaching” are “2 to 99”.

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of failure is selected and "gold" is selected as the display color of the character display, the change timing of the display color of the character display is "at the time of occurrence of reach". It is set so that the timing is selected at a rate of 2% and the change timing of "reaching" is selected at a rate of 98%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of losing, when "gold" is selected as the display color of the character display, the character display Se2 during reach displayed during the execution of the variable element of "super reach" is displayed, the display color of the in-reach character display Se2 is set to be easily changed to "golden" (98%).

Next, in the color change timing table 222i, when the "red" display color is won in "E4: special reach" at the time of losing, two change timings, "at the time of reach occurrence" and "during reach", are displayed. Selectable change timings are provided, and each change timing is associated with a value that the color change timing counter 223g can take.

In the example shown in FIG. 23, the correspondence between the value of the color change timing counter 223g and the change timing in the display color of "red" in "E4: Special Reach" is "0 to 4" with respect to "When Reach Occurs". , and “reaching” are “5 to 99”.

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of failure is selected and "red" is selected as the display color of the character display, the change timing of the display color of the character display is "at the time of occurrence of reach". is set to be selected at a rate of 5%, and the change timing of "reaching" is 95%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" production mode at the time of losing, when "red" is selected as the display color of the character display, the character display Se2 during reach displayed during the execution of the variable element of "special reach" is displayed, the display color of the in-reach character display Se2 is easily changed to "red" (95%).

Next, in the color change timing table 222i, when the "golden" display color is won in "E4: Special Reach" at the time of losing, there are two change timings, "at the time of occurrence of reach" and "during reach". Selectable change timings are provided, and each change timing is associated with a value that the color change timing counter 223g can take.

In the example shown in FIG. 23, the correspondence between the value of the color change timing counter 223g and the change timing in the display color of "gold" in "E4: Special reach" is "0", " It is "1 to 99" against "reaching".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of failure is selected and "gold" is selected as the display color of the character display, the change timing of the display color of the character display is "at the time of occurrence of reach". is set to be selected at a rate of 1%, and the change timing of "in reach" is selected at a rate of 99%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" production mode at the time of losing, when "gold" is selected as the display color of the character display, the character display Se2 during reach displayed during the execution of the variable element of "special reach" is set (99%) so that the display color of the in-reach character display Se2 is likely to be changed to "gold" at the timing when is displayed.

In this way, in the "ready-to-win display" at the time of losing, the display color of the character display is more likely to change from "at the time of reaching" to "during reaching". If you change the display color of the character display at the timing of "when reach occurs", it will result in a loss. This is because the first half of the presentation may excessively arouse expectations for a big win, and the player may lose interest in the game due to the excessive agitation. Therefore, in the change effect of losing, by configuring the display color of the character display so that it is easy to change from "at the time of occurrence of reach" to "during reach", the game can be played without excessively stirring the player in the change effect of losing. It is possible to prevent a person from losing interest in a game. In addition, even if the display color of the character display does not change at the time of "reaching", it is possible to change the display color of the character display even during "reaching" at the time of the big hit. , is configured so that a big win can be expected in the variable performance.

Next, in the color change timing table 222i, when the display color of "red" or "gold" is won in "E5: normal reach" at the time of the big win, one change timing of "at the time of occurrence of reach" is selected as the change timing. configured to be That is, in "E5: Normal Reach", since the variable element of "Super Reach" and the variable element of "Special Reach" cannot be executed, the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach" cannot be executed. The "Reaching" textual indication that may be displayed within may also not be displayed. Therefore, when the effect mode of "E5: normal reach" is selected, the value of the color change timing counter 223g is not associated with the change timing of "during reach". Therefore, in the first embodiment, when the effect mode of "E5: normal reach" is selected, only the change timing of "at the time of reach occurrence" is selected, so the reach displayed at the timing of "at the time of reach occurrence" The display color of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is changed to "red" or "gold" at the timing when the character display Se1 at the time of occurrence is displayed.

In the first embodiment, in "E5: normal reach", since the change timing of the character display is single, the color change timing table 222i is configured so as not to provide a division (group) for "E5: normal reach". may

In the color change timing table 222i, when the "red" display color is won in "E6: Super reach" at the time of the big win, there are two change timings, "at the time of reach occurrence" and "during reach" as the change timing. are prepared to be selectable, and each change timing is associated with a possible value of the color change timing counter 223g.

In the example shown in FIG. 23, the correspondence between the value of the color change timing counter 223g and the change timing in the display color of "red" in "E6: Super Reach" is "0 to 79" with respect to "When Reach Occurs". , and “reaching” are “80-99”.

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of the big hit is selected and "red" is selected as the display color of the character display, the change timing of the display color of the character display is "at the time of occurrence of reach". It is set so that the timing is selected at a rate of 80% and the change timing of "reaching" is selected at a rate of 20%.

Therefore, when "red" is selected as the display color of the character display in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of the big hit, the character display Se1 when the reach occurs displayed at the start of the variable element of "normal reach" The setting (80%) is such that the display color of the character display Se1 at the time of occurrence of the reach is likely to be changed to "red" at the displayed timing.

Next, in the color change timing table 222i, when the "golden" display color is won in "E6: Super Reach" at the time of the big win, there are two change timings, "At the time of occurrence of Reach" and "During Reach". Change timings are prepared to be selectable, and each change timing is associated with a possible value of the color change timing counter 223g.

In the example shown in FIG. 23, the correspondence between the value of the color change timing counter 223g and the change timing in the display color of "gold" in "E6: Super Reach" is "0 to 69" with respect to "When Reach Occurs". , and “reaching” are “70-99”.

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of the big hit is selected and "gold" is selected as the display color of the character display, the change timing of the display color of the character display is "at the time of occurrence of reach". It is set so that the timing is selected at a rate of 70% and the change timing of "reaching" is selected at a rate of 30%.

Therefore, when "gold" is selected as the display color of the character display in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of the big hit, the character display Se1 when the reach occurs displayed at the start of the variable element of "normal reach" The setting (70%) is such that the display color of the character display Se1 at the time of occurrence of the reach is likely to be changed to "gold" at the displayed timing.

Next, in the color change timing table 222i, when the "red" display color is won in "E7: special reach" at the time of the big win, two change timings, "at the time of occurrence of reach" and "during reach", are displayed. Change timings are prepared to be selectable, and each change timing is associated with a possible value of the color change timing counter 223g.

In the example shown in FIG. 23, the correspondence between the value of the color change timing counter 223g and the change timing in the display color of "red" in "E7: Special Reach" is "0 to 69" with respect to "When Reach Occurs". , and “reaching” are “70-99”.

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of the big hit is selected and "red" is selected as the display color of the character display, the change timing of the display color of the character display is "at the time of occurrence of reach". It is set so that the timing is selected at a rate of 70% and the change timing of "(super/) special reaching" is selected at a rate of 30%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of the big hit, when "red" is selected as the display color of the character display, the character display Se1 when the reach occurs displayed at the start of the variable element of "normal reach" The setting (70%) is such that the display color of the character display Se1 at the time of occurrence of the reach is likely to be changed to "red" at the displayed timing.

Next, in the color change timing table 222i, when the "golden" display color is won in "E7: special reach" at the time of the big win, there are two change timings, "at the time of occurrence of reach" and "during reach". Change timings are prepared to be selectable, and each change timing is associated with a possible value of the color change timing counter 223g.

In the example shown in FIG. 23, the correspondence between the value of the color change timing counter 223g and the change timing in the display color of "gold" in "E7: Special reach" is "0 to 59" with respect to "at the time of reach occurrence". , and “reaching” are “60 to 99”.

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of the big hit is selected and "gold" is selected as the display color of the character display, the change timing of the display color of the character display is "at the time of occurrence of reach". It is set so that the timing is selected at a rate of 60% and the change timing of "reaching" is selected at a rate of 40%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of the big hit, when "gold" is selected as the display color of the character display, the character display Se1 when the reach occurs displayed at the start of the variable element of "normal reach" The setting (60%) is such that the display color of the character display Se1 at the time of occurrence of the reach is likely to be changed to "gold" at the displayed timing.

As described above, when the "super reach" production mode or "special reach" production mode is selected as the production mode, and the display color of "red" is selected, the reach middle sentence is set to "reach during" when losing The character display Se2 tends to change to "red" (90% or 95%), while the character display Se1 tends to change to "red" when the reach occurs (80% or 70%). is set to Therefore, in the "super reach" effect mode or the "special reach" effect mode, when the character display Se1 at the time of the reach occurrence of "at the time of the reach occurrence" is displayed in "red", the "big win display" is displayed in the variable effect. You can increase your chances of getting out. As a result, after the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is displayed in "red" at "at the time of occurrence of reach", if it develops into a variable element of "super reach" or a variable element of "special reach", in the variable effect Making a player expect the appearance of a ``jackpot display'' and making the player pay more attention to the ``border performance'' in the variable element of the ``super reach'' or the variable element of the ``special reach'', thereby enhancing the interest of the game. can increase

In addition, when the "super reach" effect mode or the "special reach" effect mode is selected as the effect mode and the display color of "golden" is selected, the "reach in progress" character display Se2 is displayed in the "reach in progress" at the time of losing. is likely to change to "golden" (98% or 99%), while the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence, which is displayed at the start of the variable element of "normal reach", is likely to change to "golden" (70% or 60%). %) is set as

This is set so that the display color of "golden" in the character display is likely to be selected when the "big win display" is won, and is less likely to be selected when the "losing display" is selected. Therefore, at the time of failure, the character display of "golden" is not displayed until the second half of the variable effect, that is, the appearance timing of the in-reach character display Se2. By configuring the color so as to make it difficult to appear, it is possible to reduce excessive excitement for the big win by displaying "golden" character display from the first half of the change performance of the loss, and the change performance is the loss. To prevent the player from losing interest in the game due to being excessively stimulated even when the player has been caught.

Further, at the time of the big hit, the character display of "gold" is displayed at the first half of the variable performance, that is, at the timing of the appearance of the character display Se1 at the occurrence of the ready-to-win, so that the expectation of the big win is set from the first half of the variable performance. The amusement of the game is heightened by displaying the character display of ``golden'' with a high value, and the amusement of the game can be improved without discouraging the player by making the variation presentation a big win.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when displaying characters in the "ready-to-win display" of the variable display, based on the propriety of the variable output (performance mode) and each of the counters 223e to 223g, Determine the character pattern (“weak pattern” or “strong pattern”), display color (“white”, “red” or “gold”) and change timing (“when reach occurs” or “during reach”) of the character display is configured to By configuring in this manner, the display modes of the character displays Se1 and Se2 displayed in the "ready-to-reach display" are displayed in various patterns reflecting the results of the winning lottery, and the display modes of the character displays Se1 The degree of expectation for a big hit can be varied. As a result, it is possible to make the player guess whether or not the variation effect will be the "big win display" based on the display modes of the character displays Se1 and Se2, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

Returning to FIG. 14, the description continues. The pending information storage area 223h stores information for performing prefetch processing, that is, the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer in accordance with the start winning in the main controller 110 and transmitted by the pending ball number command. Each value of the hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, the pending change information indicating the display mode of the "holding change notice", the scenario data indicating the execution timing of the "holding change notice", and the fluctuation This is an area for storing pending erasure information indicating whether or not the cockpit display area Db is to be erased in the effect, and re-variation information indicating whether or not "re-variation" is to be performed in the variation effect.

The sound lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223h and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to perform prefetch processing (hold display setting processing ( See FIG. 43))) is executed. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the pending change information, scenario data, pending erasure information and re-change information obtained by the pre-reading process in the pending change information storage area 223h5, the scenario data storage area 223h6, and the pending change information storage area 223h5 of the pending information storage area 223h. Stored in the pending deletion information storage area 223h7 and the re-change information storage area 223h8, respectively, and executes the "suspended change notice" based on the values stored in the respective areas 223h5 to 223h8.

The execution information storage area 223i is information for performing a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, that is, the first number obtained from the counter buffer in accordance with the start winning in the main controller 110 and transmitted by the pending ball number command. Each value of the winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, the pending change information indicating the display mode of the "holding change notice", and the execution timing of the "holding change notice" Scenario data indicating , pending deletion information indicating whether or not the cockpit display area Db is deleted in the variable effect, and re-variation information indicating whether or not the variable element of "re-variation" is performed in the variable effect This is an area for storing.

When the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable production, it is stored in the first pending information storage area of the above-described pending information storage area 223h in order to execute the setting of the variable production. Information (values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, etc.) for performing the variable effect that is stored is shifted to the execution information storage area 223i.

Details of the pending information storage area 223h and the execution information storage area 223i will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the pending information storage area 223h and the execution information storage area 223i. The pending information storage area 223h has four areas of pending information storage first to fourth areas. Each of the first to fourth storage information storage areas includes a first winning random number counter storage area 223h1 in which the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is stored, and a first winning type counter C2 in which the value is stored. A per type counter storage area 223h2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223h3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, a variation type counter storage area 223h4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored, and a "suspended change A pending change information storage area 223h5 in which pending change information indicating the display mode of "notice" is stored, a scenario data storage area 223h6 in which scenario data indicating the execution timing of the "notice of pending change" is stored, and a cockpit display in the variable effect. A pending deletion information storage area 223h7 for storing pending deletion information indicating whether or not the region Db is to be deleted, and re-variation information indicating whether or not a variable element of "re-variation" is performed in the variation effect are stored. At least a re-change information storage area 223h8 is provided.

The execution information storage area 223i contains the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the variable effect currently being executed, the hold change information indicating the display mode of the "hold change notice", and the execution timing of the "hold change notice". scenario data indicating, pending erasure information indicating whether or not the cockpit display area Db is erased in the variable effect, and re-variation information indicating whether or not "re-variation" is performed in the variable effect are stored. It is an area for

In addition, the first to fourth areas for storing the pending information respectively store the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the maximum of four suspended variable effects, and the display mode of the "holding change notice". Change information, scenario data indicating the execution timing of "pending change notice", pending deletion information indicating whether or not the cockpit display area Db is erased in the variable effect, and "re-variation" variable element in the variable effect. This is an area for storing re-change information indicating whether or not to be performed.

Specifically, the execution information storage area 223i is an area corresponding to the variable effect currently being executed, and the pending information storage first area is the variable effect that is first suspended in terms of time among the suspended variable effects. It is an area corresponding to performance, the second area for storing reserved information is an area corresponding to the second oldest suspended variable performance among the suspended variable performances, and the third area for storing reserved information is: This is an area corresponding to the temporally third oldest suspended variable performance among the suspended variable performances, and the fourth area for storing the suspension information is the fourth temporally suspended variable performance among the suspended variable performances. It is an area corresponding to the variable performance.

When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball count command from the main control device 110, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are held. Extract from the number of balls command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the values of the extracted counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the areas corresponding to the number of pending balls included in the number of pending balls command among the first to fourth areas for storing the pending information. Stored in the random number counter storage area 223h1, the first win type counter storage area 223h2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223h3, and the variation type counter storage area 223h4.

Specifically, if the number of pending balls included in the pending ball number command is X (1 ≤ X ≤ 4), the number of variable effects suspended at that time is X, and the pending ball count command The values of the included counters C1 to C3 and CS1 correspond to the X-th suspended variable performance in terms of time among the suspended variable performances, so each counter storage area of the X-th storage area for storage of suspension information. The values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to 223h1 to 223h4 are stored. At this time, the main controller 110 stores the values of the respective counters C1 to C3, CS1 included in the reserved ball number command in the reserved No. X area of the reserved ball storage area 203b. That is, the same values as those of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reservation X area of the main controller 110 are stored in the reservation information storage X area.

In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 performs pre-reading processing (holding display setting processing (see FIG. 43)) based on the values stored in the respective counter storage areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the holding information storage X area. The pending change information, scenario data, pending erase information and re-change information generated based on the result of the processing are stored in the storage areas 223h5 to 223h8 of the same pending information storage X area. That is, in each hold information storage X area, whether or not the "hold change notice" is executed in each variable effect, the execution timing when the "hold change notice" is executed, and the cockpit display area Db in each change effect Whether or not an effect to be deleted is included, and whether or not "re-variation" is performed in each variable effect are stored respectively.

On the other hand, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command and a stop type command that mean the start of the variation effect from the main control device 110, shift processing is performed in the pending information storage area 223h and the execution information storage area 223i. That is, the suspended variable performance is reduced by one, and the execution of the variable performance suspended first in terms of time is started, so that the first area for storing the suspended information corresponding to the first suspended variable performance is stored. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223h1 to 223h8 and various information (data) are moved to the storage areas 223i1 to 223i8 of the execution information storage area 223i corresponding to the variable performance currently being executed. Let

In addition, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223h1 to 223h8 of the pending information storage second area and various information (data) are stored in the respective storage areas 223h1 to 223h8 of the pending information storage first area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and various information (data) stored in the storage areas 223h1 to 223h8 of the third pending information storage area are stored in the respective storage areas 223h1 to 223h8 of the second pending information storage area. , and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223h1 to 223h8 of the fourth pending information storage area and various information (data) are stored in the respective storage areas 223h1 to 223h1 of the third pending information storage area. Move to 223h8.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223i stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203c of the main controller 110. FIG. In addition, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first to fourth holding areas of the holding ball storage area 203b of the main controller 110 are stored in the first to fourth holding information storage areas. will be That is, in the sound lamp control device 113, counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the variable effects being executed and held by the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223i and the hold information storage area 223h. be.

The sound lamp control device 113 grasps the number of pending variable effects (the number of pending balls) from the sub-holding ball number counter 223b when performing the look-ahead processing (holding display setting processing (see FIG. 43)). Then, based on the number of pending balls, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the areas where the variable performance is suspended among the first to fourth areas for storing the pending information are read in advance, and in the variable performance, It is determined whether or not it will be a big hit, and the fluctuation time and the like. For example, if the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b is "1", the number of holding balls of the variable effect is 1, so for the holding information storage first area, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored Read ahead the value and make a decision. Further, if the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b is "4", the number of holding balls of the variable effect is 4 times, so for the holding information storage fourth area, the stored counters C1 to C3, CS1 Read ahead the value and make a decision.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that commands are transmitted only in one direction from the main controller 110 to the voice ramp controller 113, and the voice ramp controller 113 accesses the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and the like. can't. On the other hand, the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a pending information storage area 223h, and the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the variable performances put on hold by the main control device 110 are also stored in the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, by referring to each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223h, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute the prefetching process. That is, when the suspended variable performance is executed, the result of the variable performance (whether it will be a big hit, what the variable time will be, etc.) is determined before the variable performance is executed, The audio lamp control device 113 can determine the execution of various effects and control the execution mode and execution timing of the "holding change notice".

The above-described shift processing in the holding information storage area 223h and the execution information storage area 223i is based on the number of held balls when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received (the update based on the reception of the variation pattern command and the stop type command is performed. Based on the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b before being changed), the data is moved (shifted) only for the area corresponding to the reserved variable effect among the first to fourth areas storing the reserved information.

For example, when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received, the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b before updating is "4", and all areas of the reservation information storage area 223h (reservation information storage first to fourth areas ) is stored with data. In this case, the data in the first hold information storage area is shifted to the execution information storage area 223i, the data in the second hold information storage area is shifted to the first hold information storage area, and the data in the third hold information storage area is held. The data is shifted to the second information storage area, and the data in the fourth pending information storage area is shifted to the third pending information storage area.

On the other hand, if the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b before updating when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received is "2", the data in the first reservation information storage area is shifted to the execution information storage area 223i. , the data in the second hold information storage area is shifted to the first hold information storage area, and the data shift ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift processing is not performed for the third and fourth storage information storage areas where the variable effect is not suspended, the number of data shifts can be reduced. Control burden can be reduced.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the pending information storage first to fourth areas is shifted to an area with an area number smaller by 1 (the execution information storage area 223i or the pending information storage first to third areas). It may be configured as follows. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (reserved) for each of the first to fourth reservation information storage areas, thereby facilitating the creation of a program.

Returning to FIG. 14, the description continues. The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed.

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 42) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and the processing according to the command is performed.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect or continuous display. It controls the advance notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 37). Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, referring to FIG. 25, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and a bus line. 240, 241.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the display control device 114 issues a command to instruct the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 determined by the sound lamp control device 113. Received from the audio ramp controller 113 . MPU 231 , program ROM 232 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of input port 238 via bus line 240 . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different jackpot lottery probabilities and the number of prize balls paid out per jackpot, there are models with exactly the same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the program ROM 232 and work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on commands input from the sound lamp control device 113 .

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores image data of each sprite such as a pattern (background pattern or decorative pattern) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In order to store a large amount of image data, the character ROM 234 has a large storage area with a small area. It is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a which has a large capacity and is inexpensive. In the first embodiment, a 2 gigabyte NAND flash memory 234a is used. As a result, since a large number of images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be stored, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified, thereby increasing the amusement of the game. ing.

The NAND flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates bad block data that cannot be written. Therefore, in the character ROM 234, a known arbitration circuit 234b (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2006-223598) that executes data address conversion so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. ) are provided. The arbitration circuit 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a inside the character ROM 234 and avoids access to the defective data block. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the data block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 32) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and stores the frame in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process during the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in the first embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81. ) in parallel.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when one frame of image rendering processing is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 49(b)), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the display process of displaying the image developed by the previous drawing on the third pattern display device 81 .

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237. Image data required for image drawing by the image controller 237 is read from the character ROM 234 by the MPU 231 before drawing and stored in the resident memory. It is transferred to the video RAM 235 for normal use or the video RAM 236 for normal use. At this time, the MPU 231 determines to which of the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 the image is to be transferred (and to which address the image is to be stored) according to the contents of the image based on the program or table stored in the program ROM 232 . to decide.

When the image controller 237 draws an image, it does not use the image data in the character ROM 234, but uses the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 to perform image drawing processing. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image controller 237 can read the image using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234 in advance. , the image can be drawn immediately without being affected by the slow reading speed of the character ROM 234 . Therefore, a desired image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at a desired time.

Here, the NAND flash memory 234a facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a lower read speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to remain resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the initial setting process (main process (see FIG. 48)) when the power is turned on, the image drawing process is performed by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. be able to. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by the main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113 or display controller 114. Since the image data is resident, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be kept high.

When the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident (unexpanded) image data in the resident video RAM 235, the image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data necessary for drawing. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The MPU 231 determines in which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 the image data necessary for drawing an image by the image controller 237 is stored (and at which address it is stored). Based on the program or table stored in the storage destination of image data (resident video RAM 235 or normal video In which of the RAM 236 it is stored, and at what address it is stored) is also indicated. The image controller 237 reads necessary image data from a predetermined address of the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 . This allows the image controller 237 to concentrate on drawing the image.

Note that when the image controller 237 receives an image drawing instruction from the MPU 231, it determines the storage location of the image data required for drawing (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) based on the type of image required for drawing. or at which address it is stored). In this case, when the MPU 231 stores image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237 controls the type of image displayed by the stored image data (or the corresponding image). The address of the character ROM 234 where the data is stored) and the storage destination of the image data are determined based on the control signal from the MPU 231, and the image is stored in the RAM (not shown) provided in the image controller 237. The type (or the address of the character ROM 234 where the corresponding image data is stored) and the storage destination of the image data may be associated and stored. Then, based on the information stored in the RAM, the image controller 237 may determine the storage location of the image data required for the image. The processing load of the MPU 231 can be reduced by determining the storage destination of the image data by the image controller 237 .

The image controller 237 is provided with a buffer RAM 237a. The buffer RAM 237a functions as a buffer memory for data transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236, and has a storage capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a provided in the character ROM 234 (for example, 132 kilobytes), and is configured to be directly accessible from the MPU 231 .

When transferring an image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 reads out one block of data from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. is not used, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data were directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 without providing the buffer RAM 237a, the read speed of the character ROM 234 would be slow because the character ROM 234 consists of the NAND flash memory 234a. , while transferring image data of a desired size, the input/output port is composed of a dynamic RAM (hereinafter referred to as "DRAM") with one port (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "one port type"). One port of the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is occupied by image data transfer from the character ROM 234, and other data access cannot be performed for a long time. As a result, during this time, the image controller 237 cannot read image data from the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 to draw an image or transfer the drawn image data to the third pattern display device 81. There is a possibility that the image display of the third pattern display device 81 will be delayed. Further, even if a multi-port type (a type provided with a plurality of input/output ports) DRAM is used for the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237 can be used for the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. There is a risk that the control using is restricted and the control becomes complicated.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the image controller 237 is provided with the buffer RAM 237a composed of SRAM capable of operating at high speed. After that, the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to.

In addition, the MPU 231 instructs the transfer of image data to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the drawing list. and final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the starting address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and the third symbol display device. It is possible to easily determine the time that is not used for the display processing to 81, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is composed of a 1-port type DRAM, as described above, and is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is resident in the resident video RAM 235 . This resident video RAM 235 stores data corresponding to the image displayed when the power is turned on, data corresponding to the frequently displayed image among the images displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and main control data. Data corresponding to the image to be displayed immediately among the images decided to be displayed by the device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) is transferred from the character ROM 234 and is resident.

The resident video RAM 235 includes a power-on main image area 235a, a power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a rear image area 235c, a third pattern area 235d, a character pattern area 235e, an error message image area 235f, a pending pattern area 235g, At least a cockpit image area 235h, a sub-display image area 235i, and a character design area 235j are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image 282 to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the display control device 114 is performing initialization processing when the power is turned on. is. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image 282 is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image 283 that, when detected, displays the result of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 by means of a fluctuation effect.

When power is supplied from the power supply unit 251, the MPU 231 first transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image 282 from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the variable image 283 to the power-on variable image area 235b (see S2002 and S2003 in FIG. 48).

Here, the power-on main image 282 and the power-on variation image 283 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 shows the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is an explanatory view explaining an image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 first transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. The image data to be changed is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display controller 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a. The third pattern display device 81 is caused to display the main image 282 at power-on shown in FIG.

At this time, when receiving a display fluctuation pattern command and a display stop type command, which are instruction commands to start fluctuation, from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, as shown in FIG. On the display screen of the main image 282, a power-on stop image 283a with a "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen, and a "○" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol as shown in FIG. The stop image 283b at power-on with the x symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed during the period of the variable effect. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command from the sound lamp control device 113, the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is judged, and if it is "big win display", FIG. 26 ( A power-on stop image 283a shown in b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and in the case of "failure display", a power-on stop image 283b shown in FIG. display the time.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, and the image data stored in the main image area 235a at the time of power-on is used for the image controller 237. The drawing of the main image 282 at the time of insertion is instructed. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the game hall can confirm the power-on main image 282 displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can do. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the main image 282 at power-on. can do. In addition, since the player or a person involved in the game hall can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the power-on main image 282 is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the resident video To wait until the initialization processing is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the remaining image data to be resident in the RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in the operation check at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 10, the main image 282 at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 can operate without any problem when the power is turned on. It is possible to immediately confirm that the operation has been started, and it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed as the character ROM 234. FIG.

Further, when the player starts playing the game while the main image 282 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 is detected, the change when the power is turned on The power-on variation image 283 is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image 283 resident in the image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. An instruction is given from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so as to display on the pattern display device 81 . Therefore, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image 283 . Therefore, even while the power-on main image 282 is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect. .

Further, when the power-on main image 282 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image 283 is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When the entry into the first ball entrance 64 is detected while the at-throwing main image 282 is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation performance is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can be displayed.

Furthermore, image data corresponding to the power-on main image 282 and the power-on variation image 283 are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. If the resident data remains in the resident video RAM 235 when power is restored, the image data resident in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b will be used when the power is restored. , the power-on main image 282 and the power-on fluctuation image 283 can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Returning to FIG. 25, the description continues. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG. 27 and 28 are explanatory diagrams for explaining three kinds of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image, and FIG. 27(a). 27(b) is for the back surface B corresponding to the "empty stage", and FIG. 28 is for the back surface C corresponding to the "island stage". are shown respectively.

Of the rear faces A to C, the rear face images corresponding to the rear face and the rear face are, as shown in FIG. are prepared in the character ROM 234 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed as a display area in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and then an image between position a and position a' is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. , the rear image is scroll-displayed in a smooth connection in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 .

When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage, the MPU 231 first sets the position between position a and position a' as the initial position of the display area, and the image at that initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 . Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. Further, when the display area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the display area is again displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a'. , the image controller 237 is controlled. Therefore, in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, the images between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth flow to the left.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 28, the rear image on the rear surface C changes over time in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→ . It is displayed in the main display area Dm of the display device 81 . Specifically, on the back surface C, the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed as the third pattern in a state where the displayed positions are fixed. It is displayed in the main display area Dm of the display device 81 . On the other hand, an image of the sky that spreads over the mountains changes its color tone with the passage of time.

When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to the "island stage", the back image shown in FIG. 31A is displayed as the initial back image of the back surface C. FIG. In the rear image shown in FIG. 28(a), an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. As time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 28(b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 28(b), a vivid blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 28(c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 28(c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and further to orange. Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed, the rear image shown in FIG. 28(a) is displayed again, and the rear images shown in FIGS.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 27(a), the rear face A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear face A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage, the town stage, is displayed. 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, for the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage, as shown in FIG. back image area 235c. Further, the rear surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 28(a), and the image data corresponding to the rear surface images between FIGS. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident during the start-up process after the input.

Here, the operation of the frame button 22 by the player to change the stage is performed at arbitrary timing based on the player's will. In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a' or The range is fixed, and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position or the image between FIGS. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, if the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the resident video RAM 235 By using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c, the initial positions of the rear surface B and the rear surface C are immediately displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and are scrolled over time. It can be displayed while changing the display or color tone. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images are stored for the rear surfaces B and C, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear face B, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to scroll the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 during this period. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed in the main display area Dm of the pattern display device 81 .

Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surface C, the images shown in FIGS. The range of FIGS. 28(a) and 28(b) is set so that the transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be completed while the character ROM 234 is being turned on. 28(b) to 28(c) and 28(c) to 28(a) while the images of FIGS. 28(a) to 28(b) are displayed. Since the data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, after displaying the images of FIGS. 28(b) to 28(c) and 28(c) to 28(a) using image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236, sequentially , can be displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 .

Note that the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 for the rear B and C are stored in sub-areas (not shown) dedicated to rear images provided in an image storage area 236a (see FIG. 25) of the normal video RAM 236, which will be described later. ) is stored. As a result, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

In addition, in the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between positions b' and positions b. Data is stored redundantly. Then, by controlling the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, Next, by using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 to display the image from the position b' in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, the third pattern display device 81 is smoothly connected. The background image is scrolled.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 so that the image between the position a and the position a' is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. It controls the image controller 237 . As a result, in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, images between position a to position c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth manner so as to flow leftward. .

Returning to FIG. 25, the description continues. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above ten types of main patterns (see FIG. 4) with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, even though the first pattern display device 37 has started the variable performance after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the third pattern display device 81 immediately starts the variable performance. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is not possible.

In addition, in the third design area 235d, as the main designs to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main design consisting of the rear design such as a wooden box, and the rear design and characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the accessory pattern imitating the . These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters including "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e. As a result, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110 , instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 , the character data in the resident video RAM 235 is changed. The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading the image data pre-resident in the pattern area 235e. As a result, since there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, when vibration is detected by the voice ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice ramp control device 113 issues an error command indicating the occurrence of a vibration error. to the display control device 114 . Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. Then, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 displays the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The reserved pattern area 235g is an area for permanently storing data relating to the initial setting (default setting) display mode of the execution patterns and reserved patterns displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third pattern display device 81 . That is, in the reserved pattern area 235g, image data corresponding to the "white" "o" pattern, which is the default display mode of the executed and reserved patterns, is resident. As a result, when the executed symbols and reserved symbols are displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0 or the suspended symbol display areas Db1 to Db4 of the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 can quickly display the executed symbols or reserved symbols. Therefore, a plurality of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 occur, and although the reserved symbols are displayed in the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, the cockpit display area of the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the reserved symbols (executed symbols) are not displayed in Db.

The cockpit image area 235h is an area in which image data corresponding to the cockpit image displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third pattern display device 81 resides. That is, in the cockpit image area 235h, image data corresponding to cockpit images other than the executed symbols and reserved symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db resides. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the cockpit display area Db from the character ROM 234 one by one. The cockpit display area Db can be quickly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Therefore, even when the cockpit display area Db continues to be displayed in the variable effect, or when the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed after executing the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach", By reading the cockpit image stored in the cockpit image area 235h, the cockpit display area Db can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, even when the rear image of the main display area Dm is scrolled, the cockpit display area Db is always displayed as the third It is configured to be fixedly displayed at a certain position (lower part of the display area) of the display area of the pattern display device 81 . Therefore, the cockpit display area Db is a display object that is displayed more frequently than the specific third pattern or the specific rear image. Therefore, a cockpit image area 235h for the cockpit display area Db is provided in the resident video RAM 235, and display control is performed based on the cockpit image stored in the cockpit image area 235h. It is possible to smoothly display the cockpit display area Db, which has a high display frequency, as compared with the case of directly reading from the cockpit display area Db.

The sub-display image area 235i is an area for resident image data corresponding to each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sub-display area Ds from the character ROM 234 one by one. The sub-display area Ds can be quickly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Therefore, even when the sub-display area Ds is continuously displayed in the variable effect, or when the sub-display area Ds is re-displayed after executing the "reach display", the sub-display stored in the sub-display image area 235i By reading the image data corresponding to the area Ds, the sub-display area Ds can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, like the cockpit display area Db, even when the back image of the main display area Dm is scrolled, the "super reach" variable element and the "special reach" variable element are not executed. As long as it is, it is configured to always be fixedly displayed at a fixed position (upper portion of the display area) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 . Therefore, like the cockpit display area Db, the sub display area Ds is a display object that is displayed more frequently than the specific third pattern or the specific rear image. Accordingly, a secondary display image area 235i for the secondary display region Ds is provided in the resident video RAM 235, and display control is performed based on the image data corresponding to the secondary display region Ds stored in the secondary display image area 235i. By doing so, it is possible to smoothly display the sub-display area Ds, which is frequently displayed, as compared to the case of reading directly from the NAND flash memory 234a.

The character pattern area 235j is an initial setting ( This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the default setting). That is, the character design area 235j stores data relating to the normal display color "white" and the "weak pattern" character pattern of each of the character displays Se1 to Se4. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when one of the "ready-to-win displays" is executed, the character displays Se1 to Se4 corresponding to the "ready-to-win displays" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. is configured to

Here, the display mode of each of the character displays Se1 and Se2 is determined by various counters 223e and the like at the start of the variable effect, and based on the determination, each character is displayed promptly in the variable effect. It is required to display Se1 and Se2.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to the initial setting (default setting) of each character display Se1 to Se4 is resident in advance in the character pattern area 235j. Therefore, the display control device 114, based on the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command received, displays images corresponding to the character displays Se1 to Se4 preliminarily resident in the character pattern area 235j of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the data, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each character display Se1 to Se4. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design area 235j can be By reading the stored image data corresponding to each character display Se1 to Se4, each character display Se1 to Se4 can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately.

The initial setting (default setting) of each character display Se1 to Se4 is a display mode with the highest appearance frequency. Therefore, by storing the character displays Se1 to Se4 with a high appearance frequency in the character design area 235j, it is possible to reduce the processing load of display control for the character displays Se1 to Se4.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated as needed, and is composed of a 1-port type DRAM. In the normal video RAM 236, when the image controller 237 draws the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the data read from the character ROM 234 in advance is stored. It is for temporarily storing image data. The normal video RAM 236 is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is determined in advance.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data, and has at least a data table storage area 232a.

The data table storage area 232a describes the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110 (sound lamp control device 113). In addition to the display data table 232a1 and one effect based on the command from the main control device 110 (sound lamp control device 113), the display to be displayed with the passage of time for the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 The additional data table 232a2 describing the contents and the transfer data information and transfer timing of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the display data table 232a1 are defined. This is an area in which the transfer data table 232a3 is stored.

The display data table 232a1 is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110 (sound lamp control device 113). , a variable effect, a demonstration effect, a fixed display effect, and a restart effect are prepared.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

Further, the fixed display effect is performed by receiving a fixed command (display fixed command) from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 after the variable effect. This is the effect displayed at 81 . For example, when the stopped pattern is a losing pattern, an effect emphasizing "losing display" is performed, and if the stopped pattern is one of "15R probability variable jackpot", "15R normal jackpot", and "2R probability variable jackpot". , an effect is performed in which each “jackpot display” is emphasized. The player can easily judge the game value given by the content of the stop symbol by visually recognizing this fixed display effect.

In addition, the restart effect is a confirmation command (confirmation for display) transmitted from the main control device 110 (sound lamp control device 113) even after a predetermined time has passed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed with the end of the variable effect. command) is not received, the third pattern display device 81 displays an image in which the third pattern is vibrated. When the player visually recognizes that the third pattern is vibrated and displayed after the variation of the third pattern is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the stop pattern is not determined at that time. can be recognized.

The data table storage area 232a stores one display data table 232a1 corresponding to each of the demonstration effect, the confirmation display effect and the restart effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, the variable display data table 232a1, which is the display data table 232a1 for the variable effect, is prepared with one table for one variable effect pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Furthermore, in the variable display data table 232a1, when the variable effect pattern instructed by the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113 does not match the stop pattern to be displayed when the variable effect is stopped, for example, , When the variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern for winning, it is clearly different from the normal variable performance used when the stop pattern of losing is instructed by the main control device 110 (audio lamp control device 113). A display data table 232a1 for default variation, which is a variation rendering, is also prepared. This default variation causes the third pattern to be displayed with high speed fluctuation until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 is received. At the same time, special stop symbols (for example, symbols displayed as "9", "8", and "7" in order from the left column) are fixed as stop symbols.

When the variation effect pattern instructed by the main controller 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 does not match the stop pattern to be displayed during the stop display of the variation effect, the display controller 114 causes the main controller 110 to perform There is a possibility that the result of the drawn lottery cannot be correctly reflected and the variable performance and the fixed display performance cannot be performed.

On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, in such a case, the default variation performance is performed, and after the variation performance, a special stop symbol indicating a special failure is fixedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the main control device Even if the result of the lottery in 110 is a loss, it is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from erroneously performing a confirmation display performance of a big win.

Further, even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the lottery result in the main control device 110 is a big win, the actual game state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a big win state. can continue the game without worry.

Furthermore, by making the fixed display a special stop symbol, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 is in a big winning state even if the fixed display is a failure. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy because the pachinko machine 10 is in a big winning state in spite of the fact that the confirmation display is a failure.

Details of the display data table 232a1 will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table 232a1 of the display data table 232a1. The display data table 232a1 is associated with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which one frame of an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit, and displays data at that time. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table 232a1, one rear image, one cockpit image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . ), effects that express the insertion of light in the image, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters (character 1, character 2, ...), character patterns such as character display Se1 when reach occurs ( Rendering information for each sprite such as character pattern 1, character pattern 2, . . . is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects, characters, and character designs are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the character displays Se1 to Se4 appearing in the "ready-to-win display" are set to the display mode of the initial setting (default setting), and the display color of all the character displays Se1 to Se4 is "white." , and the character patterns of the on-reach character display Se1 and the on-reach character display Se2 are each configured to display a "weak pattern". Therefore, even if the lottery process for the chance up patterns of the character displays Se1 to Se4 is not properly performed, the character displays Se1 to Se4 can be displayed in the default display mode. Therefore, even if an error or the like occurs in the lottery process of each character display Se1-Se4, each character display Se1-Se4 can be displayed. In addition, by displaying the initial setting display mode of each character display Se1 to Se4 with the display color of "white", which has the lowest degree of advantageous suggestion, and the character pattern of "weak pattern", it is a variable effect of losing. However, it can be configured so that the degree of expectation for a big win does not increase excessively. For this reason, even if the lottery processing of each character display Se1 to Se4 is not properly performed due to the occurrence of an error or the like, it is configured so as not to appear the display that stirs up the expectations of the player. It is possible to provide a comfortable game without causing distrust.

It should be noted that the character displays Se1 to Se4 may be initially set so that the character displays Se1 to Se4 are not displayed. When the lottery processing of the character displays Se1 to Se4 is not properly performed due to an error or the like, by not displaying the character displays Se1 to Se4, the player's expectations for a big win are not excessively stimulated and the player is distrusted. It is possible to provide a comfortable game without causing feelings.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined in the variable display data table 232a1. This back face type is to display one of the back faces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage"), or to display back faces A to C. Information specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to C, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image to display.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back faces A to C as the object to be drawn. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to C, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In this embodiment, the display data table 232a1 defines only the back face type as the drawing content of the back face image. Position information indicating whether the range should be displayed may also be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table 232a1 (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the display data table 232a1 at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table 232a1 (or the third symbol display device 81 display) is started, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table 232a1 (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started information indicating whether the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The display position of the cockpit image is fixed at the center of the lower side of the screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are constant over time. Therefore, in the variable display data table 232a1, only the cockpit type, which is information for specifying the type of the cockpit image, is defined, like the rear image. This cockpit type specifies whether to continue displaying the cockpit display area Db in the variable effect, or to erase the cockpit display area Db during the execution of the "super reach" variable element or the "special reach" variable element. Information is provided.

When the cockpit type specifies that the cockpit display area Db is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the cockpit image corresponding to the cockpit display area Db as a rendering target. On the other hand, if the cockpit type specifies not to display (delete) the cockpit display area Db, it specifies that the cockpit image corresponding to the cockpit display area Db is not to be drawn.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the leading address of the variable display data table 232a1, and the final address of the variable display data table 232a1 ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 29). ) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described is associated with an effect to be defined in the variable display data table 232a1. The content of the drawing is described.

The MPU 231 selects the display data table 232a1 to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the audio ramp control device 113, reads it from the data table storage area 232a, and stores it in a work RAM 233, which will be described later. The data is stored in the display data table buffer 233b, and a pointer 233e, which will be described later, is initialized to "0". Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233e is incremented by 1, and in the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233e, the next The image controller 237 specifies the image contents to be drawn, creates a drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the drawing of the image. As a result, the drawing contents are identified in the order specified in the display data table 232a1 according to the update of the pointer 233e, so the image specified in the display data table 232a1 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 does not change the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the sound lamp control device 113. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table 232a1 with the display data table buffer 233b.

Here, as in a conventional pachinko machine, if a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table 232a1 with the display data table buffer 233b. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 can be caused to display various types of effect images.

Further, the display data table 232a1 corresponding to each effect is prepared in this manner, the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the effect to be displayed is set in the display data table buffer 233b, and the display data table 232a1 thus set is used. The drawing list can be created frame by frame because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting winnings. is.

On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines such as the pachinko machine 10, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have the display data table 232a1 corresponding to each effect. In this way, the display data table 232a1 is prepared for each effect, the display data table buffer 233b is set according to the effect to be displayed, and the drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set display data table 232a1. can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. is.

Next, details of the additional data table 232a2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the additional data table 232a2. The additional data table 232a2 is a display to be displayed with the passage of time for the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to one effect based on the command from the main control device 110 (sound lamp control device 113). It describes the contents. Here, "adding to one effect" means changing the display content of one effect based on a command from the main control device 110 (sound lamp control device 113). displays an image that is not displayed, superimposes another effect on the one effect, changes the color tone of part or all of the one effect, or changes the image displayed in the one effect It includes the concept of

That is, the additional data table 232a2 adds an image that is not normally displayed to one effect displayed by the display data table 232a1 selected based on the command from the main controller 110 (audio lamp controller 113). The drawing content necessary to display it, the drawing content necessary to change the color tone of part or all of the one effect, and the image displayed as the initial setting (default setting) in the one effect The drawing contents required to be changed and displayed are defaulted.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation effect displayed by the variation display data table 232a1 selected based on the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) from the main controller 110 (voice lamp control device 113). A case will be described in which the display contents for displaying the change pattern to be displayed in addition to the "display" are defined by the additional data table 232a2.

That is, the additional data table 232a2 is prepared corresponding to change patterns such as character patterns, display colors, change timings, and re-change contents of the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 in the "reach display" of the variable effect, for example. Specifically, the data table storage area 232a stores a plurality of additional data tables 232a2 corresponding to the change patterns of the character displays Se1 to Se4.

In this additional data table 232a2, in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table 232a1, the contents (drawing contents) of one frame of image to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address are defined in detail. . The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object to be additionally displayed in the image for one frame, and display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and so on according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render a sprite, such as a translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

For example, in the example of the additional data table 232a2 shown in FIG. 30, one character (character 1) and one character pattern (character pattern 1) are associated with the address "01F4H" defined in the display data table 232a1. Each sprite type (character type, character type), display position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information are defined. On the other hand, if there is no display object to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table 232a1, the additional data table 232a2 indicates that there is no display object to be added corresponding to that address. Meaning Null data is defined (corresponding to address "0001H" in FIG. 30).

Note that "0000H", which is the top address of the additional data table 232a2, describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table 232a1, and the last address of the additional data table 232a2 ( In the example, "02EFH") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address "02EFH" in which the "End" information is described is associated with the effect to be defined in the additional data table 232a2. The content of the drawing is described.

Further, the additional data table 232a2 shown in FIG. 30 exemplifies those corresponding to the change pattern of the variable effect which is the variation pattern of "normal reach only", and the variable effect of "normal reach only" (for example, as the variation pattern " E201H". See FIG. 20(a).), that is, set to correspond to the variation time of 15 seconds. Specifically, "01F4H" is set as an address corresponding to 10 seconds after the start of the variable element of "normal reach", and at the start of the variable element of "normal reach", the central small area Ds2 The display mode of the displayed character pattern (for example, change in hair color, etc.) and the change pattern (for example, the display color of "red", etc.) of the character display Se1 at the time of reaching occurrence emitted from the character pattern. configured to be set.

When the MPU 231 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 creates an additional data table corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation effect indicated by the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command. 232a2 is read from the data table storage area 232a and stored in an additional data table buffer 233c of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Each time the pointer 233e is updated, the pointer 233e is indicated by one display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and one or more additional data tables 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. The drawing contents specified by the address are specified, the image contents to be drawn next are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, is created. If the additional data table 232a2 is not stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, the drawing list is created only from the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b.

For example, in the example of FIG. 30, when the pointer 233e is "0001H", null data is defined at the address "0001H" of the additional data table 232a2, so it is determined that there is no display object to be added. , a drawing list is generated based on various sprites defined at the address "0001H" of the display data table 232a1. On the other hand, when the pointer 233e becomes "01F4H", the MPU 231 adds characters 1, Each sprite of the character pattern 1 is added to create a drawing list, and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image.

By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. Accordingly, as the pointer 233e is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order specified in the display data table 232a1, and the drawing contents specified in the additional data table 232a2 are added. An image as defined by the table 232a2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to commands (for example, display variation pattern commands) from the sound ramp control device 113, etc. (For example, a variable effect image) in addition to another effect image (for example, the "strong pattern" image of the character display Se1 at the time of reaching occurrence) is displayed, corresponding to the other effect image to be additionally displayed By setting the additional data table 232a2 in the additional data table buffer 233c, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed.

As a result, for example, in the case where there are 32 types of original effect images and 5 types of other effect images to be additionally displayed, it is possible to provisionally display an image in which the other effect images are superimposed on each original effect image. If a data table is prepared separately, 32×5=160 types of display data tables must be prepared. By defining, it is sufficient to prepare 32+5=37 types of display data tables 232a1 and additional data tables 232a2, and an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 232a can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to store data tables 232a1 and 232a2 corresponding to various modes of effects in the capacity prepared in the data table storage area 232a, and further diversification of the effect images can be easily achieved.

Further, as in the pachinko machine 10, by defining another effect image to be additionally displayed as an additional data table 232a2, the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the original effect image is set in the display data table buffer 233b. Even if it is later decided to display another effect image to be additionally displayed, additional data corresponding to the other effect image can be obtained without changing the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b. By simply setting the table 232a2 in the additional data table buffer 233c, the additional effect image to be displayed can be easily displayed in addition to the original effect image.

Furthermore, since the additional data table 232a2 has the same data structure as the display data table 232a1, the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table buffer 233c are set. From the additional data table 232a2, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e while updating the pointer 233e every time, and from these, one corresponding to one frame can be easily identified. One draw list can be easily generated. Therefore, even if the display of other effects is determined by the sound lamp control device 113 or the like in addition to the effects performed based on the command from the main control device 110, the effects to be additionally displayed are displayed. By defining the display contents in the additional data table 232a2, it is possible to easily display a wide variety of effects from the few data tables 232a1 and 232a2.

In particular, each character display Se1 to Se4 displayed at the time of "reach display" is a character pattern of "weak pattern" or "strong pattern", display color of "white", "red" or "gold", "when reach occurs or "Reaching" are determined by lottery, and the display patterns of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are diverse. Therefore, by defining the display mode of each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 in the additional data table 232a2, it is possible to easily produce a wide variety of character display effects from a small number of data tables 232a1 and 232a2.

Next, details of the transfer data table 232a3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table 232a3. The transfer data table 232a3 is prepared corresponding to the display data table 232a1 prepared for each effect. That is, in the transfer data table 232a3, among the image data of the sprites used in the effects defined in the display data table 232a1, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Transfer data information for transfer to the image storage area 236a and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table 232a1 are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the display data table 232a1 is not prepared. . As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 232a can be suppressed.

The transfer data table 232a3 is associated with the address defined in the display data table 232a1, and transfers sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. Data information is described (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "01F4H" in FIG. 31). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table 232a1. is set, and in the transfer data table 232a3, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table 232a1, the transfer data table 232a3 indicates the transfer to start corresponding to that address. Null data, which means that there is no target image data, is defined (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 31).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that, similarly to the display data table 232a1, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table 232a3, and the end address of the transfer data table 232a3 (see FIG. 31). In the example, "02EFH") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address "02EFH" in which the "End" information is described, the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table 232a3 is transferred. transfer data information is described.

When the MPU 231 selects the display data table 232a1 to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like from the sound lamp control device 113, the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the display data table 232a1 exists. reads the transfer data table 232a3 from the data table storage area 232a and stores it in a transfer data table buffer 233d of the work RAM 233, which will be described later.

Then, each time the pointer 233e is updated, the drawing specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e is selected from the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. After specifying the contents, a drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, is created, and image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is selected from the transfer data table 232a3 stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d. Acquire the transfer data information and add the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of FIG. 31, when the pointer 233e becomes "0001H" or "01F4H", the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table 232a3 to the display data table 232a1 and the additional data. It is added to the drawing list created based on the table 232 a 2 and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233e is "0002H", since Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table 232a3, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the image data to be transferred is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

When the drawing list received from the MPU 231 contains transfer data information, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area provided in the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information. 236a to a predetermined sub-area.

Here, as described above, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table 232a1. , in the transfer data table 232a3, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table 232a3, a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table 232a1. In addition, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table 232a1.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 without delay. , the third symbol display device 81 can display the corresponding effect while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the display data table 232a1. Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 by the description in the transfer data table 232a3.

In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 sets the display data table 232a1 in the display data table buffer 233b in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) from the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, since the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the display data table 232a1 is set in the transfer data table buffer 233d, the sprite image data used in the display data table 232a1 can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 at a desired timing. It can be transferred to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

Further, the transfer data table 232a3 defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be finely controlled while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

The transfer data table 232a3 has a data structure similar to that of the display data table 232a1, and corresponds to the address defined in the display data table 232a1. Data transfer data information is defined. Therefore, before image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b, the image data is surely stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. can indicate the timing of transfer start. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third symbol display device 81 can easily display various effect images.

Returning to FIG. 25, the description continues. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the MPU 231 . The work RAM 233 contains a simple image display flag 233a, a display data table buffer 233b, an additional data table buffer 233c, a transfer data table buffer 233d, a pointer 233e, a drawing list area 233f, a clock counter 233g, a stored image discrimination flag 233h, a drawing object It has at least a buffer flag 233i, a character pattern memory 233j, a red character flag 233k, a gold character flag 233m, a character color change flag at occurrence 233n, a character color change flag during reach 233o, and a limit flag 233p.

The simplified image display flag 233a causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the power-on images (power-on main image 282 and power-on fluctuation image 283) shown in FIGS. 26(a) to 26(c). This is a flag indicating whether or not This simple image display flag 233a is set in order to display the power-on main image 282 on the third symbol display device 81 during the initialization process of the main process (see FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 after the power is turned on. When the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the power-on main image 282, it is set to ON (see S2004 in FIG. 48). Then, when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61(b)) of the transfer setting process (see FIG. 61(a)), the third symbol This is set to off in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the display device 81 (see S2415 in FIG. 61(b)).

The simple image display flag 233a is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2021 in FIG. 49(b)). When the image display flag 233a is ON, the simple command determination process (see S2028 in FIG. 49B) and the simple display setting process (see S2028 in FIG. 49(b) S2029) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233a is off, command determination processing (see FIGS. 50 to 56) and display are performed so that various images are displayed according to commands received from the sound lamp control device 113. Setting processing (see FIGS. 57 to 60) is executed.

The simple image display flag 233a is referred to in transfer setting processing (see FIG. 61(a)) executed by the MPU 231 during V interrupt processing (see FIG. 49(b)). In this transfer setting process, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233a is ON, there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. While the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61(b)) for transferring to the video RAM 235 is executed, if the simple image display flag 233a is off, the image data necessary for the drawing process is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Executes the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 62) for transferring to.

The display data table buffer 233b is a buffer for storing one display data table 232a1 corresponding to the effect to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to commands from the sound lamp control device 113 and the like. The MPU 231 determines an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like from the sound lamp control device 113, selects a display data table 232a1 corresponding to the effect from the data table storage area 232a, The selected display data table 232a1 is stored in the display data table buffer 233b.

Then, the MPU 231 increments a pointer 233e, which will be described later, by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233e in the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, for each frame. , a drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b.

The additional data table buffer 233c adds to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b in response to a command or the like from the sound lamp control device 113. This is a buffer for storing one or a plurality of additional data tables 232a2 corresponding to effects to be displayed (change patterns such as display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4). When the display data table 232a1 is stored in the display data table buffer 233b, the MPU 231 temporarily writes Null data, which means that there is no additional display object to be displayed, in the additional data table buffer 233c. Clear its contents.

After that, the MPU 231 adds to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b based on the command or the like from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays it. Determine whether or not there is a performance. Each time an effect to be additionally displayed occurs, an additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the effect is selected from the data table storage area 232a, and the selected additional data table 232a2 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. do.

Then, the MPU 231 increments a pointer 233e, which will be described later, by 1, and adds the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e to the additional data table buffer in the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b. In the additional data table 232a2 stored in the 233c, a drawing list (described later) describing the instruction content of image drawing to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233e is generated. 32).

As a result, the effect corresponding to the additional data table 232a2 is additionally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1. Further, when the additional data table 232a2 is not stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, Null data is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Therefore, the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as it is.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the additional data table buffer 233c is configured to store a plurality of (for example, 32) additional data tables 232a2. Therefore, each time an effect to be added is added, the additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the effect is determined, and the additional data table 232a2 is added and stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. A plurality of effects corresponding to a plurality of additional data tables 232a2 can be added to the effects and displayed.

The transfer data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b in response to a command or the like from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. When the display data table 232a1 is stored in the display data table buffer 233b, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the display data table 232a1 from the data table storage area 232a, and stores the selected transfer data. The table 232a3 is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d.

If all the sprite image data used in the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the display data table 232a1 is prepared. It has not been. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233d by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

Then, the MPU 231 increments a pointer 233e, which will be described later, by one, and adds transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e in the transfer data table 232a3 stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d. is specified (that is, if Null data is not described), the rendering list described later (see FIG. 32) describing the instruction content of image rendering to the image controller 237 generated for each frame includes that Add transfer data information.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer to a predetermined sub-area. Here, as described above, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table 232a1. , in the transfer data table 232a3, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table 232a3, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table 232a1, , the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 without fail.

Further, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it is possible to read images necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance and transfer them to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 without delay. can. Therefore, while drawing the image of each sprite designated by the display data table 232a1, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 by the description in the transfer data table 232a3.

The pointer 233e retrieves the corresponding drawing content or the This is for designating the address from which the transfer data information of the transfer target image data should be obtained.

The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233e to "0" when the display data table 232a1 is stored in the display data table buffer 233b. Then, the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 49B) executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of one frame of image is completed. During the display setting process (see FIG. 57), the pointer update process (see FIG. 60) is executed to increment the value of the pointer 233e by one.

Every time the pointer 233e is updated, the MPU 231 updates the pointer 233e from the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. A drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, is created by specifying the drawing contents specified at the indicated address, and the transfer data table 232a3 stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d should be transferred at that time. Transfer data information relating to image data of a predetermined sprite is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the additional data table 232a2 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, , the effect corresponding to the stored additional data table 232a2 can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. can be done. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

Further, when the transfer data table 232a3 stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d is stored, based on the transfer data table 232a3, the corresponding display data table 232a1 starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 without delay. can be done. Therefore, while drawing the image of each sprite designated by the display data table 232a1, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 by the description in the transfer data table 232a3.

The drawing list area 233f includes a display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, an additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, and a transfer data table 232a3 stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d. This is an area for storing a drawing list that is generated based on and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 32, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, . For each sprite such as character 2, ...), cockpit image, execution pattern, reserved pattern (reserved pattern 1, reserved pattern 2, ...), character pattern (character pattern 1, ...), error pattern, It describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the ROM type (or information indicating the RAM type) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its address. ing. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the ROM type (or RAM type) and address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information.

The image controller 237 performs enlargement/reduction processing on a standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the character ROM 234 (or various video RAMs 235 and 236) according to the enlargement ratio, Rotation processing, semi-transparency processing according to the translucency value, synthesis processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, color tone correction processing according to color information, and filter specification information After performing filtering processing by a method specified by the information, an image obtained by performing various processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233i, which will be described later.

The MPU 231 stores the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233e and other drawing contents in the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Detailed drawing information for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame, based on the content of the image to be executed (for example, a pending image that displays an execution pattern or a pending pattern, a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.) (detailed information) is generated, and a drawing list is created by rearranging the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage ROM type (or RAM type) and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table 232a1 and the additional data table 232a2, and others. is generated according to the sprite type specified from the content of the image. That is, since the character ROM 234 (or the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) in which the sprite image data is stored is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 stores the sprite image data according to the sprite type. can immediately identify the storage ROM type (or RAM type) and address in which is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 stores other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table 232a1 and the additional information. Those information defined in the data table 232a2 are copied as they are. In this embodiment, no other information is set for the rear image and the cockpit image.

Furthermore, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ). , character (character 1, character 2, ...), cockpit image, execution design, reserved design (reserved design 1, reserved design 2, ...), character design (character design 1, character design 2, ...) , error pattern, detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites by overwriting them in the frame buffers 236b and 236c. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data table 232a3 stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d contains transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233e, the MPU 231 detects the transfer data information (i.e., where the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the character ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list.

Then, if the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. , and transfers the image data to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

Returning to FIG. 25, the description continues. The clock counter 233g is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b. When one display data table 232a1 is stored in the display data table buffer 233b, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time (variable effect time) of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table 232a1. . This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing and display processing for one frame of image are completed (FIG. 49(b)). )) is executed (see FIG. 57), the timer counter 233g is decremented by one (see S2309 in FIG. 57). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233g becomes "0" or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b has ended, and ends the effect. Various processes that should be performed together are executed.

The stored image determination flag 233h determines whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not

This stored image determination flag 233h is generated by the initial setting process (see S2001 in FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The storage image determination flag 233h generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image determination flag 233h is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 231. . In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, the stored state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image determination flag 233h to determine whether the image of the sprite to be transferred is transferred. It is determined whether the data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S2438 in FIG. 62).

If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S2439 in FIG. 62). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). is a flag for specifying The MPU 231 designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing object buffer when the drawing object buffer flag 233i is "0", and designates the second frame buffer 236c when it is "1". The information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S2502 in FIG. 63).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233i is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233i, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the process (see FIG. 49B) is executed (see S2502 in FIG. 63).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

The character pattern memory 233j stores any character pattern of the "weak pattern" or the "strong pattern" in the character display Se1 during the reach occurrence or the character display Se2 during the reach displayed on the third pattern display device 81 during the "reach display". This is a memory for storing what to display. The MPU 231 determines, based on the contents of the character pattern memory 233j, whether the character pattern in the on-reach character display Se1 or the on-reach character display Se2 is a "weak pattern" or a "strong pattern". A “weak pattern” or a “strong pattern” to be displayed on the character display Se1 during reach occurrence or the character display Se2 during reach is set based on the content of determination.

The character pattern memory 233j is first initialized (that is, cleared to 0) by the initial setting process (see S2001 in FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. Then, when the display control device 114 receives a command regarding the character pattern of the character display Se1 during reach generation or (and) during reach character display Se2 from the sound lamp control device 113, the contents corresponding to those commands are set. (See S2192 in FIG. 55).

Specifically, for example, when a weak pattern command for display is received, data indicating "weak pattern" is set in the character pattern memory 233j as the character display Se1 at the occurrence of reach. Further, when a strong pattern command for display is received, data indicating "strong pattern" is set in the character pattern memory 233j as the character display Se1 at the occurrence of ready-to-win. In addition, when the display weak/weak command is received, data indicating "weak pattern" as the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence and data indicating "weak pattern" as the character display Se2 during reach are stored in the character pattern memory 233j. set. Further, when the weak/strong command for display is received, the character pattern memory 233j stores data indicating "weak pattern" as the character display Se1 at the occurrence of reach and data indicating "strong pattern" as the character display Se2 during reach. set. Further, when the strong/weak command for display is received, data indicating "strong pattern" as the character display Se1 at the occurrence of reach and data indicating "weak pattern" as the character display Se2 during reach are set in the character pattern memory 233j. be done. Further, when the strong/strong command for display is received, the character pattern memory 233j stores the data indicating "strong pattern" as the character display Se1 at the occurrence of the reach and the data indicating the "strong pattern" as the character display Se2 during the reach. set.

In this way, the MPU 231 receives from the sound lamp control device 113 a weak display pattern command, a strong display pattern command, a weak display pattern command, a weak strong pattern command for display, a strong/weak display pattern command, or a strong/strong display pattern command. Pattern commands (hereafter, weak pattern commands for display, strong pattern commands for display, weak pattern commands for display, weak strong pattern commands for display, strong/weak pattern commands for display, and strong/strong pattern commands for display are collectively referred to as "pattern system." command) is received, the character pattern memory 233j is set based on the received pattern-based command. On the other hand, when the variable effect ends, that is, when the display confirmation command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the character The pattern memory 233j is cleared to 0 (turned off) (see S2312 in FIG. 57).

When the contents of the pattern-based command are set in the character pattern memory 233j, the MPU 231 determines the character pattern additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the contents stored in the character pattern memory 233j, and creates the character pattern additional data table 232a2. is set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c (see 2203 in FIG. 55). Then, as described above, the MPU 231 generates a to create a drawing list.

As a result, the character pattern additional data table 232a2 is set in the additional data table buffer 233c, so that the character pattern of the character display Se1 at the occurrence of reach or the character display Se2 during reach in the variable effect is defined by the display data table 232a1. (For example, the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is changed from "weak pattern" to "strong pattern", and the character display Se2 during reach is changed from "weak pattern" to "strong pattern"). Therefore, only by storing the character pattern additional data table 232a2 in the additional data table buffer 233c, the character pattern of the ready-to-win character display Se1 or the during-reach character display Se2 to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed. be able to. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In the first embodiment, in the character pattern memory 233j, the character pattern of the initial setting (default setting) of each character display Se1 to Se4, that is, "weak pattern" for the character display Se1 when reach occurs, or character display Se2 during reach Even if a "weak pattern" character pattern is set for the character pattern, the character pattern additional data table 232a2 is selected based on the character pattern and stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. By configuring in this way, the process of confirming whether or not the display mode of each character display Se1 to Se4 is the initial setting becomes unnecessary, and the process can be standardized, and the man-hours at the time of designing the program can be reduced. .

Instead of the above configuration, the additional data table 232a2 may not be stored in the additional data table buffer 233c when the content set in the character pattern memory 233j is the initial setting (default setting). good too. In the case of such a configuration, it is necessary to perform processing to determine whether or not it is an initial setting. can be mitigated.

The red character flag 233k is a flag for setting the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to "red" in the "reach display" mode. The MPU 231 collectively sets the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 to "red" based on the setting contents of the red character flag 233k.

The red character flag 233k is first initialized (that is, turned off) by the initialization process (see S2001 in FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. Then, when the MPU 231 receives the display red character command from the audio lamp control device 113, it sets the red character flag 233k to ON (see S2195 in FIG. 55). On the other hand, when the variable effect is completed, that is, when the display confirmation command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 displays the red character flag together with the character pattern memory 233j in the display setting process (see FIG. 57). 233k is turned off (cleared to 0) (see S2312 in FIG. 57).

When the red character flag 233k is set to ON, the MPU 231 determines the character color additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the ON of the red character flag 233k, and saves the character color additional data table 232a2 to the additional data table buffer. 233c (see S2203 in FIG. 55). Then, as described above, the MPU 231 performs the following operations based on the display data table 232a1 set (stored) in the display data table buffer 233b and the character color additional data table 232a2 set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c. to create a drawing list.

When both the character pattern additional data table 232a2 and the character color additional data table 232a2 are set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c, the character pattern additional data table 232a2 and the character color A drawing list is created based on the additional data table 232a2.

As a result, the character color additional data table 232a2 based on the red character flag 233k is set, so that the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 in the variable effect are displayed in the display data table 232a1 regardless of the character pattern. The original content ("white") defined by the is changed to "red" and displayed. Therefore, the character color additional data table 232a2 is created based on the setting contents of the red character flag 233k, and the character color additional data table 232a2 is simply stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. The display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 to be displayed can be easily changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

The gold character flag 233m is a flag for setting the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 displayed on the third pattern display device 81 at the time of "ready display" to "gold". The MPU 231 collectively sets the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 to "gold" based on the setting contents of the gold character flag 233m.

The gold character flag 233m is first initialized (that is, turned off) by the initial setting process (see S2001 in FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. Then, when the MPU 231 receives the display gold letter command from the sound lamp control device 113, it sets the gold letter flag 233m to ON (see S2196 in FIG. 55). On the other hand, when the variable effect is completed, that is, when the display confirmation command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 displays the gold character flag together with the character pattern memory 233j etc. in the display setting process (see FIG. 57). 233m is turned off (cleared to 0) (see S2312 in FIG. 57).

When the gold character flag 233m is set to ON, the MPU 231 determines the character color additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the ON of the gold character flag 233m, and stores the character color additional data table 232a2 in the additional data table buffer. 233c (see S2203 in FIG. 55). Then, as described above, the MPU 231 performs the following operations based on the display data table 232a1 set (stored) in the display data table buffer 233b and the character color additional data table 232a2 set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c. to create a drawing list.

As a result, the character color additional data table 232a2 based on the gold character flag 233m is set, so that the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 in the variable effect are displayed in the display data table 232a1 regardless of the character pattern. The original content ("white") specified by is changed to "gold" and displayed. Therefore, the character color additional data table 232a2 is created based on the setting contents of the gold character flag 233m, and the character color additional data table 232a2 is simply stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. The display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 to be displayed can be easily changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

The character color change flag 233n at the time of occurrence is set at the time of "at the time of occurrence of reach", that is, at the start of the variable element of "normal reach", when the character display color change lottery for each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 described above is won. It is a flag for setting to change the display color of the character display Se1 at the time of occurrence of the ready-to-win at the timing of displaying the character display Se1 at the time of occurrence of the ready-to-win displayed on the 3-symbol display device 81 . The MPU 231 sets the display color of the ready-to-win character display Se1 to a display color corresponding to the lottery result of the character display color change lottery based on the setting contents of the character color change flag 233n.

The occurrence character color change flag 233n is initialized (that is, turned off) by the initial setting process (see S2001 in FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. Then, when the MPU 231 receives the change-at-occurrence command for display from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 sets the change-at-occurrence character color flag 233n to ON (see S2200 in FIG. 55). On the other hand, when the variable effect ends, that is, when the display confirmation command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 performs the display setting process (see FIG. 57) together with the character pattern memory 233j and the character pattern memory 233j. The color change flag 233n is turned off (cleared to 0) (see S2312 in FIG. 57).

When the character color change flag 233n is set to ON, the MPU 231 determines the character timing additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the ON state of the character color change flag 233n. 232a2 is set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c (see S2203 in FIG. 55). By setting (storing) the character timing additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the turning on of the character color change flag 233n at occurrence, the display color of the character display Se1 at occurrence of reach is displayed at the display timing of character display Se1 at occurrence of reach occurrence. is changed. As described above, the MPU 231 performs drawing based on the display data table 232a1 set (stored) in the display data table buffer 233b and the character timing additional data table 232a2 set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c. Create a list.

Note that the additional data table 232a2 for character timing, the additional data table 232a2 for character pattern, and the additional data table 232a2 for character color corresponding to the on of the character color change flag 233n at occurrence are all set in the additional data table buffer 233c ( stored), a drawing list is created based on the character timing additional data table 232a2, the character pattern additional data table 232a2, and the character color additional data table 232a2.

As a result, the additional data table 232a2 for character timing is set based on the character color change flag 233n at the time of occurrence of the occurrence of the hit occurrence, so that the display color of the character indication Se1 at the occurrence of the reach occurrence is changed at the timing when the character indication Se1 at the occurrence of the occurrence of the reach occurrence is displayed. , the display color is changed from the initial content ("white") specified by the display data table 232a1 to the display color set by the character timing additional data table 232a2 indicating the lottery result ("red" or "gold") of the change lottery. displayed. Therefore, the character timing additional data table 232a2 is created based on the setting contents of the character color change flag 233n at occurrence, and the third symbol display is performed only by storing the character timing additional data table 232a2 in the additional data table buffer 233c. The display color of the character display Se1 when a reach occurs can be easily changed at the timing when the character display Se1 when a reach occurs on the device 81 is displayed. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of display can be performed.

The in-reach character color change flag 233o indicates that when the character display color change lottery for each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 described above is won, the variation factor of "in-reach", that is, "super reach" or "special reach" ” is a flag for setting the display color of the in-reach character display Se2 to be changed at the timing of displaying the in-reach character display Se2 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the variable element. . The MPU 231 sets the display color of the in-reach character display Se2 to a display color according to the lottery result of the character display color change lottery based on the setting content of the in-reach character color change flag 233o.

The in-reach character color change flag 233o is initialized (that is, turned off) by the initial setting process (see S2001 in FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. Then, when the MPU 231 receives the change command during reach for display from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 sets the during reach character color change flag 233o to ON (see S2201 in FIG. 55). On the other hand, when the variable effect ends, that is, when the display confirmation command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 performs the character pattern memory 233j and the like in the display setting process (see FIG. 57). The color change flag 233o is turned off (cleared to 0) (see S2312 in FIG. 57).

When the during-reach character color change flag 233o is set to ON, the MPU 231 determines the additional data table for character timing 232a2 corresponding to the ON of the during-reach character color change flag 233o, and determines the additional data table for character timing 232a2. 232a2 is set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c (see S2203 in FIG. 55). By setting (storing) the character timing additional data table 232a2 corresponding to turning on of the in-reach character color change flag 233o, the display color of the in-reach character display Se2 changes at the display timing of the in-reach character display Se2. be done. As described above, the MPU 231 performs drawing based on the display data table 232a1 set (stored) in the display data table buffer 233b and the character timing additional data table 232a2 set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c. Create a list.

Note that the character timing additional data table 232a2, the character pattern additional data table 232a2, and the character color additional data table 232a2 are set in the additional data table buffer 233c ( stored), a drawing list is created based on the character timing additional data table 232a2, the character pattern additional data table 232a2, and the character color additional data table 232a2.

As a result, the character timing additional data table 232a2 is set based on the in-reach character color change flag 233o, so that the display color of the in-reach character display Se2 is displayed at the timing when the in-reach character display Se2 is displayed. The display color is changed from the initial content (“white”) defined by the data table 232a1 to the display color set in the character timing additional data table 232a2 indicating the lottery result (“red” or “golden”) of the change lottery. Is displayed. Therefore, the character timing additional data table 232a2 is created based on the setting contents of the character color change flag 233n at occurrence, and the third symbol display is performed only by storing the character timing additional data table 232a2 in the additional data table buffer 233c. The display color of the character display Se1 when a reach occurs can be easily changed at the timing when the character display Se1 when a reach occurs on the device 81 is displayed. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of display can be performed.

The after-match restriction flag 233p changes the display color of the standard phrase character display Se3 displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after the "ready-to-win display" at the time of losing to "white" which is the normal display color. This is a flag for forcibly setting. At this time, the MPU 231 wins the character display color change lottery based on the setting contents of the post-restriction flag 233p, and the display color of the character display Se1 at the time of reaching occurrence or the character display Se2 during reaching is changed to the chance up pattern. Even in the case where the variable effect is displayed as a failure, the display color of the standard phrase character display Se3 is displayed in "white" which is the normal display color.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a chance-up pattern ("red" or "golden") appears in any of the character displays Se1 and Se2, in principle, the subsequent character displays Se2 and Se3 (and the pseudo fixed form The phrase character display Se4) is configured to be able to carry on the display that inherits the chance-up pattern.

This is because, in the case of a configuration in which character displays appear at a plurality of locations in the variable effect as in the first embodiment, if the configuration is such that a chance-up pattern is randomly selected for each appearance location, the appearance of the character display is determined. This is because the lottery processing for each location becomes necessary, which complicates the control and increases the processing load. In addition, if the character display of the chance-up pattern is made to appear at the appearing position that is executed first in the variable effect, and then the character display of the normal pattern that is not the chance-up pattern is made to appear at the place that is executed later. , the expression of the degree of expectation for a big hit has become a downgraded expression (hereinafter referred to as "downgraded expression"), and a player who has been excited by the emergence of a chance-up pattern sees the downgraded expression. This is because there is a risk of losing interest.

Therefore, the lottery for the chance-up pattern is performed collectively in the character display of the variable effect, and if the chance-up pattern appears even once, it is configured to follow the chance-up pattern and appear in the subsequent character display. By doing so, there is no need to perform the lottery process for each appearance location, and the processing load can be reduced. Further, when a chance-up pattern is set, by following the chance-up pattern in the subsequent character display, the phenomenon of the occurrence of a downgraded expression in the character display can be eliminated in advance, and the player can enjoy the game. It is possible to prevent disappointment. Furthermore, by collectively setting the chance-up pattern in the character display of the variable effect, the lottery processing is performed in each of the character displays Se1 to Se4, and the additional data table 232a2 is generated for each lottery result (each character display). Since the number of additional data tables 232a2 to be set can be reduced compared to the case of setting, the processing load on the MPU 231 can be reduced.

On the other hand, when collectively setting the chance-up patterns of the character displays Se1 to Se4, for example, after the effect of "ready-to-win display" is completed and the "loss display" appears in the change effect of the loss, the standard phrase character display Se3 is performed. may be displayed in a chance-up pattern (eg, "red").

In such a case, the player does not decide the variable effect as "loss display" as it is because the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in the chance up pattern, and the effect of "re-variation" is executed from now on. I predict that the "loss display" will change to the "jackpot display". However, contrary to the prediction, the variable performance is fixed as "failure display". There is a possibility that the distrust of the installed game hall will increase, and the game will be interrupted.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, even if each of the character displays Se1 and Se2 wins the chance-up pattern, the post-game restriction flag 233p is turned on when the variable effect is determined by the "loss display". It is configured so that the chance-up pattern does not appear in the standard phrase character display Se3 displayed after the end of the "ready-to-reach display". That is, in the variable rendering of the "failure display", the display color of the standard phrase character display Se3 is corrected to the normal pattern of "white" according to the setting content of the post-event restriction flag 233p. do. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the performance contents, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and does not feel distrustful.

At this time, the post-restriction flag 233p is first initialized (that is, turned off) by the initial setting process (see S2001 in FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. Then, when the MPU 231 receives from the sound lamp control device 113 the standard phrase display normal command for displaying the standard phrase character display Se3 in "white", the MPU 231 sets the rear restriction flag 233p to ON at this time (Fig. 55, S2198). On the other hand, when the variable effect ends, that is, when the display confirmation command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 performs the display setting process (see FIG. 57) together with the character pattern memory 233j and the like. The flag 233p is turned off (cleared to 0) (see S2312 in FIG. 57).

When the character correction flag 233p is set to ON, the MPU 231 determines the character correction additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the ON of the character correction limit flag 233p, and stores the character correction additional data table 232a2 as additional data. It is set (stored) in the table buffer 233c (see S2203 in FIG. 55). At this time, by setting (storing) the character correction additional data table 232a2 corresponding to ON of the post restriction flag 233p, the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 is set to "red" or "red" by the character color additional data table 232a2. Even if it is set to change to "gold", the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in "white". As described above, the MPU 231 performs drawing based on the display data table 232a1 set (stored) in the display data table buffer 233b and the character correction additional data table 232a2 set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c. Create a list.

The character correction additional data table 232a2, the character pattern additional data table 232a2, the character color additional data table 232a2, and the character timing additional data table 232a2 are all set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c. If there is, a drawing list is created based on the character timing additional data table 232a2, the character pattern additional data table 232a2, and the character color additional data table 232a2. Since the additional data table 232a2 has a higher priority than the additional data table for color 232a2 (stored last), the additional data table for character color 232a2 is set, and the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are set. is set to change (display color other than "white"), the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is changed to "white ” is configured to be displayed.

As a result, the additional data table 232a2 for character correction based on the post-event restriction flag 233p is set, so that the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 displayed after the “event effect” of the “reach display” is executed. However, even if it is a chance-up pattern set by the character color additional data table 232a2 based on winning the above-described character display color change lottery, normal display is performed by the character correction additional data table 232a2. displayed in the color "white". Therefore, only by creating the additional data table for character correction 232a2 based on the setting contents of the limit flag 233p and storing the additional data table for character correction 232a2 in the additional data table buffer 233c, the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence can be achieved. Alternatively, even if the in-reach character display Se2 is changed to the chance-up pattern and displayed, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 can be changed again to the normal display color "white". Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 33 to 39. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into start-up processing (see FIG. 38) that is started when power is turned on, main processing (see FIG. 39) that is executed after the start-up processing, and periodic processing (first implementation). There are a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33) that is started with a period of 4 milliseconds) and an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 37) that is started by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Here, for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and the NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, and then the start-up processing and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds. The MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt processing to perform various types of processing that should be executed periodically.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In timer interrupt processing and main processing, commands to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, sound lamp control device 113, etc. are generated based on various processes, and temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. . In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device).

For example, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 a command for the number of pending balls set in the later-described starting winning process (see FIG. 34). In addition, it transmits to the sound ramp controller 113 the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the variation process (see FIG. 35) and the variation start process (FIG. 36) which is one process of the variation process. In addition, a ball launch signal set for shooting a ball in the process of S111, which will be described later, is transmitted to the launch control device 112. FIG.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then, in the case of the jackpot state, the specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened or closed. A large-opening opening/closing process for opening the door is executed (S103). That is, the specific winning hole 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning hole 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning hole 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of "o" or "x") by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S105). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 Variable display is performed at . Then, a lottery for the second symbol is carried out according to the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in a winning state, the electric accessary attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined period of time.

Next, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S106). That is, it reads the states of various switches 208 connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches 208, and saves detection information (winning detection information). Also, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 based on the winning detection information. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted toward the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("899" in the first embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203 . Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("250" in the first embodiment), it is cleared to "0" and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared to "0". The updated value of the counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S108). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values. ("899", "99", "99", "198" and "250" respectively in the first embodiment) are cleared to "0" respectively. Also, when the first winning random number counter C1 or the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the value of the first winning random number counter C1 or the second random number counter CINI2. The initial value of the second winning random number counter C4 is read, and the initial value is set to the first winning random number counter C1 or the second winning random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer areas of the RAM 203 .

Next, a process for performing dynamic display by the first design display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third design by the third design display device 81 are executed (S109). A starting prize winning process is executed when the ball mouth 64 wins a prize (S110). The details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, and the details of the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the starting winning process (S110) is executed, the firing control process is executed (S111), and further, other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Then, when the ball shooting is on, in order to send the ball shooting signal to the shooting control device 112 , the information of the ball shooting signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 . As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

Next, the starting winning process (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process (S110). In the starting winning process, it is determined whether or not a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), and if there is a starting winning, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Execute the process to hold (suspend). Further, the processing for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the starting winning process (S110), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S201). Here, based on the output signal of the first ball entrance switch (not shown) that detects the entry (winning) of the ball into the first ball entrance 64, read in the switch reading process (S106 in FIG. 33), A ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing.

When it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (the starting prize has been awarded) (S201: Yes), the value of the pending ball number counter 203a (the value of the suspended ball number counter 203a) It is determined whether or not the number of balls (N) is less than the upper limit (4 in the first embodiment) (S202). Then, whether there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S201: No), or even if there is a prize to the first ball entrance 64, if the number of pending balls N<4 (S202: No) , returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33).

On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S201: Yes) and if the number of reserved balls N<4 (S202: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N) is 1 is added (S203). Then, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) and provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Among the reserved first to fourth areas, the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1, the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, and the stop pattern selection counter storage area of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a 203b3 and the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 (S204).

Specifically, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a after the addition by the process of S203 is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in the respective storage areas of the first pending area. Also, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a after addition is "2", each storage area in the second pending area, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a after addition is "3", the third storage area If the value of the pending ball number counter 203a after addition is "4", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the storage areas of the fourth pending area.

Next, the value of the retained ball number counter 203a after addition by the processing of S203 (the number of retained balls N), the first winning random number counter C1 stored (reserved) in the retained ball storage area 203b by the processing of S204, the first winning In order to transmit the pending ball number command including the respective values of the type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 to the sound lamp control device 113, the pending ball number command is sent to the command transmission ring provided in the RAM 203. Set in the buffer (S205). As a result, the pending ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. After completing the process of S205, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

In the process of S205, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the number-of-holds-balls command may be the values read from the counter buffer in the process of S204. A value read out from the value stored (reserved) in 203b may be used.

Next, the variation process (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing this variation process (S109). This variation processing (S109) controls the dynamic display in the first symbol display device 37 and the variation effect performed in the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

In this variation process (S109), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently in progress (S301). During the big win includes the middle of the big win game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big win and the middle of the predetermined time after the end of the big win game. As a result of determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S301: Yes), this process is terminated.

If the jackpot is not in progress (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is dynamic display (S302), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is dynamic display. If not (S302: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has passed after the dynamic display on the first pattern display device 37 has stopped (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed since the dynamic display was stopped (S303: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33). As a result, the stationary symbols in the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) are displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined period of time, so that the player can visually recognize the stationary symbols. can.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S303, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display was stopped (S303: Yes), the value of the pending ball number counter 203a (dynamic display suspended in the main controller 110 (fluctuation It is determined whether or not the number of pending balls N) of the performance) is greater than "0" (S304). As a result, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a (the pending ball number N) is not "0" (S304: Yes), it is determined that it is time to start executing the variable effect, and first, the value of the pending ball number counter 203a is determined. (Number of held balls N) is subtracted by 1 (S305). This is because the variation start process (S307) starts the execution of one of the suspended variable effects, so that the number of suspended balls is reduced by one.

Next, shift processing is performed on the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b (S306). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b toward the reserved ball execution area 203c. The data in each area is shifted such as area 203c, reserved second area→reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on.

After the data shift process of S306, the variation start process for the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the data shift process. (S307), returning to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33). Note that the fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S304, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved balls counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N) is "0" (S304: No), the third symbol display device 81 is in a state where a demonstration effect is being performed. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not a demonstration is being performed (S308). In this determination process, after transmitting the demo command to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, it is determined that the value of the pending ball number counter 203a (the pending ball number N) is greater than "0". The period up to is determined to be during the demonstration.

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S308: No), the demo command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S309), and the process returns to timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33). On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration is being performed (S309: Yes), the process returns to timer interrupt processing. The demo command set in the process of S309 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 .

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, it transmits the display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 displays the demo on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demo command. Control is performed to display the production.

Here, the demo command is set when, as described above, there is not even a single held ball when the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, if the variable effect is not started even after the predetermined time has passed after the stop of the variation, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁

If it is determined in the process of S308 that the demonstration is not in progress (S308: No), a process of determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation is stopped is further performed. After the fluctuation is stopped, the process of S309 may be executed to set the demonstration command when the second predetermined time has passed. Thus, when there is no reserved ball after the fluctuation is stopped, the stop pattern of the stopped fluctuation performance can be shown to the player for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demonstration performance.

In the processing of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is in dynamic display (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S310). The display time during the dynamic display of the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If it has not elapsed (S310: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S311), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

In the first embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the dynamic display to the elapse of the fluctuation time, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red The green LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. A display mode is set in which the LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the variation process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the variation processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches "100" , to change the lighting color of the LED. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to "0" when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has passed (S310: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set for the first symbol display device 37 (S312). The stop symbols are set in advance by the variation start process (S307), which will be described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start process, whether or not a big win is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the process of S306. Depending on the value of , after the big hit, it is determined whether it is a pattern of "15R probability variable jackpot", a pattern of "2R probability variable jackpot", or a pattern of "15R normal jackpot".

In the first embodiment, when the "15R probability variable jackpot" is reached after the jackpot, the blue LED is lit, and when the "2R probability variable jackpot" is reached, the red LED is lit, and when the "15R normal jackpot" is reached. , a red LED and a blue LED are lit. In addition, when it is a loss, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Each LED is turned off when the next dynamic display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S312, the stop symbol of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED on the first symbol display device 37. In order to confirm and display, a confirmation command is set (S313), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variable effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 . Upon receiving this confirmation command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display confirmation command to the display control device 114 . The display control device 114 is configured to stop the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 and to confirm and display the stop symbol by receiving the confirmation command for display.

Next, the fluctuation start process (S307), which is one process of the fluctuation process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process (S307). In this fluctuation start process (S307), based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c, a lottery for a big hit or a loss (big hit lottery) is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device are executed. The dynamic display and the dynamic pattern (variation pattern and stop type) of the dynamic display performed in 81 and the like are determined.

In the fluctuation start process (S307), first, whether or not the game is a big hit is determined based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 8(a)). A judging big hit lottery (win/fail judgment) process is performed (S401).

Whether or not it is a big win is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the normal low probability state ("normal game state" or "time reduction state"), "7,307 , 582” is defined as the jackpot random value. In addition, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the high probability state (“probability fluctuation state”), “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892” are defined as jackpot random numbers.

In the process of S401, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and if they match. , is determined to be a jackpot. As a result of the process of S401, when it is determined that it is a jackpot (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 8(b) ), the display mode at the time of the big win is set (S402).

In this process, according to the jackpot type table 202b, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c, that is, the maximum number of rounds after the jackpot of 15 rounds "Probability fluctuation "15R probability variable jackpot" that shifts to "state", "15R normal jackpot" that shifts to "time reduction state" after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, or "probability variable state" after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds It is determined whether it is a “2R probability variable jackpot” that shifts to “. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) at the time of the jackpot in the first symbol display device 37 is set.

In addition, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display various jackpot patterns corresponding to the jackpot types, the jackpot types ("15R probability variable jackpot", "2R probability variable jackpot", "15R normal jackpot") are used as stop types as they are. By setting, the display mode at the time of the big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S403), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the effect mode is selected based on the display mode (stop type) at the time of the big win and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time. Then, the variable time of the variable performance is determined based on the value of the variable type counter CS1 from among the selected performance modes. In determining the variation pattern at the time of the big win, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11(a) or (b)) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the big win.

Then, in the process of S402, when "15R probability variable jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot" is set as the jackpot type, it is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the selected stop pattern table 202d (C table 202d3). A performance mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is selected. That is, in this case, one of the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode, or the "special reach" effect mode is selected (see FIG. 11(a)).

When the "normal reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode, the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the group "E5: normal reach" of the big hit variation pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 12) Select the variation pattern associated with the value of That is, in this case, "only normal reach", "pseudo-gase + normal reach", "pseudo-gase 1 + normal reach", "normal reach + re-variation", "pseudo-gase + normal reach + re-variation" or "pseudo-gase 1 + normal reach + re-variation" is selected (see FIG. 12). Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time (see FIG. 12).

When the "super reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode, the variation type stored in the held ball execution area 203c in the "E6: super reach" group of the big hit variation pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 12) A variation pattern associated with the value of the counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "only super reach", "pseudo catch + super reach", "pseudo run 1 + super reach", "pseudo run 2 + super reach", "super reach + revariation", "pseudo catch + super reach + Re-fluctuation", "pseudo-run 1 + super reach + re-fluctuation" or "pseudo-run 2 + super reach + re-fluctuation" is selected (see Fig. 12). Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time (see FIG. 12).

When the "special reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode, the variation type stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the "E7: special reach" group of the big hit variation pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 12). A variation pattern associated with the value of the counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "only special reach", "pseudo hitch + special reach", "pseudo hitch 1 + special reach", "pseudo hitch 2 + special reach", "special reach + re-variation", "pseudo hitch + special reach + Re-fluctuation", "pseudo-run 1 + special reach + re-fluctuation" or "pseudo-run 2 + special reach + re-fluctuation" is selected (see Fig. 12). Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time (see FIG. 12).

Also, when "2R probability variable jackpot" is set as the jackpot type in the process of S402, the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c in the selected stop pattern table 202d (D table 202d4) Select an effect mode associated with the value. That is, when the "2R probability variable jackpot" is won, the "special variation" is selected without exception. Then, referring to the selected effect mode and the big hit variation pattern table 202e1, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203c is selected. In the first embodiment, only "movie" is selected in this case (see FIG. 12). Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time (see FIG. 12).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of losing is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the retained ball execution area 203c and the retained ball number counter 203a are set. Based on the value of and the current game state, as the effect mode to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81, "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode, "non-reach (normal)" effect mode, "normal reach" effect mode , "super reach" effect mode, or "special reach" effect mode is set. In the first embodiment, as described above, depending on whether the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the "probability fluctuation state", the "time reduction state", or the "normal game state", each effect The stop pattern table 202d (A table 202d1 or B table 202d2) is set so that the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the mode differs.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of losing is determined (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until stop display of the missing symbol is determined. At this time, if the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "normal game state", the A table 202d1 or B table 202d2 ( Either of FIG. 10(a) or FIG. 10(b) is selected. Further, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "time reduction state" or "probability fluctuation state", the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d corresponding to the number of pending balls at that time indicated by the number of pending ball counter 203a Alternatively, one of the B table 202d2 (see FIG. 10(a) or FIG. 10(b)) is selected.

When the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is set in the process of S404, it is stored in the held ball execution area 203c in the "E0: non-reach (shortened)" group of the change pattern table for losing 202e2. A variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "only non-reach (shortening)" is selected, and no other variation pattern is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time (see FIG. 13).

In addition, when the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is set in the process of S404, in the "E1: non-reach (normal)" group of the fluctuation pattern table 202e2 for loss, stored in the holding ball execution area 203c Select the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1. That is, in this case, "non-reach (normal) only", "pseudo-gase + non-reach (normal)", or "pseudo-gase 1 + non-reach (normal)" is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time (see FIG. 13).

Further, when the "normal reach" effect mode is set in the process of S402, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c in the group "E2: normal reach" of the variation pattern table 202e2 for loss Select the variation pattern associated with That is, in this case, "only normal reach", "pseudo-gase+normal reach" or "pseudo-ream 1+normal reach" is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time (see FIG. 13).

Further, when the "super reach" effect mode is set in the process of S402, the variation type counter CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203c in the "E3: super reach" group of the change pattern table for losing 202e2 Select the variation pattern associated with the value of That is, in this case, "only super reach", "pseudo-gase+super reach", "pseudo-rep 1+super reach", or "pseudo-rep 2+super reach" is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time (see FIG. 13).

Further, when the "special reach" effect mode is set in the process of S402, the variation type counter CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203c in the group "E4: special reach" of the change pattern table 202e2 for loss Select the variation pattern associated with the value of That is, in this case, "only special reach", "pseudo-gase+special reach", "pseudo-rep 1+special reach", or "pseudo-rep 2+special reach" is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time (see FIG. 13).

In this way, the setting processing of the performance mode and the variation pattern at the time of the big win and the setting processing of the performance mode and the variation pattern at the time of losing are determined by the same determination program using the same random numbers C3 and CS1. , the program can be shared, and the development man-hours at the time of development can be reduced.

In the processing of S406, based on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the processing of S403 and S405, the display control device 114 is notified of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern via the audio lamp control device 113. A pattern command is set (S406). Specifically, for example, when a big hit lottery is won and a 30-second variation pattern of "super reach only" is selected, "E601H" is set as the variation pattern command. Further, when the big winning lottery is lost and the 30-second variation pattern of "super reach only" is selected, "E301H" is set as the variation pattern command. In this way, even if the variable effect has the same variable time, by setting together the propriety of the variable effect and the contents of the rough variation pattern in the variation pattern command, the sound ramp control device 113 can achieve the effect mode including the propriety. By grasping the contents of and the variation time, it is possible to determine the variation pattern of the variation performance in more detail based on the information.

Also, the stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the processing of S402 or S404 is set (S407), and the process proceeds to the change processing (see FIG. 35). return. Specifically, for example, if the jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is "15R probability variable jackpot", the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "7" symbol etc.) is not specified, A stop type command indicating "15R probability variable jackpot" is set. In addition, if a jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is "15R normal jackpot", the third pattern stop mode (for example, "4" pattern, etc.) is not specified, and "15R normal jackpot" is selected. Set a stop type command that indicates that

On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won and the "super reach" production mode is selected, the stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "787" etc.) is not specified, and the " Set a stop type command indicating that it is a "super reach" production mode (so-called front and back loss). In addition, if the jackpot is not won and the "normal reach" production mode is selected, the stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "737" etc.) is not specified, and the "normal reach" at the time of losing is selected. ' Set a stop type command indicating that it is a production mode (so-called loss other than front and back). Furthermore, if the jackpot is not won and the "non-reach" production mode is selected, the stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "258" etc.) is not specified, and " Set a stop type command indicating that it is a "non-reach" production mode (so-called complete loss).

Thus, by setting a rough stop type based on the propriety of the variable effect to the stop type command, the audio lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) grasps the stop type based on the propriety, Based on this information, it is possible to determine the stop result of the variable presentation in more detail.

These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33) executed next, these commands are It is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . Upon receiving the variation pattern command and the stop type command, the audio ramp control device 113 generates a display variation pattern command and a display type command based thereon, and transmits them to the display control device 114 .

FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S501), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

Incidentally, the above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (1 second in the first embodiment) is executed. (S602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S603).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S604), and if it is turned on (S604: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605), and if not stored (S605: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case also, the process proceeds to S611.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S606). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed.

Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will also be described in S706 of FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S611, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S611). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S612, S613).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 is initialized (S612, S613). Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S612, S613) is similarly executed. . In the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S612, S613), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S612), and then the initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S613). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S605: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S607: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S608). Then, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power interruption is transmitted (S609), and the process proceeds to S610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes possible to start the ball payout control while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the process of S610, interrupts are permitted (S610). Then, the process shifts to the main process (see FIG. 39), which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S701). If the RAM 203 does not store power failure occurrence information (S701: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S702, S703).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S702). Specifically, when the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and the counter values reach the maximum values ("899" and "250" in the first embodiment), , clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S703) by the same method as the process of S108 (see FIG. 33), and the process proceeds to S701.

Here, while this main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 33 is activated and executed at predetermined time intervals (4 milliseconds in the first embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed according to the state of the game. For example, during the jackpot, the execution of controlling the opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is performed, and if the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67, the display control of the second pattern by the second pattern display device 83 is performed. done. Also, in the jackpot lottery executed when the dynamic display on the first pattern display device 37 is started, the jackpot random value to be compared with the obtained first hit random number counter C1 is determined depending on whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. the numbers will be different. Therefore, the time taken to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, but changes according to the state of the game at that time.

The processes of S702 and S703, which are one process of the main process, are executed during the remaining time of this timer interrupt process. That is, the remaining time is used to repeatedly update the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated randomly. . In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the first winning random number counter C1 and the second winning random number counter C2 are updated using these as initial values for updating. can have randomness.

In addition, in the process of S701, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S701: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 37 has been executed, so the power-off process from S704 onward is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S704), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) and transmit (S705). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S706), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S707), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

Note that the process of S701 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S702 and S703 performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33) ends. As a result, in the main processing of the main controller 110, at the timing when various settings by the timer interrupt processing are finished and when the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are finished updating, information on occurrence of power failure is confirmed. . Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S701 after the start-up process (see FIG. 38) ends. That is, the process can be started from the process of S701, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process.

Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initial setting processing (S601). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S701 can be started. As a result, the control burden on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110 .

In the first embodiment, the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33) is executed periodically to perform processing, and the main processing updates the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 during the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing. Although the case has been described, part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing may be configured to be executed in the main processing every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds). For example, in the first embodiment, the timer interrupt processing was performed by the timer interrupt processing to read the prize ball count signal and payout abnormality signal read processing (S102), the large opening opening and closing processing (S103), the second symbol control processing (S105), and the switch A part or all of the reading process (S106) may be configured to be executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

In this case, a step for determining whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has passed is provided in the main processing, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has passed, the processing to be executed at predetermined time intervals is executed. The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is updated during the remaining time of the processing executed every predetermined time. Since the time required for the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be updated at random even with such a configuration.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 47. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing (see FIG. 40) that is activated upon power-on and main processing (see FIG. 41) that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 40, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S1115 (see FIG. 41) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 41, when the audio lamp controller 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S1112 in FIG. 41), it executes power-off processing in S1115. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1115 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1002: No), the current start-up process was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1115. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), it will transfer to S1004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1115 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started after the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S808.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process of S1115, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined as normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to "0".

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1115 is executed (see S1114 in FIG. 41). That is, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1115 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1115 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared in order to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1009), and after setting the initial values of the RAM 223 (S1010), an interrupt Permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S1008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1010, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1010), interrupt permission is set. Then (S1011), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S1009 is skipped is that when the process of S1008 is reached from S1004 via the process of S1006, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the process of S1101 was executed last time (S1101), and if 1 millisecond or more has not passed (S1101: No). , S1102 to S1108 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1109. In the processing of S1101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has passed because S1102 to S1108 do not need to be processed in a short period (within 1 millisecond), whereas the fluctuation effect processing of S1109 This is because the command determination processing in step S1110 is preferably performed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1110 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S1109 in a short period, the command received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

In the process of S1101, if it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has passed since the process of S1101 was executed last time (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1102. If the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 40, the process proceeds directly to S1102.

In the processing of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1103 to S1111 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1106 described later (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

Next, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1105). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the variable effect is not executed or during the period of the "high-speed change" variable element, the process of changing the stage is performed, and the display control is performed instead of the frame button operation command. Set the back image change command for the device 114 . By including information about the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to an image corresponding to the stage. A process to change to is performed. In addition, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable production, by pressing the frame button 22, the expected value of the big win due to this change is displayed, or by pressing the frame button 22 during the "reach display", the expectation for the big win is displayed. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be changed to a decision button for selecting one ready-to-win effect from a plurality of ready-to-win effects. Note that if the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1105 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1105) ends, the lamp editing processing is executed (S1106), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S1107). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1107, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1108), and the process proceeds to S1109. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation effect performed by the third pattern display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S1106 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing/output process of S1107 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81. executed in time.

In the process of S1109, in order to display the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variable effect process which is a process for starting the variable effect based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110 to run. The details of this variation effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variable presentation process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1110), and the process proceeds to S1111. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In S1111, counter update processing is executed to update the hold change counter 223c, scenario counter 223d, character pattern counter 223e, character color lottery counter 223f, and color change timing counter 223g provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1111 ). Specifically, the hold change counter 223c, the scenario counter 223d, the character pattern counter 223e, the character color lottery counter 223f, and the color change timing counter 223g are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are set to their maximum values (in the first embodiment, When all of them reach "99"), they are cleared to "0".

As described above, the pending change counter 223c is used for executing the "holding change notice" and selecting the display mode, and the scenario counter 223d is used for selecting the execution timing of the "holding change notice". The counter 223e is used to select the character pattern of "weak pattern" or "strong pattern" in the character display Se1 during reach occurrence and the character display Se2 during reach, and the character color lottery counter 223f Used for selecting the display color, the color change timing counter 223g selects the change timing to the selected display color from the display timing of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence and the display timing of the character display Se2 during reach. used.

When the process of S1111 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1112). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1112 (S1112: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1114), and the power-off processing is executed (S1115). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S1116), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1112 (S1112: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1113), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1113: No), the process returns to S1101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1113: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call a pachinko hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1110). This command determination process (S1110) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process (S1110), first, from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read out and analyzed. is received (S1201). Then, when it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (S1201: Yes), a variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1202). The variation pattern extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and based on the variation pattern, a display variation pattern command for notifying the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern is set for the display control device 114 (S1203). , return to the main processing (see FIG. 41).

The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S1102 in FIG. 41) of the main processing. . As a result, the display control device 114 executes processing to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation effect of the variation pattern determined by the sound lamp control device 113 .

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1201: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S1204). Then, when it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1203: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1205). The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and based on the stop type, a display stop type command for notifying the stop type of the variable effect is set to the display control device 114 (S1206), and the variable effect is started. The flag 223a is set to ON (S1207), and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 41).

The display stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S1102 in FIG. 41) of the main processing. . The display control device 114 sets a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command when the variable effect to be executed by the display change pattern command set by the processing of S1206 is to be displayed. do.

It should be noted that the stop type command indicates the stop type of the variable effect in which the variation pattern is indicated by the variation pattern command after the main controller 110 transmits the variation pattern command when starting the variable effect. This command is always sent from 110 . By setting the fluctuation start flag 223a to ON by the process of S1206, in the fluctuation production process to be executed later, the fluctuation of the fluctuation production extracted based on the value of each counter C1 or the like included in the pending ball number command. It is determined whether or not the pattern matches the variation pattern of the variation performance extracted from the received variation pattern command. In addition, whether or not the variable effect stop type extracted based on the value of each counter C1 etc. previously included in the pending ball number command matches the variable effect stop type extracted from the received stop type command judgment is made. As a result of those determinations, in one variation production, if the variation pattern based on the number of pending balls command and the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command do not match, or the stop type and stop type command based on the number of pending balls command If it does not match the stop type based on the above, it is determined that some abnormality (for example, command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, an error command for display indicating the abnormality is generated, and transmitted to the display control device 114 44).

As a result of the processing of S1204, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1204: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1208). Then, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S1208: Yes), the pending display setting process is performed (S1209), and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 41). In this hold display setting process (S1209), control related to "hold change notice" is performed based on various information (for example, the value of the first hit random number counter C1, etc.) included in the received hold ball number command. The details of this pending display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

As a result of the process of S1208, if it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S1208: No), then it is determined whether or not a confirmation command has been received from main controller 110 (S1210). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variable effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 . If it is determined that the confirmation command has been received (S1210: Yes), a display confirmation command for notifying the reception of the confirmation command is set to the display control device 114 (S1211), and the process proceeds to S1212. Transition.

The display confirmation command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1002 in FIG. 41). . In the display control device 114, by receiving the confirmation command for display, the variable effect being executed by the third pattern display device 81 is stopped, and the stop type corresponding to the stop type command for display is previously indicated. By displaying the stop pattern, it is determined and displayed.

In the processing of S1212, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is greater than "0" (S1212), and it is confirmed whether or not there is a suspended and unexecuted variable effect. As a result of the determination, if the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is not greater than "0", that is, if there is no standby variable effect (S1212: No), the display control device 114 is changed to a standby variable. A non-reserved display command for notifying that there is no effect is set (S1213), and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 41). On the other hand, if the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is greater than "0" (S1212: Yes), there is a waiting variable effect, so the process of S1213 is skipped and the process returns to the main process.

The no-hold-for-display command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1002 in FIG. 41). be. The display control device 114 receives the no-hold command for display, recognizes that there is no waiting variable effect, and displays the execution pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third pattern display device 81. be erased.

In the process of S1210, if it is determined that the definite command has not been received (S1210: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1212), the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 41). For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. A command is set to be sent to the device 114 . The demonstration command received from the main controller 110 is set as a display demonstration command by the processing of S1212, and after being temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, the command output processing of the main processing (Fig. 41) is transmitted to the display control device 114.

Here, the hold display setting process (S1209) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the pending display setting process (S1209). In this pending display setting process (S1209), first, the value of the pending ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110 included in the received pending ball number command (that is, the pending variable effect pending ball number) is extracted, This is stored in the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1301).

Here, the pending ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), so each time there is a starting winning, the process of S1301 , the value of the sub pending ball number counter 223 b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the pending ball number counter 203 a of the main controller 110 . Therefore, even if the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the voice lamp control device 113 The value of the sub-retained ball number counter 223b can be corrected to match the value of the retained ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110.

Next, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 included in the received pending ball number command is extracted, and the pending information in the pending information storage area 223h. Of the first to fourth storage areas (see FIG. 24), it stores in the area corresponding to the number of reserved balls extracted from the number of reserved balls command by the processing of S1301 (S1302). That is, when the number of held balls is X (1≤X≤4), each value of the extracted first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1. are stored in the first winning random number counter storage area 223h1, the first winning type counter storage area 223h2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223h3, and the variation type counter storage area 223h4 of the X-th area for storing pending information.

The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball number command are obtained from the counter buffer in the main controller 110 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). , is the value stored in the X-th reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main controller 110 when the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command is X. In other words, the same information (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) as in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main controller 110 is stored in the reserved information storage area 223h of the sound ramp controller 113. FIG.

The sound lamp control device 113 can execute pre-reading processing by referring to the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223h. That is, when the suspended variable performance is executed, the result of the variable performance (whether it will be a big hit, what the variable time will be, etc.) is determined before the variable performance is executed, The sound lamp control device 113 performs control such as determining execution of various effects, determining whether or not to execute the "holding change notice" and display mode, and determining the execution (start) timing of the "holding change notice". can be run

Next, in the processing of S1303, it is determined whether or not the execution lottery for "holding change notice" is won based on various information indicated by the number of holding balls command received this time (S1303). As described above, the execution lottery for the "suspension change notice" is based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the X-th area storing the suspension information. Appropriateness of the variable performance indicated by the command and the mode of performance are extracted. Then, based on the extracted success or failure and effect mode, the value of the pending change counter 223c at that time and the pending change table 222e (see FIG. 15) are referred to, and whether or not the "holding change notice" can be executed and displayed. determine the mode.

As a result of the process of S1303, if the execution lottery for "holding change notice" is won (S1303: Yes), a hold indicating the display mode (for example, "blue" etc.) that is the result of the "holding change notice" execution lottery The change information is stored in the pending change information storage area 223h5 of the X-th pending information storage area (S1304). As a result, whether or not to execute the "hold change notice" can be stored for each X-th area storing the hold information.

Next, in the process of S1304, the value of the scenario counter 223d at that time is determined in order to determine the execution timing of the "suspended change notice", that is, the display timing at which the "suspended change notice" is reflected in the executed symbols or the suspended symbols. , and the scenario table 222f to determine the execution timing of the "suspension change notice", and store the scenario data indicating the determined execution timing in the scenario data storage area 223h6 of the suspension information storage area X ( S1305). As a result, the execution timing of the "hold change notice" can be stored for each X-th area storing the hold information.

Next, in the processing of S1306, it is determined whether or not the variable effect indicated by the command for the number of pending balls received this time includes a variable element of "super reach or more" (S1306). As described above, in the "super reach" variable element, the "special reach" variable element, or the "special variable" variable element, the cockpit display area Db of the third pattern display device 81 is executed during execution of the variable element. The symbols and reserved symbols are erased. Therefore, as long as it is a variable performance including a variable element of "super reach or more", it can be executed even if "after suspension erasure" is included as the execution timing of "suspension change notice". Therefore, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the X-th area storing the pending information, whether or not the variation element of "super reach or higher" is included in the variation effect. determine.

As a result of the processing of S1306, if the variable effect includes a variable element of "super reach or higher" (S1306: Yes), the pending deletion indicating that the execution pattern and the suspended pattern in the cockpit display area Db are deleted by the variable effect. The information is stored in the pending deletion information storage area 223h7 of the X-th pending information storage area (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1310.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1306, if it is a variable effect that does not include the variable element of "super reach or higher" (S1306: No), since the executed symbols and the suspended symbols in the cockpit display area Db are not erased in the variable effect, it is suspended. Data indicating that no information is stored (blank) (hereinafter referred to as "null data") is stored in the pending deletion information storage area 223h7 of the information X area (S1308), and the process proceeds to S1310. Transition. In the process of S1308, by writing Null data to the pending deletion information storage area 223h7, for example, redundant use of the pending deletion information related to the "pending change notice" stored in the pending information storage area X before writing is prevented. be able to.

In addition, in the process of S1303, if the execution lottery for the "hold change notice" is not won (S1303: No), the "hold change notice" is not executed. Null data is stored in each of the pending change information storage area 223h5, the scenario data storage area 223h6, and the pending deletion information storage area 223h7 of the information storage area X (S1309), and the process proceeds to S1310. In the processing of S1309, by writing Null data into each of the storage areas 223h5 to 223h7, it is possible, for example, to prevent redundant use of information related to "suspension change notice" stored in the X-th storage area for storage of suspension information before writing. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a discrepancy in the production (for example, the “suspension change notice” is “rainbow color” despite the variable production of “failure display”).

In the process of S1310, it is determined whether or not the variation element of "re-variation" is included in the variation effect indicated by the command for the number of pending balls received this time (S1310). If "after deletion of suspension" is selected as the execution timing of "suspension change notice", even if it is a variable effect in which the cockpit display area Db is deleted due to the variable element of "super reach", etc., the "super If there is no effect after the variable elements of "reach", there is no point in performing "hold change notice" after "hold erasure".

Specifically, for example, even if the execution symbol "suspension change notice" is executed after the variable element of "super reach" is executed and the "big win display" is confirmed, the player is not given any interest. Rather, the meaningless production will make you lose interest. Also, for example, even if the execution symbol "hold change notice" is executed after the "super reach" variable element is executed and the "losing display" is confirmed, the "losing display" is confirmed as it is, and the next fluctuation effect is started, the discrepancies in the presentation give the player a sense of distrust in the game. Therefore, determine whether or not there is a variable element of "re-variation" that is a variable element that is executed after the variable element of "super reach", etc., and execute "pending change notice" after "pending deletion" Check if it is possible.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, depending on whether or not the variation element of "re-variation" is included in the variable effect (or whether or not the variable effect becomes a big hit), it is displayed after the execution of the "ready-to-win display". In the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 (pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4), it is determined whether the display color of the chance-up pattern is maintained or whether the display color of the chance-up pattern is changed again to the normal display color. be done.

As described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, in the variable effect at the time of losing, when the third symbol display device 81 finishes the "ready-to-win display" and the "losing display" appears, the standard phrase character display Se3 is displayed. may be displayed in a chance-up pattern (eg, "red"). In such a case, the player does not decide the variable effect as "loss display" as it is because the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in the chance up pattern, and the effect of "re-variation" is executed from now on. I predict that the "loss display" will change to the "jackpot display". However, contrary to the prediction, the variable performance is fixed as "failure display". There is a possibility that the distrust of the installed game hall will increase, and the game will be interrupted.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the variable element of "re-variation" is executed in the variable effect, and "big win display" is displayed without being determined by "loss display". When the variable element of "variation" is included, the variable performance becomes a big hit, so even if the chance up pattern is displayed on the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 (fixed phrase character display Se3), the player is offended. never. Therefore, when a chance-up pattern is selected, the chance-up pattern is displayed in the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 (fixed phrase character display Se3).

On the other hand, if the variable effect does not include the "revariation" variable element, when the chance up pattern is selected, the variable effect does not include the "revariation" variable element, but the "jackpot display" Even if it is determined whether or not it will be a "big hit display", even if a chance up pattern is displayed on the standard phrase character display Se3, the player will not be offended. Therefore, when a chance-up pattern is selected, the chance-up pattern is displayed in the fixed phrase character display Se3.

However, if the variation effect does not include the variable element of "re-variation" and does not include the "big win display", if the chance-up pattern is displayed in the standard phrase character display Se3, the player will not be able to see the chance-up pattern. Recognizing this, they have excessive expectations that a "jackpot display" may occur. In addition, when the phrase character display Se3 is displayed in the chance-up pattern, the developmental effect is not executed and the jackpot is not awarded, the player who has experienced the above phenomenon multiple times may lose. Even if the chance-up pattern of the fixed phrase character display Se3 appears in the state where the display is displayed, it is realized that the big win and the developmental effect will not be executed. If the player witnesses the above phenomenon in such a state of mind, he or she may feel the illusion of being ridiculed by the pachinko machine 10 and may feel distrustful of the pachinko machine 10 and the game hall.

Therefore, in the variable effect, if the variable element of "re-variation" is not included and the "jackpot display" is not included, it is displayed in the normal display color ("white") that is not the chance up pattern in the fixed phrase character display Se3. do. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the performance, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and does not feel distrustful.

Therefore, as a result of the process of S1310, if it is a variation production including the variable element of "re-variation" (S1310: Yes), the re-variation information indicating that the variation element of "re-variation" is performed in the variation production, Stored in the re-change information storage area 223h8 of the Xth area for storage of pending information (S1311), and the process proceeds to S1313. On the other hand, if the variable effect does not include the variable element of "re-variation" (S1310: No), the variable element of "re-variation" is not executed, so the information on the variable element of "re-variation" is retained. Null data is stored in the re-change information storage area 223h8 of the information storage area X (S1312), and the process proceeds to S1313. In the process of S1312, by writing Null data to the re-change information storage area 223h8, for example, redundant use of information related to the "re-change" variable element stored in the pending information storage area X before writing is prevented. It is possible to prevent inconsistencies in production (for example, problems due to the fact that re-variation information is stored despite the fact that the change production is a loss that does not include the variable element of "re-variation"). can be prevented. It should be noted that it is also possible to recognize that the "suspension change notice" can be executed at the execution timing of "after suspension erasure" by the processing of S1307 and S1311.

In the process of S1313, a display pending ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the sub pending ball number counter 223b updated by the process of S1301 is set (S1313), and the process proceeds to S1314. In the processing of S1314, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is the time of displaying the holding pattern (acquired holding change timing) in the variable effect indicated by the number of holding balls command received this time (S1314). This determination is made when the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223h6 of the X-th area storing the pending information is the same as the value of the sub pending ball number counter 223b. is displayed.

As a result of the determination in S1314, if the execution timing of the "suspended change notice" is when the reserved pattern is displayed (S1314: Yes), the display mode of the determined "suspended change notice" is performed at the timing when the reserved pattern is displayed. A change command for display lighting pending change is set for notifying the display control device 114 of this (S1315), and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 41). On the other hand, if the execution timing of the "suspended change notice" is not the time when the suspended symbol is displayed (S1314: No), the process of S1315 is skipped and the process returns to the main process.

The display pending ball number command and the display lighting hold change command set in S1313 and S1315 are temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing of the main processing (see S1002 in FIG. 41) is executed. ) to the display control device 114 . As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the command for the number of reserved balls for display executes processing to display the reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the display control device 114 that has received the display lighting pending change command performs display control so as to display the pending pattern in the display mode of the determined "holding change notice" when displaying the pending pattern. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the variation effect processing (S1109) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing this variation effect processing (S1109).

This variable effect processing (S1109) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 41), and in order to confirm whether or not the variable effect is normally displayed on the third symbol display device 81, first, the reservation information storage area The various information stored in the pending information storage first area 223h is shifted to the execution information storage area 223i, and the information stored in the pending information storage second to fourth areas is shifted to the pending information storage first to third areas. process. In addition, when the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main controller 110 do not match the contents (information) stored in the execution information storage area 223i, an error command for display is generated, and this command is displayed and controlled. Processing is performed to set for transmission to the device 114 . Furthermore, when it is the execution timing of the "holding change notice" in the execution pattern and the holding pattern, to generate various commands related to each execution timing of the "holding change notice" and to transmit these commands to the display control device 114 Perform processing to set to . In addition, based on the effect mode of the variable effect and the values of the character pattern counter 223e, the character color lottery counter 223f and the color change timing counter 223g, the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence, the character display Se2 during the reach and the fixed phrase character display Se3. A process for setting the display mode of (pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4) is performed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command from the sound lamp control device 113, the display processing regarding the variation effect based on the command is performed. It does not start immediately, but waits for a predetermined time (for example, 1 millisecond) to see if the above-described display error command or the like is transmitted. When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command from the audio ramp control device 113 and immediately executes the display processing related to the variation effect based on the command, for example, the audio ramp control When a display error command is transmitted from the device 113 after that, the display processing related to the variation performance must be stopped, and the display corresponding to the error based on the display error command (for example, default variation) must be replaced.

Therefore, even if the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, the display control device 114 does not immediately execute the display processing related to the variation effect based on the command, and displays from the sound lamp control device 113. Execution of the display processing relating to the variation effect based on the command is waited for a predetermined time during which there is a possibility that the error command for the command will be transmitted. By configuring in this way, the display control device 114 can prevent the occurrence of a processing burden caused by executing useless processing in the display processing related to the variable effect.

In the first embodiment, 1 millisecond was exemplified as the predetermined time during which the display control device 114 may receive the display error command from the audio lamp control device 113. Any method may be used as long as the display processing in 1 is not delayed. Specifically, for example, the display control device 114 is configured to perform display processing and drawing processing for one frame every 20 milliseconds. After the command determination process (see FIG. 42) is executed, the variation effect process (see FIG. 44) is executed within several milliseconds. Therefore, after transmitting the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command based on the reception of the variation pattern command and the stop type command, the sound lamp control device 113 generates and transmits the display error command in the variation effect process. It is possible to reliably generate and transmit an error command for display if there is at least a few milliseconds of time. Therefore, after receiving the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, the display control device 114 waits for at least the above several milliseconds, and if there is a display error command, it is configured to be able to receive it. there is Therefore, by waiting for a time shorter than the time required for display processing and drawing processing for one frame (20 milliseconds), it is possible to execute display processing related to fluctuation effects without delay, so the third symbol display device It is possible to prevent an event in which the display processing of the variable effect to 81 is clearly delayed.

In the fluctuation effect process (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1401). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), at least the stop type command is not received from the main controller 110, so this fluctuation effect End the process and return to the main process (see FIG. 41).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S1401: Yes), since both the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received, the fluctuation start flag 223a is turned off to start the fluctuation effect. (S1402), next, the data contained in the pending information storage first area provided in the pending information storage area 223h is shifted to the execution information storage area 223i (S1403), and further, the pending data stored in the pending information storage area 223h The data contained in the second to fourth information storage areas are shifted to the first to third hold information storage areas (S1404), and the process proceeds to S1405.

That is, in this case, the suspended variable performance is reduced by one, and the execution of the variable performance suspended first in terms of time is started. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223h1 to 223h8 of one area and various information (data) are stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i8 of the execution information storage area 223i corresponding to the variable effect being executed. move to In addition, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223h1 to 223h8 of the pending information storage second area and various information (data) are stored in the respective storage areas 223h1 to 223h8 of the pending information storage first area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and various information (data) stored in the storage areas 223h1 to 223h8 of the third pending information storage area are stored in the respective storage areas 223h1 to 223h8 of the second pending information storage area. , and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223h1 to 223h8 of the fourth pending information storage area and various information (data) are stored in the respective storage areas 223h1 to 223h1 of the third pending information storage area. Move to 223h8.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223i stores the same values as the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c of the main controller 110. The same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main controller 110 are stored in the 4 areas.

Next, in the process of S1405, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223i, the variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed from now on is obtained (S1405). Then, the variation pattern stored in the execution information storage area 223i and the variation pattern in the variation performance extracted from the variation pattern command stored in the RAM 223 in the processing of S1202 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 42) match. It is determined whether or not there is an address (S1406). If the information on the variable performance indicated by the variation pattern command received this time is different from the information on the variable performance stored in the execution information storage area 223i (holding information storage area 223h) before that, some abnormality (noise, etc.) ), it is not possible to execute a normal variation effect (variation pattern). Therefore, by this determination processing, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality, and it is confirmed whether or not a normal variation effect can be executed.

As a result of the determination of S1406, if it is determined that the variation pattern stored in the execution information storage area 223i and the variation pattern stored in the RAM 223 do not match (S1406: No), some abnormality related to the variation effect to be executed has occurred, a display error command for notifying the display controller 114 of the abnormality is generated and set (S1407), and the process proceeds to S1408.

The display error command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 41). . By receiving this display error command, the display control device 114 recognizes that some abnormality has occurred in relation to the variation effect, and switches the third pattern display device 81 to display corresponding to the error (for example, default variation). , to start controlling the display of that error indication.

On the other hand, in the process of S1406, if it is determined that the variation pattern stored in the execution information storage area 223i and the variation pattern stored in the RAM 223 match (S1406: Yes), there is no abnormality regarding the variation performance to be executed. Since it has not occurred, the process of S1407 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1408.

Next, in the process of S1408, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223i, the stop type of the variable performance to be executed from now on is obtained (S1408). Then, the stop type stored in the execution information storage area 223i and the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command stored in the RAM 223 in the process of S1205 of the command determination process (see FIG. 42) match. It is determined whether or not there is an address (S1409). If the information on the variable performance indicated by the stop type command received this time is different from the information on the variable performance stored in the execution information storage area 223i (holding information storage area 223h) before that, some abnormality (noise etc. ), the normal variable effect (stop type) cannot be executed. Therefore, by this determination process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined, and it is confirmed whether or not a normal variation effect can be executed.

As a result of the determination in S1409, if it is determined that the stop type stored in the execution information storage area 223i and the stop type stored in the RAM 223 do not match (S1409: No), some abnormality related to the variable performance to be executed has occurred, a display error command for notifying the display control device 114 of the abnormality is generated and set (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411.

In the first embodiment, when the variation pattern based on the value stored in the execution information storage area 223i and the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command do not match, an error command for display is generated and transmitted, and the execution information If the stop type based on the value stored in the storage area 223i and the stop type indicated by the stop type command do not match, an error command for display is generated and transmitted, and a maximum of 2 error commands for display are transmitted. is configured to Alternatively, if the variation pattern based on the value stored in the execution information storage area 223i and the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command do not match, or stop based on the value stored in the execution information storage area 223i If the type and the stop type indicated by the stop type command do not match, if either one does not match, one error command for display may be transmitted. With this configuration, the number of command transmissions can be reduced, so the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be reduced.

The display error command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 41). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display error command, it recognizes that some abnormality has occurred regarding the variation effect, switches the third symbol display device 81 to error display (for example, default variation), and displays the error Starts display control of the display.

On the other hand, in the process of S1409, if it is determined that the stop type stored in the execution information storage area 223i and the stop type stored in the RAM 223 match (S1409: Yes), there is no abnormality in the variable performance to be executed. Since it has not occurred, the process of S1410 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1411.

Next, in the process of S1411, the value of the sub-retained ball number counter 223b is adjusted according to the consumption of the retained ball (that is, setting of the variable rendition corresponding to the retained ball) along with the start of the variable effect. is reduced by 1 (S1411), and a display pending ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the pending ball number indicated by the updated value of the sub pending ball number counter 223b is set (S1412), and the process to S1413.

Next, in the process of S1413, it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing for displaying the "holding change notice" in the execution symbols displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 (S1413). This determination is made by confirming the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223i6 provided in the execution information storage area 223i. ”, “after reach”, or “after pending deletion” (hereinafter abbreviated as “at start” to “after pending deletion”).

As a result of the determination in S1413, the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223i6 of the execution information storage area 223i indicates that the number of pending balls is "0" and indicates any of "at the start" to "after pending deletion". If it is data (S1413: Yes), an execution symbol change process is performed (S1414) in order to execute the "suspension change notice" in the execution symbol, and the process proceeds to S1415.

On the other hand, in the process of S1413, the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223i6 of the execution information storage area 223i is the number of pending balls "0" and any one of "at the start" to "after pending deletion". If it is not data to indicate (S1413: No), the process of S1414 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1415. The executed symbol change processing of S1414 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, in the processing of S1415, it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing for displaying the "holding change notice" in the reserved symbols displayed in the first to third reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db3 (S1415). This determination is made for each scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223h6 provided in the first to third pending information storage areas of the pending information storage area 223h. That is, each scenario data in each scenario data storage area 223h6 determines whether or not it is the execution timing of the "suspended change notice" in the shifted pending symbol display areas Db1 to Db3 It is determined whether or not the scenario data stored in the stored scenario data storage area 223h6 is data indicating the number of held balls "1".

As a result of the process of S1415, if there is a pending information storage area 1 to 3 storing scenario data corresponding to the execution timing (S1415: Yes), the corresponding pending pattern is displayed to be stored in the pending change information storage area 223h5. In order to execute the "hold change notice" in the mode, a hold change command for display shift including information on the relevant hold pattern is set toward the display control device 114 (S1416), and the process proceeds to S1417.

Specifically, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223h6 of the first pending information storage area is data indicating the pending number "1", the pending change information storage area 223h5 of the first pending information storage area generates and sets a display-shift hold change command for notifying execution of "hold change notice" in the display mode stored in . Also, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223h6 of the second pending information storage area is data indicating the pending number "2", it is stored in the pending change information storage area 223h5 of the second pending information storage area. Generate and set a hold change command for shift display for notifying that "hold change notice" is to be executed in the display mode shown in FIG. Furthermore, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223h6 of the third pending information storage area is data indicating the pending number "3", it is stored in the pending change information storage area 223h5 of the third pending information storage area. Generate and set a hold change command for shift display for notifying that "hold change notice" is to be executed in the display mode shown in FIG.

The display shift hold change command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and sent to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 41). sent. The display control device 114 that has received the hold change command during shift for display performs display control so as to display the corresponding hold design in the display mode of the determined "hold change notice" when shift-displaying the hold design. .

On the other hand, in the processing of S1415, if scenario data corresponding to the execution timing is not stored in each of the scenario data storage areas 223h6 of the first to third storage areas of the suspension information storage area 223h (S1415: No), The process of S1416 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1417.

In this way, at the time of the shift display of the execution symbols and the pending symbols accompanying the start of execution of the variable effect, the scenario data stored in the execution information storage area 223i and the pending information storage area 223h are confirmed, and the "suspension change notice" is displayed. When there is scenario data corresponding to the execution timing, it is possible to make the "holding change notice" appear at the time of shift display of the holding symbols and the execution symbols. As a result, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the "holding change notice" appears and enhance the interest of the game.

In the processing of S1417, based on the effect mode of the variable effect, the values of the character pattern counter 223e, the character color lottery counter 223f, and the color change timing counter 223g, character display Se1 during reach occurrence, character display Se2 during reach, and fixed phrase A character mode setting process for setting the display mode of the character display Se3 (pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4) is performed (S1417), the variable effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 41). The character style setting process of S1417 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 45, the executed symbol change process (S1414) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the executed symbol change process (S1414).

This executed symbol change process (S1414) is executed in the variation effect process (see FIG. 44) executed in the main process (see FIG. 41), and is displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0 of the third symbol display device 81. This is done to execute the "holding change notice" in the execution pattern.

In the executed symbol change process (S1414), first, the timing of changing the executed symbols, that is, the execution timing for displaying the "suspended change notice" in the executed symbols is discriminated (S1501). This determination is made by confirming the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223i6 of the execution information storage area 223i.

As a result of the determination in S1501, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223i6 of the execution information storage area 223i is data indicating that the number of pending balls is "0" and indicates "at the start" (S1501: "Start time"), at the timing of displaying the executed symbols in the executed symbol display area Db0, display toward the display control device 114 in order to execute the "suspended change notice" in the display mode stored in the suspended change information storage area 223i5. A change command at the start of use is set (S1502), the execution symbol change process is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 44).

The display start time change command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 41). be done. The display control device 114 that has received the change command at the start of display displays the executed symbols in the determined display mode of "holding change notice" when shift-displaying the executed symbols in the executed symbol display area Db0. control.

As a result of the determination in S1501, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223i6 of the execution information storage area 223i is data indicating that the number of pending balls is "0" and "before reach" (S1501: "reach Before”), the timing before the “reach display” of the variable effect appears (for example, the left symbol column Z1 is stopped during the execution of the “high-speed fluctuation” variable element or the “low-speed fluctuation” variable element) time, etc.), in order to execute the "suspended change notice" in the display mode stored in the pending change information storage area 223i5 of the execution information storage area 223i, set the change command before reach for display to the display control device 114 (S1503), and returns to the variation effect processing (see FIG. 44).

The pre-reach change command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 41). be done. The display control device 114, which has received the before-ready-for-display change command, changes the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 to the timing before the "ready-to-reach display" of the variable effect appears (for example, "high-speed fluctuation ", or when the left symbol column Z1 stops during the execution of the "low speed variation" variable element, etc.), the execution symbol is changed to the display mode of the determined "suspended change notice" (for example, Display control is performed to change from "white" to "blue").

As a result of the determination in S1501, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223i6 of the execution information storage area 223i is data indicating that the number of pending balls is "0" and "after reach" (S1501: "reach After"), in order to confirm whether it is possible to execute the "hold change notice" at the timing after the "reach display" of the variable production appears (for example, during the execution of the variable element of "normal reach"), the variable production , it is determined whether or not "ready-to-reach display" appears (S1504). This determination is performed by determining the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command stored in the RAM 223 in the processing of S1202 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 42).

As a result of the determination in S1504, if it is determined that the "reach display" appears in the variable effect (S1504: Yes), the timing after the initially set "reach display" of the variable effect appears (for example, " During execution of variable elements of "Normal Reach", etc.), it is possible to execute "suspension change notice". Therefore, in order to execute the "suspended change notice" in the display mode stored in the pending change information storage area 223i5 of the execution information storage area 223i, a post-reach change command for display is set to the display control device 114 (S1505). ), and returns to the variable effect processing (see FIG. 44).

The post-reach change command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 41). be done. The display control device 114, which has received the after-ready-to-display change command, changes the timing (during appearance) of the "ready-to-win display" of the variable effect to the execution symbols displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0. For example, display control is performed to change the execution pattern (for example, from 'white' to 'blue') to the display mode of the determined 'suspension change notice' during the execution of variable elements of 'normal reach'.

On the other hand, in the process of S1504, if it is determined that the "reach display" does not appear in the variable effect (S1504: No), the "hold change notice" is changed to " Unable to execute after leech. Therefore, in order to change the “holding change notice” set to “after reaching” to “before reaching” which is an executable timing, the process proceeds to S1503, and the Reach front change command is set (S1503), and it returns to fluctuation production processing (refer to Figure 44).

By configuring in this way, even if it is a variable effect that cannot execute the initially set "after reach" "hold change notice", change to the executable "before reach" execution timing and "hold change notice" ” can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of cases where the ``holding change notice'' is not executed even though the lottery for executing the ``holding change notice'' is won, and the execution rate of the ``holding change notice'' can be increased, thereby improving the amusement of the game. In addition, even if the lottery process of the "holding change notice" and the lottery process of the variable effect are performed by different processes, it is possible to adjust so that there is no discrepancy between the contents of the mutual effect. Therefore, by performing each lottery process with a program of a different system, it is possible to facilitate the design of each program and to execute a consistent effect.

As a result of the determination in S1501, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223i6 of the execution information storage area 223i is data indicating that the number of pending balls is "0" and "after pending deletion" (S1501: " After suspension deletion"), this determination is based on the processing of S1311 of the suspension display setting process (see FIG. 43), and the determination of the re-change information stored in the re-change information storage area 223i8 of the execution information storage area 223i. conduct.

As a result of the determination in S1506, if the re-change information is stored in the re-change information storage area 223i8 of the execution information storage area 223i (S1506: Yes), the change in which "re-change" is executed after "reach display" Since it is an effect, next, at the timing after the cockpit display area Db is erased in the variable effect (for example, after executing the variable element of "Super Reach" or after executing the variable element of "Special Reach") Determine whether or not the cockpit display area Db is erased by executing the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" in the variable effect ( S1507). This determination is performed by determining the pending deletion information stored in the pending deletion information storage area 223i7 of the execution information storage area 223i in the processing of S1307 of the pending display setting processing (see FIG. 43).

As a result of the determination in S1507, if the pending deletion information is stored in the pending deletion information storage area 223i7 of the execution information storage area 223i (S1507: Yes), the "suspended change notice" can be executed "after pending deletion". Therefore, in order to execute the "suspended change notice" in the display mode stored in the pending change information storage area 223i5 of the execution information storage area 223i, a post-erase change command for display is set to the display control device 114 ( S1508), and returns to the variation effect processing (see FIG. 44).

The post-erase change command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 41). be done. The display control device 114 that has received the post-delete change command for display has a variable element of "super reach" or a variable element of "special reach" of the variable effect with respect to the executed symbols displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0. Display control to change the execution pattern (for example, from "white" to "blue") to the display mode of the determined "suspension change notice" at the timing after the end and before the execution of "revariation" I do.

By configuring in this way, when the "reserved change notice" is performed in the reserved symbols and the executed symbols indicating the variable effect that generates the big win, the executed symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is caused by the "super reach or more" variable element. is erased, and at the timing when the effect of the variable element of "super reach or higher" is completed and the execution pattern of the execution pattern display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed, the "suspension change notice" is displayed. is configured to be visible (executable). As a result, it is possible to notify by directly changing the notice object (changeable object; in the first embodiment, the execution pattern) which is always visible, or to notify by making the notice object appear anew. Compared to the case where the change of the notice object is performed, it is possible to casually change the display mode of the notice object while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the notice object. By temporarily hiding the announcement object and then casually changing it, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the player is made to recognize that the source of the sense of discomfort is directly linked to the game value (for example, a big win). As a result, it is possible to diversify the presentation while providing the player with an unexpected presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the display of the cockpit display area Db, and the executed symbols and reserved symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db, are always displayed except during the execution of the variable element of "super reach or higher", so that the player can see the current variation. It is intended to inform the execution suggestion of the production and the presence or absence of the variable production during standby. In addition, even if the cockpit display area is erased due to the execution of the "super reach or higher" variable element, it is configured to be immediately redisplayed as soon as the "super reach or higher" variable element ends. Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the re-display. That is, the player recognizes that the executed symbols and the suspended symbols in the cockpit display area Db should be displayed originally as the display contents of the third symbol display device 81, and this is an exceptional event ("super reach or higher"). ”), we recognize that it will immediately return to its original state when the exceptional event ends. In the first embodiment, at the timing of returning to its original form, by casually changing the display mode of the execution pattern from before it is erased, the change is intentionally made difficult to notice, and when the change is noticed, it is unexpected. Surprise is increased by sex. By constructing in this manner, it is possible to diversify the presentation while providing the player with an unexpected presentation, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In addition, by allocating the execution timing of the "suspension change notice" to the second half of the variable production ("after reach" or "after deletion of the suspension"), the expectation of the jackpot increases even in the second half of the variable production. A player can play a game while anticipating the occurrence (appearance) of the change notice. Therefore, the player can play the game while anticipating a big win until the second half of the variable presentation, so that the player can be entertained for a long period of time.

On the other hand, in the process of S1506, if it is determined that the re-variation information is not stored in the re-variation information storage area 223i8 of the execution information storage area 223i (S1506: No), the variable element of "re-variation" in the variation effect , so there is no point in performing a "pending change notice" after "pending erase". Specifically, for example, even if the execution symbol "holding change notice" is executed after the "super reach" variable element is executed and the "jackpot display" is confirmed, the effect is performed after the "super reach" variable element Since nothing occurs, the player cannot be given any interest, but rather, the meaningless performance will make the player lose interest. Also, for example, even if the execution symbol "hold change notice" is executed after the "super reach" variable element is executed and the "losing display" is confirmed, the "losing display" is confirmed as it is, and the next fluctuation effect is started, the discrepancies in the presentation give the player a sense of distrust in the game.

Further, in the processing of S1507, if it is determined that the pending deletion information is not stored in the pending deletion information storage area 223i7 of the execution information storage area 223i (S1507: No), the cockpit display area Db is erased in the variable effect. Since the production is not performed, it is not possible to execute the "holding change notice" after "holding erasure".

Therefore, if it is determined in S1506 that the re-change information is not stored in the re-change information storage area 223i8 of the execution information storage area 223i (S1506: No), or in the processing of S1507, If it is determined that the pending deletion information is not stored in the pending deletion information storage area 223i7 (S1507: No), "after pending deletion" is set because "pending change notice" cannot be executed "after pending deletion". The process proceeds to S1504 in order to confirm the timing at which it is possible to execute the "hold change notice".

By configuring in this way, even if it is a variable effect that cannot execute the "hold change notice" of the initially set "after hold erasure", at the executable execution timing ("after reach" or "before reach") It can be changed to execute a "pending change notice". Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of cases where the ``holding change notice'' is not executed even though the lottery for executing the ``holding change notice'' is won, and the execution rate of the ``holding change notice'' can be increased, thereby improving the amusement of the game. In addition, even if the lottery process of the "holding change notice" and the lottery process of the variable effect are performed by different processes, it is possible to adjust so that there is no discrepancy between the contents of the mutual effect. Therefore, by performing each lottery process with a program of a different system, it is possible to facilitate the design of each program and to execute a consistent effect.

Next, the character mode setting process (S1417) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this character mode setting process (S1417).

This character mode setting process (S1417) is executed in the variation production process (see FIG. 44) executed in the main process (see FIG. 41), and in the variation production executed by the third symbol display device 81, " It is performed to determine the display mode of the character display Se1 at the time of reaching occurrence, the character display Se2 during reach, and the fixed phrase character display Se3 (pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4) that appear when "reach display" is performed.

In the character mode setting process (S1417), the processes of S1601 to S1610 are controls related to the character patterns of the character displays Se1 and Se2. is selected (S1601). This determination is made by determining whether or not the effect mode of the variable effect stored in the RAM 223 in the process of S1202 of the command determination process (see FIG. 42) is the "normal reach" effect mode, that is, "E2: normal reach" or "E5: normal reach". ” is determined.

In the process of S1601, if the effect mode of the "normal reach" effect mode is selected (S1601: Yes), then in the variable effect to be executed this time, it is displayed at the time of "reach display ("normal reach" variable element)". The character pattern of the character display Se1 at the occurrence of reach is discriminated (S1602). This determination is performed based on the character pattern table 222g and the value of the character pattern counter 223e (see FIGS. 18 and 19). or "strong pattern".

As a result of the determination in S1602, if it is determined that the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is to be performed in the "weak pattern" (S1602: "weak pattern"), it is displayed that the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is to be performed in the "weak pattern". A display weak pattern command for notification to the control device 114 is generated and set (S1603), and the process proceeds to S1611. On the other hand, if it is determined that the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is to be performed in the "strong pattern" (S1602: "strong pattern"), the display control device 114 is instructed to perform the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence in the "strong pattern". A display strong pattern command for notification is generated and set (S1604), and the process proceeds to S1611.

The weak pattern command for display or the strong pattern command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 41) causes the display control device to 114. By receiving this display weak pattern command or strong display pattern command, the display control device 114 displays the character pattern of the character display Se1 when reach occurrence occurs in the "normal reach" production mode as a "weak pattern" or a "strong pattern". Pattern" is recognized, and display control of the character pattern of the character display Se1 at the time of occurrence of reach that is displayed at the start of the variable element of "normal reach" on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

In the process of S1601, when the "normal reach" effect mode is not selected in the variable effect to be executed this time (S1601: No), the process proceeds to S1605. In the process of S1605, it is determined whether or not the "super reach" effect mode or the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the variable effect to be executed this time (S1605). This determination is similar to the determination of the "normal ready-to-win" effect mode, if the effect mode of the variable effect stored in the RAM 223 in the process of S1202 of the command determination process (see FIG. 42) is "super ready-to-win" effect mode or "special ready-to-win". It is determined whether or not it is an effect mode, that is, "E3: Super reach" or "E6: Super reach", or "E4: Special reach" or "E7: Special reach".

In the process of S1605, if the "super reach" effect mode or the "special reach" effect mode is selected (S1605: Yes), then in the variable effect to be executed this time, "reach display (variation of "super reach" Character patterns of character display Se1 during reach occurrence and character display Se2 during reach to be displayed at time (S1605). This determination is performed based on the character pattern table 222g and the value of the character pattern counter 223e (see FIGS. 18 and 19). , respectively, it is determined whether to display with a “weak pattern” or a “strong pattern”.

As a result of the determination in S1605, if it is determined that the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is performed with a "weak pattern" and the character display Se2 during reach is also performed with a "weak pattern" (S1605: "weak pattern → weak pattern"), Generate and set a display weak/weak pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 that the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is performed in a "weak pattern" and the character display Se2 during reach is also performed in a "weak pattern" ( S1607), and the process proceeds to S1611.

In the process of S1605, if it is determined that the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is performed with a “weak pattern” and the character display Se2 during reach is performed with a “strong pattern” (S1605: “weak pattern→strong pattern”), the reach A strong/weak pattern command for display is generated and set to notify the display control device 114 that the character display Se1 at the time of occurrence is performed in a “weak pattern” and the character display Se2 during reach is performed in a “strong pattern” (S1608). ), and the process proceeds to S1611.

In the process of S1605, if it is determined that the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is performed with a “strong pattern” and the character display Se2 during reach is performed with a “weak pattern” (S1605: “strong pattern→weak pattern”), the reach A strong/weak pattern command for display is generated and set for notifying the display control device 114 that the character display Se1 at the time of occurrence is performed in a "strong pattern" and the character display Se2 during reach is performed in a "weak pattern" (S1609). , the process proceeds to S1611.

In the processing of S1605, if it is determined that the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is performed with a "strong pattern" and the character display Se2 during reach is also performed with a "strong pattern" (S1605: "strong pattern → strong pattern"), the reach A strong pattern command for display is generated and set to notify the display control device 114 that the character display Se1 at the time of occurrence is performed in the "strong pattern" and the character display Se2 during reach is also performed in the "strong pattern" (S16010). ), and the process proceeds to S1611.

The weak display pattern command set here, the weak strong pattern command for display, the strong weak pattern command for display, or the strong strong pattern command for display (hereinafter referred to as the weak display pattern command, the strong pattern command for display, and the weak The pattern command, display intensity pattern command, display intensity pattern command, and display intensity pattern command may be collectively referred to as “pattern commands”) are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223. It is temporarily stored and transmitted to the display control device 114 by command output processing (see S1102 in FIG. 41) of the main processing.

By receiving this pattern-based command, the display control device 114 sets the character pattern of the character display Se1 when a reach occurs and the character display Se2 during a reach in the "super reach" production mode or the "special reach" production mode to the "weak pattern". or "strong pattern" to be displayed, and display control of the character patterns of the character display Se1 during reach occurrence and the character display Se2 during reach displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

In this way, when starting the variable effect, the effect mode of the variable effect is determined, and based on the effect mode, the values of the character pattern table 222g and the character pattern counter 223e are referred to, and each character display Se1, The character pattern of Se2 is determined, and a pattern system command related to the character pattern is transmitted to the display control device 114 based on the content of the determination. By configuring in this way, the character patterns of the character displays Se1 and Se2 displayed in the variable performance including the "ready-to-win display" are diversified to enhance the interest of the game, and the display control device 114 is displayed at the start of the variable performance. It is possible to notify the content of the character display to appear in the variable performance, and to reliably perform the display control in the variable performance.

In the process of S1605, when it is determined that the "super reach" effect mode or the "special reach" effect mode is not selected (S1605: No), the "reach display" is executed in the variable effect to be executed this time. Since none of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are displayed, the following processes are skipped, the character mode setting process (S1417) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 44).

The processing of S1611 to S1614 is control related to the display color of each of the character displays Se1 to Se4. It is determined whether or not the lottery has been won (S1611). This determination is performed based on the character color change table 222h and the value of the character color lottery counter 223f (see FIG. 22). It is determined whether to display the color "white" or the chance-up pattern "red" or "gold".

In the processing of S1611, if the character color change lottery is won, the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 is displayed in "red" or "gold" instead of the normal display color "white". If so (S1611: Yes), then it is determined which display color has been selected (S1612). As a result of determination, when "red" is selected as the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 (S1612: "red"), the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 is to be displayed in "red". A display red character command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated and set (S1613), and the process proceeds to S1615. On the other hand, when "golden" is selected as the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 (S1612: "golden"), display control is performed to display the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 in "golden". A display gold character command for notification to the device 114 is generated and set (S1614), and the process proceeds to S1615.

The red character command for display or the gold character command for display set here (hereinafter, the red character command for display and the gold character command for display may be collectively referred to as "color system command") are stored in the RAM 223. command transmission ring buffer, and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 41). The display control device 114, by receiving this display red character command or display gold character command, changes the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 displayed in the variable effect including the "reach display" to "red" or Recognizing that the character is to be displayed in “gold”, the third pattern display device 81 executes display control regarding the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4.

In this way, when starting the variable effect, the effect mode of the variable effect is determined, and based on the effect mode, the values of the character color change table 222h and the character color lottery counter 223f are referred to, and each character display in the variable effect is performed. The display colors of Se1 to Se4 are determined, and a color system command relating to the display colors is transmitted to the display control device 114 based on the content of the determination. By configuring in this manner, the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 displayed in the variable performance including the "ready-to-win display" are diversified to enhance the interest of the game, and the display control device 114 is displayed at the start of the variable performance. The content of the character display to be displayed in the variable effect can be notified, and the display control in the variable effect can be reliably performed.

In the process of S1611, if the lottery for changing the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 is not won (S1611: No), the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 is not changed in the variable effect to be executed this time. Therefore, the subsequent processes are skipped, the character mode setting process (S1417) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable effect process (see FIG. 44).

The processing of S1615 to S1618 is control related to the timing of changing the display color of each character display Se1, Se2. (S1615). Similar to S1601, this determination is based on whether or not the effect mode of the variable effect stored in the RAM 223 in the process of S1202 of the command determination process (see FIG. 42) is the "normal reach" effect mode, that is, "E2: normal reach" or Determine whether it is "E5: normal reach".

In the process of S1615, if the "normal reach" production mode is selected (S1615: Yes), the character display Se2 during reach displayed when the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" appears. Since only the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is displayed, the process of S1616 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1617. In the process of S1617, a display occurrence change command for notifying the display control device 114 that the display color is to be changed at the timing when the reach occurrence character display Se1 is displayed is generated and set (S1617). to S1619.

On the other hand, in the process of S1615, when the "normal reach" effect mode is not selected (S1615: No), the selected effect mode is the "super reach" effect mode or the "special reach" effect mode, and the reach occurs. Since the hour character display Se1 and the in-reach character display Se2 are both displayed, the timing for reflecting the lottery results of the character color change lottery, that is, the timing for changing the display colors of the character displays Se1 and Se2 is next. is determined (S1616). This determination is performed based on the color change timing table 222i and the value of the color change timing counter 223g (see FIG. 23). Whether or not to change the display color is determined at the timing of displaying .

As a result of determination in S1616, if the timing to reflect the lottery result of the character color change lottery is "at the time of occurrence of reach", that is, if it is the timing to display character display Se1 at the time of occurrence of reach (S1616: Yes), the process is executed. The process proceeds to S1617, and generates and sets a change command for display for notifying the display control device 114 that the display color is to be changed at the timing when the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is displayed (S1617), and performs processing. to S1619. On the other hand, if the timing to reflect the lottery result of the character color change lottery is not "at the time of occurrence of reach", that is, if it is "during reach" (timing to display character display Se2 during reach) (S1616: No), the process is executed. Proceeding to S1618, a reach-in-reach change command for display is generated and set for notifying the display control device 114 that the display color is to be changed at the timing when the reach-in-reach character display Se2 is displayed (S1618), and the process is executed. The process proceeds to S1619.

The command for display change when occurring or the change command for display during reach (hereinafter, the change command for display and the change command for display during reach may be collectively referred to as "timing system command") , is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 41).

By receiving this timing command, the display control device 114 changes the display color of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence at the timing of displaying the character display Se1 at the time of occurrence of reach at "at the time of occurrence of reach", or It is recognized whether the display color of the in-reach character display Se2 is to be changed at the timing of displaying the in-reach character display Se2 displayed in "reach in progress". Then, the display control device 114 executes display control of each character display Se1 to Se4 displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the recognition.

In this way, when the variable performance is started, the performance mode of the variable performance is determined, and based on the performance mode, the values of the color change timing table 222i and the color change timing counter 223g are referred to, and each character display in the variable performance is performed. The display color change timing of Se1 and Se2 is determined, and a timing command regarding the display color change timing of each character display Se1 and Se2 is transmitted to the display control device 114 based on the determined content. By constructing in this manner, the change timings of the display colors of the character displays Se1 and Se2 displayed in the variable performance including the "ready-to-win display" are diversified to enhance the interest of the game, and the display is controlled at the start of the variable performance. It is possible to notify the device 114 of the contents of the character display to appear in the variable performance, and to reliably perform the display control in the variable performance.

In the process of S1619, when the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 is changed to a "red" or "golden" chance-up pattern, if the result of the variation effect is "loss display", batch setting is performed. Of the character displays Se1 to Se3, only the display color of the standard phrase character display Se3 is changed from the chance-up pattern to the normal "white" display color (S1619). After the character color change restriction process (S1619), the character mode setting process (S1417) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation rendering process (see FIG. 44).

Here, the character color change limiting process (S1619) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing this character color change restriction processing (S1619).

In this character change restriction processing (S1619), even if the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 is changed by winning a "red" or "golden" chance-up pattern, the variation effect is "reproduced". When the variable element of "variation" is not included and when the result of the variable effect is "failure display", the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 displayed after the "extra effect" of the "ready-to-win display" is changed to This is done in order to re-change to the normal display color "white".

In this character change restriction process (S1619), first, it is determined whether or not the variable effect of "re-variation" is included in the variable effect to be executed this time (S1701). This determination is made by determining the re-change information stored in the re-change information storage area 223i8 by the processing of S1310 to S1312 of the pending display setting process (see FIG. 44). In addition, it may be configured to directly determine from the received variation pattern command and stop type command whether or not the variation element of "re-variation" is included. By directly judging from the received variation pattern command and stop type command, even if there is a discrepancy between the content determined by the look-ahead processing and the content of the variation effect that is actually performed due to the influence of noise etc., the actual By making a determination based on the content of the variable presentation, it is possible to prevent the content of the presentation from being inconsistent.

In this way, by making a determination using the re-variation information stored in the re-variation information storage area 223i8 (223h8) at the stage of receiving the pending ball number command, the change of "re-variation" immediately in the variation effect It can be determined whether an element is executed. In addition, the presence or absence of the variable element of "re-variation" is stored in the re-variation information storage area 223h8 (223i8) when the command for the number of retained balls is received, and thereafter, the re-variation stored in the re-variation information storage area 223i8 (223h8) Based on the information, it is possible to determine the display mode of each of the character displays Se1 to Se4, and to determine whether or not to execute the "holding change notice" at the timing of "after holding erasure", and to perform a plurality of effects. The re-variation information can be effectively utilized in execution determination.

In the process of S1701, when it is determined that the variation pattern includes the "re-variation" variation element (S1701: Yes), the "re-variation" variation element is performed in the variation effect, and then "jackpot display" appears. Therefore, even if the display colors of the fixed phrase character display Se3 and the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 are displayed as they are in the chance-up pattern, the contents of the performance are not inconsistent and the player does not feel distrustful. Therefore, the character color change restriction process (S1619) is terminated, and the process returns to the character mode setting process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1701, if it is determined that the variation pattern does not include the "re-variation" variation element (S1701: No), at least the "re-variation" variation element is not executed in the variation effect. , it is determined whether or not the variable effect to be executed this time appears as "failure display" (S1702). This determination is made by determining whether or not the variation effect stored in the RAM 223 in the process of S1202 of the command determination process (see FIG. 42) is the effect mode in which the change effect is "loss display". ", "E1: non-reach (normal)", "E2: normal reach", "E3: super reach" or "E4: special reach". It should be noted that it may be configured so as to be determined not by the performance mode but by the stop pattern of the variable performance.

In the first embodiment, the variable performance including the variable element of "re-variation" is configured to always be a big hit, but even the variable performance in which the variable element of "re-variation" is executed will be a loss. can be configured to By configuring in this way, it is determined whether or not the variable element of "re-variation" is included in the processing of S1701, and if the variable element of "re-variation" is included, the fixed phrase character display Se3 Since the "occasion effect" is executed after the display, the process of setting the standard phrase display normal command can be skipped, and the display color of the standard phrase character display Se3 can be displayed in the chance-up pattern.

In the process of S1702, when it is determined that the variation effect is to appear the "big win display" (S1702: Yes), the "big win display" appears in the variable effect, so the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed. Even if the colors are displayed as they are in the chance-up pattern, there is no discrepancy in the contents of the performance, and the player does not feel distrustful. Therefore, the character color change restriction process (S1619) is terminated, and the process returns to the character mode setting process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1702, when it is determined that the variation effect of "big win" is not displayed (S1702: No), the variation effect is not "big win display" but "losing display". In this variable effect, if the standard phrase character display Se3 is displayed as it is in the chance-up pattern, there is a risk that the player will feel distrust due to the discrepancies in the content of the effect. Therefore, in the process of S1703, the display control device corrects (changes) the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 from the initially set chance-up pattern and changes it again to the normal display color of "white". 114 is generated and set (S1703), the character color change restriction process (S1619) is terminated, and the process returns to the character mode setting process (see FIG. 46).

The fixed form phrase normal command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 41). be done. The display control device 114 receives this standard phrase display normal command, and recognizes that the display color of the standard phrase character display Se3 is to be changed again from the chance-up pattern to the normal display color "white." , the display control of the fixed phrase character display Se3 displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 is configured to appear only when the variable element of "re-variation" is executed. In addition, when the variable element of "re-variation" is executed, the "jackpot display" always appears as a result. Therefore, the display color of the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 is configured so as to directly reflect the collectively set content.

In this way, when the variable performance is started, the performance mode (fluctuation element) of the variable performance is determined, and based on the determination, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed as it is in the chance up pattern, It is determined whether or not to modify (change) the normal display color to the normal pattern for display. Then, when correcting (changing) to a normal pattern, a fixed form phrase normal command for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 . By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the performance, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations, and in which the player does not feel a sense of distrust. At the start of the variable performance, the content of the character display to appear in the variable performance can be notified to the display control device 114, and the display control in the variable performance can be performed reliably.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 determines in detail the display modes of the character displays Se1 to Se4 that are displayed when the "ready-to-win display" is selected in the variable effect. , and by transmitting a command to the display control device 114 based on the content of the determination, the display control of each character display Se1 to Se4 is executed. Further, regarding the display mode of each character display Se1 to Se4, the character pattern of each character display Se1 and Se2, the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4, and the change timing of the display color of each character display Se1 and Se2 are It is configured to determine by separate lotteries, and to generate and set commands at any time based on each determination.

Here, after all the character patterns, display colors, and change timings of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are determined, command 1 is used to issue a command related to the character patterns, display colors, and change timings of the character displays Se1 to Se4. If it is generated, it is necessary to prepare in advance the number of commands corresponding to all variations of character patterns, display colors, and change timings, and the number of commands may become enormous. Therefore, commands are generated separately for the character patterns, display colors, and change timings of the character displays Se1 to Se4, and the display control device 114 adjusts the display control of the character displays Se1 to Se4 based on the commands. , the number of commands relating to each character display Se1 to Se4 can be reduced, and an increase in the storage capacity of the ROM 222 can be suppressed.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 10, even when the chance-up pattern of each character display Se1 to Se4 is selected, when the result of the variation effect is "no display", the standard phrase character display Se3 is displayed. is modified (changed) to a normal display color and displayed. In this case as well, after determining all the character patterns, display colors, change timings, and correction (change) contents of the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4, commands relating to the character displays Se1 to Se4 are generated by command 1. In this case, it is necessary to prepare in advance the number of commands corresponding to all the variations of the display mode, including the content for correcting (changing) the display color, and the number of commands may increase dramatically.

Therefore, commands are generated separately for each of the character patterns, display colors, change timings, and correction (change) contents of the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4. By adjusting the display control of Se1 to Se4, the number of commands relating to each character display Se1 to Se4 can be reduced, and an increase in the storage capacity of the ROM 222 can be suppressed.

Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 63. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing (see FIG. 48) that is repeatedly executed after power is turned on, and command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 (FIG. )) and a V interrupt process (see FIG. 49 ( b) see). The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 48, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

When this main process is activated by the MPU 231 when the power is turned on, first, an initial setting process is executed when the power is turned on (S2001). Specifically, the MPU 231 is initialized, and the work RAM 233, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 are cleared. Various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after initializing the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image 282 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2002). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image 282 when the power is turned on, information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image 282 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. is transferred to the main image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image 282 to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2002, then the power-on fluctuation A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the image 283 to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003).

This transfer instruction includes the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image 283, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). and the head address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235 b of the video RAM 235 . The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image 283 to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2003, then the simple image display flag is set. 233a is turned on (S2004). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233a is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 61(a)), which will be described later. A resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61(b)) is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer to the image controller 237 .

In addition, the simple image display flag 233a is transferred from the character ROM 234 of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61(b)). It remains on until the transfer to the resident video RAM 235 is completed. As a result, during this period, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B), the image at the time of image activation (power-on main image 282 and power-on variation image 283) shown in FIG. A simple command determination process (see S2028 in FIG. 49B) and a simple display setting process (see S2029 in FIG. 49B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image 282 and the power-on varying image 283 are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image 282 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A power-on main image 282 can be seen. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the main image 282 at power-on. can do.

On the other hand, while the main image 282 is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, the player can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user can wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation is stopped.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image 282 is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 starts without any problem when the power is turned on. You can immediately check that it is. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the main image 282 can be confirmed at power-on, and deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check can be suppressed.

The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to transfer the power-on main image 282 and the power-on fluctuation image 283 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image 282 is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), and a variable effect is generated. is received from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are received, FIGS. 26(b) and 26(c ) can be immediately displayed during the period of the variation effect, and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, even while the power-on main image 282 is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the player can be assured that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation performance of the power-on fluctuation image 283. can be confirmed.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image 282 when the power is turned on. Since the ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in the present pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image 283 transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, a power failure occurs. Immediately after returning to the game, even while the power-on main image 282 is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S2004, interrupt permission is set (S2005), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. As a result, command interrupt processing (see FIG. 49A) and V interrupt processing (see FIG. )).

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 49(a). FIG. 49(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2011), and this command interrupt process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are processed by command determination processing (see FIG. 50) or simple command determination processing (see FIG. 49 (b)) of V interrupt processing (see FIG. ) is read by S2028), and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 49(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 32) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the drawing of a new image from being started in the middle of the drawing of the image, or to prevent the image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer storing the information of the image being displayed. can be done.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 49(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233a is on (S2021), and it is determined that the simple image display flag 233a is on. Then (S2021: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed, so the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. In order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. A command determination process (S2028) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S2029) for displaying the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed, and the process proceeds to S2404.

On the other hand, in the process of S2021, if the simple image display flag 233a is not ON, that is, if it is OFF (S2021: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, the command determination process (S2022) is executed in order to display the normal effect image on the third symbol display device 81 instead of the power-on image shown in FIG. 26, and then the display setting process (S2023). is executed, and the process proceeds to S2024.

In the command determination process (S2022), the contents of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process (see FIG. 49(a)) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. do. If a display demonstration command or a display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table 232a1 or the variation display data table 232a1 corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233b. Further, the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the set display data table 232a1 is set in the transfer data table buffer 233d. Further, when a command related to pre-reading notice such as a pre-reading notice by reserved symbols (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "pre-reading system command") is stored, the additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the pre-reading notice is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. set. Furthermore, if commands related to the character displays Se1 to Se4 displayed during the "reach display" (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "character commands") are stored, they correspond to the display modes of the character displays Se1 to Se4. The additional data table 232a2 to be used is set in the additional data table buffer 233c.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be.

In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, a character command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, the variable effect selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display mode of each character display Se1 to Se4 of the "reach display" can be quickly grasped. Then, the drawing of the image can be controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect image corresponding to the display mode. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 50 to 56. FIG.

In the display setting process (S2023), based on the contents of the display data table 232a1 and the additional data table 232a2 set in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table buffer 233c by the command determination process (S2022), etc., the third symbol display device At 81, the content of one frame of image to be displayed next is specifically specified. Also, according to the status of processing, etc., the effect to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the determined effect is set in the display data table buffer 233b. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. FIG.

After the display setting process (S2023) is executed, task processing is then executed (S2024). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2023) or the simple display setting processing (S2029). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2025). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233a is ON, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233a is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table 232a3 set in the transfer data table buffer 233d. A transfer instruction is set to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for use. Furthermore, even when a character-based command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is used in a display mode other than the initial setting (default setting) of each character display Se1 to Se4. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the character design and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG. The details of this transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2026). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2024) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2025). 32, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. The details of this rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2027). Then, this V interrupt processing is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2027, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process (S2022), when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display ("15R probability variable jackpot", "2R probability variable jackpot", "15R normal jackpot ”, a stop type table (not shown) corresponding to a “normal reach” production mode when losing, a “super reach” production mode when losing, a “special reach” production mode when losing, and a “non-reach” production mode); The stop symbol counter is compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 50 to 54, the details of the command determination process (S2022), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

As shown in FIG. 50, in this command determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2101). After completing this command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49(b)). On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2101: Yes), it indicates that the new command has been processed, the new command flag determined in the display setting process (S2023) is set to ON (S2102), and then All unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S2103).

Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display reserved ball number command among the unprocessed commands (S2104), and if there is a display reserved ball number command (S2104: Yes), the reserved ball number command processing is executed (S2105), and the process returns to S2101.

Here, with reference to FIG. 51(a), the details of the pending ball count command process (S2105) will be described. FIG. 51(a) is a flow chart showing the pending ball count command process. This reserved ball number command processing is to execute a process corresponding to the display reserved ball number command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the pending ball number command processing (S2105), first, indicating that the display pending ball number command has been processed, the new pending ball number command flag determined in the display setting process (S2023) is turned on (S2121), and then , the number of reserved balls information included in the number of reserved balls command for display is acquired (S2122). In the process of S2122, if two or more display reserved ball number commands are stored in the command buffer area, the reserved ball number information is acquired from the last stored display reserved ball number command. This makes it possible to acquire the latest information on the number of pending balls.

Then, among the number discrimination flags provided for each number of held balls, the number discrimination flag corresponding to the number of held balls acquired in the process of S2122 is turned on, and the number discrimination flag corresponding to the other number of held balls is turned off. (S2123), this pending ball count command process (S2105) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 50).

As a result, in the display setting process (S2023), when the new pending ball number command flag is on, by referring to the number discrimination flag, the pending ball number corresponding to the number discrimination flag set to ON is displayed. The reserved image data is expanded so that the ball number pattern is displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third pattern display device 81 .

Returning to FIG. 50, in the process of S2104, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of pending balls for display (S2104: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a demo command for display among the unprocessed commands. (S2106), and if there is a display demo command (S2106: Yes), the demo command process is executed (S2107), and the process returns to S2101.

Details of the demonstration command processing (S2107) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51(b) is a flow chart showing the demonstration command processing. This demonstration command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display demonstration command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the demonstration command process (S2107), first, the demonstration display data table 232a1 corresponding to the demonstration effect is selected from the data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233b (S2131). Next, null data is written to the additional data table buffer 233c to clear its contents, and null data is also written to the transfer data table buffer 233d to clear its contents (S2132). This is because the demonstration display data table 232a1 defines image drawing so that it is not necessary to newly transfer the image data necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, the corresponding transfer data table 232a3 is not prepared in the data table storage area 232a.

Next, the time data corresponding to the demonstration display is set in the clock counter 233g (S2133), and the pointer 233e is initialized to "0" (S2134). Then, a demonstration display flag (not shown) indicating that a demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the ON state is set to ON, and a fixed display effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the ON state. A confirmation command flag (not shown) indicating that the command will be displayed is set to OFF, and a confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to OFF (S2135), and demo command processing is performed. (S2107) is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 50).

By executing this demonstration command process (S2107), in the display setting process (S2023), while updating the pointer 233e initialized by the process of S2134, the pointer 233e set in the display data table buffer 233b by the process of S2131 From the demonstration display data table 232a1, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233e is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is specified.

In the display setting process (S2023), the time counter 233g, to which the time data corresponding to the demonstration display has been set by the process of S2133, is used to measure the duration of the demonstration effects defined in the demonstration display data table 232a1. Also, based on the states of the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag set by the processing of S2135, when it is determined in the display setting processing that the timing of the clock counter 233g has ended the demonstration effect in the demonstration display data table 232a1, , control is performed so that the demonstration effect is displayed again as the effect to be displayed next.

Returning to FIG. 50, the description continues. In the process of S2106, if it is determined that there is no display demo command (S2106: No), then the unprocessed commands include a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, or a display determination command (hereinafter , the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the display confirmation command may be collectively referred to as a "variation production command") (S2108), and whether or not the variation production command is If there is (S2108: Yes), the command process of the variable effect system is executed (S2109), and the process returns to S2101.

Here, with reference to FIG. 52, the details of the variation effect system command processing (S2109) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing the command processing of variable effect system. As described above, this variable performance command processing executes processing corresponding to the variable performance command of the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, or the display confirmation command received from the sound lamp control device 113. is.

In the variable effect command processing (S2109), first, it is determined whether or not there is a confirmation command for display among unprocessed commands (S2141), and if there is a confirmation command for display (S2141: Yes), confirmation Command processing is executed (S2142), this variation effect type command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing (see FIG. 50) is returned to.

Details of the confirmation command process (S2142) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53(a) is a flow chart showing the confirmation command process. This confirmation command processing is to execute the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the confirmation command processing (S2142), the confirmation command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2023) that the confirmation command for display has been received in the ON state is set to ON (S2151), and this confirmation command processing (S2142) is executed. Terminates and returns to the variable effect command processing (see FIG. 52).

As a result, in the display setting process (S2023), the state of the confirmation command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed so as to start displaying the confirmation display effect. setting process. In addition, when the setting of the display of the variable performance is processed, the restart performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the determination command flag is not turned on even after the performance time set for the variable performance has passed. Display setting processing is executed so that

Returning to FIG. 52, the description continues. In the process of S2141, if it is determined that there is no fixed command for display (S2141: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a variation pattern command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2143), If there is a variation pattern command for display (S2143: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S2144), the variation effect system command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 50).

Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S2144) will be described with reference to FIG. 53(b). FIG.53(b) is a flowchart which shows a variation pattern command process. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process (S2144), first, the variation display data table 232a1 corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table 232a1 is stored in the data table storage area 232a. , and set in the display data table buffer 233b (S2161).

Here, since main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more display variation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process (see FIG. 50), it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands may be change and another command could be mistakenly interpreted as a display variation pattern command. In the process of S2161, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time The table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b.

If the display data table for fluctuation 232a1 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233b, the fluctuation that has a shorter fluctuation time than the set display data table for fluctuation 232a1 will actually occur. When the production is instructed by the main controller 110, the main controller 110 (sound lamp A determination command (determination command for display) is received from the control device 113), and the changing third symbol is suddenly stopped and displayed, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

In contrast, as in the first embodiment, by setting the variable display data table 232a1 corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variable time in the display data table buffer 233b, the set variable display data Even if the main controller 110 instructs a variable effect having a longer variable time than the table 232a1, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233b is completed, the main controller 110 (sound lamp control device 113) until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received, the third symbol display device 81 is set by the display setting process (S2023) so that the restart effect is displayed. display is controlled. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the restart performance as part of the variation performance, and can continue to see the variation of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 without discomfort until the stop display of the third pattern is confirmed.

Next, the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the variable display data table 232a1 set in S2161 is determined, read from the data table storage area 232a, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233d (S2162). Then, the content is cleared by writing Null data to the additional data table buffer 233c (S2163).

After that, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table 232a1 corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table 232a1 set by the processing of S2161 is turned on. , the data table discrimination flags corresponding to the other variable display data tables 232a1 are set to OFF (S2164). In the display control in the display control device 114, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S2164, it is determined which variation pattern the variation display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b corresponds to. can be easily determined. Then, the display control device 114 determines whether or not there is a contradiction between the fluctuation pattern of the set fluctuation display data table 232a1 and the stop pattern set by the display stop type command to be received later. If there is, the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the default variation is set in the display data table buffer 233b.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b by the process of S2161, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233g (S2165). , pointer 233e are initialized to "0" (S2166). Then, the determination command flag, demonstration display flag, and determination display flag are all set to OFF (S2167), and the restart timer counter used in the display setting process (S2023) is initialized to "0" (S2168). ), this variation pattern command process (S2144) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect system command process (see FIG. 52).

By executing this variation pattern command process (S2144), in the display setting process (S2023), while updating the pointer 233e initialized by the process of S2166, the display data table buffer 233b is set by the process of S2161. From the variable display data table 232a1, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233e is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is specified. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by 233e is extracted, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table 232a1 is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so that

In addition, in the display setting process (S2023), by using the timer counter 233g in which the time data is set based on the variable display data table 232a1 by the process of S2165, the time for the variable effect specified in the variable display data table 232a1 is displayed. to time. Then, when it is determined that the variation effect in the variable display data table 232a1 is completed, if a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 (sound lamp control device 113) is received, the confirmation display effect is performed as the first Displayed on the 3-symbol display device 81, and if the determination command (determination command for display) cannot be received within a predetermined time after the completion of the variable performance, the restart performance is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81. Control settings.

Here, if both the fixed command for display and the fluctuation pattern command for display are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if priority is given to the processing corresponding to the fixed command for display, Since the variation effect associated with the variation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display.

On the other hand, in the command processing for variable effects (S2109), since it is determined whether or not there is a confirmation command for display, the confirmation command processing, which is the processing corresponding to the confirmation command for display, is always executed first. On the other hand, the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command is executed later, and as in the processing of S2167, the determination command flag set by the display determination command can be set to OFF by overwriting. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display determination command, and the variation effect associated with the display variation pattern command can be preferentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Similarly, if both the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display demo command is prioritized, the display Since the variation effect associated with the variation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display.

On the other hand, in the command determination processing (see FIG. 50), since the presence or absence of the display demonstration command is determined first, the demonstration command processing corresponding to the display demonstration command is always executed first. On the other hand, the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command is executed later, and as in the processing of S2161, the demonstration display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b by the display demonstration command is overwritten to display the variation. The data table 232a1 can be rewritten. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demonstration command, and the variation effect associated with the display variation pattern command can be preferentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Returning to FIG. 52, the description continues. In the process of S2143, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2143: No), the unprocessed command related to the variation effect is the display stop type command, so the stop type command process is executed (S2145 ), the command processing of the variation effect system (S2109) is terminated, and the processing returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 50).

Details of the stop type command process (S2146) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG.53(c) is a flowchart which shows a stop classification command process. This stop type command process is for executing a process corresponding to the stop type command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display ("15R probability variable jackpot", "2R probability variable jackpot", "15R normal jackpot", "normal reach (other than front and back)" at the time of loss) production mode, "super/special reach (before and after losing reach)" production mode at the time of losing, or "non-reach" production mode) is determined (S2171), and the stop type table and V By comparing the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time the interrupt process (see FIG. 49(b)) is executed, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally determined. (S2172).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2172 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It is set to OFF (S2173), this stop type command process (S2146) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable effect system command process (see FIG. 52).

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table 232a1, the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the variation display data table 232a1 is started. As the type information for specifying the offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2172 is described. In the above-described task processing (S2024), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2172 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S2173, and the specified stop By adding the pattern offset information acquired by the display setting process (S2023) described later to the pattern, the third pattern to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Note that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the change several seconds or more apart, the display controller 114 will not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process (see FIG. 50), it is impossible that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area. It could change and another command could be mistakenly interpreted as a stop type command for display. In the process of S2171, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be "non-reach". Determine the stop type table. As a result, the stop symbol (for example, "456") corresponding to the "non-reach" which is the "loss display" is set by the processing of S2172.

If a stop symbol corresponding to a big hit is set, the third symbol display device 81 will display the stop symbol of the big win even if the game is actually lost. There is a possibility that the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered because the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is misunderstood as a big win. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the "non-reach" production mode of the "losing display", in fact, if a big hit, the third symbol display device 81 Even if the stop symbol corresponding to the "losing display" is displayed, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot state, so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 50, the description continues. In the process of S2108, if it is determined that there is no variable effect command (S2108: No), then, among the unprocessed commands, there is a command related to pre-reading notice such as "holding change notice", that is, when display lighting hold change command, shift hold change command for display, start change command for display, pre-reach change command for display, post-reach change command for display, change after display erase command, or other look-ahead command Hold change command, hold change command during shift for display, change command at start of display, change command before reach for display, change command after reach for display, change command after erase for display, and other prefetch commands are collectively referred to as "prefetch (S2110), and if there is a prefetch command (S2110: Yes), prefetch command processing is executed (S2111). return.

Details of the read-ahead command processing (S2111) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing this look-ahead command processing. This look-ahead command processing executes processing corresponding to a look-ahead command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In this look-ahead command processing (S2111), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display lighting hold change command among unprocessed commands (S2181), and if there is a display lighting hold change command ( S2181: Yes), set the pending change command to ON (S2188). The pending change command is configured to notify the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 62) to be described later that the look-ahead commands including the display lighting pending change command have been processed in the ON state. Next, the pending change additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the pending change notice image type (holding pattern or execution pattern display mode) indicated by the display lighting pending change command is determined, and the determined pending change additional data The table 232a2 is read from the data table storage area 232a, and the pending change additional data table 232a2 is set in the additional data table buffer 233c (S2189).

As a result, in the display setting process (S2023), for the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, the additional data table for pending change stored in the additional data table buffer 233c by the process of S2189 The display contents of the image for the next one frame on the third pattern display device 81 are specified so that the "pending change notice" corresponding to 232a2 is additionally displayed.

Then, among the pending change notice discrimination flags provided for each hold change notice image type, the hold change notice discrimination flag corresponding to the hold change notice image type included in the hold change command for display lighting is turned on (S2190). , the read-ahead command processing (S2111) is terminated, and the processing returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 50).

In the process of S2181, if it is determined that there is no change command for holding change during display lighting (S2181: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a hold change command during shift for display among the unprocessed commands. (S2182), if there is a display shift hold change command (S2182: Yes), the processing of S2188 to S2190 is performed, and the display shift hold change command is used in the same manner as when the display lighting hold change command is received. A pending change additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the indicated pending change notice image type is determined, and the pending change additional data table 232a2 is set in the additional data table buffer 233c. In addition, the hold change notice determination flag corresponding to the hold change notice type image included in the hold change command for display shift is turned on, this prefetching system command processing (S2111) is terminated, and the command determination processing (see FIG. 50). back to

In the process of S2182, if it is determined that there is no display shift hold change command (S2182: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display start change command among the unprocessed commands ( S2183), if there is a display start time change command (S2183: Yes), the processing is performed from S2188 to S2190, and similar to the case where the display lighting hold change command or the like is received, the display start time change command A pending change additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the indicated pending change notice image type is determined, and the pending change additional data table 232a2 is set in the additional data table buffer 233c. Also, the pending change notice determination flag corresponding to the pending change notice type image included in the change command for display start is turned on, this prefetching system command processing (S2111) is terminated, and the command determination processing (see FIG. 50) is performed. return.

In the processing of S2183, if it is determined that there is no change command at the start of display (S2183: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a pre-reach change command for display in the unprocessed commands (S2184 ), if there is a display reach before change command (S2184: Yes), the processing is performed from S2188 to S2190, and as in the case of receiving a display lighting hold change command etc., it is indicated by the display reach before change command. The suspension change additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the suspension change notice image type is determined, and the suspension change additional data table 232a2 is set in the additional data table buffer 233c. Also, turn on the hold change notice determination flag corresponding to the hold change notice type image included in the reach before change command for display, end this prefetching system command processing (S2111), and proceed to the command determination processing (see FIG. 50) return.

In the process of S2184, if it is determined that there is no pre-reach change command for display (S2184: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a post-reach change command for display in the unprocessed commands (S2185 ), if there is a post-reach change command for display (S2185: Yes), the processing is performed from S2188 to S2190, and is indicated by the post-reach change command for display in the same manner as when a hold change command for display lighting is received. The suspension change additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the suspension change notice image type is determined, and the suspension change additional data table 232a2 is set in the additional data table buffer 233c. Also, the hold change notice determination flag corresponding to the hold change notice type image included in the post-reach change command for display is turned on, this prefetching system command processing (S2111) is terminated, and the command determination processing (see FIG. 50) is performed. return.

In the process of S2185, if it is determined that there is no post-reach change command for display (S2185: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a post-erase change command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2186). ), if there is a post-erasure change command for display (S2186: Yes), the processing of S2188 to S2190 is performed, and is indicated by the post-erasure change command for display in the same manner as when a hold change command for display lighting or the like is received. The suspension change additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the suspension change notice image type is determined, and the suspension change additional data table 232a2 is set in the additional data table buffer 233c. Also, the pending change notice discrimination flag corresponding to the pending change notice type image included in the post-erase change command for display is turned on, the pre-reading system command processing (S2111) is terminated, and the process proceeds to the command judgment processing (see FIG. 50). return.

In the process of S2186, if it is determined that there is no post-erase change command for display (S2186: No), then other prefetch command processing is executed (S2187), and this prefetch related command processing (S2111) is terminated. Then, the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 50).

When the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the first embodiment detects that the hold change command flag set by the process of S2188 is turned on in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 62) described later, the pre-reading system It is determined that the predetermined pending change additional data table 232a2 has been set in the additional data table buffer 233c by the command processing (S2111), and from the pending change notice determination flag set by the processing of S2190, the additional data table buffer 232a is set in the additional data table buffer 232a. The type of suspension change notice image corresponding to the suspension change additional data table 232a2 is specified. Then, an instruction to transfer the image data necessary for displaying the specified pending change notice image type (image data related to the display mode other than the initial setting (default setting) of the pending pattern or the execution pattern) to the image storage area 236a. to the image controller 237 .

Returning to FIG. 50, the description continues. In the process of S2110, if it is determined that there is no look-ahead command (S2110: No), then weak display pattern command, strong display pattern command, weak display pattern command, weak strong display pattern command, display pattern-based command for display strength pattern command or display strength pattern command, color-based command for display red-letter command or display gold-letter command, timing-based command for display change-at-occurrence command or display-in-reach change command, Alternatively, a command related to each character display Se1 to Se4 displayed on the third pattern display device 81 of the display fixed phrase normal command (hereinafter, pattern system command, color system command, timing system command and display fixed phrase normal command (S2112), and if there is a character-based command (S2112: Yes), character-based command processing is executed (S2113). , the process returns to S2101.

Details of the character-based command processing (S2113) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing character-based command processing. This character-based command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the character-based command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the character-based command processing (S2113), first, it is determined whether or not there is a pattern-based command among the unprocessed commands (S2191). The character pattern memory 233j is set based on the command (S2192). Then, the process proceeds to S2202, and the character change command flag is set to ON (S2202). The character change command flag is configured to notify the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 62), which will be described later, that a character-based command including a pattern-based command has been processed in the ON state.

Next, the character pattern additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the character change image type indicated by the character pattern memory 233j is determined, the determined character pattern additional data table 232a2 is read from the data table storage area 232a, and the character pattern additional data table 232a2 is set in the additional data table buffer 233c (S2203).

As a result, in the display setting process (S2023), the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b is stored in the character pattern memory 233j stored in the additional data table buffer 233c by the process of S2203. The display contents of the image for the next one frame in the third pattern display device 81 are specified so that the display mode of each character display Se1 to Se4 corresponding to the character pattern additional data table 232a2 based on is additionally displayed. .

After that, among the character change determination flags provided for each character change image type, the character change determination flag corresponding to the character change image type indicated by the character pattern memory 233j is set to ON (S2204), and this character system command The process (S2113) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 50).

It should be noted that the character change determination flag set here is the timing at which the variable effect executed this time ends, that is, in the display setting process (S2023), the confirmation command flag indicating that the confirmation command for display has been received is turned on. In some cases, the character change determination flag is set to OFF (see S2314 in FIG. 57).

In the process of S2191, if it is determined that there is no pattern-based command (S2191: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a color-based command among the unprocessed commands (S2193). If there is (S2193: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the color system command is a display red character command (S2194). As a result of determination, if it is a red character command for display (S2194: Yes), the red character flag 233k is set to ON (S2195), and the process proceeds to S2202. No), the received color command is a display gold character command, so the gold character flag 233m is set to ON (S2196), and the process proceeds to S2202.

In the process of S2202 after S2195 or S2196, as in the case of receiving a pattern-based command, processing of a character-based command including a color-based command in the ON state is performed in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 62), which will be described later. ) is set to ON (S2202).

Next, the character color additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the character change image type indicated by the red character flag 233k or the gold character flag 233m and the variation effect to be executed (display data table 232a1) is determined, and the determined character color is determined. The additional data table 232a2 for character color is read from the data table storage area 232a, and the additional data table 232a2 for character color is set in the additional data table buffer 233c (S2203).

As a result, in the display setting process (S2023), the red character flag 233k or In order to additionally display the display mode of each character display Se1 to Se4 corresponding to the character color additional data table 232a2 based on the gold character flag 233m, the image for the next one frame on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. Identify what to display.

After that, among the character change determination flags provided for each character change image type, the character change determination flag corresponding to the character change image type indicated by the red character flag 233k or the gold character flag 233m is set to ON (S2204). , the character-based command processing (S2113) is terminated, and the processing returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 50).

Therefore, in the character change determination flag, for example, when a pattern-based command and a color-based command are received for the variation effect, the character change determination flag is turned on based on the pattern-based command, and the character change determination flag is turned on based on the color-based command. A change determination flag is set to ON.

Specifically, in the variable presentation of 1, a case in which a strong command for display is received as a pattern-based command and a red character command for display as a color-based command is exemplified. In this case, the character change determination flag is such that both the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence and the character display Se2 during reach are displayed in a "strong pattern", and the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 is displayed in "red". A value is set to indicate that Accordingly, as the additional data table 232a2, a character pattern additional data table 232a2 and a character color additional data table 232a2 are stored in the additional data table buffer 233c.

In the process of S2193, if it is determined that there is no color command (S2193: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a fixed phrase normal command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2197), and the command is displayed. If there is a fixed phrase normal command (S2197: Yes), the after-end restriction flag 233p is set to ON (S2198), and the process proceeds to S2202.

In the process of S2202 after the process of S2198, it is determined that the character-based command including the fixed phrase normal command for display has been processed in the ON state, as in the case of receiving the pattern-based command or the like. (see FIG. 62) is set to ON (S2202).

Next, a character correction additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the character change image type indicated by the post-event restriction flag 233p and the variation effect to be executed is determined, and the determined character correction additional data table 232a2 is stored in the data table storage area. 232a, and sets the character correction additional data table 232a2 in the additional data table buffer 233c (S2203).

As a result, in the display setting process (S2023), for the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, the post-event restriction flag 233p stored in the additional data table buffer 233c by the process of S2203 is displayed. The display mode of the image for the next one frame on the third pattern display device 81 is specified so that the display mode of the fixed phrase character display Se3 corresponding to the additional data table 232a2 for character correction based on is additionally displayed. .

After that, among the character change determination flags provided for each character change image type, the character change determination flag corresponding to the character change image type indicated by the after-end limit flag 233p is set to ON (S2204), and this character system The command processing (S2113) is ended, and the command determination processing (see FIG. 50) is returned to.

Therefore, in the character change determination flag, for example, when a pattern-based command, a color-based command, and a display standard phrase normal command are received with respect to the variable effect, the character change determination flag is turned on based on the pattern-based command. , the character change determination flag is set to ON based on the color command, and the character change determination flag is set to ON based on the standard phrase for display normal command.

Specifically, in the variable effect of 1, a strong command for display is received as a pattern-based command, a red character command for display is received as a color-based command, and a fixed form phrase normal command for display is received. An example is the case where In this case, the character change determination flag is such that both the character display Se1 during reach occurrence and the character display Se2 during reach are displayed in "strong pattern", and the character display Se1 during reach occurrence and character display Se2 during reach are both "red". , and a value indicating that the standard phrase character display Se3 is displayed in "white" is set. Accordingly, as additional data tables 232a2, a character pattern additional data table 232a2, a character color additional data table 232a2, and a character correction additional data table 232a2 are stored in the additional data table buffer 233c.

In the process of S2197, if it is determined that there is no fixed phrase normal command for display (S2197: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a change-when-generated command for display in the unprocessed commands (S2199). ), if there is a change command for display (S2199: Yes), the character color change flag 233n is set to ON (S2200), and the process proceeds to S2202. (S2199: No) Since the received text command is a change command during reach for display, the during reach character color change flag 233o is set to ON (S2201), and the process proceeds to S2202.

In the process of S2202 after S2200 or S2201, as in the case of receiving a pattern-based command, processing of a character-based command including a timing-based command in the ON state is performed in normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 62). ) is set to ON (S2202).

Next, the character timing additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the character change image type indicated by the occurrence character color change flag 233n or the reaching character color change flag 233o is determined, and the determined character timing additional data table 232a2 is used. The additional data table 232a2 for character timing is read from the data table storage area 232a and set in the additional data table buffer 233c (S2203).

As a result, in the display setting process (S2023), for the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, the character color change at occurrence stored in the additional data table buffer 233c by the process of S2203 is displayed. The next one frame on the third pattern display device 81 is changed so that the display color is changed at the appearance timing corresponding to the character timing additional data table 232a2 based on the flag 233n or the in-reach character color change flag 233o. to specify what is displayed in the image. The additional data table 232a2 for character timing is such that when the display color is changed at the display timing of the character display Se1 when a reach occurs, the display colors of the character display Se1 when a reach occurs and the character display Se2 during a reach are changed colors. When the additional data table 232a2 for character timing is set to change the display color at the display timing of the character display Se2 during reach, the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence becomes the normal display color, and the character display Se2 during reach The character timing additional data table 232a2 is set so that the display color is the changed color.

After that, among the character change determination flags provided for each character change image type, the character change determination flag corresponding to the character change image type indicated by the character color change flag 233n at occurrence or the character color change flag 233o during reach is turned on. After setting (S2204), this character-based command processing (S2113) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 50).

Therefore, in the character change determination flag, for example, when a pattern-based command, a color-based command, a fixed form phrase normal command for display, and a timing-based command are respectively received with respect to the variable effect, the character change determination flag based on the pattern-based command is turned on, the character change determination flag is turned on based on the color commands, the character change determination flag is turned on based on the display fixed phrase normal command, and the character change determination flag is turned on based on the timing commands. .

Specifically, in the variable effect of 1, a strong command for display is received as a pattern-based command, a red character command for display is received as a color-based command, and a fixed form phrase normal command for display is received. Furthermore, a case where a change command during reach for display is received as a timing-related command is exemplified. In this case, the character change determination flag is such that both the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence and the character display Se2 during reach are displayed in "strong pattern", and the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is displayed in "white", and the characters during reach A value is set which indicates that the display Se2 is displayed in "red" and the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in "white". Accordingly, the additional data table 232a2 includes a character pattern additional data table 232a2, a character color additional data table 232a2, a character correction additional data table 232a2, and a character timing additional data table 232a2 (hereinafter referred to as character pattern additional data table 232a2). The table 232a2, the character color additional data table 232a2, the character correction additional data table 232a2, and the character timing additional data table 232a2 may be collectively referred to as the "character change additional data table 232a2." It is stored in the table buffer 233c.

When the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the first embodiment detects that the character change command flag set by the process of S2202 is turned on in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 62) described later, the character system It is determined that the predetermined character change additional data table 232a2 has been set in the additional data table buffer 233c by the command processing (S2113), and the character change determination flag set by the processing of S2204 indicates that the additional data table buffer 232a2 has been set in the additional data table buffer 233c. The character change image type corresponding to the character change additional data table 232a2 is specified. Then, the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data necessary for displaying the identified character change image type.

Returning to FIG. 50, the description continues. In the process of S2112, if it is determined that there is no character-based command (S2112: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2114), and the back image change command is determined. If there is a command (S2114: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2115), and the process returns to S2101.

Details of the back image change command process (S2115) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56(a) is a flow chart showing the back image change command process. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command process (S2115), first, the back image change flag is set to notify the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 62) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state. It is set to ON (S2211). Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each back surface type (back surface A to C), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back surface type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back surface types are supported. The back image determination flag is set to OFF (S22212), the back image change command processing (S2115) is terminated, and the command determination processing (see FIG. 50) is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 62), when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S2211 is turned on, the back image determination flag set by the process of S2212 is used to determine the changed back image. Identify the type. Then, if the specified back image is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

Further, in the task processing (S2024), if it is specified to display one of the back faces A to C according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table 232a1, the back face image discrimination set in S2212 is performed. A RAM storing image data corresponding to the rear face type to be displayed at that time is specified from the flag, and the rear face image range to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and image data corresponding to the rear face image range is specified The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and its RAM address are specified.

In addition, since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. 50), it is unlikely that two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. There is a possibility that it may be erroneously interpreted as a back image change command. In the process of S2212, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear surface type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back surface type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Returning to FIG. 50, the description continues. In the process of S2114, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S2114: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2116). Otherwise (S2116: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2117), and the process returns to S2101.

Details of the error command processing (S2117) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process (S2117), first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2221). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S2222). The process (S2117) is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 50).

In the display setting process (S2023), when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2221, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S2222, and the error type is determined. Processing is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the type.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S2222, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Returning to FIG. 50, the description continues. If it is determined in the process of S2116 that there is no error command (S2116: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2119), and the process returns to S2101.

In the process of S2101, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2101: Yes ), and the processing of S2102 to S2119 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2101 to S2119 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. The process (S2022) ends.

The simple command determination process (S2028) executed when the simple image display flag 233a is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49(b)) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process (S2022). . However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. Only commands and stop type commands for display are extracted, and processing corresponding to each command, fixed command processing (see FIG. 53(a)), fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 53(b)) and stop type The command processing (see FIG. 53(c)) is executed, and other commands are discarded without executing the processing corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 53(b)) executed in this case, in the process of S2161, the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image 283 is transferred to the display data table buffer 233b. The image data of the power-on main image 282 and the power-on varying image 283 required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Since it is stored, in the process of S2162, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233d and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, referring to FIGS. 57 to 60, details of the display setting process (S2023) which is one process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. will be explained. 57 and 58 are flowcharts showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process (S2023), as shown in FIG. 57, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S2301). No), it determines that the new command has not been processed in the previously executed command determination process (see FIG. 50), skips the processes of S2302 to S2306, and shifts the process to S2307. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S2301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S2302), S2303 to S2306 are performed. The process executes the process corresponding to the new command.

In the process of S2303, it is determined whether or not the command flag for the number of new pending balls is on (S2303). ), it is determined that the reserved ball number command for display has been processed, and the reserved image setting process is executed (S2304).

Details of the reserved image setting process (S2304) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59(a) is a flowchart showing the pending image setting process. This pending image setting process initializes the pending symbols and execution symbols for the number of pending balls notified by the voice lamp control device 113 to the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the processing of the command for the number of pending balls for display. This is a process for expanding the image data to be displayed with the setting (default setting, that is, the “white” “○” pattern).

In the pending image setting process (S2304), first, the number determination flag is referred to, and the pending symbols and execution symbols for the number of pending balls corresponding to the number determination flag set to ON are displayed in the cockpit display area of the third symbol display device 81. The reserved image data to be displayed in Db (see FIG. 4A) is expanded (S2341). In task processing (see S2024 in FIG. 49(b)), based on the developed pending image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the pending image are specified, and the display coordinates are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Then, the new pending ball count command flag is set to OFF (S2342), this pending image setting process (S2304) is terminated, and the display setting process (see FIG. 57) is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 57, the description continues. After the pending image setting process (S2304) or in the process of S2303, if the new pending ball number command flag is not ON (S2303: No), then it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is ON ( S2305). As a result of determination, if the error occurrence flag is ON (S2305: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S2306).

Details of the warning image setting process (S2306) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59(b) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81 .

In the warning image setting process (S2306), first, the error discrimination flags are referred to, and the warning image data for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display error warning images corresponding to all the error discrimination flags set to ON is developed. (S2351). In task processing (see S2024 in FIG. 49(b)), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) forming the warning image are specified, and display coordinates are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Then, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S2352), the warning image setting process (S2306) is terminated, and the display setting process (see FIG. 57) is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 57, the description continues. After the warning image setting process (S2306) or in the process of S2305, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S2305: No), then the pointer update process is executed ( S2307).

Details of the pointer update processing (S2307) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process is performed by extracting the corresponding drawing data from the display data table 232a1, the additional data table 232a2 and the transfer data table 232a3 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, the additional data table buffer 233c and the transfer data table buffer 233d, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233e designating the address from which the content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data should be acquired.

In this pointer update process (S2307), first, 1 is added to the pointer 233e (S2361). That is, the pointer 233e is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49(b)) is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables 232a1 to 232a3, "Start" information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233e is initialized to "0" as the display data table 232a1 is stored in the display data table buffer 233b, the value is updated to "1" by this pointer updating process. , the actual data can be read from the respective data tables 232a1 to 232a3 in order from the address "0001H".

After the value of the pointer 233e is updated by the process of S2361, the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233e is the "End" information in the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b. (S2362). As a result, if it is "End" information (S2362: Yes), it indicates that the pointer 233e has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b. means.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b is the demonstration display data table 232a1 or the restart display data table 232a1 (S2363). If it is the restart display data table 232a1 (S2363: Yes), the pointer 233e is set to "1" (S2364), and the demonstration display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b or restart display Time data corresponding to the performance time of the data table 232a1 is set in the clock counter 233g (S2365), and the process proceeds to S2367. As a result, in the display setting process (see FIG. 57), the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table 232a1 or the restart display data table 232a1. The effect or restart effect can be repeatedly displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2363 that the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b is neither the demonstration display data table 232a1 nor the restart display data table 232a1 (S2363: No), The value of the pointer 233e is decremented by 1 (S2366), and the process proceeds to S2367. As a result, in the display setting process (see FIG. 57), the display data table buffer 233b stores display data tables 232a1 other than the demonstration display data table 232a1 and the restart display data table 232a1. When the data table 232a1 is set, the drawing contents of the previous address in which the "End" information is described are always developed, so the third pattern display device 81 has the display data table 232a1. It can be displayed in a state of being stopped at the last image to be displayed.

In the process of S2362, in the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b, if it is determined that the data at the address indicated by the pointer 233e updated by the process of S2361 is not the "End" information. (S2362: No), the process of S2363 to S2366 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2367.

In the process of S2367, it is determined whether or not the fixed command flag is on (S2367). If the fixed command flag is off (S2367: No), the pointer update process (S2307) is terminated. Then, the process returns to the display setting process (see FIG. 57). On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is ON (S2367: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113, so the display data table buffer The value of the pointer 233e is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where the "End" information is stored in the display data table 232a1 set in 233b (S2368). Then, the value of the clock counter 233g is set to "1" (S2369), the pointer updating process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, when the confirmation command is received, the display setting process can develop the drawing content specified at the end of the set display data table 232a1 and control the start of the confirmation display effect.

Returning to FIG. 57, the description continues. After the pointer update process (S2307), the address indicated by the pointer 233e updated by the pointer update process is retrieved from the display data table 232a1 and the additional data table 232a2 set in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table buffer 233c. is developed (S2308). In the task processing (see S2024 in FIG. 49(b)), the sprites (display objects) that make up the image are determined based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S2308, along with the previously developed pending image and warning image. Along with specifying the type, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

In the first embodiment, when the display data table buffer 233b stores the display data table 232a1 and the additional data table buffer 233c stores the additional data table 232a2, the same sprite is drawn at the address indicated by the pointer 233e. is set, the drawing list is generated with priority given to the drawing contents shown in the additional data table 232a2. As a result, the drawing contents of the sprite defined in the display data table 232a1 are redefined in the additional data table 232a2, so that the drawing contents of the display data table 232a1 are changed to the drawing contents of the additional data table 232a2 and displayed. be able to.

Further, in the first embodiment, the additional data table buffer 233c is configured to be able to store a plurality of additional data tables 232a2. When the drawing of the same sprite is set at the address indicated by the pointer 233e, the drawing list is generated with priority given to the drawing contents indicated by the most recently stored additional data table 232a2. That is, the order in which the additional data table 232a2 is stored is stored, and the drawing content of the newest additional data table 232a2 can be preferentially displayed. becomes possible.

Specifically, for example, when the additional data table buffer 233c stores the character color additional data table 232a2 for displaying the character displays Se1 to Se4 in "red", the display color of the standard phrase character display Se3 is changed. When the character correction additional data table 232a2 for correcting the color to "white" is stored, the character correction additional data table 232a2 can be displayed with priority over the character color additional data table 232a2.

If Null data is described in the additional data table 232a2, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. Also, when the additional data table buffer 233c is cleared with Null data, the Null data is always developed from the additional data table buffer 233c.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233g is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233g after the subtraction is "0" or less (S2310). If the value of the clock counter 233g is not less than "0", that is, if it is greater than or equal to "1" (S2310: No), the display setting process (S2023) is terminated and the V interrupt process (FIG. 49) is terminated. (b) reference).

On the other hand, in the process of S2310, if the value of the clock counter 233g is "0" or less (S2310: Yes), the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b has elapsed. means that At this time, if the variable display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) should be transmitted, so in the subsequent processing of S2311, it is checked whether or not the definite command flag is ON (S2311).

As a result of the determination in S2311, if the confirmation command flag is ON (S2311: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113. First, the fixed display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b, and null data is written in each of the additional data table buffer 233c and the transfer data table buffer 233d to clear their contents (S2312).

Next, since the variable effect being executed is completed, the setting contents of the character displays Se1 to Se4 set for the variable effect are cleared, that is, the character pattern memory 233j, the red character flag 233k, and the gold character flag 233m are generated. The hour character color change flag 233n, the in-reach character color change flag 233o, and the after-end limit flag 233p are turned off (cleared to 0) (S2313), and the character change determination flag is turned off (S2314). By configuring in this way, it is possible to initialize the setting contents of the character displays Se1 to Se4 each time one variable effect is completed. It is possible to prevent the setting contents of Se4 from appearing in the next variable presentation.

Next, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the fixed display is set in the clock counter 233g (S2315), and the value of the pointer 233e is initialized to "0" (S2316). Then, the determination command flag is set to OFF (S2317), and then the determination display flag indicating that the determination display effect is being performed in the "0" state (OFF state) is set to ON (that is, "1") ( S2318), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S2319), the display setting process (S2023) is terminated, and the V interrupt process (Fig. 49 (b )).

As a result, in a situation where the variable display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b, the confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received, the drawing contents can be set so that the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

In addition, only by changing the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b to the fixed display data table 232a1, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. . In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 can be caused to display various types of effect images.

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S2319 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. Until a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variation based on , symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the previously performed variation performance is described.

Therefore, in the task processing (see S2024 in FIG. 49(b)), until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, from the last stop symbol determination flag set by S2319, the variation effect performed one before The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by specifying the third symbol to be displayed and adding the symbol offset information obtained by the display setting process to the specified stationary symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S2311, if the confirmation command flag is not ON but OFF (S2311: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2320 shown in FIG. 58 to determine whether the confirmation display flag is ON. (S2320). Then, if the confirmation display flag is on (S2320: Yes), it is determined in the process of S2310 that the value of the clock counter 233g is "0" or less (S2310: Yes) because the confirmation display effect has ended. means. Therefore, after the fixed display flag is set to off (S2321), the demonstration display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b (S2322), and then the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display is stored in the timer counter 233g. (S2323). Then, the pointer 233e is initialized to "0" (S2324), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2325), the process proceeds to FIG. 57, and this display setting is performed. The process (S2023) is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49(b)).

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display demonstration effect command indicating the start of the demonstration effect is not received by the time the fixed display effect ends, the second display effect is automatically executed. The drawing contents can be set so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the 3-symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

In the process of S2320, when the determined display flag is determined to be ON, that is, when the branch condition of Yes in S2320 is satisfied, is when the determined display effect is performed. , the additional data table buffer 233c and the transfer data table buffer 233d are all cleared. Therefore, in the process of S2322, clearing of the data table buffers 233c and 233d is omitted. As a result, the processing load on the MPU 231 can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2320, if the fixed display flag is not ON but OFF (S2320: No), then it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S2326). If the demonstration display flag is on (S2326: Yes), the fact that the value of the clock counter 233g is determined to be "0" or less in the process of S2310 (S2310: Yes) means that the demonstration effect has ended. do. Therefore, the process shifts to FIG. 57, ends the display setting process (S2023), and returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49(b)). In this case, the pointer updating process (S2307) executed in the display setting process of the next V-interrupt process makes various settings so that the demonstration effects are started again as described above. , until a new display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁

On the other hand, in the process of S2326, if the demonstration display flag is not ON but OFF (S2326: No), it is determined in the process of S2310 that the value of the clock counter 233g is "0" or less (S2310: Yes). means that the variable production has ended. Therefore, if the confirmation command is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the variable performance, the variable display data table 232a1 corresponding to the variable performance is stored in the display data table buffer 233b in order to start the restart performance. When it is set, the restart timer counter initialized to "0" is incremented by 1 (S2327), and whether or not the value of the restart timer counter after addition reaches a predetermined value (for example, "100") (S2328).

Then, if the restart timer counter does not reach the predetermined value (S2328: No), the process proceeds to FIG. ). On the other hand, when the restart timer counter is at a predetermined value (S2328: Yes), the restart display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b, and Null is set in the additional data table buffer 233c and the transfer data table buffer 233d. By writing data, those contents are cleared (S2329). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect is set in the timer counter 233g (S2330), the value of the pointer 233e is initialized to "0" (S2331), and the process proceeds to FIG. The display setting process (see FIG. 57) is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49(b)).

As a result, in the display control device 114, even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed with the end of the variable effect, the determination command transmitted from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing contents can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the (definition command for display) is not received. Then, as described above, the restart effect is a effect of displaying an image in which the third symbol is vibrated on the third symbol display device 81. When the third symbol is vibrated and displayed after the variation of is stopped and displayed, it can be recognized that the stop symbol is not determined at that time.

Note that after the last rendering content specified by the restart display data table 232a1 is developed, the rendering content is developed again from the top of the restart display data table 232a1 by the above-described pointer update processing (S2307). Therefore, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the confirmation command for display is received from the sound lamp control device 113 or the new variation pattern command for display is received.

Further, the simple display setting process (S2029 in FIG. 49B) executed when the simple image display flag 233a is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B) is also the display setting process (S2023). Similar processing is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, after the presentation time of the variation presentation by the power-on fluctuation image 283 has ended, if a confirmation command (a confirmation command for display) is received from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113 , for a predetermined time, one image (either of FIG. 26(b) or FIG. 26(c)) of the power-on variation image 283 corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is stopped and displayed. A process of setting the display data table 232a1 defining the above in the display data table buffer 233b is performed.

Furthermore, after the effect time of the variable effect by the power-on variable image 283 is over, reception of the confirmation command (the confirmation command for display) that should be received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 is not permitted. In this case, the process of setting the display data table 232a1 specifying that the variation effect of the power-on variation image 283 is restarted as it is in the display data table buffer 233b is performed.

Next, referring to FIGS. 61 and 62, details of the transfer setting process (S2025), which is one process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. explain. First, FIG. 61(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process (S2025), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233a is ON (S2401). If the simple image display flag 233a is on (S2401: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. After executing the process (S2402), this transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49(b)). As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S3241, if the simple image display flag 233a is not ON, that is, if it is OFF (S2401: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. has been transferred to In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S2403), the transfer setting process (S2025) is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B). As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, the resident image transfer setting process (S2402), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2025) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 61(b). FIG. 61(b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S2402).

In this resident image transfer setting process (S2402), first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S2411). S2411: Yes), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S2412). In the process of S2412, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . In the process of S2412, if it is determined that the transfer process has not ended (S2412: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. and return to the transfer setting process (see FIG. 61(a)).

On the other hand, in the process of S2412, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S2412: Yes), the process proceeds to S2413. Also, in the process of S2411, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S2411: No), the process proceeds to S2413.

In the process of S2413, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S2413). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the transfer resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S2414), the resident image transfer setting process (S2402) is terminated, and the transfer setting process ( Return to FIG. 61(a)).

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list (see FIG. 32) transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 sends the drawing list Resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer data information described in .

The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). area provided in the resident video RAM 235 for storing the resident object image data). The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified resident video RAM 235. FIG. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S2413, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S2413: Yes), the simple image display flag 233a is set to off (S2415), and the resident image transfer setting process (S2402) is executed. Terminates and returns to the transmission setting process (see FIG. 61(a)). As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49(b)), the command Since determination processing (see FIGS. 50 to 56) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 57 to 60) are executed, normal image drawing is set. A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 62) (see S2401: No in FIG. 61(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting processing (S2402), the MPU 231 removes the resident All resident object image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 stays resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 and causes the image controller 237 to Image drawing processing can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. . As a result, the time required for reading the data can be saved, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, error messages, cockpit images, sub-display images, main controller 110, voice lamp control, and so on. After the display is determined by the device 113, the display control device 114, etc., the image data of the image of the reserved pattern or the character pattern to be displayed immediately is resident. It is possible to maintain high responsiveness from various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing to displaying some kind of image on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S2403), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2025) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S2403).

In this normal image transfer setting process (S2403), first, from the transfer data table 232a3 set in the transfer data table buffer 233d, by the pointer update process (S2307) of the previously executed display setting process (see FIG. 57) The information described at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233e is obtained (S2421).

Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S2422). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S2423), furthermore, a transfer start flag indicating that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state is set to ON (S2424), and the process proceeds to S2425.

On the other hand, in the process of S2422, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S2422: No), the processes of S2423 and S2424 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2425.

In the process of S2425, it is determined whether or not an image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S2425). ), and further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S2426).

In the process of S2426, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S2426 that the transfer process has not ended (S2426: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so this normal image transfer setting process ( S2403) is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S2426: Yes), the process proceeds to S2427. Also, as a result of the process of S2425, even if no image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S2425: No), the process proceeds to S2427.

In the processing of S2427, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S2427). is turned off (S2428), the image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S2423 is set as the transfer target image, and then the process proceeds to S2438. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S2427: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending change command flag is on (S2429).

Then, if the pending change command flag is ON (S2429: Yes), the look-ahead command related to the pending change notice is processed, and the pending change additional data table 232a2 for the pending change notice is set in the additional data table buffer 233c. Therefore, after the pending change command flag is set to OFF (S2430), among the pending change notice determination flags provided for each pending change notice image type, the pending change notice determination flag corresponding to the ON state is set. Identify the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the pending change notice image is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) ( S2431), the image data indicated by the specified various information is set as the image to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to S2438. In S2431, when the image data of the pending change notice image corresponding to the pending change notice determination flag in the on state is the image to be transferred, all the pending change notice determination flags in the on state are set to be off. It is configured.

In the processing of S2429, if the pending change command flag is not ON but OFF (S2429: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is ON (S2432). If the back image change flag is on (S2432: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the flags, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag that is in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (Normal video RAM 236) is specified (S2434), image data indicated by the specified various information is set as a transfer target image, and the process proceeds to S2438.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 Data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S2434, if the back image determination flag in the ON state is for the back A, the back image change flag is considered to be off (S2432: No), and the process proceeds to S2435.

In the processing of S2432, if the back image change flag is not ON but OFF (S2432: No), then it is determined whether or not the character change command flag is ON (S2435). If the character change command flag is off (S2435: No), the normal image transfer setting process (S2403) is terminated and the transfer setting process (see FIG. 61A) is returned to.

On the other hand, in the process of S2432, if the character change command flag is ON (S2432: Yes), the character pattern (character display Se1 during reach occurrence, character display Se2 during reach, fixed phrase character display Se3 or pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 ), after setting the character change command flag to OFF (S2436), the character corresponding to the character change determination flag in the ON state among the character change determination flags provided for each character change image type is changed. The head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the design is stored, and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are specified (S2437), After the image data indicated by the specified various information is set as the image to be transferred, the process proceeds to S2438.

In the process of S2438, it is determined whether or not the image to be transferred has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (S2438). The determination in the process of S2438 is performed by referring to the stored image determination flag 233h. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image determination flag 233h, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236. It is determined that the image data is stored in the image storage area 236a, and if the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. .

As a result of the process of S2438, if the image to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (S2438: Yes), the character ROM 234 transfers the image to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Since there is no need to transfer the image data, the normal image transfer setting process (S2404) is terminated, and the process returns to the transfer setting process (see FIG. 61A). As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 can be reduced, and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image is not stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S2438 (S2438: Yes), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image is set (S2439). As a result, the transfer data information of the image to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Also, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the image to be transferred, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the process of S2439, the stored image determination flag 233h is updated (S2440), the normal transfer setting process (S2403) is terminated, and the process returns to the transfer setting process (see FIG. 61(a)). As described above, the storage image determination flag 233h is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred to "on" and by storing the image in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer processing (S2403), processing for prefetching commands and character commands is executed in the previously executed command determination processing (see FIG. 50). When the additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the pending change notice image or the character change image indicated by the system command or the character system command is set in the additional data table buffer 233c, the hold change notice image used in the additional data table 232a2. The image data of the character change image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing (see FIG. 50), the resident Image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the video RAM 235 for normal use can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use without delay.

Further, in this embodiment, the display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the audio ramp control device 113. A transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to 232a1 is set in a transfer data table buffer 233d. Therefore, the sprite image data used in the display data table 232a1 can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Here, in the transfer data table 232a3, the transfer target image is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table 232a1. Data transfer data information is defined for a given address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table 232a3, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table 232a1, the drawing of the sprite can be performed. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for the image data storage area 236a can always be stored.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 without delay. , the third symbol display device 81 can display the corresponding effect while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the display data table 232a1. Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 by the description in the transfer data table 232a3.

The transfer data table 232a3 defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be finely controlled while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, details of the drawing process (S2026), which is one process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process (S2026), the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (see S2024 in FIG. 49B) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification, 32 from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2025 in FIG. 49B). (S2501).

That is, in the processing of S2501, from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined by the task processing, for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified. Parameters required for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite.

When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2025 in FIG. 49(b)), the top address of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. (storage source head address), the end address (storage source end address), and the head address of the transfer destination (image storage area 236a of normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233i are transmitted to the image controller (S2502). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233i is "0", the drawing target buffer flag 233i is set to "1", including the information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. , information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c is included as the drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the start address of the transfer destination (the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236). Then, the image data stored from the top address of the storage source to the last address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . In addition, while developing an image drawn in one frame buffer, an image developed from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

The rendering process (S2026) updates the rendering target buffer flag 233i after the process of S2502 (S2503). Then, this drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49(b)). The draw target buffer flag 233i is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 49(b)) is performed.

As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. .

After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65, an execution example (display example) of the character display Se1 at the time of reaching occurrence, the character display Se2 during reach, the fixed phrase character display Se3, and the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 will be described. .

First, with reference to FIG. 64, a situation in which the display color of the standard phrase character display Se3 is modified (changed/restricted) in the change effect of losing will be described. FIG. 64 shows that, in the change effect of losing executed by the third symbol display device 81, while winning the chance-up pattern (for example, "red") of each character display Se1 to Se3, by the above-mentioned limit flag 233p , and the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is corrected (changed) to "white".

Specifically, FIG. 64(a) shows the sub-display area Ds immediately after the "ready-to-win display (variable element of "normal reach")" appears in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which a ready-to-win character display Se1, in which words spoken from the character design of the central small area Ds2 are expressed in characters, is displayed in the left small area Ds1. In FIG. 64(b), the "normal reach" variable element is started from the state of FIG. 64(a), the sub display area Ds is erased, and the "normal reach" variable element is executed in the main display area Dm. It is the figure which showed the state. In FIG. 64(c), the variable element of "super reach" is started from the state of FIG. 64(b), the cockpit display area Db is erased, and the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. Furthermore, it is a diagram showing a state in which a reach-in-reach character display Se2 is displayed in which words spoken from the character pattern on the player side are expressed in characters. In FIG. 64(d), the variable element of "Super Reach" ends from the state in FIG. , and further, a fixed phrase character display Se3, which expresses a character pattern in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds, is displayed in the left small area Ds1. Fig. 3 shows. In addition, in FIGS. 64(a) to 64(d), the display mode of the third pattern is omitted.

First, in FIG. 64(a), in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol "7" is stopped and displayed, and in the right display area Dm3, the third symbol "7" is displayed. It shows a state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed, and furthermore, the third symbol is still unrecognizably "high-speed fluctuating" in the medium display area Dm2. Therefore, it is the state immediately after the so-called "ready-to-win display" with the "7" pattern appears. Further, in the cockpit display area Db, an executed symbol is displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, and reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively.

In addition, in the left small region Ds1 of the secondary display region Ds, the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence emitted from the character pattern of the central small region Ds2 is a “weak pattern” character pattern and a first chance up pattern “red ” is displayed. Specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the character display Se1 at the time of reaching occurrence of "Let's go!", which is the line uttered by the character pattern in the central small area Ds2, is the normal display color "white". to "red" which is the first chance-up pattern.

That is, in the display state of FIG. 64(a), "red" is selected by lottery for changing the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display is selected. This means that "at the time of occurrence of reach" was selected in the lottery for the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2. In addition, in FIG. 64(a), the character display Se1 at the time of reach generation displays the "weak pattern" of "Let's go!". This means that a "weak pattern", which is a normal character pattern, has been selected.

Therefore, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives at least the display red character command and the display occurrence change command from the sound lamp control device 113, and the red character flag 233k is set based on the display red character command. It is set to ON, and the character color change flag 233n at occurrence is set to ON based on the command for change at occurrence for display.

Therefore, in the additional data table buffer 233c, at least the character pattern additional data table 232a2 (actually, FIG. 64(c) ), an additional data table 232a2 for character color based on the on of the red character flag 233k, and additional data for character timing based on the on of the character color change flag 233n at occurrence Table 232a2 is stored (set). As a result, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the variable display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. . Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the third symbol display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 64(a) is obtained. In addition, although it will be described later in FIG. 64(d), in the fluctuation effects of FIGS. , an additional data table 232a2 for character correction is stored.

FIG. 64(b) shows a state in which the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 64(a). In the variable elements of this "normal reach", in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the "7" symbol being stopped is enlarged and displayed, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is displayed. Variable effect (for example, low speed scrolling from "5" pattern to "6" pattern) is performed so that it can be visually recognized at a low speed. In addition, the sub-display area Ds is erased as the main display area Dm expands due to the occurrence of the "normal reach" variable, and the sub-display area Ds becomes invisible. In the cockpit display area Db, as in the display state of FIG. 64(a), the executed symbols are displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. is displayed.

In the display state of FIG. 64(b), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 does not additionally receive commands from the sound lamp control device 113 with respect to the display state of FIG. 64(a). Therefore, in the additional data table buffer 233c, additional data tables 232a2 equivalent to the storage state in FIG. character change additional data table 232a2)) is stored (set). Therefore, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the variable display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the third pattern display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 64(b) is obtained.

FIG. 64(c) shows a state in which the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 64(b). In the "super reach" variable element, the "7" symbol displayed in the "normal reach" variable element is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁Also, during the execution of the variable element of "Super Reach", the cockpit display area Db is erased, and instead, the variable effect is reserved at the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and below the Reach formation symbol. A number pattern (“4” in the first embodiment) indicating the number of balls is newly displayed. It should be noted that the numerical pattern indicating the number of pending balls in the variable effect may be configured to be displayed at all times during execution of the variable effect.

In addition, in the variable elements of this "Super Reach", a "battle effect" is displayed in which a plurality of character patterns compete for victory or defeat, and furthermore, the character pattern on the player side speaks a line, and the reach middle text in which the line is expressed in letters. The character display Se2 is displayed in the "weak pattern" character pattern and the chance up pattern. Specifically, in the display area from which the cockpit display area Db has been erased, the character display Se2 during reach of "Kurae!" ” to “red”, which is the first chance-up pattern.

That is, in the display state of FIG. 64(c), "red" is selected by lottery for changing the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display is selected. Regarding the lottery for the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, as a result of selecting "at the time of occurrence of reach", character display Se2 during reach is also displayed in "red". That is, in the ready-to-win character display Se1 that has already been displayed in this variable effect, the change in the display color of the character display is reflected in the display color that reflects the lottery result, so the display color of this ready-to-win character display Se2 is displayed. is a display that follows the display color of the character display Se1 when reach occurs. In FIG. 64(c), since the "weak pattern" of "Kurae!" is displayed in the reachable character display Se2, the character pattern lottery for the reachable character display Se2 is a normal character pattern. This means that the "weak pattern" that is is selected.

In the display state of FIG. 64(c), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 additionally receives commands from the sound lamp control device 113 for the display states of FIGS. 64(a) and 64(b). do not have. Therefore, in the additional data table buffer 233c, an additional data table 232a2 equivalent to the storage state in FIGS. In this state, three character change additional data tables 232a2)) including the data table 232a2 are stored (set). Therefore, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the variable display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the display of the third pattern display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 64(c) is obtained.

In FIG. 64(d), from the state of FIG. 64(c), the character design on the player's side loses to the enemy character design in the variable element of "Super Reach", and " This shows a state in which the "missing display" appears and the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this state, the character pattern in the central small region Ds2 of the sub-display region Ds and the execution patterns and reserved patterns in the cockpit display region Db are visible again.

In addition, the character pattern in the central small region Ds2 of the sub-display region Ds is displayed in a disappointing manner due to the appearance of the "failure display", and the lines emitted from the character pattern are displayed in the left small region Ds1. A fixed form phrase character display Se3 expressed in characters is displayed in a normal display color. Specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the standard phrase character display Se3 of "I'm sorry...", which is the line uttered by the character pattern in the central small area Ds2, is displayed in the normal display color of "white." is displayed.

That is, in the display state of FIG. 64(d), the character displays Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 have won the lottery to change the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3, and "red" is selected. Regarding the lottery for the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is changed to "white" by selecting "at the time of occurrence of ready-to-win" and furthermore, by selecting the variable effect of "loss display". It means that it has been modified (changed).

When the player recognizes the display contents of FIG. 64(d), the player loses the character pattern in the "battle effect" of the "super reach", and the "jackpot display" is displayed in the "super reach". It is predicted that "failure display" will appear without appearing. In addition, since the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in "white", the end of the variable effect is recognized without feeling uncomfortable with regard to the prediction of the above-mentioned "failure display".

Here, in this variable effect, as described above, "red" is selected by winning the change lottery of the display color of each character display Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display Regarding the lottery for the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, "at the time of occurrence of reach" is selected. Therefore, since the display color of each character display Se1 to Se3 is collectively set as described above, the standard phrase character display Se3 should also be displayed in "red" according to the collective setting. Since the "missing display" appears, the standard phrase character display Se3 is configured to be displayed in the normal display color "white" instead of the chance-up pattern.

Therefore, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives at least the display red character command, the display change-at-occurrence command, and the display fixed phrase normal command from the sound lamp control device 113, and based on the display red character command, Then, the red character flag 233k is set to ON, the character color change flag 233n is set to ON based on the change command for display use, and the restriction flag 233p is set to ON based on the fixed phrase normal command for display. is set. Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c contains at least a character pattern additional data table 232a2 based on the contents of the character pattern memory 233j, a character color additional data table 232a2 based on the ON state of the red character flag 233k, and a character color when generated. A character timing additional data table 232a2 based on the on-state of the change flag 233n and a character correction additional data table 232a2 based on the on-state of the post-end limit flag 233p are stored (set).

As a result, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the variable display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. . Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the third pattern display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 64(d) is obtained.

Note that the red character command for display, the change-at-occurrence command for display, and the normal command for display fixed phrase are sent to the voice lamp control device 113 without delay together with the transmission of the variation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display at the start of the variation effect, respectively. is being sent from Therefore, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 has already grasped the display contents of each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 when the variable effect is started. Therefore, at this time, the character correction additional data table 232a2 based on the turning-on of the post-restriction flag 233p is changed to another character change additional data table 232a2 at the stage (at least in the state of FIG. 64(a)) at the start of this variable effect. are stored in the additional data table buffer 233c.

64(a) to 64(d), one display data table 232a1 relating to the "super reach" effect mode of losing is stored in the display data table buffer 233b at the start of the variable effect shown in FIGS. In addition, when the red character flag 233k is turned on, the character color additional data table 232a2 is turned on, when the character timing additional data table 232a2 is turned on when the character color change flag 233n is turned on, and when the edge limit flag 233p is turned on. The additional data table 232a2 for character correction based on the above is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Therefore, since the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 can grasp the variable performance to be displayed from now on and the performance content to be added to the variable performance at the start of the variable performance, the display control in the variable performance can be performed reliably. It becomes possible to go to

In this way, when the variable effect is determined by the "losing display", even if the chance up pattern (for example, "red") is executed in the character display Se1 during the reach occurrence or the character display Se2 during the reach, the " In the standardized phrase character display Se3 displayed after the variable element of "super reach", the chance up pattern is configured not to appear. That is, in the variable rendering of the "failure display", the display color of the standard phrase character display Se3 is configured to be displayed in the normal pattern "white". By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the performance contents, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and does not feel distrustful.

Further, in the sound lamp control device 113, commands are generated separately for the character patterns, display colors, and change timings of the character displays Se1 to Se4, respectively, and transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 responds to the commands. By adjusting the display control of each character display Se1 to Se4 based on the above, the number of commands can be reduced compared to the case where commands for all variations of each character display Se1 to Se4 are prepared in advance, and the storage capacity of the ROM 222 can be suppressed.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 10, even when the chance-up pattern of each character display Se1 to Se4 is selected, when the result of the variation effect is "no display", the standard phrase character display Se3 is displayed. is modified (re-changed) to the normal display color and displayed. In this case as well, after determining all the character patterns, display colors, change timings, and display color corrections for each of the character displays Se1 to Se4, if a command related to each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 is generated by command 1, In addition, the number of commands corresponding to all display mode variations including the content to be modified must be prepared in advance, and there is a risk that the number of commands will increase dramatically. Therefore, a command is generated separately for each of the character pattern, display color, change timing, and re-change content of the display color of each of the character displays Se1 to Se4. By adjusting the display control of Se4, the number of commands relating to each character display Se1 to Se4 can be reduced, and an increase in the storage capacity of the ROM 222 can be suppressed.

Further, only by determining whether or not to add one additional data table 232a2, it is possible to execute a variable performance that does not cause any discrepancies in the content of the performance, so that a comfortable game that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. can be provided.

In the first embodiment, based on the setting contents of the character pattern memory 233j, the red character flag 233k, the gold character flag 233m, the character color change flag 233n at occurrence, the character color change flag 233o during reach, and the limit flag 233p. Each character change additional data table 232a2 is configured to be selected (selected), and the flags 233j to 233p are configured to be referred to only when the character change additional data table 232a2 is selected. Alternatively, the character change additional data table 232a2 may be directly selected (selected) when a command is received without using a flag or the like. By selecting (selecting) the character change additional data table 232a2 without using the flags and the like 233j to 233p, the RAM 233 does not need to have capacity for the flags and the like 233j to 233k.

Next, referring to FIG. 65, in the variation effect of the jackpot including the variation element of "revariation", the display color of the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 (fixed phrase character display Se3) is displayed as it is in the chance up pattern. Describe the situation. FIG. 65 shows that in the variation effect of the big hit executed by the third symbol display device 81, the chance up pattern (for example, "red") of each character display Se1 to Se4 is won, and the variation element of "re-variation" is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a situation in which the display color of the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 displayed before is displayed remains "red";

Specifically, FIG. 65(a) is immediately after the appearance of the "ready-to-win display (variable element of "normal reach")" in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the sub-display area Ds FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which a ready-to-win character display Se1, in which words spoken from the character design of the central small area Ds2 are expressed in characters, is displayed in the left small area Ds1. In FIG. 65(b), the "normal reach" variable element is started from the state of FIG. 65(a), the sub display area Ds is erased, and the "normal reach" variable element is executed in the main display area Dm. It is the figure which showed the state. In FIG. 65(c), the variable element of "super reach" is started from the state of FIG. 65(b), the cockpit display area Db is erased, and the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. Furthermore, it is a diagram showing a state in which a reach-in-reach character display Se2 is displayed in which words spoken from the character pattern on the player side are expressed in characters. FIG. 65(d) suggests that the "distinctive effect" is executed in the variable element of "super reach" from the state of FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which contents are displayed; In FIG. 65(e), the variable element of "Super Reach" ends from the state of FIG. , and further, a fixed phrase character display Se3, which expresses a character pattern in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds, is displayed in the left small area Ds1. Fig. 3 shows. FIG. 65(f) is a diagram showing a state just before the "big win display" appears after the variable element of "re-variation" is executed from the state of FIG. 65(e). In addition, in FIGS. 65(a) to 65(f), the display mode of the third pattern is omitted.

First, in FIG. 65(a), in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol "7" is stopped and displayed, and in the right display area Dm3, the third symbol "7" is displayed. It shows a state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed, and furthermore, the third symbol is still unrecognizably "high-speed fluctuating" in the medium display area Dm2. Therefore, it is the state immediately after the so-called "ready-to-win display" with the "7" pattern appears. Further, in the cockpit display area Db, an executed symbol is displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, and reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively.

In addition, in the left small region Ds1 of the sub-display region Ds, the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence emitted from the character pattern of the central small region Ds2 is a "strong pattern" character pattern and a chance up pattern "red". is displayed. Specifically, in the left small region Ds1, the character display Se1 at the time of reaching occurrence of "I can do it!", which is the line uttered by the character pattern in the central small region Ds2, is "white" which is the normal display color. to "red" which is the first chance-up pattern.

65(a), the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 selects a "strong pattern" for the character pattern of each character display Se1, and the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are selected. This means that "red" was selected by winning the change lottery, and "at the time of occurrence of ready-to-win" was selected in the lottery regarding the change timing of the display colors of the character displays Se1 and Se2.

Therefore, in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, at least a command related to the "strong pattern" of the character display Se1 when the reach occurs from the audio lamp control device 113 (in FIG. Therefore, the strong strong pattern command for display), the red character command for display, and the command for change at occurrence of display are received, and at least the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is "strong pattern" in the character pattern memory 233j. , the red character flag 233k is set to ON based on the display red character command, and the character color change flag 233n at occurrence is set to ON based on the display use change command.

Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c contains at least a character pattern additional data table 232a2 based on the setting contents of the character pattern memory 233j, a character color additional data table 232a2 based on the ON of the red character flag 233k, and a character at occurrence time table 232a2. The additional data table 232a2 for character timing based on the ON state of the color change flag 233n is stored (set). As a result, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the variable display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. . Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the third pattern display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 65(a) is obtained.

FIG. 65(b) shows a state in which the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 65(a). In the variable elements of this "normal reach", in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the "7" symbol being stopped is enlarged and displayed, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is displayed. Variable performance (for example, low-speed scrolling from "5" pattern to "6" pattern) is performed so that it can be visually recognized at a low speed. In addition, the sub-display area Ds is erased as the main display area Dm expands due to the occurrence of the "normal reach" variable, and the sub-display area Ds becomes invisible. In the cockpit display area Db, as in the display state of FIG. 65(a), the executed symbols are displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. is displayed.

In the display state of FIG. 65(b), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 does not additionally receive commands from the sound lamp control device 113 with respect to the display state of FIG. 65(a). Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c stores (sets) an additional data table 232a2 (additional data table 232a2 for character change No. 3) equivalent to the storage state in FIG. 65(a). Therefore, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the variable display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the third pattern display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 65(b) is obtained.

FIG. 65(c) shows a state in which the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 65(b). In the "super reach" variable element, the "7" symbol displayed in the "normal reach" variable element is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁Also, during the execution of the variable element of "Super Reach", the cockpit display area Db is erased, and instead, the variable effect is reserved at the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and below the Reach formation symbol. The ready-to-win formation pattern of the numerical pattern (“4” in the first embodiment) indicating the number of balls is newly appearing and displayed.

In addition, in the variable elements of this "Super Reach", a "battle effect" is displayed in which a plurality of character patterns compete for victory or defeat, and furthermore, the character pattern on the player side speaks a line, and the reach middle text in which the line is expressed in letters. Character display Se2 is displayed in a chance-up pattern. Specifically, in the display area where the cockpit display area Db has been erased, the reach-in-reach character display Se2 of "stop!" The display color is changed from "white", which is the display color, to "red", which is the first chance-up pattern.

That is, in the display state of FIG. 65(c), the "strong pattern" is selected in the character pattern lottery for the in-reach character display Se2 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the character displays Se1 to Se3 are displayed. "Red" is selected by winning the color change lottery, and further, as a result of selecting "at the time of occurrence of reach" in the lottery of the change timing of the display color of each character display Se1, Se2, character display Se2 during reach is also displayed. Shown in "red". That is, in the display color of the character display Se1 at the time of occurrence of the ready-to-win that has already been displayed in this variable effect, the change in the display color of the character display is reflected in the display color that reflects the result of the lottery. The display color of is a display that follows the display color of character display Se1 at the time of occurrence of reach.

In the display state of FIG. 65(c), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 additionally receives commands from the sound lamp control device 113 for the display states of FIGS. 65(a) and 65(b). do not have. Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c stores (sets) an additional data table 232a2 (additional data table 232a2 for character change of 3) equivalent to the storage state in FIGS. 65(a) and 65(b). state. Therefore, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the variable display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the display of the third pattern display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 65(c) is obtained.

In FIG. 65(d), from the state of FIG. 65(c), the "dangerous effect" is executed in the "super reach", and in the "dangerous effect", the character design on the player side (the character design on the left side) is changed to the enemy side. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which a content suggesting that a "failure display" will appear, being defeated by the character pattern (right character pattern) of , is displayed.

In the display state of FIG. 65(d), the reach formation pattern of the "7" pattern that had been reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 has an "8" different from the reach formation pattern in the central portion thereof. ” The symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, a display suggesting a "mismatch display" with "787" is performed. In addition, the cockpit display area Db is continuously erased, and the number patterns indicating the number of pending balls of the variable effect are continuously displayed at the upper left of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 and below the ready-to-win formation pattern. there is

In the display state of FIG. 65(d), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives additional commands from the sound lamp control device 113 for the display states of FIGS. 65(a) to 65(c). do not have. Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c stores (sets) an additional data table 232a2 (3 character change additional data table 232a2) equivalent to the storage state in FIGS. 65(a) to 65(c). state. Therefore, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the variable display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the third pattern display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 65(d) is obtained.

In FIG. 65(e), from the state of FIG. 65(d), the character pattern on the player side loses to the enemy character pattern in the "border effect" of the variable element of "super reach", and a temporary , and the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are re-displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this state, the character pattern in the central small region Ds2 of the sub-display region Ds and the execution patterns and reserved patterns in the cockpit display region Db are visible again.

In addition, the character design in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is displayed in a disappointing manner due to the appearance of the provisional "failure display", and the character design is displayed in the left small area Ds1. A pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 in which words are represented by characters is displayed in a chance-up pattern. Specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 of "I'm sorry...", which is the line uttered by the character pattern in the central small area Ds2, is displayed in the normal display color of "white ” changes to “red”.

That is, in the display state of FIG. 65(e), "red" is selected by lottery for changing the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display is selected. As a result of selecting "at the time of occurrence of reach" in the lottery for the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 is also displayed in "red". In other words, in the display colors of the character display Se1 at the time of occurrence of the reach and the character display Se2 during the reach, which have already been displayed in this variable effect, the change in the display color of the character display is reflected in the display color that reflects the lottery result. The display color of the pseudo fixed form phrase character display Se4 follows the display color of the character display Se1 during reach occurrence and the character display Se2 during reach.

Here, in this variable effect, as described above, "red" is selected by winning the change lottery of the display color of each character display Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display Regarding the lottery for the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, "at the time of occurrence of reach" is selected. Therefore, since the display color of each character display Se1 to Se3 is collectively set as described above, the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 (fixed phrase character display Se3) is also displayed in "red" according to the plural changes. In addition, in the variable effect, the variable element of "re-variation" is performed from this provisional "loss display", and the "jackpot display" appears, so the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 (fixed phrase character Even if the display Se3) is displayed as the chance-up pattern as it is, the player does not feel distrust or the like, and there is no need to correct the display color of the chance-up pattern.

Therefore, in the display state of FIG. 65(e), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 additionally receives commands from the sound lamp control device 113 for the display states of FIGS. 65(a) to 65(d). not. Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c stores (sets) an additional data table 232a2 (additional data table 232a2 for character change of 3) equivalent to the storage state in FIGS. 65(a) to 65(d). state. Therefore, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the variable display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the third pattern display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 65(e) is obtained.

Further, when the player recognizes the display contents of FIG. 65(e), the character pattern on the player side is defeated in the "battle effect" of the variable element of "super reach" as shown in FIG. 65(d). By doing so, it is predicted that the "big win display" will not appear and the "losing display" will appear in the variable element of the "super reach". However, since the display color of the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 (which the player recognizes as the fixed phrase character display Se3) is displayed in "red", the player does not respond to the prediction of the above "failure display". I feel a sense of incongruity, and re-predict that some additional effect will be executed instead of fixing the variable effect as "failure display".

FIG. 65(f) shows a state in which the variable element of "re-variation" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 65(e). In the variable element of this "re-variation", the main display area Dm is enlarged and displayed, the sub-display area Ds is erased, and "787" is stopped and displayed in each of the display areas Dm1 to Dm3. starts fluctuating again, and finally stops at "777", which is the "jackpot display". The player is surprised at the occurrence of the variable element of "re-variation", and as guessed at the stage of FIG. It is possible to obtain a sense of happiness and a sense of satisfaction from the appearance of the "jackpot display".

In this way, when the variable effect is determined by the "big hit display", when the chance up pattern (for example, "red") is executed in the character display Se1 during reach occurrence or the character display Se2 during reach, "super The pseudo fixed form phrase character display Se4 and the fixed form phrase character display Se3 displayed after the variable element of "reach" are also configured to display following the chance up pattern. That is, in the variation effect of the "big win display", the display color of the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 and the fixed phrase character display Se3 is configured to be displayed in "red". By configuring in this way, there is no need to prepare additional commands in the variable performance of the big win, and since there is no discrepancy in the content of the performance in the first place, the player does not have excessive expectations and the player can enjoy the game. It is possible to provide a comfortable game that does not cause distrust.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variation effect is determined by the "loss display", the chance up pattern ( For example, even if "red") is executed, the chance-up pattern is not displayed in the formulaic phrase character display Se3 displayed after the "end effect" of the variable element of "super reach". That is, in the variable rendering of the "failure display", the display color of the standard phrase character display Se3 is configured to be displayed in the normal pattern of "white". By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the performance, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and does not feel distrustful.

Conventionally, in the case of a configuration in which character displays appear at a plurality of locations in a variable effect, if a chance-up pattern is drawn for each appearance location, lottery processing for the appearance locations is required. Therefore, the control may become complicated and the processing load may increase. In addition, if the character display of the chance-up pattern is made to appear at the appearing portion that is executed first in the variable effect, and then the character display of the normal pattern that is not the chance-up pattern is made to appear at the portion that is executed later. , the player, who has become an expression in which the degree of expectation for a big win has fallen (hereinafter referred to as "revolutionary expression") and has been excited by the emergence of a chance-up pattern, sees the expression of relegation. There is a risk that you will lose interest.

Therefore, the lottery for the chance-up pattern is performed collectively in the character display of the variable effect, and if the chance-up pattern appears even once, it is configured to follow the chance-up pattern and appear in the subsequent character display. By doing so, there is no need to perform the lottery process for each appearance location, and the processing load can be reduced. Further, when a chance-up pattern is set, by following the chance-up pattern in the subsequent character display, the phenomenon of the occurrence of a downgraded expression in the character display can be eliminated in advance, and the player can enjoy the game. It is possible to prevent disappointment. In particular, as the number of character display locations where the chance-up pattern can be executed in the variable effect increases (for example, five locations or more, etc.), the batch lottery works more favorably, and the control load can be significantly reduced. It becomes possible.

However, if a plurality of chance-up patterns of character displays Se1 to Se4 are to be changed, for example, in a state in which the "discretion effect" is executed in the variable effect and the "loss display" appears, the standard phrase character display Se3 is changed to the chance-up pattern. It may be displayed in an up pattern (for example, "red"). In such a case, the player does not decide the variable effect as "loss display" as it is because the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in the chance up pattern, and the effect of "revariation" is executed from now on. I predict that the "loss display" will change to the "jackpot display". However, contrary to the prediction, the variable performance is fixed as "failure display". There is a possibility that the distrust of the installed game hall will increase, and the game will be interrupted.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variable effect is determined by the "loss display", the chance up pattern (for example, "red") is displayed in the character display Se1 when the reach occurs or the character display Se2 during the reach. Even if it has been executed, the chance-up pattern is configured not to appear in the fixed form phrase character display Se3 displayed after the "end effect" of the variable element of "super reach". That is, in the variable rendering of the "failure display", the display color of the standard phrase character display Se3 is configured to be displayed in the normal pattern "white". By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the performance contents, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and does not feel distrustful.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the variable element of "re-variation" is executed in the variation effect, and "big win display" is displayed without being determined by "loss display", When the variable element of "variation" is included, the variable performance becomes a big hit, so even if the chance up pattern is displayed on the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 (fixed phrase character display Se3), the player is offended. never. Therefore, when a chance-up pattern is selected, the chance-up pattern is displayed in the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 (fixed phrase character display Se3).

On the other hand, if the variable effect does not include the "re-variation" variable element, when the chance-up pattern is selected, the variable effect does not include the "re-variation" variable element, but the "jackpot display" Even if it is determined whether or not it will be a "big win display", even if a chance up pattern is displayed on the standard phrase character display Se3, the player will not be offended. Therefore, when a chance-up pattern is selected, the chance-up pattern is displayed in the standard phrase character display Se3.

However, if the variation effect does not include the variable element of "re-variation" and does not include the "big win display", if the chance-up pattern is displayed in the standard phrase character display Se3, the player will not be able to display the chance-up pattern. By recognizing it, they have excessive expectations that "big win display" may occur. Therefore, in the variable effect, if the variable element of "re-variation" is not included and the "jackpot display" is not included, the standard phrase character display Se3 is displayed in a normal display color ("white") that is not a chance up pattern. do. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the performance contents, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and does not feel distrustful.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, when the post-event restriction flag 233p is set to ON, adds character correction additional data corresponding to the ON of the post-event restriction flag 233p. The table 232a2 is determined, and the character correction additional data table 232a2 is set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c (see S2203 in FIG. 55). Then, as described above, the MPU 231 performs the following operations based on the display data table 232a1 set (stored) in the display data table buffer 233b and the character change additional data table 232a2 set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c. to create a drawing list.

As a result, by setting the additional data table 232a2 for character correction, the display color of the fixed form phrase character display Se3 displayed after the "end effect" of the "reach display" is executed is changed to that of the character display described above. Change of display color Even the chance-up pattern set by the additional data table 232a2 for character color based on winning the lottery is displayed in the normal display color "white" by the additional data table 232a2 for character correction. be done. Therefore, only by creating the additional data table for character correction 232a2 based on the setting contents of the limit flag 233p and storing the additional data table for character correction 232a2 in the additional data table buffer 233c, the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence can be achieved. Alternatively, even when the in-reach character display Se2 is changed to the chance up pattern and displayed, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 can be corrected (rechanged) to the normal display color "white". Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when starting the variable effect, the effect mode (variable element) of the variable effect is determined, and based on the determination, the standard phrase character display Se3 (pseudo standard phrase character display) is displayed. It is determined whether the display color of Se4) is to be displayed as it is in the chance-up pattern, or whether to be modified (rechanged) to the normal display color and displayed. Sends a display fixed phrase normal command. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the performance, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations, and in which the player does not feel a sense of distrust. At the start of the variable performance, the content of the character display to appear in the variable performance can be notified to the display control device 114, and the display control in the variable performance can be performed reliably.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 determines in detail the display mode of each character display Se1 to Se4 that is displayed when "reach display" is selected in the variable effect. Then, by transmitting a command to the display control device 114 based on the content of the determination, the display control of each character display Se1 to Se4 is executed. Further, regarding the display mode of each character display Se1 to Se4, the character pattern of each character display Se1 and Se2, the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4, and the change timing of the display color of each character display Se1 and Se2, It is configured to determine by separate lotteries, and to generate and set commands at any time based on each determination.

Hypothetically, after all the character patterns, display colors, and change timings of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are determined, a command relating to the character patterns, display colors, and change timings of the character displays Se1 to Se4 is generated with one command. , the number of commands must be prepared in advance for all variations of character patterns, display colors, and change timings, and the number of commands may become enormous. Therefore, commands are generated separately for the character patterns, display colors, and change timings of the character displays Se1 to Se4, and the display control device 114 adjusts the display control of the character displays Se1 to Se4 based on the commands. , the number of commands relating to each character display Se1 to Se4 can be reduced, and an increase in the storage capacity of the ROM 222 can be suppressed.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 10, even when the chance-up pattern of each character display Se1 to Se4 is selected, when the result of the variation effect is "no display", the standard phrase character display Se3 is displayed. is modified (re-changed) to the normal display color and displayed. In this case as well, after determining all the character patterns, display colors, change timings, and display color corrections for each of the character displays Se1 to Se4, if a command related to each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 is generated by command 1, In addition, the number of commands corresponding to all display mode variations including the content to be modified must be prepared in advance, and there is a risk that the number of commands will increase dramatically. Accordingly, commands are generated separately for each of the character patterns, display colors, change timings, and display color corrections of the character displays Se1 to Se4, and the display controller 114 side based on the commands generates the respective character displays Se1 to Se4. By adjusting the display control of , it is possible to reduce the number of commands relating to each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 and suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the ROM 222 .

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the cockpit display area Db is erased during the execution of the variable element of "super reach" in which the in-reach character display Se2 is displayed, and the cockpit display area Db is erased. By configuring to display the in-reach character display Se2 in the area, the display area of the deleted cockpit display area Db is effectively used, and the display contents of the in-reach character display Se2 are not overlapped with other displayed objects. can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the display content of the in-reach character display Se2 easy for the player to see, and to allow the player to accurately recognize the effect content of the variable effect.

Furthermore, by making a determination using the re-variation information stored in the re-variation information storage area 223i8 (223h8) at the stage of receiving the pending ball number command, the variable element of "re-variation" immediately changes in the variation effect. It can be determined whether or not it is executed. In addition, the presence or absence of the variable element of "re-variation" is stored in the re-variation information storage area 223h8 (223i8) when the command for the number of retained balls is received, and thereafter, the re-variation stored in the re-variation information storage area 223h8 (223i8) Based on the information, it is possible to determine the display mode of each of the character displays Se1 to Se4, and to determine whether or not to execute the "holding change notice" at the timing of "after holding erasure", and to perform a plurality of effects. The re-variation information can be effectively utilized in execution determination.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 72. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the variation effect includes the variable element of "re-variation", or when the variable element of "re-variation" is not included but becomes "jackpot display", each character display When the chance-up pattern of the display colors Se1 to Se4 is selected, the chance-up pattern is displayed as it is in the fixed phrase character display Se3 and the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4. Also, in the variable effect, if the variable element of "re-variation" is not included, or if it does not become "big win display", that is, if the variable effect becomes "losing display", each character display Se1 to Se3 Even if the chance-up pattern of the display color is selected, the display color of the standard phrase character display Se3 is configured to be displayed in the normal display color.

Here, in playing the game, the player is playing the game aiming for a big win state in which a large number of balls can be obtained. Players are playing while expecting first of all that the given big win will be awarded. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has, as types of jackpots, "15R probability variable jackpot" and "2R probability variable jackpot" in which "probability fluctuation state" is given after the jackpot state, and "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot state. is not given, but "15R normal jackpot" is given, but "15R normal jackpot" is given, "15R probability variable jackpot" and " The player is playing the game expecting to receive a "2R probability variable jackpot".

This means that if the "probability fluctuation state" is given after the big win state, the winning probability of the big win becomes higher than the "normal game state" and the next big win state occurs until the next big win state occurs. The state in which the ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 (equivalent to the open extension of the "shortened time state") continues. If the next big win is also in the "probability fluctuation state", the game state is changed to the game state again. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the big win state will be chained, and the game value obtained by the chained big win is large. On the other hand, when the "time shortening state" is provided after the jackpot state, the "time shortening state" is provided a predetermined number of times, thereby making it easier for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. , the probability of occurrence of the jackpot itself has not been changed. Therefore, if the big win is not won during the "time shortening state" which is performed a predetermined number of times, the game state returns to the "normal game state", so the possibility of being continuously given the big win state is low and the profit is obtained. This is because the gaming value to be obtained is small. In other words, the player is playing the game expecting a big win with a "probability fluctuation state" rather than a big win with a large number of temporary rounds. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting the types of jackpot states to be obtained in the order of “15R probability variable jackpot”>“2R probability variable jackpot”>“15R normal jackpot”.

In such a configuration, for example, when the variable effect is "15R normal jackpot" and the chance up pattern is displayed in the fixed phrase character display Se3, the player recognizes the chance up pattern of the fixed phrase character display Se3. Then, based on the appearance of the chance-up pattern, a ``promotion'' production is generated in which the ``15R normal jackpot'' during appearance is promoted to a ``15R probability variable jackpot'' or the like, and this variable production is ``15R normal jackpot''. It is expected that the game value that can be obtained will increase by developing into "15R probability variable jackpot" and "2R probability variable jackpot" without being fixed by the jackpot pattern of ". However, contrary to the expectations, the "promotion" effect is not executed and the variable effect is fixed as "15R normal jackpot", so the player feels distrust of the pachinko machine 10 due to the discrepancy in the effect contents. At the same time, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game parlor, and the distrust of the game hall increases, so that the game may be interrupted immediately after the "time shortening state" ends.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, even if the "big win display" occurs in the variable effect, the "big win display" is the "15R normal jackpot" and the "promotion" effect is also performed. When there is none, the chance-up pattern is not displayed in the standard phrase character display Se3. That is, in the variable effect, it is determined whether or not the "promotion" effect is executed, and if it is determined that the "promotion" effect is not performed as a result of the determination, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is changed to the normal pattern. Configure it to display in a certain "white" color. By constructing in this way, in the variation effect in which the ``15R normal jackpot'' is awarded without the ``promotion'' effect, the standard phrase character display Se3 is displayed in the normal pattern ``white'', and the player is overwhelmed. It is possible to provide a comfortable game that does not cause unreasonable expectations and does not offend the player when the jackpot is awarded.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67, the details of the big winning variation pattern table 202e1 for the probability variable big winning in the second embodiment will be described. 66 and 67 are diagrams schematically showing an example of a big winning variation pattern table 202e1 for a probability variable big winning stored in the ROM 202. FIG. The big winning variation pattern table 202e1 for the probability variable big winning is the variation pattern table 202e that is selected without exception when winning the "15R probability variable big winning". Incidentally, although the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1 for the normal jackpot selected when winning the "15R normal jackpot" is separately provided, the description thereof is omitted here.

The big hit variation pattern table 202e1 of the second embodiment is divided into groups (groups) based on the selected effect mode, as in the first embodiment, and when the "normal reach" effect mode is determined as the effect mode. "E5: Normal Reach" referred to, "E6: Super Reach" referenced when the "Super Reach" production mode is determined, and "Special Reach" referenced when the production mode is determined. and "E8: Special Variation" which is referred to when the "Special Variation" effect mode is determined. A possible value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

In the big winning variation pattern table 202e1 for the probability variable big winning of the second embodiment, "E5: normal reach" includes "only normal reach", "pseudo gusset + normal reach", and "pseudo 1 + In addition to the six variation patterns of "Normal Reach", "Normal Reach + Revariation", "Pseudo Gase + Normal Reach + Revariation", and "Pseudo Reach 1 + Normal Reach + Revariation", each of the above variation patterns "Promotion A total of 12 variation patterns are prepared to be selectable, and each variation pattern is associated with a possible value of the variation type counter CS1.

Here, the "promotion" production is, as described above, when the "15R probability variable jackpot" is fixedly displayed in the variable production, the "15R normal jackpot" is followed by the "15R normal jackpot" of the variable production. is temporarily displayed, and thereafter, the jackpot pattern corresponding to the ``15R normal jackpot'' is changed to the pattern corresponding to the ``15R probability variable jackpot''. The pachinko machine 10 is constructed so that when the ``promotion'' performance is performed, the ``15R normal jackpot'' jackpot pattern is always changed to the ``15R probability variable jackpot'' jackpot pattern. In addition, the "promotion" effect is an effect that can be executed only when the "15R probability variable jackpot" is won. Alternatively, it is set so as not to be executed in a variable performance in which "2R probability variable jackpot" appears. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the variable element of the "promotion" effect is configured to be performed for 5 seconds, and in the effect for 5 seconds, the symbol corresponding to the "15R normal jackpot" is changed to the "15R probability variable jackpot" " will be changed to the corresponding pattern.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, the variation patterns added to "E5: normal reach" are "normal reach + promotion" with an overall variation time of 20 seconds, and "pseudo-gase + normal reach" with an overall variation time of 30 seconds. + Promotion", "Pseudo-Ren 1 + Normal Reach + Promotion" with an overall change time of 40 seconds, "Normal Reach + Re-Change + Promotion" with an overall change time of 30 seconds, and " ``Pseudo False + Normal Reach + Re-change + Promotion'' and ``Pseudo Reach 1 + Normal Reach + Re-change + Promotion'' with a total change time of 50 seconds are provided.

In the example shown in FIG. 66, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 4" for "normal reach only (01H)", "pseudo gusset + normal reach ( 02H)” for “5-9”, “10-29” for “pseudo ream 1 + normal reach (03H)”, “30-39” for “normal reach + re-fluctuation (04H)”, “pseudo "40 to 49" against "Gase + Normal Reach + Revariation (05H)", "50 to 99" against "Pseudo Ren 1 + Normal Reach + Revariation (06H)", "Normal Reach + Promotion (07H)" "100 to 104", "105 to 109" for "Pseudo Gase + Normal Reach + Promotion (08H)", "110 to 129" for "Pseudo Reach 1 + Normal Reach + Promotion (09H)", "Normal Reach + "130-139" for re-change + promotion (0AH)", "140-149" for "pseudo-gase + normal reach + re-change + promotion (0BH)", "pseudo-ren 1 + normal reach + re-change + promotion (0CH)” is “150 to 199”.

That is, in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of the big hit, the variation pattern of "normal reach only (01H)" is 2.5%, the variation pattern of "pseudo gasse + normal reach (02H)" is 2.5%, and the "pseudo consecutive 1+ 10% of the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach (03H)", 5% of the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach + re-fluctuation (04H)", 5% of the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-gase + normal reach + re-fluctuation (05H)", "pseudo continuous 1 + normal reach + re-change (06H)” is 25%, “normal reach + promotion (07H)” is 2.5%, and “pseudo-gase + normal reach + promotion (08H)” is 2.5%. 5%, 10% of the variation pattern of "pseudo-ren 1 + normal reach + promotion (09H)", 5% of the variation pattern of "normal reach + re-change + promotion (0AH)", "pseudo-gase + normal reach + re-change + promotion ( 0BH)” is set to be selected at a rate of 5%, and the variation pattern of “pseudo-ren 1 + normal reach + re-change + promotion (0CH)” is selected at a rate of 25%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" effect mode selected at the time of the big hit, it is easy to select the variation pattern including the "re-variation" variable element (70% of the total), especially "pseudo ream 1 + normal reach + re-variation ( 06H)” or “pseudo-ream 1 + normal reach + re-variation + promotion (0CH)” are more likely to be selected (2 for 50% of the total). However, by configuring it so that ``normal reach only (01H)'' and ``pseudo fake + normal reach (02H)'' that do not include the variable element of ``re-fluctuation'' are also selected, a game that can expect a big hit from any variation pattern. can provide sexuality.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the "normal reach" effect mode when winning the "15R probability variable jackpot", the variation pattern including the "promotion" effect is selected with a probability of 50%. With this configuration, in the variable performance, the ``15R normal jackpot'', which is the ``jackpot display'', is temporarily stopped, the first interest is imparted by the occurrence of the jackpot game, and further, the ``promotion'' is provided. The ``15R regular jackpot'' becomes the ``15R probability variable jackpot'' by performing a performance, so that the second interest can be imparted, and the game with unexpectedness can be played to increase the interest in the game.

In the big winning variation pattern table 202e1 for the probability variable big winning of the second embodiment, "E6: Super reach" includes "only super reach", "pseudo fake + super reach", and " Pseudo-ren 1 + super reach", "Pseudo-ren 2 + super reach", "Super reach + re-change", "Pseudo-gase + super reach + re-change", "Pseudo-ren 1 + super reach + re-change", In addition to the 8 variation patterns of “pseudo-ren 2 + super reach + re-variation”, 8 variation patterns with “promotion” effects added to each of the above variation patterns are added, and a total of 16 variation patterns are available for selection. , and each variation pattern is associated with a possible value of the variation type counter CS1.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, the variation patterns added to "E6: Super Reach" are "Super Reach + Promotion" with an overall variation time of 30 seconds and "Pseudo-gase" with an overall variation time of 40 seconds. + Super Reach + Promotion", "Pseudo-Ren 1 + Super Reach + Promotion" with an overall variation time of 50 seconds, "Pseudo-Ren 2 + Super Reach + Promotion" with an overall variation time of 60 seconds, and the overall variation time is 40 seconds of "super reach + re-change + promotion", 50 seconds of total change time of "pseudo-gase + super reach + re-change + promotion", and 60 seconds of total change time of "pseudo-ren 1 + super Reach + re-change + promotion” and “pseudo-ren 2 + super reach + re-change + promotion” with a total change time of 70 seconds are provided.

In the example shown in FIG. 66, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E6: Super reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 4" for "Super reach only (01H)", "Pseudo fake + "5 to 9" for "super reach (02H)", "10 to 29" for "pseudo-ren 1 + super reach (03H)", "30- for "pseudo-ren 2 + super reach (04H)" 49”, “50 to 59” for “Super Reach + Revariation (05H)”, “60 to 69” for “Pseudo Gase + Super Reach + Revariation (06H)”, “Pseudo Reach 1 + Super Reach + re-variation (07H)” against “70-84”, “pseudo-ren 2 + super reach + re-variation (08H)” against “85-99”, “super reach + promotion (09H)” "100-104", "105-109" against "pseudo-gase + super reach + promotion (0AH)", "110-129" against "pseudo-ren 1 + super reach + promotion (0BH)", "pseudo "130-149" for consecutive 2 + super reach + promotion (0CH)", "150-159" for "super reach + re-change + promotion (0DH)", "pseudo gase + super reach + re-change + "160-169" for promotion (0EH)", "170-184" for "pseudo-ren 1 + super reach + re-change + promotion (0FH)", "pseudo-ren 2 + super reach + re-change + promotion ( 10H)” is “185 to 199”.

That is, in the "super reach" production mode at the time of the big hit, the variation pattern of "super reach only (01H)" is 2.5%, the variation pattern of "pseudo fake + super reach (02H)" is 2.5%, and the " The variation pattern of “pseudo-ren 1 + super reach (03H)” is 10%, the variation pattern of “pseudo-ren 2 + super reach (04H)” is 10%, and the variation pattern of “super reach + re-fluctuation (05H)” is 5%, The variation pattern of “Pseudo Gase + Super Reach + Revariation (06H)” is 5%, The variation pattern of “Pseudo Reach 1 + Super Reach + Revariation (07H)” is 7.5%, “Pseudo Reach 2 + Super Reach + Revariation The fluctuation pattern of “change (08H)” is 7.5%, the fluctuation pattern of “super reach + promotion (09H)” is 2.5%, and the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-gase + super reach + promotion (0AH)” is 2.5%. 5%, 10% for the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ren 1 + super reach + promotion (0BH)", 10% for the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ren 2 + super reach + promotion (0CH)", 10% for "super reach + re-change + promotion ( 0DH)” fluctuation pattern is 5%, the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-gase + super reach + re-change + promotion (0EH)” is 5%, and the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuation 1 + super reach + re-change + promotion (0FH)” is set to be selected at a rate of 7.5%, and the variation pattern of "pseudo-ream 2 + super reach + re-variation + promotion (10H)" is 7.5%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" production mode selected at the time of the big hit, the variation pattern including the "re-variation" variation element and the variation pattern not including the "re-variation" variation element are equally selected (50% of each other). It has become so. In addition, variation patterns including the variation elements of “pseudo-run 2” are more likely to be selected (35%). However, by configuring it so that "super reach only (01H)" and "pseudo gase + super reach (02H)" that do not include the variable elements of "re-variation" and the variable elements of "pseudo-ren 2" are also selected , can provide a game property in which a big win can be expected from any variation pattern.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the "super reach" effect mode when winning the "15R probability variable jackpot", the variation pattern including the "promotion" effect is selected with a probability of 50%. With this configuration, in the variable performance, the ``15R normal jackpot'', which is the ``jackpot display'', is temporarily stopped, the first interest is imparted by the occurrence of the jackpot game, and further, the ``promotion'' is provided. The ``15R regular jackpot'' becomes the ``15R probability variable jackpot'' by performing a performance, so that the second interest can be imparted, and the game with unexpectedness can be played to increase the interest in the game.

In the big winning variation pattern table 202e1 for the probability variable big winning of the second embodiment, "E7: special reach" includes "only special reach", "pseudo fake + special reach", and " Pseudo-Ren 1 + Special Reach", "Pseudo-Ren 2 + Special Reach", "Special Reach + Re-Change", "Pseudo-Gase + Special Reach + Re-Change", "Pseudo-Ren 1 + Special Reach + Re-Change", In addition to the 8 variation patterns of “pseudo-ren 2 + special reach + re-variation”, 8 variation patterns with “promotion” effects added to each of the above variation patterns are added, and a total of 16 variation patterns are available for selection. , and each variation pattern is associated with a possible value of the variation type counter CS1.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, the variation patterns added to "E7: Special Reach" include "Special Reach + Promotion" with an overall variation time of 40 seconds and "Pseudo-Gase" with an overall variation time of 50 seconds. + Special Reach + Promotion", "Pseudo-Ren 1 + Special Reach + Promotion" with an overall variation time of 60 seconds, "Pseudo-Ren 2 + Special Reach + Promotion" with an overall variation time of 70 seconds, and the overall variation time is 50 seconds "special reach + re-change + promotion", total change time 60 seconds "pseudo-gase + special reach + re-change + promotion", total change time 70 seconds "pseudo-ren 1 + special Reach + re-change + promotion” and “pseudo-ren 2 + special reach + re-change + promotion” with a total change time of 80 seconds are provided.

In the example shown in FIG. 67, the correspondence between the variation pattern in "E7: Special reach" and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 4" for "Special reach only (01H)", "Pseudo fake + "5-9" for "Special Reach (02H)", "10-19" for "Pseudo-Ren 1 + Special Reach (03H)", "20-" for "Pseudo-Ren 2 + Special Reach (04H)" 49”, “50 to 54” against “Special Reach + Revariation (05H)”, “55 to 59” against “Pseudo Gase + Special Reach + Revariation (06H)”, “Pseudo Reach 1 + Special Reach” + Re-change (07H) "60-69", "Pseudo Ren 2 + Special Reach + Re-change (08H)" "70-99", "Special Reach + Promotion (09H)" "100-104", "105-109" against "pseudo-gase + special reach + promotion (0AH)", "110-119" against "pseudo-ren 1 + special reach + promotion (0BH)", "pseudo "120 to 149" for consecutive 2 + special reach + promotion (0CH), "150 to 154" for "special reach + re-change + promotion (0DH)", "pseudo gase + special reach + re-change + "155-159" for promotion (0EH)", "160-169" for "Pseudo-ren 1 + special reach + re-change + promotion (0FH)", "Pseudo-ren 2 + special reach + re-change + promotion ( 10H)” is “170 to 199”.

That is, in the "special reach" production mode at the time of the big hit, the variation pattern of "only special reach (01H)" is 2.5%, the variation pattern of "pseudo gase + special reach (02H)" is 2.5%, and the variation pattern of " The variation pattern of “Pseudo Ren 1 + Special Reach (03H)” is 5%, the variation pattern of “Pseudo Ren 2 + Special Reach (04H)” is 15%, and the variation pattern of “Special Reach + Re-change (05H)” is 2.5. %, the variation pattern of “pseudo-gase + special reach + re-fluctuation (06H)” is 2.5%, the variation pattern of “pseudo-ren 1 + special reach + re-fluctuation (07H)” is 5%, “pseudo-ren 2 + special reach + Re-change (08H)” is 15%, “Special Reach + Promotion (09H)” is 2.5%, and “Pseudo-Gase + Special Reach + Promotion (0AH)” is 2.5%. 5%, "Pseudo-ren 1 + special reach + promotion (0BH)" variation pattern is 5%, "Pseudo-ren 2 + special reach + promotion (0CH)" variation pattern is 15%, "Special reach + re-change + promotion ( 0DH)” is 2.5%, the variation pattern of “Pseudo Gase + Special Reach + Re-change + Promotion (0EH)” is 2.5%, “Pseudo-Relation 1 + Special Reach + Re-change + Promotion (0FH) ” is set to be selected at a rate of 5%, and the variation pattern of “pseudo continuation 2 + special reach + re-change + promotion (10H)” is selected at a rate of 15%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" production mode selected at the time of the big hit, the variation pattern including the "re-variation" variation element and the variation pattern not including the "re-variation" variation element are equally selected (50% of each other). It has become so. In addition, the variation pattern including the variation element of "pseudo-run 2" is likely to be selected (60%). However, by configuring it so that "special reach only (01H)" and "pseudo gase + special reach (02H)" that do not include the variable elements of "revariation" and the variable elements of "pseudo-ren 2" are also selected , can provide a game property in which a big win can be expected from any variation pattern.

In addition, in the second embodiment, in the "special reach" effect mode when winning the "15R probability variable jackpot", the variation pattern including the "promotion" effect is selected with a probability of 50%. By configuring in this way, in the variable performance, the ``15R normal jackpot'', which is the ``jackpot display'', is temporarily stopped, the first interest is imparted by the occurrence of the jackpot game, and further, the ``promotion'' is provided. A second interest can be imparted by performing a performance to change the ``15R normal jackpot'' to a ``15R probability variable jackpot'', and the game with unexpectedness can be played to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the big winning variation pattern table 202e1 for the probability variable big winning of the second embodiment, "E8: special variation" is the same as in the first embodiment, so the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the appearance timing of each character display Se1 to Se3 in the variable effect including the "promotion" effect in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 68 is a time chart showing an example of variation effects of variation patterns including the "promotion" effect in the second embodiment, and FIG. 68(b) shows the appearance timing of each character display Se1 to Se3 in "Super Reach + Promotion" in the second embodiment. It is a time chart. In addition, in each time chart, the upper part of the time chart shows the variable elements in the variable production and events such as the stoppage of the pattern with the number of seconds, and the lower part of the time chart shows each character that appears in the variable production. The names of Se1 to Se3 are described according to each appearance timing.

As shown in FIG. 68, the appearance timing of character display, ``at the time of occurrence of reach'', is similar to the first embodiment, after the variable element of ``low-speed fluctuation'' ends, and ``normal reach'' occurs. ” is the timing at which the variable element of “reach” occurs, and the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence corresponds to the character display of “at the time of occurrence of reach”. In addition, the timing of appearance of the character display, ``during reach'', is the same as in the first embodiment, during execution of the variable element of ``super reach'' (or the variable element of ``special reach'') in the variable effect. This is the timing immediately before the "demonstration" showing the contents suggesting "big win display" or "losing display", and the "reaching" character display corresponds to the "reaching" character display Se2.

In addition, the "symbol stop", which is the appearance timing of the character display, is determined and displayed in the main display area Dm after one of the "ready-to-reach display" (or the variable element of "re-fluctuation") is executed in the variable effect. It is the timing at which the "big win display" or "losing display" is displayed. In addition, in the case of the "jackpot display" including the "promotion" effect, the "pattern temporary stop" is after the provisional "jackpot display" (that is, the display result of the "15R normal jackpot") appears. It is the timing before the “promotion” effect is executed. That is, the character display of "symbol stop" is when the variable element of "reach display" or "re-variation" ends, or when the "promotion" effect is executed, the "promotion" effect is before the execution of , and is displayed as if the fixed phrase character display Se3 was emitted from the character pattern displayed in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds at each time.

In the second embodiment, the fixed phrase character display Se3 displayed at the time of "symbol stop" or "symbol temporary stop" except after the effect of "promotion" is the display of the third symbol fixedly displayed in the main display area Dm. It is configured to be displayed correspondingly to the results. Specifically, two types of character displays are prepared: "I did it!" corresponding to the "big win display" and "I'm sorry..." corresponding to the "losing display" (Fig. 68 ( a) see). In addition, even when the provisional "jackpot display" displayed before the "promotion" effect is displayed, the fixed form phrase character display Se3 is displayed as "Yaah!" corresponding to this provisional "jackpot display". Now!” is displayed (see FIG. 68(b)).

In such a configuration, for example, when the variation pattern of "super reach only" in FIG. When the chance-up pattern is displayed, when the player recognizes the chance-up pattern of the fixed phrase character display Se3, based on the appearance of the chance-up pattern, as shown in FIG. A "promotion" effect occurs in which the "15R normal jackpot" is promoted to a "15R variable jackpot", etc., and this variable effect is not confirmed by the "15R normal jackpot" jackpot pattern, and the "15R variable jackpot" or I expect that it will develop into a “2R variable jackpot” and increase the gaming value that can be obtained. However, contrary to the expectations, the "promotion" effect is not executed and the variable effect is fixed as "15R normal jackpot", so the player feels distrust of the pachinko machine 10 due to the discrepancy in the effect contents. At the same time, the game hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed is also distrustful, and the game is immediately stopped after the "time shortened state" given by this "15R normal big win". It may be interrupted.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, even if the "jackpot display" occurs in the variable effect, the "jackpot display" is the "15R normal jackpot", as shown in FIG. 68(a). When the "promotion" effect is not performed, the chance up pattern is not displayed in the standard phrase character display Se3. That is, in the variable effect, it is determined whether or not the "promotion" effect is executed, and if it is determined that the "promotion" effect is not performed as a result of the determination, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is changed to the normal pattern. Configure it to display in a certain "white" color. By constructing in this way, in the variable performance in which the ``15R normal jackpot'' is given without the ``promotion'' performance, the standard phrase character display Se3 is displayed in the normal pattern ``white'', and the player is overwhelmed. It is possible to provide a comfortable game that does not cause unreasonable expectations and does not offend the player when a big win is awarded.

Next, the hold information storage area 223h and the execution information storage area 223i provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the pending information storage area 223h and execution information storage area 223i in the second embodiment. The configuration of the pending information storage area 223h and the execution information storage area 223i in the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the pending information storage area 223h and the execution information storage area 223i each have a "promotion" effect. The point is that there are provided promotion information storage areas 223h9 and 223i9 for storing promotion effect information indicating execution. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, the promotion information storage areas 223h9 and 223i9 are areas for storing promotion effect information indicating whether or not the "promotion" effect is executed in the variable effect. In this promotion information storage area 223h9, based on each value stored in each counter storage area 223h1 to 223h4 of the suspension information storage X area, prefetching processing (suspension display setting processing (see FIG. 70)) is performed. Promotion effect information generated based on the result of processing is stored. In the execution information storage area 223i, each counter stored in each of the storage areas 223h1 to 223h9 of the first storage area for suspension information when shift processing is executed in the suspension information storage area 223h and the execution information storage area 223i. The values of C1 to C3 and CS1 and various information (data) are moved to and stored in storage areas 223i1 to 223i9 of the execution information storage area 223i.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, at the start of the variable performance, the promotion performance information stored in the promotion information storage area 223i9 of the execution information storage area 223i is discriminated, and the promotion performance stored in the promotion information storage area 223i9. Based on the information, it is configured to control the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3.

Next, the pending display setting process (S1209) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing a hold display setting process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment.

In the second embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 performs this pending display setting process when receiving the pending ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 . In this pending display setting process, as in the first embodiment, counters C1 to C3, The values of CS1 are respectively stored (see S1301 and S1302 in FIG. 70). Further, as in the first embodiment, the audio ramp control device 113 determines the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS stored in the storage areas 223h1 to 223h4, and, depending on the determination result, displays hold change information, The scenario data, pending deletion information and re-change information storage areas 223h5 to 223h8 are respectively stored (see S1303 to S1312 in FIG. 70). On the other hand, as a difference from the first embodiment, the sound ramp control device 113 determines the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS stored in the storage areas 223h1 to 223h4, and according to the determination result, The performance information is stored in the promotion information storage area 233h9 (see S1351-S1353 in FIG. 70).

Specifically, in the process of S1351 of the pending display setting process (S1209), it is determined whether or not the "promotion" effect is included in the variable effect indicated by the pending ball number command received this time (S1351). In the second embodiment, when the "promotion" effect is not included in the variable effect, the reserved ball number command is received, it is determined whether or not the "promotion" effect is included in the variable effect indicated by the pending ball number command, and the determination result is stored in the promotion information storage area 223h9 of the pending information storage area 223h. It is configured.

As a result of the process of S1351, if it is a variable effect including a "promotion" effect (S1351: Yes), promotion effect information indicating that the "promotion" effect is performed in the variable effect is stored in the X area storing the pending information. The data is stored in the information storage area 223h9 (S1352), and the process proceeds to S1313. Here, the promotion effect information stored in the promotion information storage area 223h9 is judged when it is transferred to the promotion information storage area 223i9 of the execution information storage area 223i. It is determined.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1351, if it is a variable effect that does not include the "promotion" effect (S1351: No), the "promotion" effect is not executed in the variable effect. Null data is stored in the promotion information storage area 223h9 of the X-th area for holding information storage (S1353), and the process proceeds to S1313. By writing Null data to the promotion information storage area 223h9 in the process of S1353, for example, it is possible to prevent redundant use of information related to the "promotion" effect stored in the pending information storage area X before writing, It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a discrepancy in performance (for example, a problem caused by storing promotion performance information in spite of the fact that it is a losing variable performance that does not include the "promotion" performance).

Next, the character color change restriction process (S1619) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing character color change restriction processing executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment.

In the character color change restriction process (S1619) of the second embodiment, the result of the variation effect is "big win display", and the display color of each character display Se1 to Se3 is "red" or "golden". Even if the pattern is changed by winning, if the variable effect does not include the "promotion" effect, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is corrected to the normal display color "white" ( re-change). Incidentally, even if the result of the variable effect is not the "big win display", the display color of the standard phrase character display Se3 is corrected (re-changed) to the normal display color of "white". It should be noted that in the second embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the presence or absence of the variable element of "re-variation" is not determined to correct (re-change) the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3. As with the form, the presence or absence of the variable element of "re-variation" may be determined, and the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 may be corrected (re-changed).

In the character change limiting process (S1619) of the second embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the "big win display" appears in the variation effect to be executed this time (S1751). This determination is made by determining whether or not the variation effect stored in the RAM 223 in the process of S1202 of the command determination process (see FIG. 42) is the effect mode in which the variable effect is "big win display", that is, "E5: normal reach", "E6 : Super Reach", "E7: Special Reach", or "E8: Special Fluctuation".

In the processing of S1751, if it is determined that the variable effect that the "jackpot display" appears (S1751: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the variable effect to be executed this time includes the "promotion" effect. (S1752). This determination is stored in the promotion information storage area 223h9 of the suspension information storage area 223h in the processing of S1352 or S1353 of the suspension display setting processing (see FIG. 70), and the execution information is stored by the subsequent shift processing (see S1403 in FIG. 44). Whether or not the promotion effect information stored in the promotion information storage area 223i9 of the area 223i stores that the "promotion" effect is to be executed, that is, "E507H" to "E50CH" are stored in the promotion information storage area 223i9. Variation pattern including variation elements of "normal reach" and "promotion" production of "E609H" to "E610H" Variation patterns including variation elements of "super reach" and "promotion" production, Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the information about the variation pattern including the variation elements of the "special reach" and the "promotion" performance of "E709H" to "E710H" is stored.

In the process of S1752, when it is determined that the variation pattern including the "promotion" effect is stored in the promotion information storage area 223i9 (S1752: Yes), the "jackpot display" appears in the variation effect. , the ``promotion'' performance is executed, and the jackpot pattern corresponding to the ``15R normal jackpot'' is changed to the jackpot pattern corresponding to the ``15R probability variable jackpot''. Therefore, even if the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 appearing at the stage where the jackpot pattern corresponding to the "15R normal jackpot" is temporarily displayed in the variable production is displayed as it is in the chance up pattern, the "promotion" production is performed. is carried out and the jackpot pattern corresponding to the ``15R probability variable jackpot'' is obtained, so that there is no discrepancy in the content of the performance and the player does not have a sense of distrust. Therefore, the character color change limiting process (s1619) is terminated without changing the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3, and the process returns to the character mode setting process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, in the process of S1751, when it is determined that the "big win display" is not the variation effect that appears (S1751: No), the "loss display" is displayed instead of the "big win display". In this variable effect, if the standard phrase character display Se3 is displayed as it is in the chance-up pattern, there is a risk that the player will feel distrust due to the discrepancies in the content of the effect. Therefore, in the process of S1703, the display control device 114 sets the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 to the normal display color "white" regardless of whether or not the chance-up pattern is set. (S1703), terminates the character color change restriction process (S1619), and returns to the character mode setting process (see FIG. 46).

Also, in the processing of S1752, even if it is determined that the variation pattern including the "promotion" effect is not stored in the promotion information storage area 223i9 (S1752: No), the "jackpot display" appears in the variation effect. However, since the "promotion" effect is not performed, the result of the "jackpot display" displayed when the "ready-to-win display" ends is fixed as it is. In this variation performance, when the jackpot pattern corresponding to the "15R normal jackpot" is displayed, if the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed as the chance-up pattern, the chance-up pattern is displayed. Since the development effect such as the "promotion" effect is not executed, there is a possibility that the content of the effect may be inconsistent and the player may feel distrust. Therefore, in the process of S1703, the display control device 114 sets the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 to the normal display color "white" regardless of whether or not the chance-up pattern is set. (S1703), terminates the character color change restriction process (S1619), and returns to the character mode setting process (see FIG. 46).

The fixed form phrase normal command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 41). be done. When the display control device 114 receives this display fixed phrase normal command, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is changed to the normal display color " It recognizes that it is to be displayed in white, and executes display control of the fixed phrase character display Se3 displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In this way, when starting the variable performance, it is determined whether or not the "promotion" performance is executed even if the "big win display" appears in the variable performance, and based on the determination , determines whether the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is to be displayed as it is in the chance-up pattern, or whether it is to be displayed in the normal display color again. Then, when changing to the normal pattern again, a fixed form phrase normal command for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 . By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the performance, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations, and in which the player does not feel a sense of distrust. At the start of the variable performance, the content of the character display to appear in the variable performance can be notified to the display control device 114, and the display control in the variable performance can be performed reliably.

In the second embodiment, the display color of the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 is not corrected. The pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 is a character display displayed when the variable element of "re-variation" is executed, and the variable effect including the variable element of "re-variation" is always "big win display". Therefore, after the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 is displayed, the variable element of "re-variation" is always executed and the "jackpot display" appears. It can be said that it is a character display corresponding to the element. Therefore, since the variable element of "re-variation" is always executed after the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 is displayed, there is no need to correct the display color of the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4.

Here, with reference to FIG. 72, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 in the variable effect including the "promotion" effect in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 72 shows that in the variation performance of the big hit executed by the third symbol display device 81 of the second embodiment, the chance up pattern (for example, "red") of each character display Se1 to Se3 is won, and the "promotion" performance is performed. is a diagram showing a situation in which the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 displayed before is executed remains "red".

Specifically, FIG. 72(a) shows that the "ready-to-win display (variable element of "normal reach")" in the third pattern corresponding to the "15R normal jackpot" in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 is It shows a state in which a ready-to-win character display Se1 is displayed in the left small area Ds1 immediately after it appears, in which words spoken from the character pattern in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds are displayed in characters. It is a diagram. In FIG. 72(b), from the state of FIG. 72(a), the variable element of "normal reach" in the third symbol corresponding to the "15R normal jackpot" is started, the sub display area Ds is erased, and the main FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which a variable element of “normal reach” is executed in the display area Dm; In FIG. 72(c), the variable element of "super reach" is started from the state of FIG. 72(b), the cockpit display area Db is erased, and the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. Furthermore, it is a diagram showing a state in which a reach-in-reach character display Se2 is displayed in which words spoken from the character pattern on the player side are expressed in characters. FIG. 72(d) shows a content suggesting that the ``dangerous effect'' is executed in the ``super reach'' from the state of FIG. It is the figure which showed the state currently carried out. In FIG. 72(e), the variable element of "Super Reach" ends from the state of FIG. A "big win display" of the third pattern corresponding to "big win" appears, and a set phrase character display Se3 in which words spoken from the character pattern of the central small region Ds2 of the sub-display region Ds are expressed in characters is displayed in the left small region. It is the figure which showed the state displayed on Ds1. Fig. 72(f) is a diagram showing a state just before the "promotion" effect is executed from the state of Fig. 72(e) and the third symbol "jackpot display" corresponding to the "15R probability variable jackpot" appears. is. In addition, in FIGS. 72(a) to 72(f), the display mode of the third pattern is omitted.

First, in FIG. 72(a), in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol "6" is stopped and displayed, and in the right display area Dm3, the third symbol "6" is displayed. It shows a state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed, and furthermore, the third symbol is still unrecognizably "high-speed fluctuating" in the medium display area Dm2. Therefore, it is the state immediately after the appearance of the "ready-to-win display" by the "6" symbol, which is the third symbol corresponding to the so-called "15R normal jackpot". Further, in the cockpit display area Db, an executed symbol is displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, and reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively.

In addition, in the left small region Ds1 of the sub-display region Ds, the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence emitted from the character pattern of the central small region Ds2 is a "strong pattern" character pattern and a chance up pattern "red". is displayed. Specifically, in the left small region Ds1, the character display Se1 at the time of reaching occurrence of "I can do it!", which is the line uttered by the character pattern in the central small region Ds2, is "white" which is the normal display color. changes from to "red" and is displayed.

72(a), the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 selects a "strong pattern" for the character pattern of each character display Se1, and the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are selected. This means that "red" was selected by winning the change lottery, and "at the time of occurrence of ready-to-win" was selected as to the lottery for the change timing of the display colors of the character displays Se1 and Se2.

Therefore, in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, at least a command related to the "strong pattern" of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence from the audio lamp control device 113 (in FIG. 72 (c) described later, the character display Se2 during reach Therefore, the strong strong pattern command for display), the red character command for display, and the command for change at occurrence of display are received, and at least the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is "strong pattern" in the character pattern memory 233j. , the red character flag 233k is set to ON based on the display red character command, and the character color change flag 233n at occurrence is set to ON based on the display use change command.

Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c contains at least a character pattern additional data table 232a2 based on the setting contents of the character pattern memory 233j, a character color additional data table 232a2 based on the ON of the red character flag 233k, and a character at occurrence time table 232a2. The additional data table 232a2 for character timing based on the ON state of the color change flag 233n is stored (set). As a result, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the variable display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. . Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the third symbol display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 72(a) is obtained.

As will be described later with reference to FIG. 72(e), in the variable effect shown in FIG. 72, the "promotion" effect is executed, so there is no need to correct the display color of the standard phrase character display Se3. Therefore, in the variable effect shown in FIG. 72, the additional data table buffer 233c does not store the character correction additional data table 232a2 for correcting the display contents of the standard phrase character display Se3.

FIG. 72(b) shows a state in which the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 72(a). In the variable elements of this "normal reach", in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the "6" symbol that is being stopped and displayed is enlarged and displayed, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is displayed. Variable effect (for example, low speed scrolling from "5" pattern to "6" pattern) is performed so that it can be visually recognized at a low speed. In addition, the sub-display area Ds is erased as the main display area Dm expands due to the occurrence of the "normal reach" variable, and the sub-display area Ds becomes invisible. In the cockpit display area Db, as in the display state of FIG. 72(a), the executed symbols are displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. is displayed.

In the display state of FIG. 72(b), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 does not additionally receive commands from the sound lamp control device 113 as compared with the display state of FIG. 72(a). Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c stores (sets) an additional data table 232a2 (additional data table 232a2 for character change No. 3) equivalent to the storage state in FIG. 72(a). Therefore, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the variable display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the third symbol display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 72(b) is obtained.

FIG. 72(c) shows a state in which the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 72(b). In this "super reach" variable element, the "6" pattern reach forming pattern displayed in the "normal reach" variable element is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Also, during the execution of the variable element of "Super Reach", the cockpit display area Db is erased, and instead, the variable effect is reserved at the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and below the Reach formation symbol. A reach formation pattern of a number pattern (“4” in the first embodiment) indicating the number of balls is newly appearing and displayed.

In addition, in the variable elements of this "Super Reach", a "battle effect" is displayed in which a plurality of character patterns compete for victory or defeat, and furthermore, the character pattern on the player side speaks a line, and the reach middle text in which the line is expressed in letters. Character display Se2 is displayed in a chance-up pattern. Specifically, in the display area where the cockpit display area Db has been erased, the reach-in-reach character display Se2 of "stop!" The display color is changed from "white" to "red".

That is, in the display state of FIG. 72(c), "strong pattern" is selected in the character pattern lottery for the in-reach character display Se2 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the character displays Se1 to Se3 are displayed. "Red" is selected by winning the color change lottery, and further, as a result of selecting "at the time of occurrence of reach" in the lottery of the change timing of the display color of each character display Se1, Se2, character display Se2 during reach is also displayed. Shown in "red". That is, in the display color of the character display Se1 at the time of occurrence of the ready-to-win that has already been displayed in this variable effect, the change in the display color of the character display is reflected in the display color that reflects the result of the lottery. The display color of is a display that follows the display color of the character display Se1 when reach occurs.

In the display state of FIG. 72(c), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives additional commands from the sound lamp control device 113 for the display states of FIGS. 72(a) and 72(b). do not have. Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c stores (sets) an additional data table 232a2 (additional data table 232a2 for character change of 3) equivalent to the storage state in FIGS. 72(a) and 72(b). state. Therefore, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the variable display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 72(c) is obtained.

In FIG. 72(d), from the state of FIG. 72(c), the "distinctive effect" is executed in the variable element of "super reach", and in the "distinctive effect", the player's side character design (left character design) is executed. is a view showing a state in which content is displayed suggesting that the character symbol on the enemy side (the character symbol on the right side) will be defeated and a "jackpot display" will appear.

In the display state of FIG. 72(d), the reach forming pattern of the "6" pattern that had been reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 has the same "6" pattern as the reach forming pattern in its center portion. ” The symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, a display suggesting "big win display" with "666" is performed. In addition, the cockpit display area Db is continuously erased, and the number patterns indicating the number of pending balls of the variable effect are continuously displayed on the upper left of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 and below the ready-to-win formation pattern. there is

In the display state of FIG. 72(d), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives additional commands from the sound lamp control device 113 for the display states of FIGS. 72(a) to 72(c). do not have. Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c stores (sets) an additional data table 232a2 (3 character change additional data table 232a2) equivalent to the storage state in FIGS. 72(a) to 72(c). state. Therefore, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the variable display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the display of the third pattern display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 72(d) is obtained.

In FIG. 72(e), from the state of FIG. 72(d), the character pattern on the player side wins the enemy character pattern in the "impartial effect" of the variable element of "super reach", and a temporary , and the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this state, the character pattern in the central small region Ds2 of the sub-display region Ds and the execution patterns and reserved patterns in the cockpit display region Db are visible again.

The character pattern in the central small region Ds2 of the secondary display region Ds is displayed with a happy expression due to the appearance of the temporary "big win display", and the character pattern is displayed in the left small region Ds1. A fixed phrase character display Se3 in which words are expressed by characters is displayed in a chance-up pattern. Specifically, in the left small region Ds1, the fixed phrase character display Se3, which is the line "I did it!" emitted from the character pattern in the central small region Ds2, is changed from the normal display color "white" to It changes to "red" and is displayed.

That is, in the display state of FIG. 72(e), "red" is selected by lottery for changing display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display is selected. As a result of selecting "at the time of occurrence of reach" regarding the lottery of the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, the standard phrase character display Se3 is also displayed in "red". In other words, in the display colors of the character display Se1 at the time of occurrence of the reach and the character display Se2 during the reach, which have already been displayed in this variable effect, the change in the display color of the character display is reflected in the display color that reflects the lottery result. The display color of this fixed form phrase character display Se3 follows the display colors of the character display Se1 during reach occurrence and the character display Se2 during reach.

Here, in this variable effect, as described above, "red" is selected by winning the change lottery of the display color of each character display Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display Regarding the lottery for the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, "at the time of occurrence of reach" is selected. Therefore, since the display color of each character display Se1 to Se3 is collectively set as described above, the standard phrase character display Se3 should also be displayed in "red" according to the collective setting. In the production, the "promotion" production is performed from this temporary "15R normal jackpot" and the "15R probability variable jackpot" appears, so that the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in "red" as it is in the chance up pattern. is configured to

As a result, in the display state of FIG. 72(e), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 additionally issues a command from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display states of FIGS. 72(a) to 72(d). not received. Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c stores (sets) an additional data table 232a2 (3 character change additional data table 232a2) equivalent to the storage state in FIGS. 72(a) to 72(d). state. Therefore, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the variable display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 72(e) is obtained.

Also, when the player recognizes the display contents of FIG. 72(e), the character design on the player side wins in the "battle effect" of "super reach" as shown in FIG. 72(d). It is predicted that the ``15R normal jackpot'' that appears after the ``end effect'' of the ``super reach'' will occur. However, since the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in "red", the player feels uncomfortable with the prediction that the "15R normal jackpot" will occur. ” instead of re-predicting that some additional production will be executed.

FIG. 72(f) shows a state in which the "promotion" effect is being executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 72(e). In this "promotion" effect, the main display area Dm is enlarged and displayed, and the sub-display area Ds is erased, corresponding to the "15R normal jackpot" which was stopped and displayed as "666" in each of the display areas Dm1 to Dm3. Then, the "jackpot display" in the third pattern starts to fluctuate again, and finally the "jackpot display" in the third pattern corresponding to the "15R probability variable jackpot" is stopped and displayed at "777". The player is surprised at the occurrence of the "promotion" production, and, as guessed at the stage of FIG. A feeling of happiness and satisfaction can be obtained for the appearance of the "jackpot".

In this way, when the variable performance executes the "promotion" performance and is determined by the "jackpot display" in the third pattern corresponding to the "15R probability variable jackpot", the character display Se1 when the reach occurs or the character display during the reach When the chance-up pattern (for example, "red") is executed in Se2, the chance-up pattern is also followed in the fixed phrase character display Se3 displayed after the "end effect" of the variable element of "super reach". Configure to display. That is, in the variable performance including the “promotion” performance, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 appearing in the state where the third pattern corresponding to the provisional “15R normal jackpot” is displayed is displayed in “red”. configured as follows. By configuring in this way, there is no need to prepare additional commands in the variation effect of the big win including the "promotion" effect, and since there is no discrepancy in the content of the effect in the first place, the player has excessive expectations. It is possible to provide a comfortable game that does not make the player feel distrustful.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 in the variable effect that does not include the "promotion" effect in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 73 shows that in the variation effect of the big hit executed by the third symbol display device 81 of the second embodiment, the chance up pattern (for example, "red") of each character display Se1 to Se3 is won, but "15R normal It is a diagram showing a situation in which the display color of the standard phrase character display Se3 is corrected to "white" because the "big win" is won and the "promotion" effect is not included.

Specifically, in FIG. 73(a), in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the "ready-to-win display (variable element of "normal reach")" in the third symbol corresponding to the "15R normal jackpot" is It shows a state in which a ready-to-win character display Se1 is displayed in the left small area Ds1 immediately after it appears, in which words spoken from the character pattern in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds are displayed in characters. It is a diagram. In FIG. 73(b), from the state of FIG. 73(a), the variable element of "normal reach" in the third symbol corresponding to the "15R normal jackpot" is started, the sub display area Ds is erased, and the main FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which a variable element of “normal reach” is executed in the display area Dm; In FIG. 73(c), the "super reach" variable element is started from the state of FIG. 72(b), the cockpit display area Db is erased, and the "super reach" variable element is executed in the main display area Dm. Further, it is a diagram showing a state in which a content suggesting that a "big win display" will appear in the "end effect" of the "super reach" is displayed. In FIG. 73(d), the variable element of "Super Reach" ends from the state of FIG. A "big win display" of the third pattern corresponding to "big win" appears, and a set phrase character display Se3 in which words spoken from the character pattern of the central small region Ds2 of the sub-display region Ds are expressed in characters is displayed in the left small region. It is the figure which showed the state displayed on Ds1. In addition, in FIGS. 73(a) to 73(d), the display mode of the third pattern is omitted.

First, in FIG. 73(a), as in FIG. 72(a), the third symbol "6" is stopped and displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and " 6" symbol is stopped and displayed, and furthermore, in the medium display area Dm2, the third symbol is still unrecognizably "high-speed fluctuating". Therefore, it is the state immediately after the appearance of the "ready-to-win display" by the "6" symbol, which is the third symbol corresponding to the so-called "15R normal jackpot". Further, in the cockpit display area Db, an executed symbol is displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, and reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively.

In addition, in the left small region Ds1 of the sub-display region Ds, the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence emitted from the character pattern of the central small region Ds2 is a "strong pattern" character pattern and a chance up pattern "red". is displayed. Specifically, in the left small region Ds1, the character display Se1 at the time of reaching occurrence of "I can do it!", which is the line uttered by the character pattern in the central small region Ds2, is "white" which is the normal display color. changes from to "red" and is displayed.

73(a), the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 selects a "strong pattern" for the character pattern of each character display Se1, and the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are selected. This means that "red" was selected by winning the change lottery, and "at the time of occurrence of ready-to-win" was selected as to the lottery for the change timing of the display colors of the character displays Se1 and Se2.

Therefore, in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, at least a command related to the "strong pattern" of the character display Se1 at the time of reaching occurrence from the sound lamp control device 113 (not shown, but since the character display Se2 during reach is also a "strong pattern", (strong strong pattern command for display), red character command for display, and command for change at occurrence of display are received. The red character flag 233k is set to ON based on the red character command for display, and the character color change at occurrence flag 233n is set to ON based on the change at occurrence command for display.

Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c contains at least a character pattern additional data table 232a2 based on the setting contents of the character pattern memory 233j, a character color additional data table 232a2 based on the ON of the red character flag 233k, and a character at occurrence time table 232a2. The additional data table 232a2 for character timing based on the ON state of the color change flag 233n is stored (set). As a result, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the variable display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. . Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the third symbol display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 73(a) is obtained. In addition, although it will be described later in FIG. 73(d), in the fluctuation effects of FIGS. , an additional data table 232a2 for character correction is stored.

FIG. 73(b) shows a state in which the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 73(a). In the variable element of this "normal reach", in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the "6" symbol that is being stopped is enlarged and displayed, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is displayed. Variable performance (for example, low-speed scrolling from "5" pattern to "6" pattern) is performed so that it can be visually recognized at a low speed. In addition, the sub-display area Ds is erased as the main display area Dm expands based on the occurrence of the "normal reach" variable, and the sub-display area Ds becomes invisible. In the cockpit display area Db, as in the display state of FIG. 73(a), the executed symbols are displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. is displayed.

In the display state of FIG. 73(b), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 does not additionally receive a command from the sound lamp control device 113 with respect to the display state of FIG. 73(a). Therefore, in the additional data table buffer 233c, additional data tables 232a2 equivalent to the storage state in FIG. character change additional data table 232a2)) is stored (set). Therefore, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the variable display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the third symbol display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 73(b) is obtained.

FIG. 73(c) shows a state in which the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 73(b). In this "super reach" variable element, the "6" pattern reach forming pattern displayed in the "normal reach" variable element is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Also, during the execution of the variable element of "Super Reach", the cockpit display area Db is erased, and instead, the variable effect is reserved at the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and below the Reach formation symbol. A reach formation pattern of a number pattern (“4” in the first embodiment) indicating the number of balls is newly appearing and displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 73(c), the "distinctive effect" is executed in the variable element of "super reach", and in the "distinctive effect", the character pattern on the player side (the character pattern on the left side) is changed to the character pattern on the enemy side. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which a content suggesting that a "jackpot display" appears after winning (right character pattern) is displayed;

In the display state of FIG. 73(c), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives additional commands from the sound lamp control device 113 for the display states of FIGS. 73(a) to 73(b). do not have. Therefore, in the additional data table buffer 233c, an additional data table 232a2 equivalent to the storage state in FIGS. In this state, four character change additional data tables 232a2)) including the data table 232a2 are stored (set). Therefore, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the variable display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the display of the third pattern display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 73(c) is obtained.

In FIG. 73(d), from the state of FIG. 73(c), the character pattern on the player side wins over the enemy character pattern in the variable element of "Super Reach", and " It shows a state in which the "big win display" appears and the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are re-displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. In this state, the character pattern in the central small region Ds2 of the sub-display region Ds and the execution patterns and reserved patterns in the cockpit display region Db are visible again.

The character pattern in the central small region Ds2 of the sub-display region Ds is displayed with a happy expression due to the appearance of the "big win display", and the lines emitted from the character pattern are displayed in the left small region Ds1. A fixed phrase character display Se3 represented by characters is displayed in a normal pattern. Specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the fixed phrase character display Se3 of "Yattaze!", which is the line uttered by the character pattern in the central small area Ds2, is displayed in the normal display color "white". Is displayed.

That is, in the display state of FIG. 73(d), the character displays Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 have won the lottery to change the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3, and "red" is selected. Regarding the lottery for the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, ``at the time of occurrence of ready-to-win'' is selected, and the variation presentation is ``big win display'', but it is ``15R normal jackpot'' and ``promotion'' presentation is executed. This means that the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 has been corrected (changed) to "white".

When the player recognizes the display contents of FIG. 73(d), the character design on the player side wins in the "battle effect" of the "super reach", and the "jackpot display" is displayed in the "super reach". Anticipate what will show up. Also, since the display color of the standard phrase character display Se3 is displayed in "white", it is recognized that the variation effect will end with the above-mentioned "big win display".

Here, in this variable effect, as described above, "red" is selected by winning the change lottery of the display color of each character display Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display Regarding the lottery for the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, "at the time of occurrence of reach" is selected. Therefore, since the display color of each character display Se1 to Se3 is collectively set as described above, the standard phrase character display Se3 should also be displayed in "red" according to the collective setting. "Big win display" appears, but "15R normal jackpot" appears without executing the "promotion" effect, so the standard phrase character display Se3 is not the chance up pattern but the normal display color "white". configured to be displayed in

Therefore, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 has received at least the display strong command, the display red character command, the display change-at-occurrence command, and the display standard phrase normal command from the sound lamp control device 113, and the character It is set in the pattern memory 233j that the character display Se1 during reach occurrence and the character display Se2 during reach Se2 are "strong pattern", the red character flag 233k is set to ON based on the red character command for display, and The occurrence character color change flag 233n is set to ON based on the change command, and the after-effect restriction flag 233p is set to ON based on the standard phrase for display normal command. Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c contains at least a character pattern additional data table 232a2 based on the setting contents of the character pattern memory 233j, a character color additional data table 232a2 based on the ON of the red character flag 233k, and a character at occurrence time table 232a2. A character timing additional data table 232a2 based on the ON state of the color change flag 233n and a character correction additional data table 232a2 based on the ON state of the end limit flag 233p are stored (set).

As a result, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the variable display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. . Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the third pattern display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 73(d) is obtained.

In this way, when the variable effect is the "jackpot display" and the "15R normal jackpot" that does not execute the "promotion" effect is confirmed, the chance up pattern ( For example, even if "red") is executed, the chance-up pattern is not displayed in the formulaic phrase character display Se3 displayed after the "end effect" of the variable element of "super reach". That is, in the ``15R normal jackpot'' in which the ``promotion'' effect is not executed even if the ``big win display'' variable effect is performed, the display color of the standard phrase character display Se3 is displayed in the normal pattern ``white''. do. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the performance contents, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and does not feel distrustful.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, even if the "jackpot display" occurs in the variable effect, the "jackpot display" is the "15R normal jackpot", When the "promotion" effect is not performed, the chance up pattern is not displayed in the standard phrase character display Se3. That is, in the variable effect, it is determined whether or not the "promotion" effect is executed, and if it is determined that the "promotion" effect is not performed as a result of the determination, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is changed to the normal pattern. Configure it to display in a certain "white" color.

Conventionally, if a chance-up pattern is displayed in the standard phrase character display Se3 when the variable effect is "15R normal jackpot", the player recognizes the chance-up pattern of the standard phrase character display Se3. Based on the appearance of the up pattern, a ``promotion'' production is generated in which the ``15R normal jackpot'' during appearance is promoted to a ``15R probability variable jackpot'', etc., and this variable performance is confirmed by the ``15R normal jackpot'' jackpot pattern. Instead, it is expected that it will develop into a “15R probability variable jackpot” and “2R probability variable jackpot”, and the gaming value that can be obtained will increase. However, contrary to the expectations, the "promotion" effect is not executed and the variable effect is fixed as "15R normal jackpot", so the player feels distrust of the pachinko machine 10 due to the discrepancy in the effect contents. At the same time, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game parlor, and the distrust of the game hall increases, so that the game may be interrupted immediately after the "time shortening state" ends.

Therefore, even if the "big win display" occurs in the variable effect, when the "big win display" is the "15R normal jackpot" and the "promotion" effect is not performed, the fixed phrase character display Se3 , configured not to display the chance up pattern. By constructing in this way, in the variable performance in which the ``15R normal jackpot'' is given without the ``promotion'' performance, the standard phrase character display Se3 is displayed in the normal pattern ``white'', and the player is overwhelmed. It is possible to provide a comfortable game that does not cause unreasonable expectations and does not offend the player when a big win is awarded.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the variable effect executes the "promotion" effect and is confirmed by the "big win display" in the third symbol corresponding to the "15R probability variable big win", when the reach occurs When the chance up pattern (for example, "red") is executed in the character display Se1 or the in-reach character display Se2, even in the fixed phrase character display Se3 that is displayed after the "exhibition effect" of the variable element of "super reach" , the chance-up pattern is followed and displayed. That is, in the variable performance including the “promotion” performance, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 appearing in the state where the third pattern corresponding to the provisional “15R normal jackpot” is displayed is displayed in “red”. configured as follows. By configuring in this way, there is no need to prepare additional commands in the variation effect of the big win including the "promotion" effect, and since there is no discrepancy in the content of the effect in the first place, the player has excessive expectations. It is possible to provide a comfortable game that does not make the player feel distrustful.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment has the same effects as the first embodiment due to the same configuration.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. FIG.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the cockpit display area Db is erased during the execution of the variable element of "super reach", and the display content of "battle effect" in the variable element of "super reach" is displayed in the main display area. It is configured to be displayed large in Dm and perform a powerful presentation. In addition, in the "impartial effect" such as the variable element of "super reach", in the display area where the cockpit display area Db is deleted, the during-reach character display Se2 is displayed. This reach-in-progress character display Se2 is configured to be changeable by lottery from the display color of the normal pattern "white" to a chance-up pattern of "red" or "gold". Furthermore, in the first embodiment, even if the in-reach character display Se2 is displayed in the chance-up pattern in the variable effect in which the "loss display" appears, the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in the normal pattern instead of the chance-up pattern. is changed again to "white", which is the display color of .

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the reserved symbols and the executed symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db, the display color of the reserved symbols and the executed symbols is changed from the normal display mode of "white" to "blue". ”, “red” or “rainbow color” chance up pattern. Due to this "pending change notice", the display color of the holding pattern and the execution pattern is changed from the normal display mode ("white") to another display mode (for example, "blue") Chance up pattern By changing, It is configured to suggest to the player that the rates of occurrence of "ready-to-win display" and "jackpot display" are different in the variable effects indicated by the reserved symbols and the executed symbols.

Here, the reserved symbols and the executed symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db suggest the degree of expectation of the variable performance during standby or execution when the "suspended change notice" is executed in the reserved symbols and the executed symbols. In particular, regarding the execution pattern, the result of the "suspended change notice" is continuously displayed during the execution of the variable performance (except when the cockpit display area Db is erased), so that the expectation of a big win in the variable performance being executed is increased. It is an index display that clearly shows the degree.

In other words, the reserved symbols and the executed symbols are display items that can be immediately confirmed when the player wants to confirm (ruminate) the contents thereof, and are suitable as an index display showing a rough expectation of a big win in the variable performance. . Therefore, the player, for example, based on the execution pattern of the chance-up pattern (for example, "red") in which the "holding change notice" is performed, while predicting the rough jackpot expectation degree of the variable performance being executed, The degree of expectation for big wins of other notice displays such as character displays Se1 to Se4 additionally appearing in the variable performance is additionally converted into the degree of expectation for big wins of the execution symbols, and the expectation degree of big wins for the entire variable performance is predicted. and playing games.

Therefore, even if the indicator display such as the executed pattern (reserved pattern) is erased (not visible) due to the duplication (execution) of some effect, the indicator display will be displayed immediately after the effect is completed. should be redisplayed, and the display mode of the redisplayed index display should be the same as before erasing (before becoming invisible). If the redisplayed index display is changed from before it is erased (before it becomes invisible), the player will not notice the change in the index display because the index display that the player checks at any time has been changed. This is because one expects that some kind of presentation will be executed based on the change.

Therefore, even if the indicator display such as the execution pattern (reserved pattern) is not additionally performed (for example, the variable element of "re-fluctuation"), if the indicator display is to be redisplayed, the It must be displayed in the same manner as (Before invisible). Specifically, when the execution pattern (reserved pattern) was displayed in a normal pattern before being erased (before becoming invisible), it is displayed in the normal pattern even after being redisplayed. In addition, when the execution pattern (reserved pattern) was displayed in the chance up pattern before erasing (before being invisible), it is displayed as the chance up pattern even after the re-display.

On the other hand, each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 displayed in the variable effect including the "ready-to-reach display" is an advance notice display displayed at a predetermined display (appearance) timing in the variable effect, and is displayed at the predetermined display timing. It is a fragmentary display that is erased after a certain period of time. In other words, even if the player wants to check (rub over) the content of fragmentary displays such as the character displays Se1 to Se4, he or she cannot check them after a certain period of time from the display timing. Since it is determined only by the player's memory, it is not suitable as an index display.

However, the fragmentary displays such as the character displays Se1 to Se4 are not suitable for suggesting that there is a possibility that, when appearing in a variable effect, there may be some effect on the effect performed immediately after that. Yes, and has a development suggestion function. In particular, when fragmentary displays such as the character displays Se1 to Se4 are displayed in the chance-up pattern, the development suggestion function is emphasized (strongly appealed). Therefore, for example, when a fragmentary display such as each character display Se1 to Se4 appears, the player can determine the display content of the fragmentary display with respect to the degree of expectation for a big win in the index display that is continuously displayed. The degree of expectation for the big win in the variable performance is determined by converting (totaling) the degree of expectation for the big win, and the game is played while expecting that some kind of performance will be additionally performed by the function of suggesting development by the fragmentary display.

As a result, the fragmentary displays such as the character displays Se1 to Se4 can be displayed when additional effects (for example, variable elements such as "re-variation") are not executed after the fragmentary displays are displayed, or when the player is prompted to play the game. Situation that should not be displayed when value is not given (for example, execution of a jackpot game), but must be displayed for some reason (for example, supplementary notification of display results of variable effects such as fixed phrase character display Se3) Even so, at least the chance-up pattern should not be displayed. That is, if the fragmentary display is displayed in the chance-up pattern in the above situation, when the player recognizes the fragmentary display of the chance-up pattern, based on the development suggestion function of the fragmentary notice, This is because one expects that some kind of production will be executed based on the appearance of the fragmentary advance notice.

Therefore, each of the character displays Se1 to Se4, especially fragmentary displays such as the fixed-form phrase character display Se3, etc., may be used when additional effects, etc. (for example, variable elements of "re-variation") are not executed, or when the game value is increased by the player. When is not given (for example, execution of a jackpot game), it should not be displayed, and even if it is displayed, it is configured not to be displayed in a chance-up pattern. Specifically, even if the character display Se1 when the reach occurs or the character display Se2 during the reach is displayed in a chance-up pattern, if there is no variable element of "re-fluctuation", it is displayed after the "event effect", and the variable effect The standard phrase character display Se3, which is responsible for supplemental notification of the display result of , is displayed not in the chance-up pattern but in the normal pattern.

In addition, in the first embodiment, regarding the display mode of each character display Se1 to Se4, the character pattern, display color, change timing, or re-change content of the display color (formal phrase character Display Se3 only normal pattern) (hereinafter, elements such as the intensity pattern of each effect, display color, appearance timing, etc. that make up the notice 1 are referred to as "effect elements"), each addition for character change The data table 232a2 is set, and the character change additional data table 232a2 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c to perform display control. In such a configuration, a plurality of additional data tables 232a2 relating to the display modes of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are required for each effect element. must be stored in the

Here, in the variable effect, in addition to the character displays Se1 to Se4, displays related to reserved patterns and execution patterns, character appearance notices that make a plurality of character patterns appear, and division images (cut-in images) of multiple patterns are displayed. There are many notice displays that are additionally displayed in the variable production, such as cut-in notices to be displayed, and each notice display also has various production elements (for example, number, display color, strength pattern, appearance timing, etc.). is pre-established. Therefore, in each of these advance notice displays, a plurality of types of additional data tables 232a2 are set for each effect element, and the additional data tables 232a2 are stored in the additional data table buffers 233c, respectively, thereby executing display control of variable effects. be done.

However, as the number of effects (notice) to be added increases and the number of effect elements of each effect (notice) increases, the number of additional data tables 232a2 to be set increases proportionally, and the number of additional data table buffers 233c increases. There is a possibility that the storage capacity will become tight, and it will be necessary to increase the capacity of the additional data table buffer 233c in advance at a cost. Also, when a large number of additional data tables 232a2 are stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, the number of additional data tables 232a2 to be referred to increases when creating a drawing list (see S2501) in the drawing process (see FIG. 63). The processing load of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 may increase.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, one additional data table 232a2 corresponding to all the effect elements of the effect (notice) is selected for each effect (notice). By storing the added data table 232a2 in the additional data table buffer 233c, it is configured to execute the display control of the variable effect. Specifically, for example, as an additional data table 232a2 related to the display modes of the character displays Se1 to Se4, 1 is added that summarizes the character patterns, display colors, change timings, and display color corrections of the character displays Se1 to Se4. Set the data table 232a2. Further, for example, one additional data table 232a2 summarizing the number of reserved symbols and executed symbols, the content of "holding change notice" and change timing is selected as the additional data table 232a2 relating to the display mode of the reserved symbols and executed symbols.

Then, the selected additional data tables 232a2 are stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, and the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c are stored. Browse and configure to create a draw list. With this configuration, the number of additional data tables 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c is only the number of types of effects (notice), and the additional data table 232a2 is set for each effect element of the effect (notice). The number of additional data tables 232a2 can be made smaller than the case, and the capacity of the additional data table buffer 233c does not need to be increased with an increase in the number of effects (notices), and the cost can be suppressed.

In addition, when creating a drawing list (see S2501) in the drawing process (see FIG. 63), the number of additional data tables 232a2 to be referred to is only the number of effects (notices). The processing load of the MPU 231 can be reduced.

Furthermore, in setting the additional data table 232a2, the additional data table 232a2 can be clearly defined by displaying indicators such as pending patterns and execution patterns (cockpit display area Db) and fragmentary displays such as character displays Se1 to Se4. Configure separately. By configuring in this way, in the display objects of the reserved pattern and the execution pattern (cockpit display area Db) and the character displays Se1 to Se4, when the display objects are erased (invisible) and redisplayed In addition, display control is performed by clearly separating display objects that are index displays that can be redisplayed as they are in the chance-up pattern and display objects that are fragmentary displays that must not be re-displayed in the chance-up pattern. be able to. In particular, when designing and developing the pachinko machine 10, when setting the display mode of each effect (preliminary notice), the additional data table 232a2 related to display objects that may be displayed in the chance-up pattern at the time of re-display or the chance up pattern at the time of re-display. Since the configuration of the additional data table 232a2 can be designed while grasping the display objects that should not be displayed in the up pattern, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of bugs such as discrepancies in the content of the presentation.

In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the initial setting (default setting) in the display data table 232a1 is set to "white", which is the normal display color of each character display Se1 to Se4, and "white" as the character pattern. "Weak pattern" is set. In addition, as the initial setting (default setting) of the reserved pattern and the execution pattern, the display color of "white" is set, and in the reserved image setting process (see FIG. 59(b)), the initially set reserved pattern and the execution pattern is set.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment or the second embodiment. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Details of the additional data table 232a2 in the third embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the character additional data table 232a2 of the third embodiment, and FIG. 75 schematically shows an example of the pending additional data table 232a2 of the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. The additional data table 232a2 of the third embodiment is added to the one effect based on the command from the main control device 110 (sound lamp control device 113) and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time. It also describes the display contents to be displayed.

As described above, in the third embodiment, one additional data table 232a2 is set for one unit of effect (notice). Specifically, for example, one character additional data table 232a2 (see FIG. 74) is set for character (serif) advance notice by character displays Se1 to Se4 appearing in the "ready-to-reach display". Also, for example, the existence of a variable effect being executed or the presence of a variable effect waiting, or the execution pattern and the reserved pattern that suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit in the corresponding variable effect by the "suspension change notice", 1 of the pending additional data table 232a2 (see FIG. 75) is set.

The character additional data table 232a2 shown in FIG. 74 is prepared to correspond to all the display modes of the character displays Se1 to Se4 in the "ready-to-reach display" of the variable effect. Character additional data tables 232a2 corresponding to all patterns of all effect elements of character patterns, display colors, change timings, and display color re-change contents of Se4 are stored in the data table storage area 232a.

In this character additional data table 232a2, as in the first embodiment, each character display Se1 to Se4 for one frame to be added at the time indicated by the address is associated with the address defined in the display data table 232a1. The content of the image (drawing content) is specified in detail. In the drawing contents, for each sprite (character pattern 1, character pattern 2, etc.), which is a display object to be displayed as an image of each character display Se1 to Se4 for one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and the sprite is specified. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render the sprite, such as display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined according to the type of the sprite. ing.

The character additional data table 232a2 of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 74 exemplifies the one corresponding to the "super reach only" variation pattern, and the "super reach only" variation effect (for example, as the variation pattern " E301H". See FIG. 20(b).), that is, set to correspond to the variable time of 25 seconds.

For example, in the example of FIG. 74, one character pattern (character pattern 1) is assigned a character type (sprite type ), display position, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. This character pattern 1 corresponds to the character display Se1 at the occurrence of reach that is displayed at the time when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the variable effect, that is, at the start of the variable element of "normal reach".

On the other hand, if there is no character display Se1 to Se4 to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table 232a1, the character additional data table 232a2 displays the character display to be added corresponding to the address. Null data is defined, which means that Se1 to Se4 do not exist (corresponding to address "0001H" or "02EEH" in FIG. 74). Note that the address "02EEH" is an address corresponding to 15 seconds after the start of fluctuation, that is, it corresponds to the start timing of the fluctuation element of "super reach". Since none of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are displayed at this "super reach" timing, null data is defined.

In addition, in association with the address "044CH" (22 seconds from the start of fluctuation) defined in the display data table 232a1, character type (sprite type), display position, enlargement Ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information are specified. This character pattern 2 corresponds to the in-reach character display Se2 which is displayed when 22 seconds have passed since the start of the variation of the variable performance, that is, when the variable element of the ``super reach'', ie, the ``dangerous performance'' is executed.

In addition, in association with the address "04B0H" (24 seconds from the start of fluctuation) defined in the display data table 232a1, character type (sprite type), display position, enlargement Ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information are specified. This character pattern 3 is displayed when 24 seconds have passed since the start of the variation of the variation effect, that is, when the variable element of "Super Reach" ends and the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed. This corresponds to the formulaic phrase character display Se3.

Note that, similarly to the display data table 232a1, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the character additional data table 232a2, and the end address of the character additional data table 232a2 is described. (“04E2H” in the example of FIG. 74) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address "04E2H" in which the "End" information is described, the effect to be specified in the character additional data table 232a2 is determined. The corresponding drawing contents are described.

The MPU 231 of the third embodiment receives character commands (pattern commands, color commands, timing commands, and standard phrases for display) related to the character displays Se1 to Se4 received from the sound lamp control device 113 at the start of the variable effect. command) is received and all the display modes of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are determined, the character additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the display modes of the character displays Se1 to Se4 indicated by the character-based command is stored as data. It reads from the table storage area 232a and stores it in the additional data table buffer 233c. Specifically, when a character-based command is received, standby processing is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 20 milliseconds). The character additional data table 232a2 is selected based on the character system command and the character system command received during the standby process. With this configuration, one character additional data table 232a2 can define all the display modes of the character displays Se1 to Se4.

Instead of selecting one character additional data table 232a2, the additional data table 232a2 is provisionally selected for each display mode of each character display Se1 to Se4, and all the additional data tables 232a2 are selected. Then, all these additional data tables 232a2 may be combined to generate one character additional data table 232a2 to be stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Alternatively, after selecting one character additional data table 232a2, the additional data table 232a2 may be selected so as to partially correct the display mode.

Next, the reserve additional data table 232a2 shown in FIG. 75 is prepared corresponding to the display mode of the cockpit display area Db, the execution pattern and the reserve pattern. A plurality (for each pattern) of pending additional data tables 232a2 corresponding to all patterns of all effect elements, such as the number of symbols and pending symbols, and the display colors of execution symbols and pending symbols, are stored in the data table storage area 232a. stored.

Similar to the character additional data table 232a2 (similar to the first embodiment), this pending additional data table 232a2 should correspond to the address defined in the display data table 232a1 and should be added at the time indicated by that address. The cockpit display area Db for one frame, and the contents (drawing contents) of images of execution symbols and reserved symbols are specified in detail. The drawing contents include the cockpit display area Db for one frame, and the type of sprite for each sprite (cockpit image, execution pattern, reserved pattern 1, etc.) that is a display object to be displayed as an image of the executed pattern and reserved pattern. In order to make the third pattern display device 81 draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, according to the type of sprite. drawing information is specified.

The pending additional data table 232a2 of the third embodiment shown in FIG. The time corresponding to the variation time of the variation performance (for example, "E301H" as the variation pattern; see FIG. 20(b)) is set to correspond to the variation time of 25 seconds.

For example, in the example of FIG. 75, one execution design and four reserved designs (in the example of FIG. 1), drawing information corresponding to each sprite is defined for each address.

One execution pattern and four pending patterns are displayed on the front side of the cockpit image displayed in the cockpit display area Db. pattern type, etc.), display position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information.

On the other hand, when the executed symbols and reserved symbols are not displayed at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table 232a1, the pending additional data table 232a2 sets the translucent value to the maximum value, and the executed symbols and It may be set so that the reserved design becomes transparent and invisible, and in the case of hiding (erasing) the execution design and the reserved design, predetermined erase data (for example, "Erase "data, etc.) can be set, and when the predetermined erasure data is set at a predetermined address, the executed symbols and reserved symbols are hidden (erased) at the timing indicated by the address. You may

It should be noted that, similarly to the character additional data table 232a2 (display data table 232a1), "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the leading address of the pending additional data table 232a2. "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described at the final address ("04E2H" in the example of FIG. 75) of the additional data table 232a2. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address "04E2H" in which the "End" information is described, the effect to be specified in the pending additional data table 232a2 is The corresponding drawing contents are described.

The MPU 231 of the third embodiment receives a command to change the display mode of the execution symbol or the pending symbol received from the sound lamp control device 113 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or when the variable effect is started. (Hold change command for display, hold change command for display shift, change command for display start, change command for display before reach, change command for display after reach, and change command for display after erase. These commands are described below. may be collectively referred to as a "suspended change command"), a hold additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the display mode of the execution pattern and the hold pattern indicated by the hold change command is stored in the data table. It reads from the area 232a and stores it in the additional data table buffer 233c. By configuring in this way, it is possible to define the display mode of all the execution symbols and the pending symbols in one pending additional data table 232a2, and when a pending change command is received, the pending symbols or the execution symbols can be displayed. can be changed, and the game state can be accurately suggested to the player.

When the MPU 231 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 stores the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the variation effect indicated by the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command. It reads out from the table storage area 232a and stores it in the display data table buffer 233b. At that time, when a character-based command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, one character additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the display mode of each character display Se1 to Se4 indicated by the character-based command is stored in the data table. The data is read from the area 232a and stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Further, when a pending change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, one hold additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the display mode of the cockpit display area Db, the execution pattern and the hold pattern indicated by the hold change command is stored as data. It reads from the table storage area 232a and stores it in the additional data table buffer 233c.

Then, each time the pointer 233e is updated, one display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and the character additional data table 232a2 and the pending additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c , specifies the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233e, specifies the image contents to be drawn next, and creates a drawing list (see FIG. 32).

For example, in the examples of FIGS. 74 and 75, when the pointer 233e becomes "0001H", the MPU 231 adds various sprites specified at the address "0001H" of the display data table 232a1 to the address of the pending additional data table 232a2. A drawing list is created by adding the sprites such as the cockpit image, the execution pattern, and the reserved pattern 1 defined in "0001H", and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image.

Null data is defined for the address "0001H" of the character additional data table 232a2. Therefore, the MPU 231 determines that there is no display object to be added for each of the character displays Se1 to Se4, and adds the address of the pending additional data table 232a2 to the various sprites specified at the address "0001H" of the display data table 232a1. Create a drawing list by adding various sprites defined in "0001H".

Further, when the pointer 233e becomes "01F4H", the MPU 231 inserts various sprites specified at the address "01F4H" of the display data table 232a1 into the execution symbols specified at the address "01F4H" of the additional data table 232a2. , Suspended pattern 1, etc. are added, and each sprite of character pattern 1 (character display Se1 when reach occurs) specified at the address "01F4H" of the character additional data table 232a2 is added to create a drawing list. and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the execution symbols and the suspension symbols indicated by the additional data table 232a2 for reservation are displayed, and the character display Se1 at the occurrence of ready-to-win indicated by the additional data table 232a2 for characters is displayed.

Further, when the pointer 233e becomes "02EEH", the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on various sprites specified at the address "02EEH" of the display data table 232a1, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. do. On the other hand, both the address "02EEH" of the reserve additional data table 232a2 and the address "02EEH" of the character additional data table 232a2 define Erase data. Therefore, the MPU 231 judges that there is no display object to be added with respect to the execution pattern, the reserved pattern 1, and the character pattern, etc., and draws based on various sprites specified at the address "02EEH" of the display data table 232a1. Create a list. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the cockpit image, the execution symbol, and the reserved symbol are erased (not displayed), and all of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are erased (not displayed).

Further, when the pointer 233e becomes "044CH", the MPU 231 adds the character pattern specified at the address "044CH" of the character additional data table 232a2 to the various sprites specified at the address "044CH" of the display data table 232a1. 2 (in-reach character display Se2) is added to create a drawing list, and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. On the other hand, Erase data is defined for the address "044CH" of the pending additional data table 232a2. Therefore, the MPU 231 determines that there is no display object to be added with respect to the execution pattern, the reserved pattern 1, etc. Create a drawing list by adding various sprites defined at the address "044CH". As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the in-reach character display Se2 indicated by the character additional data table 232a2 is displayed, while the cockpit image, the execution symbol and the reserved symbol are erased (not displayed).

Further, when the pointer 233e becomes "04B0H", the MPU 231 adds the cockpit image specified at the address "04B0H" of the additional data table 232a2 to the various sprites specified at the address "04B0H" of the display data table 232a1. , Execution pattern, Reserved pattern 1, etc. are added, and each sprite of character pattern 3 (fixed form phrase character display Se3) defined at address "04B0H" of the additional data table 232a2 for characters is added to the drawing list. and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the cockpit display area Db indicated by the additional data table for reservation 232a2 and the executed and reserved symbols are displayed again, and the standard phrase character display Se3 indicated by the additional data table for character 232a2 is displayed again. is displayed.

In this way, one additional data table 232a2 corresponding to all the effect elements of the effect (notice) is set for each effect (notice), and the additional data table 232a2 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. By doing so, it is configured to execute the display control of the variable effect. With this configuration, the number of additional data tables 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c is only the number of types of effects (notice), and the additional data table 232a2 is set for each effect element of the effect (notice). The number of additional data tables 232a2 can be made smaller than the case, and the capacity of the additional data table buffer 233c does not need to be increased with an increase in the number of effects (notices), and the cost can be suppressed.

In addition, when creating a drawing list (see S2501) in the drawing process (see FIG. 63), the number of additional data tables 232a2 to be referred to is only the number of effects (notices). The processing load of the MPU 231 can be reduced.

Furthermore, in setting the additional data table 232a2, the additional data table 232a2 can be clearly defined by displaying indicators such as pending patterns and execution patterns (cockpit display area Db) and fragmentary displays such as character displays Se1 to Se4. Configure separately. By configuring in this way, in the display objects of the reserved pattern and the execution pattern (cockpit display area Db) and the character displays Se1 to Se4, when the display objects are erased (invisible) and redisplayed In addition, display control should be performed by clearly dividing display objects that are index displays that can be redisplayed as they are in the chance-up pattern and display objects that are fragmentary displays that must not be re-displayed in the chance-up pattern. It can be carried out. In particular, when designing and developing the pachinko machine 10, when setting the display mode of each effect (preliminary notice), the additional data table 232a2 related to display objects that may be displayed in the chance-up pattern at the time of re-display or the chance up pattern at the time of re-display. Since the configuration of the additional data table 232a2 can be designed while grasping whether the additional data table 232a2 is related to the display object that should not be displayed in the up pattern, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of bugs such as discrepancies in the contents of the presentation.

In the third embodiment, the content of the additional data table for reservation 232a2 is displayed with priority over the content of the additional data table for character 232a2. While the additional data table for reservation 232a2 indicates game states such as reserved symbols and executed symbols, the additional data table for characters 232a2 indicates one effect mode of variable effect. Therefore, the reserved symbols or execution symbols indicating the game state are displayed with priority over the character displays Se1 to Se4, so that the game state can be accurately suggested to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 76, the display modes of the character displays Se1 to Se3, which are fragmentary displays in the third embodiment, and the display of the executed symbols and the reserved symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db, which is the index display. Aspects will be described. FIG. 76 shows that, in the changing performance of losing executed by the third symbol display device 81 of the third embodiment, while winning the chance up pattern of each character display Se1, Se2, the standard phrase character display Se3 is a normal display pattern. While displayed in , it is a diagram showing a situation in which the "suspension change notice" is being executed in the execution pattern.

Specifically, FIG. 76( a ) shows the sub-display area Ds immediately after the “ready-to-win display (variable element of “normal reach”)” appears in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 . The ready-to-win character display Se1, which expresses the words emitted from the character pattern in the central small region Ds2, is displayed in the left small region Ds1, and is displayed in the execution pattern display region Db0 of the cockpit display region Db. It is a diagram showing a state in which a "red" "suspended change notice" is displayed in the execution pattern. In FIG. 76(b), the "normal reach" variable element is started from the state of FIG. 76(a), the sub-display area Ds is erased, and the "normal reach" variable element is executed in the main display area Dm. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which a "red" "pending change notice" is continuously displayed in the execution symbols displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db. In FIG. 76(c), the variable element of "super reach" is started from the state of FIG. 76(b), the cockpit display area Db is erased, and the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. Furthermore, it is a diagram showing a state in which a reach-in-reach character display Se2 is displayed in which words spoken from the character pattern on the player side are expressed in characters. In FIG. 76(d), the variable element of "Super Reach" ends from the state in FIG. is displayed in the left small area Ds1, and a set phrase character display Se3 is displayed in the left small area Ds1. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which a “red” “suspended change notice” is continuously displayed in the execution symbols displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the display area Db; In addition, in FIGS. 76(a) to 76(d), the display mode of the third pattern is omitted.

First, in FIG. 76(a), in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol "7" is stopped and displayed, and in the right display area Dm3, the third symbol "7" is displayed. It shows a state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed, and furthermore, the third symbol is still unrecognizably "high-speed fluctuating" in the medium display area Dm2. Therefore, it is the state immediately after the so-called "ready-to-win display" with the "7" pattern appears. Further, in the cockpit display area Db, an executed symbol is displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, and reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively.

In addition, in the cockpit display area Db, the executed symbol displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0 is displayed in "red", and the reserved symbols displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4 are displayed in " displayed in white. Therefore, it is a state in which the "red" "hold change notice" is being executed in the execution pattern.

In addition, in the left small region Ds1 of the secondary display region Ds, the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence emitted from the character pattern of the central small region Ds2 is a “weak pattern” character pattern and a first chance up pattern “red ” is displayed. Specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the character display Se1 at the time of reaching occurrence of "Let's go!", which is the line uttered by the character pattern in the central small area Ds2, is the normal display color "white". to "red" which is the first chance-up pattern.

That is, in the display state of FIG. 76(a), the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 wins the execution lottery for the "suspended change notice" in the variable performance corresponding to the execution symbol, and "red" is selected and executed. Timing before the occurrence of the reach of the variable effect corresponding to the design, that is, at the time of display of the reserved design, or at the time of display (shift) of the execution pattern or at the timing before the reach, the execution timing of "suspension change notice" has arrived means.

In addition, "red" is selected by winning the change lottery of the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the lottery of the change timing of the display colors of the character displays Se1 and Se2 is made. Regarding, it means that "when reach occurs" has been selected. In addition, in FIG. 76(a), the character display Se1 at the time of reach generation displays the "weak pattern" of "Let's go!". This means that a "weak pattern", which is a normal character pattern, has been selected.

Therefore, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives, from the sound lamp control device 113, the display pending ball number command related to the pending ball number and the prefetching system command related to the "holding change notice". The number determination flag corresponding to the command is set to ON, and the pending change notice determination flag corresponding to the look-ahead command related to "hold change notice" is set to ON.

Further, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives at least the red character command for display and the change-at-occurrence command for display from the sound lamp control device 113 as commands related to the character displays Se1 to Se4. The red character flag 233k is set to ON based on the red character command, and the character color change at occurrence flag 233n is set to ON based on the change at occurrence command for display.

Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c contains at least a pending additional data table 232a2 based on when the number determination flag is turned on and when the pending change notice determination flag is turned on, and when the red character flag 233k is turned on and when the character color change flag 233n occurs. , and the character additional data table 232a2 based on the turning on of is stored (set). As a result, the MPU 231 draws based on the variable display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and the pending additional data table 232a2 and the character additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Create a list. Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the third pattern display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 76(a) is obtained. In addition, as will be described later in FIG. 76(d), in the variation effects of FIGS. 76(a) to 76(d), since the post-event restriction flag 233p is turned on, the character additional data table is actually As 232a2, a character additional data table 232a2 that reflects the turning-on of the border restriction flag 233p is stored.

FIG. 76(b) shows a state in which the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 76(a). In the variable elements of this "normal reach", in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the "7" symbol being stopped is enlarged and displayed, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is displayed. Variable effect (for example, low speed scrolling from "5" pattern to "6" pattern) is performed so that it can be visually recognized at a low speed. In addition, the sub-display area Ds is erased as the main display area Dm expands due to the occurrence of the "normal reach" variable, and the sub-display area Ds becomes invisible. Further, in the cockpit display area Db, as in the display state of FIG. 76(a), the executed symbols are displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. is displayed, and "red" "hold change notice" is continuously displayed in the execution pattern.

In the display state of FIG. 76(b), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 does not receive additional commands from the sound lamp control device 113 as compared with the display state of FIG. 76(a). Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c stores (sets) the additional data table 232a2 (hold additional data table 232a2 and character additional data table 232a2) equivalent to the storage state in FIG. 76(a). be. Therefore, the MPU 231 draws a drawing list based on the variable display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and the pending additional data table 232a2 and the character additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. to create Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the third symbol display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 76(b) is obtained.

FIG. 76(c) shows a state in which the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 76(b). In this "super reach" variable element, the "7" symbol displayed in the "normal reach" variable element is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁Also, during the execution of the variable elements of "super reach", the cockpit display area Db is erased, and instead, the variable effect is reserved at the upper left of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 and below the reach forming pattern. A number pattern (“4” in the first embodiment) indicating the number of balls is newly displayed.

In addition, in the variable elements of this "Super Reach", a "battle effect" is displayed in which a plurality of character patterns compete for victory or defeat, and furthermore, the character pattern on the player side speaks a line, and the reach middle text in which the line is expressed in letters. The character display Se2 is displayed in the "weak pattern" character pattern and the chance up pattern. Specifically, in the display area from which the cockpit display area Db has been erased, the character display Se2 during reach of "Kurae!" ” to “red”, which is the first chance-up pattern.

That is, in the display state of FIG. 76(c), "red" is selected by lottery for changing display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display is selected. Regarding the lottery for the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, as a result of selecting "at the time of occurrence of reach", character display Se2 during reach is also displayed in "red". That is, in the ready-to-win character display Se1 that has already been displayed in this variable effect, the change in the display color of the character display is reflected in the display color that reflects the lottery result. is a display that follows the display color of the character display Se1 when reach occurs. In FIG. 76(c), since the "weak pattern" of "Kurae!" is displayed in the reach-in-progress character display Se2, the normal character pattern This means that the "weak pattern" that is is selected.

In the display state of FIG. 76(c), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 additionally receives commands from the sound lamp control device 113 for the display states of FIGS. 76(a) and 76(b). do not have. Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c stores (sets) the additional data table 232a2 (hold additional data table 232a2 and character additional data table 232a2) equivalent to the storage state in FIGS. ). Therefore, the MPU 231 draws a drawing list based on the variable display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and the pending additional data table 232a2 and the character additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. to create Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the display of the third pattern display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 76(c) is obtained.

In FIG. 76(d), from the state of FIG. 76(c), the character design on the player side loses to the enemy character design in the "border effect" of the variable element of "super reach", and in the main display area Dm " This shows a state in which the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 redisplays the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db. In this state, the character pattern in the central small region Ds2 of the sub-display region Ds and the execution patterns and reserved patterns in the cockpit display region Db are visible again.

In the redisplayed cockpit display area Db, the executed symbols displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0 are displayed in the same "red" color as before being deleted, and are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4. Each reserved pattern displayed in is also displayed in the same "white" as before it is deleted. Therefore, it is a state in which the "red" "hold change notice" is continuously executed in the executed symbols.

In addition, the character pattern in the central small region Ds2 of the sub-display region Ds is displayed in a disappointing manner due to the appearance of the "failure display", and the lines emitted from the character pattern are displayed in the left small region Ds1. A fixed form phrase character display Se3 expressed in characters is displayed in a normal display color. Specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the standard phrase character display Se3 of "I'm sorry...", which is the line uttered by the character pattern in the central small area Ds2, is displayed in the normal display color of "white." is displayed.

That is, the display state of FIG. 76(d) means that the display state before the cockpit display area Db was erased by the execution of the variable element of "super reach" is redisplayed without change. ing.

In addition, in the display state of FIG. 76(d), "red" is selected by lottery for changing the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display is selected. Regarding the lottery for the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, the display color of the standard phrase character display Se3 is changed to "white" by selecting "at the time of occurrence of ready-to-win" and furthermore, by selecting the variable effect of "loss display". It means that it has been modified (changed).

When the player recognizes the display contents of FIG. 76(d), the character pattern on the player side loses in the "battle effect" of the variable element of "super reach", and the "big win" is achieved in the "super reach". It is predicted that "display" will not appear and "missing display" will appear. In addition, since the execution pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db is in the same display state as before being erased by the execution of the variable element of "super reach", the user recognizes the end of the variable performance without feeling discomfort. . Furthermore, since the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in "white", the user recognizes the end of the variable effect without feeling uncomfortable with regard to the prediction of the above-mentioned "failure display".

If the display mode at the time of redisplaying the executed symbols is changed from the display mode before erasing the executed symbols, the player notices the change and recognizes the change as a further "suspension change notice". However, it is expected that some kind of effect will be executed by the "suspension change notice" based on the change. However, since the "failure display" is confirmed in a way that disappoints the expectation, changing the display mode of the execution pattern from the display mode before erasing causes a discrepancy in the performance content, and the player may Distrust of the pachinko machine 10 is heightened, and distrust of the game parlor where the pachinko machine 10 is installed may be heightened, and the game may be interrupted.

Therefore, if the variable effect is confirmed by "losing display", the execution pattern (reserved pattern) is erased by the variable element of "super reach", etc., and if it is displayed again, the display mode before erasing will increase the chance. Even if it is displayed in a pattern, it is configured to be displayed in the display mode that was displayed before erasing (see FIGS. 76(b) and 76(d)). That is, in the variable effect of the "losing display", the display mode of the executed symbols (reserved symbols) is configured to be the same display mode before erasure and at the time of re-display. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the performance contents, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and does not feel distrustful.

In addition, when the variable effect is confirmed by the "losing display", even if the chance up pattern (for example, "red") is executed in the character display Se1 when the reach occurs or the character display Se2 during the reach, even if the "super reach is displayed after the variable element ``demonstration'' of '', the chance-up pattern is not displayed. That is, in the variable rendering of the "failure display", the display color of the standard phrase character display Se3 is configured to be displayed in the normal pattern of "white". By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the performance, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and does not feel distrustful.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the display of indicators such as executed symbols (reserved symbols) is performed even when additional effects and the like (for example, variable elements of "re-variation") are not executed. Even if there is, when the index display is redisplayed, it is configured to display in the same display mode as before erasing (before being invisible). By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the performance, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and does not feel distrustful.

In addition, each character display Se1 to Se4, especially the fragmentary display such as the fixed phrase character display Se3, etc., may be used when additional effects, etc. (for example, variable elements of "re-fluctuation") are not executed, is not given (for example, execution of a jackpot game), the chance-up pattern is not displayed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the performance, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and does not feel distrustful.

Furthermore, in setting the additional data table 232a2, the additional data table 232a2 can be clearly defined by displaying indicators such as pending patterns and execution patterns (cockpit display area Db) and fragmentary displays such as character displays Se1 to Se4. Configure separately. By configuring in this way, in the display objects of the reserved pattern and the execution pattern (cockpit display area Db) and the character displays Se1 to Se4, when the display objects are erased (invisible) and redisplayed In addition, display control should be performed by clearly dividing display objects that are index displays that can be redisplayed as they are in the chance-up pattern and display objects that are fragmentary displays that must not be re-displayed in the chance-up pattern. It can be carried out. In particular, when designing and developing the pachinko machine 10, when setting the display mode of each effect (preliminary notice), the additional data table 232a2 related to display objects that may be displayed in the chance-up pattern at the time of re-display or the chance up pattern at the time of re-display. Since the configuration of the additional data table 232a2 can be designed while grasping the display objects that should not be displayed in the up pattern, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of bugs such as discrepancies in the content of the presentation.

Also, for each effect (notice), one additional data table 232a2 corresponding to all the effect elements of the effect (notice) is set, and the additional data table 232a2 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. , is configured to execute display control of variable performance. With this configuration, the number of additional data tables 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c is only the number of types of effects (notice), and the additional data table 232a2 is set for each effect element of the effect (notice). The number of additional data tables 232a2 to be stored in the additional data table buffer 233c can be reduced, and the capacity of the additional data table buffer 233c does not need to be increased with an increase in the number of effects (advance notices), thereby suppressing costs. can do.

Furthermore, when creating a drawing list (see S2501) in the drawing process (see FIG. 63), the number of additional data tables 232a2 to be referred to is only the number of effects (notices). The processing load of the MPU 231 can be reduced.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment has the same effects as those of the first to second embodiments due to the same configuration.
<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 81. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments, the display on the third symbol display device 81 is rendered using the additional data table 232a2 (and the transfer data table 232a3) for one display data table 232a1. The display control of the third symbol display device 81 was performed by creating a list and adding the effect indicated by the additional data table 232a2 to the basic effect indicated by the display data table 232a1.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the data tables 232a4 to 232an (n is a natural number of 5 or more) are grouped for each image (sprite) or scene displayed by the third symbol display device 81. , and so on) are provided, and a large number of display patterns are provided in each of the data tables 232a4 to 232an. Then, the display control device 114 selects a display pattern from each of the data tables 232a4 to 232an based on the effect instruction (command) such as a variable effect from the sound lamp control device 113, and based on the selected display pattern Create a draw list to draw with a given priority. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily execute an effect rich in variation in the number obtained by multiplying the number of data tables 232a4 to 232an by the number of display patterns provided in each of the data tables 232a4 to 232an. .

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first to third embodiments, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the data tables 232a4 to 232an of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the configuration of data tables 232a4-232an in the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 77, in the fourth embodiment, the data tables 232a4 to 232an are grouped by images (sprites) and scenes displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Specifically, computer graphics (hereinafter referred to as "CG") of the background image such as the back surface A displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (hereinafter referred to as "animation"). ), a cockpit image data table 232a5 for displaying the animation of the cockpit display area Db, a design data table 232a6 for displaying the animation of the third design, and a character design. and a character pattern data table 232a8 for displaying the animations of character display Se1 when reach occurs, character display Se2 during reach, fixed phrase character display Se3, and pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4. , a pending symbol data table 232a9 for displaying animation of pending symbols (including execution symbols; the same shall apply hereinafter), an error symbol data table 232a10 for displaying animation of error symbols, and so on. There are grouped data tables 232a4-232an.

The data tables 232a4-232an are stored in the data table storage area 232a of the program ROM 232, and each data table 232a4-232an is associated with a large number of display patterns.

When the display control device 114 receives a command from the sound lamp control device 113, it selects one display pattern from each of the data tables 232a4 to 232an according to the command, and stores it in each buffer (not shown) of the work RAM 233. do. Then, based on the counter value of a later-described switching counter (not shown) also provided in the work RAM 233, a drawing list is created based on the display patterns stored in each buffer.

Each data table 232a4 to 232an has a predetermined priority (for example, priority 1 to priority 12). Based on this, each buffer (not shown) corresponding to each data table 232a4-232an is referenced to create a drawing list. That is, when one image overlaps another image at a predetermined drawing position, the display contents indicated by the data tables 232a4 to 232an with higher priority (lower priority numbers) are displayed forward (front). side).

Specifically, as shown in the example of FIG. 77, the background image data table 232a4 is associated with "priority 12", which is the lowest priority, and the cockpit image data table 232a5 is associated with the background image data table 232a4. "Priority 11", which is higher in priority, is associated with the pattern data table 232a6, and "Priority 5", which is higher in priority than the data table (not shown) of "Priority 6", is associated with the pattern data table 232a6. The character data table 232a7 is associated with "priority 4", which is higher in priority than the pattern data table 232a6, and the character/pattern data table 232a8 is associated with "priority 3", which is higher in priority than the character data table 232a7. The reserved design data table 232a9 is associated with "priority 2" higher in priority than the character design data table 232a8, and the error design data table 232a10 is associated with "priority 1" with the highest priority. It is

Next, referring to FIGS. 78 to 80, when the display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the variation pattern of "normal reach only", the display pattern selected for each of the data tables 232a4 to 232an An example is explained. FIG. 78(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the background pattern 1 of the background image in the "normal reach only" variation pattern of the fourth embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a cockpit pattern 1 of a cockpit image in a variation pattern of “normal reach only”;

78 to 80, background pattern 1 is selected from the background image data table 232a4, cockpit pattern 1 is selected from the cockpit image data table 232a5, design pattern 1 is selected from the design data table 232a6, and character design data. A case where character pattern 1 is selected from table 232a8 will be described. As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 transmits a display variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern of "normal reach only", and the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, each data table 232a4 to 232a7, a display pattern corresponding to the "normal reach only" variable effect is selected, and an example in which background pattern 1, cockpit pattern 1, symbol pattern 1 and character pattern 1 are selected will be described. . Description of other data tables 232a4 (character data table 232a7, reserved design data table 232a9, etc.) is omitted.

Each display pattern defines a "display order" indicating the display order, a "switching counter value" corresponding to the "display order", and a "scene" corresponding to the "display order". In the "scene", "time" indicating the display time of each "target data" constituting the "scene", and "target data" indicating the type of image data, transfer source address (not shown), etc. , ``parameters'' indicating the display position coordinates and transfer destination address (not shown) of the ``target data'', and the drawing method of the ``target data''. "Semi-transparent", "enlarged display" for enlarged display, "non-display" for non-display, etc., and "outline" in the "scene" are defined. In each display pattern, according to the "display order", every time the value of the switching counter (to be described later) reaches the "switching counter value" assigned to each "scene", the "scene" is switched to the next "display order". "Scene" is configured to be displayed by switching.

Here, the switching counter in the fourth embodiment will be explained. The switching counter of the fourth embodiment has a function similar to that of the pointer 233e of the first embodiment. This is for designating a "scene" from which data transfer data information should be acquired.

The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 once initializes the switching counter to "0" as the data tables 232a4 to 232an are stored in the buffer (not shown). Then, V interrupt processing (see FIG. 49(b)) executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of one frame of image is completed. In the display setting process (see FIG. 57), a counter update process (not shown) is executed so that the value of the switching counter is incremented by one. The MPU 231 initializes the value of the switching counter to "0" each time the "scene" is switched, that is, each time the "switching counter value" associated with each "scene" is reached. "Scene" is switched to the "Scene" corresponding to the next "Display Order".

The MPU 231 selects the drawing contents (“object data”, “parameters”, “display mode") to create a drawing list (see FIG. 81), which will be described later, and from the "parameter" associated with the "target data" of the "scene", a predetermined Transfer data information relating to sprite image data (information for transferring image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236) is acquired, and the transfer data information is stored in the created drawing list. to add. Specifically, a new drawing list is created by adding the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

As a result, effects corresponding to the display patterns of the data tables 232a4 to 232an stored in each buffer (not shown) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, by storing the display pattern of each data table 232a4 to 232an in each buffer and changing the display pattern based on a command or the like, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

Also, if there is transfer data information in the "parameter", based on the transfer data information, it will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the sprite until drawing of the corresponding predetermined sprite is started. It is possible to store the image data not stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 without fail.

In the background pattern 1 of FIG. 78(a), the "display order" is composed only of "1". "Scene 001" is associated. Therefore, by "Scene 001" of 1, the display of the background image is controlled until the value of the switching counter reaches "750", that is, 750×20 milliseconds (frame)=15 seconds. means.

Specifically, in “Scene 001”, “CG”, which is “target data”, is set to “10” as “time” (that is, 10×20 milliseconds (frame)=0.2 seconds). ), the display is controlled at the position of the display coordinates (x1, y1) defined as the "parameter" with the "display mode" defined as "display". Thereafter, a total of 15 background images are displayed in the entire main display area Dm based on the "object data", the "parameters" and the "display mode" for each "time" in the order specified by the "scene 001". displayed for seconds.

In the cockpit pattern 1 of FIG. 78(b), as in the background pattern 1, the "display order" is composed only of "1". ” and “scene”=“scene 101” are associated with each other. Therefore, the display of the cockpit image is controlled until the value of the switching counter reaches "750", ie, 750×20 milliseconds (frame)=15 seconds, by "Scene 101" of 1. means.

Specifically, in the "scene 101", the "target data", ie, the "cockpit design" is first set to "750" as the "time" (that is, 750 x 20 milliseconds (frames) = 15 seconds). ), display control is performed with the “display mode” defined as “display” at the position of the display coordinates (x50, y1) defined as the “parameter”, and the cockpit image is displayed in the cockpit display area Db on the lower side of the display screen. Displayed for 15 seconds.

In the symbol pattern 1 of FIG. 79, the "display order" is composed of "1" to "4". ”=“Scene 201”, and “2” for “Display order” is associated with “Switching counter value”=“150” and “Scene”=“Scene 202”, and “3 , "switching counter value" = "200" and "scene" = "scene 203" are associated with "display order" of "4", and "switching counter value ”=“50” and “scene”=“scene 204” are associated with each other, and then the process ends.

Therefore, in the "scene 201" corresponding to "1" in the "display order", until the value of the switching counter reaches "350", that is, 350×20 milliseconds (frames)=7 seconds, This means that the display of the third pattern is controlled, and in this "scene 201", the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element of the third pattern. ing. Also, in the "scene 202" corresponding to "2" of the "display order", until the value of the switching counter reaches "150", that is, 150×20 milliseconds (frames)=3 seconds, This means that the display of the third symbol is controlled, and in this "scene 202", the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the variable element of the "low speed variation" of the third symbol. ing. Also, in the "scene 203" corresponding to "3" of the "display order", until the value of the switching counter reaches "200", that is, 200×20 milliseconds (frames)=4 seconds, This means that the display of the third pattern is controlled, and in this "scene 203", the third pattern display device 81 displays the variation (scroll) of the third pattern in the variable element of "normal reach". is configured as Also, in "scene 204" corresponding to "4" in "display order", until the value of the switching counter reaches "50", that is, 50×20 milliseconds (frame)=1 second , means that the display of the third symbol is controlled, and in this "scene 204", the third symbol display device 81 displays the fixed stop display of the third symbol in the variable element of "normal reach". is configured as

Specifically, in the "scene 201" where the "display order" is "1", the "left symbol", "target data", "left symbol", " Right symbol" and "middle symbol" are between "20" as "time" (that is, during 20 × 20 milliseconds (frame) = 0.4 seconds), display coordinates defined as "parameters" (respectively The display is controlled to be "displayed" as the "display mode" at positions (x10, y50), (x90, y50), (x50, y50). That is, each symbol image (previous stop result) is stopped and displayed at the stop position of each symbol Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Dm for 0.4 seconds.

After that, similarly in the "scene 201", the "left pattern", "right pattern" and "middle pattern" which are the "target data" are set to "10" as the "time" (that is, 10×20 milliseconds (frames). ) = 0.2 seconds), at the positions of the display coordinates ((x10, y51), (x90, y51), (x50, y51)) defined as the “parameters”, the “display mode” is set to “half "Transparent" is specified and display controlled. That is, each pattern in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Dm is in a "high-speed change" state, and each semi-transparently drawn third pattern is difficult for the player to visually recognize from the initial stop position to another coordinate. displayed in good condition. Therefore, the displayed object arranged on the back side of each third pattern is visible through each third pattern because each third pattern is translucent. In this state, the third symbol is made invisible, and the previous stop symbol is replaced with the current stop symbol.

Thereafter, until the value of the switching counter reaches "350" defined by the "switching counter value", each pattern row Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Dm is displayed in the order defined by the "scene 201". are controlled to be displayed, and in this "scene 201", "high-speed variation" is executed for a total of 7 seconds. When the value of the switching counter reaches "350", the "scene" is switched from "scene 201" to "scene 202" and the value of the switching counter is initialized to "0".

Next, in the “scene 202” with the “display order” of “2”, the “left pattern” which is the “object data” is set to “time” of “10” (that is, 10×20 milliseconds (frame)= 0.2 seconds), the display is controlled at the position of the display coordinates (x10, y99) defined as the "parameter" with the "display mode" defined as "display". In the "scene 202", the "right pattern" and the "middle pattern" that are the "target data" are set to "time" of "10" (that is, 10 x 20 milliseconds (frame) = 0.2 seconds). ), display control is performed with the “display mode” defined as “translucent” at the positions of the display coordinates ((x90, y99) and (x50, y99), respectively) defined as the “parameters”. That is, the variation mode of the third pattern in the main display area Dm becomes the "slow variation" state, and the third pattern in the left pattern row Z1 is displayed so as to be clearly visible from the top of the main display region Dm, and the middle pattern row is displayed. And in the right symbol rows Z2 and Z3, each semi-transparently drawn third symbol is displayed in such a state that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it from above the main display area Dm.

After that, until the value of the switching counter reaches "150" specified by the "switching counter value", each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Dm is displayed in the order specified by the "scene 202". is controlled for display, and in this "scene 202", "low speed variation" is executed for a total of 3 seconds. When the value of the switching counter reaches "150", the "scene" is switched from "scene 202" to "scene 203" and the value of the switching counter is initialized to "0".

Next, in the “scene 203” with the “display order” of “3”, the “left pattern” and “right pattern” that are the “object data” are between “10” as the “time” (that is, 10×20 mm). second (frame) = 0.2 seconds), at the position of the display coordinates ((x10, y99), (x90, y99), respectively) defined as the "parameter", "display mode" is "enlarged display" is displayed and controlled as Also, in the "scene 203", the "medium pattern", which is the "target data", has a "time" of "10" (that is, 10 x 20 milliseconds (frame) = 0.2 seconds), " At the position of the display coordinates (x50, y99) defined as "parameter", the "display mode" is defined as "display" and the display is controlled. That is, the variation mode of the third symbols in the main display area Dm becomes the "normal reach" state, and the third symbols of the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 are enlarged and displayed at a predetermined stop position, and the middle symbols are displayed. In row Z2, the third symbol in the "low speed fluctuation" state is displayed in a state that the player can visually recognize it from above the main display area Dm.

Thereafter, until the value of the switching counter reaches "200" defined by the "switching counter value", each pattern row Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Dm is displayed in the order defined by the "scene 203". In this "Scene 203", an effect is executed until the middle symbols in the variable elements of "Normal Reach" stop for a total of 4 seconds. When the value of the switching counter reaches "200", the "scene" is switched from "scene 203" to "scene 204" and the value of the switching counter is initialized to "0".

Next, in the "scene 204" with the "display order" of "4", the "left pattern", the "right pattern" and the "middle pattern" that are the "target data" are displayed during the "time" of "10" (i.e. , for 10×20 milliseconds (frame)=0.2 seconds), at the display coordinates ((x10, y50), (x90, y50), (x50, y50) respectively) specified as "parameters" , "display mode" is defined as "display" and display is controlled. That is, the variation mode of the third symbols in the main display area Dm becomes the "temporary stop" state, and the third symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed at the predetermined stop positions.

After that, until the value of the switching counter reaches "50" specified by the "switching counter value", the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Dm are displayed in the order specified by the "scene 204". In this "Scene 204", an effect of stopping display of each symbol in the variable element of "Normal Reach" is executed for a total of 1 second. Then, when the value of the switching counter reaches "50", the "scene 204" is finished, and the entire presentation of the symbol pattern 1 is finished.

In the character pattern 1 in FIG. 80, the "display order" is composed of "1" to "4". ”=“scene 000”, and “2” for “display order” is associated with “switching counter value”=“50” and “scene”=“scene 301”, and “3 , "switching counter value" = "150" and "scene" = "scene 000" are associated with "display order" of "4", and "switching counter value ”=“50” and “scene”=“scene 302” are associated with each other, and then the process ends. "Scene 000" indicates that the "display mode" of the "target data" is "non-display", that is, the state is invisible.

Therefore, in "scene 000" corresponding to "1" in the "display order", any character is displayed until the value of the switching counter reaches "500", that is, for 500×20 frames=10 seconds. In this "Scene 000", the third pattern display device 81 is configured so that the character displays Se1 to Se4 are not displayed. Further, in "scene 301" corresponding to "2" of "display order", the character pattern 1 is displayed until the value of the switching counter reaches "50", that is, for 50×20 frames=1 second. This means that the display is controlled, and in this "scene 301", the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a character display Se1 when a reach occurs. In addition, in "scene 000" corresponding to "3" in the "display order", any character is displayed until the value of the switching counter reaches "150", that is, for 150×20 frames=3 seconds. In this "Scene 000", the third pattern display device 81 is configured so that the character displays Se1 to Se4 are not displayed. In the "scene 302" corresponding to "4" in the "display order", the character pattern 3 is displayed until the value of the switching counter reaches "50", that is, for 50×20 frames=1 second. This means that the display is controlled, and in this "scene 302", the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display the fixed phrase character display Se3.

Specifically, first, in "scene 000" with "display order" of "1", "target data" does not exist (denoted as "-"), and "display mode" is defined as "non-display". Therefore, display control is performed assuming that none of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 during "500" as "time" (that is, during 500×20 frames=10 seconds). . Then, the state defined by "scene 000" (that is, "non-display") is maintained until the value of the switching counter reaches "500" defined by the "switching counter value". When the value of the switching counter reaches "500", the "scene" is switched from "scene 000" to "scene 301" and the value of the switching counter is initialized to "0".

Next, in the “scene 301” with the “display order” of “2”, the “text pattern 1”, which is the “target data”, is displayed during the “time” of “10” (that is, 10×20 frames=0.2 seconds), the display is controlled at the position of the display coordinates (x10, y90) defined as the "parameter" with the "display mode" defined as "display". That is, the ready-to-win character display Se1 corresponding to the character pattern 1 is displayed at the position of the left small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds for 0.2 seconds.

After that, until the value of the switching counter reaches "50" defined by the "switching counter value", the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence in the left small area Ds1 is displayed in the order defined by the "scene 301". is displayed, and in this "scene 301", the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is displayed for a total of 1 second. When the value of the switching counter reaches "50", the "scene" is switched from "scene 301" to "scene 000" and the value of the switching counter is initialized to "0".

Next, in the "scene 000" with the "display order" of "3", the "target data" does not exist (denoted as "-") and the "display mode" is defined as "non-display". The display is controlled so that none of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 during "150" as "time" (that is, during 150×20 frames=3 seconds). Then, the state defined by "scene 000" (that is, "non-display") is maintained until the value of the switching counter reaches "150" defined by the "switching counter value". When the value of the switching counter reaches "150", the "scene" is switched from "scene 000" to "scene 302" and the value of the switching counter is initialized to "0".

Next, in the “scene 302” with the “display order” of “4”, the “text pattern 3”, which is the “object data”, is displayed during the “time” of “10” (that is, 10×20 frames=0.2 seconds), the display is controlled at the position of the display coordinates (x10, y90) defined as the "parameter" with the "display mode" defined as "display". That is, the fixed phrase character display Se3 corresponding to the character pattern 3 is displayed at the position of the left small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds for 0.2 seconds.

After that, until the value of the switching counter reaches "50" specified by the "switching counter value", the fixed phrase character display Se3 in the left small area Ds1 is displayed in the order specified by the "scene 302". The display is controlled, and in this "scene 302", the standard phrase character display Se3 is displayed for a total of one second. Then, when the value of the switching counter reaches "50", the "scene 302" is finished, and the overall presentation of the character pattern 1 is finished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the drawing list in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list when a "normal reach" variable element occurs in the "normal reach only" variation pattern of the fourth embodiment.

When the MPU 231 receives a command from the sound lamp control device 113, it selects one display pattern from each data table 232a4 according to the command, and refers to the value of the switching counter and the like in the selected display pattern. However, the drawing list shown in FIG. 81 is created according to the predetermined priority set for each display pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 81, "Scene 001" of the background pattern 1 is extracted as the background image, "Scene 101" of the cockpit pattern 1 is extracted as the cockpit image, and so on, in descending order of sprite priority. "Scene 203" of pattern pattern 1 is extracted as a (third pattern), ..., "Scene 301" of character pattern 1 is extracted as a character pattern, and detailed "object data" and "parameter , etc. is described (detailed information). Although not shown, the drawing list of the fourth embodiment is similar to the drawing lists of the first to third embodiments, in which predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 . Transfer data information for transferring to the storage area 236a is also described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites by overwriting them in the frame buffers 236b and 236c. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprites with the lowest priority can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprites with the highest priority can be arranged on the frontmost side.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the data table 232a4 grouped for each image (sprite) and scene (scene) displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is provided. The data table 232a4 is configured to provide a large number of display patterns. Then, the display control device 114 selects a display pattern from each data table 232a4 based on the effect instruction (command) such as a variable effect from the sound lamp control device 113, and a predetermined display pattern is selected based on the selected display pattern. Create a draw list to draw in priority order. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily execute an effect rich in variations obtained by multiplying the number of data tables 232a4 by the number of display patterns provided in each data table 232a4.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment has the same effects as those of the first to third embodiments due to the same configuration.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, in the variable performance, the display mode of each character display Se1 to Se4 is changed according to the degree of expectation for the big win in the variable performance, and in the case of a big win, it appears after the "end performance". While the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed while maintaining the change mode, in the case of a failure, the fixed phrase character display Se3 appearing after the "event effect" is changed from the changed mode to the normal display mode (that is, "white"). It is configured to be modified and displayed.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, when an abnormal state occurs in the game state, an abnormal sound (warning sound) is output from the voice output device 226 in order to suggest the abnormal state to the player. An error character display Se5 is displayed to suggest to the player that an abnormality (error) has occurred in the third symbol display device 81, to make the player recognize that it is in an abnormal state, and to let the player know the cause of the abnormality. is structured to suggest

Here, the display modes of the character displays Se1 to Se4 appearing in the variable performance are determined based on the lottery result of the variable performance, while the error character display Se5 is displayed in the pachinko machine regardless of the lottery of the variable performance. 10, and the display mode is determined by independent control.

However, when the error character display Se5 is displayed in the variable effect, the character displays Se1 to Se4 appearing in the variable effect and the display mode of the error character display Se5 are displayed in display modes that are not related to each other. Then, the player may misunderstand the degree of expectation for the big win and the abnormal state in the variable presentation.

Specifically, although the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 in the variable effect are not displayed in the chance up pattern, the error character display Se5 is displayed in the same color as the chance up pattern. In this case, the player sees the display color of the error character display Se5, misunderstands it as a chance-up pattern, and expects a big win in the variable effect. On the other hand, although the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 in the variable effect are displayed in the chance up pattern, the error character display Se5 is displayed in the same type of display color as the normal display color instead of the chance up pattern. In this case, the player sees the display color of the error character display Se5, misunderstands that the degree of expectation for the big win in the variable performance has decreased, and loses interest in the game.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, in addition to the character displays Se1 to Se4 indicating the degree of expectation for a big win in the variable effect, an error character display Se5 for notifying an abnormality in the game state during the variable effect is present. When the error character display Se5 is displayed, the display mode of the error character display Se5 is configured to be synchronized with the display modes of the character displays Se1 to Se4. Specifically, when the variation effect is a big win and the character displays Se1 to Se4 are displayed in the chance-up pattern, the error character display Se5 is displayed in the same color as the chance-up pattern. to display. Further, in the case where the variable effect is lost, the character display Se1 during reach occurrence and the character display Se2 during reach are displayed in the chance up pattern, and the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in the display color of the normal pattern, While the on-reach character display Se1 and the in-reach character display Se2 are displayed, the error character display Se5 is displayed in the same color as the chance up pattern, while the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed. The error character display Se5 is configured to be displayed in a display color similar to that of the normal pattern.

With this configuration, even if the character displays Se1 to Se4 and the error character display Se5 are simultaneously displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the player misunderstands the degree of expectation for the big win in the variable performance. Moreover, the content of the abnormal state can also be clearly recognized. Therefore, while making the player accurately recognize the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10, the discrepancies in the performance contents do not occur, the player does not have excessive expectations, and the player does not feel a sense of distrust. games can be provided.

In addition, the error character display Se5 is configured to be displayed in the foreground among the display items in the third symbol display device 81 in order to inform the player of the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. Then, the display mode of the error character display Se5 is displayed so as to be synchronized with the display modes of the character displays Se1 to Se4 (regular pattern or chance up pattern). With this configuration, even if the character displays Se1 to Se4 are difficult for the player to see (difficult to see) due to other displays, especially the error character display Se5, the character displays Se1 to Se4 By displaying the error character display Se5 synchronized with the display color of , in the forefront of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 so as to be visible to the player, the player can surely recognize the degree of expectation for the big win in the variable performance. be able to.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

With reference to FIGS. 82 and 83, character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence, character display Se2 during reach, fixed phrase character display Se3, pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4, and error character display Se5 in the fifth embodiment. An execution example (display example) will be described.

First, referring to FIG. 82, in the change rendering of the failure, the display color of the standard phrase character display Se3 is corrected (changed/restricted), and error character display is performed in synchronization with the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3. The situation in which Se5 is displayed will be described. FIG. 82 shows that, in the change effect of losing executed by the third symbol display device 81, while winning the chance up pattern (for example, "red") of each character display Se1 to Se3, the post-event restriction flag 233p controls the FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a situation in which the display color of the phrase display Se3 is corrected (changed) to "white"; Also, it is a diagram showing a situation in which the error character display Se5 is displayed in a display color that matches the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3.

More specifically, FIG. 82(a) shows the sub-display area Ds immediately after the "ready-to-win display (variable element of "normal reach")" appears in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 82(b) is a diagram showing a state in which a ready-to-win character display Se1, in which words spoken from the character pattern of the central small area Ds2 are expressed in characters, is displayed in the left small area Ds1. The variable element of "normal reach" is started from the state of 82(a), the sub display area Ds is erased, and the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm, and an error character indicating the error state is displayed. FIG. 82(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the display Se5 is displayed. In the main display area Dm, the variable element of "super reach" is executed, and furthermore, a reach-in-progress character display Se2 is displayed in which words spoken from the character pattern on the player's side are displayed, and an error state is indicated. FIG. 82(d) shows a state in which the error character display Se5 is displayed. The area Db is redisplayed, and the third pattern "failure display" appears in the main display area Dm, and further, the dialogue emitted from the character pattern in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is displayed as characters. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which a fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and an error character display Se5 indicating an error state is displayed; In addition, in FIGS. 82(a) to 82(d), the display mode of the third pattern is omitted.

First, in FIG. 82(a), similarly to FIG. 64(a) in the first embodiment, in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed on the right. In the area Dm3, the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed, and furthermore, in the medium display area Dm2, the third symbol is still unrecognizably "high-speed fluctuating". Therefore, it is the state immediately after the so-called "ready-to-win display" with the "7" pattern appears. Further, in the cockpit display area Db, an executed symbol is displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, and reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively.

In addition, in the left small region Ds1 of the secondary display region Ds, the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence emitted from the character pattern of the central small region Ds2 is a “weak pattern” character pattern and a first chance up pattern “red ” is displayed. Specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the character display Se1 at the time of reaching occurrence of "Let's go!", which is the line uttered by the character pattern in the central small area Ds2, is the normal display color "white". to "red" which is the first chance-up pattern.

That is, in the display state of FIG. 82(a), the character displays Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 have won the lottery to change the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3, and "red" is selected. This means that "at the time of occurrence of reach" was selected in the lottery for the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2. In addition, in FIG. 82(a), the character display Se1 at the time of reach generation displays the "weak pattern" of "Let's go!". This means that a "weak pattern", which is a normal character pattern, has been selected.

Therefore, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives at least the display red character command and the display occurrence change command from the sound lamp control device 113, and the red character flag 233k is set based on the display red character command. It is set to ON, and the character color change flag 233n at occurrence is set to ON based on the command for change at occurrence for display.

Therefore, in the additional data table buffer 233c, at least the character pattern additional data table 232a2 (actually, FIG. 82(c) ), an additional data table 232a2 for character color based on the on of the red character flag 233k, and additional data for character timing based on the on of the character color change flag 233n at occurrence Table 232a2 is stored (set). As a result, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the variable display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. . Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the third symbol display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 82(a) is obtained. In addition, although it will be described later in FIG. 82(d), in the variation effects of FIGS. 82(a) to 82(d), since the limit flag 233p is turned on, actually, as an additional data table 232a2 , an additional data table 232a2 for character correction is stored.

In FIG. 82(b), from the state of FIG. 82(a), the "normal reach" variable element is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 1) is in a full tank state. When the full state of the lower tray 50 is detected by a lower tray full state switch (not shown) for detecting whether or not an error suggesting the full state of the lower tray on the forefront of the third pattern display device 81 It shows a state in which character display Se5 is displayed.

In the variable elements of this "normal reach", in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the "7" symbol being stopped is enlarged and displayed, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is displayed. Variable effect (for example, low speed scrolling from "5" pattern to "6" pattern) is performed so that it can be visually recognized at a low speed. In addition, the sub-display area Ds is erased as the main display area Dm expands due to the occurrence of the "normal reach" variable, and the sub-display area Ds becomes invisible. In the cockpit display area Db, as in the display state of FIG. 82(a), the executed symbols are displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. is displayed.

In addition, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, as described above, the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 1) is in the full state, and the game is in an abnormal state in which no more balls can be put out. An error character display Se5 is displayed to suggest to the user. Specifically, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, an error character display Se5 saying "Please remove the ball" is displayed to prompt the player to remove the ball from the lower tray 50. is displayed in a display color (for example, "white") of the same type as "white" which is the normal display color of . That is, in FIG. 82(b), since the character displays Se1 to Se3 are not displayed, the error character display Se5 is displayed in a normal display color (for example, "white").

Note that the error character display Se5 in FIG. 82(b) may be displayed in a display color (for example, "red") similar to the display color of the chance up pattern of each of the character displays Se1 to Se3. . Further, the display position of the error character display Se5 may be displayed in a portion other than the central portion of the main display area Dm, and any display is possible as long as it can clearly suggest the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 to the player. An error character display Se5 may be displayed in the area. Specifically, the error character display Se5 may be displayed in a lower area of the main display area Dm, a display area overlapping with the cockpit display area Dm, or a display area overlapping with the sub-display area Ds. Further, the error character display Se5 is configured to indicate that the bottom tray is full, but the error character display Se5 may be configured to display other error displays. Specifically, the error character display Se5 displays messages such as ball clogged abnormalities, door open abnormalities, excessive payout abnormalities, etc. that indicate abnormalities in the game state, magnet detection abnormalities, radio wave detection abnormalities, etc. that indicate fraud detection. You may

In the display state of FIG. 82(b), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives an error command indicating that the lower tray is full from the sound lamp control device 113 for the display state of FIG. 82(a). . Therefore, in the additional data table buffer 233c, the storage state in FIG. 232a2)), an error additional data table 232a2 is stored (set). Therefore, the MPU 231 generates a , to create a drawing list. Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the third symbol display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 82(b) is obtained.

FIG. 82(c) shows a state in which the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 82(b). In the "super reach" variable element, the "7" symbol displayed in the "normal reach" variable element is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁Also, during the execution of the variable element of "Super Reach", the cockpit display area Db is erased, and instead, the variable effect is reserved at the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and below the Reach formation symbol. A number pattern (“4” in the first embodiment) indicating the number of balls is newly displayed. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, an error character display Se5 is displayed on the forefront of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, as in FIG. 82(b). It should be noted that the numerical pattern indicating the number of pending balls in the variable effect may be configured to be displayed at all times during execution of the variable effect.

In addition, in the variable elements of this "Super Reach", a "battle effect" is displayed in which a plurality of character patterns compete for victory or defeat, and furthermore, the character pattern on the player side speaks a line, and the reach middle text in which the line is expressed in letters. The character display Se2 is displayed in the "weak pattern" character pattern and the chance up pattern. Specifically, in the display area from which the cockpit display area Db has been erased, the character display Se2 during reach of "Kurae!" ” to “red”, which is the first chance-up pattern.

That is, in the display state of FIG. 82(c), "red" is selected by lottery for changing display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display is selected. Regarding the lottery for the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, as a result of selecting "at the time of occurrence of reach", character display Se2 during reach is also displayed in "red". That is, in the ready-to-win character display Se1 that has already been displayed in this variable effect, the change in the display color of the character display is reflected in the display color that reflects the lottery result, so the display color of this ready-to-win character display Se2 is displayed. is a display that follows the display color of the character display Se1 when reach occurs. In FIG. 82(c), since the "weak pattern" of "Kurae!" is displayed in the reachable character display Se2, the character pattern lottery for the reachable character display Se2 is a normal character pattern. This means that the "weak pattern" that is is selected.

At the center of the main display area Dm, as in FIG. 82(b), the bottom tray 50 (see FIG. 1) is in a full state, which is an abnormal state where no more balls can be dispensed. An error character display Se5 is displayed to indicate to the player that the error character display Se5 is displayed in a display color (for example, "red") that matches the display color of the in-reach character display Se2. Specifically, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the error character display Se5 of "Please remove the ball" prompting the player to remove the ball from the lower tray 50 is replaced by the in-reach character display Se2. It is displayed in a display color (for example, “red”) of the same type as “red” which is the display color of the chance up pattern.

In the display state of FIG. 82(c), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 does not receive additional commands from the sound lamp control device 113 as compared to the display state of FIG. 82(b). In other words, the error cancellation command indicating to cancel the abnormal state of the lower tray full state has not been received. Therefore, in the additional data table buffer 233c, an additional data table 232a2 for each character display Se1 to Se3 equivalent to the storage state in FIG. In this state, three additional data tables 232a2)) for character change including the additional data table 232a2 for error and one additional data table 232a2 for error are stored (set). Therefore, the MPU 231 generates a , to create a drawing list. Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the third symbol display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 82(c) is obtained.

In FIG. 82(d), from the state of FIG. 82(c), the character pattern on the player's side loses to the enemy character pattern in the variable element of "Super Reach", and " This shows a state in which the "missing display" appears and the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this state, the character pattern in the central small region Ds2 of the sub-display region Ds and the execution patterns and reserved patterns in the cockpit display region Db are visible again.

In addition, the character pattern in the central small region Ds2 of the sub-display region Ds is displayed in a disappointing manner due to the appearance of the "failure display", and the lines emitted from the character pattern are displayed in the left small region Ds1. A fixed form phrase character display Se3 expressed in characters is displayed in a normal display color. Specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the standard phrase character display Se3 of "I'm sorry...", which is the line uttered by the character pattern in the central small area Ds2, is displayed in the normal display color "white". is displayed.

Further, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, as in FIG. 82(c), the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 1) is in a full state, and an abnormal state in which no more balls can be dispensed. The error character display Se5 suggesting to the player that the , “white”). Specifically, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, an error character display Se5 of "Please remove the ball" prompting the player to remove the ball from the lower tray 50 is displayed instead of the standard phrase character display Se3. It is displayed in a display color (for example, "white") of the same system as the normal display color "white".

That is, in the display state of FIG. 82(d), "red" is selected by lottery for changing the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display is selected. Regarding the lottery for the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, the display color of the standard phrase character display Se3 is changed to "white" by selecting "at the time of occurrence of ready-to-win" and furthermore, by selecting the variable effect of "loss display". It means that it has been modified (changed).

When the player recognizes the display contents of FIG. 82(d), the character design on the player side is defeated in the "battle effect" of the "super reach", so that the "jackpot display" is displayed in the "super reach". It is predicted that "failure display" will appear without appearing. In addition, since the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in "white", the end of the variable effect is recognized without giving a sense of incongruity regarding the prediction of the above-mentioned "failure display". Furthermore, since the display color of the error character display Se5 is displayed in "white", the end of the variable effect is recognized without feeling uncomfortable with regard to the prediction of the above-mentioned "failure display".

Here, in this variable effect, as described above, "red" is selected by winning the change lottery of the display color of each character display Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display Regarding the lottery for the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, "at the time of occurrence of reach" is selected. Therefore, since the display color of each character display Se1 to Se3 is collectively set as described above, the standard phrase character display Se3 should also be displayed in "red" according to the collective setting. Since the "missing display" appears, the standard phrase character display Se3 is configured to be displayed in the normal display color "white" instead of the chance-up pattern.

Therefore, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives at least the red character command for display, the change-at-occurrence command for display, the standard phrase for display command, and the error command from the sound lamp control device 113, and The red character flag 233k is set to ON based on the command, the character color change flag 233n is set to ON based on the command for change when generated for display, and the restriction flag 233p for display is set to ON based on the standard phrase for display normal command. is set on and a lower tray error flag (not shown) is set on based on the error command. Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c contains at least a character pattern additional data table 232a2 based on the contents of the character pattern memory 233j, a character color additional data table 232a2 based on the ON state of the red character flag 233k, and a character color when generated. A character timing additional data table 232a2 based on when the change flag 233n is turned on, a character correction additional data table 232a2 based on when the edge limit flag 233p is turned on, and an error additional data table 232a2 based on when the bottom tray error flag is turned on. , are stored (set) respectively.

As a result, the MPU 231 generates the data based on the variation display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and the character change additional data table 232a2 and the error additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. to create a drawing list. Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the third pattern display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 82(d) is obtained.

In this way, when the variable effect is lost, the character display Se1 when the reach occurs and the character display Se2 during the reach are displayed in the chance-up pattern, and the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in the display color of the normal pattern. In this case, while the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence and the character display Se2 during reach are displayed, the error character display Se5 is displayed in the same color as the chance up pattern, and the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed. In the meantime, the error character display Se5 is configured to be displayed in a display color of the same system as the display color of the normal pattern. With this configuration, even if the character displays Se1 to Se4 and the error character display Se5 are simultaneously displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the player misunderstands the degree of expectation for the big win in the variable performance. Moreover, the content of the abnormal state can also be clearly recognized. Therefore, it is possible to provide a comfortable game in which the content of the performance is not inconsistent, the player does not have excessive expectations, and the player does not feel distrustful.

Next, referring to FIG. 83, in the variation effect of the jackpot including the variation element of "re-variation", the display color of the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 (fixed phrase character display Se3) is displayed as it is in the chance up pattern. Describe the situation. FIG. 65 shows that in the variation effect of the big hit executed by the third symbol display device 81, the chance up pattern (for example, "red") of each character display Se1 to Se4 is won, and the variation element of "re-variation" is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a situation in which the display color of the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 displayed before is displayed remains "red"; Further, it is a diagram showing a situation in which the error character display Se5 is displayed in a display color that matches the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3.

Specifically, FIG. 83(a) shows immediately after the "ready-to-win display (fluctuation element of "normal reach")" appears in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 in the fifth embodiment. 83 ( In b), the variable element of "normal reach" is started from the state of FIG. FIG. 83(c) is a diagram showing a state in which an error character display Se5 indicating the state is displayed. is erased, the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm, and furthermore, a reach-in-reach character display Se2 is displayed, in which words spoken by the player's character pattern are displayed. 83(d) is a diagram showing a state in which an error character display Se5 indicating an error state is displayed, and FIG. 83(d) shows a change in the variable element of "super reach" from the state of FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which a content suggesting that a "failure display" will appear in the "occasion effect" is displayed, and an error character display Se5 indicating an error state is displayed; 83(e), the variable element of "super reach" ends from the state of FIG. 83(d), the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are displayed again, and the third A "failed display" of the pattern appears, and furthermore, a set phrase character display Se3, in which words spoken from the character pattern in the central small region Ds2 of the sub-display region Ds are expressed in characters, is displayed in the left small region Ds1. 83(f) is a diagram showing a state in which an error character display Se5 indicating an error state is displayed, and FIG. 83(f) is a diagram showing a state in which a variable element of "re-variation" is executed from the state of FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which an error character display Se5 indicating an error state is being displayed, just before "display" appears. In addition, in FIGS. 65(a) to 65(f), the display mode of the third pattern is omitted.

First, in FIG. 83(a), similarly to FIG. 65(a) of the first embodiment, in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol "7" is stopped and displayed on the right. In the area Dm3, the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed, and furthermore, in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is still unrecognizably "high-speed fluctuating". Therefore, it is the state immediately after the so-called "ready-to-win display" with the "7" pattern appears. Further, in the cockpit display area Db, an executed symbol is displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, and reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively.

In addition, in the left small region Ds1 of the sub-display region Ds, the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence emitted from the character pattern of the central small region Ds2 is a "strong pattern" character pattern and a chance up pattern "red". is displayed. Specifically, in the left small region Ds1, the character display Se1 at the time of reaching occurrence of "I can do it!", which is the line uttered by the character pattern in the central small region Ds2, is "white" which is the normal display color. to "red" which is the first chance-up pattern.

83(a), the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 selects a "strong pattern" for the character pattern of each character display Se1, and the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are selected. This means that "red" was selected by winning the change lottery, and "at the time of occurrence of ready-to-win" was selected in the lottery regarding the change timing of the display colors of the character displays Se1 and Se2.

Therefore, in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, at least a command related to the "strong pattern" of the character display Se1 when the reach occurs from the audio lamp control device 113 (in FIG. Therefore, the strong strong pattern command for display), the red character command for display, and the command for change at occurrence of display are received, and at least the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is "strong pattern" in the character pattern memory 233j. , the red character flag 233k is set to ON based on the display red character command, and the character color change flag 233n at occurrence is set to ON based on the display use change command.

Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c contains at least a character pattern additional data table 232a2 based on the setting contents of the character pattern memory 233j, a character color additional data table 232a2 based on the ON of the red character flag 233k, and a character at occurrence time table 232a2. The additional data table 232a2 for character timing based on the ON state of the color change flag 233n is stored (set). As a result, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the variable display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. . Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the third symbol display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 83(a) is obtained.

In FIG. 83(b), from the state of FIG. 83(a), the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm, and the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 1) is in the full state. When the full state of the lower tray 50 is detected by a lower tray full state switch (not shown) for detecting whether the 81 is displayed in the foreground on the display surface of 81. FIG.

In the variable elements of this "normal reach", in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the "7" symbol being stopped is enlarged and displayed, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is displayed. Variable performance (for example, low-speed scrolling from "5" pattern to "6" pattern) is performed so that it can be visually recognized at a low speed. In addition, the sub-display area Ds is erased as the main display area Dm expands due to the occurrence of the "normal reach" variable, and the sub-display area Ds becomes invisible. In the cockpit display area Db, as in the display state of FIG. 83(a), the executed symbols are displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. is displayed.

In addition, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, as described above, the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 1) is in the full state, and the game is in an abnormal state in which no more balls can be put out. An error character display Se5 is displayed to suggest to the user. Specifically, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, an error character display Se5 saying "Please remove the ball" is displayed to prompt the player to remove the ball from the lower tray 50. is displayed in a display color (for example, "white") of the same type as "white" which is the normal display color of . That is, in FIG. 83(b), since the character displays Se1 to Se4 are not displayed, the error character display Se5 is displayed in a normal display color (for example, "white").

Note that the error character display Se5 in FIG. 83(b) may be displayed in a display color (for example, "red") similar to the display color of the chance up pattern of each of the character displays Se1 to Se4. .

In the display state of FIG. 83(b), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 has received an error command indicating that the lower tray is full from the sound lamp control device 113 for the display state of FIG. 83(a). . Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c stores (sets) the additional data table 232a2 for error in addition to the storage state (additional data table 232a2 for character change of 3) in FIG. 83(a). . Therefore, the MPU 231 generates a , to create a drawing list. Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the third symbol display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 83(b) is obtained.

FIG. 83(c) shows a state in which the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 83(b). In the "super reach" variable element, the "7" symbol displayed in the "normal reach" variable element is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁Also, during the execution of the variable element of "Super Reach", the cockpit display area Db is erased, and instead, the variable effect is reserved at the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and below the Reach formation symbol. The ready-to-win formation pattern of the numerical pattern ("4" in the fifth embodiment) indicating the number of balls is newly displayed. Further, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, an error character display Se5 is displayed on the forefront of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, as in FIG. 83(b).

In addition, in the variable elements of this "Super Reach", a "battle effect" is displayed in which a plurality of character patterns compete for victory or defeat, and furthermore, the character pattern on the player side speaks a line, and the reach middle text in which the line is expressed in letters. Character display Se2 is displayed in a chance-up pattern. Specifically, in the display area where the cockpit display area Db has been erased, the reach-in-reach character display Se2 of "stop!" The display color is changed from "white", which is the display color, to "red", which is the first chance-up pattern.

That is, in the display state of FIG. 83(c), "strong pattern" is selected in the character pattern lottery for the in-reach character display Se2 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the character displays Se1 to Se3 are displayed. "Red" is selected by winning the color change lottery, and further, as a result of selecting "at the time of occurrence of reach" in the lottery of the change timing of the display color of each character display Se1, Se2, character display Se2 during reach is also displayed. Shown in "red". That is, in the display color of the character display Se1 at the time of occurrence of the ready-to-win that has already been displayed in this variable effect, the change in the display color of the character display is reflected in the display color that reflects the result of the lottery. The display color of is a display that follows the display color of the character display Se1 when reach occurs.

In addition, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, as in FIG. 83(b), the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 1) is in a full state, which is an abnormal state in which no more balls can be dispensed. An error character display Se5 is displayed to indicate to the player that the error character display Se5 is displayed in a display color (for example, "red") that matches the display color of the in-reach character display Se2. Specifically, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the error character display Se5 of "Please remove the ball" prompting the player to remove the ball from the lower tray 50 is replaced by the in-reach character display Se2. It is displayed in a display color (for example, “red”) of the same type as “red” which is the display color of the chance up pattern.

In the display state of FIG. 83(c), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 does not receive additional commands from the sound lamp control device 113 for the display state of FIG. 83(b). In other words, the error cancellation command indicating to cancel the abnormal state of the lower tray full state has not been received. Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c contains additional data tables 232a2 for character displays Se1 to Se4 (3 additional data tables 232a2 for character changes) and 1 for errors. In this state, the additional data table 232a2 is stored (set). Therefore, the MPU 231 generates a , to create a drawing list. Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the third pattern display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 83(c) is obtained.

In FIG. 83(d), from the state of FIG. 83(c), the "dangerous effect" is executed in the "super reach", and in the "dangerous effect", the character pattern on the player side (the character pattern on the left side) is changed to the enemy side. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which a content suggesting that a "failure display" will appear, being defeated by the character pattern (right character pattern) of , is displayed. Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, an error character display Se5 is displayed on the forefront of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, as in FIG. 83(c).

In the display state of FIG. 83(d), the reach formation pattern of the "7" pattern displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is displayed in a reduced size. ” The symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, a display suggesting a "mismatch display" with "787" is performed. In addition, the cockpit display area Db is continuously erased, and the number patterns indicating the number of pending balls of the variable effect are continuously displayed at the upper left of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 and below the ready-to-win formation pattern. there is

In addition, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, as in FIG. 83(c), the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 1) is in a full state, which is an abnormal state in which no more balls can be dispensed. An error character display Se5 is displayed to suggest to the player that the ). Specifically, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, an error character display Se5 of "Please remove the ball" is displayed to urge the player to remove the ball from the lower tray 50, while an in-reach character display Se2 ( It is displayed in a display color (for example, “red”) of the same system as “red” which is the display color of the chance up pattern in FIG. 83(c)). At this point, if the display color of the error character display Se5 is displayed in a normal display color (for example, "white"), it will be as if the variable effect is off despite the fact that the "climate effect" is in progress. It makes an impression. Therefore, the display mode of the error character display Se5 that is displayed during the "distinctive effect" is configured to maintain a display that is synchronized with the display mode of the in-reach character display Se2 that appears during the "distinctive effect". ing.

In the display state of FIG. 83(d), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 does not receive additional commands from the sound lamp control device 113 for the display state of FIG. 83(c). In other words, the error cancellation command indicating to cancel the abnormal state of the lower tray full state has not been received. Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c stores (sets) an additional data table 232a2 (additional data table 232a2 for character change 3 and additional data table 232a2 for error 1) equivalent to the storage state in FIG. 83(c). It is in a state where Therefore, the MPU 231 generates a , to create a drawing list. Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the third pattern display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 83(d) is obtained.

In FIG. 83(e), from the state shown in FIG. 83(d), the character design on the player side loses to the enemy character design in the "border effect" of the variable element of "super reach", and a temporary , and the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are re-displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this state, the character pattern in the central small region Ds2 of the sub-display region Ds and the execution patterns and reserved patterns in the cockpit display region Db are visible again.

In addition, the character pattern in the central small region Ds2 of the sub-display region Ds is displayed in a disappointing manner due to the appearance of the temporary "failure display", and the character pattern is displayed in the left small region Ds1. A pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 in which words are represented by characters is displayed in a chance-up pattern. Specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 of "I'm sorry...", which is the line uttered by the character pattern in the central small area Ds2, is displayed in the normal display color of "white ” changes to “red”.

That is, in the display state of FIG. 83(e), "red" is selected by lottery for changing the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display is selected. As a result of selecting "at the time of occurrence of reach" in the lottery for the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 is also displayed in "red". In other words, in the display colors of the character display Se1 at the time of occurrence of the reach and the character display Se2 during the reach, which have already been displayed in this variable effect, the change in the display color of the character display is reflected in the display color that reflects the lottery result. The display color of the pseudo fixed form phrase character display Se4 follows the display color of the character display Se1 during reach occurrence and the character display Se2 during reach.

Here, in this variable effect, as described above, "red" is selected by winning the change lottery of the display color of each character display Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display Regarding the lottery for the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, "at the time of occurrence of reach" is selected. Therefore, since the display color of each character display Se1 to Se3 is collectively set as described above, the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 (fixed phrase character display Se3) is also displayed in "red" according to the plural changes. In addition, in the variable effect, the variable element of "re-variation" is performed from this provisional "loss display", and the "jackpot display" appears, so the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 (fixed phrase character Even if the display Se3) is displayed as the chance-up pattern as it is, the player does not feel distrust or the like, and there is no need to correct the display color of the chance-up pattern.

At the center of the main display area Dm, as in FIG. 83(d), the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 1) is in a full state and an abnormal state in which no more balls can be dispensed. The error character display Se5 suggesting to the player that the , “red”). Specifically, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, an error character display Se5 of "Please remove the ball" prompting the player to remove the ball from the lower tray 50 is displayed instead of the standard phrase character display Se3. It is displayed in a display color (for example, “red”) of the same type as “red” which is the display color of the chance up pattern.

Therefore, in the display state of FIG. 83(e), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 does not additionally receive commands from the audio lamp control device 113 as compared with the display state of FIG. 83(d). Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c stores (sets) an additional data table 232a2 (additional data table 232a2 for character change 3 and display data table 232a2 for error 1) equivalent to the storage state in FIG. 83(d). It is in a state where Therefore, the MPU 231 generates a , to create a drawing list. Based on the drawing list, the image controller 237 controls the third pattern display device 81 so that the display state shown in FIG. 83(e) is obtained.

Further, when the player recognizes the display contents of FIG. 83(e), the character pattern on the player side is defeated in the "battle effect" of the variable element of "super reach" as shown in FIG. 83(d). By doing so, it is predicted that the "big win display" will not appear and the "losing display" will appear in the variable element of the "super reach". However, the display color of the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 (which the player recognizes as the fixed phrase character display Se3) is displayed in "red", and the display color of the error character display Se5 is displayed in "red". Therefore, the player feels a sense of incongruity with the prediction of the above-mentioned "failure display", and instead of fixing the variable presentation as "failure display", some additional presentation may be executed. , and re-predict.

FIG. 83(f) shows a state in which the variable element of "re-variation" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 83(e). In the variable element of this "re-variation", the main display area Dm is enlarged and displayed, the sub-display area Ds is erased, and "787" is stopped and displayed in each of the display areas Dm1 to Dm3. starts fluctuating again, and finally stops at "777", which is the "jackpot display". Also, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, an error character display Se5 is displayed on the forefront of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, as in FIG. 83(e). The player is surprised at the occurrence of the variable element of "re-variation", and as guessed at the stage of FIG. It is possible to obtain a sense of happiness and a sense of satisfaction from the appearance of the "jackpot display".

In this way, when the variable effect is determined by the "big win display", when the chance up pattern (for example, "red") is executed in the character display Se1 during the reach occurrence or the character display Se2 during the reach, the "super The pseudo fixed form phrase character display Se4 and the fixed form phrase character display Se3 displayed after the variable element of "reach" are also configured to display following the chance up pattern. In addition, the error character display Se5 that appears during the "blind effect" of the variable element of "super reach" is also displayed in a display color that is synchronized with the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4. That is, in the variation effect of the "big win display", the display color of the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4, the fixed phrase character display Se3 and the error character display Se5 is configured to be "red". By configuring in this way, no discrepancies occur in the contents of the performance, so that the player does not have excessive expectations, and a comfortable game can be provided in which the player does not feel a sense of distrust.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, in addition to the character displays Se1 to Se4 indicating the degree of expectation for a big win in the variable performance, an abnormality in the game state is notified during the variable performance. When the error character display Se5 appears, the display mode of the error character display Se5 is configured to be synchronized with the display modes of the character displays Se1 to Se4. With this configuration, even if the character displays Se1 to Se4 and the error character display Se5 are simultaneously displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the player misunderstands the degree of expectation for the big win in the variable performance. Moreover, the content of the abnormal state can also be clearly recognized. Therefore, it is possible to provide a comfortable game in which the content of the performance is not inconsistent, the player does not have excessive expectations, and the player does not feel distrustful.

In addition, the error character display Se5 is configured to be displayed in the foreground among the display items in the third symbol display device 81 in order to inform the player of the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. Then, the display mode of the error character display Se5 is displayed so as to be synchronized with the display modes of the character displays Se1 to Se4 (regular pattern or chance up pattern). With this configuration, even if the character displays Se1 to Se4 are difficult for the player to see (difficult to see) due to other displays, especially the error character display Se5, the character displays Se1 to Se4 By visibly displaying the error character display Se5 on the forefront of the third pattern display device 81 synchronized with the display color of , the player can surely recognize the degree of expectation for the big win in the variable performance.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment has the same effects as those of the first to fourth embodiments due to the same configuration.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. can be easily guessed. For example, each embodiment may add part or more of the configuration of another embodiment to that embodiment or replace it with a part or more of the configuration of that embodiment. The embodiment may be modified and configured. Also, the numerical values given in each of the above embodiments are examples, and it is naturally possible to employ other numerical values.

<Modification 1>
In each of the above embodiments, the audio ramp control device 113 determines the display mode of each character display Se1 to Se4 in the variable performance being executed (hereinafter referred to as "the variable performance") by lottery at the start of the variable performance, Each character display Se1 to Se4 is displayed based on the result of the lottery, and the display color of the standard phrase character display Se3 is corrected when the variable effect is "loss display". On the other hand, in the modification processing of the standard phrase character display Se3 in the variable performance, it is determined whether or not there is a "jackpot display" in the pending variable performance (hereinafter referred to as "suspended variable performance"). If there is a "big win display" in the presentation, the fixed phrase character display Se3 may be displayed as it is in the chance up pattern without correcting the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3. With this configuration, when the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed as a chance-up pattern in a state where the display result of "failure display" appears in the "ready-to-win display" of the variable display, the game It is possible to increase the interest in the game by making the player expect the "big win display" to appear in the variable performance or the "big win display" to appear in the reserved variable performance.

<Modification 2>
In each of the above embodiments, the sound ramp control device 113 determines the character pattern, character color, and change timing of the character color of each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 at the start of the variable effect. Instead of this, in the look-ahead process (holding display setting process (see FIG. 43)), the character pattern table 222g, the character color change table 222h and the color change timing table 222i are referred to, and the "reach The character pattern, the character color, and the change timing of the character color of each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 appearing in "Display" may be determined.

<Modification 3>
In each of the above embodiments, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display one character display Se1 to Se4 alone. Instead of this, the third pattern display device 81 may be configured to simultaneously display a plurality of character displays at the same time. Note that "simultaneously displayed" is exemplified by a case where a plurality of character displays are displayed at the same time, a case where another character display is displayed while one character display is being displayed, and the like.

<Modification 4>
In the above four embodiments, the data table 232a4 is provided for each sprite, and display control is performed by selecting a display pattern from the data table 232a4. On the other hand, a display color data table for specifying only the display color of each sprite is provided, and when changing the display color of each sprite, the display color of each sprite is changed by changing the contents of the display color data table. It may be configured as

<Modification 5>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the character displays Se1 to Se4 are fragmentarily displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, the display period is 1 second) based on the execution of the "ready-to-reach display". Instead of this, a dedicated character display area (telop area) for displaying character display may be provided, and the character display may be scroll-displayed in the character display area. When scrolling the character display in the character display area, for example, the character display is scrolled from the right side of the screen to the left side of the screen, and when the character display moves to the left side of the screen, the character display is displayed again from the right side of the screen. can be configured to Therefore, when the character display is displayed in a chance-up pattern (for example, "red") in the character display area, after the end of the "discretion effect" in the variable effect of the "loss display", the character display is changed to normal. (for example, “white”). As a method of returning the character display that was displayed in the chance-up pattern to the normal display mode after the "end effect", the display mode of the character display in the character display area is displayed in the chance-up pattern when moving to the left side of the screen. However, when the character display disappears from the left side of the screen and is displayed again from the right side of the screen, it may be configured to be displayed in a normal display mode.

<Modification 6>
In each of the above embodiments, when a chance-up pattern (for example, "red") is selected in the display color lottery for each character display Se1-Se4, the display color of each character display Se1-Se4 is once set to the chance-up pattern. Then, after that, when the variation effect for each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 is "failure display", the display color of the standard phrase character display Se3 is corrected (rechanged) to a normal pattern that is not a chance-up pattern. configured to display. Instead of this, in the variable effect that does not have the “loss display” or “promotion” effect, the additional data table 232a2 for the character colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 is set so that the character displays Se1 and Se2 are the display colors of the chance-up patterns. (for example, "red") and the standard phrase character display Se3 may be configured to select the color change additional data table 232a2 of the normal display color (for example, "white"). By configuring in this way, in the variable performance in which additional variable elements are not executed after the execution of the "climate performance", the chance up pattern having the function of suggesting development does not need to be displayed, and inconsistency in the performance content is generated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming distrustful.

<Modification 7>
In each of the above embodiments, when a chance-up pattern (for example, "red") is selected in the display color lottery for each character display Se1-Se4, the display color of each character display Se1-Se4 is once set to the chance-up pattern. After that, when the variation effect for each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 is "failure display", the display color of the standard phrase character display Se3 is corrected to a normal pattern that is not a chance-up pattern. was configured. Instead of this, the fixed phrase character display Se3 may not be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a variable effect that does not have a "failure display" or "promotion" effect. By not displaying the standard phrase character display Se3 on the third pattern display device 81 in the ``failure display'' and ``promotion'' presentations, it is possible to prevent the distrust of the players from occurring without causing discrepancies in the contents of the presentation. can be prevented.

In such a case, even if the standard phrase character display Se3 is not displayed, the voice output device 226 outputs a voice corresponding to the standard phrase character display Se3 that is not displayed (for example, "I'm sorry..."). It may be configured as In the case of "missing display" or the like, since the standard phrase character display Se3 is not displayed on the third pattern display device 81, there is a possibility that it may be regarded as a display pattern different from the usual (so-called rule breaking), but the standard phrase character By not displaying (visible) the display Se3, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the rule is broken.

Further, as a method of not displaying the fixed phrase character display Se3, a value is set in the additional data table for color change 232a2 so that the display mode of the fixed phrase character display Se3 becomes transparent, thereby making it invisible to the player. , the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is set to the same color as the display color of the sprite arranged behind the fixed phrase character display Se3, and the fixed phrase character display Se3 is assimilated with the sprite on the rear side. Alternatively, another sprite may be arranged in front of the sprite of the standard phrase character display Se3 to be invisible to the player.

<Modification 8>
In each of the above embodiments, when executing the "hold change notice""after hold erase", whether or not it is a variable effect that can execute "hold change notice" at the initially set execution timing ("after hold erase") is determined, and if it is a variable effect that can be executed, a "hold change notice" is performed at the execution timing ("after erasing the hold") as originally set, while if it is a variable effect that cannot be executed, the initial setting The execution timing of the "holding change notice" that has been set is changed to determine the timing at which the "holding change notice" can be executed, and then the "holding change notice" is executed. Instead of this, when executing the "holding change notice" after "holding deletion", it is determined whether or not the "holding change notice" can be executed at the initially set execution timing, and the fluctuation production that cannot be executed In the case of , it is configured to change the contents of the variable effect so that the "holding change notice" of "after holding erasure" can be executed, and to execute the initially set "holding change notice" of "after holding cancellation". You may

By configuring in this way, when the ``suspension change notice'' of ``after suspension erasure'' is selected in the variable performance, the ``suspension change notice'' is executed at the execution timing of ``after suspension erasure'' in the variable performance. When it is determined that the performance mode (variable element) cannot be displayed, it is first determined whether there is a variable element (for example, a variable element related to "pseudo performance") that can be changed to a variable element for erasing the cockpit display area Db. Then, when it is determined that a changeable variable element (for example, a "pseudo effect" variable element) is included, the changeable variable element (for example, all or part of the "pseudo effect") is displayed in the cockpit It converts to a variable element of a variable element (for example, "super reach") that erases the area Db. Therefore, by adding the variable element for erasing the cockpit display area Db, it becomes possible to execute the "suspended change notice" after "suspended erasure". By configuring in this way, when the ``suspension change notice'' of ``after suspension erasure'' is selected, the ``suspension change notice'' can be easily executed at the execution timing of the ``after suspension erasure''. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the performance while providing the player with an unexpected performance, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

<Modification 9>
In each of the above embodiments, when executing the "holding change notice" after "holding erase", the execution pattern and the holding pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are given some effect (for example, "super reach" change factor, etc.), and after that, when it is displayed again, it is configured to execute "suspended change notice". Instead of this, a movable accessory capable of partially covering the third pattern display device 81 may be used so that the cockpit display area Db can be driven into an invisible (difficult to see) state. . In the state where the cockpit display area Db is covered by the movable accessory, "suspension change notice" is executed in the execution pattern. After that, when the movable accessory returns from the state of covering the cockpit display area Db to the original state, the player becomes able to visually recognize the executed symbols again, and the "suspended change notice" is displayed in the executed symbols. It becomes possible to recognize that it is being executed.

<Modification 10>
In each of the above embodiments, when executing the "holding change notice" after "holding erase", the execution pattern and the holding pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are given some effect (for example, "super reach" change factor, etc.), and after that, when it is displayed again, it is configured to execute "suspended change notice". Instead of this, a large character cut-in image can be displayed so as to overlap the cockpit display area Db during the variable performance, and the display time of the large character cut-in image is set to any variable element of the variable performance. Configure for less than an hour. In addition, the cockpit display area Db is constructed so that any variable element can always be displayed during execution of the variable effect. Further, in the variable performance, the cockpit display area Db is not visible to the player while the large character cut-in image is being displayed. After that, when the large character cut-in image disappears and the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again, the display mode of the execution pattern changes "after the large cut-in display" ``pending change notice'' is executed. Configure. With this configuration, the execution pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db is hidden by the large character cut-in image having a display time shorter than the execution time of each variable element, and the execution pattern is displayed at the stage when the concealment is released. By performing "hold change notice" after "pending deletion" for , when directly changing the notice object (change object) that is always visible and notifying it, or when a new notice target It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the change of the announcement object, and to casually change the display mode of the execution pattern, as compared with the case of notifying by making the object appear. By casually changing the execution pattern, first, the player feels uncomfortable, and then, by making the player realize that the root of the uncomfortable feeling is directly linked to the game value (for example, a big win), the player is surprised. To increase the interest of a game by diversifying the performance while providing the performance with quality.

Furthermore, by setting the display time of the large character cut-in image to be shorter than the execution time of each variable element, it is possible to display the large character cut-in image for any variable element. Compared to the case where the cockpit display area Db is covered by driving the movable accessory in Modification 7, the process of determining whether or not the large character cut-in image can be displayed or not is unnecessary for the variable element of the variable effect. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 only needs to perform control to determine the display of the large character cut-in image in order to perform the "hold change notice" after the "after hold erasure". While reducing the control burden of the game, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance, diversify the performance, and enhance the interest of the game.

<Modification 11>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the "holding change notice""after holding erasure" is executed in the execution pattern indicating the variable effect being executed. Instead of this, it may be configured to execute "g suspension change notice" after "holding deletion" in the holding symbol. With this configuration, the player pays less attention to the change of the reserved symbols than the executed symbols, and it is difficult for the player to notice the change. Therefore, when the "reserved change notice" of "after the reserved erasure" is performed for the reserved symbols, the player can delay recognizing the change of the reserved symbols as compared with the change of the executed symbols. During this period, the player can feel uncomfortable. As a result, it is possible to diversify the presentation while providing the player with an unexpected presentation, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

<Modification 12>
In each of the above-described embodiments, in the variable effect being executed, the cockpit display area Db is erased when the "super reach" variable element appears, and when the "super reach" variable element ends, the cockpit display area Db is displayed. At the timing when is displayed again, "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" was performed for the execution pattern. In addition, as "reach display", three different types of "normal reach" variable elements, "super reach" variable elements and "special reach" variable elements (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "each reach display") Reach display” was provided, and each reach pattern (execution mode) of each reach display was composed of one type. Instead of this, a plurality of reach patterns (for example, two types of "weak pattern" and "strong pattern") are provided for "each reach display", and when "each reach display" is selected, the "each reach display" It may be configured to determine the reach pattern of "reach display". In addition, in this configuration, when executing the "suspended change notice" after "suspended deletion", when the reach pattern of "strong pattern" is selected for "each reach display", the "strong pattern" is changed to " Change to the reach pattern of "weak pattern". Then, after the "each reach display" of the "weak pattern" is executed, the "suspension change notice" of "after suspension erasure" is executed.

By configuring in this way, for example, when performing "holding change notice" after "holding deletion" in the big hit fluctuation production, the reach pattern of "strong pattern" is selected in the "each reach display" of the fluctuation production. If so, the "strong pattern" reach pattern is changed to a "weak pattern" reach pattern. By configuring in this way, even if the reach pattern of the "weak pattern" appears, after the variable element of the "reach display" of the "weak pattern" ends, the "suspension change notice" of "after pending deletion" Appearance of the "weak pattern" results in a big hit, so it is possible to enjoy the game without losing interest even when the "weak pattern" appears.

<Modification 13>
In the first embodiment, when "Super Reach" appears, the entire cockpit display area Db is erased so that both the executed symbols and the reserved symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db become invisible. had been erased. On the other hand, it is also possible to delete only the pending symbols in the cockpit display area Db and continue to display the executed symbols indicating the content of the variable effect being executed. By configuring in this way, when the "holding change notice" is executed in the execution pattern, the player is suggested the degree of expectation for the big win regarding the variable performance being executed based on the display mode of the "holding change notice". The game can be continued, and the interest in the game can be enhanced in the variable performance being executed. It should be noted that, in the case of continuing to display the executed symbols without erasing them during the variable effect, it is preferable to perform the "suspended change notice" of "after pending erasure" for the suspended symbols.

<Modification 14>
In the first embodiment or the fifth embodiment, the execution pattern or the reserved pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db, which is visible at normal times and becomes invisible when "super reach" occurs, At the timing when the variable element of "super reach" ends and the executed symbols and the suspended symbols become visible again, the "suspended change notice" after "suspended erasure" is executed. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the "post-delete""changenotice" is performed on a displayed object different from the executed symbol or the reserved symbol.

Specifically, for example, the character pattern displayed in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds may be configured to perform the "post-delete" "change notice". If the character pattern displayed in the central small area Ds2 is used for the "post-delete" "change notice", the character pattern is changed at the timing when the central small area Ds2 is redisplayed after the variable element of "super reach" ends. The display mode may be configured to be displayed in a special display mode (for example, happy mode) different from the normal display mode (for example, disappointing mode when "failure display" appears). .

Further, for example, a level meter display object is displayed in the right small area Ds3 of the sub-display area Ds, and the level meter display object is always displayed normally. This level meter display object is configured to specifically display the degree of expectation for a big win in the variable performance. The level meter display object is raised step by step when a pattern appears, a cut-in pattern appears, etc.), and the degree of expectation for a big win at that stage is visualized and displayed so that the player can easily understand it. Then, at the timing of erasing the sub-display area Ds by "super reach" etc., the level meter display is also erased, and the timing of re-displaying the sub-display area Ds after the variable element such as "super reach" is completed. Then, this level meter display is also displayed again. If the re-displayed level meter display has changed from the display mode before erasing (for example, the level meter step has increased compared to before erasing), "re-fluctuation" is performed and "jackpot display" is performed. ” is derived.

Further, for example, in the background display of the main display area Dm, the background display is erased by "super reach" or the like, and the background display of the main display area Dm is redisplayed after the variable element such as "super reach" is completed. This background display is also redisplayed at the timing to do so. If the re-displayed background display has changed from the display mode before erasing (for example, "town stage" to "empty stage"), perform "re-fluctuation" to derive "jackpot display". Configure.

In this way, by changing and displaying the display object that is not the execution pattern or the reservation pattern from before it is erased at the timing of redisplaying, the object that is always visible is directly changed and notified. Compared to the case where a new object is made to appear and notified, it is possible to casually change the display mode of the object while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the object. To first make a player feel a sense of incongruity by temporarily hiding an object and then casually changing it, and then to make the player recognize that the root of the sense of incongruity is directly linked to a game value (for example, a big win). Thus, it is possible to diversify the performance while providing the player with an unexpected performance, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Further, it may be configured such that the change of the object is performed for a plurality of objects. With this configuration, when the variable element such as "Super Reach" ends and the display screen returns to the normal display mode, the player can find out where the displayed object that has been changed from before erasing is located. A game to search for is born, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

<Modification 15>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when executing the "holding change notice" after "holding erase", the display mode of the execution pattern or the holding pattern is displayed in a display mode raised (chance up) from the normal display mode was configured to On the other hand, when executing the "holding change notice" after "holding erasure", the display mode of the execution pattern or the holding pattern is displayed in a display mode lowered (chance down) from the display mode before erasure. may be configured. By configuring in this way, for example, when the reserved design before erasure is in the "blue" display mode, the reserved design is displayed in the normal display mode "white" at the timing of redisplay. , The display of the reserved pattern for which the ``reserved change notice'' is performed ``after the reserved erasure'' is equivalent to the display of the other reserved patterns, making it difficult for the player to understand which reserved pattern has changed. . By obscuring the reserved pattern that has changed before erasing, it is made unclear in which variable presentation the ``reserved change notice'' has occurred. The ambiguous impression gives the player a sense of incongruity, and then the player recognizes that the root of the sense of incongruity is directly linked to the game value (for example, a big win), thereby giving the player an unexpected performance. While providing the above, the entertainment of the game can be enhanced by diversifying the presentation.

<Modification 16>
In each of the above embodiments, when the "holding change notice" is performed after the execution pattern or the holding pattern is made invisible, the "holding change notice" is performed in the execution pattern or the holding pattern at the timing when the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again. was running On the other hand, the configuration may be such that the "suspension change notice" is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the cockpit display area Db became visible again. In this case, it may be configured such that the executed symbols or reserved symbols are gradually changed by a display mode (for example, morphing) to make it difficult for the player to recognize the change.

<Modification 17>
In the sixth embodiment, when the "weak pattern" of "super reach" appears, the "hold change notice" of "after pending erasure" may appear. That is, the "weak pattern" of the "super reach" is configured to suggest the possibility that the "hold change notice" will be executed "after the hold erasure". On the other hand, during the execution of the variable production, the background display, the notice pattern, or the stop pattern of the "loss display", etc. suggest the possibility that the "hold change notice" will be executed "after the hold deletion" may be configured. By constructing in this way, the player is made to play while paying attention to whether or not an effect suggesting the execution of the 'reservation change notice' after 'reservation deletion' appears during the execution of the variable effect. , can enhance the interest of the game.

<Modification 18>
In each of the above embodiments, the displayed object (executed pattern or reserved pattern) displayed on the third pattern display device 81 switches from a visually recognizable state to an unrecognizable state, and is again visually recognized. By changing the display mode when possible, it is configured to cause a sense of discomfort based on the change. On the other hand, by changing perceptions other than vision, such as perception based on hearing or skin sensations (tactile sensation, temperature sensation, pain sensation, wind sensation, etc.), it may be configured to make the player feel uncomfortable. .

Specifically, for example, in the case of causing a sense of incongruity due to hearing, the sound output by the audio output device 226 is changed from a normal state to make the player feel a sense of incongruity. The sense of incongruity caused by sound means that the method of stimulating the auditory sense of the player, such as the pitch of the sound, the change pattern of the sound image, the magnitude of the sound, the change of the rhythm, etc., is changed from the normal output state, so that the player feels a sense of incongruity. configured to make you feel With visual recognition, it is possible to continue to check with the eyes, so it is easy to recognize at an early stage when a sense of discomfort is felt. It is lower than visual recognition because it cannot be confirmed continuously. Therefore, if the sound is changed from the normal output state to make the player feel uncomfortable, it is possible to prolong the time until the player clearly recognizes the strange feeling.

Also, for example, skin sensation (tactile sensation (perception of touch), temperature sensation (perception of temperature), pain sensation (perception of pain and stimulation), pressure sensation (perception of pressure), wind sensation (perception of wind) ), etc.), the operation handle 51, the frame button 22, the ball removal lever 52, the ball lending button 42, or the return button 43, and other games such as fans and heaters. It is configured to make the player feel a sense of incongruity by making the control state of parts that stimulate the player different from normal. For example, the operating handle 51 may be configured to make the player feel uncomfortable by increasing the urging force of a spring (not shown) that urges the operating handle 51 to the initial position. Further, for example, the frame button 22 is provided with a lock mechanism that locks the frame button 22 so that the frame button 22 cannot be pushed, and the player can feel uncomfortable by locking the frame button 22 so that the push operation cannot be performed. may be configured. In this case, it is preferable to output an announcement such as "Please press the frame button" on the third symbol display device 81 or the like. Furthermore, for example, a fan capable of outputting wind toward the player is normally configured to emit (output) wind to stimulate the player's sense of wind. , may be configured to stimulate the player's sense of wind by inhaling wind.

<Modification 19>
In the first embodiment, when "after erasure of suspension" is selected as the execution timing of "suspension change notice", when the variable element of "re-variation" is not included in the variable effect, "suspension change notice" was configured to change the execution timing of to other timing (for example, "after reach") other than "after pending deletion". On the other hand, when "after erasing pending" is selected as the execution timing of "holding change notice", when "holding change notice" cannot be executed at the execution timing of "after pending erasing" in the variable effect, "holding change It may be configured to execute other notice effects other than the notice. Specifically, for example, if it is a variation pattern such as "normal reach + re-variation" that "re-variation" is performed but the cockpit display area Db is not erased, the "suspended change notice ' is selected, instead of the 'suspended change notice' of 'after pending deletion', the 're-replay display notice”. In the variable effect including "re-variation", the "normal reach" variable element is always executed, and when the "normal reach" variable element is executed, the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is erased. It is a variation pattern in which the "holding change notice" of "after" cannot be executed, and some notice effect can always be executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Modification 20>
In each of the above-described embodiments, a plurality of display modes of "suspension change notice" are provided, one execution timing is selected regarding the execution timing of "suspension change notice", and one of the execution timings determined at the one execution timing is selected. was configured to execute "holding change notice" in the display mode of On the other hand, when a display mode (for example, "red" or "rainbow color") is selected in multiple stages in the "hold change notice", the "hold change notice" is executed step by step at multiple execution timings. It may be configured to By constructing in this way, the "suspension change notice" can be executed step by step, and the notice effect of stepping up the degree of expectation for a big win can be executed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

<Modification 21>
In each of the above embodiments, the display color of each of the character displays Se1 and Se2 is changed from normal "white" to "red" as a chance-up pattern, or "gold" which has a higher chance of winning than "red". is determined, and the determined display color of the chance-up pattern is displayed at the display timing of each of the character displays Se1 and Se2. On the other hand, when a display color (that is, "golden color") that is higher than a plurality of steps is selected as the display color of each of the character displays Se1 and Se2, the display of each of the character displays Se1 and Se2 is performed stepwise at a plurality of execution timings. It may be configured to change color. Specifically, for example, when "gold" is determined as the display color of each of the character displays Se1 to Se4, the character display Se1 when the reach occurs is displayed in "red" at the display timing of the character display Se1 when the reach occurs. Then, at the display timing of the in-reach character display Se2, the display color of the in-reach character display Se2 is displayed in "gold". By configuring in this manner, the display colors of the character displays Se1 and Se2 are changed step by step, and the advance notice effect of stepping up the expectation level of the big win can be executed, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game. can.

In addition, when changing the display color of each character display Se1 and Se2 step by step, the display color of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence (for example, "red") and the character display Se2 during reach are determined by one additional data table 232a2. (for example, "golden") may be defined, or an additional data table 232a2 may be set for each of the character displays Se1 and Se2, and each additional data table 232a2 may define each character It may be configured to define the display colors of the displays Se1 and Se2.

<Modification 22>
In the first embodiment, as the initial setting of the display data table 232a1, the normal pattern of each character display Se1 to Se4 (the display color "white" and the character pattern "weak pattern", which is not a chance-up pattern) is displayed. When the normal pattern is selected by lottery for each character display Se1 to Se4, the additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the selection result is selected and displayed by the display data table 232a1 and the additional data table 232a2. configured to control. Therefore, the display contents indicated by the display data table 232a1 and the additional data table 232a2 are duplicated. It is possible to reduce the control burden by eliminating the need for determining whether or not.

On the other hand, the display data table 232a1 may be defined not to display the character displays Se1 to Se4. That is, the character displays Se1 to Se4 are not displayed only by setting the display data table 232a1, and the character displays Se1 to Se4 are displayed only after the additional data table 232a2 is set. good too. By configuring in this way, redundant specification of the display contents of the display data table 232a1 and the additional data table 232a2 is eliminated.

<Modification 23>
In addition, although the character displays Se1 to Se4 are used as a plurality of display means displayed with a predetermined relationship with each other, for example, the display means may have the same attribute or the same type. , if they appear at the same timing, or even if they appear with a time difference, if one appears, the other also appears, etc. Any mode may be used as long as the means is a indicating means that is organically entwined (closely related) temporally, geometrically, and conceptually.

Specifically, for example, a notice display displayed in the same display area (for example, a reach occurrence character display Se1 and a fixed phrase character display Se3 displayed in the left small area Ds1, or displayed in the cockpit display area Db execution pattern or pending pattern, etc.), and notice display displayed in different modes at the same timing (for example, notice of strong and weak characters that appear in reach display, notice of mini characters that appear at the start of variable production, etc.) , a notice display in which another notice appears after the notice of 1 appears (for example, step-up notice, character display Se1 when reach occurs, character display Se2 during reach, fixed phrase character display Se3, and pseudo fixed phrase character display Character display of Se4, etc.) and an announcement that the same effect is executed multiple times in one variable effect (for example, variable elements of “pseudo-continuation”, etc.) are exemplified.

<Modification 24>
In addition, when the ``15R probability variable jackpot'' is won, a provisional display result corresponding to the ``15R normal jackpot'' is displayed in the variable performance, suggesting that it was a ``15R probability variable jackpot'' during the jackpot. When the mid-round promotion effect is executed, the display color of the standard phrase character display Se3 may be displayed in the chance up pattern as it is.

<Modification 25>
Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, by setting the additional data table 232a2 for the display content defined by the display data table 232a1, from the display content of the third symbol display device 81 defined by the display data table 232a1, The display control of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to reflect the change contents defined by the additional data table 232a2. Instead of this, the display data table 232a1 may be configured to define the display contents including the changed contents of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. That is, the display data table 232a1 may be configured so as to include information for changing the display content in the display data table 232a1.

<Modification 26>
Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the additional data table 232a2 is set for the display content defined by the display data table 232a1, and the image data related to the display content defined by the display data table 232a1 or the additional data table 232a2 is stored as the resident data table. If not stored in the video RAM 235, a transfer data table 232a3 is set to transfer the image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Instead of this, the display data table 232a1 or the additional data table 232a2 may be configured to define data related to the transfer of image data as well. That is, the display data table 232a1 or the additional data table 232a2 may be configured so that the transfer information of the image data is included in the display data table 232a1 or the additional data table 232a2.

<Modification 27>
Alternatively, when the additional data table 232a2 is set, the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the additional data table 232a2 may be set.

<Modification 28>
Alternatively, the display contents of the display data table 232a1 may be changed using a flag or the like without using the additional data table 232a2. Specifically, when a specific flag is set, the display content of the display object corresponding to the flag is changed from the display content indicated by the display data table 232a1 according to the setting content of the flag. may

<Modification 29>
Further, the MPU 231 grasps the drawing contents of several frames ahead displayed on the third pattern display device 81, creates drawing information including transfer information based on the grasped drawing contents, and transfers the drawing information to the image controller. 237, the image controller 237 comprehends (preliminarily analyzes) the drawing information in advance, and the image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer information specified in the preliminarily grasped drawing information. Alternatively, the data may be transferred to the pre-analyzed data area.

Specifically, for example, the description will be based on an execution drawing list for the current drawing schedule, a next drawing list for the next drawing schedule, and a next drawing list for the next next drawing schedule. First, the execution drawing list is analyzed, and image data in the character ROM 234 is transferred to a predetermined address (first address) in the pre-analysis data area of the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer information specified in the execution drawing list. At the same time, a next drawing list is created in which the reference destination of the image data to be transferred is rewritten to a predetermined address (first address) after transfer. Only the transfer information of the rewritten next drawing list is analyzed in advance, and the image data of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the pre-analysis data area of the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer information specified in the next drawing list. , and at the same time, a drawing list is created in which the reference destination of the image data to be transferred is rewritten to the predetermined address (second address) after transfer. With such a configuration, drawing using pre-analyzed image data can be executed.

Since the image data is read while the image controller 237 is drawing, if the character ROM 234 is directly referred to for the image data, the performance of the image processing may be greatly reduced. Therefore, by pre-analyzing the drawing list and transferring the image data in advance from the character ROM 234 to the pre-analysis data area of the normal video RAM 236, rapid and accurate drawing can be executed.

Since there is an upper limit to the capacity of the pre-analysis data area of the normal video RAM 236, when performing the pre-analysis of the drawing list, the amount of data that can be stored in the pre-analysis data area of the normal video RAM 236 is used. may be configured to perform preliminary analysis and transfer of image data within the range of the capacity. Also, the range for pre-analysis of the drawing list (for example, up to one frame ahead or up to two frames ahead) is set in advance so that it falls within the capacity of the pre-analysis data area of the normal video RAM 236, and By pre-analyzing the drawing list in , it is possible to prevent a situation in which the capacity of the pre-analysis data area of the normal video RAM 236 is exceeded.

Also, the pre-analysis data area of the normal video RAM 236 may be configured to store a plurality of image data (for example, 512 at maximum). When pre-analyzing the drawing list, if the same image data as the image data to be transferred to the pre-analysis data area of the normal-use video RAM 236 exists in the history, the normal-use video RAM 236 instead of the character ROM 234 The image data may be acquired from the pre-analysis data area and stored in the image storage area 236a. The determination of the same image data is configured such that, for example, when the start addresses on the character ROM 234 are the same, the same image data is determined.

<Modification 30>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display fixed phrase normal command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 turns on the end limit flag 233p based on the reception of the display fixed phrase normal command. , and by checking the post-event restriction flag 233p, the display color of the formulaic phrase character display Se3 displayed after the "event effect" of the change effect of losing is displayed in the normal display color "white". The additional data table for character correction 232a2 is set so as to Alternatively, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, the display result (whether or not) of the variation effect that can be executed based on the command is determined, and the determination is performed. It may be configured to set the post-end limit flag 233p based on the result.

Specifically, for example, when the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives a variation pattern command for display and a stop type command for display, the display result of the variation effect that can be executed based on the command is a failure display. or not. Then, when the variable performance that can be executed is a failure, the post-event restriction flag 233p is set to ON, and based on the ON of the post-event restriction flag 233p, the performance ( For example, all the standard phrase character displays Se3) are configured to be displayed in normal patterns (for example, "white") that are not chance-up patterns.

By configuring in this way, the chance-up pattern is not displayed regardless of what kind of settings are made based on other lotteries in the effect displayed after the "end effect" of the variable effect of losing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in performance contents, to provide a comfortable game in which players do not have excessive expectations and do not feel distrust. In addition, discrimination processing such as lottery result of display mode of character display on the sound lamp control device 113 side, transmission/reception of display fixed phrase normal command, additional data based on display fixed phrase normal command on the display control device 114 side Since control such as setting of the table 232a2 becomes unnecessary, the processing load on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 can be reduced. In addition, since the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are received at the start of the variable effect, the display control device 114 can determine whether the variable effect is appropriate at the start of the variable effect. It is possible to set the display contents of the character display displayed in the variable effect based on the determination result. Therefore, it is possible to effectively utilize the conventional configuration in executing the variable presentation and prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the content of the presentation.

<Modification 31>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when the character correction additional data table 232a2 is selected (determined) when the after-end limit flag 233p is set to ON, the additional data table buffer 233c of the character correction additional data table 232a2 By storing (setting), the display color of the standard phrase character display Se3 in the change effect of failure is configured to be displayed in the normal display color (that is, "white"). On the other hand, when the post-boundary restriction flag 233p is set to ON, the additional data table 232a2 (additional data table 232a2 for character pattern, additional data table 232a2 for character color, additional data table 232a2 for character timing) related to fixed form phrase character display Se3 is displayed. A part or all of the data table 232a2) may be prohibited from being used.

Specifically, for example, when the post-border restriction flag 233p is turned on, if the additional data table buffer 233c stores (sets) the text color additional data table 232a2, the text color additional data The table 232a2 is deleted (discarded or invalidated), and the display color of character display is set to the initial setting (default setting). Further, for example, when the post-border restriction flag 233p is set to ON and the additional data table 232a2 for text color is stored (set) in the additional data table buffer 233c, the additional data table 232a2 for text color is stored (set). , is corrected to a normal pattern (reselecting the text color additional data table 232a2 in which the fixed phrase character display Se3 is a normal pattern), and the modified (reselected) text color addition The data table 232a2 is configured to be stored (set) in the additional data table buffer 233c.

By configuring in this way, the standard phrase character display Se3 displayed after the "climate effect" can be displayed in the display color of the normal pattern instead of the chance-up pattern without providing the additional data table 232a2 for character correction. . Therefore, the number of additional data tables 232a2 to be stored (set) in the additional data table buffer 233c can be reduced, thereby reducing the processing load of the MPU 231 when drawing lists are created. In addition, since it is possible to configure not to display the chance-up pattern (for example, "red") in the fixed form phrase character display Se3 displayed after the "event effect", it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the effect contents and to prevent the game from being inconsistent. It is possible to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel distrustful.

<Modification 32>
In the fifth embodiment, when the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are displayed in the chance-up pattern, when the error character display Se5 is displayed, the display color of the error character display Se5 is changed to each character display. It was configured to display in a display color synchronized with the display colors of Se1 to Se4. Instead of this, when the error character display Se5 is displayed even before the character displays Se1 to Se4 appear, the error characters are displayed in a display color synchronized with the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4. The display Se5 may be configured to be displayed. By configuring in this way, for example, before the ready-to-win display occurs, the error character display Se5 is displayed by intentionally causing the lower tray full state, and the display color of the error character display Se5 is changed. A game property for confirming whether or not it is displayed is created, and a notice function suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit in a variable performance is added to the error character display Se5, which usually has only an abnormal state notification function, to realize various game properties, It is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Also, the read-ahead process may be executed by the display control device 114 . For example, information for performing the look-ahead process, that is, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type obtained from the counter buffer with the start winning in the main control device 110 A pending information storage area and an execution information storage area similar to those shown in FIG. 24 are provided in the display control device 114 to store each value of the counter CS1. And based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area, the display control device 114 executes the pre-reading process, and the big hit is made in the variable performance being executed and the variable performance being held. If it is determined that there is a variable effect, the "suspension change notice" may be executed. In this case, when receiving the pending pitches command from the main controller 110, the audio lamp control device 113 may transmit the pending pitches command as it is to the display control device 114 as a pending pitches command for display. As a result, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the main controller 110 along with the start winning are stored in the pending information first to fourth areas provided in the pending information storage area of the display control device 114. Among them, it can be stored in an area corresponding to the number of reserved balls in the display reserved ball number command. Then, the display control device 114 may perform shift processing similar to the processing of S1403 and S1404 in FIG. 44 on the pending information storage area each time it receives the display variation pattern command. As a result, the execution information storage area of the display control device 114 can store the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c of the main control device 110. The same values as those of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first to fourth reserved ball storage areas 203b of the main controller 110 can be stored in the to fourth areas.

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the audio lamp controller 113 instructs the display controller 114 to display. The command may be sent directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114 . Alternatively, the audio lamp control device 113 may be connected to the display control device 114 so that the display control device 114 may transmit commands for instructing the output of each sound and lighting of the lamp to the audio lamp control device 113 . Furthermore, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

When the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured as one control device, the same hold information storage area and execution information storage area as shown in FIG. is provided, and when a pending ball number command is received from the main controller 110, among the first to fourth areas of the prefetch information provided in the pending information storage area, the area corresponding to the prefetch pending number of the pending ball number command , each of the counter values C1 to C3, CS1 included in the pending ball count command may be stored. In addition, each time one control device receives a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, shift processing similar to the processing of S1403 and S1404 in FIG. 44 between the first to fourth areas of the pending information and the execution information storage area may be executed.

In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S911) executed by the audio ramp control device 113, when the stop type command is received, the fluctuation start flag 223a is always set to ON. The fluctuation start flag 223a may be set to ON when the stop type command is received after receiving the command. As a result, it is possible to suppress execution of a strange variation effect when a stop type command is received without receiving a variation pattern command.

Further, the variation start flag 223a may be set to ON at the timing when the variation pattern command is received. In this case, in the variation effect processing (S910) executed by the sound lamp control device 113, the variation pattern extracted by the variation pattern command is notified to the display control device 114 based on the fact that the variation start flag 223a is turned on. A display variation pattern command may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114 . As a result, without waiting for reception of the stop type command by the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 is caused to execute the variation effect on the third pattern display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command. can be done. In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing of receiving the stop type command, You may make it transmit to the display control apparatus 114. FIG. Then, the display control device 114 may determine the stop pattern of the variable effect executed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the stop type command for display.

In the above-described embodiment, whether or not there is a variation effect that will result in a big win during the variation effect of the third symbol that is held and executed with the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is determined by the execution symbols and the The case of performing the "holding change notice" in the holding pattern has been described. On the other hand, when the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67 (start winning), the second symbol (normal symbol) is suspended and executed during the variable display (stops at "○" symbol). Whether or not there is something to be, using the second design reservation lamp 84 or the third design display device 81, etc., together with whether or not there is a variation effect that becomes a big hit during the variation effect of the third design, or , may alternatively notify the player. As a result, whether there is a winning variable display in the variable display of the pending second pattern (normal pattern) or in the variable display of the second pattern (normal pattern) being executed and held The player can grasp whether or not. Therefore, it can be estimated whether the second symbol will be a hit or not before executing the variable display of the second symbol. Among game machines, there is a game machine which enhances game performance by the presence or absence of winning of normal symbols, and it is particularly effective in such a game machine.

In the above-described embodiment, the demo effect is described as stopping display of the third symbol consisting of the main symbols with no numbers "0" to "9", but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , the third pattern consisting of main patterns with numbers or main patterns without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third pattern. Also, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third pattern or the back image used in the variable effect may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed has explained the case of executing the "suspended change notice", which is one form of the continuous notice effect. A fourth pattern display device separate from the third pattern display device 81 is provided in the machine 10, and the fourth pattern display device is caused to display the fourth pattern together with the variation performance executed by the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Executes a continuous notice effect (hereinafter referred to as “continuous notice effect” including “hold change notice”) that is executed across multiple variable effects, unlike “hold change notice” or “hold change notice” You may In this case, the control of the fourth pattern display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a pachinko machine 10 is provided with an accessory different from each movable accessory that operates according to various performances, and by operating the accessory in a predetermined mode together with the variable performance, continuous advance notice performance is executed. good too. Further, by controlling the sound lamp control device 113, by outputting the sound for the continuous notice effect from the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10, the continuous notice effect may be executed, or the illumination part of the pachinko machine 10. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time the variation effect (dynamic display) is performed in the third pattern display device 81 (and the first pattern display device 37), the pattern is continuously displayed in the fourth pattern display device, or the character is displayed. By operating in a predetermined mode, by outputting sound from the sound output device 226, or by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33, the player can be given a feeling of expectation of a big win. . In addition, the player normally continues the game while watching the third pattern display device 81 where the variable effect is performed, but the pattern is displayed by the fourth pattern display device different from the third pattern display device 81. , the operation of the character, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting and blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33, so that the continuous announcement effect is performed, so that the player is given a different effect than usual. can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous announcement effect can be easily continued by simple control such as display of the pattern by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the character, sound output from the sound output device 226, or lighting / blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33. It is possible to perform a preview performance.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by outputting sound from the sound output device 226 or by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113. The main control device 110 is made to perform the winning judgment and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation, the voice lamp control device 113 is made to perform the continuous notice effect, and the display control device 114 is made to perform the change effect, so that the pachinko machine 10 continues When the advance notice effect is performed, each control device can be made to take charge of each process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from concentrating on one control device, so that the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

In addition, display of symbols for continuous advance notice effect on the third pattern display device 81, display of symbols for continuous notice effect on the fourth pattern display device, operation in a predetermined mode of the role, sound from the sound output device 226 At least two or more of the output and lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 may be combined and controlled in conjunction with each other to execute a continuous advance notice effect. As a result, it is possible to execute more diverse continuous announcement effects. In addition, the execution method of the continuous notice effect (display by the third pattern display device 81, display by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the role, sound output from the sound output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33 , or a combination of them), by changing the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, off) Prepare multiple continuous notice effect modes selected according to good too.

In the above embodiment, the main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of pending balls incremented by "1" when there is a winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64. The case where each counter C1 to C3, CS1 acquired from the counter buffer along with the start winning is included in the number command and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, but it is included in the reserved ball number command. The types of counters may be part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include the values of other counters. Also, when the main controller 110 notifies the audio lamp controller 113 of the values of the counters acquired in conjunction with the start winning, the information indicating the values of the counters is included in the pending ball number command and notified. Instead, information indicating the value of each counter may be included in a command separate from the number-of-holds-balls command, and these values may be notified to the audio lamp control device 113 . As another command, it may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, or a variation pattern command, a stop pattern command, or other information may be voiced. The command for notifying the lamp control device 113 may be added with the value of each counter acquired with the start winning. As another command, when notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, the value of each counter to be notified is in the variable effect corresponding to the number of times of suspension It may include information indicating whether it is related. As a result, the audio lamp control device 113, based on the information about the number of times of suspension included in the command, stores each of the A counter value can be stored.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the pending ball number command are stored in the pending information storage area 223h. Although the case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and when a pending ball number command (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, based on the value of each counter indicated by the command , whether it is a jackpot or not, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, the type of loss in the case of a loss, etc. are partially or entirely determined, and these determination results are used instead of the values of each counter indicated by the command, or , may be stored in the pending information storage area 223h together with part or all of the value of the counter. As a result, when the prefetching process is executed, the determination result such as whether or not the variable effect being executed or pending is a big hit is already stored in the pending information storage area 223h, so the prefetching process uses this determination result. It is only necessary to read it, and the execution of processing can be completed quickly. In addition, if the variable time of the variable effect is determined according to the number of pending balls at the time when the execution of the variable effect is started (strictly, the time when the jackpot lottery is performed), the number of pending balls command (or When a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, it is not possible to determine the number of pending balls when the variable effect is started, so it is impossible to accurately determine the variable time. Therefore, in this case, it is preferable to store at least the value of the variation type counter CS1 used for determining the variation time in the pending information storage area 223h. As a result, when the look-ahead process is executed, if the hitting of balls to the game area is stopped, the number of pending balls at the time when the variable effect is started can be determined. It is possible to calculate the variation time based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 together with the determination result of whether or not the game is a big win, the type of the big win in the case of a big win, and the type of loss in the case of a loss.

In the above embodiment, the case where the game board 13 is provided with one first ball entrance 64 for starting the jackpot lottery when a ball is entered has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances, each of which is independently detected to start a jackpot lottery. In this case, when there is a hold at each of the first ball entrances, the number of held ball commands sent by the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 indicate which of the first ball entrances is being held. May contain information. In addition, the variation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 when starting the variation also includes information indicating which of the first entrances is the suspended variation effect. good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a holding ball counter is prepared for each first ball entrance, and when a holding ball number command is received, the first ball entering indicated by the holding ball number command is received. When the number of held balls is set in the number of held balls counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, if the number of held balls counter for the first entrance indicated by the variation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entrance The number of held balls can be counted every time.

In addition, when a plurality of first ball entrances are arranged on the game board 13, the counter value acquired with the winning (starting winning) of each first ball entrance is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. You may In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired by the main controller 110 with the start winning is may include information indicating whether the In addition, the variation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 when starting the variation also includes information indicating whether the variation effect is associated with the start winning to any of the first entrances. may Furthermore, in the sound ramp control device 113, a hold information storage area may be prepared for each first ball entrance. As a result, every time a variation pattern command is received, shift processing is performed on the holding information storage area corresponding to the first entrance where the start winning that triggered the execution of the variation performance indicated by the variation pattern command is detected. It can be carried out. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the pending variable effect for each first ball entrance can be held in the sound ramp control device 113 as well. Therefore, if the probability of winning a jackpot, the distribution probability of the jackpot type, the distribution probability of the losing type, etc. differ depending on the first ball entrance that has started winning, in the look-ahead process, it is determined whether each variable effect will be a jackpot. It is possible to correctly determine whether or not, the type of jackpot in the case of a big win, the type of loss in the case of a loss, etc., based on which first ball entrance the starting prize is entered. In addition, when the variable effect based on the start winning to one first entrance is given priority over the variable effect based on the starting winning to the other first entrance, the first entrance to one Prefetch processing can be performed in order from the value of the counter corresponding to the variable performance based on the start winning to the ball.

In addition, when a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, the sound ramp control device 113 sends the values of each counter acquired based on the start winning to the first ball entrances from the main controller 110 by a command. When it is determined to start the continuous notice performance when receiving, the continuous notice performance is executed over all the variable performances (suspended balls) suspended at that time regardless of the first ball entrance where the starting prize was awarded. may In addition, a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, and the variable performance for winning to one first ball entrance is preferentially executed over the variable performance for winning to other first ball entrances. In the pachinko machine, the start of the continuous advance notice performance may be determined only from the result of reading the counter value acquired for winning the prize at the first ball entrance where the variable performance is preferentially executed. . As a result, it is not determined whether or not the execution of the continuous announcement performance is set for the variable performance corresponding to the winning of the first ball entrance with the low priority, and the continuous announcement performance is not started for this variable performance. . Supposing that the continuous advance notice effect is started for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the first ball entrance with the low priority, and the variable effect is continuously suspended in the first ball entrance with the high priority, There is a possibility that a situation may occur in which the continuous advance notice effect does not end easily. On the other hand, in this modification, it is not determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is set to be executed for the variable effect corresponding to the winning at the first ball entrance with the low priority. Since the continuous advance notice effect is not started, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is decreased by 1 (see S1411 in FIG. 44). , but not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the variation process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the number of held balls of the main controller 110 subtracted in accordance with the variation pattern command set by the variation start process (S307) A pending ball number command is set so that the value (N) of the counter 203a (see S305 in FIG. 35) is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the pending ball number command is a variation pattern. It may be transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 together with the transmission of the command. As a result, the audio lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of held balls held by the main control device 110 . Also, the variation pattern command may include the value (N) of the pending ball number counter 203a after the subtraction. In this case, when receiving a variation pattern command, the sound lamp control device 113 may extract the number of held balls (N) included in the variation pattern command and set it in the sub-held ball number counter 223b.

In the above embodiment, winning into the first ball entrance 64 and passage through the second ball entrance 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four. However, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls for the variable effect based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 is displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 by numbers, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to

Further, as shown in the above-described embodiment, the variable effect, which is the variable display of the third pattern, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as the identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The pattern may be moved and displayed in the horizontal direction or along a predetermined path such as an L shape. In addition, the variable display of the symbols is not limited to the variable performance of the symbols. Display is also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variable effect is executed, the case of displaying the high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize them has been described. Alternatively, all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an unrecognizable degree and displayed, or all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiment. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.
<Group A: Change the display of multiple characters to red, and correct the character display to white after the stage effect depending on whether or not it hits a big hit>
Acquisition means (for example, the first ball entrance 64) for acquiring starting information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) for determining based on the starting information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic display executing means (for example, dynamic display of identification information (for example, third pattern variation effect) for executing dynamic display of identification information (for example, third pattern display device 81) based on the determination result by the determining means (for example, a display control device 114),
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means, when special identification information (for example, "jackpot display"), which is predetermined identification information, appears, a predetermined game is displayed to the player. In game machines that add value,
a storage means (for example, an execution information storage area 223i) for storing the start information acquired by the acquisition means;
Based on the starting information stored in the storage means, the special identification information is displayed in the dynamic display, or general identification information different from the special identification information (for example, "failure display") is displayed. Appearance information determination means for determining whether to appear (for example, variation effect processing (S1109));
Advantageous situation determination means (for example, character mode setting process (S1417)) for determining whether or not a situation advantageous to the player will occur;
A plurality of display means (for example, character display Se1 during reach occurrence, character display Se2 during reach, fixed phrase character display Se3, and pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4) that are notified with a predetermined relationship with each other;
Based on the result of determination by the appearance information determining means, the notification mode of the indicating means is changed from a predetermined first mode (eg, "white") to a second mode (eg, "red") different from the first mode. ) to change mode changing means (eg, character color lottery counter 223f),
a plurality of changing means (for example, a character color change table 222h) for changing the notification mode of a plurality of the indicating means to the second mode when the mode changing means changes the indicating means to the second mode; prepared,
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, execution of a determination effect for executing a determination effect (for example, a "demonstration" of a variable element of "super reach") to determine whether the special identification information is to be displayed or the general identification information is to be displayed. means (e.g., "super reach" variables),
The mode changing means is
When the display mode of the display means is changed to the second mode by the multiple change means, and the advantageous situation determination means determines that a situation advantageous to the player does not occur, the determination performance execution means A game machine A0 characterized by comprising a first mode notification means (for example, a fixed phrase normal command for display) for notifying the display means to be notified after execution of the determination effect by the first mode. .

According to the gaming machine A0, the acquisition means acquires the start information when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the start information acquired by the acquisition means. The dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of the identification information on the image display means based on the determination result by the determination means. When special identification information, which is predetermined identification information, appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. Further, the starting information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means. Here, based on the starting information stored in the storage means, the appearance information determination means determines whether the special identification information is to be displayed in the dynamic display or the general identification information different from the special identification information is to be displayed. be done. Further, it is determined by the advantageous situation determination means whether or not an advantageous situation for the player occurs. Then, a plurality of indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other are notified. Further, based on the determination result by the appearance information determining means, the notification mode of the indicating means is changed from the predetermined first mode to a second mode different from the first mode by the mode changing means. Then, when the mode changing means changes the indicating means to the second mode, the plurality of indicating means changes the notification modes of the plurality of indicating means to the second mode. Here, in the dynamic display, a determination effect for whether to display the special identification information or the general identification information is executed by the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means. When the notification mode of the display means is changed to the second mode by the multiple change means, and the advantageous situation determination means determines that a situation advantageous to the player does not occur, the mode change means is provided with By the first mode notification means, the indicating means notified after execution of the determination effect by the determination effect execution means is notified in the first mode. That is, even if the notification mode of a plurality of indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other is changed to the second mode when no advantageous situation for the player occurs, the notification is made after the dynamic display determination effect is executed. The notification mode of the indicating means is notified in the first mode that is not the second mode.

As in the past, when indicating indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other at a plurality of locations (timing or display area; the same shall apply hereinafter) of dynamic display, the indicating means is set to the first If it is configured to set (lottery) whether to notify in one mode or to notify in a second mode different from the first mode, setting processing (lottery processing) for the notification locations is required, and control is complicated. This may result in an increase in the processing load. In addition, if the indicating means that appears earlier in the dynamic display is notified in the second mode and then the indicating means that is notified later is notified in the first mode, the indicating means have a predetermined relevance. Therefore, it becomes an expression in which the degree of expectation for the emergence of the special identification information is lowered (hereinafter referred to as "downward expression"). Therefore, there is a possibility that the player, who has been excited by the notification of the second mode in the previous display means, will lose interest when he witnesses the above-mentioned descent expression in the subsequent display means.

Therefore, in the dynamic display, setting (lottery) of the notification modes of the indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other is performed collectively (multiple simultaneously), and the second mode notified by one indicating means is also applied to the other indicating means. By adopting a configuration in which notification is made following the instructions, there is no need to perform setting processing for each notification location, and the processing load can be reduced. In addition, when indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other are notified in the second mode even once, the indicating means to be notified thereafter are configured to follow the second mode and notify the indicating means. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game by eliminating the phenomenon of the occurrence of the expression of the downfall in the game.

However, when a plurality of display means having a predetermined relationship with each other are changed to the second mode, the display means are notified in the second mode even in a state in which, for example, a situation advantageous to the player does not occur. Sometimes. Since the second mode of the indicating means is a mode that is changed from the predetermined first mode based on the judgment result of the appearance information judging means, it suggests that the current presentation situation can be changed based on the change. It has a development suggestion function. On the other hand, the indicating means notified after the determination effect has a situation notification function of notifying the content of the current effect situation, which is the result of the determination effect. Therefore, when the indicating means after the execution of the judgment effect is notified in the second mode, the player is informed that the indicating means is notified in the second mode, and the development suggesting function is superior to the situation reporting function of the indicating means. , it is predicted that the situation will not be settled without the occurrence of a situation that is advantageous to the player, and that some kind of development performance will be executed and the situation will change to a situation that is advantageous to the player. However, contrary to the prediction, a situation that is advantageous to the player is determined without occurring. There is a risk that the game will be interrupted due to increased distrust of the game hall where the player is playing.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine A0, when a situation advantageous to the player does not occur, even if the display means is changed to the second mode, the display means notified after the determination effect is displayed in the second mode. configured not to notify That is, in a state in which no situation advantageous to the player occurs, the indicating means after the determination effect is configured to notify in the first mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the content of the performance, to provide a comfortable game that does not give the player excessive expectations, and does not make the player feel distrustful. effective.

In addition, "a plurality of indication means notified with a predetermined relationship with each other" means, for example, when the indication means have the same attribute or correspond to the same type, at the same timing In the case of appearing, or even in the case of appearing with a time lag, when one appears, the other also appears, etc., with respect to one indicating means, the other indicating means is temporally, shapely, A relationship that is conceptually organically entwined (closely related). Specifically, for example, a notice display displayed in the same display area (character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence and a fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), or a notice display (strong character notice) displayed in different modes at the same timing etc.), a notice display in which another notice appears after one notice appears (step-up notice, character display Se1 when reach occurs, and fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), and the same effect is executed multiple times. (variable elements of "pseudo-ren", etc.) or the same or similar sounds (for example, "similar sounds" are sounds that step up in stages) are intermittently output. production etc. are exemplified.

In addition, the "judgment effect" is, for example, when indicating the effect part of whether the special identification information appears or the general identification information appears among the plurality of variable elements that make up the dynamic display, the dynamic display , or the case of showing the entire dynamic display.

Furthermore, the "situation favorable to the player" means, for example, when the special identification information appears in the dynamic display during execution and a predetermined game value can be given, the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display during standby. When it appears and a predetermined game value can be given, When a special effect (for example, "Super Reach" effect mode) in which special identification information can be expected to appear in dynamic display during execution or standby can be executed , when a first special state in which special identification information is more likely to appear than usual (for example, "probability fluctuation state") can occur, or a second special state in which dynamic display of a shorter dynamic time than usual is likely to be selected ( For example, it refers to a case where a "time reduction state") can occur.

In gaming machine A0,
The advantageous situation determination means is
special identification information determining means for determining whether the special identification information appears or the general identification information appears in the dynamic display;
The first mode notification means is
When the special identification information determining means determines that the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, the indicating means notified after the determination effect execution means executes the determination effect is the first A gaming machine A1 characterized by notifying in a manner.

According to the gaming machine A1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special identification information determination means provided in the advantageous situation determination means determines whether the special identification information appears or the general identification information appears in the dynamic display. Then, when the special identification information determination means determines that the general identification information will appear in the dynamic display, the indication means notified after the determination effect execution means executes the determination effect is controlled by the first mode notification means, It is notified in the first mode. That is, when general identification information that does not give a predetermined game value appears in the dynamic display, even if the notification mode of a plurality of display means having a predetermined relationship with each other is changed to the second mode, the dynamic The notification mode of the indicating means, which is notified after execution of the determination performance of the display, is notified in the first mode instead of the second mode.

Conventionally, when changing a plurality of display means having a predetermined relationship to each other to the second mode, for example, in a dynamic display in which a display result of general identification information to which a predetermined game value is not given appears, the dynamic display In a state where the determination effect is performed and the general identification information is displayed, the indicating means may be notified in the second mode. Since the second mode of the indicating means is a mode that is changed from the predetermined first mode based on the judgment result of the judging means, it has a development suggesting function that suggests that the current rendering situation can be changed based on the change. have On the other hand, the indicating means notified after the determination effect has a situation notification function of notifying the content of the current effect situation, which is the result of the determination effect. Therefore, when the indicating means after the execution of the judgment effect is notified in the second mode, the player is informed that the indicating means is notified in the second mode, and the development suggesting function is superior to the situation reporting function of the indicating means. , it is predicted that the dynamic display will not be determined by the general identification information as it is, and that some development effect will be executed and the general identification information will be changed to the special identification information. However, contrary to the prediction, the dynamic display is determined as the general identification information to which the predetermined game value is not assigned. In such a case, the game machine may be distrustful of the game arcade where the game machine is installed, and the game may be interrupted.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine A1, when the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, even if the display means is changed to the second mode, the display means notified after the determination effect is displayed in the second mode. It is configured not to notify the two modes. That is, in the dynamic display of the general identification information, the indicating means after the judgment production is configured to notify in the first mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the content of the performance, to provide a comfortable game that does not give the player excessive expectations, and does not make the player feel distrustful. effective.

In gaming machine A1,
The indicator means
A first display means (for example, character display Se1 during reach occurrence or character display Se2 during reach) that appears before or during execution of the determination effect;
A second display means (for example, fixed phrase character display Se3) that appears after the execution of the determination effect,
The mode changing means is
When the special identification information determination means determines that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, the first display means and the second display means are changed to the second mode based on the plurality change means. a second mode continuation means for displaying with
When the special identification information determination means determines that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the first display means is displayed in the second mode based on the plurality change means, and the a second mode changing means for displaying the second display means in the first mode by means of the first mode notification means.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the indicating means is provided with a first indicating means that appears before or during execution of the determination performance and a second indicating means that appears after the determination performance is performed. Further, when the special identification information determination means determines that the special identification information will appear in the dynamic display, the second mode continuation means provided in the mode change means causes the first indication means to be displayed based on the multiple change means. and the second indicating means are displayed in the second mode. On the other hand, when the special identification information determining means determines that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the second mode changing means provided in the mode changing means changes the first display based on the multiple changing means. The means is displayed in the second manner, and the second indication means is displayed in the first manner by the first manner notification means.

As a result, when the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, both the first display means and the second display means are changed to the second mode, and when the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the second mode is displayed. The first indicating means is displayed in the second mode, while the second indicating means is configured to be displayed in the first mode. That is, in the dynamic display in which the display result of the special identification information appears when the indicating means has been changed to the second mode, the second indicating means after the determination effect is displayed in the second mode, and the general identification In the dynamic display in which the display result of the information appears, the second display means after the judgment effect is displayed in the first mode. By configuring in this way, the second indicating means of the second mode does not appear after the general identification information appears, and since it does not suggest that the presentation will develop, inconsistencies in the content of presentation do not occur. Thus, there is an effect that a comfortable game can be provided in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel a sense of distrust.

In gaming machine A2,
The first indicating means is
1. In the dynamic display of 1, at least a plurality of appearances,
The multiple change means are
A gaming machine A3, characterized by comprising a first display collective means for collectively setting at least the display mode of the first display means.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in one dynamic display, at least a plurality of the first indicating means are displayed, and the display mode of at least the first indicating means is collectively displayed by the first indicating collective means provided in the plural changing means. configured to be set. As a result, it is possible to collectively set a plurality of first indicating means appearing in one dynamic display, so that the control load can be reduced compared to control in which setting processing is performed for each first indicating means. It has the effect of being able to In particular, the more the number of appearing positions of the first indicating means capable of executing the second mode in the dynamic display (for example, 5 or more), the more the collective setting works, and the control load is remarkably reduced. It is possible to

In any of gaming machines A0 to A3,
The mode changing means is
Display mode changing means (e.g., character color) for changing the display mode of the indicating means from a predetermined normal display mode (e.g., "white") to a special display mode (e.g., "red") different from the normal display mode lottery counter 223f);
The timing at which the display mode of the display means is changed from the normal display mode to the special display mode by the display mode changing means (for example, the timing to display the character display Se1 at the time of reaching occurrence, or the timing to display the character display Se2 during reach timing selection means (color change timing counter 223g) for selecting the timing to
The multiple change means are
collective change means for collectively changing the display mode of the display means displayed after the timing selected by the timing selection means to the special display mode;
The first mode notification means is
After the timing at which the display mode of the display means is changed to the special display mode by the collective change means, the display mode of the display means appearing after the execution of the judgment effect is displayed in the normal display mode. A game machine A4, comprising a mode display means.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A0 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display mode of the indicating means is changed from a predetermined normal display mode to a special display mode different from the normal display mode by the display mode changing means provided in the mode changing means. Also, the timing selection means provided in the mode change means selects the timing at which the display mode change means changes the display mode of the indicating means from the normal display mode to the special display mode. Then, the display mode of the display means displayed after the timing selected by the timing selection means is changed to the special display mode by the collective change means provided in the plurality of change means. Here, after the timing at which the display mode of the indicating means is changed to the special display mode by the collective change means, the display mode of the indicating means that appears after execution of the judgment effect is provided in the first mode informing means. It is displayed in the normal display mode by the normal mode display means. As a result, regarding the display modes of the indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other, the display modes of the indicating means are set based on a plurality of display elements such as display timing, thereby increasing variations in the display modes of the indicating means. When the general identification information appears on the display means after the judgment production, it can be displayed in the normal display mode (first mode) by changing (correcting) the batch setting contents. Therefore, while increasing the interest of the game by diversifying the effects, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the effects, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel distrust. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine A4,
The display mode changing means is
Color changing means (e.g., character color lottery) for changing the display color of the indicating means from a predetermined normal display color (e.g., "white") to a special display color (e.g., "red") different from the normal display color counter 223f),
The timing selection means is
The timing at which the display color of the indicating means is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color changing means (for example, the timing to display the character display Se1 at the time of reaching occurrence, or the timing to display the character display Se2 during reaching color change timing selection means (color change timing counter 223g) for selecting the timing),
The collective change means is
color collective change means for collectively changing the display color of the display means displayed after the timing selected by the color change timing selection means to the special display color;
The first mode notification means is
After the timing at which the display color of the indicating means is changed to the special display color by the color batch changing means, the display color of the indicating means that appears after the execution of the judgment effect is displayed in the normal display color. A gaming machine A5 characterized by comprising a normal color display means.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display color of the indicating means is changed from a predetermined normal display color to a special display color different from the normal display color by the color changing means provided in the display mode changing means. Further, the timing at which the display color of the indicating means is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color changing means is selected by the color change timing selecting means provided in the timing selecting means. Then, the display color of the indicating means displayed after the timing selected by the color change timing selecting means is changed to the special display color by the collective color changing means provided in the collective changing means. Here, after the timing at which the display color of the indicating means is changed to the special display color by the color collectively changing means, the display color of the indicating means that appears after execution of the determination effect is provided in the first mode notification means. It is displayed in the normal display color by the normal color display means. As a result, regarding the display modes of the indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other, the display mode of the indicating means is set based on a plurality of display elements such as the display color and the display timing, thereby providing variations in the display mode of the indicating means. is increased, and when the general identification information appears in the display means after the judgment production, it is possible to change (correct) the batch setting content and display it in the normal display color (first mode). Therefore, while increasing the interest of the game by diversifying the effects, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the effects, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel distrust. It has the effect of being able to

In gaming machine A4 or A5,
The display mode changing means is
Changed element selection means (for example, character mode setting processing (S1417)) for separately selecting changed elements of the display color, change timing, or display pattern with respect to the display mode of the display means;
first instruction output means (for example, command output processing (S1102)) for outputting a display instruction for displaying the display means on the image display means based on each change element selected by the change element selection means; , and
The first instruction output means is
When the display mode of the indicating means that appears after the execution of the determination effect is displayed in the first mode by the first mode informing means, at least the changing element of the display color of the indicating means is displayed in the normal display color. a second instruction output means for outputting a display instruction to be displayed in a game machine A6.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4 or A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the change factor selection means provided in the display mode change means separately selects the change factors of the display color, the change timing, or the display pattern with respect to the display mode of the display means. Also, the first instruction output means, which is also provided in the mode change means, outputs a display instruction for displaying the display means on the image display means based on each change element selected by the change element selection means. Then, when the display mode of the indicating means to appear after execution of the judgment effect is displayed in the first mode by the first mode informing means, a display instruction to display at least the changing element of the display color of the indicating means in the normal display color. is output by the second instruction output means provided in the first instruction output means. That is, the mode changing means separately selects (determines) the change elements of the display color, the change timing, or the display pattern with respect to the display mode of the display means, and outputs display instructions for the display means based on the selected contents. so that when the display mode of the indicating means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means, a display instruction to display at least the display color in the normal display color among the changed elements of the indicating means is output. is configured to

Hypothetically, after selecting all of the plurality of change elements in the plurality of display means, that is, the display color, the change timing, and the display pattern, display instructions regarding the plurality of change elements in the plurality of display means are generated by one display instruction. In this case, display instructions corresponding to all variations of display colors, change timings, and display patterns must be prepared in advance, and the number of display instructions may become enormous. Therefore, by separately selecting display instructions for each change element of each display means, it is possible to reduce the number of display instructions relating to the display means and suppress an increase in the memory capacity of the gaming machine. .

In particular, in the gaming machine employing the invention of the gaming machine A1, even if the second mode of each display means is selected, when the result of the dynamic display is the general identification information, the determination performance is not performed. The display means (second display means) appearing after execution is configured to be displayed (changed) in the first mode (normal display color). In this case, after all of the display color, change timing and display pattern of each indicating means, and further the display (change) content of the indicating means after the effect determination are determined, a display instruction for each indicating means is given. When outputting a display instruction, it is necessary to prepare in advance a display instruction corresponding to variations in the display mode of all the display means, including the content to be displayed (changed) by the display means after the effect determination. The numbers are likely to grow exponentially. Therefore, display instructions are output separately for each display color, change timing, display pattern, or display (change) content after effect determination, and each display means is displayed by the image display means based on the display instructions. By adjusting the control, it is possible to reduce the number of display instructions for each display means and suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the gaming machine.

In addition, among the changing elements of the indicating means, the change in the display color is easier to recognize than the change in the other changing elements (change timing or display pattern). Specifically, for example, in the case of a display pattern, the meaning of the display pattern cannot be understood unless the type of the display pattern is remembered in advance. This is because it can be determined by whether or not the display color has changed from the normal display color (white). Therefore, when the player recognizes that the display color of the indicating means has been changed to the special display color, the change in the display color of the indicating means causes some kind of development effect in the dynamic display. I predict that it will be executed. However, contrary to the prediction, if the development effect is not executed in the dynamic display, the player will distrust the game machine due to the discrepancy in the content of the effect, and the game machine that has the game machine installed. There is a possibility that the game will be interrupted due to increased distrust of the place.

Therefore, when the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, even if the plurality of indicating means are changed to the second mode, at least the display color of the indicating means displayed after the determination effect is changed to the normal display color. Configure to display in display colors. That is, in the dynamic display in which the general identification information appears, the indicating means after the judgment effect is configured to be displayed in at least the normal display color. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent discrepancies in the content of the production, to provide a comfortable game that does not give the player excessive expectations, and does not make the player feel distrustful. effective.

In gaming machine A6,
The first instruction output means is
A game machine A7, characterized by comprising a start time output means for outputting all display instructions relating to the display mode of the display means in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the starting time output means provided in the first instruction output means outputs all display instructions regarding the display mode of the display means in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display. As a result, at the start of dynamic display, it is possible to indicate to the image display means the content of the indicating means to be displayed in the dynamic display, and display of each indicating means in the dynamic display can be performed smoothly. has the effect of

In game machines A1 to A7,
The mode changing means is
When it is determined by the special identification information determining means that the special identification information will appear in the dynamic display, it will appear after the determination effect is executed by the determination effect executing means based on the mode changing means. A gaming machine A8, characterized by comprising a mode maintaining means for displaying the indicating means in the second mode (for example, S1702 of character color change restriction processing: Yes).

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the determining means determines that the special identification information will appear in the dynamic display, the mode maintaining means provided in the mode changing means causes the determination effect executing means to perform the determination based on the change by the mode changing means. The indicating means appearing after execution of the effect is displayed in the second mode. As a result, when the special identification information appears, the display of the changed indicating means is initially maintained in the second mode, the special identification information appears, and the predetermined game value can be awarded. is congratulated and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

<Group B: Change the character display to red, and correct the character display to white after the stage effect depending on whether or not the probability variable jackpot is given>
Acquisition means (for example, the first ball entrance 64) for acquiring starting information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) for determining based on the starting information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic display executing means (for example, dynamic display of identification information (for example, third pattern variation effect) for executing dynamic display of identification information (for example, third pattern display device 81) based on the determination result by the determining means (for example, a display control device 114),
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means, when special identification information (for example, "jackpot display"), which is predetermined identification information, appears, a predetermined game is displayed to the player. In game machines that add value,
The special identification information includes predetermined first special identification information (for example, "15R normal jackpot") and second special identification information (for example, "15R probability variable jackpot") that can be given a higher game value than the first special identification information. ), and
a storage means (for example, an execution information storage area 223i) for storing the start information acquired by the acquisition means;
Based on the starting information stored in the storage means, the special identification information is displayed in the dynamic display, or general identification information different from the special identification information (for example, "failure display") is displayed. Appropriateness determination means (for example, MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113) for determining whether or not to appear;
When it is determined by the applicable/non-applicability determination means that the special identification information appears, the start information stored in the corresponding storage means is the start information related to the first special identification information, or the second special identification information. Type determination means (for example, MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113) for determining whether it is starting information related to special identification information;
A plurality of display means (for example, character display Se1 during reach occurrence, character display Se2 during reach, fixed phrase character display Se3, and pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4) that are notified with a predetermined relationship with each other;
Based on the judgment result by the propriety judgment means, the notification mode of the indicating means is changed from a predetermined first mode (eg, "white") to a second mode (eg, "red") different from the first mode. Mode changing means for changing (for example, character color lottery counter 223f),
a plurality of changing means (for example, a character color change table 222h) for changing the notification mode of a plurality of the indicating means to the second mode when the mode changing means changes the indicating means to the second mode; prepared,
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, the first special identification information or the second special identification information, or the determination effect of whether or not to appear the general identification information ”) Judgment effect execution means (for example, variable element of “super reach”),
The mode changing means is
When the notification mode of the indicating means is changed to the second mode by the multiple change means, the type determination means determines that the start information related to the first special identification information is stored in the corresponding storage means. a first mode informing means (for example, a fixed form phrase normal command for display) for informing, in the first mode, the indicating means to be notified after execution of the judgment effect by the judgment effect executing means when the determination is made; A gaming machine B0 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine B0, the obtaining means obtains the starting information when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the determining means makes a determination based on the starting information obtained by the obtaining means. The dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of the identification information on the image display means based on the determination result by the determination means. When special identification information, which is predetermined identification information, appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. Here, the special identification information includes predetermined first special identification information and second special identification information to which a game value higher than that of the first special identification information can be given. Further, the starting information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means. Here, based on the starting information stored in the storage means, the propriety determination means determines whether the special identification information should be displayed in the dynamic display or the general identification information different from the special identification information should be displayed. Then, when the correctness determination means determines that the special identification information appears, the type determination means determines whether the start information stored in the corresponding storage means is the start information related to the first special identification information, or the first special identification information. 2 It is determined whether the starting information is related to the special identification information. Also, a plurality of indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other are reported. Then, based on the determination result by the suitability determination means, the notification mode of the indicating means is changed from the predetermined first mode to a second mode different from the first mode by the mode changing means. Moreover, when changing the indicating means to the second mode by the mode changing means, the notification mode of the plurality of indicating means is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing means. Here, the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means determines whether or not the first special identification information, the second special identification information, or the general identification information appears in the dynamic display. is executed. Then, when the notification mode of the indicating means is changed to the second mode by the multiple change means, the type determination means determines that the corresponding storage means stores the starting information related to the first special identification information. At this time, the first mode notification means provided in the mode change means informs the indicator means in the first mode after execution of the determination effect by the determination effect execution means. That is, when the first special identification information to which a game value lower than that of the second special identification information appears in the dynamic display, the notification mode of the plurality of display means having a predetermined relationship with each other is changed to the second mode. Even if it has been changed, the notification mode of the indicating means notified after execution of the dynamic display determination effect is notified in the first mode, not in the second mode.

As in the past, when notifying indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other at a plurality of locations (timing or display area; the same shall apply hereinafter) of the dynamic display, the indicating means is displayed for each notification location. If it is configured to set (lottery) whether to notify in one mode or to notify in a second mode different from the first mode, setting processing (lottery processing) for the notification locations is required, which complicates control. , the processing load may increase. Further, after the indicating means to be notified earlier in the dynamic display is displayed in the second mode, and the indicating means to be notified later is notified in the first mode, the indicating means has a predetermined relevance. Therefore, it becomes an expression in which the degree of expectation for the emergence of the special identification information is lowered (hereinafter referred to as "downward expression"). Therefore, there is a possibility that a player who has been in high spirits by being informed of the second mode by the previous indicating means may lose interest when he witnesses the above-mentioned descent expression by the subsequent indicating means.

Therefore, in the dynamic display, setting (lottery) of the notification modes of the indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other is performed collectively, and the second mode notified by one indicating means is followed by the other indicating means. By configuring so as to allow the setting process to be performed for each notification location, the processing load can be reduced. In addition, if the indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other are notified in the second mode even once, the indicating means that appear thereafter are also configured to follow the second mode and notify, so that the indication It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game by eliminating the phenomenon of the occurrence of the expression of the decline in the means.

However, when changing a plurality of display means having a predetermined relationship to each other to the second mode, for example, the display result of the first special identification information that can be given a lower game value than the second special identification information appears. In the target display, in a state in which the dynamic display determination effect is performed and the first special identification information is appearing, the indicating means may be notified in the second mode. Since the second mode of the indicating means is a mode that is changed from the predetermined first mode based on the judgment result of the judging means, it has a development suggesting function that suggests that the current rendering situation can be changed based on the change. have On the other hand, the indicating means notified after the determination effect has a situation notification function of notifying the content of the current effect situation, which is the result of the determination effect. Therefore, when the indicating means after the execution of the judgment effect is notified in the second mode, the player is informed that the indicating means is notified in the second mode, and the development suggesting function is superior to the situation reporting function of the indicating means. , the dynamic display is not determined by the first special identification information as it is, some kind of development effect is executed, and the first special identification information being displayed is changed to the second special identification information to which a higher game value can be given. I predict that it will change. However, contrary to the prediction, the dynamic display is fixed as the first special identification information. There is a possibility that the distrust of the installed game hall will increase, and the game will be interrupted.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine B0, when the information about the first special identification information is stored in the storage means, when the indicating means is changed to the second mode, the indicating means notified after the determination performance It is configured so as not to notify the two modes. That is, when the game value of the first special identification information is awarded, the indicating means after the determination performance is configured to notify in the first mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the content of the performance, to provide a comfortable game that does not give the player excessive expectations, and does not make the player feel distrustful. effective.

In addition, "a plurality of indication means notified with a predetermined relationship with each other" means, for example, when the indication means have the same attribute or correspond to the same type, at the same timing In the case of appearing, or even in the case of appearing with a time lag, when one appears, the other also appears, etc., with respect to one indicating means, the other indicating means is temporally, shapely, A relationship that is conceptually organically entwined (closely related). Specifically, for example, a notice display displayed in the same display area (character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence and a fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), or a notice display (strong character notice) displayed in different modes at the same timing etc.), a notice display in which another notice appears after one notice appears (step-up notice, character display Se1 when reach occurs, and fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), and the same effect is executed multiple times. (variable elements of "pseudo-ren", etc.) or the same or similar sounds (for example, "similar sounds" are sounds that step up in stages) are intermittently output. production etc. are exemplified.

In addition, the "judgment effect" is, for example, when indicating the effect part of whether the special identification information appears or the general identification information appears among the plurality of variable elements that make up the dynamic display, the dynamic display , or the case of showing the entire dynamic display.

In gaming machine B0,
The indicator means
A first display means (for example, character display Se1 during reach occurrence or character display Se2 during reach) that appears before or during execution of the determination effect;
A second display means (for example, fixed phrase character display Se3) that appears after the execution of the determination effect,
The mode changing means is
When the type determination means determines that the starting information related to the second special identification information is stored in the dynamic display, the first display means and the second display notification means are based on the plurality change means. a second mode continuation means for displaying in the second mode;
When the propriety determination means determines that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, or when the type determination means stores start information relating to the first special identification information in the dynamic display. when it is determined that the first display means is displayed in the second mode based on the plurality of changing means, and the second display means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means A gaming machine B1 characterized by comprising a two-mode changing means.

According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the indicating means is provided with a first indicating means that appears before or during execution of the determination performance and a second indicating means that appears after the determination performance is performed. Further, when it is determined by the type determination means that the start information related to the second special identification information is stored in the dynamic display, the second mode continuation means provided in the mode change means causes the second mode continuation means to The first indicating means and the second indicating means are displayed in the second manner. On the other hand, when the propriety determination means determines that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, or when the type determination means determines that the start information related to the first special identification information is stored in the dynamic display. is displayed, the first display means is displayed in the second mode by the second mode changing means provided in the mode changing means based on the plurality of changing means, and the second display means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means is displayed.

Thereby, when the second special identification information appears in the dynamic display, both the first indicating means and the second indicating means are changed to the second mode, and the general identification information or the first special identification information appears in the dynamic display. When it appears, the first indicating means is displayed in the second manner, while the second indicating means is set to be displayed in the first manner. That is, in the dynamic display in which the display result of the first special identification information to which a lower game value than the second special identification information can be given or the general identification information appears, the second display means is displayed in the first mode after the determination effect. configured to By configuring in this way, after the first special identification information or general identification information appears, the second display means of the second mode does not appear, and since it does not suggest that the production will develop, the production It is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the content, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations, and in which the player does not feel a sense of distrust.

In gaming machine B1,
The first indicating means is
1. In the dynamic display of 1, at least a plurality of appearances,
The multiple change means are
A game machine B2, characterized by comprising a first display collective means for collectively setting at least the display mode of the first display means.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in one dynamic display, at least a plurality of the first indicating means are displayed, and the display mode of at least the first indicating means is collectively displayed by the first indicating collective means provided in the plural changing means. configured to be set. As a result, it is possible to collectively set a plurality of first indicating means appearing in one dynamic display, so that the control load can be reduced compared to control in which setting processing is performed for each first indicating means. It has the effect of being able to In particular, the more the number of appearing positions of the first indicating means capable of executing the second mode in the dynamic display increases (for example, five or more places), the more preferable the above multiple changes work, and the control load is remarkably reduced. It is possible to

In any of gaming machines B0 to B2,
The mode changing means is
Display mode changing means (for example, character color lottery counter 223f);
The timing at which the display mode of the display means is changed from the normal display mode to the special display mode by the display mode changing means (for example, the timing at which the character display Se1 is displayed at the time of reach occurrence, or the character display Se2 is displayed during reach) timing selection means (color change timing counter 223g) for selecting the timing to
The multiple change means are
collective change means for collectively changing the display mode of the display means displayed after the timing selected by the timing selection means to the special display mode;
The first mode notification means is
After the timing at which the display mode of the display means is changed to the special display mode by the collective change means, the display mode of the display means appearing after the execution of the determination effect is displayed in the normal display mode. A game machine B3, characterized by comprising mode display means.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B0 to B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display mode of the indicating means is changed from a predetermined normal display mode to a special display mode different from the normal display mode by the display mode changing means provided in the mode changing means. Also, the timing selection means provided in the mode change means selects the timing at which the display mode change means changes the display mode of the indicating means from the normal display mode to the special display mode. Then, the display mode of the display means displayed after the timing selected by the timing selection means is changed to the special display mode by the collective change means provided in the plurality of change means. Here, after the timing at which the display mode of the indicating means is changed to the special display mode by the collective change means, the display mode of the indicating means that appears after execution of the judgment effect is provided in the first mode informing means. It is displayed in the normal display mode by the normal mode display means. As a result, regarding the display modes of the indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other, the display modes of the indicating means are set based on a plurality of display elements such as display timing, thereby increasing variations in the display modes of the indicating means. When the general identification information appears on the display means after the judgment effect, it can be displayed in the normal display mode (first mode) by changing (correcting) the contents of the multiple changes. Therefore, while increasing the interest of the game by diversifying the effects, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the effects, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel distrust. It has the effect of being able to

In any of the gaming machines B3,
The display mode changing means is
Color changing means (e.g., character color lottery) for changing the display color of the indicating means from a predetermined normal display color (e.g., "white") to a special display color (e.g., "red") different from the normal display color counter 223f),
The timing selection means is
The timing at which the display color of the indicating means is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color changing means (for example, the timing to display the character display Se1 at the time of reaching occurrence, or the timing to display the character display Se2 during reaching a color change timing selection means (color change timing counter 223g) for selecting the timing),
The collective change means is
color collective change means for collectively changing the display color of the display means displayed after the timing selected by the color change timing selection means to the special display color;
The first mode notification means is
After the timing at which the display color of the indicating means is changed to the special display color by the color batch changing means, the display color of the indicating means that appears after the execution of the judgment effect is displayed in the normal display color. A game machine B4 characterized by comprising normal color display means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display color of the indicating means is changed from a predetermined normal display color to a special display color different from the normal display color by the color changing means provided in the display mode changing means. Further, the timing at which the display color of the indicating means is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color changing means is selected by the color change timing selecting means provided in the timing selecting means. Then, the display color of the indicating means displayed after the timing selected by the color change timing selecting means is changed to the special display color by the collective color changing means provided in the collective changing means. Here, after the timing at which the display color of the indicating means is changed to the special display color by the color collectively changing means, the display color of the indicating means that appears after execution of the determination effect is provided in the first mode notification means. It is displayed in the normal display color by the normal color display means. Thus, regarding the display elements of the indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other, the display mode of the indicating means is set based on a plurality of display elements such as the display color and the display timing, and variations in the display mode of the indicating means are achieved. is increased, in the case where the general identification information appears in the display means after the judgment production, it is possible to change (correct) the contents of the collective change and display in the normal display color (first mode). Therefore, while increasing the interest of the game by diversifying the effects, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the effects, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel distrust. It has the effect of being able to

In game machine B3 or B4,
The display mode changing means is
Changed element selection means (for example, character mode setting processing (S1417)) for separately selecting changed elements of the display color, change timing, or display pattern with respect to the display mode of the display means;
First instruction output means (for example, command output processing (S1102)) for outputting a display instruction for displaying the display means on the image display means based on each change element selected by the change element selection means. and
The first instruction output means is
When the display mode of the indicating means that appears after the execution of the determination effect is displayed in the first mode by the first mode informing means, at least the changing element of the display color of the indicating means is displayed in the normal display color. a second instruction output means for outputting a display instruction to be displayed in the game machine B5.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3 or B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the change factor selection means provided in the display mode change means separately selects the change factors of the display color, the change timing, or the display pattern with respect to the display mode of the display means. Also, the first instruction output means, which is also provided in the mode change means, outputs a display instruction for displaying the display means on the image display means based on each change element selected by the change element selection means. Then, when the display mode of the indicating means to appear after execution of the determination effect is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means, at least the indication is displayed by the second instruction output means provided in the first instruction output means. A display instruction is output to display the changed element of the display color of the means in the normal display color. That is, the mode changing means separately selects (determines) the change elements of the display color, the change timing, or the display pattern with respect to the display mode of the display means, and outputs display instructions for the display means based on the selected contents. so that when the display mode of the indicating means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means, a display instruction to display at least the display color in the normal display color among the changed elements of the indicating means is output. is configured to

Hypothetically, after selecting all of the plurality of change elements in the plurality of display means, that is, the display color, the change timing, and the display pattern, display instructions regarding the plurality of change elements in the plurality of display means are generated by one display instruction. In this case, display instructions corresponding to all variations of display colors, change timings, and display patterns must be prepared in advance, and the number of display instructions may become enormous. Therefore, by separately selecting display instructions for each change element of each display means, it is possible to reduce the number of display instructions relating to the display means and suppress an increase in the memory capacity of the gaming machine. .

In particular, in the gaming machine employing the invention of the gaming machine B0, even if the second mode of each display means is selected, when the result of the dynamic display is the first special identification information, the determination The display means (second display means) appearing after execution of the effect is displayed (changed) in the first mode (normal display color). In this case, after all of the display color, change timing and display pattern of each indicating means, and further the display (change) content of the indicating means after the effect determination are determined, a display instruction for each indicating means is given. When outputting a display instruction, it is necessary to prepare in advance a display instruction corresponding to variations in the display mode of all the display means, including the content to be displayed (changed) by the display means after the effect determination. The numbers are likely to grow exponentially. Therefore, display instructions are output separately for each display color, change timing, display pattern, or display (change) content after effect determination, and each display means is displayed on the image display means based on the display instructions. By adjusting the control, it is possible to reduce the number of display instructions for each display means and suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the gaming machine.

In addition, among the changing elements of the indicating means, the change in the display color is easier to recognize than the change in the other changing elements (change timing or display pattern). Specifically, for example, in the case of a display pattern, the meaning of the display pattern cannot be understood unless the type of the display pattern is remembered in advance. This is because it can be determined by whether or not the display color has changed from the normal display color (white). Therefore, if the display color of the indicating means has been changed to a special display color, it is assumed that some kind of development effect will be executed in the dynamic display due to the change in the display color of the indicating means. Predict. However, contrary to the prediction, if the development effect is not executed in the dynamic display, the player will distrust the game machine due to the discrepancy in the content of the effect, and the game machine that has the game machine installed. There is a possibility that the game will be interrupted due to increased distrust of the place.

Therefore, when the first special identification information appears in the dynamic display, even if the plurality of indicating means are changed to the second mode, at least the display color to be displayed in the normal display color. That is, in the dynamic display in which the first special identification information appears, the indicating means after the determination effect is configured to be displayed in at least the normal display color. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the content of the performance, to provide a comfortable game that does not give the player excessive expectations, and does not make the player feel distrustful. effective.

In gaming machine B5,
The first instruction output means is
A gaming machine B6, characterized by comprising start time output means for outputting all display instructions relating to the display mode of the display means in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the starting time output means provided in the instruction output means outputs all display instructions regarding the display mode of the display means in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display. As a result, at the start of dynamic display, it is possible to indicate to the image display means the content of the indicating means to be displayed in the dynamic display, and display of each indicating means in the dynamic display can be performed smoothly. has the effect of

In any of gaming machines B0 to B6,
The mode changing means is
When it is determined by the type determination means that the starting information related to the second special identification information is stored in the dynamic display, the determination performance by the determination performance execution means is performed based on the mode change means. A gaming machine B7 characterized by comprising a mode maintaining means for displaying the display means appearing after execution in the second mode.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machines B0 to B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the type determining means determines that the starting information related to the second special identification information is stored in the dynamic display, the mode maintaining means provided in the mode changing means causes the determination effect by the determination effect executing means. is displayed in the second mode. Thereby, when the game value based on the second special identification information is awarded, the game value based on the second special identification information can be awarded while maintaining the display of the changed indicating means in the second mode. There is an effect that it is possible to congratulate the player about this and enhance the interest in the game.

In game machines B0 to B6,
The dynamic display execution means
a special game generating means for generating a special game state in which the predetermined game value can be awarded when the special identification information appears in the dynamic display (for example, any "jackpot state");
When the type determining means determines that the starting information related to the second special identification information is stored in the storage means, the provisional display result corresponding to the first special identification information is displayed in the dynamic display. Temporary display means to appear (for example, a display result corresponding to "15R normal jackpot");
After the provisional display means displays the provisional display result corresponding to the first special identification information in the dynamic display, the special game generation means corresponds to the second special identification information in the special game state. and an elevation display means for displaying an elevation display result,
The mode maintaining means is
When it is determined by the type determining means that the starting information related to the second special identification information is stored in the storage means, and when the promotion display result appears in the special game state by the promotion display means and promotion mode maintenance means for displaying the display means appearing after execution of the determination effect by the determination effect execution means in the second mode based on the mode change means. Game machine B8 to play.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of the game machines B0 to B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, the special game generating means provided in the dynamic display executing means generates a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be awarded. Further, when the type determining means determines that the starting information related to the second special identification information is stored in the storage means, the temporary display means displays the temporary display corresponding to the first special identification information in the dynamic display. A result appears. After the temporary display means displays the temporary display result corresponding to the first special identification information in the dynamic display, the promotion display means corresponds to the second special identification information in the special game state by the special game generation means. A promotion display result will appear. Here, when it is determined by the type determining means that the starting information relating to the second special identification information is stored in the storage means and when the promotion display result is displayed in the special game state by the promotion display means, the mode The indicating means appearing after execution of the determination effect by the determination effect executing means is displayed in the second mode based on the mode changing means by the promotion mode maintaining means provided in the maintaining means. As a result, when the promotion display result corresponding to the second special identification information appears, even if the provisional display result corresponding to the first special identification information appears in the analogy dynamic display, it is displayed after that. Since the game value corresponding to the second special identification information is imparted by displaying the indicating means to be issued in the second mode, it is determined whether the indicating means after the determination effect is displayed in the second mode. There is an effect that a playfulness is created and the interest in the game can be enhanced. In addition, initially, the display of the plurality of changed display means is maintained in the second mode, congratulating the player that the game value corresponding to the second special identification information can be given as a result, and enhancing the interest in the game. There is an effect that it can be increased.

<Group C: Change the character display to red, and if there is a big hit in the hold after reading ahead, maintain the red color of the character display after the stage effect>
Acquisition means (for example, the first ball entrance 64) for acquiring starting information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) for determining based on the starting information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic display executing means (for example, dynamic display of identification information (for example, third pattern variation effect) for executing dynamic display of identification information (for example, third pattern display device 81) based on the determination result by the determining means (for example, a display control device 114),
When special identification information (for example, "jackpot display"), which is predetermined identification information, appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. In a gaming machine that provides
Storage means for storing the start information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined number as the upper limit (for example, the held ball storage area 203b or the held ball execution area 203c);
Determining whether or not information relating to the special identification information is stored in the start information corresponding to the dynamic display to start execution on the image display means among the start information stored in the storage means. Execution determination means (for example, variation effect processing (S1109));
determining whether or not information relating to the special identification information is stored in the start information corresponding to the dynamic display waiting to be executed in the image display means among the start information stored in the storage means; Standby judgment means for judging (for example, pending display setting processing (S1209));
A plurality of display means (for example, character display Se1 during reach occurrence, character display Se2 during reach, fixed phrase character display Se3, and pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4) that are notified with a predetermined relationship with each other;
Based on the determination result by the execution determination means, the notification mode of the indicating means is changed from a predetermined first mode (eg, "white") to a second mode (eg, "red") different from the first mode. Mode changing means for changing (for example, character color lottery counter 223f),
a plurality of changing means (for example, a character color change table 222h) for changing the notification mode of a plurality of the indicating means to the second mode when the mode changing means changes the indicating means to the second mode; prepared,
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, a determination effect of whether to display the special identification information or to display general identification information different from the special identification information and to which the predetermined game value is not given (for example, "failure display"). (For example, the variable element of the "super reach""endeffect") to execute the judgment effect execution means (for example, the variable element of the "super reach"),
The mode changing means is
When the notification mode of the display means is changed to the second mode by the plurality of change means, the special identification information is displayed in the dynamic display started by the image display means by the execution determination means. When it is determined not to do so, and the standby determination means determines that the start information corresponding to the dynamic display whose execution on the image display means is on standby does not include information related to the special identification information. A first mode notification means (for example, a standard phrase for display normal command) for notifying in the first mode the indicating means to be notified after execution of the determination effect by the determination effect execution means when it is determined;
When the display mode of the display means is changed to the second mode by the multiple change means, the special identification information is displayed in the dynamic display that starts execution on the image display means by the execution determination means. or the standby determination means determines that the information relating to the special identification information is stored in the start information corresponding to the dynamic display whose execution on the image display means is on standby. and a mode maintaining means for notifying, in the second mode, the indicating means to be notified after execution of the determination effect by the determination effect execution means when the game machine C0 is executed.

According to the game machine C0, the acquisition means acquires the start information when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the start information acquired by the acquisition means. The dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of the identification information on the image display means based on the determination result by the determination means. When special identification information, which is predetermined identification information, appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, predetermined game value is awarded to the player. Also, the starting information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means with a predetermined number as the upper limit. Here, the execution determination means determines whether or not information relating to the special identification information is stored in the start information corresponding to the dynamic display to start execution on the image display means among the start information stored in the storage means. be done. The standby determination means determines whether or not information relating to the special identification information is stored in the start information corresponding to the dynamic display whose execution on the image display means is on standby among the start information stored in the storage means. be judged. Then, a plurality of indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other are notified. Further, based on the determination result by the execution determination means, the notification mode of the indicating means is changed from the predetermined first mode to a second mode different from the first mode by the mode changing means. Here, when the display means is changed to the second mode by the mode change means, the plurality of notification modes of the plurality of display means are changed to the second mode by the multiple change means. Then, in the dynamic display, the special identification information is displayed or the general identification information to which a predetermined game value is not given unlike the special identification information is displayed by the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Judgment production of whether to put out is executed. Here, when the notification mode of the display means is changed to the second mode by the multiple change means, the execution determination means determines that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display that starts execution on the image display means. and when it is determined by the standby determining means that information relating to the special identification information is not stored in the starting information corresponding to the dynamic display whose execution is on standby in the image display means, the mode changing means The indicating means notified after execution of the determination effect by the determination effect execution means is notified in the first mode by the first mode notification means provided in the . Further, when the notification mode of the display means is changed to the second mode by the multiple change means, the execution determination means determines that the special identification information will appear in the dynamic display that starts execution on the image display means. or when it is determined by the standby determining means that the information relating to the special identification information is stored in the starting information corresponding to the dynamic display whose execution on the image display means is on standby, the mode maintaining means, The display means notified after execution of the determination effect by the determination effect execution means is notified in the second mode by the mode maintaining means. That is, when general identification information that does not give a predetermined game value appears in the dynamic display that starts execution on the image display means, special identification is also performed in the dynamic display that is waiting to be executed on the image display means. When the information does not appear, even if the notification mode of the plurality of display means having a predetermined relationship with each other is changed to the second mode, the display means is notified after execution of the dynamic display determination effect. is displayed in the first mode instead of the second mode. On the other hand, if the special identification information appears in the dynamic display that starts execution on the image display means, or if the special identification information that gives a predetermined game value appears in the dynamic display that is waiting for execution on the image display means, When the notification mode of the plurality of indicating means is changed to the second mode when it appears, the notification mode of the indicating means notified after execution of the determination effect of the dynamic display being executed is notified in the second mode. .

As in the past, when notifying indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other at a plurality of locations (timing or display area; the same shall apply hereinafter) of the dynamic display, the indicating means is displayed for each notification location. If it is configured to set (lottery) whether to notify in one mode or to notify in a second mode different from the first mode, setting processing (lottery processing) for the notification locations is required, which complicates control. , the processing load may increase. Further, in the dynamic display, if the indicating means to be notified first is notified in the second mode and then the indicating means to be notified later is notified in the first mode, the indicating means have a predetermined relevance. Therefore, it becomes an expression in which the degree of expectation for the emergence of the special identification information is lowered (hereinafter referred to as "downward expression"). Therefore, there is a possibility that a player who has been in high spirits by being informed of the second mode by the previous indicating means may lose interest when he witnesses the above-mentioned descent expression by the subsequent indicating means.

Therefore, in the dynamic display, setting (lottery) of notification modes of a plurality of indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other is performed collectively, and the second mode notified by one indicating means is followed by the other indicating means. By configuring so that notification is made at each location, there is no need to perform setting processing for each location to be notified, and the processing load can be reduced. In addition, when the indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other are notified in the second mode even once, the indicating means to be notified after that are configured to follow the second mode and notify the indicating means. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game by eliminating the phenomenon of the occurrence of the downgraded expression in the game.

However, when changing a plurality of display means having a predetermined relationship to each other to the second mode, for example, in a dynamic display in which a display result of general identification information to which a predetermined game value is not given appears, the dynamic display In a state where the determination effect is performed and the general identification information is displayed, the indicating means may be notified in the second mode. Since the second mode of the indicating means is a mode that is changed from the predetermined first mode based on the judgment result of the judging means, it has a development suggesting function that suggests that the current rendering situation can be changed based on the change. have On the other hand, the indicating means notified after the determination effect has a situation notification function of notifying the content of the current effect situation, which is the result of the determination effect. Therefore, when the indicating means after the execution of the judgment effect is notified in the second mode, the player is informed that the indicating means is notified in the second mode, and the development suggesting function is superior to the situation reporting function of the indicating means. , it is predicted that the dynamic display will not be determined by the general identification information as it is, and that some development effect will be executed and the general identification information will be changed to the special identification information. However, contrary to the prediction, if the dynamic display is determined as the general identification information to which the predetermined game value is not given, and if the predetermined game value is not given even in the dynamic display during standby, the player The discrepancies in the content of the presentation may increase the distrust of the game machine and the game arcade where the game machine is installed, resulting in interruption of the game.

Therefore, according to the game machine C0, even if the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display that starts execution on the image display means, even in the dynamic display that is waiting to be executed on the image display means, the special identification information is displayed. When the information does not appear, even if the indicating means is changed to the second mode, the second mode is not notified by the indicating means notified after the determination performance. On the other hand, if the special identification information appears in the dynamic display that starts execution on the image display means, or if the special identification information appears in the dynamic display that is waiting for execution on the image display means, the execution When the display means in the dynamic display in the middle is changed to the second mode, the display means to be notified after the judgment performance is configured to be notified as it is in the second mode. That is, in the dynamic display of the general identification information, while the display means after the judgment effect is configured to be notified in the first mode, when the special identification information appears in the dynamic display during standby, the general identification Even if the information is dynamically displayed, the notification mode of the indicating means after the judgment effect is configured to notify in the second mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the presentation, to prevent the player from having excessive expectations, and even when the dynamic display during execution shows the general identification information, Also, when the indicating means after the determination effect is displayed in the second mode, it is possible to suggest that the special identification information is stored in the dynamic display during standby. Therefore, while providing a comfortable game in which the player does not feel a sense of distrust, the display means after the judgment effect is provided with a read-ahead function of the dynamic display during standby, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. has the effect of

In addition, "a plurality of indicating means notified with a predetermined relationship with each other" means, for example, when the indicating means have the same attribute or correspond to the same type, at the same timing In the case of appearing, or even in the case of appearing with a time lag, when one appears, the other also appears. A relationship that is conceptually organically entwined (closely related). Specifically, for example, a notice display displayed in the same display area (character display Se1 when reach occurs and fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), or a notice display (strong character notice) displayed in different modes at the same timing etc.), a notice display in which another notice appears after one notice appears (step-up notice, character display Se1 when reach occurs, and fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), and the same effect is executed multiple times. notice (variable elements of "pseudo-ren", etc.) and the same or similar sounds (for example, "similar sounds" are sounds that step up in stages) are intermittently output. production etc. are exemplified.

In addition, the "judgment effect" is, for example, when indicating the effect part of whether the special identification information appears or the general identification information appears among the plurality of variable elements that make up the dynamic display, the dynamic display , or the case of showing the entire dynamic display.

In gaming machine C0,
The indicator means
A first display means (for example, character display Se1 during reach occurrence or character display Se2 during reach) that appears before or during execution of the determination effect;
A second display means (for example, fixed phrase character display Se3) that appears after execution of the determination effect,
The mode changing means is
When the execution determination means determines that the special identification information will appear in the dynamic display that starts execution on the image display means, or the standby determination means waits for execution on the image display means. when it is determined that the information about the special identification information is stored in the starting information corresponding to the dynamic display that is being displayed, the first indicating means and the second indicating means based on the plurality changing means a second mode continuation means for displaying in the second mode;
When it is determined by the execution determination means that the special identification information will not appear in the dynamic display whose execution is started on the image display means, and when the standby determination means determines that the execution on the image display means is on standby. when it is determined that the information related to the special identification information is not stored in the starting information corresponding to the dynamic display that is being displayed, the first indicating means is changed to the second mode based on the plurality changing means. and a second mode changing means for displaying the second indication means in the first mode by means of the first mode notification means.

According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the indicating means is provided with a first indicating means that appears before or during execution of the determination performance and a second indicating means that appears after the determination performance is performed. Further, when the execution determination means determines that the special identification information will appear in the dynamic display that starts execution on the image display means, or when the standby determination means determines that the dynamic display is on standby for execution on the image display means. When it is determined that the information related to the special identification information is stored in the starting information corresponding to the display, the second mode continuation means provided in the mode change means causes the first indication means and the second indication means to be displayed based on the multiple change means. 2 indicating means are displayed in a second manner. On the other hand, when it is determined by the execution determination means that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display to be started by the image display means, and when the standby determination means determines that the dynamic display is on standby for execution on the image display means. When it is determined that the information related to the special identification information is not stored in the starting information corresponding to the target display, the second display means provided in the mode change means changes the first display means based on the multiple change means. It is displayed in the second mode, and the second display means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means.

As a result, when the special identification information appears in the dynamic display for starting execution or when the special identification information appears in the dynamic display during standby, both the first indicating means and the second indicating means changed in mode. On the other hand, when the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display to start execution, and when the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display during standby, the first display means is in the second mode. The second display means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means. That is, when the display result of the special identification information does not appear in any of the currently stored dynamic displays, the second display means after the determination performance of the dynamic display being executed is displayed in the first mode. configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the presentation, to prevent the player from having excessive expectations, and to prevent the dynamic display during execution from appearing even when the general identification information appears. Also, when the display means after the judgment effect is displayed in the second mode, it can be suggested that the special identification information is stored in the dynamic display during standby. Therefore, while providing a comfortable game in which the player does not feel a sense of distrust, the display means after the judgment effect is provided with a read-ahead function of the dynamic display during standby, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. has the effect of

In gaming machine C1,
The first indicating means is
1. In the dynamic display of 1, at least a plurality of appearances,
The multiple change means are
A game machine C2, characterized by comprising a first display collective means for collectively setting the display mode of at least the first display means.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in one dynamic display, at least a plurality of the first indicating means are displayed, and the display mode of at least the first indicating means is collectively displayed by the first indicating collective means provided in the plural changing means. configured to be set. As a result, it is possible to collectively set a plurality of first indicating means appearing in one dynamic display, so that the control load can be reduced compared to control in which setting processing is performed for each first indicating means. It has the effect of being able to In particular, the more the number of appearing positions of the first indicating means capable of executing the second mode in the dynamic display (for example, 5 or more places), the more the collective setting works, and the control load is remarkably reduced. It is possible to

In any of gaming machines C0 to C2,
The mode changing means is
Display mode changing means (eg, character color) for changing the display mode of the indicating means from a predetermined normal display mode (eg, "white") to a special display mode (eg, "red") different from the normal display color lottery counter 223f);
The timing at which the display mode of the display means is changed from the normal display mode to the special display mode by the display mode changing means (for example, the timing to display the character display Se1 at the time of reaching occurrence, or the timing to display the character display Se2 during reach timing selection means (color change timing counter 223g) for selecting the timing to
The multiple change means are
collective change means for collectively changing the display mode of the display means displayed after the timing selected by the timing selection means to the special display mode;
The first mode notification means is
After the timing at which the display mode of the display means is changed to the special display mode by the collective change means, the display mode of the display means appearing after the execution of the determination effect is displayed in the normal display mode. A game machine C3, comprising a mode display means.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C0 to C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display mode of the indicating means is changed from a predetermined normal display mode to a special display mode different from the normal display mode by the display mode changing means provided in the mode changing means. Also, the timing selection means provided in the mode change means selects the timing at which the display mode change means changes the display mode of the indicating means from the normal display mode to the special display mode. Then, the display mode of the display means displayed after the timing selected by the timing selection means is changed to the special display mode by the collective change means provided in the plurality of change means. Here, after the timing at which the display mode of the indicating means is changed to the special display mode by the collective change means, the display mode of the indicating means that appears after execution of the judgment effect is provided in the first mode informing means. It is displayed in the normal display mode by the normal mode display means. As a result, regarding the display modes of the indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other, the display modes of the indicating means are set based on a plurality of display elements such as display timing, thereby increasing variations in the display modes of the indicating means. When the general identification information appears on the display means after the judgment effect, it can be displayed in the normal display mode (first mode) by changing (correcting) the contents of the multiple changes. Therefore, while increasing the interest of the game by diversifying the effects, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the effects, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel distrust. It has the effect of being able to

In gaming machine C3,
The display mode changing means is
Color changing means (e.g., character color lottery) for changing the display color of the indicating means from a predetermined normal display color (e.g., "white") to a special display color (e.g., "red") different from the normal display color counter 223f),
The timing selection means is
The timing at which the display color of the indicating means is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color changing means (for example, the timing to display the character display Se1 at the time of reaching occurrence, or the timing to display the character display Se2 during reaching color change timing selection means (color change timing counter 223g) for selecting the timing),
The collective change means is
color collective change means for collectively changing the display color of the display means displayed after the timing selected by the color change timing selection means to the special display color;
The first mode notification means is
After the timing at which the display color of the indicating means is changed to the special display color by the color batch changing means, the display color of the indicating means that appears after the execution of the judgment effect is displayed in the normal display color. A gaming machine C4 characterized by comprising normal color display means.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display color of the indicating means is changed from a predetermined normal display color to a special display color different from the normal display color by the color changing means provided in the display mode changing means. Further, the timing at which the display color of the indicating means is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color changing means is selected by the color change timing selecting means provided in the timing selecting means. Then, the display color of the indicating means displayed after the timing selected by the color change timing selecting means is changed to the special display color by the collective color changing means provided in the plurality of changing means. Here, after the timing at which the display color of the indicating means is changed to the special display color by the color collectively changing means, the display color of the indicating means that appears after execution of the determination effect is provided in the first mode notification means. It is displayed in the normal display color by the normal color display means. As a result, regarding the display modes of the indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other, the display mode of the indicating means is set based on a plurality of change factors such as the display color and the display timing, and variations in the display mode of the indicating means are achieved. is increased, and when the general identification information appears in the display means after the judgment production, it is possible to change (correct) the batch setting content and display it in the normal display color (first mode). Therefore, while increasing the interest of the game by diversifying the effects, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the effects, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel distrust. It has the effect of being able to

In game machine C3 or C4,
The display mode changing means is
Changed element selection means (for example, character mode setting processing (S1417)) for separately selecting changed elements of the display color, change timing, or display pattern with respect to the display mode of the display means;
First instruction output means (for example, command output processing (S1102)) for outputting a display instruction for displaying the display means on the image display means based on each change element selected by the change element selection means. and
The first instruction output means is
When the display mode of the indicating means that appears after the execution of the determination effect is displayed in the first mode by the first mode informing means, at least the changing element of the display color of the indicating means is displayed in the normal display color. a second instruction output means for outputting a display instruction to be displayed in the game machine C5.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3 or C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the change factor selection means provided in the display mode change means separately selects the change factors of the display color, the change timing, or the display pattern with respect to the display mode of the display means. Further, the first instruction output means, which is also provided in the display mode change means, outputs a display instruction for displaying the display means on the image display means based on each change element selected by the change element selection means. . Then, when the display mode of the indicating means to appear after execution of the determination effect is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means, at least the indication is displayed by the second instruction output means provided in the first instruction output means. A display instruction is output to display the changed element of the display color of the means in the normal display color. That is, the mode changing means separately selects (determines) the change elements of the display color, the change timing, or the display pattern with respect to the display mode of the display means, and outputs display instructions for the display means based on the selected contents. so that when the display mode of the indicating means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means, a display instruction to display at least the display color in the normal display color among the changing elements of the indicating means is output. is configured to

Hypothetically, after selecting all of the plurality of change elements in the plurality of display means, that is, the display color, the change timing, and the display pattern, display instructions regarding the plurality of change elements in the plurality of display means are generated by one display instruction. In this case, display instructions corresponding to all variations of display colors, change timings, and display patterns must be prepared in advance, and the number of display instructions may become enormous. Therefore, by separately selecting display instructions for each change element of each display means, it is possible to reduce the number of display instructions relating to the display means and suppress an increase in the memory capacity of the gaming machine. .

In particular, in the gaming machine employing the invention of the gaming machine C0, even if the second mode of each display means is selected, when the result of the dynamic display that starts execution does not become the special identification information, and , When the result of the dynamic display during standby does not become the special identification information, display (change) the display means (second display means) that appears after the execution of the judgment effect in the first mode (normal display color). configured to display. In this case, after all of the display color, change timing and display pattern of each indicating means, and further the display (change) content of the indicating means after the effect determination are determined, a display instruction for each indicating means is given. When outputting a display instruction, it is necessary to prepare in advance a display instruction corresponding to variations in the display mode of all the display means, including the content to be displayed (changed) by the display means after the effect determination. The numbers are likely to grow exponentially. Therefore, display instructions are output separately for each display color, change timing, display pattern, or display (change) content after effect determination, and each display means is displayed by the image display means based on the display instructions. By adjusting the control, it is possible to reduce the number of display instructions for each display means and suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the gaming machine.

In addition, among the changing elements of the indicating means, the change in the display color is easier to recognize than the change in the other changing elements (change timing or display pattern). Specifically, for example, in the case of a display pattern, the meaning of the display pattern cannot be understood unless the type of the display pattern is remembered in advance. This is because it can be determined by whether or not the display color has changed from the normal display color (white). Therefore, when the player recognizes that the display color of the indicating means has been changed to the special display color, the change in the display color of the indicating means causes some kind of development effect in the dynamic display. I predict that it will be executed. However, contrary to the prediction, if the development effect is not executed in the dynamic display, the player will distrust the game machine due to the discrepancy in the content of the effect, and the game machine that has the game machine installed. There is a possibility that the game will be interrupted due to increased distrust of the place.

Therefore, when the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display to start execution, and when the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display during standby, the plurality of display means are changed to the second mode. Even if it is displayed, at least the display color is displayed in the normal display color in the display means displayed after the judgment effect. That is, if no special identification information is generated in any of the dynamic displays currently stored in the storage means including those during standby, the display means after the determination effect in the dynamic display being executed is displayed in at least the normal display color. configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the content of the performance, to provide a comfortable game that does not give the player excessive expectations, and does not make the player feel distrustful. effective.

In gaming machine C5,
The first instruction output means is
A game machine C6, characterized by comprising a start time output means for outputting all display instructions relating to the display mode of the display means in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the start time output means provided in the first instruction output means outputs all display instructions regarding the display mode of the display means in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display. As a result, at the start of dynamic display, it is possible to indicate to the image display means the content of the indicating means to be displayed in the dynamic display, and display of each indicating means in the dynamic display can be performed smoothly. has the effect of

<Group D: Determining Display Color by Determining Whether or Not There is a Variation Element of Development Effect after Character Display>
Acquisition means (for example, the first ball entrance 64) for acquiring starting information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) for determining based on the starting information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic display executing means (for example, dynamic display of identification information (for example, third pattern variation effect) for executing dynamic display of identification information (for example, third pattern display device 81) based on the determination result by the determining means (for example, a display control device 114),
When special identification information (for example, "jackpot display"), which is predetermined identification information, appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined game value of the player In a gaming machine that provides
a storage means (for example, an execution information storage area 223i) for storing the start information acquired by the acquisition means;
Based on the starting information stored in the storage means, the special identification information is displayed in the dynamic display, or general identification information different from the special identification information (for example, "failure display") is displayed. Determination means (for example, MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113) for determining whether to appear;
A plurality of display means (for example, character display Se1 during reach occurrence, character display Se2 during reach, fixed phrase character display Se3, and pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4) that are notified with a predetermined relationship with each other;
Based on the determination result by the determination means, the notification mode of the indicating means is changed from a predetermined first mode (eg, "white") to a second mode (eg, "red") different from the first mode. Mode changing means (for example, character color lottery counter 223f),
a plurality of changing means (for example, a character color change table 222h) for changing the notification mode of a plurality of the indicating means to the second mode when the mode changing means changes the indicating means to the second mode; prepared,
The dynamic display includes a plurality of dynamic elements (e.g., "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation elements, "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation elements, "normal reach" fluctuation elements, "super reach" fluctuation elements, and " It is configured by combining the variable elements of "re-fluctuation"),
The mode changing means is
When the notification mode of the display means is changed to the second mode by the plurality of change means, at least one dynamic element execution determination means for determining whether or not the dynamic element of
When the dynamic element execution determination means determines that at least one of the dynamic elements is not executed (before the display of the indication means) after the notification of the indication means of the indication means, the indication of the indication of the one A gaming machine D0 characterized by comprising a first mode reporting means for reporting means in the first mode.

According to the gaming machine D0, the obtaining means obtains the starting information when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the determining means makes a determination based on the starting information obtained by the obtaining means. The dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of the identification information on the image display means based on the determination result by the determination means. When special identification information, which is predetermined identification information, appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, predetermined game value is awarded to the player. Further, the starting information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means. Here, based on the starting information stored in the storage means, the determination means determines whether the special identification information should be displayed in the dynamic display or the general identification information different from the special identification information should be displayed. Also, a plurality of indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other are reported. Then, based on the determination result of the determining means, the notification mode of the indicating means is changed from the predetermined first mode to a second mode different from the first mode by the mode changing means. Moreover, when changing the indicating means to the second mode by the mode changing means, the notification mode of the plurality of indicating means is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing means. A dynamic display is constructed by combining a plurality of dynamic elements. Here, when the notification mode of the display means is changed to the second mode by the multiple change means, the dynamic element execution determination means provided in the mode change means (before the display of the display means) dynamic display It is determined whether or not at least one dynamic element is executed after notification of the one indicating means in . When the dynamic element execution determination means determines that at least one dynamic element will not be executed (before display of the display means) after notification of one display means, The indication means is notified in the first mode by the first mode notification means. That is, when at least one dynamic element is not executed after one indicating means is notified in the dynamic display, the notification mode of a plurality of indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other is changed to the second mode. Even if there is, the notification mode of the first indicating means is displayed in the first mode instead of the second mode.

As in the past, when notifying indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other at a plurality of locations (timing or display area; the same shall apply hereinafter) of the dynamic display, the indicating means is displayed for each notification location. If it is configured to set (lottery) whether to notify in one mode or to notify in a second mode different from the first mode, setting processing (lottery processing) for the notification locations is required, which complicates control. , the processing load may increase. Further, in the dynamic display, if the indicating means to be notified first is notified in the second mode and then the indicating means to be notified later is notified in the first mode, the indicating means have a predetermined relevance. Therefore, it becomes an expression in which the degree of expectation for the emergence of the special identification information is lowered (hereinafter referred to as "downward expression"). Therefore, there is a possibility that a player who has been in high spirits by being informed of the second mode by the previous indicating means may lose interest when he witnesses the above-mentioned descent expression by the subsequent indicating means.

Therefore, in the dynamic display, setting (lottery) of the notification modes of the indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other is performed collectively, and the second mode notified by one indicating means is followed and notified by the other indicating means. By configuring so as to allow the setting process to be performed for each notification location, the processing load can be reduced. In addition, when indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other are notified in the second mode even once, the indicating means to be notified thereafter are configured to follow the second mode and notify the indicating means. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game by eliminating the phenomenon of the occurrence of the expression of the downfall in the game.

However, when changing a plurality of indicating means having a predetermined relationship to each other to the second mode, for example, after the determination effect in the dynamic display is executed and just before the dynamic display ends, the indicating means When notifying (suggesting, outputting, or displaying) the content of the current rendering situation, which is the result of dynamic display, by the indicating means, the indicating means may be notified in the second mode. Since the second mode of the indicating means is a mode that is changed from the predetermined first mode based on the judgment result of the judging means, it has a development suggesting function that suggests that the current rendering situation can be changed based on the change. have On the other hand, as described above, the display means that is notified just before the end of the dynamic display has a status notification function of notifying the contents of the current rendering situation that is the result of the dynamic display. Therefore, if the indicating means displayed just before the end of the dynamic display is notified in the second mode, the player will not be able to develop the status notification function of the indicating means due to the indication means being notified in the second mode. I predict that the suggestion function will prevail, the current display state will not be determined, and some kind of development effect will be executed. However, contrary to the prediction, the dynamic display is fixed in the current display state. There is a risk that the game will be interrupted due to increased distrust of the game hall where the player is playing.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine D0, even when a plurality of display means are changed to the second mode, when at least one dynamic element is not executed after one display means is notified in the dynamic display , the notification mode of the first indicating means is configured to notify in the first mode. That is, it is configured to notify in the first mode the notification mode of the indicating means displayed in a state where there is no dynamic element executed in the dynamic display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the content of the performance, to provide a comfortable game that does not give the player excessive expectations, and does not make the player feel distrustful. effective.

In addition, "a plurality of indicating means notified with a predetermined relationship with each other" means, for example, when the indicating means have the same attribute or correspond to the same type, at the same timing In the case of appearing, or even in the case of appearing with a time lag, when one appears, the other also appears. A relationship that is conceptually organically entwined (closely related). Specifically, for example, a notice display displayed in the same display area (character display Se1 when reach occurs and fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), or a notice display (strong character notice) displayed in different modes at the same timing etc.), a notice display in which another notice appears after one notice appears (step-up notice, character display Se1 when reach occurs, and fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), and the same effect is executed multiple times. notice (variable elements of "pseudo-ren", etc.) and the same or similar sounds (for example, "similar sounds" are sounds that step up in stages) are intermittently output. production etc. are exemplified.

In the gaming machine D0,
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, execution of a determination effect for executing a determination effect (for example, a "demonstration" of a variable element of "super reach") to determine whether the special identification information is to be displayed or the general identification information is to be displayed. means (e.g., "super reach" variables),
The indicator means
A first display means (for example, character display Se1 during reach occurrence or character display Se2 during reach) that appears before or during execution of the determination effect;
A second display means (for example, fixed phrase character display Se3) that appears after the execution of the determination effect,
The dynamic element execution determination means
post-second display determination means for determining whether or not at least one dynamic element is executed after display of the second display means;
The mode changing means is
When it is determined by the post-second indication determination means that the dynamic element will be executed after the display of the second indication means (before the display of the second indication means), the first indication a second mode continuation means for displaying the means and the second display means in the second mode;
When it is determined by the post-second display determining means that the dynamic element is not executed after the display of the second display means (before the display of the second display means), the first display means is displayed in the second mode, and a second mode changing means for displaying the second indication means in the first mode by the first mode indication means.

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means executes the determination effect of whether the special identification information should be displayed or the general identification information should be displayed in the dynamic display. In addition, the indicating means includes a first indicating means that appears before or during execution of the determination effect, and a second indicating means that appears after the determination effect is performed. Then, at least one dynamic element is executed (before the display of the second display means) after the display of the second display means by the second post-display determination means provided in the dynamic element execution determination means. It is determined whether or not Here, if the post-second display determination means determines that the dynamic element will be executed after the display of the second display means (before display of the second display means), The second mode continuation means causes the first display means and the second display means to be displayed in the second mode. Further, when the second post-display determining means determines that the dynamic element is not executed after the display of the second indicating means, the second mode changing means provided in the mode changing means determines that the first indicating means It is displayed in the second mode, and the second display means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means. Thereby, when the dynamic element is executed after the display of the second display means, both the first display means and the second display means are changed to the second mode, and the dynamic element is not executed after the display of the second display means. In this case, the first indicating means is displayed in the second manner, while the second indicating means is displayed in the first manner. That is, the second indicating means after the judgment effect is displayed in the first mode or the second mode depending on whether or not the dynamic element is executed after the second indicating means is displayed. By configuring in this way, when the dynamic element is not executed after the judgment effect, the second display means of the second mode is not displayed, and it does not suggest that the effect develops, so that there is no discrepancy in the effect content. It is possible to provide a comfortable game in which the occurrence of is prevented, the player does not have excessive expectations, and the player does not feel distrustful.

In addition, the "judgment effect" is, for example, when indicating the effect part of whether the special identification information appears or the general identification information appears among the plurality of variable elements that make up the dynamic display, the dynamic display , or the case of showing the entire dynamic display.

In gaming machine D1,
The first indicating means is
1. In the dynamic display of 1, at least a plurality of appearances,
The multiple change means are
The game machine D2 is characterized by comprising: a first display collective means for collectively setting the display mode of at least the first display means.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in one dynamic display, at least a plurality of the first indicating means are displayed, and the display mode of at least the first indicating means is collectively displayed by the first indicating collective means provided in the plural changing means. configured to be set. As a result, it is possible to collectively set a plurality of first indicating means appearing in one dynamic display, so that the control load can be reduced compared to control in which setting processing is performed for each first indicating means. It has the effect of being able to In particular, the more the number of appearing positions of the first indicating means capable of executing the second mode in the dynamic display (for example, 5 or more places), the more the collective setting works, and the control load is remarkably reduced. It is possible to

In any of gaming machines D0 to D2,
The mode changing means is
Display mode changing means (e.g., character color) for changing the display mode of the indicating means from a predetermined normal display mode (e.g., "white") to a special display mode (e.g., "red") different from the normal display mode lottery counter 223f);
The timing at which the display mode of the display means is changed from the normal display mode to the special display mode by the display mode changing means (for example, the timing at which the character display Se1 is displayed at the time of reach occurrence, or the character display Se2 is displayed during reach) timing selection means (color change timing counter 223g) for selecting the timing to
The multiple change means are
collective change means for collectively changing the display mode of the display means displayed after the timing selected by the timing selection means to the special display mode;
The first mode notification means is
After the display mode of the display means is changed to the special display mode by the collective change means, the display mode of the display means appearing in a situation where the dynamic element is not executed is changed to the normal display mode. A game machine D3 characterized by comprising a normal mode display means for displaying.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D0 to D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display mode of the indicating means is changed from a predetermined normal display mode to a special display mode different from the normal display mode by the display mode changing means provided in the mode changing means. Also, the timing selection means provided in the mode change means selects the timing at which the display mode change means changes the display mode of the indicating means from the normal display mode to the special display mode. Then, the display mode of the display means displayed after the timing selected by the timing selection means is changed to the special display mode by the collective change means provided in the plurality of change means. Here, after the timing at which the display mode of the display means is changed to the special display mode by the collective change means, the display mode of the display means that appears in a situation where the dynamic element is not executed is displayed by the first mode notification means. It is displayed in the normal display mode by the provided normal mode display means. As a result, regarding the display modes of the indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other, the display mode of the indicating means is set based on a plurality of change factors such as the display timing, thereby increasing the variation of the display modes of the indicating means. The display mode of the display means appearing in the situation where the dynamic element is not executed can be changed (corrected) from the contents of the batch setting and displayed in the normal display mode (first mode). Therefore, while increasing the interest of the game by diversifying the effects, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the effects, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel distrust. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine D3,
The display mode changing means is
Color changing means (e.g., character color lottery) for changing the display color of the indicating means from a predetermined normal display color (e.g., "white") to a special display color (e.g., "red") different from the normal display color counter 223f), comprising
The timing selection means is
The timing at which the display color of the indicating means is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color changing means (for example, the timing to display the character display Se1 at the time of reaching occurrence, or the timing to display the character display Se2 during reaching color change timing selection means (color change timing counter 223g) for selecting the timing),
The collective change means is
color collective change means for collectively changing the display color of the display means displayed after the timing selected by the color change timing selection means to the special display color;
The first mode notification means is
After the display color of the indicating means is changed to the special display color by the color batch changing means, the display color of the indicating means appearing in a situation where the dynamic element is not executed is changed to the normal display color. A game machine D4 characterized by comprising a normal color display means for displaying with .

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display color of the indicating means is changed from a predetermined normal display color to a special display color different from the normal display color by the color changing means provided in the display mode changing means. Further, the timing at which the display color of the display means is changed from the normal display color to the special display color is selected by the color change timing selection means provided in the timing selection means. Then, the display color of the indicating means displayed after the timing selected by the color change timing selecting means is changed to the special display color by the collective color changing means provided in the plurality of changing means. Here, after the timing at which the display color of the indicating means is changed to the special display color by the collective change means, the display color of the indicating means that appears in a situation where the dynamic element is not executed is the first mode notification means. It is displayed in a normal display color by the provided normal color display means. As a result, regarding the display modes of the indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other, the display mode of the indicating means is set based on a plurality of display elements such as the display color and the display timing, and variations in the display mode of the indicating means are achieved. is increased, the display mode of the display means appearing in the situation where the dynamic element is not executed can be changed (corrected) from the contents of the batch setting and displayed in the normal display color (first mode). Therefore, while increasing the interest of the game by diversifying the effects, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the effects, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel distrust. It has the effect of being able to

In gaming machine D3 or D4,
The display mode changing means is
Changed element selection means (for example, character mode setting processing (S1417)) for separately selecting changed elements of the display color, change timing, or display pattern with respect to the display mode of the display means;
First instruction output means (for example, command output processing (S1102)) for outputting a display instruction for displaying the display means on the image display means based on each change element selected by the change element selection means. and
The first instruction output means is
When the display mode of the display means appearing in the situation where the dynamic element is not executed is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means, at least the change element of the display color of the display means is displayed in the first mode. A gaming machine D5 comprising second instruction output means for outputting a display instruction to display in a normal display color.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3 or D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the changing elements of the display color, change timing, or display pattern are separately selected with respect to the display mode of the indicating means by the changing element selecting means provided in the mode changing means. Also, the first instruction output means, which is also provided in the mode change means, outputs a display instruction for displaying the display means on the image display means based on each change element selected by the change element selection means. Then, when the display mode of the display means to appear in the situation where the dynamic element is not executed is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means, at least the change element of the display color of the display means is displayed in the normal display color. A display instruction to display is output by the second instruction output means provided in the first instruction output means. That is, the mode changing means separately selects (determines) the change elements of the display color, the change timing, or the display pattern with respect to the display mode of the display means, and outputs display instructions for the display means based on the selected contents. so that when the display mode of the indicating means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means, a display instruction to display at least the display color in the normal display color among the changed elements of the indicating means is output. is configured to

Hypothetically, after selecting all of the plurality of change elements in the plurality of display means, that is, the display color, the change timing, and the display pattern, display instructions regarding the plurality of change elements in the plurality of display means are generated by one display instruction. In this case, display instructions corresponding to all variations of display colors, change timings, and display patterns must be prepared in advance, and the number of display instructions may become enormous. Therefore, by separately selecting display instructions for each change element of each display means, it is possible to reduce the number of display instructions relating to the display means and to suppress an increase in the memory capacity of the gaming machine. .

In particular, in the gaming machine employing the invention of the gaming machine D0, even if the second aspect of each indicating means is selected, the indicating means (the second indicating means) appearing in a situation where the dynamic element is not executed ) is displayed (changed) in the first mode (normal display color). In this case, display 1 after determining the display color, change timing and display pattern of each indicating means, and the display (change) content of the indicating means that appears in the situation where the dynamic element is not executed. When outputting display instructions for each indication means in the instruction, it is possible to display (change) the contents of the indication means that appear in the situation where the dynamic element is not executed. Display instructions must be prepared in advance, and the number of display instructions may increase dramatically. Therefore, display instructions are output separately for each display color, change timing, display pattern, or display (change) content of the display means that appears when the dynamic element is not executed, and based on the display instructions By using the image display means to adjust the display control of each display means, the number of display instructions for each display means can be reduced, and an increase in the memory capacity of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In addition, among the changing elements of the indicating means, the change in the display color is easier to recognize than the change in the other changing elements (change timing or display pattern). Specifically, for example, in the case of a display pattern, the meaning of the display pattern cannot be understood unless the type of the display pattern is remembered in advance. This is because it can be determined by whether or not the display color has changed from the normal display color (white). Therefore, when the player recognizes that the display color of the indicating means has been changed to the special display color, the change in the display color of the indicating means causes some kind of development effect in the dynamic display. I predict that it will be executed. However, contrary to the prediction, if the development effect is not executed in the dynamic display, the player will distrust the game machine due to the discrepancy in the content of the effect, and the game machine that has the game machine installed. There is a possibility that the game will be interrupted due to increased distrust of the place.

Therefore, if the dynamic element is not executed after the display means is displayed in the dynamic display, even if the plurality of display means are changed to the second mode, the dynamic element is displayed in a state where the dynamic element is not executed. In the display means, at least the display color is displayed in the normal display color. That is, the indicating means just before the end of the dynamic display is configured to display at least in the normal display color. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the content of the performance, to provide a comfortable game that does not give the player excessive expectations, and does not make the player feel distrustful. effective.

In gaming machine D5,
The first instruction output means is
A game machine D6, characterized by comprising start time output means for outputting all display instructions relating to the display mode of the display means in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the starting time output means provided in the first instruction output means outputs all display instructions regarding the display mode of the display means in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display. As a result, at the start of dynamic display, it is possible to indicate to the image display means the content of the indicating means to be displayed in the dynamic display, and display of each indicating means in the dynamic display can be performed smoothly. has the effect of

In game machines D1 to D6,
The mode changing means is
When the dynamic element execution determining means determines that at least one of the dynamic elements will be executed (before the display of the display means) after the display of the display means of the display means, A game machine D7 characterized by comprising a mode maintaining means for displaying the indicating means in the second mode.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects of the game machines D1 to D6, the following effects are produced. That is, when the dynamic element execution determining means determines that at least one dynamic element will be executed after the display of one indicating means, the mode maintaining means provided in the mode changing means determines that the mode changing means The one display means is displayed in the second mode based on. As a result, when the dynamic element is executed after the display of one display means, the display of the changed display means is initially maintained in the second mode, suggesting development from the current state of presentation, Since the dynamic element is actually executed, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In gaming machine D7,
The dynamic display execution means
provisional display means for displaying provisional identification information other than the special identification information in the dynamic display;
re-dynamic display executing means for executing re-dynamic display for changing the temporary identification information to the special identification information after the temporary identification information is displayed by the temporary display means;
The mode maintaining means is
The dynamic element execution determination means determines that the re-dynamic display by the re-dynamic display execution means is executed after the display of the display means of 1 (before the display of the display means) A game machine D8 characterized in that the display means of the one is displayed in the second mode in the case of the above.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the provisional identification information other than the special identification information is displayed in the dynamic display by the provisional display means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, after the provisional identification information is displayed by the provisional display means, the provisional identification information is displayed by the re-dynamic display execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means, and the re-dynamic display is performed to change the provisional identification information to the special identification information. be done. Here, when the dynamic element execution determining means determines that re-dynamic display is executed by the re-dynamic display executing means (before displaying the indicating means) after displaying the first indicating means, , the one display means is displayed in the second mode by the mode maintaining means. As a result, the display means is displayed in the second mode in a state in which the provisional identification information which is not the special identification information is displayed, and the display means is displayed in the second mode, thereby developing from the current performance state. Suggest. Then, by executing re-dynamic display from that state and changing the displayed provisional identification information to special identification information, an effect directly linked to the game value is executed based on the second aspect of the display means, There is an effect that the presentation can be diversified and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In gaming machine D7 or D8,
The special identification information includes predetermined first special identification information (for example, "15R normal jackpot") and second special identification information (for example, "15R probability variable jackpot") that can be given a higher game value than the first special identification information. ), and
The dynamic display execution means
a first special temporary display means for temporarily displaying the first special identification information in the dynamic display;
a promotion execution means for executing promotion display for changing the first special identification information to the second special identification information after the first special identification information is provisionally displayed by the first special provisional display means; prepared,
The mode maintaining means is
When the dynamic element execution determination means determines that the promotion display by the promotion execution means is executed after the display means of 1 (before the display means is displayed), the 1 A gaming machine D9 characterized in that the display means of is displayed in the second mode.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D7 or D8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the special identification information, it has predetermined first special identification information and second special identification information to which a game value higher than that of the first special identification information can be given. The first special temporary display means provided in the dynamic display execution means temporarily displays the first special identification information in the dynamic display, and the first special temporary display means temporarily displays the first special identification information. After that, the promotion execution means executes the promotion display for changing the first special identification information to the second special identification information. Here, when the dynamic element execution determination means determines that the promotion display by the promotion execution means is executed after the display of the display means of 1 (before the display of the display means), the mode maintenance means , 1 are displayed in a second manner. As a result, the indicating means is displayed in the second mode while the first special identification information is being displayed, and the indication means being displayed in the second mode suggests development from the current state of presentation. . Then, the promotion display is executed from that state, and the displayed first special identification information is changed to the second special identification information, so that the performance directly linked to the game value is executed based on the second mode of the display means. In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to diversify the presentation and enhance the interest of the game.

<Group E: Additional data table for each changed element of character display>
Image display means for displaying a predetermined image (e.g., third symbol display device 81), main control means for performing main control of the game (e.g., main control device 110 or (and) sound lamp control device 113), A gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (for example, a display control device 114) that controls the image display means based on a display instruction from the main control means,
The sub control means is
an image drawing means (for example, an image controller 237) for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means;
First display determination means (for example, command determination processing (S2022 ) of S2108),
First definition information (for example, a variable display data table) which is provided for each of the first display types and defines, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the first display type 232a1), a first prescribed information storage means (for example, data table storage area 232a);
a first selection means (for example, a display data table buffer 233b) for selecting the first definition information corresponding to the first display type determined by the first display determination means from the first definition information storage means;
Indicating means displayed in the image display means (for example, character display Se1 during reach occurrence, character display Se2 during reach, fixed phrase character display Se3, or pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4);
a plurality of change elements (e.g., character pattern, display color, change timing, or correction content of display color) that determine the display mode of the display means;
Based on the second display instruction (for example, red character command for display) from the main control means, the image indicated by the first prescribed information selected by the first selection means is changed (added) and displayed. a second display determination means (for example, S2112 of the command determination process (S2022)) for determining the change element of the display means;
Second prescribed information (for example, , additional data table for character color 232a2);
a second selecting means (for example, an additional data table buffer 233c) for selecting the second defining information corresponding to the change element determined by the second display determining means from the second defining information storage means; ,
The sub control means is
updating means (for example, pointer 233e) that is updated every time elapses;
Each time the updating means is updated, the update is updated based on the first stipulation information selected by the first selection means and the second stipulation information selected by the second selection means. Drawing information specifying means (for example, S2308 of the display setting process (S2023)) for specifying drawing information for one screen corresponding to the means;
Drawing for generating drawing instruction information (for example, a drawing list) for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the drawing information for one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means. An instruction information generating means (for example, S2501 of the drawing process (S2026)),
The game machine E0 is characterized in that the image drawing means draws an image for one screen based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means.

According to the gaming machine E0, the image display means displays a predetermined image, the main control means performs main control of the game, and the sub-control means displays an image based on display instructions from the main control means. A display means is controlled. An image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means is drawn by the image drawing means provided in the sub control means. Then, the first display type to be displayed is determined by the first display determination means based on the first display instruction from the main control means. Further, the first definition information is provided for each first display type and defines, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the first display type. stored by means. Here, the first specification information corresponding to the first display type determined by the first display determination means is selected from the first specification information storage means by the first selection means. Also, the indicating means is displayed on the image display means, and the display mode of the indicating means is determined by a plurality of change factors. Further, based on the second display instruction from the main control means, the changed element of the display means to be displayed by changing (adding) from the image indicated by the first prescribed information selected by the first selection means is the second display determination Determined by means. The second stipulation information, which is provided for each change element of the display means and defines, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be changed (added) and displayed by the change element, It is stored by the second specified information storage means. Here, the second specification information corresponding to the change element determined by the second display determination means is selected from the second specification information storage means by the second selection means. Then, the update means provided in the sub control means is updated every time the time elapses, and each time the update means is updated, the first prescribed information selected by the first selection means and the information selected by the second selection means Drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated updating means is specified by the drawing information specifying means on the basis of the second specifying information. The drawing instruction information generating means generates drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the drawing information for one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means. be done. An image for one screen is drawn by the image drawing means based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means. As a result, when an image of the first display type corresponding to the first display instruction from the main control means is displayed by changing (adding) the indicating means corresponding to the second display instruction, the second regulation for the changed element of the indicating means is applied. Only by selecting information from the second specified information storage means, the display mode of the display means can be easily changed (added) and displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

In gaming machine E0,
Acquisition means (for example, the first ball entrance 64) for acquiring starting information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) for determining based on the starting information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic display execution means (for example, MPU 231 of display control device 114) that causes the image display means to execute dynamic display of identification information (for example, variation effect of the third symbol) based on the determination result by the determination means; with
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means, when special identification information (for example, "jackpot display"), which is predetermined identification information, appears, a predetermined game is displayed to the player. A gaming machine that provides value,
a storage means (for example, an execution information storage area 223i) for storing the start information acquired by the acquisition means;
Based on the starting information stored in the storage means, the special identification information is displayed in the dynamic display, or general identification information different from the special identification information (for example, "failure display") is displayed. Determination means (for example, MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113) for determining whether to appear;
indicator display means for displaying a plurality of the indicator means so as to have a predetermined relationship with each other in the dynamic display;
Based on the determination result of the determining means, the display mode of the indicating means is changed from a predetermined first mode (eg, "white") to a second mode (eg, "red") different from the first mode. Mode changing means (for example, character color lottery counter 223f),
a plurality of changing means (for example, a character color change table 222h) for changing the display mode of a plurality of the indicating means to the second mode when the mode changing means changes the indicating means to the second mode; prepared,
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, execution of a determination effect for executing a determination effect (for example, a "demonstration" of a variable element of "super reach") to determine whether the special identification information is to be displayed or the general identification information is to be displayed. means (e.g., "super reach" variables),
The mode changing means is
When the display mode of the indicating means is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing means, and when the determination means determines that the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, the determination effect a first mode notification means (for example, a fixed phrase normal command for display) that displays the display means that appears after the execution of the determination effect by the execution means in the first mode,
The first selection means is
Based on the first display instruction, the dynamic specifying information (for example, display data table for variation 232a1) specifying the drawing information of the entire dynamic display is selected from the first specifying information storage means. Prescribed information selection means (for example, display data table buffer 233b),
The second selection means is
Batch defining information (for example, text color additional data table 232a2) defining drawing information when the display mode of the indicating means is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing means based on the second display instruction. collective definition information selection means (for example, additional data table buffer 233c) for selecting from the second definition information storage means;
First mode defining information defining drawing information when the display mode of the indicating means displayed after the determination effect is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notifying means based on the second display instruction. (for example, additional data table for character correction 232a2) is selected from the second specification information storage means (for example, additional data table buffer 233c). Gaming machine E1 to play.

According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is met, the acquisition means acquires the starting information, and the determining means makes a determination based on the starting information acquired by the acquiring means. The dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of the identification information on the image display means based on the determination result by the determination means. When special identification information, which is predetermined identification information, appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. Further, the starting information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means. Here, based on the starting information stored in the storage means, the determination means determines whether the special identification information should be displayed in the dynamic display or the general identification information different from the special identification information should be displayed. Further, the indicator display means displays a plurality of indicator means having a predetermined relationship with each other in the dynamic display. Then, based on the determination result of the determining means, the display mode of the display means is changed from the predetermined first mode to a second mode different from the first mode by the mode changing means. Further, when the display means is changed to the second mode by the mode change means, the display mode of the plurality of display means is changed to the second mode by the multiple change means. Here, in the dynamic display, a determination effect for whether to display the special identification information or the general identification information is executed by the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, when the display mode of the indicating means is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing means and the determination means determines that the general identification information will appear in the dynamic display, the mode changing means is provided with The first mode notifying means causes the indicating means appearing after execution of the determination effect by the determination effect executing means to be displayed in the first mode. Here, based on the first display instruction, the dynamic definition information selection means provided in the first selection means selects the dynamic definition information that defines the drawing information of the entire dynamic display from the first definition information storage means. Information is selected. In addition, collectively defining the drawing information when the display mode of the indicating means is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing means based on the second display instruction by the batch defining information selecting means provided in the second selecting means. Prescribing information is selected from the second prescribing information storage means. Also, the first mode defining information selection means provided in the second selection means also draws when the display mode of the indicating means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means based on the second display instruction. First mode defining information defining information is selected from the second defining information storage means. That is, when the general identification information that does not give a predetermined game value appears in the dynamic display, even if the display mode of the plurality of display means having a predetermined relationship with each other is changed to the second mode, the dynamic display is performed. The display mode of the indicating means displayed after execution of the determination performance of the target display is displayed in the first mode instead of the second mode. In addition, when a plurality of indicating means are collectively set and changed (added), and the indicating means after the judgment effect is changed to the first mode and displayed, the drawing information when the indicating means are collectively set is The specified batch specifying information is selected, and the first mode specifying information specifying the drawing information when the indicating means after the judgment effect is displayed in the first mode is selected.

As in the past, when indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other appear at a plurality of locations (timing or display area; the same shall apply hereinafter) of dynamic display, the indicating means If it is configured to set (lottery) whether to display in the first mode or in a second mode different from the first mode, setting processing (lottery processing) for the appearing portion is required and control becomes complicated and the processing load increases. Also, in the dynamic display, if the indicator that appears earlier is displayed in the second mode and then the indicator that appears later is displayed in the first mode, the indicator having a predetermined relevance Because it is a means, it becomes an expression in which the degree of expectation for the emergence of the special identification information is lowered (hereinafter referred to as "downward expression"). Therefore, there is a possibility that the player, who has been excited by the appearance of the second mode in the previous display means, will lose interest when he witnesses the above-mentioned descent expression in the subsequent display means.

Therefore, in the dynamic display, the setting (lottery) of the display modes of the display means having a predetermined relationship with each other is performed collectively, and the second mode displayed by one display means is followed by the other display means as well. By configuring to make it appear, there is no need to perform setting processing for each appearing location, and the processing load can be reduced. In addition, when the indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other appear in the second mode even once, the indicating means appearing after that are also configured to appear in accordance with the second mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game by eliminating the phenomenon of the occurrence of the stagnation expression in the indicating means.

However, when a plurality of display means having a predetermined relationship with each other are collectively set in the second mode, for example, in a dynamic display in which a display result of general identification information to which a predetermined game value is not given appears, the dynamic In a state where the display determination effect is performed and the general identification information is displayed, the indicating means may be displayed in the second mode. Since the second mode of the indicating means is a mode that is changed from the predetermined first mode based on the judgment result of the judging means, it has a development suggesting function that suggests that the current rendering situation can be changed based on the change. have On the other hand, the indicating means displayed after the determination effect has a status notification function of notifying the content of the current effect situation, which is the result of the determination effect. Therefore, if the indicating means after execution of the judgment effect is displayed in the second mode, the player will feel that the development suggesting function is superior to the situation reporting function of the indicating means because the indicating means is displayed in the second mode. , it is predicted that the dynamic display will not be determined by the general identification information as it is, and that some development effect will be executed and the general identification information will be changed to the special identification information. However, contrary to the prediction, the dynamic display is determined as the general identification information to which the predetermined game value is not assigned. In such a case, the game machine may be distrustful of the game arcade where the game machine is installed, and the game may be interrupted.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine E1, when the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, even if the display means is collectively set to the second mode, the display means displayed after the determination effect is displayed in the second mode. Configure so as not to reveal the mode. That is, in the dynamic display of the general identification information, the display means after the judgment effect is displayed in the first mode. based on the second display instruction, collectively defining information defining drawing information when the display mode of the indicating means is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing means is selected from the second defining information storage means; Based on the second display instruction, drawing information when the display mode of the indicating means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means is selected by the first mode specifying information selection means provided in the second selection means. The defined first mode defining information is selected from the second defining information storage means. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent discrepancies in the content of the production, to provide a comfortable game that does not give the player excessive expectations, and does not make the player feel distrustful. effective. In addition, in the case of changing (adding) a plurality of indicating means and further changing and displaying the indicating means after the judgment effect to the first mode, batch definition information that defines the drawing information when the indicating means is changed. and selecting the first mode stipulating information that defines the drawing information when the indicating means after the judgment effect is displayed in the first mode, the various display modes of the plurality of indicating means can be easily changed. (Add) to display. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

In addition, "a plurality of display means displayed with a predetermined relationship with each other" means, for example, when the display means have the same attribute or correspond to the same type, they are displayed at the same timing. In the case of appearing, or even in the case of appearing with a time lag, when one appears, the other also appears. A relationship that is conceptually organically entwined (closely related). Specifically, for example, a notice display displayed in the same display area (character display Se1 when reach occurs and fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), or a notice display (strong character notice) displayed in different modes at the same timing etc.), a notice display in which another notice appears after one notice appears (step-up notice, character display Se1 when reach occurs, and fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), and the same effect is executed multiple times. Examples include advance notices (variable elements of “pseudo-ren”, etc.).

In gaming machine E0 or E1,
The second selection means is
selection information storage means configured to select and store a plurality of the second prescribed information,
The drawing information specifying means includes:
Among the plurality of pieces of the second regulation information stored in the selection information storage means, the drawing information of the second regulation information stored later is prioritized over the drawing information of the second regulation information stored earlier for one screen. a priority specifying means for specifying the drawing information of the gaming machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E0 or E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the selection information storage means provided in the second selection means can select and store a plurality of pieces of second regulation information. Further, by the priority specifying means provided in the drawing information specifying means, among the plurality of second specifying information stored in the selection information storing means, the drawing information of the second specifying information stored later than the drawing information stored first Drawing information for one screen is specified with priority given to the drawing information of the second prescribed information. As a result, the contents of the second regulation information stored later can be displayed with priority over the contents of the second regulation information stored earlier. By storing it, the display mode of the indicating means can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that the process of determining the second stipulated information, which should be prioritized, or the like becomes unnecessary, and the processing load of the display control can be reduced.

In gaming machine E2,
The second selection means is
The collective defining information by the collective defining information selecting means is first stored in the selected information storing means, and the first mode defining information by the first mode defining information selecting means is later stored in the selected information storing means. Characterized game machine E3.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by the second selecting means, the collective defining information by the collective defining information selecting means is first stored in the selected information storing means, and the first mode defining information by the first mode defining information selecting means is later stored in the selected information storing means. be. Thus, even when the plurality of display means are changed to the second mode, the first mode defining information is stored after the batch defining information, so that the display means appearing after execution of the judgment effect are displayed in the first mode. can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for the determination processing of the second stipulated information that should be prioritized, reduce the processing load of display control, prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the performance, and prevent the player from having excessive expectations. , there is an effect that it is possible to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not feel distrust.

In any one of gaming machines E1 to E3,
The indicator means
A first display means (for example, character display Se1 during reach occurrence or character display Se2 during reach) that appears before or during execution of the determination effect;
A second display means (for example, fixed phrase character display Se3) that appears after the execution of the determination effect,
The mode changing means is
a second mode continuation means for displaying the first display means and the second display notification means in the second mode when the determination means determines that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display; ,
When the determination means determines that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the first display means is displayed in the second mode, and the second display is performed by the first mode notification means. a second mode changing means for displaying the means in the first mode.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the indicating means is provided with a first indicating means that appears before or during execution of the determination performance and a second indicating means that appears after the determination performance is performed. Further, when the determination means determines that the special identification information will appear in the dynamic display, the second mode continuation means provided in the mode change means causes the first display means and the second display means to be displayed in the second mode. is displayed. On the other hand, when the determination means determines that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the first display means is displayed in the second mode by the second mode change means provided in the mode change means, The second display means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means. As a result, when the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, both the first display means and the second display means are changed to the second mode, and when the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the second mode is displayed. The first indicating means is displayed in the second mode, while the second indicating means is configured to be displayed in the first mode. That is, in the dynamic display in which the display result of the special identification information appears when the indicating means has been changed to the second mode, the second indicating means after the judgment effect is displayed in the second mode, and the general identification In the dynamic display in which the display result of the information appears, the second display means after the judgment effect is displayed in the first mode. By configuring in this way, the second indicating means of the second mode does not appear after the general identification information appears, and since it does not suggest that the presentation will develop, inconsistencies in the content of presentation do not occur. Thus, there is an effect that a comfortable game can be provided in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel a sense of distrust.

In gaming machine E4,
The first indication means is
1. In the dynamic display of 1, at least a plurality of appearances,
The multiple change means are
A game machine E5, characterized by comprising a first indication collective means for collectively setting the display mode of at least the first indication means.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in one dynamic display, at least a plurality of the first indicating means are displayed, and the display mode of at least the first indicating means is collectively displayed by the first indicating collective means provided in the plural changing means. configured to be set. As a result, it is possible to collectively set a plurality of first indicating means appearing in one dynamic display, so that the control load can be reduced compared to control in which setting processing is performed for each first indicating means. It has the effect of being able to In particular, the more the number of appearing positions of the first indicating means capable of executing the second mode in the dynamic display (for example, 5 or more), the more the collective setting works, and the control load is remarkably reduced. It is possible to

In any of gaming machines E1 to E5,
The mode changing means is
Color changing means (e.g., character color lottery) for changing the display color of the indicating means from a predetermined normal display color (e.g., "white") to a special display color (e.g., "red") different from the normal display color a counter 223f);
The timing at which the display color of the indicating means is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color changing means (for example, the timing to display the character display Se1 at the time of reaching occurrence, or the timing to display the character display Se2 during reaching Timing selection means (color change timing counter 223g) for selecting timing),
The multiple change means are
collective change means for collectively changing the display color of the display means displayed after the timing selected by the timing selection means to the special display color;
The first mode notification means is
After the timing at which the display color of the indicating means is changed to the special display color by the batch changing means, the display color of the indicating means that appears after the execution of the judgment effect is displayed in the normal display color. A gaming machine E6, comprising color display means.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display color of the indicating means is changed from a predetermined normal display color to a special display color different from the normal display color by the color changing means provided in the mode changing means. Also, timing selection means provided in the mode change means selects the timing at which the color change means changes the display color of the indicating means from the normal display color to the special display color. Then, the display color of the indicating means displayed after the timing selected by the timing selecting means is changed to the special display color by the batch changing means provided in the plurality of changing means. Here, after the timing when the display color of the indicating means is changed to the special display color by the batch changing means, the display color of the indicating means appearing after execution of the judgment effect is provided in the first mode notification means. It is displayed in the normal display color by the normal color display means. As a result, regarding the display modes of the indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other, the display mode of the indicating means is set based on a plurality of change factors such as the display color and the display timing, and variations in the display mode of the indicating means are achieved. is increased, and when the general identification information appears in the display means after the judgment production, it is possible to change (correct) the batch setting content and display it in the normal display color (first mode). Therefore, while increasing the interest of the game by diversifying the effects, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the effects, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel distrust. It has the effect of being able to

In gaming machine E6,
The mode changing means is
Changed element selection means (for example, character mode setting processing (S1417)) for separately selecting changed elements of the display color, change timing, or display pattern with respect to the display mode of the display means;
an instruction output means (for example, command output processing (S1102)) for outputting the second display instruction based on each change element selected by the change element selection means;
The instruction output means is
When the display mode of the indicating means that appears after the execution of the determination effect is displayed in the first mode by the first mode informing means, at least the changing element of the display color of the indicating means is displayed in the normal display color. a correction instruction output means for outputting the second display instruction to be displayed in the game machine E7.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the changing elements of the display color, change timing, or display pattern are separately selected with respect to the display mode of the indicating means by the changing element selecting means provided in the mode changing means. Further, the second display instruction is output based on each change element selected by the change element selection means by the instruction output means similarly provided in the mode change means. Then, when the display mode of the indicating means to appear after execution of the determination effect is displayed in the first mode by the first mode informing means, at least the changing element of the display color of the indicating means is displayed in the normal display color. A display instruction is output by the correction instruction output means provided in the instruction output means. That is, the mode changing means separately selects (determines) the change elements of the display color, the change timing, or the display pattern with respect to the display mode of the display means, and based on the selected content, issues the second display instruction of the display means. a second display instruction for displaying at least the display color of the changed elements of the display means in the normal display color when the display mode of the display means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means; is configured to output

Suppose that after selecting all of the plurality of change elements in the plurality of display means, that is, the display color, the change timing, and the display pattern, a display instruction regarding the plurality of change elements in the plurality of display means is given by one second display instruction. If it is generated, the second display instructions must be prepared in advance according to all variations of display colors, change timings, and display patterns, and the number of second display instructions may become enormous. Therefore, by separately selecting display instructions for each change element of each display means, the number of second display instructions regarding the display means can be reduced, and an increase in the memory capacity of the game machine can be suppressed. There is

In particular, in the gaming machine adopting the invention of the gaming machine E1, even if the second mode of each display means is selected, when the result of the dynamic display becomes the general identification information, the determination performance is not performed. The display means (second display means) appearing after execution is configured to be displayed (changed) in the first mode (normal display color). In this case, after all of the display color, change timing and display pattern of each indicating means, and further the display (change) content of the indicating means after the determination of the effect are determined, each indication is given by the second display instruction of 1. When outputting a display instruction regarding the means, the second display instruction must be prepared in advance according to the variation of the display mode of all the display means, including the contents to be displayed (changed) by the display means after the effect determination. , the number of second display instructions may increase dramatically. Therefore, the second display instruction is output separately for each of the display color, change timing, display pattern, or display (change) content after determination of the effect of each display means, and based on the second display instruction, the image display means By adjusting the display control of the indicating means, it is possible to reduce the number of second display instructions for each indicating means and suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the game machine.

In addition, among the changing elements of the indicating means, the change in the display color is easier to recognize than the change in the other changing elements (change timing or display pattern). Specifically, for example, in the case of a display pattern, the meaning of the display pattern cannot be understood unless the type of the display pattern is remembered in advance. This is because it can be determined by whether or not the display color has changed from the normal display color (white). Therefore, when the player recognizes that the display color of the indicating means has been changed to the special display color, the change in the display color of the indicating means causes some kind of development effect in the dynamic display. I predict that it will be executed. However, contrary to the prediction, if the development effect is not executed in the dynamic display, the player will distrust the game machine due to the discrepancy in the content of the effect, and the game machine that has the game machine installed. There is a possibility that the game will be interrupted due to increased distrust of the place.

Therefore, when the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, even if the display means is changed to the second mode, at least the display color of the display means displayed after the determination effect is changed to the normal display color. configured to display in That is, in the dynamic display in which the general identification information appears, the indicating means after the judgment rendering is configured to be displayed in at least the normal display color. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the content of the performance, to provide a comfortable game that does not give the player excessive expectations, and does not make the player feel distrustful. effective.

In gaming machine E7,
The instruction output means is
A game machine E8, characterized by comprising start time output means for outputting all second display instructions relating to the display mode of the display means in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the start time output means provided in the instruction output means outputs all the second display instructions regarding the display mode of the display means in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display. As a result, at the start of dynamic display, it is possible to indicate to the image display means the content of the indicating means to be displayed in the dynamic display, and display of each indicating means in the dynamic display can be performed smoothly. has the effect of

In game machines E1 to E8,
The mode changing means is
When it is determined by the determination means that the special identification information will appear in the dynamic display, the display means that appears after the determination effect is executed by the determination effect execution means is displayed in the second mode. (for example, S1702 of character color change restriction processing: Yes).

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the determination means determines that the special identification information is to be displayed in the dynamic display, the mode maintaining means provided in the mode changing means causes the indication to appear after the determination effect execution means executes the determination effect. A means is displayed in a second manner. As a result, when the special identification information appears, the display of the display means collectively set at the beginning is maintained in the second mode, the special identification information appears, and a predetermined game value can be awarded. There is an effect that it can bless the person and enhance the interest of the game.

<F group: data table for each production unit>
Image display means for displaying a predetermined image (e.g., third symbol display device 81), main control means for performing main control of the game (e.g., main control device 110 or (and) sound lamp control device 113), A gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (for example, a display control device 114) that controls the image display means based on a display instruction from the main control means,
The sub control means is
an image drawing means (for example, an image controller 237) for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means;
First display determination means (for example, command determination processing (S2022 ) of S2108),
First definition information (for example, a variable display data table) which is provided for each of the first display types and defines, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the first display type 232a1), a first prescribed information storage means (for example, data table storage area 232a);
a first selection means (for example, a display data table buffer 233b) for selecting the first definition information corresponding to the first display type determined by the first display determination means from the first definition information storage means;
In the image display means, a plurality of display means displayed with a predetermined relationship (for example, character display Se1 during reach occurrence, character display Se2 during reach, fixed phrase character display Se3, and pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 )and,
Second display determination means (for example, command determination processing (S2022) for determining the display means to be displayed on the image display means based on a second display instruction (for example, red character command for display) from the main control means S2112) of
A second prescribed information (a second specified information ( For example, second prescribed information storage means (for example, data table storage area 232a) for storing additional data table for characters 232a2);
a second selecting means (for example, character-based command processing (S2113)) for selecting the second defining information corresponding to the indicating means determined by the second display determining means from the second defining information storing means;
In the image display means, a plurality of suggesting means (for example, execution symbols and pending symbols) for suggesting a gaming state;
Third display determining means (for example, command determination processing (for example, command determination processing ( S2110) of S2022),
Third prescribed information ( For example, third specified information storage means (for example, data table storage area 232a) for storing additional data table 232a2) for holding;
and a third selecting means (for example, prefetch-related command processing (S2111)) for selecting the third defining information for the suggesting means determined by the third display determining means from the third defining information storage means. ,
The sub control means is
updating means (for example, pointer 233e) that is updated every time elapses;
Each time the updating means is updated, the first defining information selected by the first selecting means, the second defining information selected by the second selecting means, and the third defining information selected by the third selecting means drawing information specifying means (for example, S2308 of the display setting process (S2023)) for specifying drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated updating means based on the third prescribed information;
Drawing instruction information generating means (for example, , S2501 of the rendering process (S2026), and
The game machine F0 is characterized in that the image drawing means draws an image for one screen based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means.

According to the game machine F0, the image display means displays a predetermined image, the main control means performs main control of the game, and the sub control means displays an image based on the display instruction from the main control means. A display means is controlled. An image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means is drawn by the image drawing means provided in the sub control means. Then, the first display type to be displayed is determined by the first display determination means based on the first display instruction from the main control means. Further, the first specification information storage means provides for each first display type and defines drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the first display type for each screen. Information is stored. Here, the first specification information corresponding to the first display type determined by the first display determination means is selected from the first specification information storage means by the first selection means. Then, on the image display means, a plurality of display means having predetermined relationships with each other are displayed. Further, the second display determination means determines the display means to be displayed on the image display means based on the second display instruction from the main control means. Second definition information that defines, for each screen, drawing information that is provided for a plurality of display means and indicates information necessary for drawing an image to be changed (added) and displayed by the plurality of display means. is stored by the second stipulation information storage means. Here, the second selection means selects the second definition information for the display means determined by the second display determination means from the second definition information storage means. Also, in the image display means, a plurality of suggestion means for suggesting the game state are displayed. Further, the third display determination means determines the suggestion means to be displayed on the image display means based on the third display instruction from the main control means. Third stipulation information, which is provided for each of the plurality of suggesting means and defines, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be changed (added) and displayed by the plurality of suggesting means. is stored by the third stipulation information storage means. Here, the third specifying means for the suggesting means determined by the third display determining means is selected from the third specifying information storage means by the third selecting means. Then, the update means provided in the sub control means is updated every time the time elapses, and each time the update means is updated, the first prescribed information selected by the first selection means and the information selected by the second selection means Drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated update means is specified by the drawing information specifying means based on the second specifying information and the third specifying information selected by the third selecting means. The drawing instruction information generating means generates drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the drawing information for one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means. be done. An image for one screen is drawn by the image drawing means based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means.

In the gaming machine E0, with respect to the display mode of a plurality of indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other, separate second stipulated information is selected for each change element of each indicating means individually selected by lottery. It is configured to perform display control of each display means based on the second regulation information. In such a configuration, the second stipulation information is required for each change element of each indicating means.

Here, in the dynamic display, in addition to each display means, there are displays related to a plurality of suggestive means indicating the game state, and a plurality of effects (announcement) such as a plurality of character patterns and other performance patterns. A variety of changeable elements (for example, number, display color, intensity pattern, appearance timing, etc.) are provided in advance. Therefore, in each of these effects as well, a plurality of types of third stipulation information or the like are selected for each change element, and display control of the entire dynamic display is executed based on the selected third stipulation information.

However, the more effects (notices) to be added and the more elements to be changed in each effect (notices), the more the number of second stipulated information to be selected increases proportionally, and the storage capacity of the gaming machine is reduced. There is a risk of overcrowding, and it becomes necessary to increase the storage capacity in advance at a cost. In addition, when a large number of second stipulation information are selected, the number of the first stipulation information and the second stipulation information to be referred to when generating the drawing instruction information in the drawing process increases, which increases the processing load related to display control. It may increase.

Therefore, when displaying each image in response to the first display instruction, the second display instruction or the third display instruction from the main control means, the first stipulation information, the second stipulation information or the third stipulation information for each effect unit is used. , the first specified information storage means, the second specified information storage means, or the third specified information storage means, the display mode of the image display means can be easily changed (added) and displayed. Further, by configuring to select the second stipulated information for a plurality of indicating means and to select the third stipulated information for a plurality of suggesting means, the image is composed of a plurality of images. Since display control can be collectively performed for effects, display control can be managed in units of related effects. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means. In addition, the number of second stipulated information and third stipulated information to be selected is the number of types of effects (notice), and the second stipulated information and third stipulated information are selected for each change element of the effect (notice). 3. The total number of stipulated information can be reduced, the capacity of the second stipulated information does not need to be increased in accordance with the increase in the number of change elements of the performance (advance notice), and the cost of the game machine can be suppressed. has the effect of In addition, when generating drawing instruction information in drawing processing, the number of the first defining information, the second defining information, and the third defining information to be referred to can be reduced, thereby reducing the processing load when generating drawing instruction information. It has the effect of being able to

In addition, "a plurality of display means displayed with a predetermined relationship with each other" means, for example, when the display means have the same attribute or correspond to the same type, they are displayed at the same timing. In the case of appearing, or even in the case of appearing with a time lag, when one appears, the other also appears. A relationship that is conceptually organically entwined (closely related). Specifically, for example, a notice display displayed in the same display area (character display Se1 when reach occurs and fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), or a notice display (strong character notice) displayed in different modes at the same timing etc.), a notice display in which another notice appears after one notice appears (step-up notice, character display Se1 when reach occurs, and fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), and the same effect is executed multiple times. Examples include advance notices (variable elements of “pseudo-ren”, etc.).

In gaming machine F0,
The main control means is
Comprehensive output means for collectively outputting the plurality of second display instructions for the display modes of the plurality of display means during a predetermined period;
The sub control means is
Standby means for waiting for the predetermined period when one of the second display instructions to the display means is received from the main control means;
post-wait determination means for determining the display means to be displayed on the image display means based on one or more of the second display instructions received after waiting by the wait means. Machine F1.

According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the comprehensive output means provided in the main control means collectively outputs a plurality of second display instructions for the display modes of the plurality of display means during a predetermined period. Further, the waiting means provided in the sub-control means waits for a predetermined period of time when the first second display instruction to the indicating means is received from the main control means. Then, after waiting by the waiting means, the post-wait determining means, which is also provided in the sub-control means, determines the display means to be displayed on the image display means based on the received one or more second display instructions. That is, the sub control means is configured to execute display control for the indicating means after receiving all the second display instructions collectively output during the predetermined period. As a result, when drawing a plurality of indicating means, once the display modes of all the indicating means are determined, the indicating means can be drawn based on one set of the second defining information, and the plurality of indicating means can be drawn using one set of second defining information. It is possible to display by the second prescribed information. Therefore, since it is possible to collectively control the display of effects related to a plurality of indicating means, there is an effect that it is possible to easily diversify the display modes of the indicating means displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine F0 or F1,
The main control means is
occasional output means for outputting the third display instruction regarding the display mode of the plurality of suggesting means as needed when a predetermined condition (e.g., start-up winning) is established;
The sub control means is
occasional determining means for determining the suggesting means to be displayed on the image display means based on the third display instruction when receiving the third display instruction for the suggesting means from the main control means. A gaming machine F2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F0 or F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the occasional output means provided in the main control means outputs the third display instruction regarding the display mode of the plurality of suggestion means as needed. Further, when the occasional determination means provided in the sub control means receives the third display instruction for the suggestion means from the main control means, the suggestion means to be displayed on the image display means is determined based on the third display instruction. be done. That is, the sub control means is configured to perform display control for the suggesting means each time the third display instruction output as needed is received when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Thereby, when the predetermined condition is established and the third display instruction is output, the display mode of the suggesting means based on the third display instruction can be changed at any time. Therefore, it is possible to immediately display the content of the suggesting means indicating the game state, so there is an effect that the game state can be accurately suggested to the player.

In any of the game machines F0 to F2,
The drawing information specifying means includes:
A gaming machine F3, characterized by comprising a priority specifying means for specifying drawing information for one screen by prioritizing drawing information of said third defining information over drawing information of said second defining information.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machines F0 to F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the drawing information of the third defining information is prioritized over the drawing information of the second defining information by the priority specifying means provided in the drawing information specifying means, and is specified as the drawing information for one screen. In other words, the display of the suggesting means indicating the game state can be displayed with priority over the display means, so that the game state can be accurately suggested to the player.

In any of the game machines F0 to F3,
The first selection means is
Based on the first display instruction, the dynamic specifying information (for example, display data table for variation 232a1) specifying the drawing information of the entire dynamic display is selected from the first specifying information storage means. Prescribed information selection means (for example, display data table buffer 233b),
The second selection means is
Batch defining information (for example, text color additional data table 232a2) defining drawing information when the display mode of the indicating means is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing means based on the second display instruction. collective definition information selection means (for example, additional data table buffer 233c) for selecting from the second definition information storage means;
First mode defining information defining drawing information when the display mode of the indicating means displayed after the determination effect is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notifying means based on the second display instruction. (for example, additional data table for character correction 232a2) is selected from the second specification information storage means (for example, additional data table buffer 233c). Game machine F4 to play.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machines F0 to F3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic specification information selecting means provided in the first selection means selects the dynamic specification information specifying the drawing information of the entire dynamic display from the first specification information storage means based on the first display instruction. is selected. Further, collectively specifying the drawing information when the display mode of the indicating means is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing means based on the second display instruction by the batch specifying information selecting means provided in the second selecting means. Prescribing information is selected from the second prescribing information storage means. Also, the first mode defining information selection means provided in the second selection means also draws when the display mode of the indicating means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means based on the second display instruction. First mode defining information defining information is selected from the second defining information storage means. That is, when the general identification information that does not give a predetermined game value appears in the dynamic display, even if the display mode of the plurality of display means having a predetermined relationship with each other is changed to the second mode, the dynamic display is performed. The display mode of the indicating means displayed after execution of the determination performance of the target display is displayed in the first mode instead of the second mode. In addition, when a plurality of indicating means are collectively set and changed (added), and the indicating means after the judgment effect is changed to the first mode and displayed, the drawing information when the indicating means are collectively set is The specified batch specifying information is selected, and the first mode specifying information specifying the drawing information when the indicating means after the judgment effect is displayed in the first mode is selected.

As in the past, when indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other appear at a plurality of locations (timing or display area; the same shall apply hereinafter) of dynamic display, the indicating means If it is configured to set (lottery) whether to display in the first mode or in a second mode different from the first mode, setting processing (lottery processing) for the appearing portion is required and control becomes complicated and the processing load increases. Also, in the dynamic display, if the indicator that appears earlier is displayed in the second mode and then the indicator that appears later is displayed in the first mode, the indicator having a predetermined relevance Because it is a means, it becomes an expression in which the degree of expectation for the emergence of the special identification information is lowered (hereinafter referred to as "downward expression"). Therefore, there is a possibility that the player, who has been excited by the appearance of the second mode in the previous display means, will lose interest when he witnesses the above-mentioned descent expression in the subsequent display means.

Therefore, in the dynamic display, the setting (lottery) of the display modes of the display means having a predetermined relationship with each other is performed collectively, and the second mode displayed by one display means is followed by the other display means as well. By configuring to make it appear, there is no need to perform setting processing for each appearing location, and the processing load can be reduced. In addition, when the indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other appear in the second mode even once, the indicating means appearing after that are also configured to appear in accordance with the second mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game by eliminating the phenomenon of the occurrence of the stagnation expression in the indicating means.

However, when a plurality of display means having a predetermined relationship with each other are collectively set in the second mode, for example, in a dynamic display in which a display result of general identification information to which a predetermined game value is not given appears, the dynamic In a state where the display determination effect is performed and the general identification information is displayed, the indicating means may be displayed in the second mode. Since the second mode of the indicating means is a mode that is changed from the predetermined first mode based on the judgment result of the judging means, it has a development suggesting function that suggests that the current rendering situation can be changed based on the change. have On the other hand, the indicating means displayed after the determination effect has a status notification function of notifying the content of the current effect situation, which is the result of the determination effect. Therefore, if the indicating means after execution of the judgment effect is displayed in the second mode, the player will feel that the development suggesting function is superior to the situation reporting function of the indicating means because the indicating means is displayed in the second mode. , it is predicted that the dynamic display will not be determined by the general identification information as it is, and that some development effect will be executed and the general identification information will be changed to the special identification information. However, contrary to the prediction, the dynamic display is determined as the general identification information to which the predetermined game value is not assigned. In such a case, the game machine may be distrustful of the game arcade where the game machine is installed, and the game may be interrupted.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine F4, when the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, even if the display means is collectively set to the second mode, the display means displayed after the determination effect is displayed in the second mode. Configure so as not to reveal the mode. That is, in the dynamic display of the general identification information, the indicating means after the judgment effect is displayed in the first mode. based on the second display instruction, collectively defining information defining drawing information when the display mode of the indicating means is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing means is selected from the second defining information storage means; Based on the second display instruction, drawing information when the display mode of the indicating means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means is selected by the first mode specifying information selection means provided in the second selection means. The defined first mode defining information is selected from the second defining information storage means. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent discrepancies in the content of the production, to provide a comfortable game that does not give the player excessive expectations, and does not make the player feel distrustful. effective. In addition, in the case of changing (adding) a plurality of indicating means and further changing and displaying the indicating means after the judgment effect to the first mode, batch definition information that defines the drawing information when the indicating means is changed. and selecting the first mode stipulating information that defines the drawing information when the indicating means after the judgment effect is displayed in the first mode, the various display modes of the plurality of indicating means can be easily changed. (Add) to display. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine F4,
The indicator means
A first display means (for example, character display Se1 during reach occurrence or character display Se2 during reach) that appears before or during execution of the determination effect;
A second display means (for example, fixed phrase character display Se3) that appears after the execution of the determination effect,
The mode changing means is
a second mode continuation means for displaying the first display means and the second display notification means in the second mode when the determination means determines that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display; ,
When the determination means determines that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the first display means is displayed in the second mode, and the second display is performed by the first mode notification means. A gaming machine F5 characterized by comprising a second mode changing means for displaying the means in the first mode.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the indicating means is provided with a first indicating means that appears before or during execution of the determination performance and a second indicating means that appears after the determination performance is performed. Further, when the determination means determines that the special identification information will appear in the dynamic display, the second mode continuation means provided in the mode change means causes the first display means and the second display means to be displayed in the second mode. is displayed. On the other hand, when the determination means determines that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the first display means is displayed in the second mode by the second mode change means provided in the mode change means, The second display means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means. As a result, when the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, both the first display means and the second display means are changed to the second mode, and when the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the second mode is displayed. The first indicating means is displayed in the second mode, while the second indicating means is configured to be displayed in the first mode. That is, in the dynamic display in which the display result of the special identification information appears when the indicating means has been changed to the second mode, the second indicating means after the judgment effect is displayed in the second mode, and the general identification In the dynamic display in which the display result of the information appears, the second display means after the judgment effect is displayed in the first mode. By configuring in this way, the second indicating means of the second mode does not appear after the general identification information appears, and since it does not suggest that the presentation will develop, inconsistencies in the content of presentation do not occur. Thus, there is an effect that a comfortable game can be provided in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel a sense of distrust.

In the gaming machine F5,
The first indication means is
1. In the dynamic display of 1, at least a plurality of appearances,
The multiple change means are
A gaming machine F6, characterized by comprising: a first indication collective means for collectively setting at least the display mode of the first indication means.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in one dynamic display, at least a plurality of the first indicating means are displayed, and the display mode of at least the first indicating means is collectively displayed by the first indicating collective means provided in the plural changing means. configured to be set. As a result, it is possible to collectively set a plurality of first indicating means appearing in one dynamic display, so that the control load can be reduced compared to control in which setting processing is performed for each first indicating means. It has the effect of being able to In particular, the more the number of appearing positions of the first indicating means capable of executing the second mode in the dynamic display (for example, 5 or more), the more the collective setting works, and the control load is remarkably reduced. It is possible to

In either gaming machine F5 or F6,
The mode changing means is
Color changing means (e.g., character color lottery) for changing the display color of the indicating means from a predetermined normal display color (e.g., "white") to a special display color (e.g., "red") different from the normal display color a counter 223f);
The timing at which the display color of the indicating means is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color changing means (for example, the timing to display the character display Se1 at the time of reaching occurrence, or the timing to display the character display Se2 during reaching Timing selection means (color change timing counter 223g) for selecting timing),
The multiple change means are
collective change means for collectively changing the display color of the display means displayed after the timing selected by the timing selection means to the special display color;
The first mode notification means is
After the timing at which the display color of the indicating means is changed to the special display color by the batch changing means, the display color of the indicating means that appears after the execution of the judgment effect is displayed in the normal display color. A gaming machine F7 characterized by comprising color display means.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F5 or F6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display color of the indicating means is changed from a predetermined normal display color to a special display color different from the normal display color by the color changing means provided in the mode changing means. Also, timing selection means provided in the mode change means selects the timing at which the color change means changes the display color of the indicating means from the normal display color to the special display color. Then, the display color of the indicating means displayed after the timing selected by the timing selecting means is changed to the special display color by the batch changing means provided in the plurality of changing means. Here, after the timing when the display color of the indicating means is changed to the special display color by the batch changing means, the display color of the indicating means appearing after execution of the judgment effect is provided in the first mode notification means. It is displayed in the normal display color by the normal color display means. As a result, regarding the display modes of the indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other, the display mode of the indicating means is set based on a plurality of change factors such as the display color and the display timing, and variations in the display mode of the indicating means are achieved. is increased, and when the general identification information appears in the display means after the judgment production, it is possible to change (correct) the batch setting content and display it in the normal display color (first mode). Therefore, while increasing the interest of the game by diversifying the effects, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the effects, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel distrust. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine F7,
The mode changing means is
Changed element selection means (for example, character mode setting processing (S1417)) for separately selecting changed elements of the display color, change timing, or display pattern with respect to the display mode of the display means;
an instruction output means (for example, command output processing (S1102)) for outputting the second display instruction based on each change element selected by the change element selection means;
The instruction output means is
When the display mode of the indicating means that appears after the execution of the determination effect is displayed in the first mode by the first mode informing means, at least the changing element of the display color of the indicating means is displayed in the normal display color. a correction instruction output means for outputting the second display instruction to be displayed in the game machine F8.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the changing elements of the display color, change timing, or display pattern are separately selected with respect to the display mode of the indicating means by the changing element selecting means provided in the mode changing means. Further, the second display instruction is output based on each change element selected by the change element selection means by the instruction output means similarly provided in the mode change means. Then, when the display mode of the indicating means to appear after execution of the determination effect is displayed in the first mode by the first mode informing means, at least the changing element of the display color of the indicating means is displayed in the normal display color. A display instruction is output by the correction instruction output means provided in the instruction output means. That is, the mode changing means separately selects (determines) the change elements of the display color, the change timing, or the display pattern with respect to the display mode of the display means, and based on the selected content, issues the second display instruction of the display means. a second display instruction for displaying at least the display color of the changed elements of the display means in the normal display color when the display mode of the display means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means; is configured to output

Suppose that after selecting all of the plurality of change elements in the plurality of display means, that is, the display color, the change timing, and the display pattern, a display instruction regarding the plurality of change elements in the plurality of display means is given by one second display instruction. If it is generated, the second display instructions must be prepared in advance according to all variations of display colors, change timings, and display patterns, and the number of second display instructions may become enormous. Therefore, by separately selecting display instructions for each change element of each display means, the number of second display instructions regarding the display means can be reduced, and an increase in the memory capacity of the game machine can be suppressed. There is

In particular, in the gaming machine employing the invention of the gaming machine F4, even when the second mode of each display means is selected, when the result of the dynamic display is the general identification information, the determination performance is not performed. The display means (second display means) appearing after execution is configured to be displayed (changed) in the first mode (normal display color). In this case, after all of the display color, change timing and display pattern of each indicating means, and further the display (change) content of the indicating means after the determination of the effect are determined, each indication is given by the second display instruction of 1. When outputting a display instruction regarding the means, the second display instruction must be prepared in advance according to the variation of the display mode of all the display means, including the contents to be displayed (changed) by the display means after the effect determination. , the number of second display instructions may increase dramatically. Therefore, the second display instruction is output separately for each of the display color, change timing, display pattern, or display (change) content after determination of the effect of each display means, and based on the second display instruction, the image display means By adjusting the display control of the indicating means, it is possible to reduce the number of second display instructions for each indicating means and suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the game machine.

In addition, among the changing elements of the indicating means, the change in the display color is easier to recognize than the change in the other changing elements (change timing or display pattern). Specifically, for example, in the case of a display pattern, the meaning of the display pattern cannot be understood unless the type of the display pattern is remembered in advance. This is because it can be determined by whether or not the display color has changed from the normal display color (white). Therefore, when the player recognizes that the display color of the indicating means has been changed to the special display color, the change in the display color of the indicating means causes some kind of development effect in the dynamic display. I predict that it will be executed. However, contrary to the prediction, if the development effect is not executed in the dynamic display, the player will distrust the game machine due to the discrepancy in the content of the effect, and the game machine that has the game machine installed. There is a risk that the game will be interrupted due to increased distrust of the place.

Therefore, when the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, even if the display means is changed to the second mode, at least the display color of the display means displayed after the determination effect is changed to the normal display color. configured to display in That is, in the dynamic display in which the general identification information appears, the indicating means after the judgment effect is configured to be displayed in at least the normal display color. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent discrepancies in the content of the production, to provide a comfortable game that does not give the player excessive expectations, and does not make the player feel distrustful. effective.

In the game machine F8,
The instruction output means is
A game machine F9, characterized by comprising start time output means for outputting all second display instructions relating to the display mode of the display means in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the start time output means provided in the instruction output means outputs all the second display instructions regarding the display mode of the display means in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display. As a result, at the start of dynamic display, it is possible to indicate to the image display means the content of the indicating means to be displayed in the dynamic display, and display of each indicating means in the dynamic display can be performed smoothly. has the effect of

In game machines F4 to F9,
The mode changing means is
When it is determined by the determination means that the special identification information will appear in the dynamic display, the display means that appears after the determination effect is executed by the determination effect execution means is displayed in the second mode. (eg S1702: Yes in character color change restriction processing).

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effects of the game machines F4 to F9, the following effects are produced. That is, when the determining means determines that the special identification information will appear in the dynamic display, the mode maintaining means provided in the mode changing means causes the indication to appear after the determination effect execution means executes the determination effect. A means is displayed in a second manner. As a result, when the special identification information appears, the display of the display means collectively set at the beginning is maintained in the second mode, and the special identification information appears and a predetermined game value can be awarded. There is an effect that it is possible to congratulate the person and enhance the interest of the game.

<Group G: Additional data table for one character for multiple character representations>
Image display means for displaying a predetermined image (e.g., third symbol display device 81), main control means for performing main control of the game (e.g., main control device 110 or (and) sound lamp control device 113), A gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (for example, a display control device 114) that controls the image display means based on a display instruction from the main control means,
The sub control means is
an image drawing means (for example, an image controller 237) for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means;
First display determination means (for example, command determination processing (S2022 ) of S2108),
First definition information (for example, a variable display data table) which is provided for each of the first display types and defines, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the first display type 232a1), a first prescribed information storage means (for example, data table storage area 232a);
a first selection means (for example, a display data table buffer 233b) for selecting the first definition information corresponding to the first display type determined by the first display determination means from the first definition information storage means;
In the image display means, a plurality of display means displayed with a predetermined relationship (for example, character display Se1 during reach occurrence, character display Se2 during reach, fixed phrase character display Se3, and pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 )and,
Based on the second display instruction (for example, red character command for display) from the main control means, the image indicated by the first prescribed information selected by the first selection means is changed (added) and displayed. a second display determination means for determining the display means (for example, S2112 of the command determination process (S2022));
A second prescribed information (a second specified information ( For example, second prescribed information storage means (for example, data table storage area 232a) for storing additional data table for characters 232a2);
Second selection means (for example, character-based command processing (S2113 )) and
The sub control means is
updating means (for example, pointer 233e) that is updated every time elapses;
Each time the updating means is updated, the update is updated based on the first stipulation information selected by the first selection means and the second stipulation information selected by the second selection means. Drawing information specifying means (for example, S2308 of the display setting process (S2023)) for specifying drawing information for one screen corresponding to the means;
Drawing instruction information generating means (for example, , S2501 of the rendering process (S2026), and
The game machine G0 is characterized in that the image drawing means draws an image for one screen based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means.

According to the game machine G0, the image display means displays a predetermined image, the main control means performs main control of the game, and the sub-control means displays the image based on the display instruction from the main control means. A display means is controlled. An image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means is drawn by the image drawing means provided in the sub control means. Then, the first display type to be displayed is determined by the first display determination means based on the first display instruction from the main control means. Further, the first definition information storing means provides for each first display type, and defines drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the first display type for each screen. is stored. Here, the first specification information corresponding to the first display type determined by the first display determination means is selected from the first specification information storage means by the first selection means. Then, on the image display means, a plurality of display means having predetermined relationships with each other are displayed. Further, the second display determination means determines the display means to be displayed by changing (adding) the image indicated by the first prescribed information selected by the first selection means based on the second display instruction from the main control means. be done. Second definition information that defines, for each screen, drawing information that is provided for a plurality of display means and indicates information necessary for drawing an image to be changed (added) and displayed by the plurality of display means. is stored by the second stipulation information storage means. Here, the second selection means selects from the second definition information storage means one second stipulation information for the plurality of display means determined by the second display determination means. Then, the update means provided in the sub control means is updated every time the time elapses, and each time the update means is updated, the first prescribed information selected by the first selection means and the information selected by the second selection means Drawing information for one screen for the updated updating means is specified by the drawing information specifying means on the basis of the second specifying information. The drawing instruction information generating means generates drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the drawing information for one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means. be done. An image for one screen is drawn by the image drawing means based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means. Thereby, when displaying the image of the first display type corresponding to the first display instruction from the main control means by changing (adding) the indicating means corresponding to the second display instruction, the second stipulation information for the indicating means is It is possible to easily change (add) and display the display modes of a plurality of display means simply by selecting from the 2 prescribed information storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

In gaming machine G0,
Acquisition means (for example, the first ball entrance 64) for acquiring starting information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) for determining based on the starting information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic display execution means (for example, MPU 231 of display control device 114) that causes the image display means to execute dynamic display of identification information (for example, variation effect of the third symbol) based on the determination result by the determination means; with
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means, when special identification information (for example, "jackpot display"), which is predetermined identification information, appears, a predetermined game is displayed to the player. A gaming machine that provides value,
a storage means (for example, an execution information storage area 223i) for storing the start information acquired by the acquisition means;
Based on the starting information stored in the storage means, the special identification information is displayed in the dynamic display, or general identification information different from the special identification information (for example, "failure display") is displayed. Determination means (for example, MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113) for determining whether to appear;
indicator display means for displaying a plurality of the indicator means so as to have a predetermined relationship with each other in the dynamic display;
Based on the determination result of the determining means, the display mode of the indicating means is changed from a predetermined first mode (eg, "white") to a second mode (eg, "red") different from the first mode. Mode changing means (for example, character color lottery counter 223f),
a plurality of changing means (for example, a character color change table 222h) for changing the display mode of a plurality of the indicating means to the second mode when the mode changing means changes the indicating means to the second mode; prepared,
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, execution of a determination effect for executing a determination effect (for example, a "demonstration" of a variable element of "super reach") to determine whether the special identification information is to be displayed or the general identification information is to be displayed. means (e.g., "super reach" variables),
The mode changing means is
When the display mode of the indicating means is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing means, and when the determination means determines that the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, the determination effect a first mode notification means (for example, a fixed phrase normal command for display) that displays the display means that appears after the execution of the determination effect by the execution means in the first mode,
The first selection means is
Based on the first display instruction, the dynamic specifying information (for example, display data table for variation 232a1) specifying the drawing information of the entire dynamic display is selected from the first specifying information storage means. Prescribed information selection means (for example, display data table buffer 233b),
The second selection means is
Batch defining information (for example, text color additional data table 232a2) defining drawing information when the display mode of the indicating means is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing means based on the second display instruction. collective definition information selection means (for example, additional data table buffer 233c) for selecting from the second definition information storage means;
First mode defining information defining drawing information when the display mode of the indicating means displayed after the determination effect is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notifying means based on the second display instruction. (for example, character correction additional data table 232a2) is provided from the second specification information storage means (for example, additional data table buffer 233c). Gaming machine G1 to play.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is met, the acquisition means acquires the starting information, and the determining means makes a determination based on the starting information acquired by the acquiring means. The dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of the identification information on the image display means based on the determination result by the determination means. When special identification information, which is predetermined identification information, appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. Further, the starting information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means. Here, based on the starting information stored in the storage means, the determination means determines whether the special identification information should be displayed in the dynamic display or the general identification information different from the special identification information should be displayed. Further, the indicator display means displays a plurality of indicator means having a predetermined relationship with each other in the dynamic display. Then, based on the determination result of the determining means, the display mode of the display means is changed from the predetermined first mode to a second mode different from the first mode by the mode changing means. Further, when the display means is changed to the second mode by the mode change means, the display mode of the plurality of display means is changed to the second mode by the multiple change means. Here, in the dynamic display, a determination effect for whether to display the special identification information or the general identification information is executed by the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, when the display mode of the indicating means is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing means and the determination means determines that the general identification information will appear in the dynamic display, the mode changing means is provided with The first mode notifying means causes the indicating means appearing after execution of the determination effect by the determination effect executing means to be displayed in the first mode. Here, based on the first display instruction, the dynamic definition information selection means provided in the first selection means selects the dynamic definition information that defines the drawing information of the entire dynamic display from the first definition information storage means. Information is selected. In addition, by collectively specifying information storage means provided in the second selecting means, based on the second display instruction, collectively specifying the drawing information when the display mode of the indicating means is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing means. Prescribing information is selected from the second prescribing information storage means. Also, the first mode defining information selection means provided in the second selection means also draws when the display mode of the indicating means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means based on the second display instruction. First mode defining information defining information is selected from the second defining information storage means. That is, when the general identification information that does not give a predetermined game value appears in the dynamic display, even if the display mode of the plurality of display means having a predetermined relationship with each other is changed to the second mode, the dynamic display is performed. The display mode of the indicating means displayed after execution of the determination performance of the target display is displayed in the first mode instead of the second mode. In addition, when a plurality of indicating means are collectively set and changed (added), and the indicating means after the judgment effect is changed to the first mode and displayed, the drawing information when the indicating means are collectively set is The specified batch specifying information is selected, and the first mode specifying information specifying the drawing information when the indicating means after the judgment effect is displayed in the first mode is selected.

As in the past, when indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other appear at a plurality of locations (timings or display areas; the same shall apply hereinafter) of dynamic display, the indicating means If it is configured to set (lottery) whether to display in the first mode or in a second mode different from the first mode, setting processing (lottery processing) for the appearing portion is required and control becomes complicated and the processing load increases. Also, in the dynamic display, if the indicator that appears first is displayed in the second mode and then the indicator that appears later is displayed in the first mode, the indicator having a predetermined relevance will be displayed. Because it is a means, it becomes an expression in which the degree of expectation for the emergence of special identification information is lowered (hereinafter referred to as "downward expression"). Therefore, there is a possibility that the player, who has been excited by the appearance of the second mode in the previous display means, will lose interest when he witnesses the above-mentioned descent expression in the subsequent display means.

Therefore, in the dynamic display, the setting (lottery) of the display modes of the display means having a predetermined relationship with each other is performed collectively, and the second mode displayed by one display means is followed by the other display means as well. By configuring to make it appear, there is no need to perform setting processing for each appearing location, and the processing load can be reduced. In addition, when the indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other appear in the second mode even once, the indicating means appearing after that are configured to follow the second mode and appear. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game by eliminating the phenomenon of the occurrence of the expression of the decline in the indicating means.

However, when a plurality of display means having a predetermined relationship with each other are collectively set in the second mode, for example, in a dynamic display in which a display result of general identification information to which a predetermined game value is not given appears, the dynamic In a state in which the display determination effect is performed and the general identification information is appearing, the indicating means may be displayed in the second mode. Since the second mode of the indicating means is a mode that is changed from the predetermined first mode based on the judgment result of the judging means, it has a development suggesting function that suggests that the current production situation can be changed based on the change. have On the other hand, the indicating means displayed after the determination effect has a situation notification function for notifying the content of the current effect situation, which is the result of the determination effect. Therefore, if the indicating means after execution of the judgment effect is displayed in the second mode, the player will feel that the development suggesting function is superior to the situation reporting function of the indicating means because the indicating means is displayed in the second mode. , it is predicted that the dynamic display will not be determined by the general identification information as it is, and that some development effect will be executed and the general identification information will be changed to the special identification information. However, contrary to the prediction, the dynamic display is fixed as the general identification information to which the predetermined game value is not given, and the discrepancies in the content of the presentation make the player distrustful of the gaming machine. In such a case, there is a risk that the game machine will be distrustful of the game arcade where the game machine is installed, and that the game will be interrupted.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine G1, when the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, even if the display means is collectively set to the second mode, the display means displayed after the determination effect is displayed in the second mode. Configure so as not to reveal the mode. That is, in the dynamic display of the general identification information, the indicating means after the judgment effect is displayed in the first mode. based on the second display instruction, collectively defining information defining drawing information when the display mode of the indicating means is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing means is selected from the second defining information storage means; Based on the second display instruction, drawing information when the display mode of the indicating means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means is selected by the first mode specifying information selection means provided in the second selection means. The defined first mode defining information is selected from the second defining information storage means. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent discrepancies in the content of the production, to provide a comfortable game that does not give the player excessive expectations, and does not make the player feel distrustful. effective. In addition, in the case of changing (adding) a plurality of indicating means and further changing and displaying the indicating means after the judgment effect to the first mode, batch definition information that defines the drawing information when the indicating means is changed. and selecting the first mode stipulating information that defines the drawing information when the indicating means after the judgment effect is displayed in the first mode, the various display modes of the plurality of indicating means can be easily changed. (Add) to display. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

In addition, "a plurality of display means displayed with a predetermined relationship with each other" means, for example, when the display means have the same attribute or correspond to the same type, they are displayed at the same timing. In the case of appearing, or even in the case of appearing with a time lag, when one appears, the other also appears. It refers to a relationship that is conceptually organically entwined (closely related). Specifically, for example, a notice display displayed in the same display area (character display Se1 when reach occurs and fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), or a notice display (strong character notice) displayed in different modes at the same timing etc.), a notice display in which another notice appears after one notice appears (step-up notice, character display Se1 when reach occurs, and fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), and the same effect is executed multiple times. Examples of advance notices (variable elements of “pseudo-ren”, etc.) are exemplified.

In gaming machine G1,
The indicator means
A first display means (for example, character display Se1 during reach occurrence or character display Se2 during reach) that appears before or during execution of the determination effect;
A second display means (for example, fixed phrase character display Se3) that appears after the execution of the determination effect,
The mode changing means is
a second mode continuation means for displaying the first display means and the second display notification means in the second mode when the determination means determines that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display; ,
When the determination means determines that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the first display means is displayed in the second mode, and the second display is performed by the first mode notification means. A gaming machine G2 characterized by comprising a second mode changing means for displaying the means in the first mode.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EG1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the indicating means is provided with a first indicating means that appears before or during execution of the determination performance and a second indicating means that appears after the determination performance is performed. Further, when the determination means determines that the special identification information will appear in the dynamic display, the second mode continuation means provided in the mode change means causes the first display means and the second display means to be displayed in the second mode. is displayed. On the other hand, when the determination means determines that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the first display means is displayed in the second mode by the second mode change means provided in the mode change means, The second display means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means. As a result, when the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, both the first display means and the second display means are changed to the second mode, and when the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the second mode is displayed. The first indicating means is displayed in the second mode, while the second indicating means is configured to be displayed in the first mode. That is, in the dynamic display in which the display result of the special identification information appears when the indicating means has been changed to the second mode, the second indicating means after the judgment effect is displayed in the second mode, and the general identification In the dynamic display in which the display result of the information appears, the second display means after the judgment effect is displayed in the first mode. By configuring in this way, the second indicating means of the second mode does not appear after the general identification information appears, and since it does not suggest that the presentation will develop, inconsistencies in the content of presentation do not occur. Thus, there is an effect that a comfortable game can be provided in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel a sense of distrust.

In gaming machine G2,
The first indication means is
1. In the dynamic display of 1, at least a plurality of appearances,
The multiple change means are
The game machine G3 is characterized by comprising a first display collective means for collectively setting the display mode of at least the first display means.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in one dynamic display, at least a plurality of the first indicating means are displayed, and the display mode of at least the first indicating means is collectively displayed by the first indicating collective means provided in the plural changing means. configured to be set. As a result, it is possible to collectively set a plurality of first indicating means appearing in one dynamic display, so that the control load can be reduced compared to control in which setting processing is performed for each first indicating means. It has the effect of being able to In particular, the more the number of appearing positions of the first indicating means capable of executing the second mode in the dynamic display (for example, 5 or more), the more the collective setting works, and the control load is remarkably reduced. It is possible to

In any of gaming machines G1 to G3,
The mode changing means is
Color changing means (e.g., character color lottery) for changing the display color of the indicating means from a predetermined normal display color (e.g., "white") to a special display color (e.g., "red") different from the normal display color a counter 223f);
The timing at which the display color of the indicating means is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color changing means (for example, the timing to display the character display Se1 at the time of reaching occurrence, or the timing to display the character display Se2 during reaching Timing selection means (color change timing counter 223g) for selecting timing),
The multiple change means are
collective change means for collectively changing the display color of the display means displayed after the timing selected by the timing selection means to the special display color;
The first mode notification means is
After the timing at which the display color of the indicating means is changed to the special display color by the batch changing means, the display color of the indicating means that appears after the execution of the judgment effect is displayed in the normal display color. A gaming machine G4, characterized by comprising color display means.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects of the game machines G1 to G3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display color of the indicating means is changed from a predetermined normal display color to a special display color different from the normal display color by the color changing means provided in the mode changing means. Also, timing selection means provided in the mode change means selects the timing at which the color change means changes the display color of the indicating means from the normal display color to the special display color. Then, the display color of the indicating means displayed after the timing selected by the timing selecting means is changed to the special display color by the batch changing means provided in the plurality of changing means. Here, after the timing when the display color of the indicating means is changed to the special display color by the batch changing means, the display color of the indicating means appearing after execution of the judgment effect is provided in the first mode notification means. It is displayed in the normal display color by the normal color display means. As a result, regarding the display modes of the indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other, the display mode of the indicating means is set based on a plurality of change factors such as the display color and the display timing, and variations in the display mode of the indicating means are achieved. is increased, and when the general identification information appears in the display means after the judgment production, it is possible to change (correct) the batch setting content and display it in the normal display color (first mode). Therefore, while increasing the interest of the game by diversifying the effects, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the effects, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel distrust. It has the effect of being able to

In gaming machine G4,
The mode changing means is
Changed element selection means (for example, character mode setting processing (S1417)) for separately selecting changed elements of the display color, change timing, or display pattern with respect to the display mode of the display means;
an instruction output means (for example, command output processing (S1102)) for outputting the second display instruction based on each change element selected by the change element selection means;
The instruction output means is
When the display mode of the indicating means that appears after the execution of the determination effect is displayed in the first mode by the first mode informing means, at least the changing element of the display color of the indicating means is displayed in the normal display color. a correction instruction output means for outputting the second display instruction to be displayed in the game machine G5.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the changing elements of the display color, change timing, or display pattern are separately selected with respect to the display mode of the indicating means by the changing element selecting means provided in the mode changing means. Further, the second display instruction is output based on each change element selected by the change element selection means by the instruction output means similarly provided in the mode change means. Then, when the display mode of the indicating means to appear after execution of the determination effect is displayed in the first mode by the first mode informing means, at least the changing element of the display color of the indicating means is displayed in the normal display color. A display instruction is output by the correction instruction output means provided in the instruction output means. That is, the mode changing means separately selects (determines) the change elements of the display color, the change timing, or the display pattern with respect to the display mode of the display means, and based on the selected content, issues the second display instruction of the display means. a second display instruction for displaying at least the display color of the changed elements of the display means in the normal display color when the display mode of the display means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means; is configured to output

Suppose that after selecting all of the plurality of change elements in the plurality of display means, that is, the display color, the change timing, and the display pattern, a display instruction regarding the plurality of change elements in the plurality of display means is given by one second display instruction. If it is generated, the second display instructions must be prepared in advance according to all variations of display colors, change timings, and display patterns, and the number of second display instructions may become enormous. Therefore, by separately selecting display instructions for each change element of each display means, the number of second display instructions regarding the display means can be reduced, and an increase in the memory capacity of the game machine can be suppressed. There is

In particular, in the gaming machine adopting the invention of the gaming machine G1, even if the second mode of each display means is selected, when the result of the dynamic display becomes the general identification information, the determination performance is not performed. The display means (second display means) appearing after execution is configured to be displayed (changed) in the first mode (normal display color). In this case, after all of the display color, change timing and display pattern of each indicating means, and further the display (change) content of the indicating means after the determination of the effect are determined, each indication is given by the second display instruction of 1. When outputting a display instruction regarding the means, the second display instruction must be prepared in advance according to the variation of the display mode of all the display means, including the contents to be displayed (changed) by the display means after the effect determination. , the number of second display instructions may increase dramatically. Therefore, the second display instruction is output separately for each of the display color, change timing, display pattern, or display (change) content after determination of the effect of each display means, and based on the second display instruction, the image display means By adjusting the display control of the indicating means, it is possible to reduce the number of second display instructions for each indicating means and suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the game machine.

In addition, among the changing elements of the indicating means, the change in the display color is easier to recognize than the change in the other changing elements (change timing or display pattern). Specifically, for example, in the case of a display pattern, the meaning of the display pattern cannot be understood unless the type of the display pattern is remembered in advance. This is because it can be determined by whether or not the display color has changed from the normal display color (white). Therefore, when the player recognizes that the display color of the indicating means has been changed to the special display color, the change in the display color of the indicating means causes some kind of development effect in the dynamic display. I predict that it will be executed. However, contrary to the prediction, if the development effect is not executed in the dynamic display, the player will distrust the game machine due to the discrepancy in the content of the effect, and the game machine that has the game machine installed. There is a risk that the game will be interrupted due to increased distrust of the place.

Therefore, when the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, even if the display means is changed to the second mode, at least the display color of the display means displayed after the determination effect is changed to the normal display color. configured to display in That is, in the dynamic display in which the general identification information appears, the indicating means after the judgment effect is configured to be displayed in at least the normal display color. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent discrepancies in the content of the production, to provide a comfortable game that does not give the player excessive expectations, and does not make the player feel distrustful. effective.

In gaming machine G5,
The instruction output means is
A gaming machine G6, characterized by comprising start time output means for outputting all second display instructions relating to the display mode of the display means in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the start time output means provided in the instruction output means outputs all the second display instructions regarding the display mode of the display means in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display. As a result, at the start of dynamic display, it is possible to indicate to the image display means the content of the indicating means to be displayed in the dynamic display, and display of each indicating means in the dynamic display can be performed smoothly. has the effect of

In game machines G1 to G6,
The mode changing means is
When it is determined by the determining means that the special identification information will appear in the dynamic display, the indicating means that appears after the determination effect is executed by the determination effect executing means is displayed in the second mode. (for example, S1702 of character color change restriction processing: Yes).

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effects of the game machines G1 to G6, the following effects are produced. That is, when the determining means determines that the special identification information will appear in the dynamic display, the mode maintaining means provided in the mode changing means causes the indication to appear after the determination effect execution means executes the determination effect. A means is displayed in a second manner. As a result, when the special identification information appears, the display of the display means collectively set at the beginning is maintained in the second mode, and the special identification information appears and a predetermined game value can be awarded. There is an effect that it is possible to congratulate the person and enhance the interest of the game.

<H group: red for character display and red for hold display>
Acquisition means (for example, the first ball entrance 64) for acquiring starting information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
determination means (for example, main controller 110) for determining based on the starting information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic display executing means (for example, dynamic display of identification information (for example, variation effect of the third pattern) for executing dynamic display of identification information (for example, third pattern display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means (for example, a display controller 114);
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means, when special identification information (for example, "jackpot display"), which is predetermined identification information, appears, a predetermined game is displayed to the player. In gaming machines that add value,
a storage means (for example, execution information storage area 223i) for storing the start information acquired by the acquisition means;
Based on the starting information stored in the storage means, the special identification information is displayed in the dynamic display, or general identification information different from the special identification information (for example, "failure display") is displayed. Determination means (for example, MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113) for determining whether to appear;
In the image display means, a plurality of display means displayed with a predetermined relationship (for example, character display Se1 during reach occurrence, character display Se2 during reach, fixed phrase character display Se3, and pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 )and,
Based on the determination result of the determining means, the display mode of the indicating means is changed from a predetermined first mode (eg, "white") to a second mode (eg, "red") different from the first mode. Display mode changing means (for example, character color lottery counter 223f),
a plurality of changing means (for example, a character color change table 222h) for changing the display mode of a plurality of the indicating means to the second mode when the indicating means is changed to the second mode by the indicating mode changing means;
display erasing means for erasing the indicating means after a predetermined period of time after displaying the indicating means;
stored symbol display means (eg, execution symbol display area Db0) for displaying symbols (eg, execution symbols) based on the starting information stored in the storage means;
Based on the judgment result of the judgment means, the display mode of the pattern displayed by the memory pattern display means is changed from a predetermined first pattern mode (for example, "white") to a second pattern mode different from the first pattern mode. A pattern mode changing means (for example, "pending change notice") that changes to a pattern mode (for example, "red"),
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, execution of a determination effect for executing a determination effect (for example, a "demonstration" of a variable element of "super reach") to determine whether the special identification information is to be displayed or the general identification information is to be displayed. a means (e.g., a “super reach” variable); and
display state means for setting the pattern to a display state at the start of the dynamic display;
non-display state means for switching to a non-display state the symbols that are in a display state by the display state means when the determination effect by the determination effect execution means is executed;
a re-display state means for switching back to a display state the symbols that are in a non-display state by the non-display state means when the determination effect by the determination effect execution means ends,
The display mode changing means is
When the display mode of the indicating means is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing means, and when the determination means determines that the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, the determination effect a first mode notification means (for example, a fixed phrase normal command for display) that displays the display means that appears after the execution of the determination effect by the execution means in the first mode,
The pattern mode changing means is
In a situation where the display mode of the pattern is displayed in the second pattern mode by the pattern mode changing means, when the determination means determines that the general identification information will appear in the dynamic display, the After the pattern in the second pattern mode is hidden by the non-display state means, when the pattern is brought back to the display state by the re-display state means, the pattern is displayed in the second pattern mode. A gaming machine H0 characterized by comprising 2-symbol mode continuation means.

According to the gaming machine H0, the obtaining means obtains the starting information when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the determining means makes a determination based on the starting information obtained by the obtaining means. The dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of the identification information on the image display means based on the determination result by the determination means. When special identification information, which is predetermined identification information, appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. Further, the starting information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means. Here, based on the starting information stored in the storage means, the determination means determines whether the special identification information should be displayed in the dynamic display or the general identification information different from the special identification information should be displayed. Also, in the image display means, a plurality of indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other are displayed. Then, based on the determination result of the determining means, the display mode of the indicating means is changed from the predetermined first mode to a second mode different from the first mode by the indicating mode changing means. Further, when the indicating means is changed to the second mode by the indicating mode changing means, the display mode of the plurality of indicating means is changed to the second mode by the plural changing means. Further, the indicating means is erased by the indicating erasing means after a predetermined period of time after displaying the indicating means. Here, the memory pattern display means displays a pattern based on the starting information stored in the storage means, and the pattern mode changing means changes the pattern displayed by the memory pattern display means based on the judgment result of the judgment means. The display mode is changed from a predetermined first design mode to a second design mode different from the first design mode. Further, determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means executes a determination effect for whether the special identification information is to be displayed or the general identification information is to be displayed in the dynamic display. Then, when the dynamic display is started, the symbols are put into the display state by the display state means, and when the determination effect by the determination effect execution means is executed, the symbols set in the display state by the display state means are not displayed. The state means switches to the non-display state. Further, when the determination effect by the determination effect executing means is finished, the symbols which are in the non-display state by the non-display state means are switched to the display state again by the re-display state means. Here, when the display mode of the display means is changed to the second mode by the plurality of change means, and the determination means determines that the general identification information will appear in the dynamic display, the display mode change means is provided with: The indicator means that appears after execution of the determination effect by the determination effect execution means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means. Further, in a situation where the pattern display mode is displayed in the second pattern mode by the pattern mode changing means, when the determination means determines that the general identification information is to be displayed in the dynamic display, the non-display state means After the pattern of the second pattern mode is put into the non-display state, when the pattern is put into the display state again by the re-display state means, the pattern is displayed in the second pattern mode by the second mode continuation means.

Conventionally, while displaying a pattern based on starting information stored in a storage means, the display mode of the pattern is changed from a predetermined first pattern mode to a second pattern depending on whether or not special identification information appears. It is configured to be changeable in a mode, and is configured to suggest to the player whether or not the special identification information will appear due to the change.

Here, the pattern is displayed continuously during execution of the dynamic display, so that the display mode of the pattern clearly indicates the degree of expectation for the appearance of the special identification information in the dynamic display being executed. be.

That is, by continuously displaying the above symbols during execution of the dynamic display, the player can immediately confirm the contents when he/she wants to confirm them. is suitable as an indication of Therefore, for example, when the pattern changes, the player can roughly predict the expected degree of appearance of the special identification information in the dynamic display being executed based on the change, and can perform the dynamic display. The expected degree of appearance of the special identification information by other effects such as each additionally appearing indicating means is additionally converted into the expected degree of appearance of the special identification information by the above-mentioned pattern, and the special A game is played by predicting the expected degree of appearance of the identification information.

However, even if the above symbols are erased (become invisible) due to the duplication (execution) of some kind of effect, they are immediately redisplayed as soon as the effect ends, and the redisplayed pattern is displayed again. The display mode should be the same as before erasing (before becoming invisible). If the re-displayed pattern is changed from before erasing (before being invisible), the player can make an additional payment based on the change in the pattern because the pattern to be checked at any time has been changed from before erasing. I predict that some kind of production will be executed in Contrary to the prediction, however, if the dynamic display ends without the additional effect being executed, the player will become distrustful of the gaming machine due to the discrepancies in the content of the effect, and the game machine There is a risk that the game will be interrupted due to distrust of the game arcade where the game is installed.

Therefore, even if no additional effect is executed, the above symbols must be displayed in the same manner as before erasing when they are redisplayed after being erased. Specifically, if the symbols were displayed in the first symbol mode before being erased, they are displayed in the first symbol mode even after being re-displayed. Further, when the pattern was displayed in the second pattern mode before erasing, it is displayed in the second pattern mode even after being re-displayed.

On the other hand, the display means appearing in the dynamic display is an advance notice display that is displayed at a predetermined timing in the dynamic display, and is erased after a predetermined period of time after being displayed at the predetermined timing. In other words, even if the player wants to confirm (rub over) the content of the display means, it cannot be confirmed after a predetermined period of time from the above timing, and after the predetermined period of time, judgment is made only by the player's memory. be.

However, the indicating means is suitable for suggesting that there is a possibility that, when additionally appearing in the dynamic display, there is a possibility of exerting some effect on the performance performed at the timing immediately after that. It has a function. In particular, when the indicating means is displayed in a second mode different from the predetermined first mode, the development suggesting function is emphasized more. Therefore, for example, when the indicating means appears, the player converts the display contents of the indicating means to the symbols that are continuously displayed to calculate the expected degree of appearance of the special identification information in the dynamic display. is determined, and it is predicted that some kind of production will be additionally performed by the development suggesting function of the indicating means. However, after displaying the indicating means in the second mode, if the dynamic display ends without the additional effect being executed, the player will become distrustful of the gaming machine due to the discrepancies in the content of the effect. At the same time, there is a risk that the game machine will be distrustful of the game arcade where the game machine is installed, and the game will be interrupted.

Therefore, in the case of redisplaying the continuously displayed symbols after execution of the judgment effect, even if the effect is not additionally executed, when redisplaying the pattern, the same display as before erasing is performed. configured to be displayed in a manner. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent discrepancies in the content of the production, to provide a comfortable game that does not give the player excessive expectations, and does not make the player feel distrustful. effective. In addition, the display means for fragmentary display is configured not to display in the second mode when additional effects are not executed or game values are not given to the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent discrepancies in the content of the production, to provide a comfortable game that does not give the player excessive expectations, and does not make the player feel distrustful. effective.

In addition, "a plurality of display means displayed with a predetermined relationship with each other" means, for example, when the display means have the same attribute or correspond to the same type, they are displayed at the same timing. In the case of appearing, or even in the case of appearing with a time lag, when one appears, the other also appears. A relationship that is conceptually organically entwined (closely related). Specifically, for example, a notice display displayed in the same display area (character display Se1 when reach occurs and fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), or a notice display (strong character notice) displayed in different modes at the same timing etc.), a notice display in which another notice appears after one notice appears (step-up notice, character display Se1 when reach occurs, and fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), and the same effect is executed multiple times. Examples include advance notices (variable elements of “pseudo-ren”, etc.).

In gaming machine H0,
Main control means (for example, main control device 110 or (and) sound lamp control device 113) that performs main control of the game, and sub-control means that controls the image display means based on display instructions from the main control means (For example, a display control device 114), and
The sub control means is
an image drawing means (for example, an image controller 237) for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means;
First display determination means (for example, command determination processing (S2022 ) of S2108),
First definition information (for example, a variable display data table) which is provided for each of the first display types and defines, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the first display type 232a1), a first prescribed information storage means (for example, data table storage area 232a);
a first selection means (for example, a display data table buffer 233b) for selecting the first definition information corresponding to the first display type determined by the first display determination means from the first definition information storage means;
Second display determination means (for example, command determination processing (S2022) for determining the display means to be displayed on the image display means based on a second display instruction (for example, red character command for display) from the main control means S2112) of
A second prescribed information (a second specified information ( For example, second prescribed information storage means (for example, data table storage area 232a) for storing additional data table for characters 232a2);
a second selecting means (for example, character-based command processing (S2113)) for selecting the second defining information corresponding to the indicating means determined by the second display determining means from the second defining information storing means;
Third display determination means (eg, command determination processing (S2022 ) of S2110) and
Third prescribed information (for example, Third specified information storage means (for example, data table storage area 232a) for storing additional data table 232a2) for holding;
a third selection means (e.g., look-ahead command processing (S2111)) for selecting the third definition information for the pattern determined by the third display determination means from the third definition information storage means;
The sub control means is
updating means (for example, pointer 233e) that is updated every time elapses;
Each time the updating means is updated, the first defining information selected by the first selecting means, the second defining information selected by the second selecting means, and the third defining information selected by the third selecting means drawing information specifying means (for example, S2308 of the display setting process (S2023)) for specifying drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated updating means based on the third prescribed information;
Drawing instruction information generating means (for example, , S2501 of the drawing process (S2026),
The game machine H1 is characterized in that the image drawing means draws an image for one screen based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means.

According to the gaming machine H1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the main control means performs the main control of the game, and the sub-control means controls the image display means based on the display instruction from the main control means. An image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means is drawn by the image drawing means provided in the sub control means. Then, the first display type to be displayed is determined by the first display determination means based on the first display instruction from the main control means. Further, the first specification information storage means provides for each first display type and defines drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the first display type for each screen. Information is stored. Here, the first specification information corresponding to the first display type determined by the first display determination means is selected from the first specification information storage means by the first selection means. Further, the second display determination means determines the display means to be displayed on the image display means based on the second display instruction from the main control means. Second definition information that defines, for each screen, drawing information that is provided for a plurality of display means and indicates information necessary for drawing an image to be changed (added) and displayed by the plurality of display means. is stored by the second stipulation information storage means. Here, the second selection means selects the second definition information for the display means determined by the second display determination means from the second definition information storage means. Further, the pattern to be displayed on the image display means is determined by the third display determination means based on the third display instruction from the main control means. The third prescribed information defines, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be changed (added) and displayed in the plurality of patterns provided for the plurality of patterns. 3 stored by the stipulation information storage means. Here, the third specifying information for the pattern determined by the third display determining means is selected from the third specifying information storage means by the third selecting means. Then, the update means provided in the sub control means is updated every time the time elapses, and each time the update means is updated, the first prescribed information selected by the first selection means and the information selected by the second selection means Drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated update means is specified by the drawing information specifying means based on the second specifying information and the third specifying information selected by the third selecting means. The drawing instruction information generating means generates drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the drawing information for one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means. be done. An image for one screen is drawn by the image drawing means based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means.

As a result, when displaying each image in response to the first display instruction, second display instruction or third display instruction from the main control means, the first stipulation information, the second stipulation information or the third stipulation information for each effect unit is displayed. is selected from the first specified information storage means, the second specified information storage means, or the third specified information storage means, the display mode of the image display means can be easily changed (added) and displayed. Further, by configuring to select the second stipulated information for a plurality of indicating means and configuring to select the 3rd stipulated information for a plurality of suggesting means, the image is composed of a plurality of images. Since display control can be collectively performed for effects, display control can be managed in units of related effects. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means. In addition, the number of selected second and third stipulated information is only the number of types of effects (notice), compared to the case where the second and third stipulated information are selected for each change element of the effect (notice). It is possible to reduce the number of the second regulation information and the third regulation information, without increasing the capacity of the second regulation information and the third regulation information in accordance with the increase in the number of change elements of the performance (advance notice). There is an effect that the cost of the machine can be suppressed. Further, when generating the drawing instruction information in the drawing process, the number of the first stipulation information, the second stipulation information, and the third stipulation information to be referred to may be only the number of effects (advance notice), so when the drawing instruction information is generated, There is an effect that the processing load can be reduced. Furthermore, in selecting the second stipulated information and the third stipulated information, by clearly separating the second stipulated information regarding the indicating means and the third stipulated information regarding the pattern, it is possible to reproduce the second pattern mode as it is. Display control can be performed by clearly dividing the symbols that can be displayed and the marking means that must not be displayed again in the second mode. In particular, when designing and developing a game machine, when setting the display mode of each effect, it is necessary to select display means that must not be displayed in the second mode when re-displayed, or symbols that can be displayed in the second mode when re-displayed. There is an effect that it becomes easy to design the configuration of each regulation information while grasping whether it is the third regulation information related to it, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of bugs such as discrepancies in the contents of the presentation.

In gaming machine H1,
The first selection means is
Based on the first display instruction, the dynamic specifying information (for example, the variable display data table 232a1) specifying the drawing information of the entire dynamic display is selected from the first specifying information storage means. Prescribed information selection means (for example, display data table buffer 233b),
The second selection means is
Batch defining information (for example, text color additional data table 232a2) defining drawing information when the display mode of the indicating means is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing means based on the second display instruction. collective definition information selection means (for example, additional data table buffer 233c) for selecting from the second definition information storage means;
First mode defining information defining drawing information when the display mode of the indicating means displayed after the determination effect is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notifying means based on the second display instruction. (for example, character correction additional data table 232a2) is provided from the second specification information storage means (for example, additional data table buffer 233c). Game machine H2 to play.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic specification information selecting means provided in the first selection means selects the dynamic specification information specifying the drawing information of the entire dynamic display from the first specification information storage means based on the first display instruction. is selected. In addition, by collectively specifying information storage means provided in the second selecting means, based on the second display instruction, collectively specifying the drawing information when the display mode of the indicating means is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing means. Prescribing information is selected from the second prescribing information storage means. Also, the first mode defining information selection means provided in the second selection means also draws when the display mode of the indicating means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means based on the second display instruction. First mode defining information defining information is selected from the second defining information storage means. That is, when the general identification information that does not give a predetermined game value appears in the dynamic display, even if the display mode of the plurality of display means having a predetermined relationship with each other is changed to the second mode, the dynamic display is performed. The display mode of the indicating means displayed after execution of the target display determination effect is displayed in the first mode, not the second mode. In addition, when a plurality of indicating means are collectively set and changed (added), and the indicating means after the judgment effect is changed to the first mode and displayed, the drawing information when the indicating means are collectively set is The specified batch specifying information is selected, and the first mode specifying information specifying the drawing information when the indicating means after the judgment effect is displayed in the first mode is selected.

As in the past, when indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other appear at a plurality of locations (timing or display area; the same shall apply hereinafter) of dynamic display, the indicating means If it is configured to set (lottery) whether to display in the first mode or in a second mode different from the first mode, setting processing (lottery processing) for the appearing portion is required and control becomes complicated and the processing load increases. Also, in the dynamic display, if the indicator that appears earlier is displayed in the second mode and then the indicator that appears later is displayed in the first mode, the indicator having a predetermined relevance Because it is a means, it becomes an expression in which the degree of expectation for the emergence of the special identification information is lowered (hereinafter referred to as "downward expression"). Therefore, there is a possibility that the player, who has been excited by the appearance of the second mode in the previous display means, will lose interest when he witnesses the above-mentioned descent expression in the subsequent display means.

Therefore, in the dynamic display, the setting (lottery) of the display modes of the display means having a predetermined relationship with each other is performed collectively, and the second mode displayed by one display means is followed by the other display means as well. By configuring to make it appear, there is no need to perform setting processing for each appearing location, and the processing load can be reduced. In addition, when the indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other appear in the second mode even once, the indicating means appearing after that are also configured to appear in accordance with the second mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game by eliminating the phenomenon of the occurrence of the stagnation expression in the indicating means.

However, when a plurality of display means having a predetermined relationship with each other are collectively set in the second mode, for example, in a dynamic display in which a display result of general identification information to which a predetermined game value is not given appears, the dynamic In a state where the display determination effect is performed and the general identification information is displayed, the indicating means may be displayed in the second mode. Since the second mode of the indicating means is a mode that is changed from the predetermined first mode based on the judgment result of the judging means, it has a development suggesting function that suggests that the current rendering situation can be changed based on the change. have On the other hand, the indicating means displayed after the determination effect has a status notification function of notifying the content of the current effect situation, which is the result of the determination effect. Therefore, if the indicating means after execution of the judgment effect is displayed in the second mode, the player will feel that the development suggesting function is superior to the situation reporting function of the indicating means because the indicating means is displayed in the second mode. , it is predicted that the dynamic display will not be determined by the general identification information as it is, and that some development effect will be executed and the general identification information will be changed to the special identification information. However, contrary to the prediction, the dynamic display is determined as the general identification information to which the predetermined game value is not assigned. In such a case, the game machine may be distrustful of the game arcade where the game machine is installed, and the game may be interrupted.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine H2, when the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, even if the display means is collectively set to the second mode, the display means displayed after the determination effect is displayed in the second mode. Configure so as not to reveal the mode. That is, in the dynamic display of the general identification information, the indicating means after the judgment effect is displayed in the first mode. based on the second display instruction, collectively defining information defining drawing information when the display mode of the indicating means is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing means is selected from the second defining information storage means; Based on the second display instruction, drawing information when the display mode of the indicating means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means is selected by the first mode specifying information selection means provided in the second selection means. The defined first mode defining information is selected from the second defining information storage means. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the content of the performance, to provide a comfortable game that does not give the player excessive expectations, and does not make the player feel distrustful. effective. In addition, in the case of changing (adding) a plurality of indicating means and further changing and displaying the indicating means after the determination effect to the first mode, batch definition information that defines the drawing information when the indicating means is changed. and selecting the first mode stipulating information that defines the drawing information when the indicating means after the judgment production is displayed in the first mode, the various display modes of the plurality of indicating means can be easily changed. (Add) to display. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

In gaming machine H2,
The indicator means
A first display means (for example, character display Se1 during reach occurrence or character display Se2 during reach) that appears before or during execution of the determination effect;
A second display means (for example, fixed phrase character display Se3) that appears after the execution of the determination effect,
The mode changing means is
a second mode continuation means for displaying the first display means and the second display notification means in the second mode when the determination means determines that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display; ,
When the determination means determines that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the first display means is displayed in the second mode, and the second display is performed by the first mode notification means. A gaming machine H3 characterized by comprising a second mode changing means for displaying the means in the first mode.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H2, the following effects are produced. That is, the indicating means is provided with a first indicating means that appears before or during execution of the determination performance and a second indicating means that appears after the determination performance is performed. Further, when the determination means determines that the special identification information will appear in the dynamic display, the second mode continuation means provided in the mode change means causes the first display means and the second display means to be displayed in the second mode. is displayed. On the other hand, when the determining means determines that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the first indicating means is displayed in the second mode by the second mode changing means provided in the mode changing means, The second display means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means. As a result, when the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, both the first display means and the second display means are changed to the second mode, and when the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the second mode is displayed. The first indicating means is displayed in the second mode, while the second indicating means is configured to be displayed in the first mode. That is, in the dynamic display in which the display result of the special identification information appears when the indicating means has been changed to the second mode, the second indicating means after the determination effect is displayed in the second mode, and the general identification In the dynamic display in which the display result of the information appears, the second display means after the judgment effect is displayed in the first mode. By configuring in this way, the second indicating means of the second mode does not appear after the general identification information appears, and since it does not suggest that the presentation will develop, inconsistencies in the content of presentation do not occur. Thus, there is an effect that a comfortable game can be provided in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel a sense of distrust.

In gaming machine H3,
The first indication means is
1. In the dynamic display of 1, at least a plurality of appearances,
The multiple change means are
A gaming machine H4, characterized by comprising a first indication collective means for collectively setting the display mode of at least the first indication means.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in one dynamic display, at least a plurality of the first indicating means are displayed, and the display mode of at least the first indicating means is collectively displayed by the first indicating collective means provided in the plural changing means. configured to be set. As a result, it is possible to collectively set a plurality of first indicating means appearing in one dynamic display, so that the control load can be reduced compared to control in which setting processing is performed for each first indicating means. It has the effect of being able to In particular, the more the number of appearing positions of the first indicating means capable of executing the second mode in the dynamic display (for example, 5 or more places), the more the collective setting works, and the control load is remarkably reduced. It is possible to

In any one of game machines H2 to H4,
The mode changing means is
Color changing means (e.g., character color lottery) for changing the display color of the indicating means from a predetermined normal display color (e.g., "white") to a special display color (e.g., "red") different from the normal display color a counter 223f);
The timing at which the display color of the indicating means is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color changing means (for example, the timing to display the character display Se1 at the time of reaching occurrence, or the timing to display the character display Se2 during reaching Timing selection means (color change timing counter 223g) for selecting timing),
The multiple change means are
collective change means for collectively changing the display color of the display means displayed after the timing selected by the timing selection means to the special display color;
The first mode notification means is
After the timing at which the display color of the indicating means is changed to the special display color by the batch changing means, the display color of the indicating means that appears after the execution of the judgment effect is displayed in the normal display color. A gaming machine H5 characterized by comprising color display means.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of the game machines H2 to H4, the following effects are produced. That is, the display color of the indicating means is changed from a predetermined normal display color to a special display color different from the normal display color by the color changing means provided in the mode changing means. Also, timing selection means provided in the mode change means selects the timing at which the color change means changes the display color of the indicating means from the normal display color to the special display color. Then, the display color of the indicating means displayed after the timing selected by the timing selecting means is changed to the special display color by the batch changing means provided in the plurality of changing means. Here, after the timing when the display color of the indicating means is changed to the special display color by the batch changing means, the display color of the indicating means appearing after execution of the judgment effect is provided in the first mode notification means. It is displayed in the normal display color by the normal color display means. As a result, regarding the display modes of the indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other, the display mode of the indicating means is set based on a plurality of change factors such as the display color and the display timing, and variations in the display mode of the indicating means are achieved. is increased, and when the general identification information appears in the display means after the judgment production, it is possible to change (correct) the batch setting content and display it in the normal display color (first mode). Therefore, while increasing the interest of the game by diversifying the effects, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the effects, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel distrust. It has the effect of being able to

In gaming machine H5,
The mode changing means is
Changed element selection means (for example, character mode setting processing (S1417)) for separately selecting changed elements of the display color, change timing, or display pattern with respect to the display mode of the display means;
an instruction output means (for example, command output processing (S1102)) for outputting the second display instruction based on each change element selected by the change element selection means;
The instruction output means is
When the display mode of the indicating means that appears after the execution of the determination effect is displayed in the first mode by the first mode informing means, at least the changing element of the display color of the indicating means is displayed in the normal display color. a correction instruction output means for outputting the second display instruction to be displayed in the game machine H6.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the changing elements of the display color, change timing, or display pattern are separately selected with respect to the display mode of the indicating means by the changing element selecting means provided in the mode changing means. Further, the second display instruction is output based on each change element selected by the change element selection means by the instruction output means similarly provided in the mode change means. Then, when the display mode of the indicating means to appear after execution of the determination effect is displayed in the first mode by the first mode informing means, at least the changing element of the display color of the indicating means is displayed in the normal display color. A display instruction is output by the correction instruction output means provided in the instruction output means. That is, the mode changing means separately selects (determines) the change elements of the display color, the change timing, or the display pattern with respect to the display mode of the display means, and based on the selected content, issues the second display instruction of the display means. a second display instruction for displaying at least the display color of the changed elements of the display means in the normal display color when the display mode of the display means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means; is configured to output

Suppose that after selecting all of the plurality of change elements in the plurality of display means, that is, the display color, the change timing, and the display pattern, a display instruction regarding the plurality of change elements in the plurality of display means is given by one second display instruction. If it is generated, the second display instructions must be prepared in advance according to all variations of display colors, change timings, and display patterns, and the number of second display instructions may become enormous. Therefore, by separately selecting display instructions for each change element of each display means, the number of second display instructions regarding the display means can be reduced, and an increase in the memory capacity of the game machine can be suppressed. There is

In particular, in the gaming machine employing the invention of the gaming machine H2, even if the second mode of each display means is selected, when the result of the dynamic display becomes the general identification information, the determination performance is not performed. The display means (second display means) appearing after execution is configured to be displayed (changed) in the first mode (normal display color). In this case, after all of the display color, change timing and display pattern of each indicating means, and further the display (change) content of the indicating means after the determination of the effect are determined, each indication is given by the second display instruction of 1. When outputting a display instruction regarding the means, the second display instruction must be prepared in advance according to the variation of the display mode of all the display means, including the contents to be displayed (changed) by the display means after the effect determination. , the number of second display instructions may increase dramatically. Therefore, the second display instruction is output separately for each of the display color, change timing, display pattern, or display (change) content after determination of the effect of each display means, and based on the second display instruction, the image display means By adjusting the display control of the indicating means, it is possible to reduce the number of second display instructions for each indicating means and suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the game machine.

In addition, among the changing elements of the indicating means, the change in the display color is easier to recognize than the change in the other changing elements (change timing or display pattern). Specifically, for example, in the case of a display pattern, the meaning of the display pattern cannot be understood unless the type of the display pattern is remembered in advance. This is because it can be determined by whether or not the display color has changed from the normal display color (white). Therefore, when the player recognizes that the display color of the indicating means has been changed to the special display color, the change in the display color of the indicating means causes some kind of development effect in the dynamic display. I predict that it will be executed. However, contrary to the prediction, if the development effect is not executed in the dynamic display, the player will distrust the game machine due to the discrepancy in the content of the effect, and the game machine that has the game machine installed. There is a possibility that the game will be interrupted due to increased distrust of the place.

Therefore, when the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, even if the display means is changed to the second mode, at least the display color of the display means displayed after the determination effect is changed to the normal display color. configured to display in That is, in the dynamic display in which the general identification information appears, the indicating means after the judgment effect is configured to be displayed in at least the normal display color. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent discrepancies in the content of the production, to provide a comfortable game that does not give the player excessive expectations, and does not make the player feel distrustful. effective.

In gaming machine H6,
The instruction output means is
A gaming machine H7, characterized by comprising start time output means for outputting all second display instructions relating to the display mode of the display means in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effects of the game machine H6, the following effects are produced. That is, the start time output means provided in the instruction output means outputs all the second display instructions regarding the display mode of the display means in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display. As a result, at the start of dynamic display, it is possible to indicate to the image display means the content of the indicating means to be displayed in the dynamic display, and display of each indicating means in the dynamic display can be performed smoothly. has the effect of

In game machines H2 to H7,
The mode changing means is
When it is determined by the determining means that the special identification information will appear in the dynamic display, the indicating means that appears after the determination effect is executed by the determination effect executing means is displayed in the second mode. (for example, S1702 of character color change restriction processing: Yes).

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effects of the game machines H2 to H7, the following effects are produced. That is, when the determining means determines that the special identification information will appear in the dynamic display, the mode maintaining means provided in the mode changing means causes the indication to appear after the determination effect execution means executes the determination effect. A means is displayed in a second manner. As a result, when the special identification information appears, the display of the display means collectively set at the beginning is maintained in the second mode, and the special identification information appears and a predetermined game value can be awarded. There is an effect that it is possible to congratulate the person and enhance the interest of the game.

<Group I: Expectation performance multiple times in a predetermined period, execution of expectation performance multiple times when advantageous situation occurs, execution of expectation performance less than multiple times when advantageous situation does not occur>
Acquisition means (for example, the first ball entrance 64) for acquiring starting information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) for determining based on the starting information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic display executing means (for example, dynamic display of identification information (for example, third pattern variation effect) for executing dynamic display of identification information (for example, third pattern display device 81) based on the determination result by the determining means (for example, a display control device 114),
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means, when special identification information (for example, "jackpot display"), which is predetermined identification information, appears, a predetermined game is displayed to the player. In gaming machines that add value,
storage means (for example, execution information storage area 223i) for storing the identification information acquired by the acquisition means;
Judgment means (for example, variable effect processing (S1109)) for judging whether or not the player is in an advantageous situation based on the starting information stored in the storage means;
Based on the judgment result by the judgment means, in a predetermined period (for example, within one variable production), a suggestive effect (for example, character display Se1 when ready-to-win occurs, Chinese text to reach) Suggestive effect execution means (for example, "super reach" effect mode) for executing the character display Se2, fixed phrase character display Se3, and pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4) for a predetermined prescribed number of times;
A mode of the suggestive effect executed by the suggestive effect executing means, which is a predetermined normal suggestive mode (for example, character display of "white");
A mode of the suggestive effect executed by the suggestive effect execution means, which is an expected level increasing mode (for example, character display of "red") suggesting that the degree of expectation for the advantageous situation is higher than that of the normal suggestive mode. and,
rising mode continuous execution means (for example, a character color change table 222h) for continuously executing the expectation level rising mode over at least a plurality of executions of the suggestive effect when the expectation level rising mode appears; , and
The suggestion effect execution means is
When it is determined by the determination means that the advantageous situation will be achieved, the specified number of times execution means (for example, character display Se1 when reach occurs, reach Chinese text) character display Se2 and fixed phrase character display Se3 are all "red");
When the determining means determines that the advantageous situation does not occur, the expected level increasing mode by the increasing mode continuous execution means is performed a predetermined number of times less than the specified number of times. Display Se1 and reach-in-character display Se2 are “red”),
When the expectation degree increasing mode by the increasing mode continuous execution means is performed by the less than specified execution means for the predetermined number of times less than the specified number of times, the suggestive effect is executed after a specific timing after the predetermined number of times. 3, further comprising: expectation degree execution regulation means (for example, the fixed phrase character display Se3 is "white") for regulating the execution of the expectation degree increasing mode.

According to the gaming machine I0, the acquisition means acquires the start information when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the start information acquired by the acquisition means. The dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of the identification information on the image display means based on the determination result by the determination means. When special identification information, which is predetermined identification information, appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. Further, the starting information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means. Here, based on the starting information stored in the storage means, the judgment means judges whether or not the player is in an advantageous situation. Here, based on the judgment result of the judgment means, the suggestive effect execution means executes the suggestive effect suggesting that there is a possibility of an advantageous situation in a predetermined period of time for a prescribed number of times. Also, a predetermined normal suggestive mode is executed by the suggestive effect executing means as one mode of the suggestive effect. Further, an expectation increase mode, which suggests that the degree of expectation for an advantageous situation is higher than the normal suggestion mode, is executed by the suggestion performance executing means as one mode of the suggestion performance. When the expectation level increasing mode is executed, the expectation level increasing mode is continuously executed over at least a plurality of executions of the suggestive effect by the increasing mode continuous execution means. Here, when it is determined by the determination means that the situation is advantageous, the specified number of times execution means provided in the suggestive effect execution means executes the expectation degree increasing mode by the rising mode continuous execution means for a specified number of times. Further, when it is determined by the determining means that the situation is not favorable, the less-than-specified execution means provided in the suggestive effect execution means executes the expectation degree increasing mode by the rising mode continuous execution means a predetermined number of times less than the specified number of times. . When the less-than-specified execution means executes the expectation level increasing mode by the rising mode continuous execution means a predetermined number of times less than the specified number of times, the expectation level execution restricting means suggests execution after a specific timing after the predetermined number of times. Execution of the degree-of-expectation increasing mode is regulated in the presentation.

Conventionally, based on the determination result of a determination means for determining whether or not the situation will be advantageous for the player, a suggestive effect is executed a plurality of times in a predetermined period to suggest whether or not the situation will be advantageous. For each suggestive performance, it is set (lottery) whether to execute the suggestive performance in the normal suggestive mode or to execute the expectation degree increasing mode suggesting that the expectation degree of being in an advantageous situation is higher than the normal suggestive mode. In this case, setting processing (lottery processing) is required for the number of executions of the suggestive effect, which may complicate the control and increase the processing load. Also, in the suggestive effects that are executed multiple times during a predetermined period, if the suggestive effects that appear first are executed in the mode of increasing expectations, and then the suggestive effects that are executed thereafter are executed in the normal mode of suggestion. , it becomes an expression in which the degree of expectation for becoming an advantageous situation is lowered (hereinafter referred to as "downward expression"). Therefore, there is a risk that the player, who has been excited by the execution of the expectation-increasing mode in the previous suggestive effect, may lose interest by witnessing the above-mentioned descent expression in the later suggestive effect. .

Therefore, in the suggestive effect that is executed a plurality of times in a predetermined period, when the expectation level increasing mode is executed, the expectation level increasing mode is continued in the suggestive effect a plurality of times. This eliminates the need to perform the setting process in each case, thereby reducing the processing load. In addition, when the previous suggestive effect is executed in the expectation level rising mode, the suggestive effect to be executed thereafter is configured to continue to execute the expectation level increasing mode, so that the downgrading expression in the suggestive effect is reduced. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game by eliminating the phenomenon that occurs.

However, when the suggestive performance is executed a plurality of times in the expectation level increasing mode, the suggestive performance may be executed in the expectation level increasing mode even in a state where no situation advantageous to the player occurs, for example. Since the expectation rising mode of suggestive performance is changed from the normal performance mode and executed based on the determination result of the determination means, it has a development suggestive function of suggesting that the current performance situation can be changed. On the other hand, the suggestive effect executed in the second half of the predetermined period has a situation notification function of notifying the content of the current effect situation. Therefore, if the suggestive effect to be executed in the latter half of the predetermined period is executed in the expected level increasing mode, the player will not be able to receive the suggested effect from the situation notification function of the suggestive effect as a result of the suggestive effect being executed in the expectation level increasing mode. If the development suggesting function wins and a situation advantageous to the player does not occur, it will not be determined, and it is predicted that some development performance will be executed and the situation will change to a situation advantageous to the player. However, contrary to the prediction, the predetermined period ends without the occurrence of an advantageous situation for the player, and the situation is confirmed without the occurrence of an advantageous situation. In addition, the distrust of the game arcade where the game machine is installed increases, and there is a risk that the game will be interrupted.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine I0, when a situation that is advantageous to the player does not occur, even if the suggestive effect is changed to the expected degree increasing mode, it is executed after a specific timing after the predetermined number of times. It is constituted so as to regulate the execution of the expectation degree increasing mode in the suggestive effect. Therefore, for example, in a state where no situation advantageous to the player occurs, the suggestive effect to be executed after a specific timing after the predetermined number of times is executed in the normal suggestive mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent discrepancies in the content of the production, to provide a comfortable game that does not give the player excessive expectations, and does not make the player feel distrustful. effective.

Note that the "advantageous situation for the player" means, for example, when the special identification information appears in the active display during execution and a predetermined game value can be given, the special identification information is displayed in the dynamic display during standby. appears and a predetermined game value can be awarded, a special effect (for example, a "super reach" effect mode) in which special identification information can be expected to appear can be executed in the dynamic display during execution or standby. case, a first special state (for example, "probability fluctuation state") in which special identification information is more likely to appear than usual, or a second special state in which dynamic display with a shorter dynamic time than usual is likely to be selected (For example, "time reduction state") may occur.

Further, ``regulating the execution of the expectation level increasing mode'' means, for example, the case where the normal suggestion mode different from the expectation level increasing mode is performed, or the suggestion performance itself including the expectation level increasing mode and the normal suggestion mode is not performed. Alternatively, it refers to a case in which the suggestive effect is made difficult for the player to visually recognize.

In gaming machine I0,
The determination means is
As the advantageous situation, it is determined whether the special identification information appears in the dynamic display or general identification information different from the special identification information (for example, "failure display") appears. A game machine I1.

According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determining means determines whether the special identification information should be displayed in the dynamic display or the general identification information different from the special identification information should be displayed as the advantageous situation. As a result, for example, when the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, even if the suggestive effect is changed to the expected level increasing mode, the suggestive effect executed after the specific timing is in the expected level increasing mode. configured to regulate the execution of That is, for example, in the dynamic display in which the general identification information appears, the suggestion effect after the specific timing is configured to be executed in the normal suggestion mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent discrepancies in the content of the production, to provide a comfortable game that does not give the player excessive expectations, and does not make the player feel distrustful. effective.

In gaming machine I0,
The special identification information is
Predetermined first special identification information (for example, "15R normal jackpot") and second special identification information (for example, "15R probability variable jackpot") that can be given a higher game value than the first special identification information death,
The determination means is
The game machine I2 is characterized by determining whether the first special identification information appears in the dynamic display or the second special identification information appears in the dynamic display as the advantageous situation.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the special identification information, it has predetermined first special identification information and second special identification information to which a game value higher than that of the first special identification information can be given. Then, the determination means determines whether the first special identification information or the second special identification information appears in the dynamic display as an advantageous situation. As a result, for example, when the first special identification information appears in the dynamic display, even if the suggestive effect is changed to the expected level increasing mode, the suggestive effect executed after the specific timing has the expected level It is configured to regulate the execution of the ascending mode. That is, for example, in the dynamic display in which the first special identification information appears, the suggestion effect after the specific timing is configured to be executed in the normal suggestion mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent discrepancies in the content of the production, to provide a comfortable game that does not give the player excessive expectations, and does not make the player feel distrustful. effective.

In gaming machine I0,
The determination means is
Determining whether or not information relating to the special identification information is stored in the start information corresponding to the dynamic display to start execution on the image display means among the identification information stored in the storage means. Execution determination means (for example, variation effect processing (S1109));
determining whether or not information relating to the special identification information is stored in the start information corresponding to the dynamic display waiting to be executed in the image display means among the start information stored in the storage means; Standby judgment means for judging (for example, pending display setting process (S1209)),
The suggestion effect execution means is
It is determined by the execution determination means that the information related to the special identification information is not stored in the dynamic display that starts execution on the image display means, and the standby determination means determines that the execution on the image display means is performed. is determined that the information about the special identification information is not stored in the starting information corresponding to the dynamic display for which the Execution of the expectation level increasing mode is performed, and the execution of the expectation level increasing mode is restricted in the suggestion performance executed after the specific timing after the predetermined number of times by the expectation level execution restricting means. Game machine I3.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination means is provided with whether or not information relating to the special identification information is stored in the start information corresponding to the dynamic display to be started by the image display means among the start information stored in the storage means. is determined by the execution determination means. Further, the determining means determines whether or not information relating to the special identification information is stored in the starting information corresponding to the dynamic display that is waiting to be executed on the image display means among the starting information stored in the storage means. It is determined by the provided standby determination means. Then, the execution determination means determines that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display to be executed by the image display means, and the standby determination means makes the image display means wait for execution of the dynamic display. When it is determined that the information related to the special identification information is not stored in the starting information related to Execution of the expectation level regular mode is restricted in the suggestion effect executed after the specific timing after the predetermined number of times by the expectation level execution restricting means. As a result, when the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display which starts execution on the image display means, and when the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display which is waiting for execution on the image display means. In the second, even if the expectation level increasing mode is executed in the suggestive performance, the expectation level increasing mode is not executed in the suggestive performance executed after the specific timing. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the presentation, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations, and in which the player does not feel a sense of distrust. has the effect of

In any of gaming machines I0 to I3,
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, a decision to execute a judgment effect (for example, "exciting effect" of the variable element of "super reach") for determining whether the special identification information is displayed or the general identification information is displayed Equipped with production execution means (for example, variable elements of "super reach"),
The game machine I4 is characterized in that the specific timing is a timing at which the special identification information or the general identification information appears in the determination effect.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effects of the game machines I0 to I3, the following effects are produced. That is, the determination effect executing means provided in the dynamic display executing means executes the determination effect of whether the special identification information should be displayed or the general identification information should be displayed in the dynamic display. Then, the timing at which the special identification information or the general identification information appears in the determination effect is defined as the specific timing. As a result, when the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, in the suggestive effect before the special identification information or the general identification information appears in the judgment effect, the less than specified execution means continues the mode of raising expectations. In the suggestion performance after the special identification information or the general identification information appears in the judgment performance, the execution of the expectation level increasing mode is restricted by the expectation level execution restricting means. Therefore, for example, in the dynamic display in which the display result of the general identification information appears, the suggestion effect after the determination effect is executed in the normal suggestion mode. By configuring in this way, after the appearance of the general identification information, the suggestive production of the mode of raising the expectation level is not executed, and it does not suggest that the production will develop, so that the production content will not be inconsistent. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel a sense of distrust.

In any of gaming machines I0 to I4,
A main control means (for example, the main control device 110 or (and) the sound lamp control device 113) that performs the main control of the game,
a sub-control means (for example, a display control device 114) that controls the image display means based on a display instruction from the main control means;
The sub control means is
an image drawing means (for example, an image controller 237) for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means;
First display determination means (for example, command determination processing (S2022 ) of S2108),
First definition information (for example, a variable display data table) which is provided for each of the first display types and defines, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the first display type 232a1), a first prescribed information storage means (for example, data table storage area 232a);
a first selection means (for example, a display data table buffer 233b) for selecting the first definition information corresponding to the first display type determined by the first display determination means from the first definition information storage means;
a plurality of change elements (e.g., character pattern, display color, change timing, or correction content of display color) that determine the display mode of the suggestive effect displayed on the image display means;
Based on the second display instruction (for example, red character command for display) from the main control means, the image indicated by the first prescribed information selected by the first selection means is changed (added) and displayed. a second display determination means (for example, S2112 of the command determination process (S2022)) for determining the change element of the suggestive effect;
Second prescribed information (for example, a second specified information storage means (for example, data table storage area 232a) for storing character color additional data table 232a2);
a second selecting means (for example, an additional data table buffer 233c) for selecting the second defining information corresponding to the change element determined by the second display determining means from the second defining information storage means; ,
The sub control means is
updating means (for example, pointer 233e) that is updated every time elapses;
Each time the updating means is updated, the update is updated based on the first stipulation information selected by the first selection means and the second stipulation information selected by the second selection means. Drawing information specifying means (for example, S2308 of the display setting process (S2023)) for specifying drawing information for one screen corresponding to the means;
Drawing for generating drawing instruction information (for example, a drawing list) for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the drawing information for one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means An instruction information generating means (for example, S2501 of the drawing process (S2026)),
The game machine I5 is characterized in that the image drawing means draws an image for one screen based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effects of the game machines I0 to I4, the following effects are produced. That is, the main control means performs the main control of the game, and the sub-control means controls the image display means based on the display instruction from the main control means. An image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means is drawn by the image drawing means provided in the sub control means. Then, the first display type to be displayed is determined by the first display determination means based on the first display instruction from the main control means. Further, the first definition information is provided for each first display type and defines, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the first display type. stored by means. Here, the first specification information corresponding to the first display type determined by the first display determination means is selected from the first specification information storage means by the first selection means. A suggestive effect is displayed on the image display means, and the display mode of the suggestive effect is determined by a plurality of change elements. Further, based on the second display instruction from the main control means, the change element of the suggestive effect to be displayed by changing (adding) the image indicated by the first prescribed information selected by the first selection means is determined as the second display determination. Determined by means. The second prescribed information, which is provided for each change element of the suggestive effect and defines, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be changed (added) and displayed in the change element, It is stored by the second specified information storage means. Here, the second specification information corresponding to the change element determined by the second display determination means is selected from the second specification information storage means by the second selection means. Then, the update means provided in the sub control means is updated every time the time elapses, and each time the update means is updated, the first prescribed information selected by the first selection means and the information selected by the second selection means Drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated updating means is specified by the drawing information specifying means on the basis of the second specifying information. The drawing instruction information generating means generates drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the drawing information for one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means. be done. An image for one screen is drawn by the image drawing means based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means. As a result, when an image of the first display type corresponding to the first display instruction from the main control means is displayed by changing (adding) the suggestive effect for the second display instruction, the second regulation is applied to the change element of the suggestive effect. Only by selecting information from the second prescribed information storage means, the display mode of the suggestive effect can be easily changed (added) and displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

In gaming machine I5,
The first selection means is
Based on the first display instruction, the dynamic specifying information (for example, display data table for variation 232a1) specifying the drawing information of the entire dynamic display is selected from the first specifying information storage means. Prescribed information selection means (for example, display data table buffer 233b),
The second selection means is
Based on the second display instruction, the increase mode defining information (for example, additional data table 232a2 for character color) defining drawing information in the case where the display mode of the suggestive effect is changed to the expectation increase mode is changed to the second display instruction. 2 rising mode stipulating information selecting means (for example, additional data table buffer 233c) that selects from stipulating information storage means;
Based on the second display instruction, expectation regulation regulation information (for example, A game machine characterized by comprising an expectation degree regulation regulation information selection means (for example, an additional data table buffer 233c) for selecting the character correction additional data table 232a2) from the second regulation information storage means. I6.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic specification information selecting means provided in the first selection means selects the dynamic specification information specifying the drawing information of the entire dynamic display from the first specification information storage means based on the first display instruction. is selected. Further, the increase mode definition information selection means provided in the second selection means defines drawing information when the display mode of the suggestive effect is changed to the expectation level increase mode based on the second display instruction. Information is selected from the second defined information storage means. Further, the expectation level regulation regulation information selection means provided in the second selection means controls the expectation level increase mode in the suggestive performance after the specific timing by the expectation level execution regulation means based on the second display instruction. Expectation regulation regulation information defining drawing information for the case is selected from the second regulation information storage means. By configuring in this way, when changing (adding) a suggestive effect to be executed a plurality of times, and furthermore, in the case of regulating the mode of raising expectations in a suggestive effect after a specific timing, a suggestive effect to be executed before a specific time. In addition to selecting the increase mode regulating information that defines the drawing information when the display mode of is changed to the expectation level increase mode, the expectation level increase mode in the display mode of the suggestive effect executed after the specific timing is regulated. It is possible to easily change (add) and display various display modes of a plurality of suggestive effects simply by selecting the expectation degree regulation information that defines the drawing information of the case. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

In gaming machine I5 or I6,
The second selection means is
selection information storage means configured to select and store a plurality of the second prescribed information,
The drawing information specifying means includes:
Among the plurality of pieces of the second regulation information stored in the selection information storage means, the drawing information of the second regulation information stored later is prioritized over the drawing information of the second regulation information stored first, one screen. a priority specifying means for specifying the drawing information of the game machine I7.

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I5 or I6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the selection information storage means provided in the second selection means can select and store a plurality of pieces of second regulation information. Further, by the priority specifying means provided in the drawing information specifying means, among the plurality of second specifying information stored in the selection information storing means, the drawing information of the second specifying information stored later than the drawing information stored first Drawing information for one screen is specified with priority given to the drawing information of the second prescribed information. As a result, since the contents of the second prescribed information stored later can be displayed with priority over the contents of the second prescribed information stored earlier, the second prescribed information for the suggestive effect desired to be changed can be additionally displayed. By storing it, the display mode of the suggestive effect can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that the process of determining the second stipulated information, which should be prioritized, or the like becomes unnecessary, and the processing load of the display control can be reduced.

In gaming machine I7,
The second selection means is
The rising mode defining information by the rising mode defining information selecting means is first stored in the selection information storage means, and the expectation level regulation defining information by the expectation level regulation defining information selecting means is later stored in the selection information storing means. A game machine I8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by the second selection means, the rising mode defining information by the rising mode defining information selecting means is first stored in the selection information storage means, and the expectation level regulation defining information by the expectation level regulation defining information selecting means is later stored in the selection information storage means. remembered. As a result, even when a plurality of suggestive performances are changed to the expectation level rising mode, the expectation level increasing mode in the suggestive performance executed after the specific timing is stored by storing the expectation level regulation regulation information after the increase mode regulation information. can regulate the execution of Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for the determination processing of the second stipulated information that should be prioritized, reduce the processing load of display control, prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the performance, and prevent the player from having excessive expectations. , there is an effect that it is possible to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not feel distrust.

In any of gaming machines I0 to I4,
A main control means (for example, the main control device 110 or (and) the sound lamp control device 113) that performs the main control of the game,
a sub-control means (for example, a display control device 114) that controls the image display means based on a display instruction from the main control means;
The sub control means is
an image drawing means (for example, an image controller 237) for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means;
First display determination means (for example, command determination processing (S2022 ) of S2108),
First definition information (for example, a variable display data table) which is provided for each of the first display types and defines, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the first display type 232a1), a first prescribed information storage means (for example, data table storage area 232a);
a first selection means (for example, a display data table buffer 233b) for selecting the first definition information corresponding to the first display type determined by the first display determination means from the first definition information storage means;
Second display determination means (for example, command determination processing (S2022) for determining the display means to be displayed on the image display means based on a second display instruction (for example, red character command for display) from the main control means S2112) of
2nd prescribed information ( For example, second prescribed information storage means (for example, data table storage area 232a) for storing additional data table for characters 232a2);
a second selection means (for example, character-based command processing (S2113)) for selecting the second prescribed information corresponding to the suggestive effect determined by the second display determination means from the second prescribed information storage means;
In the image display means, a plurality of second suggestive effects (for example, execution symbols and pending symbols) suggesting a game state different from the suggestive effect;
Third display determination means (for example, command determination) for determining the second suggestive effect to be displayed on the image display means based on a third display instruction (for example, display lighting hold change command) from the main control means S2110 of the process (S2022);
Drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be changed (added) and displayed in the plurality of second suggestive effects provided for the plurality of second suggestive effects is specified for each screen. 3 stipulated information storage means (for example, data table storage area 232a) for storing 3 stipulated information (for example, additional data table for suspension 232a2);
a third selecting means (for example, a look-ahead command process (S2111)) for selecting the third specifying information for the second suggestive effect determined by the third display determining means from the third specifying information storing means; with
The sub control means is
updating means (for example, pointer 233e) that is updated every time elapses;
Each time the updating means is updated, the first defining information selected by the first selecting means, the second defining information selected by the second selecting means, and the third defining information selected by the third selecting means drawing information specifying means (for example, S2308 of the display setting process (S2023)) for specifying drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated updating means based on the third prescribed information;
Drawing instruction information generating means (for example, , S2501 of the rendering process (S2026), and
The gaming machine I9 is characterized in that the image drawing means draws an image for one screen based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means.

According to the game machine I9, in addition to the effects of the game machines I0 to I4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the main control means performs the main control of the game, and the sub-control means controls the image display means based on the display instruction from the main control means. An image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means is drawn by the image drawing means provided in the sub control means. Then, the first display type to be displayed is determined by the first display determination means based on the first display instruction from the main control means. Further, the first specification information storage means provides for each first display type and defines drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the first display type for each screen. Information is stored. Here, the first specification information corresponding to the first display type determined by the first display determination means is selected from the first specification information storage means by the first selection means. Further, the suggestive effect to be displayed on the image display means is determined by the second display determination means based on the second display instruction from the main control means. Second prescribed information that is provided for a plurality of suggestive effects and defines, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be changed (added) and displayed in the plurality of suggestive effects. is stored by the second stipulation information storage means. Here, the second specifying information for the suggestive effect determined by the second display determining means is selected from the second specifying information storage means by the second selecting means. Further, in the image display means, a plurality of second suggestive effects suggesting game states different from the suggestive effects are executed. Further, the second suggestive effect to be displayed on the image display means is determined by the third display determination means based on the third display instruction from the main control means. Drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be changed (added) and displayed in the plurality of second suggestive effects provided for the plurality of second suggestive effects is defined for each screen. The third regulation information is stored by the third regulation information storage means. Here, the third specifying information for the second suggestive effect determined by the third display determining means is selected from the third specifying information storage means by the third selecting means. Then, the update means provided in the sub control means is updated every time the time elapses, and each time the update means is updated, the first prescribed information selected by the first selection means and the information selected by the second selection means Drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated update means is specified by the drawing information specifying means based on the second specifying information and the third specifying information selected by the third selecting means. The drawing instruction information generating means generates drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the drawing information for one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means. be done. An image for one screen is drawn by the image drawing means based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means. As a result, when displaying each image in response to the first display instruction, second display instruction or third display instruction from the main control means, the first stipulation information, the second stipulation information or the third stipulation information for each effect unit is displayed. is selected from the first specified information storage means, the second specified information storage means, or the third specified information storage means, the display mode of the image display means can be easily changed (added) and displayed. In addition, by configuring to select the second prescribed information for a plurality of suggestive effects and by configuring to select the third prescribed information for a plurality of second suggested effects, the image is composed of a plurality of images. Since display control can be collectively performed for the effects to be performed, display control can be managed in units of related effects. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means. In addition, the number of second stipulated information and third stipulated information to be selected is the number of types of effects (notice), and the second stipulated information and third stipulated information are selected for each change element of the effect (notice). 3 The total number of stipulated information can be reduced, the capacity of the second stipulated information does not need to be increased as the number of change elements of performance (notice) increases, and the cost of the game machine can be suppressed. has the effect of In addition, when generating drawing instruction information in drawing processing, the number of reference first defining information, second defining information, and third defining information can be reduced, thereby reducing the processing load when generating drawing instruction information. It has the effect of being able to

In gaming machine I9,
The main control means is
Comprehensive output means for collectively outputting the plurality of second display instructions for the display modes of the plurality of suggestive effects during a predetermined period;
The sub control means is
standby means for waiting for the predetermined period when one of the second display instructions for the suggestive effect is received from the main control means;
post-wait determination means for determining the suggested effect to be displayed on the image display means based on one or more of the second display instructions received after waiting by the wait means. Machine I10.

According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the comprehensive output means provided in the main control means collectively outputs a plurality of second display instructions for the display modes of the suggestive effects during a predetermined period. Further, the waiting means provided in the sub-controlling means waits for a predetermined period of time when the one second display instruction to the indicating means is received from the main controlling means. Then, after waiting by the waiting means, the post-wait determining means, which is also provided in the sub-control means, determines a suggestive effect to be displayed on the image display means based on the received one or more second display instructions. That is, the sub-control means is configured to execute the display control related to the suggestive effect after receiving all the second display instructions collectively output during the predetermined period. As a result, in the case of drawing a plurality of suggestive effects, once the display modes of all the suggestive effects are determined, the suggestive effects can be drawn according to one second prescribed information, and the plurality of suggestive effects can be drawn in one. It is possible to display by the second prescribed information. Therefore, since it is possible to perform display control collectively for a plurality of suggestive effects, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes of the suggestive effects displayed on the image display means.

In gaming machine I9 or I10,
The main control means is
occasional output means for outputting as needed the third display instruction regarding the display mode of the plurality of second suggestive effects when a predetermined condition (e.g., start winning) is satisfied;
The sub control means is
occasional determination means for determining the second suggestive effect to be displayed on the image display means based on the third display instruction when receiving the third display instruction for the second suggestive effect from the main control means; A gaming machine I11 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine I11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I9 or I10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the occasional output means provided in the main control means outputs the third display instruction regarding the display mode of the plurality of second suggestive effects as needed. Further, when the occasional determination means provided in the sub control means receives the third display instruction for the second suggestive effect from the main control means, the second display means displays on the image display means based on the third display instruction. Suggestion production is decided. That is, the sub-control means is configured to execute display control relating to the second suggestive effect each time the third display instruction that is output as needed is received when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Thereby, when the predetermined condition is established and the third display instruction is output, the display mode of the second suggestive effect based on the third display instruction can be changed as needed. Therefore, it is possible to immediately display the content of the second suggestive effect indicating the game state, so there is an effect that the game state can be accurately suggested to the player.

In any of game machines I9 to I11,
The drawing information specifying means includes:
A gaming machine I12, characterized by comprising a priority specifying means for specifying drawing information for one screen by prioritizing the drawing information of the third defining information over the drawing information of the second defining information.

According to the game machine I12, in addition to the effects of the game machines I9 to I11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the drawing information of the third definition information is prioritized over the drawing information of the second definition information by the priority identification means provided in the drawing information identification means, and is identified as the drawing information for one screen. That is, the display of the second suggestive effect indicating the game state can be displayed with priority over the suggestive effect, and the game state can be accurately suggested to the player.

In any one of game machines I9 to I12,
The first selection means is
Based on the first display instruction, the dynamic specifying information (for example, display data table for variation 232a1) specifying the drawing information of the entire dynamic display is selected from the first specifying information storage means. Prescribed information selection means (for example, display data table buffer 233b),
The second selection means is
On the basis of the second display instruction, increase mode regulating information (for example, character color additional data table 232a2) defining drawing information when the display mode of the plurality of suggestive effects is changed to the expectation increase mode Ascend mode regulating information selection means (for example, additional data table buffer 233c) that selects from the second regulating information storage means;
Based on the second display instruction, expectation level regulation regulation information (for example, character correction additional data A gaming machine I13, characterized by comprising expectation degree regulation regulation information selection means (for example, additional data table buffer 233c) for selecting the table 232a2) from the second regulation information storage means.

According to the gaming machine I13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines I9 to I12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic specification information selecting means provided in the first selection means selects the dynamic specification information specifying the drawing information of the entire dynamic display from the first specification information storage means based on the first display instruction. is selected. Further, an increase specifying the drawing information when the display mode of the plurality of suggestive effects is changed to the expectation level increasing mode based on the second display instruction by the increasing mode defining information selecting means provided in the second selecting means. Mode defining information is selected from the second defining information storage means. In addition, drawing when the execution of the expectation level increase mode in the suggestive effect to be executed after the specific timing is restricted by the expectation regulation regulation information selection means similarly provided in the second selection means based on the second display instruction. Expectation regulation regulation information defining information is selected from the second regulation information storage means. By configuring in this way, drawing information when a plurality of suggestive effects are changed (added) and the suggestive effects are changed when the execution of the expectation level increasing mode in the suggestive effects after a specific timing is regulated. In addition to selecting the expectation degree regulation information that defines the drawing information in the case where the execution of the expectation degree increase state in the suggestion performance after the specific timing is regulated, a plurality of suggestions It is possible to easily change (add) and display various display modes of effects. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

<J Group: In case of loss variation, the character display after a specific timing is returned to the initial state>
Acquisition means (for example, the first ball entrance 64) for acquiring starting information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) for determining based on the starting information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic display executing means (for example, dynamic display of identification information (for example, third pattern variation effect) for executing dynamic display of identification information (for example, third pattern display device 81) based on the determination result by the determining means (for example, a display control device 114),
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means, when special identification information (for example, "jackpot display"), which is predetermined identification information, appears, a predetermined game is displayed to the player. In gaming machines that add value,
storage means (for example, execution information storage area 223i) for storing the identification information acquired by the acquisition means;
Based on the starting information stored in the storage means, the special identification information is displayed in the dynamic display, or general identification information different from the special identification information (for example, "failure display") is displayed. Determination means (for example, MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113) for determining whether to appear;
A plurality of display means (for example, character display Se1 during reach occurrence, character display Se2 during reach, fixed phrase character display Se3, and pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4) that are notified with a predetermined relationship with each other;
Based on the judgment result by the judgment means, the notification mode of the indicating means is changed from the first mode (eg, "white") in the initial state to a second mode (eg, "red") different from the first mode. Mode changing means for changing (for example, character color lottery counter 223f),
a plurality of changing means (for example, a character color change table 222h) for changing the notification mode of a plurality of the indicating means to the second mode when the indicating means is notified in the second mode by the mode changing means; prepared,
The determination means is
General identification information determination means (for example, character color change restriction processing (S1619)) for determining whether or not the general identification information appears in the dynamic display,
The mode changing means is
When the general identification information determination means determines that the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, the notification mode of the display means to notify after a specific timing in the dynamic display is changed to the first mode. A game machine J0 characterized by comprising a mode initialization means for initialization (for example, a fixed phrase normal command for display).

According to the gaming machine J0, the obtaining means obtains the starting information when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the determining means makes a determination based on the starting information obtained by the obtaining means. The dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of the identification information on the image display means based on the determination result by the determination means. When special identification information, which is predetermined identification information, appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, predetermined game value is awarded to the player. Further, the starting information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means. Here, based on the starting information stored in the storage means, the determination means determines whether the special identification information should be displayed in the dynamic display or the general identification information different from the special identification information should be displayed. Also, a plurality of indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other are reported. Then, based on the determination result of the determining means, the notification mode of the indicating means is changed from the first mode in the initial state to the second mode different from the first mode by the mode changing means. Moreover, when changing the indicating means to the second mode by the mode changing means, the notification mode of the plurality of indicating means is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing means. Here, whether or not the general identification information appears in the dynamic display is determined by the general identification information determination means provided in the determination means. Then, when the general identification information determination means determines that the general identification information will appear in the dynamic display, the display means for notifying after a specific timing in the dynamic display by the mode initialization means provided in the mode change means is initialized to the first mode. That is, when the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, among the notification modes of the plurality of indication means having a predetermined relationship with each other, the notification mode of the indication means to be notified after a specific timing is set to the first notification mode in the initial state. Notify in a manner.

Conventionally, when notifying indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other at a plurality of locations (timing or display area; the same shall apply hereinafter) of dynamic display, the indicating means is set to the initial state for each notification location. If it is configured to set (lottery) whether to notify in one mode or to notify in a second mode different from the first mode, setting processing (lottery processing) for the notification locations is required, and control is complicated. This may result in an increase in the processing load. Further, in the dynamic display, if the indicating means to be notified first is notified in the second mode and then the indicating means to be notified later is notified in the first mode, the indicating means have a predetermined relevance. Therefore, it becomes an expression in which the degree of expectation for the emergence of the special identification information is lowered (hereinafter referred to as "downward expression"). Therefore, there is a possibility that a player who has been in high spirits by being informed of the second mode by the previous indicating means may lose interest when he witnesses the above-mentioned descent expression by the subsequent indicating means.

Therefore, in the dynamic display, setting (lottery) of the notification modes of the indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other is performed collectively (multiple simultaneously), and the second mode notified by one indicating means is also applied to the other indicating means. By adopting a configuration in which notification is made following the instructions, there is no need to perform setting processing for each notification location, and the processing load can be reduced. In addition, when indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other are notified in the second mode even once, the indicating means to be notified thereafter are configured to follow the second mode and notify the indicating means. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game by eliminating the phenomenon of the occurrence of the expression of the downfall in the game.

However, since the second mode of the display means is a mode that is changed from the first mode in the initial state based on the determination result of the determination means, it suggests that the current rendering situation can be changed based on the change. It has a development suggestion function. On the other hand, the indicating means notified after the specific timing of the dynamic display (for example, at the end of the dynamic display) has a status notification function of notifying the contents of the current rendering situation in the dynamic display. Therefore, if the indicating means after the specific timing in the dynamic display when the general identification information appears is announced in the second mode, the player will not be able to see the indication due to the indicating means being notified in the second mode. I predict that the function of suggesting development will be superior to the function of notifying the situation of the means, and that some kind of development production will occur. Contrary to the prediction, however, if the general identification information is determined without the development effect occurring, the player will become distrustful of the gaming machine due to the discrepancies in the content of the effect, and will continue to use the gaming machine. There is a possibility that the distrust of the installed game hall will increase, and the game will be interrupted.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine J0, when the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, among the notification modes of the plurality of display means having a predetermined relationship with each other, the notification of the display means to be notified after the specific timing The mode is reported in the first mode in the initial state. Since the display means, which is the first aspect of the initial state, does not have a development suggesting function, the player does not have excessive expectations even when seeing the display means notified in the initial state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the content of the performance, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations, and in which the player does not feel a sense of distrust.

In addition, "a plurality of indicating means notified with a predetermined relationship with each other" means, for example, when the indicating means have the same attribute or correspond to the same type, at the same timing In the case of appearing, or even in the case of appearing with a time lag, when one appears, the other also appears. A relationship that is conceptually organically entwined (closely related). Specifically, for example, a notice display displayed in the same display area (character display Se1 when reach occurs and fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), or a notice display (strong character notice) displayed in different modes at the same timing etc.), a notice display in which another notice appears after one notice appears (step-up notice, character display Se1 when reach occurs, and fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), and the same effect is executed multiple times. notice (variable elements of "pseudo-ren", etc.) and the same or similar sounds (for example, "similar sounds" are sounds that step up in stages) are intermittently output. production etc. are exemplified.

In gaming machine J0,
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, a decision to execute a judgment effect (for example, "exciting effect" of the variable element of "super reach") to display the special identification information or the general identification information Equipped with production execution means (for example, variable elements of "super reach"),
The gaming machine J1 is characterized in that the specific timing is timing at which the special identification information or the general identification information appears in the determination effect.

According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination effect executing means provided in the dynamic display executing means executes the determination effect of whether the special identification information should be displayed or the general identification information should be displayed in the dynamic display. Then, the timing at which the special identification information or the general identification information appears in the determination effect is defined as the specific timing. Thereby, when the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the notification mode of the indicating means after the special identification information or the general identification information appears in the judgment effect is initialized and notified. Therefore, in the dynamic display in which the display result of the general identification information appears, the indicating means notified after the determination effect is configured to notify in the first state of the initial state. By configuring in this way, after the general identification information appears, the display means of the second mode having the function of suggesting development is not notified, and since it does not suggest that the performance will develop, there is no discrepancy in the content of the performance. It is possible to provide a comfortable game in which the occurrence is prevented, the player does not have excessive expectations, and the player does not feel a sense of distrust.

In the gaming machine J0 or J1,
The mode changing means is
A second mode determination means (for example, S1611 of the character mode setting process (S1417)) for determining whether or not the indicating means is notified in the second mode,
The mode initialization means is
A second mode for initializing the notification mode of the indicating means to be notified after the specific timing to the first mode when the second mode determining means determines that the indicating means will be notified in the second mode. A game machine J2 characterized by comprising a 2-mode initialization means (for example, S1702 of character color change restriction processing (S1619)).

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J0 or J1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined by the second mode determining means provided in the mode changing means whether or not the indication means is notified in the second mode. Then, when the second mode determination means determines that the indicating means will be notified in the second mode, the second mode initialization means provided in the mode initialization means indicates the indication after the specific timing. The notification mode of the means is initialized to the first mode. That is, it is determined whether or not to initialize the notification mode of the indicating means after the specific timing based on the indication means being notified in the second mode. Thus, by executing the initialization processing of the indicating means only when the indicating means is notified in the second mode, the initialization process becomes unnecessary when the indicating means is in the first mode, and the display control process To provide a comfortable game in which a player does not have excessive expectations and does not feel a sense of distrust by preventing the occurrence of discrepancies in performance contents while reducing the burden. has the effect of

In the gaming machine J0 or J1,
The dynamic display execution means
Subsequent notification determination means for determining whether or not the display means will be notified after the specific timing in the dynamic display,
The mode initialization means is
When the subsequent notification determination means determines that the indicating means will be notified after the specific timing, the notification mode of the indicating means to be notified after the specific timing is initialized to the first mode. A gaming machine J3 characterized by comprising initialization means.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J0 or J1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined whether or not the display means will be notified after the specific timing in the dynamic display by the subsequent notification determination means provided in the dynamic display execution means. After that, when the notification determining means determines that the indicating means will be notified after the specific timing, the subsequent notification initializing means provided in the mode initializing means notifies the indicating means to be notified after the specific timing. Aspect is initialized to a first aspect. That is, if there is a display means to be notified after a specific timing in the dynamic display, it is configured to be notified in the first mode of the initial state without omission. As a result, since the indicating means to be notified after the specific timing can be notified in the initial state, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the indicating means is to be notified in the second mode, and the processing load of the display control can be reduced. It is possible to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and does not feel distrust while preventing the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the performance while reducing the effect. There is

In any of the game machines J0 to J3,
The general identification information determination means is
A determination result storage means (for example, a post-event restriction flag 233p) that stores that the general identification information appears,
The mode initialization means is
A game machine J4 characterized in that, when it is stored that the general identification information appears in the determination result storage means, the notification mode of the display means after the specific timing is initialized.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J0 to J3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the appearance of the general identification information is stored by the judgment result storage means provided in the general identification information judgment means. Then, when the determination result storage means stores that the general identification information appears, the mode initialization means initializes the notification mode of the display means after the specific timing. As a result, since the indicating means to be notified after the specific timing can be notified in the initial state, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the indicating means is to be notified in the second mode, and the processing load of the display control can be reduced. It is possible to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and does not feel distrust while preventing the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the performance while reducing the effect. There is

In any of game machines J1 to J4,
The indicator means
A first display means (for example, character display Se1 during reach occurrence or character display Se2 during reach) that appears before or during execution of the determination effect;
A second display means (for example, fixed phrase character display Se3) that appears after the execution of the determination effect,
The mode changing means is
When the general identification information determination means determines that the general identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the first display means and the second display means are changed to the second display means based on the plurality change means. a second mode continuation means for displaying in a mode;
When the general identification information determination means determines that the general identification information will appear in the dynamic display, the first display means is displayed in the second mode based on the plurality of change means, and the mode and a second mode changing means for displaying the second display means in the first mode by an initialization means.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the indicating means is provided with a first indicating means that appears before or during execution of the determination performance and a second indicating means that appears after the determination performance is performed. Further, when the general identification information determination means determines that the general identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the second mode continuation means provided in the mode change means causes the first indication based on the plurality of change means to be displayed. The means and the second indicating means are displayed in a second manner. On the other hand, when the general identification information determination means determines that the general identification information will appear in the dynamic display, the second mode change means provided in the mode change means causes the first indication means to be displayed based on the multiple change means. is displayed in the second mode, and the second display means is displayed in the first mode by the mode initialization means.

Thereby, when the general identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, that is, when the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, both the first display means and the second display means are changed to the second mode, When the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, that is, when the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the first indicating means is displayed in the second manner, while the second indicating means is displayed in the first manner. configured to be displayed in a manner. That is, in the dynamic display in which the display result of the special identification information appears when the indicating means has been changed to the second mode, the second indicating means after the judgment effect is displayed in the second mode, and the general identification In the dynamic display in which the display result of the information appears, the second display means after the judgment effect is displayed in the first mode. By configuring in this way, the second indicating means of the second mode does not appear after the general identification information appears, and since it does not suggest that the presentation will develop, inconsistencies in the content of presentation do not occur. Thus, there is an effect that a comfortable game can be provided in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel a sense of distrust.

In the gaming machine J5,
The first indicating means is
1. In the dynamic display of 1, at least a plurality of appearances,
The multiple change means are
A gaming machine J6 characterized by comprising: a first display collective means for collectively setting display modes of at least the first display means.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in one dynamic display, at least a plurality of the first indicating means are displayed, and the display mode of at least the first indicating means is collectively displayed by the first indicating collective means provided in the plural changing means. configured to be set. As a result, it is possible to collectively set a plurality of first indicating means appearing in one dynamic display, so that the control load can be reduced compared to control in which setting processing is performed for each first indicating means. It has the effect of being able to In particular, the more the number of appearing positions of the first indicating means capable of executing the second mode in the dynamic display (for example, 5 or more), the more the collective setting works, and the control load is remarkably reduced. It is possible to

In any of the game machines J1 to J6,
The mode changing means is
Color changing means (e.g., character color lottery) for changing the display color of the indicating means from a predetermined normal display color (e.g., "white") to a special display color (e.g., "red") different from the normal display color a counter 223f);
The timing at which the display color of the indicating means is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color changing means (for example, the timing to display the character display Se1 at the time of reaching occurrence, or the timing to display the character display Se2 during reaching a color change timing selection means (color change timing counter 223g) for selecting the timing),
The multiple change means are
color collective change means for collectively changing the display color of the display means displayed after the timing selected by the color change timing selection means to the special display color;
The mode initialization means is
After the timing at which the display color of the indicating means is changed to the special display color by the color batch changing means, the display color of the indicating means that appears after the execution of the judgment effect is displayed in the normal display color. A game machine J7 characterized by comprising normal color display means.

According to the game machine J7, in addition to the effects of the game machines J1 to J6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display color of the indicating means is changed from a predetermined normal display color to a special display color different from the normal display color by the color changing means provided in the mode changing means. Further, the timing for changing the display color of the display means from the normal display color to the special display color by the color change means is selected by the color change timing selection means provided in the mode change means. Then, the display color of the indicating means displayed after the timing selected by the color change timing selecting means is changed to the special display color by the collective color changing means provided in the plurality of changing means. Here, after the timing when the display color of the indicating means is changed to the special display color by the color batch changing means, the display color of the indicating means appearing after execution of the judgment effect is provided in the mode initializing means. It is displayed in the normal display color by the normal color display means. As a result, regarding the display modes of the indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other, the display mode of the indicating means is set based on a plurality of display elements such as the display color and the display timing, and variations in the display mode of the indicating means are achieved. is increased, and when the general identification information appears in the display means after the judgment production, it can be displayed in the normal display color (first mode) by changing (correcting) the batch setting contents. Therefore, while increasing the interest of the game by diversifying the effects, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the effects, to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel distrust. It has the effect of being able to

In any of the game machines J0 to J7,
A main control means (for example, the main control device 110 or (and) the sound lamp control device 113) that performs the main control of the game,
a sub-control means (for example, a display control device 114) that controls the image display means based on a display instruction from the main control means;
The sub control means is
an image drawing means (for example, an image controller 237) for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means;
First display determination means (for example, command determination processing (S2022 ) of S2108),
First definition information (for example, a variable display data table) which is provided for each of the first display types and defines, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the first display type 232a1), a first prescribed information storage means (for example, data table storage area 232a);
a first selection means (for example, a display data table buffer 233b) for selecting the first definition information corresponding to the first display type determined by the first display determination means from the first definition information storage means;
a plurality of change elements (e.g., character pattern, display color, change timing, or correction content of display color) that determine the notification mode of the display means displayed on the image display means;
Based on the second display instruction (for example, red character command for display) from the main control means, the image indicated by the first prescribed information selected by the first selection means is changed (added) and displayed. a second display determination means (for example, S2112 of the command determination process (S2022)) for determining the change element of the display means;
Second prescribed information (for example, a second prescribed information storage means (for example, data table storage area 232a) for storing character color additional data table 232a2);
a second selecting means (for example, an additional data table buffer 233c) for selecting the second defining information corresponding to the change element determined by the second display determining means from the second defining information storage means; ,
The sub control means is
updating means (for example, pointer 233e) that is updated every time elapses;
Each time the updating means is updated, the update is updated based on the first stipulation information selected by the first selection means and the second stipulation information selected by the second selection means. Drawing information specifying means (for example, S2308 of the display setting process (S2023)) for specifying drawing information for one screen corresponding to the means;
When the display mode of the display means is initialized by the mode initialization means, the second prescribed information selected by the second selection means is discarded (invalidated) and the information selected by the first selection means is second drawing information specifying means for specifying drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated updating means based on the first defining information;
Drawing instruction information (for example, , drawing list) (for example, S2501 of drawing processing (S2026)),
The image drawing means draws an image for one screen based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means,
A gaming machine J8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J0 to J7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the main control means performs the main control of the game, and the sub-control means controls the image display means based on the display instruction from the main control means. An image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means is drawn by the image drawing means provided in the sub control means. Then, the first display type to be displayed is determined by the first display determination means based on the first display instruction from the main control means. Further, the first definition information is provided for each first display type and defines, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the first display type. stored by means. Here, the first specification information corresponding to the first display type determined by the first display determination means is selected from the first specification information storage means by the first selection means. Also, the indicating means is displayed on the image display means, and the display mode of the indicating means is determined by a plurality of change factors. Further, based on the second display instruction from the main control means, the changed element of the display means to be displayed by changing (adding) from the image indicated by the first prescribed information selected by the first selection means is the second display determination Determined by means. The second stipulation information, which is provided for each change element of the display means and defines, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be changed (added) and displayed by the change element, It is stored by the second specified information storage means. Here, the second specification information corresponding to the change element determined by the second display determination means is selected from the second specification information storage means by the second selection means. Then, the update means provided in the sub control means is updated every time the time elapses, and each time the update means is updated, the first prescribed information selected by the first selection means and the information selected by the second selection means Drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated updating means is specified by the drawing information specifying means on the basis of the second specifying information. Further, when the display mode of the indicating means is initialized by the mode initialization means, the second prescribed information selected by the second selection means is discarded (invalidated), and the first specified information selected by the first selection means is Drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated updating means is specified by the second drawing information specifying means based on the prescribed information. Then, the drawing instruction information generating means instructs the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the drawing information for one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means or the second drawing information specifying means. Rendering instruction information is generated. An image for one screen is drawn by the image drawing means based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means. As a result, when an image of the first display type corresponding to the first display instruction from the main control means is displayed by changing (adding) the suggestive effect for the second display instruction, the second regulation is applied to the change element of the suggestive effect. Only by selecting information from the second prescribed information storage means, the display mode of the suggestive effect can be easily changed (added) and displayed. Further, when the display mode of the indicating means is initialized, the second stipulated information is discarded (invalidated) so that the change of the indicating means is not reflected in the display contents, and the display mode of the indicating means is easily initialized. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

<K group: character display for production and character display for error>
Acquisition means (for example, the first ball entrance 64) for acquiring starting information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) for determining based on the starting information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic display executing means (for example, dynamic display of identification information (for example, third pattern variation effect) for executing dynamic display of identification information (for example, third pattern display device 81) based on the determination result by the determining means (for example, a display controller 114);
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means, when special identification information (for example, "jackpot display"), which is predetermined identification information, appears, a predetermined game is displayed to the player. In game machines that add value,
a storage means (for example, an execution information storage area 223i) for storing the start information acquired by the acquisition means;
Based on the starting information stored in the storage means, the special identification information is displayed in the dynamic display, or general identification information different from the special identification information (for example, "failure display") is displayed. Determination means (for example, MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113) for determining whether to appear;
In the image display means, a plurality of display means displayed with a predetermined relationship (for example, character display Se1 during reach occurrence, character display Se2 during reach, fixed phrase character display Se3, and pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 )and,
Based on the determination result of the determining means, the display mode of the indicating means is changed from a predetermined first mode (eg, "white") to a second mode (eg, "red") different from the first mode. Display mode changing means (for example, character color lottery counter 223f),
State determination means for determining the state of the game machine (for example, a lower tray full switch);
State notification means (for example, error character display Se5) for notifying the state of the gaming machine based on the determination result of the state determination means;
state notification synchronization means for changing the notification mode of the state notification means so as to synchronize with the change status of the display means by the display mode change means when the status of the gaming machine is reported by the status notification means. A gaming machine K0 characterized by:

According to the game machine K0, the obtaining means obtains the starting information when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the determining means makes a determination based on the starting information obtained by the obtaining means. The dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of the identification information on the image display means based on the determination result by the determination means. When special identification information, which is predetermined identification information, appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. Further, the starting information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means. Here, based on the starting information stored in the storage means, the determination means determines whether the special identification information should be displayed in the dynamic display or the general identification information different from the special identification information should be displayed. Also, in the image display means, a plurality of indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other are displayed. Then, based on the determination result of the determining means, the display mode of the indicating means is changed from the predetermined first mode to a second mode different from the first mode by the indicating mode changing means. Here, the state of the gaming machine is determined by the state determining means. Further, the state of the gaming machine is notified by the state notification means based on the result of determination by the state determination means. When the state of the gaming machine is notified by the state notification means, the state notification synchronization means changes the notification mode of the status notification means so as to synchronize with the change status of the display means by the display mode change means.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, the state of a gaming machine is judged, and the result of the judgment is notified by a state notification means, thereby making a player or the like aware of the state of the gaming machine. Specifically, for example, when an abnormal state occurs in the game state, in order to suggest the abnormal state to the player, an abnormal sound (warning sound) is output and an abnormality (error) is generated in the display means. It is configured to display a character display suggesting to the player that it is in an abnormal state, to make the player aware of the abnormal state, and to suggest the cause of the abnormality to the player.

Here, the notification mode of the indicating means notified in the dynamic display is determined based on whether the special identification information appears in the dynamic display or the general identification information different from the special identification information appears. The appearance of the state reporting means for reporting the state of the gaming machine is determined independently of the lottery for the special identification information in the dynamic display, and the reporting mode is determined by independent control.

However, when the state of the gaming machine is notified by the state notification means during execution of the dynamic display, the notification mode of the display means notified in the dynamic display and the notification mode by the state notification means are not related to each other. , the player may misunderstand the degree of expectation of the special identification information in the dynamic display and the state of the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, if the state notification means is notified in a mode related to the second mode of the display means even though the display means in the dynamic display is not notified in the second mode, the player When the user sees the notification mode of the state notification means, he misunderstands that the second mode has been notified, and expects the special identification information to appear in the dynamic display. Conversely, although the notification mode of the indicating means in the dynamic display is notified in the second mode, the notification mode of the state notification means is notified in a mode related to the first mode that is not the second mode of the indicating means. In this case, the player, by witnessing the notification mode of the state notification means, misunderstands that the degree of expectation for the special identification information in the dynamic display has decreased, and loses interest in the game. put away.

Therefore, according to the game machine K0, when the state notification means for notifying the state of the game machine during execution of the dynamic display performs notification, the notification mode of the status notification means is synchronized with the notification mode of the display means. configured to With this configuration, even if the display means and the status notification means are notified at the same time, the player will not misunderstand the expected degree of appearance of the special identification information in the dynamic display. , the state of the gaming machine can also be clearly recognized. Therefore, the state of the game machine is accurately notified, the occurrence of discrepancies in the contents of the performance is prevented, the player does not have excessive expectations, and the player does not feel a sense of distrust, thereby providing a comfortable game. It has the effect of being able to

In addition, "a plurality of indicating means notified with a predetermined relationship with each other" means, for example, when the indicating means have the same attribute or correspond to the same type, at the same timing In the case of appearing, or even in the case of appearing with a time lag, when one appears, the other also appears. It refers to a relationship that is conceptually organically entwined (closely related). Specifically, for example, a notice display displayed in the same display area (character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence and a fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), or a notice display (strong character notice) displayed in different modes at the same timing etc.), a notice display in which another notice appears after one notice appears (step-up notice, character display Se1 when reach occurs, and fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), and the same effect is executed multiple times. (variable elements of "pseudo-ren", etc.) or the same or similar sounds (for example, "similar sounds" are sounds that step up in stages) are intermittently output. production etc. are exemplified.

The "state of the gaming machine" includes, for example, an abnormal state occurring in the gaming machine, an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player during execution of the gaming machine, or a A game continuation state etc. are illustrated.

In gaming machine K0,
The state determination means is
Abnormal state determination means for determining whether the gaming machine is in an abnormal state other than a predetermined normal state,
The gaming machine K1 is characterized by comprising an abnormality type notification means for notifying the abnormality type of the abnormal state by means of the state notification means when the abnormal state determination means determines an abnormal state.

According to the gaming machine K1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine is in an abnormal state other than a predetermined normal state by the abnormal state determination means provided in the state determination means. Then, when the abnormal state determination means determines an abnormal state, the abnormality type notification means notifies the abnormality type of the abnormal state by the state notification means. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the type of the abnormal state, to clearly recognize the abnormal point in the game machine, and to promptly eliminate the abnormality.

In the gaming machine K0 or K1,
The mode changing means is
Color changing means (e.g., character color lottery) for changing the display color of the indicating means from a predetermined normal display color (e.g., "white") to a special display color (e.g., "red") different from the normal display color a counter 223f);
The timing at which the display color of the indicating means is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color changing means (for example, the timing to display the character display Se1 at the time of reaching occurrence, or the timing to display the character display Se2 during reaching a color change timing selection means (color change timing counter 223g) for selecting the timing),
The state notification tuning means includes:
The display color of the state notification means that appears after the timing at which the display color of the display means is changed to the special display color by the color change timing selection means is the same as or similar to the special display color. The game machine K2 is characterized by comprising a same system display means for displaying.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K0 or K1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display color of the indicating means is changed from a predetermined normal display color to a special display color different from the normal display color by the color changing means provided in the mode changing means. Further, the color change timing selection means selects the timing at which the display color of the indicating means is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color change means. Then, by the same system display means provided in the state notification tuning means, the display color of the state notification means that appears after the timing when the display color of the display means is changed to the special display color by the color change timing selection means is changed to the special display color. It is displayed in a display color that is the same as or similar to the display color. As a result, when notifying the state of the gaming machine during execution of the dynamic display, the display color of the state notification means that appears after the display color of the display means is changed is the same or the same as the display color of the display means. It can be displayed systematically. Therefore, even if the display means and the status notification means are notified at the same time, the player will not misunderstand the degree of expectation for the appearance of the special identification information in the dynamic display, and the state of the gaming machine will not be misunderstood. can also be clearly recognized. Therefore, the state of the game machine is accurately notified, the occurrence of discrepancies in the performance contents is prevented, the player is not given excessive expectations, and the player is provided with a comfortable game in which the player does not feel a sense of distrust. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine K2,
The state notification tuning means includes:
When the state of the gaming machine is determined by the state determining means before the timing selected by the color change timing selecting means and the state of the gaming machine is notified by the state reporting means, the color changing means changes the color. pre-display means for displaying the display color of the state notification means in a display color identical to or similar to the special display color of the game machine K3.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the state of the gaming machine is determined by the state determining means before the timing selected by the color change timing selecting means and the state of the gaming machine is reported by the state reporting means, the state reporting tuning means is provided with By the advance display means, the display color of the state notification means is displayed in a display color that is the same as or similar to the special display color changed by the color change means. As a result, for example, before the display means is displayed, the state notification means is displayed by intentionally creating a situation judged by the state determination means, and the display color of the state notification means is displayed. In addition to the state reporting means, which usually only has the function of reporting the state of the game machine, a notification function that suggests the expected degree of appearance of the special identification information in the dynamic display is added, and various games are possible. There is an effect that it is possible to realize the sexuality and enhance the interest of the game.

For any one of the game machines A0 to A8, the game machines B0 to B8, C0 to C6, D0 to D9, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G7, H0 to H8, I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I13, J0 to J8, and K0 to K3 may be applied. Further, for any one of the gaming machines B0 to B8, the gaming machines A0 to A8, C0 to C6, D0 to D9, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G7, H0 to H8, I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I13, J0 to J8, and K0 to K3 may be applied. Further, for any one of the gaming machines C0 to C6, the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B8, D0 to D9, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G7, H0 to H8, I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I13, J0 to J8, and K0 to K3 may be applied. Further, for any one of the gaming machines D0 to D9, the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B8, C0 to C6, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G7, H0 to H8, I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I13, J0 to J8, and K0 to K3 may be applied. Further, for any one of the gaming machines E0 to E9, the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B8, C0 to C6, D0 to D9, F0 to F10, G0 to G7, H0 to H8, I0 to A configuration limited by any one of I13, J0 to J8, and K0 to K3 may be applied. Further, for any one of the gaming machines F0 to F10, the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B8, C0 to C6, D0 to D9, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G7, H0 to A configuration limited by any one of H8, I0 to I13, J0 to J8, and K0 to K3 may be applied. Further, for any one of the gaming machines G0 to G7, the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B8, C0 to C6, D0 to D9, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G7, H0 to A configuration limited by any one of H8, I0 to I13, J0 to J8, and K0 to K3 may be applied. Further, for the configuration of the game machines H0 to H8, the game machines A0 to A8, B0 to B8, C0 to C6, D0 to D9, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G7, I0 to I13, J0 A configuration limited to any one of J8 and K0 to K3 may be applied. Further, for any one of the game machines I0 to I13, the game machines A0 to A8, B0 to B8, C0 to C6, D0 to D9, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G7, H0 to H8 , J0 to J8, and K0 to K3. In addition, for the configuration of the game machines J0 to J8, the game machines A0 to A8, B0 to B8, C0 to C6, D0 to D9, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G7, H0 to H8, I0 . . . I13 and K0 to K3 may be applied. Further, for the configuration of the gaming machines K0 to K3, the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B8, C0 to C6, D0 to D9, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G7, H0 to H8, I0 . . . I13 and J0 to J8 may be limited to one. In these cases, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

In any of gaming machines A0-A8, B0-B8, C0-C6, D0-D9, E0-E9, F0-F10, G0-G7, H0-H8, I0-I13, J0-J8, K0-K3, A gaming machine I1, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of gaming machines A0-A8, B0-B8, C0-C6, D0-D9, E0-E9, F0-F10, G0-G7, H0-H8, I0-I13, J0-J8, K0-K3, The game machine I2 is characterized in that the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any of gaming machines A0-A8, B0-B8, C0-C6, D0-D9, E0-E9, F0-F10, G0-G7, H0-H8, I0-I13, J0-J8, K0-K3, The gaming machine I3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

It should be noted that "entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "predetermined starting condition" in the claims, and "counters C1 to C3, The CS1 value” corresponds to the “information” acquired by the “acquisition means” in the claims, and the “third pattern” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “identification information” in the claims. However, the "variable effect" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "dynamic display of identification information" described in the claims, and the "jackpot design" described in the above embodiments corresponds to the claims. Corresponds to the "predetermined identification information", and the "jackpot" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "predetermined game value" described in the claims.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64 1st ball entrance (part of acquisition means)
81 Third pattern display device (part of image display means)
110 main controller (part of determination means)
113 Audio lamp control device (part of judgment means)
114 display controller (part of dynamic display execution means)
203b Reserved ball storage area (part of storage means)
203c Reserved ball execution area (part of storage means)
221 MPU (a part of judgment means)
222h Character color change table (part of multiple change means)
223f Character color lottery counter (part of mode change means)
223i execution information storage area (part of storage means)
Se4 Fixed phrase character display (part of display means)

Claims (1)

Acquisition means for acquiring starting information triggered by establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
a storage means for storing the starting information acquired by the acquisition means;
determining means for determining based on the starting information acquired by the acquiring means;
a dynamic display execution means for causing the image display means to dynamically display the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means;
A gaming machine capable of imparting a predetermined game value to a player when special identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means,
stop display means capable of displaying the special identification information or general identification information different from the special identification information as a stop result display to be displayed when the dynamic display is stopped;
a plurality of display means displayed in the image display means having a predetermined relationship with each other;
a first mode display means capable of displaying the display mode of the indicating means in a predetermined first mode based on the determination result by the determination means;
When one of the indicating means is set to be displayed in a second mode different from the first mode, the display mode of the other indicating means displayed after the one indicating means is the second mode. multiple setting means configurable to be displayed;
an indication erasing means for erasing the indication means after a predetermined period of time after displaying the indication means;
a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect for a specific period in the dynamic display;
memory pattern display means for displaying a pattern corresponding to the starting information stored in the storage means;
The display mode of the predetermined pattern is changed from a predetermined first pattern mode before the start of the specific effect to a mode different from the first pattern mode and equivalent to a part of the second mode of the indicating means. A pattern mode changing means capable of changing to an equivalent pattern mode which is a color;
display state means for setting the pattern to a display state at the start of the dynamic display;
non-display state means for switching to a non-display state the pattern displayed by the display state means in response to execution of the specific effect by the specific effect execution means;
When the general identification information is displayed as the stop result display after the display mode of the display means is changed to the second mode by the plurality setting means, the specific effect execution means performs the specific effect. a first mode means for displaying the display means to be displayed after execution in the first mode;
When the pattern hidden by the non-display state means is displayed again after the execution of the specific effect, the pattern hidden by the non-display state means when the specific effect is executed. and re-display means for displaying in the same manner as the pattern,
The indicator means
can be changed at least at one of two or more timings,
The first aspect means is
A game characterized by displaying the indicating means in the first mode at a specific timing after execution of the specific effect regardless of whether the indicating means changes at the first timing or at the second timing. machine.

Images